T400

Standard Software Package
SPA440 Angular Synchronous Control

for the
T400 Technology Module
1 = 2
1
Manual
Edition 05.01
Order No.: 6DD1903-0BB0
Contents
Contents
Warning information.............................. ................................................................................ 3
Overview.................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
T400 technology module ..................................................................................................... 17

2.1
2.2
Validity........................................... ...................................................................................... 5
Order Numbers.................................................................................................................... 6
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 6
Terminology......................................................................................................................... 6
1.4.1 Important terminology................................................................................................ 6
1.4.2 Functions and features.............................................................................................. 8
A comparison between speed- and angular synchronism................................................... 9
1.5.1 Model......................................................................................................................... 9
1.5.2 Differences between speed- and angular synchronism .......................................... 10
Displacement and synchronization.................................................................................... 11
Hardware constellation.................... .................................................................................. 14
Information and instructions when using angular synchronous control............................. 16
Communication interfaces................................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Interface to the basic drive (CU) ............................................................................. 18
2.1.2 Interface to COMBOARD ........................................................................................ 19
2.1.3 Peer-to-peer interface.............. ............................................................................... 20
2.1.4 Diagnostics interface............................................................................................... 20
2.1.5 USS-slave interface................................................................................................. 21
Terminal assignment..................... .................................................................................... 22
2.2.1 Digital I/O................................................................................................................. 22
2.2.2 Analog I/O........................... .................................................................................... 24
2.2.3 Pulse encoders........................................................................................................ 24
Absolute value encoder ..................................................................................................... 27
Function description................................. ........................................................................... 28

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Ratio......................................... ......................................................................................... 29
3.1.1 Speed ratio........................... ................................................................................... 29
3.1.2 Fine ratio.................................. ............................................................................... 30
Setpoints and actual values............................................................................................... 31
3.2.1 Setpoints........................... ...................................................................................... 31
3.2.2 Actual value sensing................. .............................................................................. 32
3.2.3 Position actual value sensing with absolute value encoders................................... 35
Determining the displacement and synchronization .......................................................... 41
3.3.1 Synchronization......................... .............................................................................. 41
3.3.2 Determining the displacement................................................................................. 42
3.3.3 Noise-immune synchronization ............................................................................... 46
3.3.4 Synchronism achieved........... ................................................................................. 48
Closed-loop angular control............................................................................................... 49
3.4.1 Enable signals............................... .......................................................................... 49
3.4.2 Displacement setpoint............................................................................................. 49
3.4.3 Angular controller............................. ....................................................................... 50
Closed-loop speed control................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 Ratio....................................... ................................................................................. 52
3.5.2 Master speed setpoint................... .......................................................................... 53
3.5.3 Inertia compensation............................................................................................... 53
3.5.4 Speed controller Kp adaption .................................................................................. 54
SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

6DD1903-0BB0 Edition 05.01
Contents
3.6
3.7
3.8
Parameters and connectors ................................................................................................ 60

4.1
4.2
4.3
3.5.5 Jogging.................................. .................................................................................. 54

3.5.6 Parameters to the speed controller ......................................................................... 55
Open-loop control........................... ................................................................................... 56
Faults, alarm and status display ........................................................................................ 56
3.7.1 General information on faults and alarms ............................................................... 56
3.7.2 Monitoring the communication coupling .................................................................. 57
Application example........................................................................................................... 58
3.8.1 Synchronous operation and synchronizing using as an example a gantry crane.... 58
Parameter handling.................................... ....................................................................... 60

4.1.1 BICO parameters.................................. .................................................................. 61
4.1.2 Resources to adapt the software and commissioning............................................. 61
Parameter list................................ .................................................................................... 63
Connector list................................................................................................................... 104
Start-up....................................... ......................................................................................... 115

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Commissioning, general............. ..................................................................................... 115

Commissioning, closed-loop speed control ..................................................................... 117
Commissioning the angular control ................................................................................. 123
5.3.1 Information regarding optimizing the angular controller ........................................ 126
Commissioning synchronization ...................................................................................... 127
Trace function with symTrace-D7 ................................................................................. 129
Literature................................... .......................................................................................... 130
Appendix.............................................................................................................................. 131
Changes............................................................................................................................... 145

Warning information
Warning information
WARNING
Electrical equipment has components which are at dangerous voltage levels.
If these instructions are not strictly adhered to, this can result in severe bodily
injury and material damage.
Only appropriately qualified personnel may work on/commission this
equipment.
This personnel must be completely knowledgable about all the warnings and
service measures according to this User Manual.
It is especially important that the warning information in the relevant
Operating Instructions (MASTERDRIVES or DC MASTER) is strictly
observed.
Definitions
D Qualified personnel for the purpose of this Manual and product labels
are personnel who are familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must
have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in
accordance with established safety procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.
!
!
!
DANGER
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Danger indicates
death, severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will
result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Warning indicates
death, severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken
CAUTION
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Caution indicates
that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Warning information
NOTE
For the purpose of this Manual, Note indicates information about the
product or the respective part of the Manual which is essential to
highlight.
CAUTION
This board contains components which can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge. Prior to touching any electronics board, your body must be
electrically discharged. This can be simply done by touching a conductive,
grounded object immediately beforehand (e.g. bare metal cabinet
components, socket protective conductor contact).

Overview
1
1.1
Overview
Validity
This User Manual is valid for the SPA440 angular synchronous control
standard software package.
NOTE
This documentation is not compatible with the previous MS340

angular synchronous controls!
Contrary to the earlier version, version 2.02 and higher includes socalled BICO technology. This allows connections within the application
to be adapted to the actual task by making the appropriate parameter
changes. Supplementary functions can be implemented by inserting
free blocks.
For compatibility reasons, the multiplexer blocks have been kept,
although they are no longer required as a result of the BICO technology.
All of the parameters from versions V2.00 and V2.01 which can be
changed, have been kept. Changes have been made with respect to
the display parameters.
Hardware
configuration
The documentation refers to operational standard software package,

comprising the T400 technology module and the software which is loaded
onto it. Generally, the T400 is operated in the drive converter (SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES MC or VC; DC Master) with/without communications
module (e. g.: PROFIBUS connection).
However, the software package can also be used when the T400 is
inserted in the SRT400. In this particular case, data is not transferred to
the basic drive converter via a common backplane bus. Presently, it is not
possible to parameterize the system using SIMOVIS.
NOTE
The control core (all of the functions) of the SPA440 standard software
package is also available for other configurations, e.g. CPU modules
PM4 - PM6 with the IT41 expansion module. In this case, the
application-specific changes are made using the graphic configuring
tool CFC.

Overview
1.2
Order Numbers
The sources of the standard software package SPA440 angular
synchronous control, are available on CD-ROM (designation SPA440) .
When required, the angular synchronous control function can be adapted
to specific customer requirements using the graphic configuring interface
of SIMADYN D, i.e. CFC (also refer to Table 1-1).
Designation
Explanation
MLFB / Order No.
SPA440
SPA440 angular synchronous control on CD-ROM and the

documentation (as file).
6DD1842-0AB0
D7 ES
SIMADYN D configuring software D7-ES. Package comprising 6DD1801-4DA2

STEP7, CFC and D7-SYS on CD-ROM
Table 1-1
1.3
Components for adapting the software package using CFC
Introduction
Electrical shaft
The angular synchronous control with synchronization is an application

which is frequently used in drive technology. This synchronous operation,
which is achieved with the control software, is also known as Electrical
shaft.
Standard software
package
Angular synchronous operation is implemented using the SPA440

standard software package. This standard software package can run on
the T400 technology module, integrated in a drive converter. It is available
as CFC source software on CD-ROM or directly on the T400. It can be
modified with STEP7, CFC and the supplementary D7-SYS software, to
adapt the technology functions to the customers precise requirements.
1.4
Terminology
1.4.1
Important terminology
Master slave
The angular synchronous application comprises a master drive and one

or several slave drives. The master drive specifies the speed and angular
position of the slaves.
Pulses / pulse
encoder
Position actual values are sensed by counting the pulses received from
the connected pulse encoder. The pulse encoder has two signal lines,
which supply pulse series with a 90 offset to one another. The direction
of rotation is determined from the phase position of the two pulse series.
For these pulse series, both the rising as well as the falling edges are
evaluated. Overall, the pulses are quadrupled, which means that the
resolution is also quadrupled. The position- and speed actual values are
retrieved from the quadrupled pulses per software (using the speed
sensing function blocks).
Encoder pulse
number /
synchronizing
pulse number

Overview
A differentiation must be made between Encoder pulse number
(parameter H011) and Synchronizing pulse number (parameter
H100). Encoder pulse number specifies the number of encoder
pulses per revolution (Pulse number). On the other hand, the
Synchronizing pulse number refers to the number of pulse edges
between two synchronizing pulses (quadrupled pulses). This means, that
for an encoder with an encoder pulse number H011=1024, the
synchronizing pulse number is H100=4096, if one synchronizing pulse
(e.g. zero pulse) occurs per revolution.
Position actual
value
The number of summed pulses since the drive was powered-up, or since
it was reset the last time. The position actual value can be reset, e.g.
when a zero pulse occurs. In this case, the position actual value
corresponds to the number of summed pulses since the last time the
drive was reset.
Actual angular
value
Rotation of the rotor of a drive with reference to a defined zero position in

angular degrees. The definition of the actual angular value is from 0 to
360. It can only be determined after a synchronizing pulse has been
received (zero pulse, BERO proximity switch) with the drive running. The
absolute position of the drive is known as a result of the synchronizing
pulse. As the drive moves, additional pulses are received, which are
summed and the actual position changes. The actual angular value is
obtained from the difference of the instantaneous actual position and the
actual position at the synchronizing instant. It therefore corresponds to the
angle that the rotor has moved through since the last synchronizing pulse
was received.
Position actual
value
The summed pulses of the incremental encoder represent the actual

position value. The actual travel is calculated from the actual position
value, which is generated due to the fact that the drive is moving, e.g. the
distance that a gantry crane moves when the drives are running (refer to
3.8.1)
Speed
synchronism
The master- and slave drive(s) receive the same speed setpoint. The
speed setpoint can be weighted for the individual drives using a ratio. For
pure synchronous speed control, only the speeds of the drives are
controlled and the angular position is ignored.
Angular
synchronism
The angular synchronous control has a closed-loop speed synchronizing

control as subordinate control loop. In addition to the speed synchronism,
the differential position actual values (i. e. the difference pulses) between
the master- and slave drive(s) are fed to a higher-level closed-loop
angular control. Angular synchronous operation of the drives means that
while the master- and slave drives are operational, the relative angular
position between the master and slaves is controlled so that it remains
constant. The same as the closed-loop synchronous speed control, the
master/slave ratio can be adjusted over a wide range.
Synchronization
In addition to speed- and angular synchronism, the drives can also be

synchronized with one another. This means, that the angular- or positions
of the drives can be synchronized to a specified offset (displacement)
when synchronizing marks are passed (pulse encoder zero pulse or
BERO proximity switch). Synchronization is realized, depending on the
application, at various intervals. The synchronizing mechanism is
explained in more detail in Section 1.5.

Overview
1.4.2
Functions and features

Ratio between the master and slave which can be set over a wide
range
Both drives can be synchronized with one another, also for a flying
master
An offset (displacement) can be entered depending on the direction of
rotation
Speed controller KP adaption for low speeds
Angular controller KP adaption as a function of the ratio
Communications coupling is monitored and the angular controller
enabled
From V2.1. onwards for linear axis, angular synchronism can also be
implemented using 2 absolute value encoders by comparing the two
position actual values: Delta_Pos = Pos_Master Pos_Slave.
When using this version, parameters L098 must be set to 0 and L099
to 1. In this case, the peer-to-peer coupling of the T400 cannot be
used.
If the standard version is used (position differential sensing with
incremental encoders), parameter L098 must be set to 1 and L099 to
0 (factory setting).
Functions
The control core consists of the following CFC charts: SYNC01, SYNC02
and CONTR. All of the other charts form the interfaces to the drive
converter, communication channels and HMI devices.
Functions in the standard software package Implemented in CFC chart Sampl. time
Closed-loop control
reading-in setpoints
sensing actual values
angular controller
determining the displacement
synchronizing
speed controller (optional)
analog outputs
analog inputs
AE1
AE2 to AE4
Open-loop control
jogging
enable functions for:
angular controller
synchronization
speed controller
communication interfaces
fault- and alarm handling
monitoring functions
couplings
Communications
drive converter (CU), receive PZD
drive converter (CU), send PZD
COMBOARD PZD
Description
Section 2.2
SYNC01, SYNC02
9.6 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
Section 3
1.2 ms
9.6 ms
CONTR
Section 3
19.2 ms
19.2 ms
19.2 ms
19.2 ms
when initial.
153.6 ms
19.2 ms
Section 2.1
IF_CU (interface to CU)

IF_COM (interface to CB1)
19.2 ms
1.2 ms
9.6 ms

Overview
-
peer-to-peer PZD
IF_Peer (interface to peer.)
Parameter handling
defining the texts for the
technology parameters
Table 1-2
PAR_GER (German)
PAR_ENG (English)
9.6 ms
153.6 ms
Section 4
Functions and structure at a glance
1.5
A comparison between speed- and angular synchronism
1.5.1
Model
The following sketch of the model is intended to provide a better
understanding of the control principles of speed- and angular
synchronism.
Disk, master drive
P_M
N zero mark
Offset
Disk, slave drive

P_S
F
Sensor
Stroboscope S
Fig. 1-1
Model to illustrate angular synchronism
S_M and S_S
The lefthand disk is located on the rotor of the master drive. In the
following it will be called Disk, master drive (P_M). The righthand disk is
connected to the rotor of the slave drive and is called Disk, slave drive
(P_S).
Stroboscope S
The slave drive is operated from a closed-loop synchronous speed- or

angular synchronous control, where the reference is the master. The
master/slave speed ratio is assumed to be 1:1, i.e. the two disks P_M and
P_S rotate with the same speed, in the same direction. Stroboscope S is
triggered by the rotational motion of the master. It is triggered precisely
then, when cam N is located above sensor F, i.e., if the line on the disk
P_M points vertically upwards (i.e. to 12). This is implemented, e.g.
using the zero pulse of a pulse encoder.
NOTE
Pulse pattern
The situation assumes a master/slave speed ratio of 1:1 (this is easier

to depict). The observations also apply for other ratios.
In spite of the rotational movement, as a result of the stroboscope,
anybody looking at the disk, will see a steady-state pattern of lines on the
disks P_M and P_S. The principles behind closed-loop speed- and
angular synchronous controls can be made very clear using the position
of the lines on the two disks, as will be seen in the following.

Overview
1.5.2
Differences between speed- and angular synchronism

For synchronous speed control, the master- and slave drives receive the
same speed setpoint, while the angular position is ignored. The closedloop angular synchronous control has, as subordinate control, a closedloop synchronous speed control. In addition to speed synchronism, the
differential position actual values (i. e. the difference pulses) between the
master- and slave drives, are fed to a higher-level closed-loop angular
control.
The differences between the two control types will be clarified using the
following example: There are three disks (refer to Fig. 1-2): one master
disk (P_M) and two slave (P_S) disks. The master drive rotates with a
constant impressed speed. One of the slave drives is controlled from a
closed-loop speed control, and the other slave drive, from a closed-loop
angular synchronous control; both of them are referred to the master
drive. The master/slave ratio is set to 1:1 for both of the slaves, i.e. the
three disks rotate in the same direction and with the same speed.
Master
Status
Slave,
speed synchronism
Slave,
angular synchronism
Instant t
Undisturbed,
steady-state
operation
Instant t+1
Vx
Vx
Disturbance
quantity
injected into
the slave
Instant t+2
Vx
Disturbance
quantity has
been corrected
Fig. 1-2
Difference between speed- and angular synchronism
Three instants in time are shown in Fig. 1-2 : the disks of the master
(P_M) and slave (P_S) at the instants t, t+1 and t+2.
Instant t:
Operation without any disturbance quantity. In this operating status, there

are no differences between closed-loop speed- and angular synchronous
control. However, this particular situation is only of theoretical relevance,
as in practical operation, disturbances are always present.
Instant t+1:
10

Overview
A disturbance affects the slave drives. This disturbance initially causes
the slave drive to lead by a specific offset Vx, both for the closed-loop
speed- as well as for the closed-loop angular synchronous control.
Instant t+2:
Note
1.6
In steady-state operation, for closed-loop angular synchronous control,

this offset Vx is corrected and for the pure closed-loop synchronous speed
control, it is not. For the closed-loop angular synchronous control, the
slave disk re-assumes its original position, contrary to the pure closedloop synchronous speed control. The angular controller corrects until the
previous pulse difference between the master- and slave drive at instant t
has been re-established.
After the disturbance has been corrected, for the closed-loop angular
synchronous control, disk P_S assumes its original position, i.e. relative
angular position. Contrary to this, for the pure closed-loop speed
control, this disturbance is not corrected. This means that the additional
angular offset, caused by the fault, is kept !
Displacement and synchronization

When two drives are operated with synchronous control, it may be
necessary to also synchronize the drives. This is generally the case after
the drives have been powered-up, as the master- and slave drives are not
in a defined position. Certain applications make it also necessary to
synchronize shorter or longer intervals (also refer to e.g. Section 3.7.1).
The goal is to correct an erroneous differential pulse actual value between
the master and slave. In this case, the sensed actual values are
referenced to absolute synchronizing marks.
Synchronization
When synchronizing, the displacementat the synchronizing instant is

determined and then this displacement to a specified displacement
setpoint is corrected. Synchronization is required, if the relative position
between two drives regarding absolute synchronizing marks must be
detected and corrected.
Synchronizing
mark
When a synchronizing mark is passed it is detected per hardware using a

zero pulse from the pulse encoder or using a BERO proximity switch. The
absolute position of the drives with respect to one another is sensed using
one synchronizing signal.
Displacement
(actual value)
The actual angular values of the two drives is set to defined actual
angular values when the fixed synchronizing marks are passed. Only after
both drives have passed their synchronizing marks, can the actual offset
(actual value) be defined as the number of pulses, which are received
from the master- and slave drives between the synchronizing marks.
Note
The number of synchronizing pulses between the master- and slave

drive at the machine part, to which the drive must be synchronized,
must be the same. This standard software package does not take into
account unequal synchronizing pulse rates !
Displacement and synchronization are explained using a rotary
movement. This is essentially the same also for linear motion (refer to
Section 3.7.1)

11
Overview
Position of the zero
mark of the master
drive
Offset
mark of the slave drive
Disk, master drive

P M
Fig. 1-3
Disk, slave drive

P S
Position displacement between the master- and slave drives
After both drive synchronizing marks have been passed, the correct
displacement (actual value) can be determined as master/slave pulse
difference. This displacement replaces the previous differential position
actual value in the angular synchronous control (which could have been
possibly incorrect).
Displacement
setpoint
The relative (angular) position of the master and slave are entered using
the displacement setpoint so that the master- and slave drives have the
required position to one another. If they are not synchronized, the
displacement setpoint refers to the angular position of the drives at the
instant that the differential position actual value was last set. For example,
at the start of the closed-loop control. If synchronized, the displacement
setpoint refers to the last synchronized displacement actual value. The
displacement is entered as quadrupled pulses (refer to Section 1.3.1).
The disks of the master (P_M) and slave (P_S) at instants t, t+1 and t+2
are illustrated in Fig. 1-4 at three instants in time. They are intended to
clarify the interaction between displacement setpoint and displacement
actual value. These instantaneous states are obtained using a
stroboscope and the model as shown in Fig. 1-1.
Action, status
Master
Slave
Instant t
Displacement actual value V1 and displacement
Setpoint V1* are present
V1 *
V1
Instant t+1
Synchronization has taken place, the displacement
actual value has been corrected.
Displacement setpoint V1 is kept, the change is
corrected.
Instant t+2
New displacement setpoint V2* is entered and kept,
actual value V2 is corrected.
V1 *
V2 *
V2
Fig. 1-4 Synchronizing to an displacement setpoint
Instant t:
12
The slave drive is operated from the closed-loop angular synchronous

control. V1* is available as displacement setpoint, which should specify
the required relative displacement between the master and slave. The

Overview
displacement setpoint V1* refers to the angular position of the drive the
last time that the differential position actual value was set. If
synchronization still has not taken place, this reference instant can extend
back to the past until the angular controller has been enabled after poweron. However, if synchronization has already taken place, the
displacement setpoint refers to the last synchronized angular position.
However, the actual displacement is V1. This means that synchronization
is necessary (refer to instant t+1). The displacement setpoint V1* is kept
during synchronization.
Instant t+1:
Synchronizing takes place after the synchronizing marks have been

passed. An undesirable deviation between the actual displacement V1 and
the displacement setpoint V1* occurs. The deviation is corrected with
unchanged displacement setpoint V1*. In the closed-loop angular
synchronous control, the displacement actual value is set directly to the
actual displacement at the synchronizing instant. The angular control then
corrects the set displacement actual value to the constant displacement
setpoint. Synchronization is completed at instant t+1.
Instant t+2:
A new displacement setpoint V2* is entered and corrected. The setpoint

now refers to the synchronized angular position at instant t+1.
Summary
Synchronization is sub-divided into:

Determining the displacement, and
Correcting the deviation, to the differential angular actual value.
The angular synchronous control is a lower-level control to the
synchronizing circuit. When synchronizing, the differential position actual
value is directly set to the actual displacement at the synchronizing instant
(i. e. when at least one synchronizing mark is passed). With a constant
displacement setpoint at the angular synchronous controller, deviations
which may be present at the synchronizing instant, are corrected.

13
Overview
1.7
Hardware constellation
A typical hardware constellation to implement angular synchronous
control on a T400 technology module is shown in Fig. 1-5.
Incremental
encoder
The incremental encoder for the master drive is connected at connector

X6. For the slave drive, the pulse encoder signals are either received from
connector X8 or via the backplane bus of the basic drive (refer to Section
2.2)
CU
COM
T400
BASEBOARD
(MasterDrives / DC Master)
COMBOARD
(CB1, CBP, ...)
Technology module
Electronics box of the drive

converter
Fig. 1-5: Typical hardware arrangement in the electronics box of a drive converter
Control structure
14
The basic closed-loop control structure of the angular synchronous

control is shown in Fig. 1-6. The master- and slave drive(s) are connected
to a common speed master setpoint n*. The speed master setpoint n* is
used for pre-control and ensures that the required speed of the slave(s) is
achieved. Further, the speed of each slave drive can be set using
different master/slave ratios. The higher-level angular controller ensures
angular synchronism and corrects steady-state errors in the lower-level
speed control loop (also refer to Fig. 3-1, Overview closed-loop control).

Overview
Commands, messages/signals
setpoints and actual values
Master
setpoint
n*
n*
Drive
converter
Motor
nMaster
T400
T400
CU
CU
Drive converter
Drive converter
Motor
Motor
nSlave
if required,
amplifier
Position and speed of the master
Master drive
Fig. 1-6
Slave drive 1
If required, add. slave drives
Basic closed-loop control structure of the angular synchronous control (CU: Basic drive module)
Input quantities
The closed-loop control for the slave drive requires the following input
quantities:
Speed master setpoint n* (reference speed for the master and slave)
Speed- and position actual value of the master (from pulse encoder
signals)
Additional commands and signals, setpoints and actual values (e. g.
from the automation)
Synchronization
NOTE
The closed-loop control structure, illustrated above, is independent of the

synchronization. This is because, when synchronizing, only a correction
signal for the differential position actual value can be generated from the
position of the synchronizing marks (refer to Fig. 3-1).
Synchronization is only necessary if the machine requires this.
Angular synchronous control can also be operated without
synchronization (without synchronizing pulse/marks).
Several slave
drives
NOTES
If angular synchronism has to be established between several drives,

then the drive with the highest output or the longest rise time should be
used as the master drive. If this drive runs unsteadily, then it might make
more sense to select a smoother running drive, i.e. deviating from this
recommendation.
The pulse encoder of the master drive must be simultaneously
connected to the appropriate inputs of the slave drives. It is not
permissible to overload the pulse encoder of the master drive!

15
Overview
1.8
Information and instructions when using angular

synchronous control
NOTE
Applications
Angular synchronous control means that the machine runs in true
angular synchronism which for instance can be realized using
mechanical linkages and couplings (e. g. shafts or gearboxes).
NOTE
Applications, which under certain circumstances, are not

practical:
Applications, which can be implemented using a pure closed-loop
speed control. Closed-loop speed control is preferable to angular
synchronism due to the simpler controller optimization, if the task in
hand permits this. Generally, angular synchronous control does not
further improve the control dynamic performance.
Applications, which require load equalization or closed-loop tension
control.
16

T400 technology module

The interfaces between the standard software package and the system
environment are explained in this Section. In addition to the local
interfaces of the T400 technology module (terminals and backplane bus
to the basic drive), the three configured communication interfaces are
also involved.
2.1
Communication interfaces
The approximate structure of the standard software package is shown in
Fig. 2-1. It is sub-divided into:
Communication interfaces: COMBOARD (e. g. PROFIBUS slave),
peer-to-peer and USS slave (USS is only required if the T400 is used
in standalone applications, i.e. is not used with a basic drive. In this
case, only restricted parameterization capability is possible via the
USS-slave interface.)
Interface to the basic drive (process data PZD, parameterization, faultand alarm messages)
Analog and digital I/O
Control core (the speed controller can be alternatively located on the
T400 or in the basic drive).
The functions of the control core are explained in detail in Section 0. The
interfaces, via which process- and parameter data are
transferred/exchanged with the T400, are described in the following
Sections.
Communications
COMBOARD
(e.g. PROFIBUS)
Control core
Open-loop control
Local interface
Interface CU
Closed-loop angular control

Peer-to-peer
Analog I/O
Closed-loop speed control
USS slave
(operation without CU)
Fig. 2-1
Speed/position sensing
Digital I/O
Structure of the standard software package (CU is the processor module of the basic drive)

17
2.1.1
Interface to the basic drive (CU)
Communications
with CU
Data, including fast process data and parameters, as well as

faults/alarms, is exchanged between the T400 technology module and the
basic drive converter (abbreviated: Basic drive) using the backplane bus
LBA (Local Bus Adapter) via a parallel DUAL-PORT RAM interface.
Basic drive setting
The basic drive must be commissioned. For instance, for SIMOVERT

MasterDrives this is realized according to the Expert application mode in
[1]
the Operating Instructions . In order to operate the SPA440 standard
software package, the following pre-set basic drive parameters must be
set, refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
NOTE
The T400 supplies the basic drive with the following control words;
however, they are only effective in the drive converter after the basic
drive has been appropriately parameterized.
Variable
Word
VC (CU2)
CUMC
DC-Master
Bit
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
On command (main
contactor)
W1.0
P554
3001
P554
3100
P654
3100
Off2
W1.1
P555..557
3001
P555
3101
P655
3101
Off3
W1.2
P558..560
3001
P558
3102
P658
3102
Setpoint enable
W1.6
P564
3001
P564
3106
P664
3106
Fault acknowledgement
W1.7
P565-567
3001
P565
3107
P665
3107
Jogging 1
W1.8
P568
3001
P568
3108
P668
3108
Jogging 2
W1.9
P569
3001
P569
3109
P669
3109
External fault 1
W1.15
P575
3001
P575
3115
P675
3115
Speed controller enable

Speed setpoint
(if H140 = 0)
Suppl. speed setpoint from
the angular controller
Pre-control value for the
speed controller
W4.9
P585
3004
P585
3409
P685
3409
W2
P443
3002
P443
3002
P644
3002
W5
P433
3005
P224
3005
P634
3005
W8
P506
3008
P262
3008
P501
3008
Table 2-1
Control word- and setpoint channel
Variable
Word /
Bit
VC
CUMC
DC-Master
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
Status word 1
W1
P694.01
968
552
P734.01
0032
U734.01
0032
Speed actual value
W2
P694.02
219
P734.02
0091
U734.02
0040
Torque
W3
P694.03
P734.03
0182
U734.03
0142
Status word 2
W4
P694.04
553
P734.04
0033
U734.04
0033
Drive converter output current W5
P694.05
P734.05
U734.05
0116
Table 2-2
18
Status word- and actual value channel

2.1.2
Interface to COMBOARD
Communications
module
Communication modules (COMBOARDs; abbreviated: CB) form the

interface between the T400 and a communications network. The type of
COMBOARD depends on the network protocol. For example, CB1,CBP
or CBP2 are available for PROFIBUS applications. For the T400, the
COMBOARD is an interface, which can be used to transfer process data
(PZD) and parameters (PKW).
The COMBOARD is parameterized from the basic drive (protocol, baud
rate, telegram length, monitoring,... ). The number of pieces of net
(useful) data can extend up to 10 PZD (each 16 bits).
T400 in the SRT400
Example
The parameterization is only made from the T400, if the T400 is used as
standalone solution in the SRT400 with COMBOARD at slot 2.
Parameters H480 - H496 are provided for this special case.
Fixed protocol versions are available for PROFIBUS (parameter process
data objects PPO [2, 4]). The required PPO type of the slave is generally
saved in the master. It defines the number of PZD which are transferred.
If, for example, PPO type 4 (6 PZD) is used, PZD7 to PZD10 are
undefined.
Enable
COMBOARD communications can be activated or de-activated using

parameter H409.
Receive data
The first 6 of the process data received from the communications module
are assigned as follows in the factory setting (refer to Chart 410):
PZD
Monitoring
Normalization
Display
Control word1 (e. g. On)
None
d460
Master setpoint
H451
d450
Setpoint, displacement setpoint
H453
d452
Control word2
None
d461
Setpoint, ratio
H455
d454
Setpoint, inertia compensation
H457
d456
Table 2-3
Send data
Receive words (factory setting)
COMBOARD receive channels (sampling time 9.6 ms; free PZD, refer to Chart 410)
The send data are selected via multiplexer (H442 to H449), or using BICO
re-connections. Refer to Chart 440 to normalize the send data.
Telegram reception can be monitored from a time perspective
(watchdog). Two time limits are available. After power-on there is a delay
of H462 ms, and during operation H463 ms for a valid receive telegram.
The error- and alarm messages are transferred to the CU where they are
displayed if the messages were not suppressed (H003 and H004).

19
2.1.3
Peer-to-peer interface
Communications
via peer-to-peer
The standard software package contains a peer-to-peer interface for fast

data transfer between two modules, e.g. to an additional T400. This
interface has the following factory setting:
Baud rate
H363
19200 baud
Monitoring time limit after power-on
H360
20 s
Monitoring time limit in operation
H361
100 ms
Telegram structure (cannot be

changed)
Table 2-4
Factory setting, peer-to-peer interface
NOTE
The peer-to-peer telegram always includes 5 PZD. (PZD2 and PZD3) or

(PZD4 and PZD 5) can, alternatively, be used as single words, double
word or floating-point value (refer to Chart 300). For the factory setting,
floating-point values are transferred.
Caution
In order to eliminate data transfer disturbances, the interface terminating

resistors must be switched-in (switches S1/3 to S1/6; refer to [4]).
Parameter H309
communications.
Enable
Monitoring
is
used
to
enable
or
inhibit
peer-to-peer
Telegram reception can be monitored from a time perspective. There are

two time limits. After power-on, there is a delay of H360 ms and during
operation H361 ms for a valid receive telegram. The error- and alarm
messages are transferred to the CU where they are displayed if the
messages were not suppressed (refer to H003 and H004).
For absolute value

encoders
2.1.4
1 control word
2 floating-point values
If the position sensing of the 2 absolute value encoders of the T400 are
used, the peer-to-peer interface cannot be used, as absolute value
encoder 2 uses the same terminals!
Diagnostics interface
A PC can be connected to serial interface 1 (RS232). The interface can
be used with the Service-IBS/ TELEMASTER or with the CFC in the test
mode. Thus, values and connections can be changed.
The baud rate 19200 baud.
T400
20
PC
Terminal
Function
9-pin
25-pin
67
RxD
68
TxD
69
Ground

Table 2-5
2.1.5
Terminals of interface X01 on T400 (RS232)
USS-slave interface
Serial interface 1 (RS232 / RS485) can be alternatively used for
parameterization. This is intended for the special case, where the T400 is
used in the SRT400. When used in the basic drive, parameterization is
realized via the basic drive. The following settings are required for this
particular case:
Involves
Value
Factory
H700
Significance
Enable USS slave
H701
9600
H703
Slave address at the USS bus
H704
0: RS485 (OP1S)
1: RS232 (SIMOVIS)
S1/8 on
T400
Table 2-6
Caution:
ON
OFF
Baud rate (OP1S : 9600 or 19200)
Changeover from online operation (CFC, basic start-up) on USS.

This only becomes effective after power-down / when the T400 is
reset
Settings for USS-slave operation (factory = factory setting)
It is not possible to simultaneously use USS and CFC online! USS

operation is not possible if the parameterization is incorrect. This means,
that the error can only be resolved if online operation is selected, and then
the error is, for example, resolved using the basic-IBS (basic start-up
tool). OP1S can only be used from version V2.3 onwards.

21
2.2
Terminal assignment
Setpoints and control signals can be read-in and actual values and status
signals output via digital and analog signals. For the T400, the
system/plant signals are connected directly at the appropriate terminals,
which are accessible from the front. Fig. 2-2 shows an overview of the
T400 connections. The following description refers to the terminal
assignment.
2.2.1
Digital I/O
Supply voltage
The digital inputs and outputs of the T400 Technology Module have a 24
V signal level. The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs must be
externally connected.
The SPA440 control core uses 5 control signals, which, when required
can be entered via digital inputs (refer Table 2-7) .
Terminal
Recommended assignment (control signals)
53
Angular controller enable
54
Synchronizing command
55
Reset position
56
Displacement reset
57
Jog enable
Table 2-7
Recommended terminal assignment for the digital inputs, T400 module
Digital outputs
The digital outputs are pre-assigned for status messages, refer to Table
2-8.
Properties
When the unit is powered-up, all of the outputs are initially open-circuit
(high ohmic state). After the initialization phase, they are driven with the
values which are present. All of the outputs are connected to ground
when the drive converter is powered-down or when a fault develops.
NOTE
Logical 0: Output open-circuit or connected to ground

Logical 1: Output is closed, i. e. the terminal is at the
connected supply voltage of approx. - 2.5 V.
The max. output load is 50 mA, short-circuit proof
Term.
BICO param.
Enable
46
Synchronism reached
H631
H637
47
Angular controller at its limit
H632
H638
48
Enable status of the ang. controller
H633
H639
49
Fault
H634
H640
51
Alarm
H635
Not relev.
Table 2-8
22
Factory setting
Terminal assignment of the digital outputs of the T400

X8.80
+15V / 100mA
Track
A
Track
82
B
Pulse
83 Zero pulse encoder
1
84 Coarse pulse
T400
81
HTL
85
Pulse encoder
Tracks A and B from CU

Zero pulse from CU
M
Increm_1
X6.62
HTL
TTL
RS422
Track B +
Zero
64
pulse
65 Coarse pulse
66
X8.86
M
Track A -
87
Track B -
88
Zero pulse
X01
Pulse
encoder
2
X9.90
10V
5 analog inputs
2 differential inputs
11 bits + sign
10 V / 10 k
+
-
91
A
D
92
10V
RS485, 2-wire
Track A +
63
Selected using
switch S2
MASTERDRIVES
basic drive
CUx
93
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
10V
Tx/Rx-
71
69
Symbolic
hardware
addresses of
the basic
software
package
TTL
RS232
TxD
68
RxD
67
11 bits + VZ
Ana_In_1
Ana_In_3
X9.97
Ana_In_4
P24 external
X5.45
50
Ana_In_5
51
99
X5. 45
46
4 digital I/O
52
M
P24 external
47
bi-directional
24 V DC
(8 mA input
current)
2 analog outputs
10 V / 10 mA
11 bits + sign
99
96
10V
Program download
CFC online
USS / SIMOVIS
98
95
10V
Serial interface 1
Ana_In_2
Ana_Out_2
X7.70
Increm_2
Ana_Out_1
94
Tx/Rx+
+24V
2 digital outputs
24 V DC / 100 mA
Base load 40 mA
for external P24supply, which can
also be taken from
the basic drive
BinInOut
48
X7.76
77
78
79
49
SSI_1
Absolute value
encoder 1
24V
50
M
SSI_2
53
4 digital inputs
interrupt-capable
24 V DC
(8 mA input
current )
54
55
X6
X7.72
56
BinInput
57
4 digital
inputs
24 V DC
X02
58
59
61
Communications
module
e.g.: CB1
Fig. 2-2
Absolute value
encoder-2
74
or
75
Serial interface 2
Peer-to-peer or
USS
60
24V
73
Dual
port
RAM
Dual
port
RAM
MASTERDRIVES
basic drive
CUx
Layout of the terminals of the T400 Technology Module

23
2.2.2
Analog I/O
An output- and input voltage of 5 V corresponds, in the factory setting to
an internal value of 1.0 (100 %). This pre-setting can be changed using
scaling factors and offsets. The following is valid for analog inputs:
Scaling
Analog value = terminal voltage scaling factor / 5 V - offset

Generally, the analog inputs have a smoothing element connected in
series. The smoothing can be de-activated by setting the filter time
constant to 0.
Terminal
Recommended
assignment
Sampling
time
Scaling
Offset
Filter time
constant
Value,
smoothed
90 / 91 Inertia compensation
1.2 ms
H210
H211
H222
d223
92 / 93 Ratio
9.6 ms
H213
H214
H224
d225
94 / 99 Speed master setpoint
9.6 ms
H216
H217
H226
d227
95 / 99 Offset setpoint
9.6 ms
H219
H220
H228
d229
Table 2-9
Terminal assignment of the analog inputs, T400 module
T400 has two analog outputs which are processed in the fastest sampling
time (1.2 ms). The output quantity is selected per multiplexer or the BICO
connection. During operation, every output can be inhibited by a control
signal (output = 0V).
Analog outputs
The outputs can be scaled. For the factory setting, 1.0 is output for 5 V.
The output voltage V is obtained as follows:
V = ( value + offset ) scaling factor 5 V
Terminal
Multiplexer
BICO input
Inhibit input
Scaling factor
Offset
97 / 99
H618
H620
H621
H161
H160
98 / 99
H619
H622
H623
H163
H162
Table 2-10
2.2.3
Analog outputs and associated parameters
Pulse encoders
Pulse encoder type
Encoder power
supply
Shielding
24
Pulse encoders with two tracks, offset through 90 degrees must be

used. If the synchronizing function is used, the zero pulse or a
comparable synchronizing signal (e. g. BERO switch) must be connected.
The T400 module provides 15 V (max. 100 mA) as encoder power
supply.
Encoders with a 15 - 24 V supply voltage, especially: SIEMENS rotary
pulse encoders 1XP8001-1 (for 1LA5 motors, frame sizes 100K to 200L);


The pulse encoder cable and the cables used to conduct the
synchronizing pulses must be shielded. The cable shield must be
connected at both ends, if possible through clamps, to ground potential
through the lowest impedance connection. This is especially important for
signals from proximity- or switches using contacts.
15 V power
supply units
If the 100 mA of the internal 15 V supply is not adequate, we recommend

the following 15V power supplies:
Type CM62-PS-220 AC/ 15 DC/ 1
220 V AC to 15V DC, load capacity 1 A
Manufacturer, Phoenix
Type FMP 15S 500 with fast mounting
110/220 V AC to 15V DC, load capacity 0.5 A
Manufacturer, Block
Encoder pulse
numbers
When selecting the encoder pulse number, the following issues must be
taken into account:
1. Maximum pulse frequency, 1.5 MHz
2. The ratio should be approx. 1:1 as in this case, the best dynamic
performance is obtained. A ratio in the range from 1:4 to 4:1 is
acceptable (definitions, refer to the following sections).
3. The encoder pulse numbers of the master- and slave drives should be
same; however, criteria 1) and 2) have priority.
The master drive pulse encoders are directly connected to the T400. The
slave drive can use the incremental encoder signals from the basic drive
(CU) from the backplane bus.
The operating mode can be parameterized using parameters H018 and
H019. The following should be set:
Encoder type
Filter parameterization and filter time constant of the digital filter for the
signals of the two pulse tracks / zero pulse track
Source of the encoder tracks
The recommended values for H018 and H019 are specified in the
parameter table in Section 4.2. For additional information, refer to Lit.[5]
block NAVS, connector MOD.

25
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
HTL
RS422
HTL
TTL
HTL 3V
81
62
62
62
62
86
82
63
63
63
63
87
Synchronizing pulse N+
83
64
64
64
64
Synchronizing pulse N -
66
88
Coarse pulse inputs
84
65
65
65
65
P15 output for the 15 V encoder power supply
80
80
80
80
80
Ground
85
66
66
66
66
Switch S2.1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.3
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Switch S2.4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Track A+ and track A

Track ATrack B+ and track B
Track B-
Table 2-11
Incremental encoder inputs of the T400: Terminal assignment and switch settings for various encoder
types
Coarse pulse
evaluation
Coarse pulses are used to suppress undesirable synchronizing signals.

For example, by combining coarse- and fine pulses, disturbances can be
suppressed, or just specific synchronizing pulses evaluated.
5 different cases are investigated. The default setting is for synchronizing
pulses which are used independently of the associated coarse pulses
(mode 1). The coarse pulse mode is selected using H022 and H023.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Coarse pulse ignored
Y = XG AND XF
only 1st pulse
Y = XG AND XF
Y = XG AND XF
only 1st pulse
Y = XG AND XF
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
XG
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
XF
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Fig. 2-3
26
Operating modes for coarse pulse evaluation (the synchronizing pulses correspond to the fine pulses)

Absolute value encoder

When using the absolute value encoder for differential position sensing,
two absolute encoders with SSI or EnDat interface are connected.
We recommend a multi-turn encoder with e.g. 4096 steps per revolution
and 4096 revolutions which can be differentiated between. The encoder
should be a coded rotary encoder.
(function block type to evaluate an absolute value encoder: AENC)
T400
terminal
Significance
72
Absolute encoder 2, data +
73
Absolute encoder 2, data -
74
Absolute encoder 2, clock +
75
Absolute encoder 2, clock -
76
77
78
79
Drive to be connected
Master drive
Slave drive with T400
Table 2-12: T400 terminals for absolute value encoder

27
Function description
A control-related block diagram of the standard angular synchronism
software package is illustrated in Fig. 3-1.
The closed-loop angular control is implemented on the technology
module. The closed-loop speed control is either realized on the
connected drive converter or is internally computed on the T400 (refer to
parameter H140).
The setpoints are either received from the basic drive (CU), COMBOARD,
peer-to-peer or analog input or can be entered as fixed value.
Inertia
compensation
Closed-loop speed
control
Basic drive CU
Speed controller
Master speed
setpoint
(reference speed)
Speed setpoint
To the
current
controller
Ratio
Speed actual value, slave
Closed-loop angular
control
Conversion into pulse

number conversion
Pulse encoder
Slave
Actual value
sensing
Speed actual
values
Position act. value, slave and master
Master
Status and control signals
Control signals for

synchronizing
Displacement
determination
&
synchronization
Displacement
act. value
Displacement position difference
Position difference
Position difference - correction value
Ramp-function
generator
Angular controller
Displacement
setpoint
P- or PI controller
Fig. 3-1 Overview of the SPA440 standard software package
28

3.1
Ratio
3.1.1
Speed ratio
The master- and slave drives receive the same speed setpoint, whereby
this setpoint is weighted by the (master/slave) speed ratio .
The speed ratio between the master and slave drive is defined as
follows:
Speed ratio
Speed, master drive
Speed, slave drive
Example:
Speed, master drive:
Ratio
Speed, slave drive:
NOTE
nM = 1710 RPM
= 1.5
nS = nM / = 1710 RPM / 1.5 = 1140 RPM
Contrary to the older versions of the angular synchronous control, the

ratio, as floating-point value, can be practically set without any
limitations.
Parameter
Use
H040
Multiplexer selection of the source for the ratio
H041
Source for the supplementary ratio
H043
Fixed value, ratio
d044
Actual ratio
d045
Ratio, numerator
d046
Ratio, denominator
H047
Fixed value, supplementary ratio
H048
Multiplexer selection for the relative ratio
H067
Source for the ratio
H068
Source for the relative ratio
H086
Fixed value, fine ratio, numerator
H087
Fixed value, fine ratio, denominator
H088
Enable fine ratio
H155
Resolution for calculating numerator and denominator
Table 3-1
Parameters to define and display the ratio

29
3.1.2
Fine ratio
The ratio is generally entered as a floating-point value. The integer value
for numerator and denominator DN and NM are automatically calculated
from the selected ratio (refer to Chart 80). The calculated ratio exhibits a
maximum error of 0.0001 with respect to the floating-point input (this can
be influenced using the resolution of the ratio H155).
Nominator and denominator can be separately entered as integer value
(fine ratio) (refer to Table 3-1). (For example, this may be required if the
ratio is entered with OP1S, whereby only 3 decimal points are possible).
Example:
Ratio:
Pulses, slave/revolution:
1024
Pulses, master/revolution:
2048
/3 (master speed/slave speed)
Displacement correction should be made

Settings:
Parameter
Value
H077
5001
H078
30
Explanation
st
Source for fixed value 1 ratio of the displacement

calculation = 1, as the number of pulses between 2
synchronizing operations has been taken into account
(refer to H100, H102, H105, H107)
H086
Fine ratio, numerator
H087
Fine ratio, denominator
H088
Activates the fine ratio
H100
16384
(242048) number of edges between 2 synchronizing

signals of the master (2 revolutions)
H102
12288

signals of the slave (3 revolutions)
H105
10993
Suppresses the first synchronizing pulse from the master

(synchronizing is only enabled after 1.5 revolutions)
H107
10240
Suppresses the first two synchronizing pulses from the

slave (synchronizing is only enabled after 2.5 revolutions)

3.2
Setpoints and actual values
3.2.1
Setpoints
Setpoints can be entered from any interface. A connection must be
established from the required source to the appropriate setpoint input
using BICO technology. When making a selection with the multiplexer, a
selection can be made between the following sources. Also refer to
function chart 500 and the tables specified below.
Setpoint
Selection
Pre-assigned with ...
Displacement
H050
Fixed value (by H066)
Ratio
H040
Relative ratio
H048
Master speed setpoint
H070
Speed actual value, master
Inertia compensation
H080
Differentiation of the speed setpoint
Table 3-2
Multiplexer to select the setpoint channel
Selection
Normalization
Fixed value 0.0
Fixed value (a separate fixed value for each setpoint channel)
H210
Analog input 1, smoothed
H213
H216
H219
H550
Basic drive, word 2
H552
Basic drive, word 3
H554
Basic drive, word 5
Setpoint sources
H451
COMBOARD word 2
10
H453
COMBOARD word 3
11
H455
COMBOARD word 5
12
H457
COMBOARD word 6
13
Peer-to-peer, words 2 + 3
14
15
Table 3-3
Speed actual value, master (channel 15 is only available to

select the master setpoint)
Setpoint sources

31
3.2.2
Actual value sensing

The actual speed, position and position difference are sensed by
counting the pulses from the two pulse encoders from the master- and
slave drives.
Principle
The speed actual value sensing is calibrated using parameters H010 to

H013. The speed actual value is referred to the configured rated speed,
i.e. the rated speed has a speed actual value of 1.0.
Speed
Pulses
Normalization factor
Measuring time
Encoder pulse No.. Rated speed
All of the parameters which have to be set for the actual value sensing
are listed in Table 3-4:
Param.
Significance
Explanation
H010
Encoder pulse number, slave
Number of pulses (single) per revolution
H011
Encoder pulse number, master
H012
Rated speed, slave
Speed actual value, which is simulated for 1.0
H013
Rated speed, master
d014
Display parameter
d015
Display parameter
d016
Position actual value, slave
Display parameter
d017
Position actual value, master
Display parameter
H018
Slave sensing mode
Encoder type (always type 1); filter time; behavior for zero pulse;
source of the tracked signals and zero pulse
H019
Master sensing mode
Encoder type (always type 1); filter time; behavior for zero pulse
d020
Error code, slave sensing
Refer to Section 4.2
d021
Error code, master sensing
H022
Coarse pulse evaluation, slave
Refer to Section 4.2 and 2.2.3
H023
Coarse pulse evaluation,

master
Table 3-4
Parameters for the speed actual value sensing
NOTE
The explanations in this Manual only assume encoders with 2 tracks A

and B, offset through 90 and possibly with zero pulse! However, the
information is also valid for encoders with separate forwards- and
reverse tracks.
Rated speed, master (H013) and rated system frequency:
If the master setpoint for the slave is referred to the encoder pulses of
the master (H070 = 15), the rated speed of the master (H013) and the
rated system frequency (or the speed for a drive converter) must be
parameterized so that they are identical.
The rated speeds of the master and slave are required to generate the
master setpoint and to display the speed actual value (d014, d015).
These are used when calculating the pos. and pos. difference.
32

Position actual
value sensing
The master and slave position actual values are required to determine
the displacement. To sense the position actual value, the encoder pulse
edges from the master- and slave drives are counted which have been
received since the last time the system was reset with the drives
operational.
The position actual values are reset as follows:
the control signal reset position (refer to Chart 90)
when enabling the angular controller
using the synchronizing pulse (e. g. zero pulse) at the pulse encoder
input. When the synchronizing marks are passed, the position actual
value is set to 0 and runs-up to four times the encoder pulse number in
one revolution.
The position difference is sensed per software using a 32-bit counter.
This means that a maximum pulse number of
231 = 2147483648 quadrupled pulses is possible.
NOTE
Param.
31
In order that the position actual values do not overflow (e. g. from 2
31
-2 ), a synchronizing pulse must be generated, at the latest after
231 quadrupled pulses, which then resets the position!
Significance
Explanation
d017
Calculated in quadrupled pulses
d016
H105
Synchronizing threshold, slave
A synchronizing pulse is only evaluated if the position

actual value exceeds threshold H105
H107
Synchronizing threshold, master
As for H105, however for the master position
d109
Status of the angular controller

enable
At d109=0, the position is reset
H173
Multiplexer for reset position
Selects the source for this control signal
H097
H167
Inputs for the reset position

function
BICO inputs
H181
Input, reset slave position
H189
Input, reset master position
Table 3-5
Parameters for position actual value sensing
Position difference
sensing
The position difference actual value is defined as the position actual value
through which the slave must be moved, so that the position actual value
of the slave and the position actual value of the master, referred to the
slave, are the same.
The position pulse number of the master drive is re-normalized to the
slave. This means it can be directly compared with the position pulse
number of the slave, i.e. the angle through which the master drive moves,
is represented as a pulse number of the slave. The following algorithm for
the position difference is obtained, taking into account different encoder

33
pulse numbers for the master- and slave drives. Master- and encoder
pulses refer to the quadrupled position pulses generated by the pulse
encoder. Rated pulses represents the number of position pulses, where
the position actual value should be 1.0.
PulseMaster
Pos. difference =
Calculation
DN
Slave encoder pulse No.
NM
Master encoder pulse No.
- PulseSlave
Rated pulses
The quotient of NM / DN corresponds to ratio (refer to Section 3.1.2).

A so-called correction pulse number (H093), calculated from the displacement calculation, is added to the position difference for synchronization.
This means that the angular controller is forced to correct the position
difference which is entered. This correction value is zero if
synchronization is not applied or when in the synchronous condition
Correction pulse
number
Par.
Significance
Explanation
H093
Correction pulse number
H117
Filter time, position

difference
d124
Differential position actual

value, smoothed
Table 3-6
Number of pulses which, when the displacement is being corrected

are input per sampling time into the angular controller to correct the
displacement
Number of pulse edges (pulses 4) which represents the offset

between the master and slave; this is zero when the system is
synchronized.
Parameters for the differential position sensing
The pulse number ratio should be approximately 1:1. An inaccuracy of

several pulses can occur, especially for a pulse number ratio 1. The
highest accuracy is achieved for a pulse number ratio of 1:1, refer to the
example in Fig. 3.5.
Inaccuracy
9 edges
Pulses, master
Counter saved
1 edge
Pulses, slave
Counter saved
Ratio = 1
Determined position difference:
Actual position difference:
9 edges - 1 edge
4.5 pulses - 0.75 pulses
= 8 edges
= 3.75 pulses
Ratio = 6
Fig. 3-2
34
9 edges - 6 1 edge
= 3 edges
4.5 pulses - 6 0.75 pulses = 0 pulse
Example of inaccuracies when determining the position difference

The settings when using absolute value encoders are described in the
next section.
3.2.3
Position actual value sensing with absolute value encoders

Parameter
Description
Factory
setting
Connector
L098
Enables position sensing using a pulse

encoder (NAVS).
It is necessary to reset after a value is
changed!
---
L099
Enables position sensing using an

absolute value encoder (AENC).
changed!
---
Table 3-7: Activating the absolute value encoder
Settings
The absolute value encoder is set using the following parameters. The
required data can be taken from the manufacturers Operating Instructions
for the particular absolute value encoder.
Absolute Absolute
encoder encoder
1
2
Description
L100
Resolution per turn (RPT)
L200
Example: L100 = 4096 (Operating Instructions, absolute

encoder)
L101
L201
Number of turns (NOT)

only for multi-turn encoders. For single-turn encoders =
0.
Example: A multi-turn encoder is used. L101 = 4096
(Operating Instructions, absolute encoder)
L102
L202
Preceding zero bits (PZB)

Number of non-relevant bits at the start of the position
value transfer. This is valid for SSI encoders, with which
the various protocol versions are specified.
encoder)
L103
L203
Alarm bit position (ABP)

Position of the interrupt bit within the data transfer
protocol of an SSI encoder. If there is no interrupt bit,
then ABP = 0 applies.
encoder)
L104
L204
Clock frequency (MDF)

There are four possible clock frequencies for data
transfer.
0 : Clock frequency = 100 kHz, period = 10 s
2 : Clock frequency = 1 MHz, period = 1 s
3 : Clock frequency = 2 MHz, period = 0.5 s
encoder)

35
L105
L205
Encoder type (MDT)

Specification of the encoder type. The differentiation
between coded rotary encoders and length measuring
systems has an influence on the velocity output
(parameter c114 or c214).
0 : SSI (coded rotary encoder)
1 : SSI (coded length measuring system)
2 : EnDat (coded rotary encoder)
3 : EnDat (coded length measuring system)
4 : SSI (coded length measuring system with range
correction)
5 : EnDat (coded length measuring system with range
correction)
encoder)
L106
L206
Data coding (MDC)

0 : Binary code (permissible for EnDat and SSI)
1 : Gray code (permissible for SSI)
2 : Gray Excess code (permissible for SSI single-turn
encoders)
encoder)
L107
L207
Control word (CW)

Bit 0 : Enables the parity monitoring for an SSI encoder.
A check is made for even parity. The parity bit is directly
transferred after the position value, i.e. as 14th bit or as
26th bit.
0 = No parity monitoring (permissible for SSI, EnDat)
1 = Parity monitoring, even parity (permissible for SSI).
Bit 1 : Resets the AENC block and deletes the fault
messages and alarms as well as individual bits of the
fault word.
When using an EnDat encoder, its alarms and alarm bits
are reset.
For SSI encoders, after connecting-up and powering-up
the encoder, it is necessary to reset. A 0 to 1 signal edge
is required to reset.
Example: L107 = 0000h (hexadecimal value, with all bits
= 0, setting, bit 0 from the Operating Instructions,
absolute encoder)
L108
L208
L109
L209
L110
L210
Gearbox ratio (NFG)

Takes into account a gear ratio between the coded rotary
encoder and the drive system. The position values and
the speed are converted over to the drive system.
For a length measuring system, the gear ratio is not
taken into account.
The following applies: Position(drive) = gear ratio *
position(encoder).
Example: L208 = 1.0 (recommended setting)
Normalization, position (NFP)
Normalization basis for the offset input (OFF).
Normalization, speed (NFY)
This value influences the output value Y of the speed:
Y = NFY * revolutions/min.
Factory setting: 0.0
Example: L110 = 1.0 (i.e. for 100 revolutions/min, c114 =
100.0 is displayed at the output)
36

L111
L211
Position offset (OFF)

When entering an offsets 0 the encoder zero position is
shifted.
The offset value has the same normalization as the
position outputs.
It is subtracted from the encoder position actual value.
Example:
L111 = .... (must be determined from the position
normalization, refer to Section 4)
L112
L212
Upper speed limit (LU)

Maximum operating speed of the encoder where valid
position values can still be determined. The data is a
value normalized to the speed output (parameter c114
and c214).
Example: L112 = 6000.0 (i.e. 6000 revolutions/min, must,
if required, be adapted)
L120
L220
Offset, number of rotations

This is used to enter an offset for the number of
revolutions (parameter c116 or c216). This determines
the scaled position actual value.
Example: L120 = ... (must be determined from the
position normalization, refer to Section 6.2.6)
L121
L221
Scaling, position actual value

This normalizes the scaled position actual value (c125 or
c225).
position normalization, refer to Section 4)
L122
L222
Selection, MUL/DIV:
0: The scaling factor L121 (or L221) is multiplied by the
value supplied from AENC.
1: The value supplied from AENC is divided by the
scaling factor L121 (or L221). The scaling factor must be
assigned its inverse value: L121 = 1.0 / L121.
The selection must be made if the scaling factor < 0.1
and otherwise the multiplication would be too inaccurate.
Example: 1: L122 = 0 (the scaling factor L121 = 3.431
determined from the position normalization and can
therefore be multiplied)
Example: 2: L122 = 1 (the original scaling factor L121U =
0.01234 originally determined from the position
normalization, is less than 0.1. The scaling factor to be
entered, L121 = 1.0 / L121U = 81.037.
L123
L223
Offset, position actual value:

The position can only be normalized if a defined point
has the position actual value 0.0. However, if this point is
not at 0.0, then it can be shifted to 0.0 using the offset.
The following applies for AENC 1:
if L122 = 0 : c125 = (c115 + c116 L120) * L121 + L123.
if L122 = 1 : c125 = (c115 + c116 L120) / L121 + L123.
The corresponding is true for AENC 2.
Example: H123 = 10000.0 (reference point 1 for the
position normalization is at 10000.0 mm, however, it
must be 0.0 and is therefore shifted via L123 (offset).
Table 3-8: Settings for absolute value encoders (examples only for AENC1)
INIT parameters
Parameters L100 L106 (or L200 L206) are INIT parameters, i.e. after a value has been
changed, a reset is required (e.g. power off/on).

37
Diagnostics
c114
Speed actual value AENC1, slave
only display
KR4114
c115
Position counter AENC1, slave
only display
KR4115
c116
Revolution counter AENC1, slave
only display
KR4116
c118
Error code AENC1, slave (refer below)
only display
---
c119
Error word AENC1, slave (refer below)
only display
---
c125
Position actual value AENC1, slave

[length units]
only display
KR4125
c214
Speed actual value AENC2, master
only display
KR4214
c215
Position counter AENC2, master
only display
KR4215
c216
Revolution counter AENC2, master
only display
KR4216
c218
Error code AENC2, master (refer below)
only display
---
c219
Error word AENC2, master (refer below)
only display
---
c225
Position actual value AENC2, master

[length units]
only display
KR4225
c300
Differential position, master slave

[length units]
only display
KR4300
Table 3-9: Diagnostic parameters for absolute value encoders
Normalization of
the position actual
values
L301
Adaptation, division differential position

(Y1 = c300/L301)
1.0
---
L302
Adaptation, multiplication differential

position Y2 = Y1 * L302.
This value is saved in connector KR3124
via the filter smoothed with H117 and
transferred to the angular controller.
1.0
---
Table 3-10: Parameter and connectors for absolute value encoders
The position actual values can be represented in length units. A length

unit can be freely selected, e.g. 1 length unit = 1 mm or 1 length unit = 1
m.
Position
normalization
Procedure when normalizing the position (as an example, AENC1).

Parameters L111, L120, L121, L122 and L123 must be defined using the
position normalization.
1. Prerequisites:
L111 = 0.0 (Offset zero position).
L120 = 0.0 (Offset, number of revolutions)
L121 = 1.0 (Scaling factor).
L122 = 0 (Multiplication of the scaling factor).
The defined first position should be, e.g. 10000 mm: L123 = 10000.
These values should first be entered.
The angular synchronism may still not be activated (H172=0), as the
values from the absolute value encoder block have still not been
normalized in this phase and therefore are not correct.
2. Move to the first position (in this case 10,000 mm). The first position
is now used as a virtual zero point.
38

Read-off c115 and enter in L111.
A value of 10000 must now be in c125.
3. Traverse to a second position. The distance lDiff to the first position
must be known.
lDiff = 15014.3 mm; i.e. the second position is 25014.3 mm, as the first
position = 10000 mm.
Read-off parameter c125.
Example 1: If c125 = 26023.5, a scaling factor is obtained
L121 = 15014.3 / (26023.5 10000) = 0.937
This value is greater than 0.1, which means that L122 can be kept at
0.
Example 2: If c125 = 1234567.8, then this results in a scaling factor
L121 = 15014.3 / (1234567.8 10000) = 0.0123
This value is less than 0.1, a correction must be made:
L122 = 1 (it is divided by the scaling factor).
L121 = (1234567.8 10000) / 15014.3 = 81.560
4. Check:
Move to the "second position" position and read-off c125 (in this case,
c125 = 25014.3).
Then move to the "first position" and ready-off c125 (in this case,
c125 = 10000).
5. Proceed in the same way for the master drive (AENC2).
6. After position normalization, the synchronous operation function
can be activated. The slave will now always control itself to track the
master position.
If the position is to shift, then this can be corrected via the offset slave
L123 or offset master L223.
Example:
Actual slave position = 12000.0 mm, display c125 = 12000.5 mm.
Then
L123 = L123old + real position c125 = 10000.0 + 12000.0 12000.5
= 9999.5
This means that the display is c125 = 12000.0
The position actual value must be re-normalized if the encoder type is

changed.
When using the plausibility check (function chart 75 of the SPA440
Operating Instructions) the dn enable (H118 and H119) must be set to a
higher value (e.g. 1.2), if the speed actual value source (parameter H192
or H195) was not configured.
A higher value is not required for the dn enable if the speed actual values
from the master and slave from the absolute value encoder blocks are

39
used. In this particular case, the source parameters should be set as
follows:
H192 = 4114 (speed actual value AENC1, observe the normalization
L110!)
L210!)
Error codes for the
absolute value
encoders
Parameters c118 and c218

This involves erroneous input parameters (configuring error)
communication errors (possibly erroneous encoder specification) or
operating errors.
Bit 0 - 1
Not specified
Bit 2
Timeout
Bit 3
Communications error:
The component of messages (telegrams) with parity/CRC errors is,
on the average, 10% and more.
If the error rate decreases the error bit is automatically reset.
Bit 4
Communication errors:
On the average, a parity or CFC error occurs at each second
position transfer (or more frequently). The error bit is automatically
reset if the error rate decreases.
Bit 5
Not specified
Bit 6
Parity check only possible in the SSI mode
Bit 7
Illegal data coding
Bit 8
Illegal encoder type
Bit 9
Illegal clock cycle frequency
Bit 10
Format error: Contradictory or illegal data
Bit 11
Hardware address illegal or already assigned
Bit 12-15
Not specified
Table 3-11: Error codes for absolute value encoders
Errors words of the

absolute encoder
Monitoring parameters c119 and c219

Error status word of an EnDat encoder. The significance of the error bits
can be taken from the manufacturers data sheets.
Fault word = 0000Hex, as long as no fault is present.
Fault word = FFFFHex, as long as an SSI encoder sends a set interrupt
bit.
Faults, alarms via

CU
40
Faults and alarms can also be sent to the basic unit (CU):
Fault
Significance
Alarm
Binector
F125
Fault AENC2 master
A106
B0212
F126
Fault AENC1 slave
A107
B0211

3.3
Determining the displacement and synchronization
3.3.1
Synchronization
The differential position actual value is determined as a result of the
difference between the pulses which have occurred since the position
difference was reset. This does not indicate the relative position of the
drives to one another! The displacement is determined if the position
of two drives with respect to one another regarding their
synchronizing pulses (e.g. zero pulses) must be identified and
corrected.
Synchronization involves determining and correcting the displacement,
which isnt clear from the position difference, e.g. after the drives have
been rotated with the drive converter powered-down. For instance, it
makes sense to first synchronize the drives after they have been
powered-up, as they are still not in defined positions at the instant of
power-on. Initial synchronization can be automatically initiated (refer to
H168, H169). After this initial synchronization, additional synchronized
operations are required, if errors occur in the position actual value
sensing of the drives, as a result of disturbances for example, wheel slip
(also refer to Section 3.8.1)
NOTE
Task
For angular synchronous control, synchronization and therefore the

availability of synchronizing marks is not a prerequisite (if the
displacement is not specified)!
1. Determining the displacement from the position of the synchronizing
marks, whereby a correction value for the differential position actual
value is generated,
2. Correcting the differential position actual value by correcting the
displacement.
In principle, it is adequate to synchronize just once. Continuous
synchronization is mandatory under the following conditions:
The (pulse number) ratio cannot be precisely entered. While fractions
can be precisely set, irrational ratios (e.g. ) cannot be precisely
entered !
Encoder pulses can be lost
Closed-loop position control of a traversing gear (refer to Section3.8.1)
should be executed. As the pulse encoders are mounted on the motor,
they do not emulate the actual position of the crane (position actual
values). For wheel slip, position actual value sensing drive errors
occur, which can only be corrected by synchronizing.
Enable
Synchronization, i. e. correcting an displacement which may have been

identified, is realized by activating a synchronizing command (H174). The
synchronizing command must be inhibited for applications which do not
require synchronization.
Synchronization
sequence

41
The differential position actual value can be corrected using the
calculated displacement, either once within a sampling time, or distributed
over several sampling times.
Directly setting the displacement
The differential position actual value is set directly to a correction value,

which is retrieved from the position of the synchronizing marks, if a
synchronizing command is present, and after at least one synchronizing
pulse has been received.
Thus, the angular controller receives a system deviation, generated from
the displacement calculation, which must be corrected. As there is a time
delay between the instant that the displacement is determined, and the
instant that the displacement is set per software, then the difference
pulses, which are received during this time, must be taken into account.
This is possible when configuring the speed sensing blocks by
appropriately connecting-up the setting inputs and selecting specific
setting modes. The differential position actual value is corrected, so that
no pulses are lost between determining the displacement and correcting
the differential position actual value.
Successively setting the displacement in n sampling times
When the displacement is set once, this can result in large steps in the
differential position actual value at the angular synchronous controller and
can even result in overshoot. Steps such as these can be avoided by
successively setting the displacement. Correction is then step-by-step, i.e.
in n sampling times by the correction pulse number (H093):
n = displacement/H093.
Correction pulse
number
NOTE
3.3.2
H093 is used to define how many pulses of the defined displacement per
sampling time should be corrected. If the angular controller is inactive,
then the differential position value would assume the displacement
setpoint after n sampling cycles. In order that the displacement correction
isnt too high, the correction pulse number H093 should be set to
extremely low values (typically =1). The value of the correction pulse
number is subtracted from the differential position actual value in each
sampling time until synchronism is achieved.
A synchronizing operation, started once is executed until synchronism
is achieved (correction value is 0); this can no longer be interrupted !
Determining the displacement
Synchronizing
pulse number
The number of encoder pulses between two synchronizing pulses, the socalled synchronizing pulse number, must be entered in order to determine
the displacement actual value (refer to Fig. 3-3). The synchronizing
pulse numbers from the master- and slave drives are entered using
parameters H100 and H102.
If a small deviation occurs between the entered and actual pulse number,
e.g. as a result of an encoder error, then this is corrected by the
synchronization.
42

Master drive, pulses, pulse edges

Track A
Track B
Pulse
edges
Synchronizing
pulse, master
Synchronizing pulse number, master H100 (in this case: 52)
Slave drive, pulses, pulse edges
Track A
Track B
Pulse
edges
Synchronizing
pulse, slave
Synchronizing pulse number, slave H102 (in this case: 104)
Fig. 3-3
Explanation of the synchronizing pulse number
Operating mode
The displacement actual value can be determined once if the master- and
slave drives pass over the two synchronizing marks at least once. This
can be determined in two ways:
"continuous (H091=0) displacement determination:
As soon as the displacement actual value has been determined once, i. e.
both synchronizing marks have been passed once, then an displacement
actual value (d094, d095) is calculated each time a synchronizing mark is
passed. The number of synchronizing pulses passed is counted and is
evaluated with the synchronizing pulse numbers (H100 and H102). This
allows the actual displacement to be determined, even if the associated
synchronizing pulse of the other drive is missing. Several revolutions of
the machine parts to be synchronized may be included in the
displacement actual value. For a synchronizing operation, several
synchronizing pulses which are passed are corrected (revolutions).
This is the default mode.
Retrigger displacement calculation (H091=1):
When synchronizing, correction is only made within a synchronizing
pulse period. This corresponds, for example, for a zero pulse during one
encoder revolution.
The Retrigger operating mode should be used, if
1. if, for technology reasons it is sufficient or it makes more sense to only
synchronize within one revolution, or
2. if the synchronizing pulse number can only be determined with
insufficient accuracy. In this case, both synchronizing pulses are
required in order to determine the precise displacement.

43
In order to determine a new displacement, both synchronizing marks
must be again passed. The number of synchronizing marks which are
passed is not counted. If an displacement of several revolutions is to be
obtained, then this is lost the next time the displacement is calculated.
NOTE
In the Retrigger mode, the danger exists, that the angular control
loop becomes unstable if the dynamic performance is set too high and
for low-frequency synchronizing pulses. This is because if the two
synchronizing pulses occur one after the another, alternating positive
and negative displacement actual values could be determined, which
the angular controller would attempt to correct
Example: +10 would be obtained from an displacement of -370
Edge evaluation
The displacement is determined when the synchronizing pulse edges

are received using the position actual values from the master- and slave
drives. Using the example of the switching cam in Fig. 3-4, this
corresponds to edge a for clockwise direction of rotation or edge b for
counter-clockwise direction of rotation.
The synchronizing circuit has a so-called direction of rotationdependent edge evaluation, i.e. synchronization is realized for both
directions of rotations at the same edge of the switching cam and more
precisely, at the front (positive) edge of the synchronizing pulse when
rotating clockwise (in Fig. 3-4, edge a). When rotating counter-clockwise,
synchronization is realized at the falling edge of the synchronizing pulse (i.
e. at edge a).
Proximity
switch
L
S
S=switching cams, length L with edges a and b
b
a
RL
Fig. 3-4
Command type
Resetting
displacement
calculation
NOTE
44
LL
Determining the displacement and synchronizing for clockwise- and counterclockwise directions of rotation
The synchronizing command can be parameterized for either signal levelor edge control using parameter H092. The synchronizing command must
be 1 for at least the time it takes to determine the displacement. For
signal level control, the displacement is corrected as long as the signal is
active (logical 1); for edge control, correction is only executed once after a
positive (01) edge. The displacement isnt suddenly corrected, but it is
corrected with a pulse number, which can be set using parameter H093,
at each sampling time.
Resetting the displacement calculation is realized by
using the reset position control signal (refer to Chart 90)
by enabling the angular controller
The displacement calculation should only be reset briefly when
required, for example, when the drive starts. After this, it is

automatically controlled by the internal monitoring function
The displacement at the instant that at least one synchronizing pulse is
received, is calculated using the function block Displace in the CFC Chart
SYNC02.
Displacement
calculation
NOTES
The distance between two synchronizing operations may not exceed

231 quadrupled pulses.
The time between two synchronizing operations must be greater
than 4.8 ms (for safety reasons, 4x sampling time for a basic
sampling time of 1.2 ms)
The synchronizing pulse must be inactive for T > 1.6 ms, i. e. low
(for safety, 2x sampling time for a basic sampling time of 1.2 ms).
Synchronizing
example
Master- and slave drive with pulse encoders mounted on the motor shaft.
The pulse encoders generate two pulse series, displacement through 90
and zero pulses.
The drives should be synchronized, so that the zero pulses (synchronizing
pulses) are always simultaneously received. The pulse trains would look
like this on a suitable plotter or oscilloscope:
Pulses, slave
Track A
Track B
Synchronizing pulse, slave
Position act. value, slave

Pulses, master
Track A
Track B
Synchronizing pulse, master
Positon act. value, master

Synchronizing
command
(edge-dependent)
Determine offset
Correction duration
Fig. 3-5 Calculating the displacement and synchronization

45
3.3.3
Noise-immune synchronization
An adjustable enable threshold is used to suppress multiple edges (switch
bounce) and suppress disturbances on the synchronizing pulse cable.
Erroneous synchronizing pulses, caused by switch bounce or
disturbances, can have, among others, the following results:
inaccuracy in the angular position,
the synchronizing control sense could be reversed, as the rigid
sequence of synchronizing pulses is interrupted (e.g. master-,
slave-, master drive),
the slave drive could run without any closed-loop control.
Thus, the synchronizing pulse cables must be especially carefully
routed and shielded.
The following diagrams should show the behavior at contact-bounce and
the resulting evaluation.
Signals at the T400 terminals

Switching
threshold
Internal evaluation
Fig. 3-6
Signal characteristic with clear pulse edges, e.g. for zero pulses from pulse encoders
Synchronizing pulse at the T400 terminal

Switching
threshold
Te
> 0,8
Internal evaluation
Fig. 3-7
NOTE
Noisy signal characteristics, e.g. for proximity switches.
Disturbances and noise which occur in the sampling time are

automatically suppressed when processed in the sampling time !
Faults which occur between two leading edges of the synchronizing
pulses can be suppressed by entering an enable threshold when a
specific position actual value is reached. The synchronizing pulses are
46

only evaluated again after the position actual value exceeds the threshold
for the master- (H107) or slave drive (H105) (refer to Fig. 3-8).
Calculating the limit value of the enable thresholds (H105, H107):
1.) If the situation is non-critical, the enable threshold can be set to
approx. 95% of the synchronizing pulse numbers (parameters H100
and H102).
If the synchronizing pulses are noisy or there is the danger, that at high
speeds, an enable threshold for the enable minimum duration tmin (refer
to Fig. 3-8) is not maintained, then enable threshold d can be calculated
using the following formula:
d = SS (1
t min+ SF TS
);
TS
d>0
Whereby:
SS
Number of pulse edges between 2 synchronizing pulses
TS
Time between 2 synchronizing pulses at the maximum speed
tmin
Minimum enable time. Time period where synchronization is

permitted; calculation: e.g.: 4 T1 (4 base sampling time = 4.8
ms)
SF
Safety factor (0.05 to 0.1) if the synchronizing pulse comes earlier

due to mechanical inaccuracy.
Limit value d designates the enable threshold for the synchronizing pulse.
It defines, how many edges (pulses 4) must be counted after
synchronization (i. e. how high the position actual value must be) before
the next synchronizing operation is enabled. Limit value d must be
separately calculated for master- and slave drive.
Bounce time ( typical 1 ms .. 10 ms)
tsyn
Signal at the T400

terminal
Switching
threshold
Enable
TS
Inhibit duration f (threshold)
Enabled
tmin
Inhibited
Internal
evaluation
Fig. 3-8:
Effect of the enable control (only one drive is shown)

47
3.3.4
Synchronism achieved
The threshold for the Synchronism reached signal can be set using
parameter H103. A high signal is output at digital output terminal 46 when
synchronism is reached.
Conditioned actual
displacement
Dynamic fluctuations in the angular difference, which are mirrored in the

actual displacement, are taken into account by correcting the displacement actual value by the differential angular actual value. This corrected
actual displacement is known as the conditioned actual displacement.
Synchronism is reached, if the conditioned actual displacement has been
determined and this is zero or is a selected displacement setpoint
(including a possible synchronizing displacement setpoint which is
dependent on the direction of rotation), i. e.
conditioned actual displacement = displacement setpoint H103.
Significance
Par.
Explanation
d056 Actual displacement setpoint
Display parameter
H091 Trigger condition, actual displacement

sensing
0
1
=
=
continuous
retrigger
H092 Edge evaluation, synchronizing command
0
1
=
=
level controlled (continuous)

edge-controlled (once)
H093 Correction pulse number
Select the lowest possible value (preferably 1);

this should be increased, if the displacement, in spite
of low-frequency synchronizing pulses, must be
quickly corrected, or if required, for the Retrigger
operating mode
d094 Displacement actual value
Display parameter;
also includes, if relevant, a set displacement setpoint
d095 Actual displacement - differential position

act. value
Display parameter
d096 Actual displacement sensing, error

identification:
Bit 0 = Overflow SSslave
Bit 1 = Overflow SSmaster
Bit 2 = Overflow SSslave (H102)
Bit 3 = Overflow SSmaster (H100)
Bit 8 = Overflow displacement- diff. pos.
actual value
Display parameter
SS = Sum of the synchronizing pulses
H100 Synchronizing pulse number, master
Pulse edges (pulses *4) of the master drive, which are

received between 2 synchronizing pulses
H102 Synchronizing pulse number, slave
Pulse edges (pulses *4) of the slave drive, which are

H103 Response threshold, synchronism reached
If the actual displacement = displacement setpoint

H103, synchronism has been reached.
H105 Enable threshold, slave synchronization
To suppress the effects of contact bounce and

suppressing disturbances on the zero pulse cable.
H107 Enable threshold, master synchronization
Same as H105
Table 3-12 Parameters for displacement sensing/synchronization
48

3.4

Closed-loop angular synchronous control refers to a cascading speed
control loop with a higher-level angular control. The angular controller has
the task to control the relative angular position between the master- and
slave drive to zero or to an displacement setpoint. Angular differences,
which can be obtained due to different load levels and speed fluctuations
are corrected. The implementation of an angular controller is shown in
Function Chart 110 (Appendix).
Principle
3.4.1
Enable signals
The angular controller is enabled as a result of the following two
conditions
Principle
External enable, angular controller enable (H173, H131,H139), and

Enable threshold of the angular controller (H118)
The angular controller is first enabled. The angular control (d109) is
actually enabled by automatically monitoring the speed actual value of the
slave. An enable threshold defines the margin between the speed
setpoint of the slave and speed actual value of the slave. As soon as the
enable threshold is reached, the angular controller is automatically
switched-in. The displacement calculation is simultaneously reset
together with the position actual values of the slave/master. This avoids
unnecessary overshoot and non-stable rotary motion of the closed-loop
angular synchronous control if there is a considerable speed difference
between the master and slave (e. g: when powering-up or powering-down
a slave while the master is running).
Flying
synchronization
3.4.2
The SPA440 standard software package permits this automatic

monitoring function to also synchronize a stationary slave with a flying
master, and to establish angular synchronism. Before the slave speed
actual value approaches its setpoint, or an enable threshold is reached,
the angular controller becomes inactive. The displacement calculation
and slave/master position are simultaneously reset. Only the speed
control operates during this time. Synchronization is only executed after
the angular controller has been actually enabled.
Displacement setpoint
A shift between the relative angular position of the master- and slave
drives can be set using the displacement setpoint. If synchronization was
not realized, the displacement setpoint refers to the angular drive position
at the instant that the differential position actual value was last set, e.g.
that the angular controller was enabled. If synchronization was realized,
the displacement setpoint refers to the synchronized angular position.
The displacement setpoint is defined as the number of slave-encoder
pulse edges (pulses 4), which the slave drive leads with respect to the
master drive. The limits can be set using parameters H054, H055.
Examples:
Encoder pulse number, slave = 1000 (H010)

49
The slave drive should lead the master drive by 0.5 revolutions
displacement setpoint = 0.5 * (1000 * 4) = 2000 pulses
The displacement setpoint is fed to the angular controller via a rampfunction generator. The ramp-up time should be selected to be as high as
possible (recommended: 5 s to 10 s).
NOTE
Direction of
rotation-dependent
synchronous
displacement
The displacement setpoint, in the displacement calculation =

retrigger (H091=1) mode, should be a maximum of half of a revolution
of the parts which are to be synchronized (safety-/control margin, refer
to Section 3.3.1)
It is possible to provide an displacement setpoint depending on the
direction of rotation. Generally, independent of the direction of rotation,
the same edge of the synchronizing signal is always used (i. e. the same
encoder position). Various displacements can be added to the speed
setpoint using parameters H062 to H064 depending on the direction of
rotation of the master and slave.
Param.
Master speed
Slave speed
H062
Positive
Positive
Slave lags
H063
Negative
Positive
Slave lags
H064
Positive
Negative
Slave leads
H065
Negative
Negative
Slave leads
Table 3-13
3.4.3
Displacement for positive

value
Direction of rotation-dependent synchronizing displacement setpoint
Angular controller
The angular controller can be operated as P- or PI controller (H110).
Optionally, the P gain can be adapted as a function of ratio .
Smoothing,
differential position
actual value
The differential position actual value is smoothed using a PT1 element.

The smoothing time is set using parameter H117. The smoothed
differential position actual value is used as actual value for the angular
controller.
Adapting the P gain
The angular controller provides a supplementary speed setpoint for the

speed controller at its output. For high speed ratios , an overproportional high supplementary speed setpoint is demanded and at low
speeds, an appropriately below-proportional low supplementary speed
setpoint. This non-linear interdependency is simulated using a polygon
characteristic (refer to Fig. 3-9),
The polygon characteristic sets the P gain, dependent on the ratio. The
characteristic linearly interpolated between transition points A and B.
The P gain should be adapted if the ratio is changed in operation by
factors of approximately > 1.5 or < 0.75.
50

KP
B
H113 KP_UE
H114 KP_UE_O
-H115
H116
ue_KP_O
-H116
No adaption for:
H115
ue_KP
H115 = H116 = 0
H113 = H114
Fig. 3-9
Adapting the P gain for the angular controller
The adaption values are determined empirically using the usual

techniques:
1. Starting from the standard setting (no adaption), the highest ratio is
selected. This is entered for ue_KP, and the control should be
optimized for this value (KP_UE).
2. The lowest ratio is then selected. This is entered at ue_KP_0, and the
control should be optimized for this value (KP_UE_0).
Example:
Parameter list
Ratio range: 0.2 to 4.0

H116
=
ue_KP_0
H114
=
KP_UE_0
H115
=
ue_KP
H113
=
KP_UE
=
=
=
=
0.2
3
4.0
5
Table 3-14 lists the parameters used in the angular controller. The
structure is illustrated in Chart 110.
Parameter
Significance
H052
Ramp-up time, displacement setpoint
H053
Ramp-down time, displacement

setpoint
H054
Setpoint limiting, positive
Displacement setpoint limiting
H055
Setpoint limiting, negative
d056
Actual displacement setpoint
Display parameter
H062-H065
Direction of rotation-dependent
displacement setpoint
Synchronizing displacement setpoint (refer to

Table 3-13)
H066
Fixed setpoint
Default 0
H110
Angular controller as P controller
(0 / 1 = no / yes = = PI / P controller)
H111
Integral action time TN
I controller
H112
Limit value, angular controller
Positive and negative output limiting (as a %

of the rated speed)
H113
P gain, KP_UE
P gain for a high ratio > ue_KP

Explanation
51
Parameter
Significance
Explanation
H114
P gain, KP_UE_0
For a low ratio
H115
Limit value, ue_KP
From a P gain = KP_UE
H116
Limit value, ue_KP_0
From a P gain = KP_UE_0
H117
Smoothing, differential pos. act. value
Smoothing time
H118
Threshold for angular controller enable Reduce for a low speed setpoint (default 0.1)
and monitoring the slave speed
d120
Output, angular controller
Display parameter
d121
System deviation, angular controller
Display parameter
d122
I component, angular controller
Display parameter
d109
Status of the angular controller enable
Also available at digital terminal 48
Table 3-14
3.5
Parameters for the angular controller
External or internal
The closed-loop speed control is either external using the connected

drive converter or internal on the T400 processor module. The Closedloop speed control external or internal option is used to select one of
these alternatives, which can be controlled using parameter H140 (H140
= 1 internal on the T400).
Parameter H140 = 0 is the default setting, i. e. the closed-loop speed
control is implemented in the drive converter of the slave drive. It receives
a speed setpoint via the communications interface to the basic drive.
The speed controller structure is illustrated in function chart 120.
3.5.1
Ratio
Ratio is defined as the ratio between the speed of the master drive
referred to the speed of the slave drive. The actual ratio comprises three
parts (refer to Chart 80):
Ratio (d060)
Relative change of the ratio (d061)
Supplementary ratio (this is added)
Relative change
A ratio, entered as absolute value is used, for example, to set stretching
factors and compression factors for material webs in a user-friendly
fashion. The absolute ratio is multiplied by a value, which is supplied from
a source which can be selected using H048, H068. If this factor has the
value 1.0, the selected ratio is not changed.
Supplementary
ratio
52
A fixed ratio can be set using parameter H047; the product of d060 with
d061 is added to this value.

3.5.2

The master speed setpoint is the speed setpoint at which the master
drive should rotate. The speed setpoint for the slave drive is calculated
from the speed master setpoint after smoothing (H072; refer to Chart
115) and after dividing by the ratio. This is fed to the speed control which
is superimposed on an angular control.
The master speed setpoint source is selected using a parameter (H070,
H071). The setpoint smoothing (in ms) is set using parameter H072. This
is recommended, if the master speed actual value is used as master
setpoint (setting, H070 = 15).
NOTE
If the angular controller or synchronization is used, then the slave

master setpoint with respect to the master may only be changed using
ratio .
The angular difference, which occurs as a result of the ratio, does not
appear as differential position value, so that the angular controller does
not have to work to correct it.
3.5.3
System deviations from angular synchronism, which can occur when the
master speed setpoint changes quickly, can be reduced using the inertia
compensation function. The inertia compensation acts as pre-control
value for the speed controller.
The sources for the inertia compensation can be selected using
The following drawing clearly illustrates the characteristics of the DT1
element and the influence of the parameters:
X(t)
H083
H082
Y(t)
t
H082
Fig. 3-10
Setting:
Step response of the DT1 element to illustrate the use of parameters H082
and H083
H082 generally lies in the range between 100 ms and 500 ms. The
magnitude of the differential element output quantity is set using
parameter H083.

53
3.5.4
Speed controller Kp adaption

The speed controller is a PI controller. If extremely low speeds (n* < 0.05
nrated) are used, then we recommend a speed setpoint-dependent
adaption of the P gain. This can be implemented using an adjustable
polygon characteristic.
The characteristic is linearly interpolated between the corner points A and
B.
KP
A
H142 KP
H141 KP_O
B
n
-H143
Fig. 3-11
-H144
H144
n_KP_O
H143
n_KP
P gain adaption for the speed controller
The adaption values should be determined using the usual techniques

and using the following experiments:
1. Starting from the standard setting (no adaption), the lowest speed
should be determined, where the already optimized drive, manifests
the required control quality.
2. Then, for n_KP_0, the value n_KP_0 = n_KP/2 is approximately
defined.
3. The speed is entered as under 2. and approached. The closed-loop
control is then optimized with KP_0.
4. The values for KP_0 and n_KP_0 must still, if required, be varied.
3.5.5
Jogging
When jogging is enabled, a jog setpoint is added to the master setpoint.
This means that the slave speed can be changed with respect to the
master speed, and it is possible to take-up or slack-off with respect to the
master. Jogging is not practical in the closed-loop angular control
mode, except for test purposes, as the angular controller acts to oppose
the jog setpoint.
The jog setpoint is set as fixed value using parameter H130. The source
of the jog enable is defined using H171, H208 (refer to Chart 115).
54

3.5.6
Parameters to the speed controller
Param.
Significance
Explanation
H040
H048
H070
Multiplexer, ratio
Multiplexer, relative ratio
Multiplexer, master speed setpoint
H072
Smoothing, master speed setpoint
H080
Multiplexer, inertia compensation
Only required due to compatibility to V2.01.
H130
Jog setpoint
Selectable supplementary speed value
H132
Speed setpoint limiting, positive
H133
Speed setpoint limiting, negative
H134
Speed controller output limiting, positive
H135
Speed controller output limiting, negative
Reference to the speed controller on T400
H140
Speed controller calculated on T400
0/1 == no/yes
H141
KP: P gain
H142
H143
H144
H145
d150
d152
KP_0: P gain
Limit value for KP
Limit value for KP_0
Integral action time, speed controller
Speed controller output
Actual basic drive setpoint
At high speeds
n > n_KP
At low speeds
Speed n_KP, from the P gain = KP
Speed n_KP_0, up to the P gain = KP_0
Default 200 ms
Effective at H140=1
At H140=1, d152=d150
At H140=0, d152= speed setpoint
d153
H171
KP speed controller
Jog enable
Table 3-15

Parameters to the speed controllers

55
3.6
Open-loop control
In order to control open-loop angular synchronism, in addition to the
setpoint, five control signals have to be handled (the control signals in this
documentation are always written in italics):
displacement reset
reset position
angular controller enable
synchronizing commend
jog enable
The sources of these control signals can be selected per multiplexer
(refer to H170 to H174), or can be connected-up as required using BICO
connection.
Several options are possible to generate control words for the basic drive
or for output via the communications interface:
Fixed values can entered

Control words can be transferred from one interface to another (e. g.
control word 1 from CB to control word 1 CU)
The control word can be selected bit by bit (e. g. by combining a CB
control word with digital inputs)
Also refer to function charts 170 to 570.
3.7
Faults, alarm and status display
3.7.1
General information on faults and alarms

Fault- and alarm statuses contain various monitoring quantities (Table
3-16). The quantities, which are to be transferred to the basic drive as
alarm or fault are selected using the two masks H003 or H004.
If at least one of the bits, enabled per mask, is set to 1, then the
associated digital output is activated (fault, terminal 49; alarm, terminal
51).
In the factory setting, all faults and alarms are de-activated, i. e. H003 =
H004 = 0.
Fault
56
The basic drive is fault tripped if a bit is set in the fault word and it is
appropriately enabled with mask parameter H003 (behaves the same as
OFF2, i. e. the equipment is powered-down and the drive coasts-down).
The fault is saved in the basic drive. As soon as the cause has been
resolved, i.e. the associated bit has become 0, then the fault can be
acknowledged on the basic drive. The fault cannot be acknowledged as
long as a fault exists (=1), and is transferred to the basic drive via the
dual port RAM!

When appropriately enabled with mask parameter H004, alarms are
displayed as appropriate numbers on the operator panels. They do not
influence the drive. They cannot be acknowledged, but can be deleted
automatically when the cause has been removed, as soon as the
appropriate bit has become 0.
Alarms
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Monitoring
Time overflow COMBOARD (correct data have not been received)

Time overflow peer-to-peer (correct data have not been received)
Speed controller at its limit
External fault
Master speed not plausible (deviation w. r. t. the master setpoint is too high)
Slave speed not plausible (deviation w. r. t. the setpoint is too high)
Error, speed sensing, master (illegal parameterization, refer to d021)
Error, speed sensing, slave (illegal parameterization, refer to d120)
Table 3-16
Fault
Alarm
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
A097
A098
A099
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
Monitoring functions and associated faults and alarms
Suppressing the
fault/alarm
message
Fault- and alarm messages can be suppressed using selectable masks.

The appropriate monitoring function is evaluated if a bit in the mask is set
to 1.
Example: H003 = 16#0021
H003 = 0000 0000 0010 0001
Bit 0 = 1
Bit 4 = 1
(input with CFC)

(digital input with OP1S)
time monitoring COMBOARD (watchdog) can initiate a fault

external fault can initiate a fault
We recommend that when commissioning the basic drive, the fault- and
alarm messages of the T400 are de-activated using parameters H003
and H004. When the system is operated, these monitoring functions
should be re-enabled.
3.7.2
Monitoring the communication coupling
Principle
The communication monitoring function checks, whether in a definable

period, a valid telegram (and error-free) has been received. If this is not
the case, the associated error bit is set. If valid telegrams are again
received after an error, the error bit is again reset.
Note
In order to make the first commissioning steps easier, so that they are not
hindered by non-relevant fault trips, when the angular synchronous
software package is supplied, the communication errors and alarms are
suppressed per mask (H003, H004).
If communications are used, the associated status bits to initiate a
fault must be re-enabled!
Power-on time limit

57
After power-up, it must be assumed that it will take several seconds until
the communication channels become operational. Thus, the so-called
power-on time limit is decisive for this particular phase (peer H360;
COMBOARD H462).
Time limit for cyclic
operation
As soon as the initialization delay time after power-on has expired, or

already valid telegrams have been received, the cyclic monitoring time for
the telegram error identification becomes effective (watchdog). This is
defined using parameter H361 (peer), H496 (COMBOARD). For this
monitoring time, for CB1 (PROFIBUS), if necessary, the number of nodes
must be taken into account, as the reception of telegrams depends on the
number of nodes (stations) and the send clock cycle.
3.8
Application example
3.8.1
Synchronous operation and synchronizing using as an example a

gantry crane
The following traversing gear of a container crane can be used as a
specific example for the necessity of having synchronization.
Task description
Both sides of the crane traversing gear (fixed legs-master drive and
moving legs-slave drive) should operate with position synchronous control
and in synchronism. This prevents the crane running skew in the rails
along the quay.
Necessity
Synchronization is required in this case, as the pulse encoders are

mounted on the motor and therefore do not directly represent the
movement of the crane (position actual value), but instead, the position of
the wheels (as a result of slip, wheel slip, etc.). If the wheels slip, then
errors can occur in the drive actual value sensing resulting in errors in the
position difference as controlled variable between the two drives.
Task
The task of synchronization is to correct the above mentioned errors. The

position actual values of the two drives are set to defined, actual position
values when fixed synchronizing marks are passed. The difference
between the two drives, after the second drive has passed its mark, is
known as displacement. This displacement is the real position difference
between the two drives, which must be corrected.
As it involves a linear-axis application, synchronization is always realized
when the position value of the master and slave is approx. 0.0. Thus, in
this case, synchronization must always be enabled. This means that the
position-dependent synchronization must be de-activated (H105 = H107 =
0.0).
Bero proximity
switch
58
To realize this, the position actual value is set to zero on both sides when
the synchronizing mark is passed - Bero proximity switch 3. The position
marks are mechanically located and precisely aligned along the crane
track.

If the crane traversing gear arrives at the synchronizing mark in a skew
position, then at first, the position actual value of side 1 is set to zero, and
then the position actual value of side 2. The position actual values of the
master and slave are therefore corrected.
Displacement
The pulses, which are sensed between these two events, represent the
displacement. The displacement is added to the position difference (in
small steps), whereby the angular controller identifies a position
difference which is the same as the displacement. The skew position is
resolved after the position difference has been corrected.
Coarse signal mark

Fine signal mark
Synchronizing marks
Motion direction
Crane traversing
gear in the skew
position
Side 1
master drive
Fig. 3-12
Fine signal
evaluation
Coarse signal
evaluation
(BERO)
Side 2
slave drive
Closed-loop synchronous operation of a crane traversing gear

59
Parameters and connectors
4.1
Parameter handling
Definition
Parameters are used to
visualize internal quantities (monitoring parameters)

to change fixed values
to change connections (BICO parameters)
All of the parameters which refer to the function and setting of the
technology module are called technology parameters. The technology
parameters for the closed-loop synchronous control appear in the function
charts with the following symbols:
Rated speed
(1500 RPM)
H123
Display text
Pre-setting
Offset actual value

d094
Parameter number
Parameter which can be changed
Fig. 4-1
Monitoring parameters
Representing parameters in the function charts
When changing parameters, it should be observed that there are

initialization parameters, which only become effective after the T400 has
re-started.
In addition to technology parameters, there are so-called basic drive
parameters for the drive converters used. These should be taken,
together with the associated function charts of the documentation of the
drive converter used.
It should be noted, that the parameters are selected by entering a number
(e.g. at the drive converter operator panel). However, for the display, the
most significant position is replaced by a letter, which is intended to
symbolize as to whether it involves a quantity which can be changed or
not changed.
Example
Value
Number 1956 is entered to select technology parameter H956.

Significance
range
Parameter display (example)

can be changed
cannot be
changed
0 ... 999
Lower parameter range of the drive

converter
P123
r123
1000 ... 1999
Lower parameter range of the T400
H123
d123
2000 ... 2999
Upper parameter range of the drive

converter
U123
n123
3000 ... 3999
Upper parameter range of the T400
L123
c123
Table 4-1 Parameter number specification
60

4.1.1
BICO parameters
Contrary to (value) parameters, BICO parameters define connections.
This means that parameters specify a fixed value at an input, and on the
other hand, BICO parameters select the signal source, which is
connected to the input. This signal source must be defined in the form of
a connector. The BICO parameter appears as a parameter in the symbol
of a BICO input (refer to Fig. 4-2). The source and target of a BICO
connection must have the same data type. This means that digital
quantities (BOOL) cannot, for example, be connected to floating-point
inputs. Thus, for the data type used, there are different symbols in the
function charts for connectors and BICO inputs.
Changes not
possible
Remedy:
Re-wiring work demands memory space if new connections are to be

generated, and if it involves connections between various time sectors. If
the available memory space can no longer accept connection changes,
then this can be identified when the required re-connection is no longer
possible (OP1S display jumps to the old connector value).
Rest the module (power OFF - ON). Memory space which is not used is
enabled when the module restarts.
Connector
name
Connector number
BICO parameter
S.enable
Connecting:
BOOLean values
B0123
H681 (0123)
B (120,3)
Status
bit_XY
PZD_123
S.control
word
L430 (2541)
K (200,8)
CU_DoppelXY
S.double
word
P501 (5021)
KK (60,2)
Data type symbol

16-bit values
32-bit values
Floating-point values
K2541
KK5021
KR3155
Speed
4.1.2
Number of the
connected connector
(factory setting)
Chart, sector of the
source for the factory
setting
S.speed actual
value
L321 (3155)
KR (330,1)
Connectors
Fig. 4-2
BICO input name
BICO inputs
Symbols for connectors and BICO inputs
Resources to adapt the software and commissioning

Various resources are available to adapt the standard software package
to particular applications. The resources essentially differ by the
intervention possibilities, which are shown in the following table. The
parameter name, displayed at OP1S, is a maximum of 16 characters
long, and it is possible to toggle between German and English using
initialization parameter H000 (reset is required after a change has been
made!).

61
Name
Explanation
PMU
Input field for all MASTERDRIVES- and DC Master units (with 4-digit display)
OP1S
Operator device with numerical keypad and 4-line text display; can be directly connected to
the PMU.
SIMOVIS
Start-up- and parameterizing software for the PC (Windows). It provides an oscilloscope

function for MASTERDRIVES MC.
CFC
Graphic engineering tool which is used to generate the standard software package. It is
connected to the service interface of the T400.
Prerequisite: STEP 7; D7-SYS
Service-IBS Simple start-up- and diagnostics tool for PC (DOS). It can also be used as Telemaster for
(Serviceremote diagnostics.
start-up)
Table 4-2
Adaption- and start-up tools
Intervention
CFC
PMU
OP1S
SIMOVIS
Service-IBS
View value
Any
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Any
Change value
Any
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Any
Change connection
Any
BICO
BICO
BICO
Any
Insert block
Yes
No
No
No
No
Delete block
Yes
No
No
No
No
Change execution
sequence
Yes
No
No
No
No
Change cycle time for

processing
Yes
No
No
No
No
Duplicate software
Yes
No
No
No
No
Duplicate the complete

parameter set
No
No
No
Yes
(Macro)
Documentation
Charts
No
No
Parameter
lists
No
Table 4-3
For several parameter types, as a result of the limited resolution at input

or due to conversion operations, rounding-off errors can be expected.
Further, in some cases, more decimal places are offered than can
actually be set.
I/O can be read and changed using CFC online or the simple IBS
program (start-up program) (TELEMASTER) via the T400. This allows
parameters to be influenced.
Changing
connections:
If a connection between function blocks is required, which is not intended

as BICO connection, then this can be simply realized using the basic IBS
program (TELEMASTER). In this case, the complete path name (CFC
software package) of the source and target are required in the following
form:
CFC-chart name.Block name.Connector name
62


To realize this, the parameter list, in addition to the parameter description,
contains the complete I/O designation, which can be used as source or
target for a connection.
If a connection is changed using the simple IBS, this is not identified as
a parameter change, and therefore cannot be read-out with SIMOVIS.
This means that it cannot be transferred to any other modules with
angular synchronism!
Caution:
4.2
Parameter list
The parameters used in the standard angular synchronism software
package are listed on the following pages. The list has the following
format:
Parameter
Description
Data
Hxyz (Lxyz)
Parameter
designation
Parameter description for a technology parameter which can be set

Parameter with the supplement initialization parameter, means when this
parameter is changed, the change only becomes effective after the power
supply voltage has been powered-up again.
Chart name.Block name.Connection
Value, factory setting

type
Min lower limit
Max upper limit
Chart chart, sector
Parameter description for a visualization parameter (cannot be set).

Letters d or c symbolize the displacement values
1000 (d) or 3000 (c). This should be taken into account when selecting
the parameter with OP1(S).
Type
Initialization
parameter
dxxx (cxyz)
Parameter
designation
Chart chart, sector

Table 4-4
Listing type for input- or display parameters
Type
abbrev.
Type
BO
BOOL
INT
WORD
Significance
Logical quantity
Integer number; signed
Integer number; unsigned; hexadecimal and binary
displayed at OP1(S)
Example, display
on OP1S
Value range,
OP1S
0, 1
-12345
-32768 ...32767
2F03hex
0000 ... FFFF
0010111100000011
(0 ... 65535)
DI
DINT
Double integer number (32 bit); signed
123456789
2147483647
REAL
Floating-point number. Input using OP1(S) is

restricted to 6 places before the decimal point and 3
places after the decimal point, whereby the range is
limited to 199999.999.
123456.789
2147483.647
SD
SDTIME
Time in [ms]
200.000 ms
0 ... 2147483.647
ms
N2
INT
N4
DINT
Table 4-5
16-bit fixed point quantity for drive converter comp.

Value range: -32768 ... 32767 => -200% ... 200%
As for N2; however 32-bit resolution:
16#40000000 = 1073741824 => 100%
Data types and range for parameterization with OP1S

63
Table 4-6
Parameters of the SPA440 standard software package
Parameter
Description
Data
H000
0 = German
1 = English
Value: 0
Type: I
Language select
Initialization
parameter
d001
Software Type
IF_CU.DRIVE.PLA
Identification of the angular synchronism, standard software package
on T400 = 440
Type: I
Chart: 40, 3
PAR_GER.SW_TYP.Y
d002
Actual software version (2.020)
Software Version
PAR_GER.SWVERS.Y
Type: R
Chart: 40, 3
H003
Fault messages are enabled bitwise
Error Mask
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
COMBOARD, receive faulted

Peer-to-peer, receive faulted
External fault (refer to H665)
Master speed outside the tolerance (refer to H119)
Slave speed outside the tolerance (refer to H118)
Error, speed sensing, master (refer to d020)
Error, speed sensing, slave (refer to d021)
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 160, 4
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
Bits 9 ..15 can be optionally assigned. In the default setting, all of the error
messages are suppressed to facilitate commissioning. If communications are
used, the monitoring function must be re-enabled
CONTR.ErrorMask.I2
H004
Warnings are enabled bitwise
Warning Mask
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
COMBOARD, data receive faulted

Peer-to-peer, data receive faulted
Master speed outside its tolerance (refer to H119)
Slave speed outside its tolerance (refer to H118)
A097
A098
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 160, 7
A099
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
Bits 9 ..15 can be optionally assigned. The default suppresses all warning
messages!
CONTR.WarnMaske.I2
d005
Status of the standard angular synchronous control software package
State of Control
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Angular controller enabled

Speed controller on T400 enabled
Synchronism reached
Time overflow, basic drive
PROFIBUS, data receive faulted
Slave has synchronized (10 ms pulse)
Master has synchronized (10 ms pulse)
Position actual value slave > enable threshold
Status displacement determined
Warning active
Fault active
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 40, 7
CONTR.Statuswort.QS
d006
Error Bits
Status of the monitored error sources. The assignment corresponds to the

mask in H003
Type: W
Chart: 160, 4
CONTR.Fehlerzustand.QS
64

Parameter
Description
Data
d007
Status of the monitored warning sources. The assignment corresponds to the

mask in H004
Type: W
Chart: 160, 6
Warning Bits
CONTR.Warnzustand.QS
H008
TechBoard ParTyp
Initialization
parameter
H008 is used to define the data type which is used to transfer type R
parameters (real) via the USS slave interface. Generally, real parameters
must be converted into a 32-bit fixed-point value (e. g. for OP1S).
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 40,1
0: Transfer in the fixed-point format

1: Transfer in the floating-point format
IF_CU.DRIVE.TF
H009
T400 = Baseboard
Initialization
parameter
Activates basic drive converter functions if the T400 is used in the SRT400
Value: 0
without a basic drive, and if it should behave with respect to an adjacent T400 Type: BO
just like a basic drive. In this case, all of the parameter numbers are shifted
Chart: 40,1
(offset) by 1000. This means, that H123 becomes P123.
Caution: Only set H009 to 1, if parameterization is still possible, as it is
neither possible to operate in the basic drive nor parameterize via the PMU or
OP1(S)!
0
1
T400 operates as technology module (in the basic drive or SRT400)

T400 behaves just like a basic drive (in the SRT400 as basic drive)
IF_CU.DRIVE.BBF
H010
Pulses Slave
Initialization
parameter
H011
Pulses Master
Initialization
parameter
H012
Nom. Speed Slave
Number of pulses (of a track) per revolution of the incremental encoder at the
slave drive.
Value: 1024
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
SYNCO2.SlavePulse.X
master drive (=speed sensing 2);
Value: 1024
Type: I
Chart: 70, 4
SYNCO2.MasterPulse.X
Nominal (rated) speed of the slave drive in RPM. This is referred to speed
1.0. A sign reversal of the value corresponds to interchanging the pulse
encoder tracks. It is not permissible to use the value 0.
Value: 1500.0
Type: R
Chart: 60, 4
SYNCO2.SlaveNnenn.X
H013
Nom. Speed Master
Nominal (rated) speed of the master drive in RPM. This is referred to speed
It is especially important to enter the right value when using the master
encoder signal as master setpoint for the slave.
Value: 1500.0
Type: R
Chart: 70, 4
SYNCO2.MasterNnenn.X
d014
Speed Slave
Speed actual value of the slave in RPM; (normalization can be selected with
parameter H058)
Type: R
Chart: 60, 7
SYNCO2.n_Slave.Y
d015
Speed Master
Speed actual value of the master in RPM (normalization can be selected with
parameter H059)
Type: R
Chart: 70, 7
SYNCO2.n_Master.Y
d016
Slave Position
Number of quadrupled pulses of the slave drive since the last synchronizing
pulse. For a negative direction of rotation, the value is counted down
(decremented).
Type: R
Chart: 60, 7
SYNCO2.Slave.YP
d017
Master Position
Number of quadrupled pulses of the master drive since the last synchronizing
(decremented).
Type: R
Chart: 70, 6
SYNCO2.Master.YP

65
Parameter
Description
H018
Slave speed sensing mode 1
Mode Slave Speed
Initialization
parameter
Data
Value: 16#7FE2
Type: W
The mode of the speed sensing block for the slave drive is selected using this
Chart: 60, 2
parameter; this especially involves the digital filter, the encoder type, the
coarse signal type selection and the direction of rotation dependency of the
synchronizing pulse (zero encoder pulse), as well as the source of the
encoder pulses.
The selected mode is highlighted (in bold letters). Refer to the SIMADYN D
Reference Manual for an additional description as well as the function block
library, function block NAVS, connection MOD.
- - - X: the last hexadecimal position = 2 has the following significance:
Bit 0
0
1
encoder 1: Two pulse tracks, offset through 90

encoder 2: There is a dedicated track for each direction of rotation
Bit 3..1 digital filter with time constant/limiting frequency 500 ns / 2 MHz
000x no filter
001x
010x
011x
100x
500 ns (encoder 1)
2 s (encoder 1)
8 s (encoder 1)
16 s (encoder 1)
Rest
illegal
125 ns (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
- - X -: the last but one position = E has the following significance:

Bit 4
setting mode for input S
0
1
set YP to SV
subtract SV from YP
Bit 5
setting mode for input SD
0
1
set YDP to SVD

subtract SVD from YDP
Bit 6
source of the encoder tracks (can only be selected for terminal XE1)
0
1
T400
from the BASEBOARD
Bit 7
source of the zero pulse (can only be selected for terminal XE1)
0
1
from terminal XE1 of the T400

from the BASEBOARD
XX - -: the two highest positions = 7F has the following significance:

Correcting the standstill limit for 127 sampling cycles
SYNCO2.Slave.MOD
66

Parameter
Description
Data
H019
Operating mode of master speed sensing 2
Mode MasterSpeed
For this particular software package, the only difference between H018 and
H019 is in the last but one position (refer below)
Value: 16#7F02
Type: W
Chart: 70, 4
This parameter is used to set the speed sensing block mode for the master
drive, especially the digital filter, the encoder type, the coarse pulse version
and the source of the encoder pulses.
Initialization
parameter
In the following text, only those operating modes will be described which are
possible when supplied from the factory. Refer to H018 for additional
information.
- - - X: last position = 2 has the following significance:
Digital filter with time constant/limiting frequency 500 ns / 2 MHz
Encoder type : pulse encoder with 2 tracks offset through 90 degrees
- - X -: last but one position = 0 has the following significance:
Zero- and incremental pulses from the terminal, encoder 2 of the T400
Setting mode S=0 :
set YP to SV
Setting mode SD=0: set YDP to SVD (contrary to
parameter H018, however this is not relevant for this particular software
package, as YDP is not accessed by the master speed sensing block.)
XX - -: the two highest position = 7F have the following significance:
Correcting the standstill limit at 127 sampling cycles
SYNCO2.Master.MOD
d020
Error Code Slave
Error code of the slave drive speed sensing. In order to use angular
synchronism, the value must be 0. If this value is not 0, an error has been
made when parameterizing the speed sensing.
Type: W
Chart: 60, 7
The cases designated with *) can occur after the software package has been
modified in-line with application specific requirements.
Significance of the error bits
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Parameters which may not be 0: H010, H012, H044

Sampling time > 20 ms *)
H018, illegal filter parameterization
Slave without master *)
Master and slave in various sampling times *)
Several masters use the same encoder *)
Master and slave use the same encoder *)
Pulse counter overflow
SYNCO2.Slave.YFC
d021
ErrorCode Master
Error code of the master drive speed sensing. In order to use angular
Type: W
Chart: 70, 6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SYNCO2.Master.YFC

67
Parameter
Description
Data
H022
Sets the synchronizing type of the slave speed sensing. The value has
several functions, however, only the coarse pulse evaluation selection can be
modified in this application (refer to Fig. 2-3 ).
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 60, 3
CoarsePulseSlave
Bit(s)
Value
0
1
3...2
6...4
0
0
00
XYZ
000
Significance
Synchronization using the zero pulse

For the zero pulse, the pos. is set to the setting value 0.0
Not evaluated
Coarse pulse version number (refer to Doc. T400)
Example: No. 0 ( coarse pulse is not evaluated; as for
mode 1)
011
Example: No. 3 (mode 3; the zero pulse is always
evaluated if the coarse pulse has a high signal level)
15...7 any
Not evaluated
SYNCO2.Slave.SYM
H023
CoarsePulseMaster
Sets the synchronizing type of the master speed sensing. The value has
modified in this application.
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 70, 3
Significance, refer to H022.

SYNCO2.Master.SYM
H024
COMBOARD ParTyp
Initialization
parameter
H024 is used to define the data type parameter type R (real = floating point)
which is transferred via the COMBOARD interface.
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 40, 1
IF_CU.DRIVE.CF1
d025
Digital inputs 1 .. 8 and their inverse values, combined as a word:
State dig. Inputs
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BinInput 1 (terminal 53)

BinInput 1 inverse (terminal 53)
Type: W
Chart: 52, 7
T400_EA.Invert_Bin.QS
d026
Control word 1; is sent to the basic drive converter.
Control Word1 CU
Bit Significance
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
On (main contactor)
/OFF2 (voltage-free)
/OFF3 (fast stop)
Pulse enable
Ramp-function generator enable
Start ramp-function generator
Setpoint enable
Acknowledge fault
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Control requested
Enable positive direction of rotation
Enable negative direction of rotation
Motorized potentiometer, raise
Motorized potentiometer, lower
Fault, external 1
Type
W
Chart: 220, 4
1=ON
0=OFF
0=OFF
1=enable
1=acknowledge
0 = fault
IF_CU.Steuerwort1.QS
68

Parameter
Description
Data
d027
2nd control word for the basic drive. Only bit 9 (enabling the speed controller
in the basic drive) is used.
Type: W
Chart: 220, 8
Control Word2 CU
d028 ... d031
Display R1 ...
Display R4
Four display parameters, type REAL (floating point) to display connectors

Type: R
without their own display parameter. The source is selected using parameters Chart: 470, 8
L028 ... L031.
Free_FBs.Display_R.Y1 ... Free_FBs.Display_R.Y4
d032 ... d035

Display B1 ...
Display B4
d036, d037
Display I1 ...
Display I2
Four display parameters, type BOOL to display connectors without their own
display parameter. The source is selected using parameters L032 ... L032.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 8
Free_FBs.Display_BO.Q1 ... Free_FBs.Display_BO.Q4

Two display parameters, type integer (16-bit) to display connectors without
their own display parameter. The source is selected using parameters L036
and L037.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 8
Free_FBs.Display_I.Y1, Free_FBs.Display_I.Y2
d038, d039
Display W1 ...
Display W2
Two display parameters, type word (16-bit) to display connectors without their
own display parameter. The source is selected using parameters L038 and
L039.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 8
Free_FBs.Display_W.Y1, Free_FBs.Display_W.Y2
H040
Multiplexer selection of the source for the ratio:
MUX ratio
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fixed value 0.0

Fixed value, parameter H043
Analog value 1, smoothed
Actual value1 from the basic drive
Setpoint1 from the COMBOARD
Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
14
I
500, 1
MUXsoll.MUX_Uebersetzung.XCS
H041
Source for the supplementary ratio.
S.Addition.Ratio
SYNCO1.UE4PRO.X2
H043
Fixed value for the ratio.
Constant Ratio
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X1
d044
Actual ratio calculated from the fixed value and the relevant ratio
Ratio
Actual ratio = (d060 * d061) + source (H041)
Value: 3047
Type: I
Chart: 80,2
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 30,3
Type: R
Chart: 80, 4
SYNCO1.UE4PRO.Y
d045
Actual value of the ratio numerator
Ratio Numerator
SYNCO1.PNRAT.NM
d046
Actual value of the ratio denominator
RatioDenominator
SYNCO1.PNRAT.DN
H047
Additional ratio: Summand to enter the ratio as follows:
Addition. Ratio
ratio * rel.ratio + additional ratio

SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X3

Type: DI
Chart: 80, 5
Type: DI
Chart: 80, 5
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 80, 1
69
Parameter
Description
Data
H048
Multiplexer selection of the source for the relative ratio
MUXrelativeRatio
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
1
0
14
I
500, 4
MUXsoll.MUX_RelUebersetz.XCS
H049
Fixed value for a factor to relatively change the ratio
Rel. Ratio Const
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X2
H050
Multiplexer selection of the source for the displacement setpoint
MUXdisplace.Setp
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 30, 3
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
14
I
500, 1
MUXsoll.MUX_Versatz.XCS
H051
Source for the displacement setpoint (angular controller).
S.Displacem.Setp
SYNCO2.Q_Versatz.X
H052
Time, in which the displacement setpoint changes by 2048 quadrupled pulses Value: 2.5 ms
(2048 quadrupled pulses correspond to the maximum or minimum
Min:
0 ms
displacement setpoint, i.e. half a revolution, also refer to H054 and H055).
Type: SD
Chart: 110, 2
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.TU
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.TD
RmpUp Displacem
H053
RampDownDisplace
H054
Max.Displacement
Upper displacement setpoint limit (pulses*4)

When the displacement calculation is in the retrigger mode (i. e. H091=1), the
maximum displacement setpoint should not exceed the half pulse number
(*4) value per revolution (i. e. half a revolution) of the parts to be
synchronized (control margin)!
Value: 3050
Type: I
Chart: 110, 1
Value:
Min:
Type:
Chart:
2048
0
R
110, 3
Value:
Min:
Type:
Chart:
-2048
0
R
110, 3
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.LU
H055
Min.Displacement
Lower displacement setpoint limit (pulses*4)

synchronized (control margin).
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.LL
d056
DisplacementSetp
Displacement setpoint (pulses*4) at the ramp-function generator output

(angular controller)
Type: R
Chart: 110, 4
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.Y
H057
Source of the control signal to set the displacement ramp-function generator.
S.set Displ.Ramp
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.S
70
Value: 0175
Type: I
Chart: 110, 1

Parameter
Description
Data
H058
Source for the normalization factor to display the slave drive speed (d014). In
the factory setting, this is linked to the rated slave drive speed.
Value: 3012
Type: I
Chart: 60, 7
Q.Norm. n_Slave
SYNCO2.n_Slave.X1
H059
Q.Norm. n_Master
Source for the normalization factor to display the master drive speed (d015).
In the factory setting, this is linked to the rated master drive speed.
SYNCO2.n_Master.X1
d060
Actual ratio before being multiplied by the relative ratio.
Ratio 1
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y4
d061
Actual value for the relative ratio.
Ratio relative
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y5
H062 - H065
Direction of rotation-dependent displacement of the synchronization.
DisplaceMas+Sla+
f(n)
This is only necessary, if different displacement values are required as a

function of the directions of rotation of the master and slave.
H062
H063
H064
H065
Displacement setpoint for:

Value: 3013
Type: I
Chart: 60, 6
Type: R
Chart: 80, 2
Type: R
Chart: 80, 2
n_Master > 0;
n_Master < 0;
n_Master > 0;
n_Master < 0;
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 100, 1
n_Slave > 0
n_Slave > 0
n_Slave < 0
n_Slave < 0
The displacement setpoints correspond to the number of pulses*4

SYNC01.DREFS1.X1 and .X2 SYNC01.DREFS2.X1 and .X2
H066
Fixed displacement setpoint (pulses*4)
Const.Displacem.
SYNCO1.FixVersatz.X
H067
Source for the speed ratio before being multiplied by the relative ratio.
S.Ratio
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X4
H068
Source for the relative ratio before being multiplied by the ratio.
S.relative Ratio
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X5
H070
Multiplexer selection of the source for the master speed setpoint
MUX Refer.speed
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Speed, master
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 30, 3
Value: 3040
Type: I
Chart: 80, 1
Type: I
Chart: 80, 1
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
15
0
15
I
500, 7
MUXsoll.MUX_Leitsollwert.XCS
H071
Source for the master setpoint (speed setpoint for the master and slave)
S.ReferenceSpeed
SYNCO1.Leitsollwert.X
H072
Smoothing time (PT1 element) for the master speed setpoint
Tfilt Ref. Speed
SYNCO1.SREFSM.T
H073
Fixed value, master speed setpoint
Const. Ref.Speed
SYNCO1.fixLeitsoll.X
d074
Actual value of the smoothed master speed setpoint
Refer.Speed filt
SYNCO1.SREFSM.Y
d076
Actual value of the master speed setpoint (before smoothing)
Reference Speed
SYNCO1.Leitsollwert.Y

Value: 3070
Type: I
Chart: 115, 1
Value: 10 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 115, 2
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 30,3
Type: R
Chart: 115, 3
Type: R
Chart: 115, 2
71
Parameter
Description
Data
H077
Source for the value of the ratio numerator for the displacement calculation.
S.DisplaceNumer.
SYNCO2.Displace.NM
Value: 5088
Type: I
Chart: 100, 4
H078
Source for the value of the ratio denominator for the displacement
calculation.
S.DisplaceDenom
SYNCO2.Displace.DN
H079
S.DT1 Acc. Comp.
Source for the input quantity of the high-pass filter to generate inertia
compensation.
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.X
H080
MUX Accel.Comp.
Selects the source for the inertia compensation (pre-control value for the
speed controller):
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fixed value 0.0

From dn/dt generated value
Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Value: 5089
Type: I
Chart: 100, 4
Value: 3129
Type: I
Chart: 120, 6
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
14
I
500, 5
MUXsoll.MUX_BAusgleich.XCS
H082
Tfilt Acc.Comp.
Smoothing time constant of the derivative action element (DT1 element) to

generate the inertia compensation value; higher time values signify a lower
influence.
Value: 100ms
Type: SD
Chart: 120, 7
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.T1
H083
Tdif Accel.Comp.
Differentiating time constant of the DT1 element to generate the inertia

compensation value; higher values signify a higher influence.
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.TD
d085
Actual value of the inertia compensation.
DT1 (SpeedSetp.)
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.Y
H086
This is used to directly enter numerator and denominator of the ratio.
Fine Ratio Numer
Constant.DINT_Const.X1
H087
Refer to H086
Fine Ratio Denom
H088
The source of the ratio is changed-over using H088
enable FineRatio
0
1
Value: 4 ms
Type: R
Chart: 120, 7
Type: R
Chart: 120, 7
Value: 1000
Type: DI
Chart: 80, 3
Value: 1000
Type: I
Chart: 80, 3
The numerator and denominator are automatically calculated

Fine setting (H086, H087)
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 80, 6
SYNCO1.FEINPZ.I1
H090
Pos.Correct Mode
H090 is used to define whether the position can always be corrected or only if Value: 1
there is an active synchronizing command. The position correction is required Type: BO
for a position reset and for the displacement correction. For H090=0, the
Chart: 60, 4
edge-controlled correction mode only works, if after passing the
synchronizing marks, the synchronizing command = 1.
0 Displacement correction or reset only as long as the synchronizing
command=1
1 Displacement correction is always possible
CONTR.LagekorrektLogik.I2
72

Parameter
Description
Data
H091
Selects whether synchronization (determining the displacement and

displacement correction) should be realized in the retrigger mode or
continuously.
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 100, 6
SynchrRetrigMode
= Continuously
The displacement is sensed over several revolutions and corrected
(parameters H100 and H102 have to be set!)
1 = Retrigger
The displacement is only determined over 1 revolution and corrected.
Only
the actual position since the last synchronizing operation is evaluated.
(this may be recommendable for negative ratios and a
negative displacement setpoint)
SYNCO2.Displace.RTM
H092
Synchr.Edge Mode
Evaluation modes of the synchronizing command (i. e. displacement

correction). The synchronizing command must be 1 while synchronizing.
H092 is used to define whether the displacement correction should be made
continuously or only once.
0 =
1 =
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 100, 6
Continuous (signal level-controlled)

Once (edge controlled)
SYNCO2.Displace.ENM
H093
CorrectionPulses
Number of quadrupled pulses, which are fed to the angular controller to

correct the displacement for displacement correction per sampling time.
This generates a position difference, which the angular controller corrects.
A lower value (e.g. 1) is recommended in order to achieve low-oscillation
synchronization.
This value must be increased (e. g. to 10) if, for very low-frequency
synchronizing pulses (e. g. as a result of a high ratio or small speed), fast
synchronization is required
Value: 1
Type: R
Chart: 100, 7
SYNCO2.Displace.CPN
d094
act.Displacement
Displacement actual value in quadrupled slave pulses since the displacement Type: R
determination was enabled and after both synchronizing pulses have been
Chart: 100, 7
received. (Synchronizing command is not required.) It is the actual angular
difference between the synchronizing pulses.
It is only re-calculated at the instant in time that one (H91=0; setting of H100
and H102) or two (H091=1) synchronizing pulses occur.
It contains the set displacement- (d056) as well as the direction of rotationdependent synchronizing displacement setpoints (H062 - H065).
In the synchronous status, it is 0 or includes the displacement setpoint.
This status is signaled to terminal 46, taking into account a tolerance
bandwidth which can be set using H103.
SYNCO2.Displace.DV
d095
Displ.-Pos.diff
Difference actual displacement minus the position difference actual value in

quadrupled slave pulses. This value is zero (independent of a possibly
existing displacement setpoint) if the system is in the angular synchronous
status!
During synchronizing, this value is not equal to zero, and during
synchronization, is always less.
Update, as is described for d094.
The following is essentially valid:
d095 = d094 - d124
Type: R
Chart: 100, 7
SYNCO2.Displace.DVD
d096
ErrorCode Displ.
Error IDs from the displacement sensing. The error ID is deleted when the
position difference is reset.
Type: W
Chart: 100, 7
Bit Hex
Significance
0 1
Overflow, number of synchronizing operations 1 ( more than 231 )
1 2
2 4
Number of synchronizing operations 1 * PR1 > 231
3 8
Number of synchronizing operations 1 * PR2 >231
If one of the bits 0-3 is set, then synchronization was probably erroneous.
8 100 = Displacement position difference cannot be represented with 32 bit,
i. e. synchronization must be repeated.
SYNCO2.Displace.FC

73
Parameter
Description
Data
H097
Source for the 2nd digital signal to reset the position and displacement.
S.Reset Pos_1
CONTR.Zus_Lage-RS.I1
Value: 0108
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
H098
Source for the 2nd digital signal to enable displacement correction.
S.Synchr.Command
CONTR.OR_Sync.I1
H100
The synchronizing pulse number is set in the master drive, and corresponds
to one revolution in quadrupled pulses. The default for H100 is set for a pulse
encoder with 1024 pulses, and is 4 1024 = 4096.
SyncPulsesMaster
Value: 0173
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
Value: 4096
Type: DI
Chart: 100, 5
SYNCO2.Displace.PR2
H101
Source for the signal to end the start synchronizing (refer to H168).
S.StopStartSynch
CONTR.SyncFlipFlop.R
H102
The synchronizing pulse number is set to the slave drive and corresponds to
one revolution in quadrupled pulses. The default for H102 is set for a pulse
SyncPulses Slave
Value: 0105
Type: BI
Chart: 90,6
Value: 4096
Type: DI
Chart: 100, 6
SYNCO2.Displace.PR1
H103
Threshold Synchr
If the actual displacement is less than this response threshold, then the
synchronism reached status bit is set to 1. In the other case, it is reset to 0.
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.L
H104
Source for the control signal to enable the angular controller.
S.Enable Control
SYNCO2.AngleControl.EN
H105
Minimum number of quadrupled pulses, which must be received after an

effective synchronizing pulse, before a new synchronizing pulse may become
effective. This is used, for example, to suppress multiple edges due to switch
bounce.
Caution: The pulse number specified here must be greater than the number
of pulses, which are received while the synchronizing pulse is active (active
time). This threshold value is also effective for the first synchronization (after
power off,
power on / restart).
Thresh.SyncSlave
Value: 20.0
Type: R
Chart: 100, 6
Value: 0109
Type: I
Chart: 110, 6
Value:
Unit:
Type:
Chart:
500
Pulse
R
60, 3
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.X2
H107
Thresh.SyncMaster
Enable threshold, synchronizing, master. The function is as for H105 for the
master speed sensing.
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.X2
H108
S.KP Pos.Contrl.
Source for the input quantity of the characteristic to adapt the P gain of the
angular controller.
SYNCO2.AngleKP.X
d109
Actual status of the angular controller enable
enable Pos.Cntrl
1: Angular controller enabled

0: Angular controller inhibited
Value: 500
Type: R
Chart: 70, 2
Value: 3044
Type: I
Chart: 110, 1
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 7
CONTR.WR-Freigabe.Q
H110
The angular controller mode can be changed-over using this parameter:
Hold I-Component
0 = Controller operates as PI controller

1 = Controller operates as P controller (the I component is kept constant)
Caution: Only changeover from 0 to 1 when the controller is inhibited, as
otherwise the I component will not be cancelled!
Value: 1
Type: BO
Chart: 110, 7
SYNCO2.AngleControl.HI
H111
Integral action time of the angular controller (only relevant for H110 = 0)
Tn Pos.Control
The minimum integral action time corresponds to the sampling time, in which
the AngleControl block is configured.
Value: 500 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 110, 7
SYNCO2.AngleControl.TN
H112
Absolute value of the maximum output quantity of the angular controller
Max. Position
SYNCO2.SYNMAX.X
74
Value: 0.3
Type: R
Chart: 110, 5

Parameter
Description
Data
H113
P gain (angular controller) without adaption or

P gain for the largest ratio ue_KP
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
KP_UE Pos.Contrl
SYNCO2.AngleKP.B2
H114
P gain (angular controller) for low ratios ue_KP_0
KP_UE_0 PosCntrl
SYNCO2.AngleKP.B1
H115
Limit of the ratio , which is linearly interpolated up to from ue_KP_0. For >
ue_KP, KP = KP_UE (angular controller).
ue_KP Value
SYNCO2.AngleKP.A2
H116
ue_KP_0 Value
Limit of the ratio , from which is linearly interpolated up to ue_KP_0. For <
ue_KP_0, KP = KP_UE_0 (angular controller)
SYNCO2.AngleKP.A1
H117
Tfilt Pos.Differ
Smoothing time constant (PT1 element) for the differential position actual
value
SYNCO2.LageDifferenz.T
H118
dn enable Max.
Maximum system deviation between the speed setpoint and actual value of
the slave when the angular controller is enabled. The angular controller is
only enabled if the system deviation lies below the threshold (N_soll_slave
H136 - H118). A low value must be set for a low speed setpoint.
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 2
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
Value: 4.0 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 60, 7
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart: 75, 3
SYNCO2.dnFreigabe.X
H119
Maximum deviation of the speed actual value of the master to its setpoint.
dn Master Max.
SYNCO2.dnMaster.X
d120
Angular controller output = supplementary speed setpoint
Outp.Pos.Control
SYNCO2.PT_Angle.Y
d121
Actual angular deviation (referred to the slave pulses). A possibly existing

displacement setpoint is taken into account:
Angular controller, system deviation = displacement setpoint - differential
actual value.
(The differential position actual value includes the displacement setpoint as
steady-state component)
Diff.Pos.Control
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart: 75, 3
Type: R
Chart: 110, 7
Type: R
Chart: 110, 5
SYNCO2.AngleControl.YE
d122
Integral component of the angular controller output
Type:
IntegralComp.Pos
SYNCO2.AngleControl.YI
d123
KP Pos.Control
Actual P gain of the angular controller. This value must be multiplied by 104,
so that small KP values do not have to be entered using the OP1S.
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
SYNCO2.AngleKP.Y
d124
Pos.Diff. filt
Smoothed differential angular actual value, smoothed with H117. This is

independent of the displacement determination or the synchronizing pulses;
this means that it provides no information about the position with respect to
one another (synchronism). On the other hand, d094 is the displacement
actual value between two synchronizing pulses.
Unit: Pulse
Type: R
Chart: 60, 8
After successful synchronization, this value is 0 or contains the selected

displacement setpoint!
SYNCO2.LageDifferenz.Y
H125
Upper limit of the speed setpoint at the ramp-function generator
n_max Ramp Gen.
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.LU
H126
Lower limit of the speed setpoint at the ramp-function generator
n_min Ramp Gen.
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.LL
H127
Time, in which the speed setpoint may change from 0 to rated speed.
n Ramp Up Time
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.TU

Value: 1.0
Type R
Chart: 115, 5
Value: -1.0
Type R
Chart: 115, 5
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 115, 6
75
Parameter
Description
Data
H128
Time, in which the speed setpoint may change from the rated speed to 0.
n Ramp Down Time
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.TD
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 115, 6
H129
Speed setpoint after the ramp-function generator.
SpeedSetpRampOut
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.Y
H130
Supplementary speed setpoint, which is added to the master setpoint in the

jog mode.
Jog Setpoint
CONTR.TIPPEN.X
H131
Source for the 1st control signal to enable the angular controller.
S.enablePosCtrll
CONTR.Steuerbits.I1
H132
Upper speed setpoint limit for the speed controller on T400.

Caution: H132 must be > H133
Max. n_Setpoint
SYNCO2.NsollLimit.LU
H133
Min. n_Setpoint
Lower speed setpoint limit for the speed controller on T400

SYNCO2.NsollLimit.LL
H134
Max. n-Controller
Upper limit of the speed controller output on T400

SYNCO2. SpeedControl.LU
H135
Min. n-Controller
Lower limit of the speed controller output on T400

SYNCO2.SpeedControl.LL
d136
Actual speed setpoint after smoothing and multiplication with the ratio.
Speed Setpoint
SYNCO1.SREFR.Y
d137
Actual speed setpoint sum after limiting (setpoint for the speed controller on
T400).
Speed Setp. ltd.
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 115, 7
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 115, 1
Value: 0172
Type: I
Chart: 90, 5
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: -1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 6
Value: -1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 6
Type: R
Chart: 115, 3
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
SYNCO2.NsollLimit.Y
H138
Smoothing time constant for the angular controller output
Tfilt Pos.Cntrl
SYNCO2.PT_Angle.T
H139
Source for the 2nd control signal to enable the angular controller.
S.enablePosCtrl2
CONTR.WR-Freigabe.I1
H140
The speed controller can be either computed on the T400 or in the basic
drive.
ModeSpeedControl
The T400 outputs the speed setpoint, taking into account the limits on
the basic drive. The speed controller blocks on the T400 are no longer
processed.
Speed controller is on the T400. The torque setpoint is transferred to the

basic drive.
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 110, 7
Value: 0193
Type: I
Chart: 90, 5
Value: 0
Type:
BO
Chart: 120, 5
CONTR.SCONI.I
H141
KP Speed Control
Upper Y value of the 2-point characteristic for the KP adaption of the speed
controller. P gain for large speed setpoints or if H143 = H144.
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.B2
H142
KP_O SpeedContrl
Lower Y value of the 2-point characteristic for the KP adaption of the speed
controller. P gain for low speed setpoints.
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.B1
H143
n_KP Threshold
Limit value of the speed setpoint which is interpolated up to, starting from
n_KP_0. The P gain = KP for n > n_KP
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.A2
H144
n_KP_0 Threshold
Limit value of the speed setpoint which is interpolated from up to n_KP. For n
< n_KP_0, the P gain = n_KP_0
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.A1
76
Value: 10.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: 10.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2

Parameter
Description
Data
H145
Integral action time of the speed controller
Tn SpeedControl
SYNCO2. SpeedControl. TN
Value: 200ms
Type R
Chart: 120, 5
H146
Smoothing time (PT1 element) for the slave speed actual value, which is
used for the closed-loop speed control
Tfilt Speed
SYNCO2.NslaveFilter.T
d147
Control word 1 for the basic drive
Control Word 1
IF_CU.Sammeln.Y1
d148
Control Word 2
IF_CU.Sammeln.Y4
H149
Pulse extension for the synchronizing pulse of the master-speed sensing. (for
diagnostics)
T SyncPulsMaster
CONTR.Puls_SS_Master.T
d150
Outp.SpeedContrl
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.Y
d151
Setpoint/actual value deviation of the speed controller
DifferSpeedCntrl
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.YE
d152
Actual setpoint for the basic drive:
SetpSpeed;Torque
H140 = 1 torque setpoint (d150)

H140 = 0 speed setpoint
Value: 4.0ms
Type: R
Chart: 60, 7
Type: W
Chart: 230, 7
Type: W
Chart: 230, 7
Value: 10 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 70, 6
Type: R
Chart: 120, 7
Type: R
Chart: 120, 4
Type: R
Chart: 115, 7
SYNCO2.SetpSwitch.Y
d153
Effective P gain of the speed controller
KP Speed Control
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.Y
H154
Source for the slave position for synchronizing enable of the position sensing
of the slave drive.
S.SlaveSynchrPos
H155
Ratio Resolution
Initialization
connection
Resolution when calculating the numerator- and denominator components

from the ratio. H155 specifies the numerator of the ratio. The value should
not exceed 100000. Examples:
H155
10000
10000
1000
Ratio
1.2351
0.0333
0.0333
Numer.
10000
10000
1000
Type: R
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3186
Type: I
Chart: 60, 3
Value: 10000
Type: R
Chart: 80, 4
Denominator
12351
333
33
SYNCO1.PNRAT.RR
H156
Source for the main setpoint of the angular controller.
S.Ref_Pos_1
SYNCO2.AngleControl.W1
H157
Source for the supplementary setpoint of the angular controller.
S.Ref_Pos_2
H158
Source for the actual value of the angular controller.
S.Act_Pos_1
SYNCO2.AngleControl.X1
H159
Source for the supplementary actual value of the angular controller.
S.Act_Pos_2
H160
Offset value of analog output 1 (terminal 97; also refer to H161)
Aout 1 Offset
T400_EA.AnaOut_1.OFF
H161
Scaling factor for analog output 1 (terminal 97)
Aout 1 Scalefact
Output voltage = (input value + offset) * 5 V / scaling factor

T400_EA.AnaOut_1.SF
H162
Aout 2 Offset

Value: 3056
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 3124
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 4
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
77
Parameter
Description
Data
H163
Aout 2 Scalefact
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 4
T400_EA.AnaOut_2.SF
H164
Erase EEPROM
Task to re-establish the factory setting. All of the changes are deleted.
Beforehand, H165 must be set to 165. Deleting is started when H164 = 1. If
data is deleted, it cannot be re-done (retrieved)!
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 40, 1
CONTR. EEPROM_T400. ERA

H165
Key EEPROM
Password to prevent the change memory being accidentally erased

(EEPROM). H165 must be set to 165 before erasing.
CONTR. EEPROM_T400. KEY
d166
State EEPROM
Indicates whether the standard software package is unchanged (factory

settings), or whether parameters were changed (change memory not empty).
d166 = 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 40, 1
Type: BO
Chart: 40, 3
change memory empty factory setting
CONTR. EEPROM_T400. EPE

H167
Source for the 1st digital signal to reset position and offset.
S.Pos.Reset_1
CONTR.Steuerbits.I3
H168
When the start synchronization is enabled (H169 = 1), after the power supply
is switched-on and after the power-on delay has expired (according to H168),
a synchronizing command is output once.
DelayStartSynchr
Value: 0173
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
Value: 1000 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 90, 6
CONTR. Start_Sync. T
H169
Enables start synchronization (refer to H168)
EnableStartSynch
0
1
Not enabled
Enabled
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 90,5
CONTR.EnableAutoSync.I
H170
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to reset the displacement setpoint
MUX Displ.Reset
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Control word from CU bit 0
Digital input 3 (terminal 55)
Control word 2 CB bit 0
Control word, peer bit 0
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 2
MUX_B.MUX_VersatzReset.XCS
78

Parameter
Description
Data
H171
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to enable jog operation.
MUX enable Jog
Selected as for H170 except: 2

1
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 3
control word from the basic drive, bit
MUX_B.MUX_TippFreigabe.XCS
H172
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to enable the angular controller.
MUX en.Pos.Cntrl

2
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 5
MUX_B.MUX_WReglerFreig.XCS
H173
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to reset position and displacement.
MUX Reset Posit.

3
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 6
MUX_B.MUX_LageReset.XCS
H174
MUX Synchr.Cmd
Multiplexer selection of the digital source for the synchronizing command.

This enables displacement errors to be corrected.
4
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 8
MUX_B.MUX_SyncSignal.XCS
d175
Actual value for the control signal to reset the position difference.
Displacem. Reset
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q4
d176
Actual value for the control input jog enable
Enable Jog
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q7
d177
Actual value for the control input angular controller enable
EnableSpeedCntrl
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q1
d178
Actual value for the control input reset position (H167)
Reset Position
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q3
d179
Actual value for the control input (H191) synchronizing command
Synchron.Command
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q2
H180
Source for the digital signal to enable slave drive synchronization.
S.EnableSynSlave
SYNCO2.Slave.SP
H181
Source for the digital signal to reset the slave drive position.
S.ResetSlavePos.
SYNCO2.Slave.R
H182
Source for the numerator of the speed ratio.
S.Slave Numerat.
SYNCO2.Slave.NM
H183
Source for the denominator of the speed ratio.
S.Slave Denomin.
SYNCO2.Slave.DN
H184
Source for the digital signal to enable the differential position correction of the
slave drive. As long as the signal at this input is 1, the position difference is
corrected as follows at each processing cycle:
S.Corr.Pos.Diff.
Type: BO
Chart: 60, 2
Type: BO
Chart: 115, 2
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 6
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 2
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 2
Value: 0154
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 0097
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 5088
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 5089
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 0098
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Position difference (new) = position difference (old) position differencecorrection value

(prerequisite, H018 is in the factory setting)
H185
S.Reset PosDiff2
Source for the 2nd digital signal to reset the determined position difference
(slave drive).
CONTR.PosDiff_Reset.I1
H186
Source for the slave drive position to generate the absolute value and sign.
S.Abs.Pos.Slave
SYNCO2.Pos_Slave_Abs.X

Value: 0108
Type: I
Chart: 60, 1
Value: 3016
Type: I
Chart: 60, 1
79
Parameter
Description
Data
H187
Source for the 1st digital signal to reset the determined position difference
(slave drive).
Value: 0170
Type: I
Chart: 60, 1
S.ResetPos.Diff1
CONTR.Steuerbits.I4
H188
Source for the signal to enable synchronization of the master speed sensing.
S.EnableSynMaster
SYNCO2.Master.SP
H189
Source for the signal to set the master position actual value to zero.
S.ResetMasterPos
SYNCO2.Master.R
H190
Source for the position actual value to enable synchronization of the master
speed sensing.
S.MasterSynchPos
H191
S.Synchr.Comd2
Source for the control signal synchronizing command to enable the

displacement correction.
CONTR.Steuerbits.I2
H192
S.n_Slave Compar
Source for the input signal of the comparator to monitor the slave speed. If
the slave speed reaches the setpoint speed, then the angular controller can
be enabled.
Value: 0190
Type: I
Chart: 70, 4
Value: 0097
Type: I
Chart: 70, 4
Value: 3017
Type: I
Chart: 70, 1
Value: 0174
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
Value: 3018
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.X
H193
S.n_ref SlaveCmp
Source for the setpoint of the slave speed. (comparator to enable the angular
controller)
Value: 3136
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.M
H195
Source for the input signal of the comparator to monitor the master speed.
S.n_MasterCompar
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.X
H196
Source for the master speed setpoint. (comparator to check the plausibility of
the master speed)
S.n_ref MastComp
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.M
H197
Source for the numerator of the fine ratio.
S.FineRatioNumer
SYNCO1.FEIN_NM.X2
H198
Source for the denominator of the fine ratio.
S.FineRatioDenom
SYNCO1.FEIN_DN.X2
H199
Source for the position of the master drive to generate the absolute value and
sign.
S.Abs.Pos.Master
SYNCO2.Pos_Master_Abs.X
H200
Source for the main setpoint of the speed controller (without limiting).
S.1 n(ref-act)
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.W1
H201
Source for the supplementary setpoint of the speed controller (without

limiting).
S.2 n(ref-act)
H202
Source for the 1st actual value of the speed controller.
S.3 n(ref-act)
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.X1
H203
Source for the 2nd actual value of the speed controller.
S.4 n(ref-act)
H204
Source for the input quantity of the KP adaption characteristic of the speed
controller.
S.KP (speedCtrl)
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.X
H205
Source for the main setpoint of the speed controller (before limiting).
S.n(ref,speed)
SYNCO2.SumNsoll.X1
80
Value: 3019
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
Value: 3076
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
Value: 5086
Type: I
Chart: 80, 5
Value: 5087
Type: I
Chart: 80, 5
Value: 3017
Type: I
Chart: 70, 6
Value: 3137
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3146
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3129
Type: I
Chart: 120, 1
Value: 3129
Type: I
Chart: 120, 1

Parameter
Description
Data
H206
Source for the supplementary setpoint of the speed controller (before

limiting).
Value: 3120
Type: I
Chart: 120, 1
S.n(addit.)
SYNCO2.SumNsoll.X2
H207
Source for the jog setpoint.
S.Jog Ref.Speed
SYNCO1.Tippen-Schalter.X2
H208
Source for the signal to enable the jog setpoint. When enabled, the jog
setpoint is added to the speed setpoint.
S.enable Jog
CONTR.Steuerbits.I7
H209
Value: 3120
Type: I
Chart: 115, 1
Value: 3120
Type: I
Chart: 115, 1
Pulse extension for the synchronizing pulse of the slave speed sensing. (for
diagnostics).
CONTR.Puls_SS_Slave.T
Value: 10 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 60, 7
H210
Scaling factor SF for analog input 1 (setting, refer to d212).
AI 1 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_1.SF
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
H211
Offset for analog input 1 (setting, refer to d212).
AI 1 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_1.OFF
d212
Actual measured value at the analog input 1 (AI1). This analog input is
sensed in the fastest time sector (T1). The measured value is obtained as
follows:
T SyncPulseSlave
AI 1 act. value
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5
d212 = terminal voltage * scaling factor / 5 V + offset

d212 = terminal voltage * H210 / 5 V + H211
T400_EA.AnaIn_1.Y
H213
AI 2 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_2.SF
H214
Offset value for analog input 2 (setting, refer to d215).
AI 2 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_2.OFF
d215
Actual measured value at analog input 2 (AI2). This analog input is sensed in
time sector T2. The measured value is obtained as follows:
AI 2 act. value
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_2.Y
H216
AI 3 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_3.SF
H217
AI 3 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_3.OFF
d218
AI 3 act. value
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_3.Y
H219
AI 4 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_4.SF
H220
AI 4 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_4.OFF
d221
AI 4 act. value
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_4.Y

81
Parameter
Description
Data
H222
Smoothing time constant for the 1st analog input. A value of 0 de-activates
the filter.
Value: 500
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
AI 1 Filter Time
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.T
d223
Analog value 1 after smoothing with smoothing time constant H222.
AI 1 filtered
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.Y
H224
Smoothing time constant for the 2nd analog input. A value of 0 de-actives the
filter.
AI 2 Filter Time
T400_EA.AE2_FILT.T
d225
Analog value 2 after smoothing with the smoothing time constant H224.
AI 2 filtered
T400_EA.AE2_FILT.Y
H226
Smoothing time constant for the 3rd analog input. A value of 0 de-activates
the filter.
AI Filter Time
T400_EA.AE3_FILT.T
d227
AI 3 filtered
T400_EA.AE3_FILT.Y
H228
Smoothing time constant for the 4th analog input. A value of 0 de-activates
the filter.
AI 4 Filter Time
T400_EA.AE4_FILT.T
d229
AI 4 filtered
T400_EA.AE4_FILT.Y
H230 ... H233
4 sources for digital signals to set the 4 analog inputs to zero.
S.set AE1 zero ...

S.set AE4 zero
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.S ... T400_EA.AE4_FILT.S
H234
Source for the position difference for the displacement calculation.
S.Position Diff1
SYNCO2.Displ_Ist.X1
H235
Source for a correction value of the position difference for the displacement
calculation.
S.Position Diff2
SYNCO2.Displ_Ist.X2
H236
Source for the signal to reset the displacement calculation.
S.ResetDisplacem
SYNCO2.Displace.R
H237
Source for the displacement setpoint (this checks whether synchronism has
been reached).
S.Setp Displace1
SYNCO2.DisplacmentSetp.X1
H238
S.Setp Displace2
Source for the value to correct the displacement setpoint (this checks
whether synchronism has been reached).
H239
S.Ratio n_ref
Source for the ratio to calculate the slave setpoint speed from the master
setpoint.
SYNCO1.SREFR.X2
H240
1st source for the setpoint speed of the slave for the ramp-function generator.
S.Slave n_ref_1
SYNCO1.SSUM.X2
H241
2nd source for the setpoint speed of the slave for the ramp-function generator.
(this is used for the jog setpoint)
S.Slave n_ref_2
SYNCO1.SSUM.X1
H242
Source for the setting value of the integral component of the speed controller.
S.SV Int(speed)
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.SV
82
Type:
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
Type:
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
Type: R
Chart: 50, 6
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
Type: R
Chart: 50, 6
Type: I
Value: 0000
Chart: 50, 4
Value: 3118
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3062
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 0097
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3051
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3062
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3044
Type: I
Chart: 115, 2
Value: 3136
Type: I
Chart: 115, 4
Value: 3176
Type: I
Chart: 115, 4
Value: 3137
Type: I
Chart: 120, 4

Parameter
Description
Data
H243
Source for the signal to set the integral component of the speed controller.
S.Set Int(speed)
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.S
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 120, 4
H244
Source for the pre-control value of the speed controller.
S.Precontrol
SYNCO2.EnVorstSpeed.X2
H245
Source for the signal to enable the pre-control of the speed controller.
S.enable PreCtrl
SYNCO2.EnVorstSpeed.I
d246
Status word 1 from the basic drive (in the factory setting; i. e. at H558 =
2571).
Status Word1 CU
Value: 3080
Type: I
Chart: 120, 5
Value: 0140
Type: I
Chart: 120, 5
Type: W
Chart: 180, 1
IF_CU.Q_ZWort1.Y
d300
Word 1 for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
Peer W1 send
IF_Peer.Peer_Zustand_W1.Y
H303
Multiplexer selection of the source for the value, output as PZD 1, at the peer- Value: 2
to-peer interface
Min:
0
Max: 10
0 Fixed value 0
Type: I
1 Fixed value H306
Chart: 570, 2
2 Status word 1 from peer-to-peer (refer to H310 ... H325)
3 Status word, angular synchronism
4 Control word 1 from the COMBOARD (PZD 1, receive)
6 Status word 1 basic drive (PZD 1 receive)
8 Control word 1 peer-to-peer (PZD 1 receive)
9 Control word 1 for the basic drive
MUX word 1 Peer
Type: W
Chart: 300, 6
MUX_Peer.MUX_Peer_W1.XCS
H304
MUX float1 Peer
Multiplexer selection of the source for output as 1st floating-point value at the
peer-to-peer interface
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Fixed value 0.0

Actual setpoint for the basic drive (speed or torque)
Ratio
Relative ratio
Speed setpoint (limited)
Slave speed (smoothed)
System deviation, speed controller
KP speed controller
Speed setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Angular controller output
KP angular controller
Displacement actual value
Displacement differential position actual value
Position difference (smoothed)
Speed actual value slave
Position actual value slave
Speed actual value master
Position actual value master
Floating-point value1 from peer-to-peer
Fixed value H307
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
32
I
570, 6

83
Parameter
Description
Data
H305
Multiplexer selection of the source for output as 2nd floating-point value at the
peer-to-peer interface.
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
MUX float2 Peer
0 .. 31 as for H304
32 Fixed value H308
0
0
32
I
570, 7
H306
W1 Peer constant
H307
W2 Peer constant
H308
W3 Peer constant
H309
Peer enable
Initialization
parameter
Fixed value to output via peer-to-peer.

MUX_Peer.Festwert_Peer.X
Value 0
Type: W
Chart: 570, 1
Fixed value to output via peer-to-peer. (word1 + word2 as floating-point

value)
MUX_Peer.MUX_Peer_W2.X32
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 570, 3

value)
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 570, 6
Enables communications via the peer-to-peer interface and also its

monitoring.
Value: 1
Type:
BO
Chart: 300, 1
0
1
Inhibited
Enabled
IF_Peer. Enable_Peer.I
H310 ... H325
Select sources for the bits of status word 1 of the peer-to-peer interface.
S.PeerState1_B0 ...
S.PeerState1_B15
H310
H311
H312
H313
H314
H315
H316
H317
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H318
H319
H320
H321
H322
H323
H324
H325
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Type
I
Chart: 310, 5
6
IF_Peer.Zustandswort1.I1 ... I15

d327
Status Word Peer
Status word to output at the peer-to-peer interface. The status word is

combined by selecting sources H310 ... H325.
Type: W
Chart: 310, 7
IF_Peer.Zustandswort1.QS
d329 ... d333
5 process data from the peer-to-peer interface.
PZD1 Peer ...

PZD5 Peer
IF_Peer.Peer_Empf_W1.Y
IF_Peer.PZD2_PZD3.YWL ... YWH
H334
Source for the control word for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.ContrlWordPeer
IF_Peer.STW_NOP.X
H335
Source for the 2nd PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.Peer PZD2
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XWL
H336
Source for the 3rd PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.Peer PZD3
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XWH
H337
Source for the 1st double word for output at the peer-to-peer interface (PZD2
+ PZD3).
S.Peer DW1
Type: W
Chart: 300, 2
Type: I
Chart: 310, 1
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XDI
H338
S.Peer Float1
Source for the 1st floating-point value for output at the peer-to-peer interface
(PZD2 + PZD3).
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XR
H339
Selects the data to be output as PZD2 + PZD3:
Peer Sendtype1
0: PZD2, PZD3 as single words

1: DW1 double word 1 (H337)
2: Float1 (H338)
Value: 3304
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 300, 6
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.SEL
H340
Source for the 4th PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.Peer PZD4
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XWL
84
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5

Parameter
Description
Data
H341
S.Peer PZD5
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XWH
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
H342
Source for the 2nd double word for output at the peer-to-peer interface (PZD4
+ PZD5).
S.Peer DW2
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XDI
H343
S.Peer Float2
Source for the 2nd floating-point value for output at the peer-to-peer interface
(PZD4 + PZD5).
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XR
H344
Peer Sendtype2

2: Float2 (H343)
Value: 3305
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 300, 6
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.SEL
H345
S.Peer PZD1
Source for the 1st PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
IF_Peer.Peer_Zustand_W1.X
d346
Receive data from the peer-to-peer interface, word 1.
Peer ControlWord
IF_Peer.STW_NOP.Y
H360
Time in which a valid telegram must be received after the device has been
powered-up. If a telegram was not received after T > H360 has expired, fault
F117 is generated (if this was not suppressed using H003).
tmaxPeer PowerOn
Value: 2303
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Type: W
Chart: 310, 1
Value: 20 s
Type: SD
Chart: 300, 6
IF_Peer.StartTimeout.T
H361
tmax Peer OpMode
Monitoring time during operation. If no data are received within the time
interval, parameterized using H361, fault F117 is generated (if this is not
suppressed with H003).
Value: 100 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 300, 1
IF_Peer. Empf_PEER.TMX
H362
Mask Peer tmax
The status word of the receive block of the peer-to-peer interface is masked
Value 16#FFFF
using H362. If the result of this bitwise AND logic operation is not equal to 0,
Type: W
then a communications error is assumed. If the error remains for longer than Chart: 300, 4
the time parameterized in H360, the power-on monitoring signals a fault (refer
to H360).
IF_Peer.Filter.I2
H363
Baud rate for peer-to-peer communications.
Baud Rate Peer
Permissible values: 9600, 19200, 38400, 93750, 187500

IF_Peer.PEER_Zentral.BDR
d364
Peer RecStateYTS
Status output of the receive block CRV as information for the fault signal
F117
Value: 19200
Type: DI
Chart: 300, 1
Type: W
Chart: 300, 4
IF_Peer.Empf_PEER.YTS
H381 ... H388
S.PZD1 CU ...
S.PZD8 CU
Selects 8 sources for output as PZD to the basic drive converter. The source
must either be a word- or integer type. Factory setting:
H381 = 2026
H382 = 2500
H383 = 2502
H384 = 2027
H385 = 2504
H386 = 2506
H387 = 2510
H388 = 2508
Type: I
Chart: 410, 5
Control word 1 (Chart220)

Setpoint1 CU N2
Setpoint2 CU N2
Setpoint3 CU N2
Setpoint4 CU N2
Setpoint CU DW high
Setpoint5 CU N2
IF_CU.Sammeln.X1 ... X8
H401
CB actval1 norm.
Normalization factor for the 1st actual value for output in the N2 format at the
communications interface.
Output value = 100% * source(H822) / H401
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 440, 2
IF_COM.Istwert_W2.NF

85
Parameter
Description
Data
H403
Normalization factor for the 2nd actual value for output in the N2 format at the
Value
1.0
Type:
CB actval2 norm.
Output value = 100% * source(H823)/ H403

H405
CB actval3 norm.
Normalization factor for the 3rd actual value for output in the N2 format at the
Value
1.0
Type:
Value
1.0
Type:

H407
CB actval4 norm.
Normalization factor for the 4th actual value for output in the N2 format at the
H409
Enables communications via PROFIBUS and its monitoring.
ComBoard enable
0
1
Initialization
parameter
H410 ... H425
S.CB state1 B0 ...
S.CB state1 B15
Inhibited
Enabled
Value: 1
Type:
BO
Chart: 400, 1
IF_COM.Enable_ComBoard.I
Sources for the bits of status word 1 to output at COMBOARD. All of the
status bits are connected to constant 0 in the factory setting.
H410
H411
H412
H413
H414
H415
H416
H417
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H418
H419
H420
H421
H422
H423
H424
H425
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Value 0
Type
BO
Chart: 430, 1 - 2
IF_COM.Zustandswort1.I1 ... I16

H426 ... H441
S.CB state2 B0 ...
S.CB state2 B15
H426
H427
H428
H429
H430
H431
H432
H433
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H434
H435
H436
H437
H438
H439
H440
H441
Value 0
Type
BO
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

H442
MUX word1 CB
Multiplexer selection of the source for the value output, at the COMBOARD
interface as PZD 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fixed value 0
Fixed value H443
Status word 1 from the COMBOARD
Status word angular synchronism
Control word 1 from the COMBOARD (PZD 1, receive)
Status word 1 basic drive (PZD 1, receive)
Control word 1 peer-to-peer (PZD 1, receive)
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
10
I
560, 3
MUX_CB.MUX_COM_W1.XCS
H443
Fixed value for output at the communications interface as PZD1.
word1 CB constan
MUX_CB.Festwerte_CB.X1
86
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 560, 2

Parameter
Description
Data
H444
interface as PZD 4
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
MUX word4 CB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fixed value 0
Fixed value H445
0
0
10
I
5600, 7
H445
Fixed value for output at the communications interface, as PZD 4.
word4 CB constan
H446
Multiplexer selection of the source for the value output at COMBOARD,

as PZD 2.
MUX word2 CB
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H470
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 560, 6
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
32
I
550, 3
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
32
I
550, 4
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
32
I
550, 6
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
32
I
550, 7
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W2.XCS
H447
MUX word3 CB

as PZD 3.
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H471
H448
MUX word5 CB

as PZD 5.
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H472
H449
MUX word6 CB
Multiplexer selection of the source for the value output as PZD 6 at

COMBOARD.
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H473
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W6 XCS
d450
1st setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_1 rec.
IF_COM.Sollwert_W2.Y
H451
Normalization factor for the 1st setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_1 norm.
d450 = H451 * source(H813) / 100%

IF_COM.Sollwert_W2.NF
d452
2nd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_2 rec.
H453
Normalization factor for the 2nd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Set_2 norm.
d452 = H453 * source(H814) / 100%

d454
3rd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_3 rec.
H455
Normalization factor for the 3rd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_3 norm.
d454 = H455 * source(H815) / 100%

d456
4th setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_4 rec.

Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
87
Parameter
Description
Data
H457
Normalization factor for the 4th setpoint from the communications module.
CB setp_4 norm.
d456 = H457 * source(H816) / 100%
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
d458
Send data of the communications interface, word 1
Word 1 CB Send
IF_COM.Sammeln2.Y3
d459
Word 4 CB Send
IF_COM.Sammeln2.Y4
d460
Process data, which interprets control word1 from the communications

module. Connected with PZD1 from CB in the factory setting.
ControlWord 1 CB
Type:
Type:
Type: W
Chart: 420, 1
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y3
d461
ControlWord 2 CB

Type: W
Chart: 420, 5
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y4
H462
tmax CB PowerOn
Time, in which a valid telegram must be received after the device has been
Value: 20000 ms
Type:
SD
Chart: 400, 5
IF_COM.StartTimeout.T
H463
tmax CB OpMode
Value: 100 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 400, 1
IF_COM. Empf-COM.TMX
H464
Mask tmax CB
Value 16#FFFF
Type: W
to H462).
IF_COM.Filter.I2
d465
CB receive state
Status display of receive block CRV as information for the fault message
F116
Type: W
Chart: 400, 3
IF_COM.Empf-COM.YTS
d466
1st status word for the communications module (as PZD1).
Status Word1 CB
IF_COM.Zustandswort1.QS
d467
2nd status word for the communications module (as PZD4).
Status Word2 CB
H470
Fixed value for output via COMBOARD (as actual value1)
W2 CB constant
H471
W3 CB constant
H472
W5 CB constant
H473
W6 CB constant
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W2.X32
H480
Slave address of the COMBOARD.
CB Slave address
This parameter is only relevant for operation without basic drive. For
operation with basic drive, the COMBOARD is parameterized from the basic
drive.
Type: W
Chart: 430, 4
Type: W
Chart: 430, 7
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 1
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 3
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 5
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 7
Value 3
Type: I
Chart: 400, 6
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig.MAA
88

Parameter
Description
Data
H481 ... H493
Parameterizing the COMBOARD. The settings are made depending on the

COMBOARD type used (refer to the User Documentation of the
COMBOARD; H482 = 2 sets PPO type 2 for Profibus)
Value 0
except
H482 = 2
Type: I
Chart: 400, 6 - 8
CB Parameter 1 ....
CB Parameter 13
These parameters are only relevant when using the system without basic
drive. When used with the basic drive, the COMBOARD is parameterized
from the basic drive.
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig. P01 ... P13
H495
CB Param.valid
The COMBOARD settings are set valid. In operation, H495 must be set to 1.
After a parameter change (H480 .. H493), H495 is first set to 0 and then to 1,
in order to update the parameters on COMBOARD.
Value 1
Type: BO
Chart: 400, 6
This parameter is only relevant for operation without a basic drive. When a
basic drive is used, the COMBOARD is parameterized from the basic drive.
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig.SET
d496
CB state SRT400
Status of the COMBOARD. This is only relevant for operation without basic
Type: W
drive. When used with the basic drive, 16#7CB3 is displayed (i.e. Basic drive Chart: 400, 8
available).
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig.YTS
H498
S.Setp DW_CU
Source for the setpoint for output as double word (N4 normalization) at the
basic drive (normalization H499).
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
IF_CU.SollwertN4CU.X
H499
CU DW norm.
Normalization factor for the setpoint for output as double word at the basic
drive. In the factory setting, the high word is output as PZD7:
Double word = 100 % * source(H498) / H499
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
IF_CU.SollwertN4CU.NF
H500
Source for the 1st setpoint for output at the basic drive (normalization H501).
S.CU setp_1
IF_CU.Sollwert_W2.X
H501
Normalization factor for the 1st setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
factory setting, output as PZD2:
CU setp_1 norm.
PZD2 = 100 % * source(H500) / H501
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
IF_CU.Sollwert_W2.NF
H502
Source for the 2nd setpoint for output to the basic drive (normalization H503).
S.CU setp_2
IF_CU.Sollwert_W3.X
H503
Normalization factor for the 2nd setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
CU setp_2 norm.
PZD3 = 100 % * source(H502) / H503
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H504
Source for the 3rd setpoint for output at the basic drive (normalization H505).
S.CU setp_3
IF_CU.Sollwert_W5.X
H505
Normalization factor for the 3rd setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
CU setp_3 norm.
PZD5 = 100 % * source(H504) / H505
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H506
Source for the 4th setpoint for output at the basic drive (normalization H507).
S.CU setp_4
IF_CU.Sollwert_W6.X
H507
Normalization factor for the 4th setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
CU setp_4 norm.
PZD6 = 100 % * source(H506) / H507
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H508
S.CU setp_5
IF_CU.Sollwert_W8.X

Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
89
Parameter
Description
Data
H509
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
CU setp_5 norm.
PZD8 = 100 % * source(H508) / H509

H510 ... H525
Sources for the bits of control word 1 for outputs at the basic drive.
S.Bit0 CTW1 CU ...

S.Bit15 CTW1 CU
Par.
Bit
Factory Significance
H510
H511
H512
H513
H514
H515
H516
H517
H518
H519
H520
H521
H522
H523
H524
H525
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
0650
0651
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
On (main contactor)
1=ON
/OFF2 (powered-down) 0=OFF
/OFF3 (fast stop)
0=OFF
Pulse enable
Start, ramp-function generator
Setpoint enable
1=enable
Acknowledge fault
1=acknowledge
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Control requested
Fault, external 1
0 = fault
Type
I
Chart: 220, 1...
2
IF_CU.Steuerwort1.I1 ... I15

IF_CU.Q_ext_Error.I
H526 ... H541
S.Bit0 CTW2 ...
S.Bit15 CTW2
Sources for the bits of control word 2 for output at the basic drive. Only
bit 9 (speed controller enable) is used.
H526
H527
H528
H529
H530
H531
H532
H533
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H534
H535
H536
H537
H538
H539
H540
H541
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Type
I
Chart: 220, 5
0546
IF_CU.Steuerwort2. I1 ... I16

H542
Mask CU ready
Using this mask, a bit of status word 1 from the basic drive can be selected,
which then signals the operational readiness of the basic drive. Status word 1
of the basic drive is AND'ed bitwise with H542. If at least the 1st bit of the
result word is set, the following is valid: Basic drive ready. This is the
prerequisite for the speed controller enable.
Value 16#0004
Type: W
Chart: 90, 5
IF_CU.BereitBitMaske.I2
H543
TestEnable CU n
For test purposes, the speed controller can be enabled in the basic drive,
bypassing the enable logic.
IF_CU.n-Reg_Freigabe.I2
H544
MUX Speed enable
Multiplexer selection of the source to enable the speed controller in the basic
drive. In order that the speed controller is enabled, the basic drive must be
ready (refer to H542)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Bit 9 from control word 2 from the COMBOARD
Bit 9 from control word 1 from peer-to-peer
Bit 15 from the control word from the basic drive
Value 0
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 7
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
5
BO
560, 3
MUX_CU.Mux_Enable_nRegl.XCS
90

Parameter
Description
d545 ... d548
Computer utilization level of the standard software package, assigned

Type: R
according to time sectors. T1 is the fastest (highest priority), T5 is the slowest Chart: 40, 7
time sector.
CPU load T1 to T4
d549
Total CPU load
It is important that the total CPU load are not utilized more than 100% , as
otherwise they will not be processed in the configured time intervals.
d545
d546
d547
d548
d549
Utilization of T1
Utilization of T2
Utilization of T3
Utilization of T4
Total CPU load
IF_CU.LoadMeasure.YC1 ... YC4,

H550
CU actval1 norm.
Data
IF_CU.LoadMeasure.Y
Normalization factor for the 1st actual value channel (factory setting: PZD2) of
the receive data from the basic drive
d551 = H550 * PZD2 / 100%
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.NF
d551
Actual value1 basic drive (factory setting: PZD2) after normalization
CU actval1
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.Y
H552
Normalization factor for the 2nd actual value channel (factory setting: PZD3)
of the receive data from the basic drive
CU actval2 norm.
d553 = H552 * PZD3 / 100%
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.NF
d553
CU actval2
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.Y
H554
Normalization factor for the 3rd actual value channel (factory setting: PZD5) of
CU actval3 norm.
d555 = H554 * PZD5 / 100%
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.NF
d555
CU actval3
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.Y
d556
Optional control word; e.g. to control angular synchronism via SIMOLINK

basic drive T400.
CTW from CU
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Type: W
Chart: 180, 6
IF_CU.STW_SPA.Y
H557
S.CTW from CU
Source for an optional control word. Factory setting, PZD6 from the basic
drive. The selected source is split-up into status bits and inverse status bits
(connectors 0550 and onwards).
Value: 2576
Type: I
Chart: 180, 1
IF_CU.STW_SPA.X
H558
S.StatusWord1 CU
Source for status word1 from the basic drive. The selected source is split-up
into status bits and inverse status bits (connectors 0510 and onwards).
IF_CU.Q_ZWort1.X
H559
S.StatusWord2 CU
Source for the status word1 from the basic drive. The selected source is splitup into status bits (connectors 0480 and onwards).
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.IS
Value: 2571
Type: I
Chart: 180, 1
Value: 2571
Type: I
Chart: 180, 1
d560
Receive word 1 from the basic drive (PZD1) = status word 1
CU Status Word 1
IF_CU.Verteilung.X1
d561
CU Status Word 2
IF_CU.Verteilung.X4
d562
Status of the receive channel from the basic drive
CU Rec.State
IF_CU.Empf_BASE.YTS
H563
Source of the 1st actual value from the basic drive, which should be converted Value: 2572
from the N2 format into the floating-point format (normalization factor H550).
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.X
S.actval_1 CU

Type:
Type:
Type: W
Chart: 150, 4
91
Parameter
Description
Data
H564
Source of the 2nd actual value from the basic drive, which should be
converted from the N2 format into the floating-point format (normalization
factor H552).
Value: 2573
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
S.actval_2 CU
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.X
H565
S.actval_3 CU
Source of the 3rd actual value from the basic drive, which should be
factor H554).
Value: 2575
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.X
H567
S.DW high CU
Source of the double word (high word) from the basic drive, which should be
factor H558).
Value: 2582
Type: I
Chart: 170, 3
IF_CU.W_DW.XWH
H568
S.DW low CU
Source of the double word (low word) from the basic drive, which should be
factor H558).
Value: 2581
Type: I
Chart: 170, 3
IF_CU.W_DW.XWL
H569
S.DW CU
Source of the double word from the basic drive, which is to be directly
converted into the floating-point format.
IF_CU.CU_DI_R.X
d570
CU DW_R
Result of the double word floating-point conversion (received from the

basic drive)
Value: 5567
Type: I
Chart: 170, 5
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.CU_DI_R.Y
d571 .. d584
PZD1 CU rec....
PZD14 CU rec.
H587
S.N4 CU
Actual value of the first 14 process data from the basic drive. In the factory
setting, only PZD1 (status word 1) is evaluated.
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y1 ... Y8
IF_CU.Verteil2CU.Y1 ... Y6
Source of the double word from the basic drive, which is to be converted from
the N4 format into the floating-point format.
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.X
H588
CU N4 norm.
Normalization factor for the conversion from N4 into the floating-point format.
For H588 = 1.0, N4 = 100% (16#40000000) is emulated as 1.0.
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.NF
d589
CU N4_R
Type: W
Chart: 170, 2
Result of the double word (N4 normalization) -> floating-point conversion

(received from the basic drive)
Value: 5567
Type: I
Chart: 170, 5
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.Y
H590
Q.CU_I_R
Source of the actual value from the basic drive which is to be directly
converted into the floating-point format (i.e. PZD= 1234 => d591 = 1234.0 ).
IF_CU.CU_I_R.X
d591
Actual value from the basic drive after conversion into a floating-point value.
CU I_R
IF_CU.CU_I_R.Y
H592
Source for the status word from the basic drive. From this, mask H542
selects a status bit, which is used to enable the speed controller.
S.en.Speed CU1
H593
Source for an additional condition to enable the speed controller.
S.en.Speed CU2
IF_CU.Enable_n_Regler.I2
d601 ... d604
Input value of the bi-directional I/O of the T400. (For the case, where the
terminals are used as inputs; i.e. driver H637 ... H640 inactive)
Pin46 input ...

Pin49 input
Parameter
T400 terminal
1 signifies:
d601
d602
d603
d604
Terminal 46
Terminal 47
Terminal 48
Terminal 49
Synchronism reached
Fault present
Value: 2577
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Value: 2571
Type: I
Chart: 90, 5
Value: 0547
Type: I
Chart: 90, 6
Type: BO
Chart: 53, 3 .. 7
T400_EA.BinOut.Q1 ... Q4
92

Parameter
Description
Data
d607
Actual value of the 1st coarse pulse input (terminal 84) on the T400.
Pin84 Coarse P1
T400_EA.BinOut.Q7
Type: BO
Chart: 52, 7
d608
Actual value of the 2nd coarse pulse input (terminal 65) on the T400.
Pin65 Coarse P2
T400_EA.BinOut.Q8
H609
This parameter is available, for compatibility reasons, to earlier software

releases. From version V2.02 onwards, the digital inputs are available
inverted and not inverted, and can be selected using BICO connections.
BinInp Inverters
The digital inputs can be individually inverted using H609. In this case, every
bit from H609 is EXORd with the appropriate input bit.
Type: BO
Chart: 52, 7
Value 16#0000
Type: W
Not included in
the charts!
1-bits result in an inversion.

For example: H609 = 16#0005 = 0000 0101b inputs 1 and 3 are inverted
T400_EA.Invert_BinInp.I2
d610 ... d617
Digital inputs of the T400.
BinInput1 Pin53
d610
d611
d612
d613
d614
d615
d616
d617
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
(terminal 53)
(terminal 54)
(terminal 55)
(terminal 56)
(terminal 57)
(terminal 58)
(terminal 59)
(terminal 60)
Type
BO
Chart: 52, 3
T400_EA.BinInput.Q1 ... Q8
H618
Selects the source for the 1st analog output of the T400 (terminal 97).
MUX AnalogOutp 1
0 .. 31 as for H304
32 DT1 (n_set) (inertia compensation from n_set)
MUX_AnaOut.MUX_DAC_1.XCS
H619
Selects the source for the 2nd analog output of the T400 (terminal 98).
MUX AnalogOutp 2
0 .. 31 as for H304
MUX_AnaOut.MUX_DAC_2. XCS
H620
S.Analog Outp1
H621
S.set DAC1 zero
Source for the signal for output at the 1st analog output of the T400.
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
31
I
510, 4
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
31
I
510, 6
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.X
Value: 3618
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
Source of the signal to set the output value to zero for the 1st analog output of
the T400. If H160 = 0.0 (DA1 offset), this allows the analog output to be
inhibited (output voltage = 0V) or enabled.
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.S
H622
S.Analog Outp2
H623
S.set DAC2 zero
Source for the signal for output at the 2nd analog output of the T400.
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.X
Value: 3619
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
Source of the signal to set the output value to zero for the 2nd analog output
of the T400. If H162 = 0.0 (DA2 offset), this allows the analog output to be
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.S
H631
S.BiDir Out1
Source for the digital signal for output at terminal 46. The output driver is
activated with H637 = 1.
T400_EA.BinOut.I1
H632
S.BiDir Out2
T400_EA.BinOut.I2
H633
S.BiDir Out3
T400_EA.BinOut.I3

Value: 0105
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Value: 0116
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Value: 0109
Type: I
Chart: 53, 5
93
Parameter
Description
Data
H634
Value: 0003
Type: I
Chart: 53, 5
S.BiDir Out4
T400_EA.BinOut.I4
H635
S.Bin.Output1
Source for the digital signal for output at terminal 51.

T400_EA.BinOut.I6
H636
S.Bin.Output2
T400_EA.BinOut.I5
H637 ... H640
Activates the driver for the bi-directional I/O of the T400.

( 1: Driver active; 0: Only the input can be used)
enable BiDir1 ...

enable BiDir4
Initialization
parameter
H637: Terminal 46
H639: Terminal 48
H638:
H640:
Value: 0004
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Type: BO
Chart: 53, 2 - 6
Terminal 47
Terminal 49
T400_EA.BinOut.DI1 ... DI4
H650
Selects the source for bit 0 in control word 1 to the basic drive
MUX CTW1 Bit0
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Bit 0 from control word 1 of the peer-to-peer interface
Control word from the basic drive, bit 5
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
MUX_CU.Mux_STW1_B0.XCS
H651
MUX CTW1 Bit1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H652
MUX CTW1 Bit2
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H653
MUX CTW1 Bit3
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H654
MUX CTW1 Bit4
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Control word from the basic drive, Bit 9
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
94

Parameter
Description
Data
H655
MUX CTW1 Bit5
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
H656
MUX CTW1 Bit6
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
H657
MUX CTW1 Bit7
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
H658
MUX CTW1 Bit8
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Coarse pulse input, encoder 2 (terminal 84)
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H659
MUX CTW1 Bit9
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H660
MUX CTW1 Bit10
0
1
2
3
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H661
MUX CTW1 Bit11
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Word 6 bit 13 from the basic drive
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H662
MUX CTW1 Bit12
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6

95
Parameter
Description
Data
H663
MUX CTW1 Bit13
0
1
2
3
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
H664
MUX CTW1 Bit14
0
1
2
3
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6
H665
MUX CTW1 Bit15
(external fault)
Selects the source for bit 15 (external fault) in control word 1 to the basic
drive (1 = no fault)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Fault (refer to H003)
Alarm (refer to H004)
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6
d666
Value, which is output at analog output 1.
Analog output 1
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.Y
d667
Analog output 2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.Y
H668
Smoothing time constant for analog output 1
T_Filter_DAC1
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.T
H669
T_Filter_DAC2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.T
H700
Enables the serial interface 1 of the T400 for operation as USS slave.
Further, switch S1/8 should be set into the ON position. Online operation with
CFC or with the basic IBS (start-up) is then no longer possible!
USS enable
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
Value: 0 ms
Type: R
Chart: 51, 2
Value: 0 ms
Type: R
Chart: 51, 2
Value: 1
Type: BO
Chart: 450, 1
USS slave is only required for operator control and visualization, if the T400
is to be operated without basic drive (in the SRT400).
Prerequisite for OP1S: Software version from V2.2
IF_USS.Enable.I
H701
Data transfer rate for the USS interface.
Baud rate USS
Example OP1S:
Value: 9600
Type: DI
Chart: 450, 1
9600 or 19200
IF_USS.Slave_ZB.BDR
H703
USS Address
H704
USS 4-Wire
Station address, USS interface.
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 450, 1
IF_USS.Slave_ZB.MAA
Difference between 2-wire (half duplex) and 4-wire operation (full duplex) for
the USS interface.
Value Significance
Required for
0
1
for OP1S
for SIMOVIS
RS485 2-wire (half duplex)

RS232 4-wire (full duplex)
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 450, 1
For end nodes on the USS bus (RS485), terminating resistors must be used
to terminate the bus. The appropriate resistors are switched-in using switches
S1/1 and S1/2 on the T400; the resistors are switched-in in the ON setting.
IF_USS.Slave_ZB. WI4
96

Parameter
Description
Data
d705
Status of the central block of the USS interface (@USS_S).
USS rec. state
This value is only of significance, if the T400 is operated without basic drive,
and parameterization should be realized via the serial interface 1 of the T400
in the USS protocol (refer to H700 to H704).
Type: W
Chart: 450, 4
d706 ... d707
Two pieces of process data, received from the USS interface.
PZD1 USS ...

PZD2 USS
IF_USS.USS_Dummy.Y1 ... Y2
H708 ... H709
Sources for 2 words, which are output at the USS interface.
S.PZD1 USS Slave

...
S.PZD2 USS Slave
IF_USS.USS_Dummy.X1 ... X2
IF_USS.Slave_ZB.YTS
d801 ... d810

PZD1 CB rec. ...
PZD10 CB rec.
10 process data when receiving data from the communications module.

Depending on the PPO type used, not all PZD are used. These values are
then undefined!
Type: W
Chart: 450, 6
Value: 2000
Type: I
Chart: 450, 5
Type: W
Chart: 410, 3
IF_COM.Verteilung.Y1 ... Y8
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y1 ... Y2
H811
S.Control W1 CB
H812
S.Control W2 CB
H813 ... H816
S.setp_1 CB ...
S.setp_4 CB
Selects the source for the 1st control word from the communications module.
IF_COM.Verteil2.X3
Selects the source for the 2nd control word from the communications module.
IF_COM.Verteil2.X4
Selects, from 4 sources, for setpoints from the communications interface,
those which are to be converted from the N2 format into the floating-point
format. Factory setting:
H813 = 2802
H814 = 2803
H815 = 2805
H816 = 2806
Value: 2801
Type: I
Chart: 420, 1
Value: 2804
Type: I
Chart: 420, 1
Type: I
Chart: 410, 5
PZD2
PZD3
PZD5
PZD6
IF_COM.Sollwert_W2.X, _W3.X, _W5.X, _W6.X

H817
S.setp. I_R CB
Selects the source, which is to be converted from integer to floating-point.

IF_COM.Sollw_IR.X
H818
Result of the conversion from integer to floating-point (refer to H817).
Setp. I_R CB
IF_COM.Sollw_IR.Y
H819 ... H820
Selects from high and low word, a double word (format N4), which is to be
converted into the floating-point-format. Normalization using H841.
S.DW high CB ...

S.DW low CB
Factory setting:
H819 = 2809
PZD9
H820 = 2810
PZD10
Type: R
Chart: 410, 2
Type: I
Chart: 410, 4
IF_COM.Sollw_DW.XWH
IF_COM.Sollw_DW.XWL
H821
Result of the N4 to floating-point conversion (refer to H818, H819, H841).
CB setp. DW
IF_COM.Sollw_N4.Y
H822 ... H825
Selects from 4 sources, which are output at the communications interface as

actual values. They are converted from the floating-point format into the N2
format.
S.actval_1 CB ...
S.actval_4 CB
Value: 2807
Type: I
Chart: 410, 1
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Type: I
Chart: 440, 1
Factory setting:
H822 = 3446
H823 = 3447
H824 = 3448
H825 = 3449
Output, multiplexer MuxWord2 CB

IF_COM.Istwert_W2.X, _W3.X, _W5.X, _W6.X

H826
S.actval R_I CB
H828
S.actval_5 CB
Selects the source, which should be converted from floating-point to integer.

IF_COM.Ist_RI.X
Selects the source, which should be converted from floating-point to double
word.
IF_COM.Ist_R_N4.X

Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 440, 6
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 440, 1
97
Parameter
Description
Data
H829
Normalization for H828. For H829 = 1.0, the input value is emulated as 1.0
for 100% in the N4 format.
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 440, 2
Actval5 CB norm.
IF_COM.Ist_R_N4.NF
H831 ... H840
S.PZD1 CB ...
S.PZD10 CB
Selects from 10 sources for output as PZD via the communications interface.
The source must be a word or integer type. Only as many PZD are
transferred as the selected PPO type makes provision for!
Factory setting:
H831 = 2442
H832 = 2822
H833 = 2823
H834 = 2444
H835 = 2824
H836 = 2825
H837 = 2827
H838 = 2000
H839 = 2828
H840 = 2829
Type: I
Chart: 410, 5
Multiplexer Mux Word1 CB (chart 560)

Actual value1 CB
Actual value2 CB
Actual value3 CB
Actual value4 CB
Actual value R_I CB
Constant 0
Actual value5 high CB
Actual value5 low CB
IF_COM.Sammeln.X1 ... X8
IF_COM.Sammeln2.X1 ... X2
H841
CB DW norm.
Normalization factor for the N4 to floating-point conversion (refer to H818,

H819, H821). For H841, 100% (16#40000000) is converted into 1.0.
IF_COM.Sollw_N4.NF
H900 ... H913

S.F125 ... S.F131
S.A106 ... S.A112
Sources for optional digital quantities, which should initiate a fault or alarm in
the basic drive.
Source
H900
H901
H902
H903
H904
H905
H906
Fault
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
F130
F131
Source
H907
H908
H909
H910
H911
H912
H913
Alarm
A106
A107
A108
A109
A110
A111
A112
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: I
Chart: 160, 1
160, 4
CONTR.Fehlerzustand.I10 ... I16

CONTR.Warnzustand.I10 ... I16
d921 ... d930
PZD1 CB out ...
PZD10 CB out
Actual value which should output up to 10 process data via the

communications module.
IF_COM.Sammeln.Y1 ... Y8
IF_COM.Sammeln2.Y1 ... Y2
H960 ... H965
6 fixed values, integer type (16 bit, signed)
Constant I1 ...
Constant I6
Constant.INT_Const.X1 ... X6
H971 ... H974
4 fixed value, word type (16 bit)
Constant W1 ...
Constant W4
Constant.WORD_Const.X1 ... X4
H981 ... H984
4 fixed values, double word type (32 bit signed).
Constant DI1 ...

Constant DI4
Constant.DINT_Const.X3 ... X6
H990 ... H997
8 fixed values, floating-point type.
Constant R1 ...
Constant R8
Constant.Const_Float.X1 ... X8
d998, d999
SIMADYN D,
SIMOVIS SW ID
Type: W
Chart: 440, 6
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 30,6
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 30,6
Value: 0
Type: DI
Chart: 30,8
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 30,5
Identification parameters for SIMOVIS to identify the standard software

package.
Chart: 40,3
Constant.SIMADYN_D.Y
L028 ... L031
S.Display R1 ...
S.Display R4
Four sources for display parameters, REAL type (floating-point) to display

connectors without their own display parameters. The display is realized
using parameters d028 ... d031.
Type: I
Chart: 470, 7
Free_FBs.Display_R.X1 ... Free_FBs.Display_R.X4
98

Parameter
Description
Data
L032 ... L035
Four sources for display parameters, BOOL type to display connectors

without their own display parameters. The display is realized using
parameters d032 ... d035.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 7
S.Display B1 ...
S.Display B4
Free_FBs.Display_BO.I1 ... Free_FBs.Display_BO.I4

L036, L037
S.Display I1,
S.Display I2
Two sources for display parameters, type integer (16 bit) to display
using parameters d036 and d037.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 7
Free_FBs.Display_I.X1, Free_FBs.Display_I.X2
L038, L039
S.Display W1,
S.Display W2
Two sources for display parameters, type word (16 bit) to display connectors
parameters d038 and d039.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 7
Free_FBs.Display_W.X1, Free_FBs.Display_W.X2
L098
Enables position sensing via pulse encoder (NAVS).

Reset required after value change!
Value !
Type BO
Chart 60, 5
L099
Enables position sensing via absolute value encoder (AENC).

Value 0
Type BO
Chart 60, 7
L100 L302
Differential position sensing with absolute value encoder:

Setting parameters for the absolute value encoder and
diagnostic parameters. Detailed description,
refer to Section 3.2.3.
L400
Length buffer
Value:
Length of Trace-buffer (in double words) for offline-trace with

symTrace-D7
Min.
Max.
2048
0
256000
Type
Typ:
Typ:
TRACE.Trace_Kopplung.TBL
c401
Coupling Trace
0: No interconnection to the trace blocks
1: Interconnection to the trace blocks is activ.
TRACE.Trace_Kopplung.QTS
c402
Status Trace
Status-word of trace. Description in symTrace-D7 (Help->
Help subjects->Function blocks error messages)
TRACE.Trace_Kopplung.YTS
L605
S.DW_W1
Sources for a double word quantity, which should be split-up into two words.
Free_FBs.DW_W1.X
L606, L607
Sources for the summands of the 1st integer adder.
S.ADDI_1 X1
S.ADDI_1 X2
Free_FBs.ADDI_1.X1
L608, L609
Sources for the inputs of the 1st integer subtractor.
S.SUBI_1 X1
S.SUBI_1 X2
Free_FBs.SUBI_1.X1 ... X2
L646
Sources for an integer quantity, which should be converted into floating-point.
S.I_R_1
Free_FBs.I_R1.X
L647
Sources for a floating-point quantity, which should be converted into integer.
S.R_I1
Free_FBs.R_I1.X
L698, L699
Sources for the setting- and reset input of an RS flipflop (R dominant).

(free block).
S.S RS-FlipFlop1
S.R RS-FlipFlop1
Free_FBs.RS_FF2.S
Value 5000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Type I
Chart 460, 1
... R

99
Parameter
Description
Data
L700 ... L702
Three sources for the inputs of the 1st free AND block.
S.AND1_I1 ...
S.AND1_I3
Type I
Chart 460, 1
Free_FBs.AND1.I1 ... I3
L703 ... L705
Three sources for the inputs of the 2nd free AND block.
S.AND2_I1 ...
S.AND2_I3
L706 , L707
S.Switch1_0 ...
S.Switch1_1
L708
S.Switch1_sel
2 sources for the inputs of the 1st free changeover. The output is selected
using L708.
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Type I
Chart 460, 1
Free_FBs.Switch1.X1 ... X2
Source for the signal to a signal.
0: Source(L706)
1: Source(L707)
Type I
Chart 460, 1
Free_FBs.Switch1.I
L709
Source for the 1st free edge detecting block.
S.Edge1
Free_FBs.Edge1.I
L710 ... L712
3 sources for the inputs of the 1st free OR block.
S.OR1_I1 ...
S.OR1_I3
Free_FBs.OR1.I1 ... I3
L713 ... L715
3 sources for the inputs of the 2nd free OR block.
S.OR2_I1 ...
S.OR2_I3
L716 , L717
S.Switch2_0 ...
S.Switch2_1
L718
S.Switch2_sel
2 sources for the inputs of the 2nd free changeover. The output is selected
using L718.
S.OnDelay1
L729
T_OnDelay1
L730
S.OffDelay1
L731
T_OffDelay1

0: Source(L716)
1: Source(L717)
Source for the 1st power-on delay.
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.I
1st power-on delay time.
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.T
Source for the 1st power-off delay time.
Free_FBs.OffDelay1.I
1st power-off delay time.
Value
0000
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 490, 7
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 490, 7
Free_FBs.OffDelay1.T
S.Not1, S.Not2
Free_FBs.Not1.I ... Not2.I
L734, L735

(free block).
S.set_PT1_zero
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 490, 7
Sources for the 2nd logical inverter.
L738
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 490, 7
L732, L733
S.S RS-FlipFlop2
S.R RS-FlipFlop2
Type I
Chart 460, 1
Free_FBs.Switch2.I
L728
Value I
Chart 430, 6
Type I
Chart 460, 7
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.S ... R
Source for the digital signal to set the output of the free lowpass filter to zero.
Behavior of the setting function:
Setting 0 1:
Setting 1 0:
Output is immediately set to zero

Output goes to the input value corresponding to L741
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Free_FBs.FreePT1.S
L739
QualityFact.Filt
L740
S.PT1_input
100
Quality of the bandstop filter. Practical values lie in the range 1.0 ... 10.0.
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.Q
Source of the input signal for the lowpass 1st order filter (free block).
Free_FBs.FreePT1.X
Value 2.0
Type I
Chart 480, 4
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 2

Parameter
Description
Data
L741
Filter time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter.
Value 20 ms
Type SD
Chart 480, 2
Tfilt PT1
L742
S.Band-Stop filt
L743
S.FilterFrequenc
Free_FBs.FreePT1.T
Source of the input signal for a bandstop filter (free block).
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.X
Source of the input signal for the bandstop frequency (in Hz) of the bandstop
filter.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 3
Value 3002
Type I
Chart 480, 3
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.FG
L744, L745
Sources for the input signals of a comparator.
S.Compare_X,
S.Compare_Y
Free_FBs.Compare.X1 ... X2
L746
Source for the upper limit of a free limiting block.
S.Limit_max
L747
S.Limit_input
L748
S.Limit_min
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.LU
Source for the signal to be limited of a free limiting block.
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.X
Source for the lower limit of a free limiting block.
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.LL
L749
Source for the input signal of a comparator with hysteresis (free block).
S.Compare2
Free_FBs.Comp2.X
L750
Source for the range limit of the comparator with hysteresis (free block).
S.Compare2 Range
L751
Compare2 Hyst
L752
S.Compare2 Mid
L753
S.Curve_X
Free_FBs.Comp2.L
Hysteresis of the comparator with hysteresis (free block).
Free_FBs.Comp2.HY
Source for the comparator center of range with hysteresis (free block).
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Value 0.1
Type I
Chart 480, 2
Free_FBs.Comp2.M
Value 3003
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Source for the input signal of a characteristic with 2 points. If the signal is
less than X1, the output = Y1; if it is greater than X2, the output = Y2. The
characteristic is approximately linear between these two points.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Free_FBs.Kennlin.X
L754, L755
Value pair for the lefthand characteristic point (lower X coordinate).
Curve_X1,
Curve_Y1
Free_FBs.Kennlin.A1 ... B1
L756, L757
Value pair for the righthand characteristic point (higher X coordinate).
Curve_X2,
Curve_Y2
L760
S.FreeWord
Source for a 16-bit value, which is to be split-up into individual bits

(connectors 0760 to 0775)
Free_FBs.Free_W_B_1.IS
L761... L763
S.DW_high,
S.DW_low,
DW norm.
L764, L765
S.Word
Word norm.
2 sources for a double word, which are to be converted into a floating-point

value. L763 is the normalization; i. e. the output value for an input value of
16#40000000.
Value 0.0
Type I
Chart 480, 2 3
Value 1.0
Type I
Chart 480, 2 - 3
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 1
Type I
Chart 490, 5 - 7
Free_FBs.DW_inp.XWH ... XWL

Free_FBs.Free_N4_R.NF
Source and normalization for a 16-bit value, which is to be converted into a
floating-point value. L765 is the normalization; i. e. the output value for input
value 16#4000.
Type I
Chart 490, 4 - 5
Free_FBs.Free_N2_R.X, Free_FBs.Free_N2_R.NF

101
Parameter
Description
Data
L766, L767
Source for a floating-point value, which is to be converted into type N2. L767
is the normalization; i. e. the input value for output = 16#4000.
Type I
Chart 490, 6 - 7
S.Float
Float norm.
Free_FBs.Float_N2.X, Free_FBs.Float_N2.NF
L786 ... L788
Source for the summands of a free adder.
S.ADD1 X1 ...
S.ADD1 X3
Free_FBs.ADD1.X1 ... X3
L789 ... L791
S.ADD2 X1 ...
S.ADD2 X3
L792 ... L793
Source for the inputs of a free subtractor (X1 X2).
S.SUB1 X1 ...
S.SUB1 X2
Free_FBs.SUB1.X1 ... X3
L794 ... L795
S.SUB2 X1 ...
S.SUB2 X2
L796 ... L798
Source for the inputs of a free multiplier.
S.MUL1 X1 ...
S.MUL1 X3
Free_FBs.MUL1.X1 ... X3
L799 ... L801
S.MUL2 X1 ...
S.MUL2 X3
L802 ... L803
Source for the inputs of a free divider (X1 / X2).
S.DIV1 X1 ...
S.DIV1 X2
Free_FBs.DIV1.X1 ... X2
L804 ... L805
S.DIV2 X1 ...
S.DIV2 X2
L810
Source for free word-to-binary converter.
S.Free_W_B_2
L812 ... L813
Source for the inputs of a free integer divider (X1 / X2).
S.DIVI_1 X1 ...
S.DIVI_1 X2
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.X1 ... X2
L814 ... L815
Source for the inputs of a free integer multiplier.
S.MULI_1 X1 ...
S.MULI_1 X2
Free_FBs.MULI_1.X1 ... X2
L816, L817
Source for free word-to-double-word converter.
S.W_DW1 high
S.W_DW1 low
Free_FBs.WDW1.XWH ... XWL
L818
Source of the input quantity of the freely available integrator.
S.Integrator X
L819
Integrator LU
L820
Integrator LL
L821
S.Integrator SV
L822
Integrator T
102
Free_FBs.Integrator.X
Upper limit value of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.LU
Lower limit value of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.LL
Source for the setting value of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.SV
Integration time constant of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.TI
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 1
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 5
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 480, 6
Value -1.0
Type R
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type R
Chart 480, 5
Value 1000 ms
Type SD
Chart 480, 6

Parameter
Description
Data
L823
Source for the setting signal of the freely available integrator.

Free_FBs.Integrator.S
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 480, 5
2 sources for the inputs of the 3rd free changeover switch. The output is
selected using L826.
Type I
Chart 460, 5
S.Integrator set
L824 , L825
S.Switch3_0 ...
S.Switch3_1
L826
S.Switch3_sel
0: Source(L824)
1: Source(L825)
Free_FBs.Switch3.I
L827, L828
S.Switch4_0 ...
S.Switch4_1
L829
S.Switch4_sel
2 sources for the inputs of the 4th free changeover switch. The output is
Value
0000
Type I
Chart 460, 5
Type I
Chart 460, 7
0: Source(L827)
1: Source(L828)
Free_FBs.Switch4.I
L830 ... .L832
Sources of the 1st AND-OR logic in Chart 425. Output is B1830.
S.AND_OR1_1 ...
S.AND_OR1_3
Free_FBs.andOR1.I1
Free_FBs.ANDor1.I1 ... I2
L833 ... .L835
Sources of the 2nd AND-OR logic in Chart 425. Output is B1833.
S.AND_OR2_1 ...
S.AND_OR2_3
Free_FBs.andOR2.I1

Value
0000
Type I
Chart 460, 7
Type I
Chart 460, 6
Type I
Chart 460, 6
103
4.3
TC
0000
0001
0003
0004
0005
0020
0021
0097
0098
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0134
0140
0148
0149
0150
0152
0153
0154
0160
0161
0162
0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0179
0186
0188
0189
0190
0192
0193
0194
0195
Connector list
Chart
30,2
30,2
160,7
160,8
160,7
60,8
70,7
90,3
90,3
90,7
90,7
100.7
100.7
100.7
100,8
100,8
90,7
90,7
100,3
100,3
100,3
100,3
100,3
100,3
110,7
120,8
120,5
70,7
70,7
60,7
60,4
60,4
60,4
75,6
75,6
75,6
520,2
520,4
520,5
520,7
520,8
60,2
115,3
90,6
90,2
60,2
70,3
70,3
70,3
75,4
75,5
75,4
75,4
104
Path Name
Constant.FALSE.Q
Constant.TRUE.Q
CONTR.ErrorMask.Q
CONTR.WarnMaske.Q
CONTR.Stoerung.Q
CONTR.ErrorNAVSslave.Q
CONTR.ErrorNAVSMaster.Q
CONTR.Zus_Lage-RS.Q
CONTR.OR_Sync.Q
CONTR.SyncFlipFlop.QN
CONTR.SyncFlipFlop.Q
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.QU
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.QM
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.QL
SYNCO2.DisplValid.Q
SYNCO2.Displace.DC
CONTR.Lage_RS.Q
CONTR.WR-Freigabe.Q
SYNCO1.SignNmaster.QU
SYNCO1.SignNmaster.QE
SYNCO1.SignNmaster.QL
SYNCO1.SignNslave.QU
SYNCO1.SignNslave.QE
SYNCO1.SignNslave.QL
SYNCO2.AngleLimit.Q
SYNCO2.SpeedCtrlLimit.Q
CONTR.SCONI.Q
SYNCO2.Master.SS
CONTR.Puls_SS_Master.Q
SYNCO2.Slave.SS
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.QL
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.QE
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.QU
SYNCO2.dnErrSlave.Q
SYNCO2.dnError.Q
SYNCO2.dnErrMaster.Q
MUX_B.MUX_VersatzReset.Q
MUX_B.MUX_TippFreigabe.Q
MUX_B.MUX_WReglerFreig.Q
MUX_B.MUX_LageReset.Q
MUX_B.MUX_SyncSignal.Q
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q4
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q7
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q1
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q2
SYNCO2.Pos_Slave_Abs.SN
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.QL
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.QE
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.QU
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.QU
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.QM
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.QL
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.QU
Significance
BOOL constant FALSE
BOOL constant TRUE
Fault
Alarm
No fault
Error, speed sensing slave
Error, speed sensing master
Position reset
Automatic start synchronization, inverse
Automatic start synchronization
Displacement > synchronism threshold (H103)
Displacement within threshold range
Displacement < synchronism threshold (H103) (negative)
Synchronism reached
Displacement determined
Angular controller inhibit
n_slave > 0
n_slave = 0
n_slave < 0
n_master > 0
n_master = 0
n_master < 0
Position master drive set when synchronized
Pulse extension, position master set when synchronized
Slave position set when synchronized
Position, slave < 0
0 < slave position < threshold
Slave position > threshold (H105)
Speed deviation, slave
Speed deviation
Speed deviation, master
Output, multiplexer displacement reset
Output, multiplexer jog enable
Output, multiplexer angular controller enable
Output, multiplexer reset position
Output, multiplexer synchronizing command
Reset position difference
Jog enable
Inverter enable
Sync command
Slave position negative
Position master < 0
0 < position master threshold (H107)
Position master > threshold (H107)
nslave > range
Slave speed within the permissible range
nslave < range
nmaster > range

TC
0196
0197
0199
0209
0211
0212
0300
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310
0311
0312
0313
0314
0315
0320
0321
0322
0323
0324
0325
0326
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0360
0361
0362
0400
0401
0402
0403
0405
0480
0481
0482
0483
0484
0485
0486
0487
0488
Chart
75,5
75,4
70,8
60,7
72,2
72,2
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
300,7
300,4
300,4
400,4
400,4
400,4
400,4
400,7
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
Path Name
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.QM
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.QL
SYNCO2.Pos_Master_Abs.SN
CONTR.Puls_SS_Slave.Q
IN_AENC.S_AENC.QF
IN_AENC.M_AENC.QF
IF_Peer.Steuerwort1.Q1
IF_Peer.invSteuerwort.Q1
IF_Peer.Timeout_Peer.Q
IF_Peer.Empf_PEER.QTS
IF_Peer.Send_PEER.QTS
IF_COM.Empf-COM.QTS
IF_COM.E_init_inv.Q
IF_COM.Send_COM.QTS
IF_COM.S_init_inv.Q
IF_COM.Timeout_CB.Q
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q1
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q2
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q3
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q4
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q5
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q6
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q7
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q8
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q9
Significance
Master speed in the permissible range
nmaster < range
Position master negative
Extended pulse, slave position set when synchronized
Fault word of the absolute value encoder sensing, slave
Fault word of the absolute value encoder sensing, master
Peer CTW.0
Peer CTW.1
Peer CTW.2
Peer CTW.3
Peer CTW.4
Peer CTW.5
Peer CTW.6
Peer CTW.7
Peer CTW.8
Peer CTW.9
Peer CTW.10
Peer CTW.11
Peer CTW.12
Peer CTW.13
Peer CTW.14
Peer CTW.15
Peer CTW.0 inverse
Peer CTW.1 inverse
Peer CTW.2 inverse
Peer CTW.3 inverse
Peer CTW.4 inverse
Peer CTW.5 inverse
Peer CTW.6 inverse
Peer CTW.7 inverse
Peer CTW.8 inverse
Peer CTW.9 inverse
Peer CTW.10 inverse
Peer CTW.11 inverse
Peer CTW.12 inverse
Peer CTW.13 inverse
Peer CTW.14 inverse
Peer CTW.15 inverse
Timeout peer
Peer receive initialized
Peer send initialized
CB receive initialized
CB receive not initialized
CB send initialized
CB send not initialized
Timeout CB
CU status2.0
CU status2.1
CU status2.2
CU status2.3
CU status2.4
CU status2.5
CU status2.6
CU status2.7
CU status2.8

105
TC
0489
0490
0491
0492
0493
0494
0495
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0510
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0530
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
0536
0537
0538
0539
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
Chart
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
220,3
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
90,8
Path Name
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q10
IF_CU.Empf_BASE.QTS
IF_CU.Send_BASE.QTS
IF_CU.Empf_BASE.QT
IF_CU.DRIVE.BS
IF_CU.CU_Einit_inv.Q
IF_CU.CU_Sinit_inv.Q
IF_CU.CU_Timeout_inv.Q
IF_CU.CU_RDY_INV.Q
IF_CU.Zustandswort1.Q1
IF_CU.Q_ext_Error.Q
IF_CU.Zustand1_inv.Q1
IF_CU.n-Reg Freigabe.Q
0547
0550
0551
0552
0553
560,4
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
MUX_CU.Mux_Enable_nRegl.Q
IF_CU.SteuerwortSPA440.Q1
106
Significance
CU status2.9
CU status2.10
CU status2.11
CU status2.12
CU status2.13
CU status2.14
CU status2.15
CU receive initialized
CU send initialized
CU timeout
CU in operation
CU receive not initialized
CU send not initialized
CU no timeout
CU not operational
CU status1.0
CU status1.1
CU status1.2
CU status1.3
CU status1.4
CU status1.5
CU status1.6
CU status1.7
CU status1.8
CU status1.9
CU status1.10
CU status1.11
CU status1.12
CU status1.13
CU status1.14
CU status1.15
External fault in control word for CU
CU status1.0 inverse
Speed controller CU; enabling the speed controller in the basic
drive
Output, multiplexer speed controller enable for the basic drive
CTW from CU.0
CTW from CU.1
CTW from CU.2
CTW from CU.3

TC
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
0560
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0570
0571
0572
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0601
0602
0603
0604
0607
0608
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0625
0626
0627
0631
0632
0633
0634
0635
Chart
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
53,4
53,4
53,8
53,8
52,8
52,8
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
53,4
53,4
53,8
53,8
52,8
Path Name
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q1
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q2
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q3
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q4
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q5
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q6
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q7
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q8
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q9
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q10
T400_EA.BinOut.Q1
T400_EA.BinOut.Q2
T400_EA.BinOut.Q3
T400_EA.BinOut.Q4
T400_EA.BinOut.Q7
T400_EA.BinOut.Q8
T400_EA.BinInput.Q1
T400_EA.BinInput.Q2
T400_EA.BinInput.Q3
T400_EA.BinInput.Q4
T400_EA.BinInput.Q5
T400_EA.BinInput.Q6
T400_EA.BinInput.Q7
T400_EA.BinInput.Q8
T400_EA.BinInput.Q9
T400_EA.BinInput.Q10
T400_EA.Klemme46inv.Q
Significance
CTW from CU.4
CTW from CU.5
CTW from CU.6
CTW from CU.7
CTW from CU.8
CTW from CU.9
CTW from CU.10
CTW from CU.11
CTW from CU.12
CTW from CU.13
CTW from CU.14
CTW from CU.15
CTW from CU.0 inverse
Terminal 46
Terminal 47
Terminal 48
Terminal 49
Coarse pulse 1 (terminal 84)
BinInput 1 (terminal 53) inverse
Terminal 46 inverse
Terminal 47 inverse
Terminal 48 inverse
Terminal 49 inverse
Coarse pulse 1 (terminal 84) inverse

107
TC
0636
0650
0651
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
0698
0699
0700
0703
0708
0709
0710
0713
0728
0730
0732
0733
0734
0735
0743
0744
0745
0746
0748
0749
0750
0751
0760
0761
0762
0763
0764
0765
0766
0767
0768
0769
0770
0771
0772
0773
0774
0775
Chart
52,8
530,3
530,3
530,3
530,3
530,7
530,7
530,7
530,7
540,3
540,3
540,3
540,3
540,7
540,7
540,7
540,7
460,2
460,2
460,2
460,5
490,8
490,8
460,2
460,5
490,8
490,8
460,8
460,8
460,5
460,5
480,8
480,8
480,8
480,8
480,8
480,3
480,3
480,3
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
108
Path Name
MUX_CU.Mux_STW1_B0.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF2.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF2.QN
Free_FBs.AND1.Q
Free_FBs.AND2.Q
Free_FBs.Edge1.QN
Free_FBs.Edge1.QP
Free_FBs.OR1.Q
Free_FBs.OR2.Q
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.Q
Free_FBs.OffDelay1.Q
Free_FBs.Not1.Q
Free_FBs.Not2.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.QN
Free_FBs.Compare.QE
Free_FBs.Compare.QU
Free_FBs.Compare.QL
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.QU
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.QL
Free_FBs.Comp2.QU
Free_FBs.Comp2.QM
Free_FBs.Comp2.QL
Free_FBs.Free_W_B_1.Q1
Significance
Output multiplexer, control word1 bit 0
Output multiplexer, control word1 bit1
Output multiplexer ,control word1 bit13
RSFF1_Q (output, free RS flipflop)
RSFF1_QN (inv. output free RS flipflop)
AND1_Q (output, free AND logic gate)
Edge detector: falling edge identified
Edge detector: rising edge identified
Q_OR1 (output, free OR logic gate)
Output, power-on delay
Output, power-off delay
Not1_Q (output, free inverter)
Output, free comparator: X = Y
Output, free comparator: X > Y
Output, free comparator: X < Y
Output, free limiter: upper limit reached
Output, free limiter: lower limit reached
Output, free comparator: input quantity > range
Output, free comparator: input quantity in range
Output, free comparator: input quantity < range
FreeWord_0
FreeWord_1
FreeWord_2
FreeWord_3
FreeWord_4
FreeWord_5
FreeWord_6
FreeWord_7
FreeWord_8
FreeWord_9
FreeWord_10
FreeWord_11
FreeWord_12
FreeWord_13
FreeWord_14
FreeWord_15

TC
0800
0801
0802
0803
0804
0805
0806
0807
0808
0809
0810
0811
0812
0813
0814
0815
0817
0818
0820
0821
0822
0823
0824
0825
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0835
0840
0841
0842
0843
0844
0845
0846
0847
0848
0849
0850
0851
0852
0853
0854
0855
0860
0861
0862
0863
0864
Chart
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
480,7
480,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
Path Name
IF_COM.Steuerwort1.Q1
Free_FBs.Integrator.QU
Free_FBs.Integrator.QL
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q1
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q2
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q3
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q4
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q5
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q6
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q7
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q8
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q9
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q10
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q11
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q12
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q13
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q14
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q15
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q16
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q1
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q2
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q3
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q4
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q5
Significance
CB control W1.0
CB control W1.1
CB control W1.2
CB control W1.3
CB control W1.4
CB control W1.5
CB control W1.6
CB control W1.7
CB control W1.8
CB control W1.9
CB control W1.10
CB control W1.11
CB control W1.12
CB control W1.13
CB control W1.14
CB control W1.15
Free integrator at the upper limit value
Free integrator at the lower limit value
CB control W2.0
CB control W2.1
CB control W2.2
CB control W2.3
CB control W2.4
CB control W2.5
CB control W2.6
CB control W2.7
CB control W2.8
CB control W2.9
CB control W2.10
CB control W2.11
CB control W2.12
CB control W2.13
CB control W2.14
CB control W2.15
CB CTW1.0 inverse
CB CTW1.1 inverse
CB CTW1.2 inverse
CB CTW1.3 inverse
CB CTW1.4 inverse
CB CTW1.5 inverse
CB CTW1.6 inverse
CB CTW1.7 inverse
CB CTW1.8 inverse
CB CTW1.9 inverse
CB CTW1.10 inverse
CB CTW1.11 inverse
CB CTW1.12 inverse
CB CTW1.13 inverse
CB CTW1.14 inverse
CB CTW1.15 inverse
CB CTW2.0 inverse
CB CTW2.1 inverse
CB CTW2.2 inverse
CB CTW2.3 inverse
CB CTW2.4 inverse

109
TC
0865
0866
0867
0868
0869
0870
0871
0872
0873
0874
0875
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1830
1833
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2010
2011
2020
2021
2025
2026
2027
2096
2246
2303
2306
2327
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2346
Chart
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
460,8
460,8
30,2
30,2
30,2
160,6
160,8
40,7
160,4
160,6
60,4
70,5
60,7
70,7
52,8
220,4
220,8
100.8
180,2
570,3
570,2
310,8
300,7
300,7
300,7
300,7
300,7
310,2
110
Path Name
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q6
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q7
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q8
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q9
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q10
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q11
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q12
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q13
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q14
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q15
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q16
Free_FBs.andOR1.Q
Free_FBs.andOR2.Q
Constant.INT_Const.Y7
Constant.WORD_Const.Y5
CONTR.ErrorMask.QS
CONTR.WarnMaske.QS
CONTR.Statuswort.QS
SYNCO2.SlavePulse.Y
SYNCO2.MasterPulse.Y
SYNCO2.Slave.YFC
SYNCO2.Master.YFC
SYNCO2.Displace.FC
IF_CU.Q_ZWort1.Y
MUX_Peer.MUX_Peer_W1.Y
MUX_Peer.Festwert_Peer.Y
IF_Peer.PZD2_PZD3.YWL
IF_Peer.PZD2_PZD3.YWH
IF_Peer.STW_NOP.Y
Significance
CB CTW2.5 inverse
CB CTW2.6 inverse
CB CTW2.7 inverse
CB CTW2.8 inverse
CB CTW2.9 inverse
CB CTW2.10 inverse
CB CTW2.11 inverse
CB CTW2.12 inverse
CB CTW2.13 inverse
CB CTW2.14 inverse
CB CTW2.15 inverse
FreeWord2_0
FreeWord2_1
FreeWord2_2
FreeWord2_3
FreeWord2_4
FreeWord2_5
FreeWord2_6
FreeWord2_7
FreeWord2_8
FreeWord2_9
FreeWord2_10
FreeWord2_11
FreeWord2_12
FreeWord2_13
FreeWord2_14
FreeWord2_15
AND_OR1 (output, AND-OR logic)
Constant, word 0
Constant, word 1
Constant, word 16#FFFF
Error status (for the basic drive)
Alarm status (for the basic drive)
Status word, angular synchronism
Error bits
Alarm bits
Encoder pulses, slave
Encoder pulses, master
Error code, slave-speed sensing
Error code, master
Status binary input (binary inputs and inverse values)
Control word1 CU
Control word2 CU
Error identification, displacement calculation
Status word 1CU
Output, multiplexer for 1st PZD send peer-to-peer
Fixed value for PZD1 send peer-to-peer
Status word, peer
PZD1 from peer
PZD2 from peer
PZD3 from peer
PZD4 from peer
PZD5 from peer
Control word peer

TC
2442
2443
2444
2445
2460
2461
2466
2467
2500
2502
2504
2506
2508
2509
2510
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2605
Chart
560,4
560,2
560,7
560,6
420,2
420,6
430,4
430,8
230,4
230,4
230,4
230,4
230,4
230,5
230,5
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
490,6
Path Name
MUX_CB.MUX_COM_W1.Y
MUX_CB.Festwerte_CB.Y1
MUX_CB.MUX_COM_W4.Y
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y3
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y4
IF_CU.Sollwert_W2.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W3.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W5.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W6.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W8.Y
IF_CU.DW_W_CU.YWL
IF_CU.DW_W_CU.YWH
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y1
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y2
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y3
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y4
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y5
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y6
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y7
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y8
IF_CU.VerteilCU_CB.Y1
Free_FBs.DW_W1.YWH
2606
490,6 Free_FBs.DW_W1.YWL
2607
2608
2647
470,2 Free_FBs.ADDI_1.Y
470,2 Free_FBs.SUBI_1.Y
490,5 Free_FBs.R_I1.Y
2706
2707
2766
450,7 IF_USS.USS_Dummy.Y1
490,8 Free_FBs.Float_N2.Y
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2812
2813
2814
2822
2823
2824
2825
2827
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
470,2
470,2
470,2
440,3
440,3
440,3
440,3
440,7
IF_COM.Verteilung.Y1
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y1
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y2
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.Y
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.MOD
Free_FBs.MULI_1.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W2.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W3.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W5.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W6.Y
IF_COM.Ist_RI.Y
Significance
Output, multiplexer word1 CB
Fixed value for CB word 1
CB CTW1 (control word1 from CB)
Status word1 CB
Status word2 CB
Setpoint1 CU N2
Setpoint2 CU N2
Setpoint3 CU N2
Setpoint4 CU N2
Setpoint5 CU N2
Setpoint6 low CU
Setpoint6 high CU
PZD1 from CU
PZD2 from CU
PZD3 from CU
PZD4 from CU
PZD5 from CU
PZD6 from CU
PZD7 from CU
PZD8 from CU
PZD9 from CU
PZD10 from CU
PZD11 from CU
PZD12 from CU
PZD13 from CU
PZD14 from CU
DW_W1 high (output, double word word converter high word)
DW_W1 low (output, double word word converter low word)
ADDI_Y (output, free adder type int)
SUBI_Y (output, free subtractor type int)
R_I1 (output, floating-point integer converter)
PZD1 USS
PZD2 USS
R_N2 (output, floating-point N2 converter)
PZD1 from CB
PZD2 from CB
PZD3 from CB
PZD4 from CB
PZD5 from CB
PZD6 from CB
PZD7 from CB
PZD8 from CB
PZD9 from CB
PZD10 from CB
DIVI_1 Y (output, free divider type int)
DIVI_1 (modulo output, free divider type int)
MULI_1Y (output, free multiplier type int)
Actual value1 CB
Actual value2 CB
Actual value3 CB
Actual value4 CB
Actual value R_I CB

111
TC
2828
2829
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2971
2972
2973
2974
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3040
3043
3044
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3056
3060
3061
3062
3066
3070
3073
3074
3076
3080
3085
3091
3094
3095
3117
3118
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3129
Chart
440,4
440,4
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,2
30,2
30,2
30,2
30,2
60,5
70,4
60,8
60,7
60,8
60,8
60,8
60,7
500,3
30,7
80,4
80,1
500,5
30,7
500,4
110,2
110,4
80,2
80,2
100,7
30,7
500,8
30,7
115,7
115,2
500,7
120,8
100,8
100,8
100,8
60,8
60,8
110,8
110,5
110,7
110,4
60,8
115,7
112
Path Name
IF_COM.Ist_DW_W.YWH
IF_COM.Ist_DW_W.YWL
Constant.Float_Const.Y1
SYNCO2.SlaveNnenn.Y
SYNCO2.MasterNnenn.Y
SYNCO2.n_Slave.Y
SYNCO2.Master.Y
SYNCO2.Slave.YP
SYNCO2.Master.YP
SYNCO2.Slave.Y
SYNCO2.Master.Y
MUXsoll.MUX_Uebersetzung.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y1
SYNCO1.UE4PRO.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y3
MUXsoll.MUX_RelUebersetz.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y2
MUXsoll.MUX_Versatz.Y
SYNCO2.Q_Versatz.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y4
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y5
SYNCO1.DREFSS.Y
SYNCO1.FixVersatz.Y
MUXsoll.MUX_Leitsollwert.Y
SYNCO1.fixLeitsoll.Y
SYNCO1.SREFSM.Y
MUXsoll.MUX_BAusgleich.Y
SYNCO2.Displace.CVP
SYNCO2.Displace.DV
SYNCO2.Displace.DVD
SYNCO2.Slave.YDP
SYNCO2.YDP_neg.Y
SYNCO2.PT_Angle.Y
SYNCO2.AngleKP.Y
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.Y
Significance
Fixed value I1 (16 bit, signed)
Fixed value I2
Fixed value I3
Fixed value I4
Fixed value I5
Fixed value I6
Fixed value W1 (16 bit, unsigned)
Fixed value W2
Fixed value W3
Fixed value W4
Floating-point constant 0.0
Floating-point constant -1.0
Rated speed, slave
Rated speed, master
Speed, slave
Speed, master
Position, slave
Position, master
Speed, slave normalized
Speed, master normalized
Output multiplexer ratio
Fixed value ratio
Ratio with supplementary ratio and relative ratio
Fixed value supplementary ratio
Output multiplexer relative ratio
Fixed value relative ratio
Output multiplexer displacement setpoint
Displacement setpoint before the ramp-function generator
Displacement setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Value for ratio (without rel. ratio; without supplementary ratio)
Value for relative ratio
Direction of rotation-dependent displacement
Fixed value displacement
Output, multiplexer master setpoint
Fixed value, master setpoint
Master setpoint, smoothed
Master setpoint
Output, multiplexer inertia compensation
DT1 (n_set)
Correction pulses (to correct the position difference)
Displacement - position difference
Inverse position difference
Position difference
System deviation of the angular controller
I component of the angular controller
Position difference smoothed
speed septpoint after the ramp-function generator

TC
3130
3136
3137
3145
3146
3150
3151
3152
3153
3176
3186
3199
3223
3225
3227
3229
3234
3304
3305
3330
3332
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3452
3454
3456
3551
3553
3555
3570
3589
Chart
115,2
115,4
120,2
120,6
60,8
120,8
120,4
115,8
120,7
115,7
60,2
70,8
50,6
50,6
50,6
50,6
100,5
570,6
570,8
300,3
300,3
550,3
550,5
550,6
550,8
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
Path Name
CONTR.TIPPEN.Y
SYNCO1.SREFR.Y
SYNCO2.NsollLimit.Y
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.YI
SYNCO2.NslaveFilter.Y
SYNCO2.SetpSwitch.Y
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.Y
SYNCO1.Tippen-Schalter.Y
SYNCO2.Pos_Slave_Abs.Y
SYNCO2.Pos_Master_Abs.Y
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.Y
T400_EA.AE2_FILT.Y
T400_EA.AE3_FILT.Y
T400_EA.AE4_FILT.Y
SYNCO2.Displ_Ist.Y
IF_Peer.PZD2_PZD3.YR
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W2.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W3.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W5.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W6.Y
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.Y
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.Y
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.Y
IF_CU.CU_DI_R.Y
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.Y
3591
3604
170,7 IF_CU.CU_I_R.Y
490,5 Free_FBs.I_R1.Y
3618
3619
3666
3667
3706
3716
3740
3742
3747
3753
3763
510,4
510,7
51,3
51,3
460,2
460,4
480,2
480,5
480,8
480,3
490,7
3765
490,5 Free_FBs.Free_N2_R.Y
3786
3789
3792
3794
3796
3799
3802
470,4
470,4
470,2
470,4
470,6
470,6
470,6
MUX_AnaOut.MUX_DAC_1.Y
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.Y
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.Y
Free_FBs.Switch1.Y
Free_FBs.Switch2.Y
Free_FBs.FreePT1.Y
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.Y
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.Y
Free_FBs.Kennlin.Y
Free_FBs.Free_N4_R.Y
Free_FBs.ADD1.Y
Free_FBs.ADD2.Y
Free_FBs.SUB1.Y
Free_FBs.SUB2.Y
Free_FBs.MUL1.Y
Free_FBs.MUL2.Y
Free_FBs.DIV1.Y
Significance
Jog setpoint (fixed value)
Setpoint speed, slave
Speed setpoint limited
Integral component of the speed controller
Speed, slave smoothed
Speed controller system deviation
Setpoint for the basic drive (n_set or Mset)
KP speed controller
Jog setpoint
Absolute position actual value of the slave
Absolute value (position, master)
AE1 smoothed
AE2 smoothed
AE3 smoothed
AE4 smoothed
Differential position value to determine the displacement
Output multiplexer for 1st floating-point value, send peer
Output multiplexer for 2nd floating-point value, send peer
Peer float 1 (receive)
Setpoint1 CB
Setpoint2 CB
Setpoint3 CB
Setpoint4 CB
Actual value1 CU
Actual value2 CU
Actual value3 CU
CU DW_R (double word as floating-point value)
CU N4_R (double word in the N4 normalization floating-point)
CU actual value_I_R
I_R1 (output, integer floating-point converter)
Output, multiplexer DAC1
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
Switch1 (output, free changeover switch)
PT1_out (output, free lowpass filter)
Output, bandstop
Output, free limiter
Output, free 2-point characteristic
DW_float (output, double word floating-point converter)
Word_float (output, word floating-point converter)
ADD_1 (output, free adder)
SUB_1 (output, free subtractor)
MUL_1 (output, free multiplier)
DIV_1 (output, free divider)

113
TC
3804
3818
3819
3821
3825
3827
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
4114
4115
4116
4125
4214
4215
4216
4225
4300
5000
5001
5086
5087
5088
5089
5330
5332
5567
Chart
470,6
410,7
480,7
410,7
460,6
460,8
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,5
30,2
30,2
80,4
80,4
80,7
80,7
300,7
300,7
170,6
5814
5816
470,2 Free_FBs.MULI_1.YDI
490,6 Free_FBs.WDW1.Y
5981
5982
5983
5984
30,8
30,8
30,8
30,8
114
Path Name
Free_FBs.DIV2.Y
IF_COM.Sollw_IR.Y
Free_FBs.Integrator.Y
IF_COM.Sollw_N4.Y
Free_FBs.Switch3.Y
Free_FBs.Switch4.Y
Constant.Const_Float.Y1
IN_AENC.S_AENC.Y
IN_AENC.S_AENC.YP
IN_AENC.S_AENC.YRC
IN_AENC.S_POS.Y
IN_AENC.M_AENC.Y
IN_AENC.M_AENC.YP
IN_AENC.M_AENC.YRC
IN_AENC.M_POS.Y
IN_AENC.DELTA_Pos.Y
Constant.DINT_Const.Y8
SYNCO1.FEIN_NM.Y
SYNCO1.FEIN_DN.Y
IF_Peer.PZD2_PZD3.YDI
IF_CU.W_DW.Y
Significance
Setpoint I_R CB
Output, free integrator
Setpoint DW CB
Fixed value1 R1 (floating-point)
Position actual value AENC1, slave [length units]
Position actual value AENC2, master [length units]
Differential position master slave [length units]
Double word, constant 0
Fixed value fine ratio, numerator
Fixed value fine ratio, denominator
Ratio, numerator
Ratio, denominator
Peer DW1 (receive)
Peer DW2 (receive)
Output of the word double word conversion for PZD from the
CU
MULI_1 (double word output, free multiplier type int)
W_DW1 (output, word double word converter)
Fixed value DI1 (double word)
Fixed value DI2
Fixed value DI3
Fixed value DI4

Start-up
Start-up
WARNING
Only start to commission the system, if adequate and effective measures have
been made to ensure that the system and drive can be safely electrically and
mechanically used.
Ensure that all of the safety- and EMERGENCY OFF signals are connected
and effective and that the drive can be powered-down at any time.
5.1
Commissioning, general
The principal commissioning sequence is shown as follows:
Commissioning the basic drive

Parameterization, basic drive f. oper. w/ the T400
Commission the open-loop control
Parameterize the setpoint input
Commission the closed-loop technology control
Fig. 5-1
Commissioning sequence
We recommend that the sequence, shown in Fig. 5-1, is maintained when

starting-up the equipment, so that possible problems which occur, can be
more easily pinpointed.
Commissioning,
basic drive
The basic drive should be commissioned according to the Operating

Instructions of the drive converter (e.g. Lit.[1]).
Parameterization,
basic drive for use
with T400
In order to be able to use the SPA440 standard software package, the

parameters, listed in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 must be set on the basic
drive for the setpoint/actual value channels and for the CU control.
All of the enable signals, used in the standard software package, are
listed in Table 5-1, and should be switched-in or set according to the
particular application.

115
Start-up
Control
Parameter
Explanation
Enable:
Synchronizing
H174
Angular controller
H172, H118
External and internal enable
Speed controller
H140 = 1
Speed controller activated on T400
COMBOARD
H409
Enable COMBOARD communications
Peer-to-peer
H309
Enable peer communications
Jog
H171
Enable Jog
Reset:
Position
(master/slave)
H173
H170
Displacement
calculation
Table 5-1
Control signals
The enabling and appropriate input for particular functions must be set.
Notes
Flowcharts
An oscilloscope should be used to evaluate the control quality and, if

required, to check the pulse encoder signals. Further, the displacement
can be easily visualized by plotting the synchronizing marks (zero pulses)
in 2 channels. When setting displacement values, a storage oscilloscope
or a stroboscope is extremely helpful.
The flowcharts in Fig. 5-1 show the sequence when commissioning the
three main functions - speed controller, angular controller and
synchronization.
Information on the following flowcharts:
116
Signficance:
Additional information under n) at the
transition to the particular flowchart

Start-up
5.2
Commissioning, closed-loop speed control

Start
First time that the basic driveis commissioned

- motor data, drive converter data
- if required, log-on the T400
CU signals an error?
ja
Basic drive interface

- setpoint channels according to Table 2.1
- actual value channels according to Table 2.2
F080, F070
Speed sensing
- H010 encoder pulses, slave
- H011 encoder pulses, master
- H012 rated speed, slave
- H013 rated speed, master
- H018 operating mode, slave speed sensing
- H019 operating mode, master speed sensing
- H022 coarse pulse mode, slave
- H023 coarse pulse mode, master
Check hardware
Power-down equipment
Power-down the equipment and power-up again

(accept initialization parameter)
Enable errors and alarms
- H003 fault mask
- H004 alarm mask
Define sources for setpoints
- H040 speed ratio
- H048 relative ratio
- H050 offset setpoint
- H070 master setpoint
- H080 inertia compensation
Define sources for control signals
- H170 offset reset
- H171 jog enable
- H172 ang. controller enable = 0 (actually, inhibit)
- H173 reset position
- H174 synchronizing command
Select process data to the basic drive
- H510 ... H525 control word 1
- H501 ... H509 normalization PZD1, 2, 3, 5 and 8
Scaling of the analog inputs used
- H210 ... H220 scaling and offsets
- H222 ... H228 smoothing times
A
Fig. 5-2
Start-up, closed-loop speed control (start-A): Speed actual value sensing, setpoint

117
Start-up
ON
Enter master setpoint, approx. 0.05
(e.g. via fixed value)
Drive rotates?
Yes
No
No
Setpoint, ON command, all

enable signals available?
No
Yes
Speed actual value

present? (d014)
CU torque limits high enough?
OFF
No
Yes
e
Speed sign
correct?
Slowly increase the torque limit

until the drive rotates or the
maximum value is reached
No
Yes
Yes
No
OFF
Check tracks A, B ; if
required interchange
Speed and torque

sign the same?
Drive overloaded,
locked, blocked?
Yes
Yes
Drive rotates in the

required direction?
No
OFF
ja
g
B
Fig. 5-3
118
No
Power-down unit
Power down
Remove cause
d
A
Commissioning the closed-loop speed control (A-B): Drive rotates, torque

Start-up
Does the
speed actual value
d014 and setpoint
d136 coincide?
Yes
h
Yes
No
Check:
pulse encoder setting;
torque limits
Setpoint
limiting?
No
Does the slave drive
run smoothly ?
Yes
No
Optimize the speed
controller
Yes
Yes
Required torque
selected?
Satisfactory result
attainable ?
No
No
Increase the torque limits by

between 5% to 10% until the
required torque is reached
OFF
i
Rated or maximum speed
reached?
No
Yes
Set the ramp-up and ramp-down
times of the speed ramp-function
generator of the basic drive
(e.g. CUMC: P462, P464)
Increase the speed

setpoint by 0.05 .. 0.1
up to max. speed
Fig. 5-4
Commissioning the closed-loop speed control (B-C): Speed controller optimization, torque limit

119
Start-up
Speed control
subsequently optimized?
No
Optimize controller
Yes
Does jog function ?
No
Setpoints, check ON/OFF

control
Yes
Fixed ratio?
ja
No
For each requested ratio, approach the maximum
demanded operating speed
Yes
Master speed = slave speed

d015 = d014 ?
No
Sources for
the ratio correct?
(H040, H048)
No

control
Yes
Yes
Change the ratio or reduce
the master setpoint
Setpoint speed = master setpoint /

d136 = d076 / d044 ?
Yes
Refer to the KP adaption,
speed controller
(Section 3.5.4)
Is synchronism used at very low

speeds?
No
For safety, check the pulse encoder
signals
Speed control start-up completed
Fig. 5-5
120
Commissioning the closed-loop speed control (C-end): Ratio

Start-up
The fault/error causes specified here represent help when troubleshooting
the closed-loop speed control; however, other causes are conceivable.
The following table provides an overview of frequently required basic drive
parameters when troubleshooting. Also refer to the setpoint- and actual
value channels in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
Parameter
T400 log-on
COMBOARD log-on
Configuration, serial interface
Configuration, CB1 /CBP
Control word 1
Control word 2
Status word 1
Status word 2
Closed-loop control mode (V/Hz, ..)
Speed limit values
n_max
n_min
Torque limit values
M_max / M1
M_min / M2
Maximum current
Speed ramp-funct. gener. ramp-up time
ramp-down time
Reference speed
Reference torque
Establish factory setting
Motor identification routine
Table 5-2
CU 2
CU MC
P090
P091
P682 ...
P695 ...
r550
r551
r552
r553
P163
P452
P453,P457
P492
P498
Automatic
Automatic
P700 ...
P711 ...
r550
r551
r552
r553
P367
P452
P453
P263
P264
P128
P462
P464
P353
P354
P462
P464
P485
P052
P052
CU VC
DC-Master
r650
r652
r653
r654
P642, P632
P643, P633
List of important parameters for troubleshooting in the basic drive
a) Basic drive signals fault F080:

T400 correctly inserted, correct slot? T400 defective? SPA440 standard
software package on T400? Does T400 have to be logged-on? CB
correctly inserted, correct slot? CB defective?
b) Basic drive signals fault F070:
If parameterized (P91=3), correct interface module type? SCB1/2 inserted
correctly for the selected protocol (P682)? Correct slot? Hardware
defective? If required, replace the module
c) Drive does not rotate when an ON command is output and a setpoint
is present:
Check whether all of the required control word enable signals are present
(setpoint-, inverter-, ramp-function generator enabled, clockwise/counterclockwise direction of rotation, etc.):
Control word =
16#9C7F
Setpoint available (d074)? Ratio correctly entered (d136)? Setpoint
channel correctly set in the basic drive? Correct frequency limits?
d) Drive does not rotate, although all of the enable signals present:
Can the drive be operated V/Hz-controlled or closed-loop frequency
controlled?

121
Start-up
If required, establish the factory setting and carry-out a motor
identification routine.
e) No speed actual value:
Wiring correct (ground connections)?
For the slave drive: Are the speed encoder cables correctly connected
to the CU (for VC: Connector X132)?
For the master drive: T400 connecting cables O.K.?
Power supply voltage at the pulse encoder?
Are all of the signals available with respect to ground and do they have
the correct phase position (oscilloscope!)?
Yes:
Defective technology module? Replace the technology
module
No:
Check the pulse encoder and cables
f) Polarity of the torque setpoint- and speed actual value different:
Prerequisite: The motor is not driven:
If the drive converter and pulse encoder are correctly connected, for a
positive torque setpoint, the motor must turn clockwise (when viewing the
drive side), and a positive speed actual value must be obtained.
Otherwise, tracks A and B of the pulse encoder must be interchanged
(slave), or a negative value entered at H012 (rated speed, slave) (this is
accepted by powering-down and powering-up the unit!).
Note: For motors running under no-load conditions or under low
conditions, fluctuations can occur, also in the polarity (sign).
g) The drive does not rotate in the required direction:
Power-down the unit, change the phase sequence at the motor/drive
converter (point f) check!),
Reverse the direction of rotation, speed actual value by
- interchanging pulse encoder track A/B or,
- reverse the polarity at H012 (rated speed, slave)
h) Setpoint limiting is effective:
The quotient of the master setpoint (d074) and the ratio (d044) may not
exceed or fall below the setpoint limits, min/max frequency.
i) Poor optimization:
Execute the motor identification run and optimize the speed controller.
Are all of the units which are used O.K.?
Have all of the cables (especially the pulse encoder cables) been carefully
routed and shielded, especially the long encoder cables?
Does the subordinate (lower level) closed-loop torque control operate
perfectly (test parameterization, motor data, etc.)?
Is the driven load mechanically O.K. (no play, elasticity, etc.)?
Is the pulse encoder mechanically O.K.?
k) Checking the pulse encoder signals:
The pulse encoder signals must be perfectly received (no noise) when
using the angular synchronous control. We therefore urgently recommend
that the following measurements are made using an oscilloscope (directly
at the terminals of the T400; refer to Function Charts 60 and 70):
1) At all speeds, the phase shift between tracks A and B of an encoder
must be 1 s.
2) Noise spikes (duration > 0.5 s) may not be present in the vicinity of
the switching threshold of the pulse encoder input circuit, i.e. not in the
122

Start-up
range B:
U/V
10
B
3
Fig. 5-6:
Signals of an incremental encoder with HTL signal level
3) If a synchronizing pulse is used, we recommend that an oscillogram

plot is made of it.
5.3
Commissioning the angular control

The fault causes, specified here are intended to help troubleshoot the
angular control; however, other causes are conceivable.
a) The differential position actual value quickly moves away from 0 after
the actual value sensing has been enabled (angular controller):
The pre-control has been correctly set, if the differential position actual
value only very slowly drifts away from zero without the angular controller
intervening. The prerequisites for this are:
- the master drive runs smoothly (speed controller optimization),
- the master setpoint corresponds to the master drive speed,
- the slave drive runs smoothly (speed controller optimization),
- when the master setpoint is entered as analog signal, the adaption is
correct
b) If the differential position actual value is too high, possible causes
could be:
- Speed controller goes to its limit?
Yes: correctly select the torque limits, remove the overload
condition
- Angular controller goes to its limit?
Yes: ensure that
frequency limit > [speed setpoint (d136) +
angular controller limit
(H112)] !
- If required adapt the enable threshold of the angular controller,
H118
c) Check the ratio which has been set and the data on the present ratio.
If possible, check, for example, the synchronizing pulses and a connected
process or material web. For example, does it continually move away
from the required position?

123
Start-up
Start
Set the largest ratio which is used (or fixed)
Set the angular controller limit to H112 = 0.0

Set "reset position" constant to 0 ;
source H173 = 0
ON
Enter the largest possible speed master setpoint
Enable the angular controller: H173 = 1
Inhibit the ang.controller, H173 = 0
The position difference

d124 only drifts slowly away?
No
Yes
Pre-control has been optimized
Inhibit the angular controller, H173 = 0
Set the angular controller limit H112 to the

required value (generally between 0.1 and 0.3)
Switch the angular controller into the P controller
mode: H110 = 1
Set the KP gain H113 to 0.0
Position difference smoothing, H117 = 4 ms
Fig. 5-7:
124
Commissioning the angular control (start-A): Basic setting

Start-up
A
Enable angular controller: H173 = 1
Optimize the angular controller (as PI controller:

H110 = 0)
- KP: H113
- integral action time Tn: H111
(refer to the next section)
Position difference
d124 within the required
tolerance?
No
Yes
No
Are different ratios used?
Yes
P-gain adaption (ratio)
- enter the largest/smallest ratio in H115 / H116
- after optimization, enter the associated KP values in H113 /
H114
a
Position difference
tolerance?
No
Yes
All of the different ratios

can be set?
No
Yes
All
required speeds can
be set?
No
Yes
Define the "reset position" source, H173
Angular controller
commissioning completed
Fig. 5-8
Commissioning the angular control (A-end): Ratio

125
Start-up
5.3.1
Information regarding optimizing the angular controller

Procedure:
1. If there are low to average demands placed on the control quality:
Set the experience value:
A KP of between 2 and 6 provides, for many applications, adequate
precision and dynamic performance.
2. For average up to high demands on the dynamic performance, or if
the experience value does not result in a satisfactory result:
-
Enter a master setpoint of 0
- Increase the P gain in steps of 2 until the slave drive starts to oscillate.
The speed actual value can be monitored at analog output 1 (terminals 97
/ 99). If the slave drive remains absolutely steady for a P gain > 2, then it
is necessary to excite oscillation by deflecting the motor from its quiescent
position. This can be realized, for example, by entering a jog setpoint
(H130, approx. 0.01; enable H171).
- Reduce the P gain H113 in steps of between 0.5 to 1 until oscillation
stops. Then multiply the value which was reached, by 0.5 to 0.7 and save
H113.
3. For high demands placed on the control quality:
- For high demands placed on the control quality, the speed actual
value must be extremely accurate, e. g. via analog output 1 (terminals 97
/ 99) trace the signal using a fast plotter or a storage oscilloscope. In this
case, the speed actual value is compensated by offset value H160 and
the analog output gain can be adapted using H161 so that the speed
ripple can be easily monitored.
- For average slave drive speeds, excite using the jog setpoint
(parameter H130 = 0.01), and monitor the transfer characteristic. The
simplest solution is to write an enable signal using a switch connected to
a digital input. Vary the P gain until a good result is achieved.
- Under certain circumstances, the optimization result can be improved
by increasing the position difference smoothing (H117). However,
generally the default value of 4 ms should be used.
4. Angular errors
- If the master setpoint is inaccurate, (e. g. if fed via an analog input or if
incorrectly adapted (rated speed)), the P control results in an angular
error which is dependent on the P gain. If this error causes disturbances,
the angular controller must be parameterized as PI controller (H110 = 0).
The integral action time should be set using parameter H111. Starting
with high values of Tn (approx. 5 s), the system should be optimized and
Tn changed towards lower values.
- If the ratio was incorrectly set, an enabled integral component would
drift away, i. e. would go to its limit.
126

Start-up
5.4
Commissioning synchronization
Prerequisite
When commissioning the synchronization, the speed- and angular control

must have been completely commissioned. The synchronizing function
must be inhibited (H174 = 0) if synchronization is not required.
Start
Set parameters (refer to Section 3.3.1)

- H091 ... H093 offset modes and correction pulse No.
- H100, H102 pulse numbers, master and slave
- H103 threshold for synchronism reached
- H174 source for synchronizing command
Offset setpoint = 0.0 (H050 = 0)
Inhibit synchronizing (H174 = 0)

ON
Enable the speed- and angular controllers
Inhibit speed- and angular controller
Operate the master- and slave drive at approx.

30% of the rated speed
OFF
Number of
synchronizing pulses the same
(do they slowly drift
apart)?
No
No
Yes
Slave drive runs smoothly?
Fig. 5-9
Commissioning synchronizing (start-A)

127
Start-up
Caution
The synchronizing function is only possible when the synchronizing

pulses are perfect (e. g. zero pulses). The cable routing should be
checked so that it provides immunity against noise and disturbances, and
is sufficiently shielded; the synchronizing pulse shapes must be checked
using an oscilloscope.
Start
Number of
and they do no drift
apart (1) ?
No
Yes
Offset value
d094 in the required range?
No
Wait,
if required increase the
correction pulse number
H093
(e. g. from 1 to 2)
No
Yes
|d095|
Offset - position difference < 32765
?
Are
offset values
required ?
No
Yes
Wait
Yes
Enter offset values

(refer to Section 3.4.2)
Are the
offset values
reached (1) ?
If synchronizing hasn't been realized

after approx. 30 s (|d095|>32765),
then an excessive system deviation
has built-up
Yes
End
Fig. 5-10
(1) Monitor the signals using an oscilloscope

or connect the synchronizing pulses to a
stroboscope
Commissioning synchronizing (A-end)
The synchronizing troubleshooting information represents a help when

troubleshooting; however, other causes are conceivable.
a) The number of synchronizing pulses from the master and slave are
not equal in any time unit:
-
128
Check the master setpoint

Check the ratio ( nset slave nact

Start-up
master d015)
Check the synchronizing pulses/signal encoder
b) The slave drive does not run smoothly after synchronizing has been
enabled:
-
If possible, reduce the correction pulse number H093 (minimum = 1),

Check the synchronizing pulse trains
Check the speed- and angular controller optimization; if required, reoptimize.
Check the master drive; if required, re-optimize the master drive
Investigate the mechanical system for play, torsional oscillations etc.
c) The number of synchronizing pulses from the master and slave are
not equal after synchronizing has been enabled, in any time unit:
-

- Check the displacement parameters (H050 to H067 and H090 to
H107)
Especially check the synchronizing pulse numbers
d) Synchronization has not been completed (absolute displacement

actual value - position difference > 32765)
-
Refer to c)
- If displacement d094 has an increasing trend, then the correcting
influence of the synchronizing is probably too low slightly
increase H093 (e.g. from 1 to 2); commence again at the start
e) Displacement setpoints are not reached:

-
5.5
Check the parameterization (H050 to H067 and H090 to H107)

(displacement setpoint limiting reached?)
Check the mechanical design and if required change
Check the response threshold H103
Trace function with symTrace-D7

With symTrace-D7, a product from the company sympat, it is possible
to establish a connection to an application based on D7-SYS (e.g. the
axial winder SPW420). With symTrace-D7 you are able to trace every
value in your CFC-application.The trace offers you two different options:
online and offline trace. With the online trace you can trace values in
intervals of a few ten-milliseconds. This is only practical for slowly
changing values, e.g. the diameter actual value.
If you want to trace quickly-changing values you need the offline trace.
With this option you can trace values within the shortest cycle-time.
Therefore the values must be saved in a buffer. Some special function
blocks have been placed in the project for that reason. You will find them
in the plan TRACE.
With the parameter L400 you are able to change the length of the tracebuffer. The standard setting is 2048 (double words). Furtheron with the
c401 and c402 two display parameters show you the state of the trace
coupling (-> see parameter list).
For more information please read the online help in symTrace-D7.

129
Literature
Literature
1. Instruction Manual for SIMOVERT Master Drives -- Vector Control
(VC), types of construction A to D, Order No.: 6SE7080-0Ad20, 1995.
2. Instruction Manual for SIMOVERT Master Drives -- Communications
module CB1, Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-0AK0, 1994.
3. Configuring Communications D7-SYS- SIMADYN D Manual, Order
No. 6DD1987-1AA1, Oct. 1997.
4. Hardware - SIMADYN D Manual, Order No. 6DD1987-1BA1, 1997.
5. SIMADYN D, Function Block Library, Reference Manual, Order No.
6DD1987-1CA1, October 97.
130

Appendix
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H000
Language selection
d001
440
Software type (identification)
Software version
d002
2.1
H003
16#0000
H004
16#0000
d005
Fault message enable
Alarm message enable
d006
Error bits
d007
Alarm bits
H008
TechBoard parameter type (1= floating point)
BO
H009
T400 = baseboard
BO
H010
1024
Pulse
H011
1024
Pulse
Encoder pulse number, master (pulse number)
H012
1500.0
RPM
Rated speed, slave
H013
1500.0
RPM
d014
d015
Encoder pulse number, slave (pulse number)
Rated speed, master
Speed actual value, slave / H012
Speed actual value, master / H013
d016
Pulse
d017
Pulse
H018
16#7FE2
Slave speed sensing mode
H019
16#7F02
Master speed sensing mode
d020
Error code, slave speed sensing
d021
Error code, master speed sensing
W
W
H022
16#0000
Coarse pulse mode, slave sensing
H023
16#0000
Coarse pulse mode, master sensing
H024
COMBOARD parameter type (1= floating point)
BO
d025
Status of the digital inputs
d026
Control word1 for the basic drive converter
d027
d028 ..
d039
H040
H041
3047
H043
1.0
d044
d045
d046
Free visualization parameter. Selecting the source using

parameters L028 .. L039
Multiplexer selection, ratio
Fixed value, ratio
Actual ratio
Pulse
Ratio, numerator
Pulse
Ratio, denominator
H047
0.0
H048
H049
1.0
Fixed value, relative ratio
Multiplexer, displacement setpoint
H050
H051
3050
H052
2.5
H053
2.5
H054
+2048
H055
-2048
d056
H057
0175
ms
ms
Pulse
Source for the displacement setpoint
SD
Ramp-down time, displacement setpoint
SD
Maximum value, displacement setpoint (positive)
Pulse
Maximum value, displacement setpoint (negative)
Pulse
Source, setting signal for the displacem.ramp-function

gener.

131
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H058
3012
Source for the normalization factor, slave speed
H059
3013
Source for the normalization factor, master speed
d060
Ratio_1 (refer to Chart 80)
d061
Relative ratio
H062
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master 0, n_slave

0
H063
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master < 0, n_slave

0
H064
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master 0, n_slave <

0
H065
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master < 0, n_slave <

0
H066
0.0
Pulse
Fixed value, displacement setpoint
R
I
H067
3040
H068
3048
H070
15
Multiplexer for the master speed setpoint
H071
3070
Source for the master speed setpoint
H072
10
H073
0.0
ms
SD
d074
Actual master speed setpoint, smoothed
d076
Master speed setpoint (before smoothing)
H077
5088
Source for numerator (ratio to determine the displacement)
H078
5089
Source for the denominator (ratio to determine the

displacement)
H079
3129
Source for input DT1 (inertia compensation)
H080
H082
100
ms
Multiplexer selection, inertia compensation
H083
ms
d085
Smoothing time, inertia compensation
I
SD
Differentiating time, inertia compensation
Output DT1 (inertia compensation)
H086
1000
Fine setting, ratio, numerator
DI
H087
1000
Fine setting, ratio, denominator
DI
H088
Enable fine setting, ratio
BO
H090
Position correction mode
BO
H091
RETRIGGER synchronizing
BO
Synchronizing command, edge-controlled
BO
H092
H093
1.0
Pulse
d094
Pulse
d095
Pulse
Displacement actual value - differential position actual

value
Error identification, displacement sensing
d096
H097
0108
Source 2 for reset, position and displacement
H098
0101
Source for the synchronizing command 2
H100
4096
H101
0105
H102
4096
H103
20.0
H104
0109
H105
Pulse
Synchronizing pulse number, master
DI
Source to end start synchronization
Pulse
Synchronizing pulse number, slave
DI
Pulse
Response threshold synchronism reached
Source for controller enable
500
Pulse
Enable threshold, synchronizing, slave
H107
500
Pulse
Enable threshold, synchronizing, master
H108
3044
Source for the input KP characteristic angular controller
d109
H110
132
Angular controller enable status
BO
BO

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
ms
Start-up value
Significance
H111
500
H112
0.3
H113
1.0
P gain, angular controller KP_UE
H114
1.0
P gain, angular controller KP_UE_0
H115
0.0
Limit value ue_KP
H116
0.0
Limit value ue_KP_0
H117
4.0
Smoothing, differential position actual value
SD
H118
0.1
Source for the angular controller enable (n_slave)
H119
0.1
ms
d120
d121
Pulse
d122
d123
d124
Pulse
Integral action time, angular controller
Type
SD
Source for monitoring the master speed
Differential position actual value, smoothed
H125
1.0
Upper limit, speed ramp-function generator
H126
-1.0
Lower limit, speed ramp-function generator
H127
ms
Ramp-up time, speed setpoint
H128
ms
Ramp-down time, speed setpoint
ms
d129
H130
0.0
H131
0172
Source, angular controller enable 1
H132
1.0
Speed setpoint limiting positive
H133
-1.0
Speed setpoint limiting negative
H134
1.0
Speed controller output limiting positive
H135
-1.0
d136
d137
H138
H139
0193
ms
Speed controller output limiting negative
Actual speed setpoint
Smoothing time constant, angular controller output
Compute speed controller on T400
BO
H140
H141
10.0
P gain, speed controller KP
H142
10.0
P gain, speed controller KP_O
H143
0.0
Limit value n_KP
H144
0.0
Limit value n_KP_0
H145
200
ms
H146
4.0
ms
Smoothing, speed actual value
d147
d148
H149
10
ms
Pulse extension, synchronizing pulse master
SD
d150
d151
d152
Actual basic drive setpoint (n or M)
d153
KP speed controller
H154
3186
H155
10000
Source, slave position (synchronizing enable)
Resolution for the ratio
H156
H157
3056
Source, actual value1 for the angular controller
3000
H158
3124
Source, setpoint1 for the angular controller
H159
3000
H160
0.0
Offset, analog output 1

133
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H161
1.0
Scaling, analog output 1
H162
0.0
H163
1.0
H164
H165
Erase change memory

Key, change memory
d166
Status, change memory
H167
0173
H168
1000
H169
H170
Source, position reset 1

ms
BO
I
BO
I
Delay start synchronization
SD
Enable start synchronization
BO
Multiplexer, displacement reset
H171
Multiplexer, jog enable
H172
Multiplexer, angular controller enable
H173
Multiplexer, reset position
H174
Multiplexer, synchronizing command
d175
Actual value, displacement reset
BO
d176
Actual value, jog enable
BO
d177
Actual value, angular controller enable (control signal)
BO
d178
Actual value, reset position
BO
Actual value, synchronizing command
BO
H180
d179
0154
Source, enable synchronization, slave
H181
0097
Source, reset the slave position
H182
5088
Source, numerator of the ratio (slave)
H183
5089
Source, denominator of the ratio (slave)
H184
0098
Source, enable position difference correction
H185
0108
Source to reset, position difference 1
H186
3016
Source, slave position for absolute value
H187
0170
H188
0190
Source, enable synchronization, master
H189
0097
Source, reset the master position actual value
H190
3199
Source, position (synchronizing enable, master)
H191
0174
Source, synchronizing command
H192
3014
Source, actual speed (plausibility, slave speed)
H193
3136
Source, setpoint speed (plausibility, slave speed)
H195
3015
Source, actual speed (plausibility, master speed)
H196
3076
Source, setpoint speed (plausibility, master speed)
H197
5086
Source, fine ratio, numerator
H198
5087
Source, fine ratio, denominator
H199
3017
Source, position (absolute position, master)
H200
3137
Source, setpoint speed 1 (speed controller)
H201
3000
H202
3146
Source, actual speed 1 (speed controller)
H203
3000
H204
3129
Source, input KP characteristic (speed controller)
H205
3129
Source, setp. speed 1, ramp-funct.gen. (speed controller)
H206
3120
H207
3130
Source, jog setpoint
H208
0171
Source, jog enable
H209
10.0
Pulse extension, slave synchronizing pulse
H210
1.0
Scaling, analog input 1
H211
0.0
Offset, analog input 1
134
ms

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
d212
H213
1.0
H214
0.0
d215
Start-up value
Significance
Type
Actual value, analog input 1
H216
1.0
H217
0.0
d218
H219
1.0
H220
0.0
d221
H222
500
ms
ms
Smoothing time, analog input 1

Actual value, analog input 2, smoothed
ms
d227
H228
d225
H226

d223
H224

d229
ms
R
SD
R
SD
R
SD
R
SD
H230
0000
Source, zero setting function, analog input 1
H231
0000
H232
0000
H233
0000
H234
3118
Source, position difference (displacement calculation)
H235
3062
Source, position difference correction (displacem.

calculation)
H236
0097
Source, resetting the displacement calculation
H237
3051
Source, displacement setpoint 1
H238
3062
H239
3044
Source, ratio (n_set)
H240
3136
Source, slave setpoint speed 1
H241
3176
H242
3137
Source f.the setting value of the I comp.(speed controller)
H243
0000
Source, setting signal I component of the speed controller
H244
3080
Source for the pre-control value of the speed controller
H245
0140
Source, enable pre-control (speed controller)
d246
Status word 1 CU
d300
Peer word 1 send
H303
Multiplexer for peer word 1 send
H304
Multiplexer for peer float 1 send
H305
H306
Fixed value for peer word 1 send
H307
0.0
Fixed value for peer float 1 send
H308
0.0
H309
Enable peer-to-peer
BO
H310H325
Sources for status word1, bits 0-15
BO
d327
Status word1 peer
d329d333
PZD1 peer to PZD5 peer
H334
2329
Source for control word (send peer)
H335
2000
Source PZD2 (send peer)

135
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H336
2000
H337
5000
Source, double word 1(send peer)
H338
3304
Source, float 1 (send Peer)
H339
Send type for PZD2 + PZD3 (send peer)
H340
2000
H341
2000
H342
5000
Source, double word 2 (send peer)
H343
3305
Source, float 2 (send peer)
H344
H345
2303
d346
H360
20000
ms
H361
100
ms
H362
16#FFFF
H363
19200
d364
Baud
Peer control word (receive)
Power-on no time limit peer
SD
Time limit peer in operation
SD
Mask peer status
Baud rate peer-to-peer
DI
Peer status, receive block
H381
2026
Source, PZD1 for the basic drive
H382
2500
H383
2502
H384
2027
H385
2504
H386
2506
H387
2510
H388
2508
H401
1.0
Normalization, COMBOARD actual value1 send
H403
1.0
H405
1.0
H407
1.0
H409
BO
H410H425
Status word 1 bits 0-15 fixed values
BO
H426H441
BO
H442
Multiplexer COMBOARD word 1 send
H443
Fixed value COMBOARD word 1 send
H444
H445
H446
H447
H448
H449
COMBOARD setpoint1 receive
d450
H451
1.0
d452
H453
1.0
d454
H455
1.0
COMBOARD normalization setpoint1 receive
d458
COMBOARD word 1 send
d459
d456
H457
136
1.0

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
d460
COMBOARD control word 1 receive
d461
W
W
H462
20000
ms
Power-on time limit COMBOARD
SD
H463
100
ms
Time limit COMBOARD operational
SD
H464
16#FFFF
Mask COMBOARD receive status
d465
Receive status COMBOARD
d466
Status word1 COMBOARD
d467
H470
0.0
Fixed value, COMBOARD send word 2
H471
0.0
H472
0.0
H473
0.0
H480
Slave address COMBOARD (only for SRT400)
H481
COMBOARD parameter 1 (only for SRT400)
H482
H483..
H493
COMBOARD parameter 3..13 (only for SRT400)
H495
COMBOARD parameters valid (only for SRT400)
BO
Status COMBOARD for operation in the SRT400
d496
H498
3000
H499
1.0
H500
3152
H501
H502
Source, setpoint for double word output
Setpoint normalization according to H498
Source for the 1st setpoint to the basic drive
1.0
Normalization, 1st setpoint for the basic drive
3000
Source for the 2nd setpoint for the basic drive
nd
H503
1.0
H504
3120
Source for the 3rd setpoint for the basic drive
Normalization, 2
setpoint for the basic drive
H505
1.0
Normalization, 3rd setpoint for the basic drive
H506
3153
Source for the 4th setpoint for the basic drive
th
H507
1.0
Normalization, 4 setpoint for the basic drive
H508
3080
H509
1.0
Normalization, 5th setpoint for the basic drive
H510
0650
Source, control word 1 for the basic drive, bit0
BO
H511
0651
BO
H512
0652
BO
H513
0653
BO
H514
0654
BO
H515
0655
BO
H516
0656
BO
H517
0657
BO
H518
0658
BO
H519
0659
BO
H520
0660
BO
H521
0661
BO
H52
0662
BO
H523
0663
BO
H524
0664
BO
H525
0665
BO
H526H541
Source, control word 2 for the basic drive, bits0 .. 15

(with the exception of H535)
BO
BO
Mask to identify CU operational readiness
H535
0546
H542
16#0004

137
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H543
Test enable for the speed controller in the basic drive
H544
Multiplexer for speed controller enable
d545
Computation utilization for T1 (fastest time sector)
d546
Computation utilization for T2
d547
d548
d549
Computation utilization for total CPU load
Normalization actual value1, receive from the basic drive
Actual value1, receive from the basic drive
H550
1.0
d551
H552
1.0
d553
H554
1.0
BO
d555
d556
Control word from the basic drive
Source, control word from the basic drive
H557
H558
2571
H559
2574
Source for status word 1 from the basic drive

I
I
d560
Status word 1 from the basic drive
d561
d562
Receive status, basic drive interface
H563
2572
Source for actual value1 from the basic drive
H564
2573
H565
2575
H567
2582
Source for double word (high) from the basic drive
H568
2581
Source for double word (low) from the basic drive
H569
5567
Source for double word from the basic drive
d570
Double word from the basic drive, normalized
d571d585
14 process data from the basic drive
H587
5567
H588
1.0
d589
H590
2577
d591
Source for double word for type conversion (N4 R)
Normalization factor for H587
Double word from CU after type conversion (N4R)
Source for PZD for type conversion (IR)
Result of type conversion (IR) from H590
H592
2571
Source to evaluate the operational readiness
H593
0547
Source for operational readiness, basic drive
d601
Digital output, terminal 46 synchronism reached
d602
Digital output, terminal 47 angular controller at its limit
BO
d603
Digital output, terminal 48 angular controller enabled
BO
d604
Digital output, terminal 49 fault
BO
d607
Coarse pulse input 1, terminal 84
BO
BO
d608
H609
Mask to invert digital inputs
d610
Digital input 1, terminal 53
BO
d611
BO
d612
BO
d613
BO
d614
BO
d615
BO
d616
BO
d617
BO
138
16#0000
BO

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H618
Multiplexer for analog output 1
H619
H620
3618
Source for analog output 1
H621
0000
Source to inhibit, analog output 1
H622
3619
H623
0000
H631
0105
Source for the bi-directional digital output 1
H632
0116
H633
0109
H634
0003
H635
0004
Source for the digital output 1
H636
0000
H637
Enable bi-directional digital output 1
H638
H639
H640
H650
Multiplexer for control word 1, bit 0
H651
H652
H653
H654
H655
H656
H657
H658
H659
H660
H661
H662
H663
H664
H665
Analog output 1
d666
d667
H668
Analog output 2
Smoothing time constant, analog output 1
ms
H669
ms
H700
H701
9600
H703
Address USS slave
H704
USS slave, 4-wire operation
BO
d705
Status USS slave
d706
PZD1 receive USS
d707
PZD2 receive USS
Enable USS slave
BO
Baud rate USS slave
DI
I
H708
2000
Source for 1st PZD send USS
H709
2000
Source for 2nd PZD send USS
d801
d810
PZD1 to PZD10 from COMBOARD
H811
2801
Source for control word 1 from CB
H812
2804
H813
2802
Source for setpoint 1 from CB
H814
2803

139
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H815
2805
H816
2806
H817
2807
Source for setpoint integer REAL from CB
Result integer REAL from CB
R
I
d818
H819
2809
Source, high word of the double word from CB
H820
2810
Source, low word of the double word from CB
Double word from CB (N4 format) as REAL value
Source for the 1st actual value at CB
d821
H822
3446
nd
H823
3447
Source for the 2
actual value at CB
H824
3448
Source for the 3rd actual value at CB
H825
3449
Source for the 4th actual value at CB
H826
3000
Source for the actual value (REAL integer) at CB
H828
3000
Source for the 5th actual value at CB(word o.double word)
H829
1.0
Normalization for H828 (REAL N4)
H831
2442
Source for PZD1 at CB
H832
2822
H833
2823
H834
2444
H835
2824
H836
2825
H837
2827
H838
2000
H839
2828
H840
2829
H841
1.0
Normalization for double word from CB
H900
0000
Source for fault message F125
H901
0000
H902
0000
H903
0000
H904
0000
H905
0000
H906
0000
H907
0000
Source for alarm A106
H908
0000
H909
0000
H910
0000
H911
0000
H912
0000
H913
0000
d921
d930
PZD1 to PZD10 for output at CB
I
W
H960
Fixed value 1, integer type
H961
H962
H963
H964
H965
H971
16#0000
Fixed value 1, word type
H972
16#0000
H973
16#0000
H974
16#0000
140

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H981
Fixed value 1, double word type
H982
H983
H984
H990
0.0
Fixed value 1, REAL type
H991
0.0
H992
0.0
H993
0.0
H994
0.0
H995
0.0
H996
0.0
H997
0.0
d998
134
Identification of SIMADYN D components
d999
121
Identification of software for SIMOVIS
L028
3234
Source for the 1st display parameter, REAL type (d028)
L029
3330
Source for the 2nd display parameter, REAL type (d029)
rd
L030
3332
Source for the 3 display parameter, REAL type (d030)
L031
3819
Source for the 4th display parameter, REAL type (d031)
L032
0193
Source for the 1st display parameter, BOOL type (d032)
L033
0196
Source for the 2nd display parameter, BOOL type (d033)
L034
0105
Source for the 3rd display parameter, BOOL type (d034)
L035
0116
Source for the 4th display parameter, BOOL type (d035)
L036
2500
Source for the 1st display parameter, integer type (d036)
L037
2502
Source for the 2nd display parameter, integer type (d037)
L038
2605
Source for the 1st display parameter, word type (d038)
L039
2606
Source for the 2nd display parameter, word type (d039)
new parameters, refers to Chapter 3.2.3
L098L112,
c114c119,
L120L123,
c125,
L200L212,
c214c219,
L220L223,
c225,
c300,
L301L302
L400
2048
c401
c402
Length buffer
Coupling Trace
BO
Status Trace
L605
5000
Source, double word quantity (conversion into 2 words)
L606
2000
Source, input 1 for integer adder 1
L607
2000
L608
2000
Source, input 1 for integer subtractor 1
L609
2000
L646
2000
Source for integer REAL conversion
L647
3000
Source for REAL integer conversion
L698
0000
Source for setting input; flipflop 1
L699
0000
Source for reset input; flipflop 1

141
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
st
Type
L700
0001
Source, 1 input AND logic gate 1
L701
0001
Source, 2nd input AND logic gate 1
L702
0001
Source, 3rd input AND logic gate 1
L703
0001
Source, 1st input AND logic gate 2
L704
0001
L705
0001
L706
3000
Source, input 0 of changeover switch 1
L707
3000
L708
0000
Source, select input of changeover switch 1
L709
0000
Source of the 1st edge evaluation block
L710
0000
Source, 1st input OR logic gate 1
L711
0000
Source, 2nd input OR logic gate 1
rd
L712
0000
Source, 3 input OR logic gate 1
L713
0000
L714
0000
L715
0000
Source, 3rd input OR logic gate 2
L716
3000
L717
3000
L718
0000
L728
0000
Source, power-on delay 1
L729
100.0
Duration, power-on delay 1
SD
L730
0000
L731
100.0
L732
0000
ms
ms
Source, power-off delay 1
Duration, power-off delay 1
SD
Source for the 1st inverter

nd
L733
0000
Source for the 2
L734
0000
L735
0000
L738
0000
Source to inhibit the 1st PT1 element
L739
2.0
Quality of the bandstop filter
L740
3000
L741
20.0
L742
3000
Source for the input signal of the bandstop filter
L743
3002
Source for the bandstop frequency of the bandstop filter
L744
3000
Source for the X input of the comparator
L745
3000
Source for the Y input of the comparator
L746
3001
Source for the upper limit value of the limiter
L747
3000
Source for the input quantity of the limiter
L748
3001
Source for the lower limit value of the limiter
L749
3000
Source for the input, comparator with hysteresis
L750
3001
Source for the range, comparator with hysteresis
L751
0.1
Hysteresis of the comparator with hysteresis
L752
3003
Source for comparison value comparator with hysteresis
L753
3000
Source for input, free 2-point characteristic
L754
0.0
X1 value 2-point characteristic
L755
0.0
Y1 value 2-point characteristic
L756
1.0
L757
1.0
L760
2000
Source for word 1 (word bits)
L761
2000
Source for high word (double word REAL)
L762
2000
Source for low word (double word REAL)
142
inverter
Source for the 1st PT1 element

ms
Filter time constant for the 1st PT1 element
I
SD

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
L763
1.0
L764
2000
L765
1.0
L766
3000
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Normalization factor for L761, L762
Type
R
Source for word REAL conversion
Normalization to L764
Source for REAL N2 conversion
L767
1.0
L786
3000
Source, 1st input, REAL adder 1
L787
3000
Source, 2nd input, REAL adder 1
L788
3000
Source, 3rd input, REAL adder 1
st
L789
3000
Source, 1 input, REAL adder 2
L790
3000
L791
3000
L792
3000
Source, 1st input, REAL subtractor 1
nd
L793
3000
Source, 2
L794
3000
L795
3000
Source, 2nd input, REAL subtractor 2
L796
3001
Source, 1st input, REAL multiplier 1
nd
input, REAL subtractor 1
L797
3001
Source, 2
input, REAL multiplier 1
L798
3001
Source, 3rd input, REAL multiplier 1
L799
3001
L800
3001
Source, 2nd input, REAL multiplier 2
L801
3001
L802
3001
Source, 1st input, REAL divider 1
L803
3001
Source, 2nd input, REAL divider 1
L804
3001
nd
L805
3001
Source, 2
L810
2000
L812
2001
Source, 1st input, integer divider 1
L813
2001
Source, 2nd input, integer divider 1
L814
2001
Source, 1st input, integer multiplier 1
nd
input, REAL divider 2
input, integer multiplier 1
L815
2001
Source, 2
L816
2000
Source, high word (word double word)
L817
2000
Source, low word (word double word)
L818
3000
Source, input free integrator
L819
1.0
Upper limit, integrator
L820
-1.0
Lower limit, integrator
L821
3000
L822
1000
L823
0000
Source for the integrator setting signal
L824
3000
Source, input 1 of the changeover switch 3
L825
3000
L826
0000
L827
3000
L828
3000
L829
0000
L830
0000
Source, AND-OR logic 1 (OR)
L831
0000
Source, AND-OR logic 1 (AND 1)
L832
0001
L833
0000
L834
0000
L835
0001
Source, setting value integrator

ms
Integration time, integrator

I
SD
143
Appendix
144

Changes
Changes
Edition 11/98
1. Parameters d129, H138, H668, H669 supplemented in the

Documentation
2. Factory setting, parameters H544, H651-H656, H660-H662
3. Pulse ratio no longer used (this is now automatically generated)
4. Definition, speed ratio inverted
Edition 06/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Edition 05/01
1. For release V2.1: Angular synchronism can also be implemented

using 2 absolute value encoders by comparing the two position
actual values
Can be freely wired using BICO technology (many new parameters!).

Digital input quantities, also available inverted.
Bi-directional outputs can be de-activated.
Possible to inhibit analog inputs and outputs.
Freely-available blocks.
The ratio resolution can be changed.
Different data types for the peer-to-peer interface.
Double words can be received and sent.
Monitoring parameters are not identical with version 2.01 (are in some
instances used as parameter which can be changed).

145
Function charts for the standard software package Angular Synchronous Control SPA440
Contents
Chart
General
Contents
General symbols
Control symbols
Constants
General parameter and status word
10
20
25
30
40
T400
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Binary inputs
Binary outputs and bidirectional I/O
50
51
52
53
Speed and position sensing

Slave drive
Master drive
Absolut encoders
Plausibility check
Speed ratio
60
70
72
75
80
Control
Control bits
Displacement (offset) calculation
Angle controller
Speed controller on T400
90
100
110
115
120
Inverter interface
Communication status
Faults and alarms
Process data receiption
Status words
Control words
Process data transmission
150
160
170
180
220
230
1
General
Contents
Contents
Chart
Communication
Peer to peer settings and PZD
Peer to peer control and status word
COMBOARD general settings
COMBOARD reception
COMBOARD control words
COMBOARD status words
COMBOARD transmission
USS slave
300
310
400
410
420
430
440
450
Free function blocks

Logical gates
Arithmetic and display parameter
Miscellaneous functions
Type conversion
460
470
480
490
Multiplexer
setpoint channels
Analog outputs
Binary control
Control word 1 (part 1)
CB actual values
CB status words
Peer to peer
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
Angular Synchr. Control SPA440
8
- 10 -
Symbol
Explanations
Parameter name
(factory setting)
Hxyz
Miscellaneous
Logic and arithmetic
Technology parameters
Symbol
technology parameter
e.g. H231
Explanations
Symbol
OR operation
Inputs and outputs may
be of binary or vector data
type
Explanations
Selection
Parameter name
H123 (fact.)
KR (chart)
dsiplay parameter
e.g. d123
&
R-S-Flip-Flop
e.g. with 5 inputs
AND operation
type
Multiplexer
1
Parameter Name
dxyz
set
reset
3
4
Selection
Connection to a floatingpoint source (fact.) which

can be modified with
H123
Switch selection with 2

inputs
Logical inversion
X2
Parameter name
H123 (fact.)
K (chart)
Connection to a integer
source (fact.) which can
be modified with H123
Multiplication
X1
X1
+
-
Y = X1 * X2
Operational amplifier
Dividor
Parametername
H234 (fact.)
B (chart)
Connection to a boolean
X1
Y=
X2
Sign determination
Y = sign ( X )
X2
X2
Excample:
Adder
parameter name
(factory setting)
X
X1
Y = X1 + X2
Edge detector
Generats a pulse for the
positive edge of X
S.Setpoint speed
parameter
number
H123 (3412)
KR (120,7)
Data type symbol:

B
BOOL
K
16bit
KK 32bit
KR floating point
A+
Absolute value
X
A-
Y=|X|
B+
(chart, sector) for

the factory setting
BN+
Negation
X
-1
Y= -X
1
Allgemeines
Allgemeine Symbole
N-
Pluse encoder
Here: 2 tracks A, B and
zero pulse N;
interface RS422
coarse
pulse
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 20 -
Symbol
Explanations
Symbol
PT1
Explanations
Td
DT1
Explanations
X1
Low pass filter

T time constant
Y1
input
Symbol
High pass filter

T = smoothing time
constant
Td = derivative action
time constant
output
Curve defined by 2 points

(X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2)
Y2
symmetrical to the Y-axis
input at the
upper limit
upper
limit
Limiter
x
input
output
lower
limit
input at the
lower limit
signalling if the input

quantity exceeds the limits
X2
Xmin
setting value
set
hysteresis
interval limit
Limiter function
X
X>Y
X>Y
Y=X
X=Y
X<Y
Y<X
Xmin <= X <= Xmax

input
Xmax
input
output
Ramp function with

setting function
Limit value monitor with

hysteresis
T1
Switch on delay T1
ramp-up time
ramp-down
time
average interval value
T1
proportional gain
integral action time
Switch off delay T1

Kp
Tn
integrator
value
system
deviation
100 %
1.0
output
Converter
here: fixed point to
floationg point
(100% converted to 1.0)
1
2
Allgemeines
Regelungstechnische Symbole
PI controller
enable
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 25 -
Fixed values for free usage

Constants
Floating point (R)
Setpoints fixed values
16bit integer (I, W)
32bit integer (DI)
B0000
Logisch 0
Constant Ratio
(1.0)
H043
KR3043
Constant R1
(0.0)
H990
KR3990
Constant I1
(0)
H960
K2960
Constant DI1
(0)
H981
KK5981
B0001
Logisch 1
Rel.Ratio Const
(1.0)
H049
KR3049
Constant R2
(0.0)
H991
KR3991
Constant I2
(0)
H961
K2961
ConstantDI2
(0)
H982
KK5982
K2000
Wort 0
Const.Displacem.
(0.0)
H066
KR3066
Constant R3
(0.0)
H992
KR3992
Constant I3
(0)
H962
K2962
Constant DI3
(0)
H983
KK5983
K2001
Wort 1
Const. Ref.Speed
(0.0)
H073
KR3073
Constant R4
(0.0)
H993
KR3993
Constant I4
(0)
H963
K2963
Constant DI4
(0)
H984
KK5984
16#FFFF
K2002
Wort 16#FFFF
Constant R5
(0.0)
H994
KR3994
Constant I5
(0)
H964
K2964
Constant R6
(0.0)
H995
KR3995
Constant I6
(0)
H965
K2965
ConstantW1
(0)
H971
K2971
Constant W2
(0)
H972
K2972
Constant W3
(0)
H973
K2973
Constant W4
(0)
H974
K2974
KK5000
Doppelwort 0
KK5001
Doppelwort 1
Constant R7
(0.0)
H996
KR3996
0.0
KR3000
Real 0.0
Constant R8
(0.0)
H997
KR3997
0.5
1.0
2.0
-1.0
1
General
Constants
KR3003
KR3001
KR3002
KR3004
Real 0.5
Real 1.0
Real 2.0
Real -1.0
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 30 -
General settings
Language select
(0)
H000
TechBoard ParTyp
(0)
H008
COMBOARD ParTyp
(0)
H024
0 german
1 english
Select the data type for the

transmission of floatingpoint parameters
CPU load
CPU load T1
d545
Software Type
d001
CPU load T2
d546
Sofware Version
d002
CPU load T3
d547
CPU load T4
d548
SIMADYN D
d998
CPU load T5
d549
SIMOVIS SW ID
d999
T400 = Baseboard
(0)
H009
Erase EEPROM
(0)
H164
Use T400 as Baseboard

(operation without inverter with
additional T400; parameter
numbers differ!
H P; L U)
Restore factory setting
Key EEPROM
(0)
H165
Status word angular

synchronous control
Bit 2
Bit 3
Speed controller limitation (B0134) [120,8]
Bit 4
Speed deviation master (B0162) [75,6]
Bit 5
Speed deviation slave (B0160) [75,6]
Bit 6
Timeout inverter (B0502) [150,5]
Bit 7
Timeout CB (B0405) [400,6]
Bit 8
Timeout Peer (B0360) [300,7]
Bit 9
Synchr. pulse Slave (10ms) (B0209) [60,8]
Bit 10
Synchr. pulse Master (10ms) (B0149) [70,7]
Bit 11
Slaveposition > enable threshold (B0154) [60,3]
Bit 12
Displacement updated (B0106) [100,8]
Bit 13
Warning (B0004) [160,8]
Bit 14
Fault (B0003) [160,6]
Bit 15
This operation can not be canceled !
General
Bit 1
Running synchron (B0105) [100,8]
Restore factory settings:
All parameter changes are deleted and set to the

original factory setting.
Bit 0
Enable speed controller (B0140) [120,5]

Angle controller limitation (B0116) [110,8]
State EEPROM
d166
Set
H165 = 165
H164 = 1
Status of angle controller (B0109) [90,7]
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
State of Control
d005
K2005
Status word angular synchr.
7
Function diagram
8
- 40 -
AE1 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H210
10 V
Terminal 90
Terminal 91
12 bit
+
-
PT1
PT1
5V
Q.setAE1_Null
5V
Q.setAE2_Null
PT1
PT1
5V
Q.setAE3_Null
T400
Analog inputs
H232 (0000)
B (30,2)
AE4 Offset
(0.0)
H220
AE4 act. value
d221
KR3227
AE1
T1
1,2 ms
AE2
T2
4,8 ms
AE3
T2
4,8 ms
AE4
T2
4,8 ms
AE2 smoothed
AE3 smoothed
AE4 Filter Time

(0 ms)
H228
AE4 smoothed
d229
KR3229
PT1
cykle time
set output zero
Q.setAE4_Null
Task
AE3 smoothed
d227
AE3 act. value

d218
5V
Input
AE3 Filter Time

(0 ms)
H226
PT1
Hardware filter
500 s
KR3225
Task cycle time:
set output zero
12 bit
+
-
AE2 smoothed
d225
AE4 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H219
10 V
AE2 Iact. value

d215
H231 (0000)
B (30,2)
AE3 Offset
(0.0)
H217
12 bit
+
-
AE2 Filter Time

(0 ms)
H224
PT1
Hardware filter
500 s
Terminal 95
AE2 Offset
(0.0)
H214
AE1 smoothed
set output zero
AE3 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H216
Terminal 94
H230 (0000)
B (30,2)
Hardware filter
500 s
10 V
KR3223
PT1
12 bit
+
-
AE1 smoothed
d223
AE1 act. value

d212
AE2 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H213
10 V
AE1 Filter Time

(500 ms)
H222
Hardware filter
500 s
Terminal 92
Terminal 93
AE1 Offset
(0.0)
H211
H233 (0000)
B (30,2)
AE4 smoothed
set output zero
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 50 -
T_Filter_DAC1
(0 ms)
H668
Analog output 1
d666
10 V
5V
S. Analog Outp1
KR3666
H620 (3618)
KR (510,4)
12 Bit
D
PT1
Terminal 97
10 V
Terminal 99
S.set DAC1 zero
H621 (0000)
B (30,2)
set output zero
T_Filter_DAC2
(0 ms)
H669
H160
(0.0)
Aout 1 Offset
H161
(1.0)
Aout 1 Scalefact
-10 V
Analog output 2
d667
10 V
5V
KR3667
S.Analog Outp2
H622 (3619)
KR (510,7)
12 Bit
D
PT1
Terminal 98
10 V
Terminal 99
S.set DAC2 zero
1
T400
Analog outputs
H623 (0000)
B (30,2)
set output zero
H162
(0.0)
Aout 2 Offset
H163
(1.0)
Aout 2 Scalefact
-10 V
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 51 -
Binary inputs (T3)
Coarse pulse inputs (T3)

BinInput1 Pin53
d610
24V
Terminal 53
1
B0620
24V
Terminal 84
5V
BinInput 1 inv.
BinInput 2
B0621
BinInput 2 inv.
B0612
BinInput 3
B0622
BinInput 3 inv.
B0613
BinInput 4
B0623
BinInput 4 inv.
B0607
Coarse pulse 1
B0635
Coarse pulse 1 inv.
B0608
Coarse pulse 2
B0636
Coarse pulse 2 inv.
Pin65 Coarse P2
d608
24V
B0611
5V
Terminal 65
5V
BinInput3 Pin55
d612
24V
Terminal 55
5V
1
BinInput4 Pin56
d613
24V
Terminal 56
5V
State dig.Inputs
d025
Bit 0 BinInput 1
Terminal 57
5V
Bit 2 BinInput 3
B0614
BinInput 5
B0624
BinInput 5 inv.
Bit 3 BinInput 4
Bit 4 BinInput 5
Bit 5 BinInput 6
BinInput6 Pin58
d615
24V
Terminal 58
5V
Bit 6 BinInput 7
Bit 7 BinInput 8
B0615
BinInput 6
Bit 8 BinInput 1 inv
B0625
BinInput 6 inv.

BinInput7 Pin59
d616
24V
Terminal 59
5V

B0616
BinInput 7
B0626
BinInput 7 inv.

BinInput8 Pin60
d617
24V
Terminal 60
5V
K2025
Bit 1 BinInput 2
BinInput5 Pin57
d614
24V
T400
Binary inputs
BinInput 1
BinInput2 Pin54
d611
Terminal 54
24V
B0610
5V
Pin84 Coarse P1
d607

B0617
BinInput 8
B0627
BinInput 8 inv.
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 52 -
Bidirectional input/output
enable BiDir1
(1)
H637
enable BiDir3
(1)
H639
Pin46 Input
d601
B0601
Terminal 46
B0631
Terminal 46 inv
S.BiDir Out 1
Pin48 Input
d603
B0603
Terminal 48
B0633
Terminal 48 inv
S.BiDir Out 3
H631 (0105)
B (100,8)
Terminal 46
enable BiDir2
(1)
H638
H633 (0109)
B (90,7)
enable BiDir4
(1)
H640
Pin47 Input
d602
Terminal 48
B0602
Terminal 47
B0632
Terminal 47 inv
S.BiDir Out 2
Pin49 Input
d604
B0604
Terminal 49
B0634
Terminal 49 inv
S.BiDir Out 4
H632 (0116)
B (110,7)
Terminal 47
H634 (0003)
B (160,6)
Terminal 49
Binary outputs
Warning:
Terminal 45
24V
S.Bin.Output1
Supply voltage for output

drivers
H637 ... H640 are initialization parameters.

Modification takes places after the next
power on.
H635 (0004)
B (160,8)
Terminal 51
If bidirectional outputs are enabled as

output the corresponding input value is
inverted!
E.g.: H640 = 1 d604 displays the inverse
level to terminal 49
S.Bin.Output2
H636 (0000)
B (30,2)
Terminal 52
T400
Binayry outputs and bidirectional outputs
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 53 -
Mode Slave Speed

Bit 6 (11)
H018
incremental
encoder
Pulses Slave
(1024)
H010
81
82
83
84
A
B
N
Pulses per
revolution
Mode Slave Speed

Bits 0..5, 8..15
H018
CoarsePulsSlave
(0)
H022
Nom. Speed Slave
Coarse pulse
Mode Slave Speed

Bit 7 (1)
H018
Track A
Track B
Coarse
pulses
handling
Zero pulse
H181 (0097)
B (90,3)
H180 (0154)
B (60,4)
B0186
PT1
correction pulses [100, 6]
n_Slave norm.
KR3146
Speed slave
smoothed
KR3016
Position slave
Position sensing
Slave Position
d016
Enable
synchronization
Actual value
position
T SyncPulseSlave
(10 ms)
H209
position > threshold
B0153
0
Position set for

synchr. pulse
B0152
0.0
B0209
SyncSlave 10ms
B0150
SyncImpuls Slave
Position difference correcting value

1
Pos.Correct Mode
(1)
H090
position difference [60.8]

Displacem. Reset
d175
S.Corr.Pos.Diff.
B0175
S.Slave Denomin H183 (5089)

KK (80,7)
L099=0
Enable, abs. enc
Correct position difference
H184 (0098)
B (90,3)
S.Slave Numerat. H182 (5088)

KK (80,7)
Position difference
calculation
Position
difference
Speed ratio
Numerator
Denominator
Tfilt Pos.Differ
(4 ms)
H117 d124
Pos.Diff. filt
-1
Enable, position
sensing with
incr. encoders
KR3124
PT1
1
KR3118
KR3117
L098=1
1
2
Slave
KR3018
actual value displacement [100, 5]
S.Reset PosDiff2
H185 (0108)
B (90,7)
Speed slave
Reset
position < 0
S.ResetPos.Diff1
H187 (0170)
B (520,2)
KR3014
Tfilt Speed
(4.0ms)
H146
B0154
H154 (3186)
KR (60,2)
slave position
negativ
Speed
S.EnableSynSlave
KR3186
H058 (3012)
KR (60,5)
Mode
Synchronization
S.SlaveSynchrPos
Absolut pos. slave
Speed Slave
d014
S.Norm. n_Slave
S.ResetSlavePos.
Thresh.SyncSlave
(500.0)
H105
H186 (3016)
KR (60,7)
Error position
sensing slave
B0020
K2020
Nominal speed
S.Abs.Pos.Slave
KR3012
(1500.0)
H012
Error Code Slave

d020
Error code
Pulses
from inverter
Position sensing slave

drive
pulses slave
K2010
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
position
difference
smoothed
position difference
inv. position difference
Position difference from absolut encoders [72,8]
7
Function diagram
8
- 60 -
Position sensing
master drive
H059 (3013)
KR (70,4)
KR3013
Nom.Speed Master
(1500.0)
H013
Terminal
A+
AB+
BN+
NCoarse
pulse
62
86
63
87
64
88
65
+
-
Speed Master
d015
Q.Norm. n_Master
KR3015
Speed
Position
Coarse pulse
handling
KR3019
n_Master normalized
KR3017
Position master
Master Position
d017
Pulses
+
+
-
Synchronization
S.Abs.Pos.Master
Abs. value master position
H199 (3017)
KR (70,7)
KR3199
Example: RS422 encoder
B0199
H023
(0)
CoarsePulsMaster
ThreshSyncMaster
(500.0)
H107
Mode MasterSpeed
(16#7F02)
H019
Mode
0
S.MasterSynchPos
x
0.0
B0189
H188 (0190)
B (70,3)
B0188
Position master < 0
Enable synchronization
depending on the master
position
Enable
synchronization
B0149
SyncMaster 10ms
B0148
SyncImpuls master
Errorcode master
d021
S.ResetMasterPos
H189 (0097)
B (90,3)
Position set for

synchronization
S.EnablSynMaster
H190 (3017)
KR (70,7)
Position master negativ
T SyncPulsMaster
(10 ms)
H149
master pos > threshold

B0190
Speed master
Nominal speed
Error code
B0021
Error position sensing master
K2021
Error code master
Reset
Pulses per revolution
Pulses Master
(1024)
H011
1
2
Master
K2011
Pulses master
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 70 -
Position difference from incremental encoders [60, 7]
L100
...
L106
L108
...
L112
Sensing
Absolut
encoder
Y
YP
YRC
SLAVE
c114
KR4115
c116
c125
KR4116
YSP
YF
B0211
QF
YFC
Terminals
76 - 79
Tfilt position diff. (4 ms)

d124
H117 Pos.Diff. filt
KR4114
c115
0
1
L120
PT1
KR4300
L301
L123
L122
c118
KR4125
L121
c300
KR3124
Position diff..
filtered
KR3118
Position diff.
L302
L099
Enable Abs-Enc
c119
Enable absolut encoders:

L098=0 and L099=1
L200
...
L206
L208
...
L212
Sensing
Absolut
encoder
c214
Y
c215
YP
c216
YRC
MASTER
YSP
KR4214
KR4215
KR4216
QF
YF
B0212
YFC
Terminals
72 -75
c225
0
1
L220
KR4225
L221
L223
L222
c218
Settings, absolut encoders
c219
Only useful for linear axis!

(no range overflow)
Sensing, absolut encoders

Master and Slave
Slave
c114
c115
c116
c118
c119
M aster
c214
c215
c216
c218
c219
Speed actual value

P o sitio n co unter
Number o f ro tatio ns
Erro r co de
Erro r status
Slave
L100
L101
L102
L103
L104
L105
L106
L107
L108
L109
L110
L111
L112
L120
L121
L122
L123
M aster
L200
L201
L202
L203
L204
L205
L206
L207
L208
L209
L210
L211
L212
L220
L221
L222
L223
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Reso lutio n per turn

Number o f turns
P receding zero bits
A larm bit po sitio n
Clo ck frequency
Enco der type
Data co ding
Co ntro l wo rd
Gearbo x ratio
No rmalizatio n po sitio n
No rmalizatio n speed
P o sitio n o ffset
Upper limit speed
Offset, number o f ro tatio ns
Scaling, po sito n actual value
Selectio n M UL/DIV
7
Function diagram
- 72 -
dn enable Max.
(0.1)
H118
0.1
H192 (3018)
KR (60,8)
nSlave > Range

B0192
X>Y
S.n_Slave Compar
X
X=Y
B0193
X<Y
B0194
nSlave < Range
S.n_ref SlaveCmp
Slave speed within enable range
B0160
Speed deviation Slave
H193 (3136)
KR (115,4)
dn Master Max.
(0.1)
H119
H195 (3019)
KR (70,7)
X=Y
B0196
X<Y
Master speed within enable range
B0197
nMaster < Range
S.n_ref MastComp
Speed deviation Master
nMaster > Range

B0195
X>Y
X
Speed deviation
0.1
B0162
S.n_Master Compar
B0161
H196 (3076)
KR (115,2)
1
2
Plausibility check
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 75 -
Addition. Ratio
(0.0)
H047
S. Addition.Ratio
KR3047
H041 (3047)
KR (80,1)
Ratio 1
d060
S.Ratio
Ratio Resolution
(10000)
H155
KR3060
H067 (3040)
KR (500,3)
S.relative Ratio
enable FineRatio
(0)
H088
Ratio relative
d061
H068 (3048)
KR (500,5)
KR3061
Ratio Numerator
d045
Ratio
d044
Calculation of
speed ratio
components
KK5088
Ratio numerator
KK5089
Ratio denominator
relative ratio
d046
RatioDenominator
KR3044
actual ratio
S.FineRatioNumer
Fine Ratio Numer
(1000.0)
H086
KK5086
H197 (5086)
KK (80,4)
fixed value numerator
S.FineRatioDenom
Fine Ratio Denom
(1000.0)
H087
1
2
Speed ratio
KK5087
H198 (5087)
KK (80,4)
fixed value denominator
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 80 -
Reset position and displacement

S.Pos.Reset_1
DelayStartSynchr.
(1000ms)
H168
Reset Position
d178
H167 (0173)
B (520,7)
EnableStartSynch
(0)
H169
S.Pos.Reset_2
H097 (0108)
B (90,7)
B0097
Automatic
synchronization after
power on
Position + displacement reset
B0101
StartSynchr
B0100
inv.StartSynchr
S.StopStartSynch H101 (0105)

B (100,8)
Enable displacement correction

Synchron.Command
d179
S.enablePosCtr11
S.Synchr.Comd2
B0179
H191 (0174)
B (520,8)
S.enablePosCTR12
S.Synchr.Command
H098 (0101)
B (90,7)
B0098
synchroning command
Enable angle controller
EnableSpeedCntrl
d177
H131 (0172)
B (520,5)
B0177
enable Pos.Cntrl
d109
&
H139 (0193)
B (75,5)
B0109
status of angle controller
B0108
angle controller inhibit
Enable inverter speed controller
Mask CU ready
(16#0004)
H542
TestEnable CU n
(0)
H543
S.en.Speed CU2
H593 (0547)
B (560,4)
&
S.en.Speed CU1 H592 (2571)

K (170,3)
n-controller CU
&
B0546
16 bit
bitwise ANDed
(at least one bit = 1 of the
AND operation)
1
Control
Conrol bits
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 90 -
SyncPulsesMaster
(4096)
H100
S.Position Diff1
H234 (3118)
KR (60,7)
S.Position Diff2
Displ.- Pos.diff
d095
Displacement - position
KR3234
H235 (3062)
KR (100,3)
Direction depending displacement
actual value
position difference
Position slave [60,8]

y
n_Slave norm.
[60,8]
B0110
n_Slave > 0
B0111
n_Slave = 0
B0112
SyncImpuls Master[70,8]
Master has synchronized
SyncImpuls Slave [60,7]
Slave has synchronized
B0113
n_Master > 0
B0114
n_Master = 0
B0115
n_Master < 0
Ratio numerator
S.DisplaceDenom H078 (5089)

KK (80,7)
Ratio denominator
S.ResetDisplacem
H236 (0097)
B (90,3)
KR3062
KR3091
Correction pulses
act.Displacement
d094
Actual value displacement
KR3094
Actual value
displacement
B0106
Displacement
determined
H091
(0)
SynchrRetrigMode
DisplaceMas-Sla+
H063 (0.0)
Correction pulses
Reset displacement
DisplaceMas+Sla+
H062 (0.0)
Error code displacem.

K2096
S.DisplaceNumer. H077 (5088)

KK (80,7)
difference
KR3095
ErrorCode Displ.
d096
n_Slave < 0
y
x
Displacement
- position difference
Displacement calculation
Position master [70,8]
Synchronization command [90,8]
n_Master
normalized [70,8]
SyncPulses Slave CorrectionPulses

(4096)
(1.0)
H102
H093
direction depending
displacement
H092
(0)
Synchr.Edge Mode
Threshold Synchr
(20.0)
H103
0.0
DisplaceMas+SlaH064 (0.0)
Synchronism reached
&
B0105
DisplaceMas- SlaH065 (0.0)
Actual value displacement [100,8]
S.Setp Displace1 H237 (3051)

KR (110,2)
X>Y
B0102
Displacement > setpoint
X=Y
B0103
Displacement within threshold
X<Y
B0104
Displacement < setpoint
Y
KR (100,3)
Control
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 100 -
RmpUp Displacem
(2.5 ms)
H052
RmpUp Displacem
(2.5 ms)
H052
Diff.Pos.Control
d121
DisplacementSetp
d056
S.Ref_Pos_2
H157 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Max.Displacement
(2048.0)
H054
S.Displacem.Setup
KR3056
Set
Kp
Tn
KR3121
KR3122
Integrator comp.
angle controller
S.Act_Pos_1
H158 (3124)
KR (60,8)
set value
S.set Displ.Ramp H057 (0175)

B (60,2)
Tn Pos.Control
(500ms)
H111
IntegralComp.Pos
d122
Deviation angle
controller
S.Ref_Pos_1
H156 (3056)
KR (110,4)
KR3051
H051 (3050)
KR (500,4)
KP normiert
[110,4]
H055
(-2048.0)
Min.Displacement
enable
S.Act_Pos_2
H159 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Enable Control
H110
(1)
Hold I-Component
H104 (0109)
B (90,7)
Ramp generator displacement setpoint
Max. Position
(0.3)
H112
S.KP Pos.Contrl.
H108 (3044)
KR (80,4)
KP Pos.Control
d123
KR3120
PT1
Output angle
controller
KP angle controller
B0116
Angle controller
limitation active
KR3123
10-4
H115
(0.0)
ue_KP Value
Control
Angle controller
-1
KP_UE_0 PosCntrl
(1.0)
H114
KP_UE Pos.Contrl
(1.0)
H113
ue_KP_0 Value
(0.0)
H116
KP adaption
angle controller
Tfilt Pos.Cntrl
(0 ms)
H138
Outp.Pos.Control
d120
KP normalized
The input values of the angle controller use the normalization

1.0 = a quarter of a speed sensor pulse.
This normalization results in very small proportional gains for
the angle controller which can not be entered with OP1S.
The factor 10-4 allows to work with bigger values.
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 110 -
Tfilt Ref. Speed

(10ms)
Reference Speed H072
Refer.Speed filt
d074
d076
S.ReferenceSpeedt
H071 (3070)
KR (500,8)
Speed Setpoint
d136
KR3136
PT1
KR3076
KR3074
n_max Ramp Gen.

(1.0)
H125
H240 (3136)
KR (115,4)
KR3129
S.Ratio n_ref H239 (3044)

KR (80,4)
H126
(-1.0)
n_min Ramp Gen.
H127
(0.0ms)
n Ramp Up
Time
H128
(0.0ms)
n Ramp Down
Time
Enable speed
controller [120, 5]
Enable Jog
d176
S.enable Jog
H208 (0171)
B (520,4)
B0176
S.Jog Ref.Speed
0.0
Jog Setpoint
(0.0)
H130
1
Control
Jog enable
SetpSpeed;Torque
d152
KR3152
Output speed controller [120, 8]
KR3176
n setpoint after ramp
S.Slave n_ref_2
H241 (3176)
KR (115,3)
H207 (3130)
KR (115,2)
SpeedSetpRampOut
d129
S.Slave n_ref_1
Setpoint for
inverter
Jog setpoint
KR3130
Mode
Setpoint for the inverter (CU)
Speed controller on CU
Speed setpoint
Torque setpoint
Fixed value jogging
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 115 -
n_KP_0 Threshold
(0.0)
H144
KP adaption
speed controller
Inertia compensation / precontrol

S.enable PreCtrl
Tdif Accel.Comp.
(4 ms)
H083
H245 (0140)
B (120,5)
KP_0 SpeedContrl
(10.0)
S.KP(speedCtrl)
H142
H204 (3129)
KR (115,7)
KP Speed Control
d153
KP speed controller
S.Precontrol
KR3153
H079 (3129)
KR (115,7)
0.0
KP Speed Control
(10.0)
H141
DT1 (SpeedSetp.)
d085
S.DT1 Acc. Comp.
H244 (3080)
KR (500,7)
DT1
Speed Setp. ltd.

d137
DifferSpeedCntrl
d151
Tn SpeedControl
(200ms)
H145
S.2 n(ref-act)
S.n(ref,speed)
S.n(addit.)
H206 (3120)
KR (110,8)
H201 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Speed setpoint S.1 n(ref-act)
limited
H200 (3137)
KR3137
KR (120,2)
H205 (3129)
KR (115,7)
Deviation
speed
controller
KR3051
Kp
S.4 n(ref-act)
x
precontrol
1
set value
S.SV Int(speed)
set
H140
(0)
ModeSpeedControl
Control
B0134
Speed controller
limitation active
enable
H135
(-1.0)
Min n-Controller
H242 (3137)
KR (120,2)
S.Set Int(speed)
H243 (0000)
B (30,2)
Output speed
controller
Outp.SpeedContrl
d150
H202 (3146)
KR (60,8)
H203 (3000)
KR (30,2)
KR3150
Max n-Controller
(1.0)
H134
Tn
S.3 n(ref-act)
H133
(-1.0)
Min n_Setpoint
DT1 (n setp)
H082
(100ms)
Tfilt Acc.Comp.
H143
(0.0)
n_KP Threshold
Max. n_Setpoint
(1.0)
H132
KR3085
KR3145
B0140
Integral comp. speed controller
enable speed controller
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 120 -
Control and monitoring functions

for the inverter interface
CU Rec.State
d562
Status receive
100 ms
maximum
time interval
between 2
telegrams
receive initialized
1
send initialized
1
Timeout
1
inverter in operation
1
Inverter interface
B0500
CU receive init.
B0504
CU receive not init.
B0501
CU send init.
B0505
CU send not init.
B0502
CU Timeout
B0506
CU no Timeout
B0503
CU in operation
B0507
CU not operational
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 150 -
Error status word

Timeout CB [400,7]
Bit 0
F116
Timeout Peer [300,7]
Bit 1
F117
Speed controller limitation [120,8]
Bit 2
F118
Angle controller limitation [110,8]
Bit 3
F119
Extern fault [220,3]
Bit 4
F120
Speed deviation master [75,6]
Bit 5
F121
Speed deviation slave [75,6]
Bit 6
F122
Error position sensing master [70,7]
Bit 7
F123
Error position sensing slave [60,8]
Bit 8
F124
Bit 9
F125
S.F125
H900 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 10
F126
S.F126
H901 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
F127
Bit 12
F128
H902 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
F129
Bit 14
F130
Bit 15
F131
S.F127
Error Mask
(0)
H003
16 bit
Error Bits
d006
bitwise ANDed
16 bit
&
K2003
Errorbits
K2006
Bit 0
A097
Bit 1
A098
Bit 2
A099
H904 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 3
A100
Bit 4
A101
S.F130
H905 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
A102
S.F131
H906 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 6
A103
Bit 7
A104
Bit 8
A105
Bit 9
A106
Bit 10
A107
S.F129
S.A106
1
Inverter interface
Errors and alarms
Fault
B0005
no fault
Alarm status word

Timeout CB [400,7]
H903 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0003
at least 1 bit of the error

status set
S.F128
Error status
(send to the inverter)
H907 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.A107
H908 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
A108
Bit 12
A109
S.A108
H909 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
A110
Bit 14
A111
S.A109
H910 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 15
A112
S.A110
H911 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.A111
H912 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.A112
H913 (0000)
B (30,2)
Warning Mask
(0)
H004
bitwise ANDed
16 bit
Warning Bits
d007
16 bit
&
K2004
Alarm status
(send to inverter)
K2007
Alarmsbits
B0004
Alarm
at least 1 bit set of the

Alarm status
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 160 -
Four 16bit process data word are converted to floating-point

Receive process data
from inverter
CU actval1 norm.
(1.0)
H550
PZD1 .. PZD14 CU rec.

d571
d584
S.actval_1 CU
H563 (2572)
K (170,3)
...
PZD1 (status word1)
K2571
100 %
PZD1 from CU
CU actval1
d551
KR3551
Actual value1 CU
KR3553
Actual value2 CU
KR3555
Actual value3 CU
KR3591
CU Actual value_I_R
KR3589
CU N4_R
KR3570
CU DW_R
1.0
PZD 2
K2572
PZD2 from CU
PZD 3
K2573
PZD3 from CU
PZD4 (status word2)
K2574
PZD4 from CU
PZD 5
K2575
PZD5 from CU
CU actval2 norm
(1.0)
H552
S.actval_2 CU
100 %
H564 (2573)
K (170,3)
CU actval2
d553
1.0
PZD 6
K2576
PZD6 from CU
PZD 7
K2577
PZD7 from CU
PZD 8
K2578
PZD8 from CU
PZD 9
K2579
PZD9 from CU
PZD 10
K2580
PZD10 from CU
PZD 11
K2581
PZD11 from CU
PZD 12
K2582
PZD12 from CU
CU actval3 norm
(1.0)
H554
S.actval_3 CU
100 %
H565 (2575)
K (170,3)
CU actval3
d555
1.0
CU I_R
d591
S.CU I_R
H590 (2577)
K (170,3)
PZD 13
K2583
PZD13 from CU
PZD 14
K2584
PZD14 from CU
Convert a double word to floating-point

CU N4 norm.
(1.0)
H588
S.DW high CU
H567 (2582)
K (170,3)
S.N4 CU
DW
high
S.DW low CU
H568 (2581)
K (170,3)
H587 (5567)
KK (170,5)
KK5567
low
100 %
CU N4_R
d589
1.0
CU DW_R
d570
S.DW CU
H569 (5567)
KK (170,5)
DW
R
1
Inverter interface
Process data reception
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 170 -
Status Word1 CU
d246
K2246
S.StatusWord1 CU
H558 (2571)
K (170,3)
CU status word 1
S.StatusWord2 CU
H559 (2574)
K (170,3)
CU status word 2
Bit 0 Ready to switch on
B0510
CU status1.0
Bit 0 Flying restart/exitation
B0480
CU status2.0
Bit 1 Ready for operation
B0511
CU status1.1
Bit 1
B0481
CU status2.1
Bit 2 Run
B0512
CU status1.2
Bit 2 Overspeed
B0482
CU status2.2
Bit 3 Fault active
B0513
CU status1.3
Bit 3 ext. fault 1 active
B0483
CU status2.3
Bit 4 OFF2 active
B0514
CU status1.4
B0484
CU status2.4
Bit 5 OFF3 active
B0515
CU status1.5
Bit 5 Alarm overload
B0485
CU status2.5
Bit 6 Switch-on inhibit
B0516
CU status1.6
Bit 6 Fault overtemperature
B0486
CU status2.6
Bit 7 Warning active
B0517
CU status1.7
Bit 7 Alarm overtemperature
B0487
CU status2.7
Bit 8 no setp./act.value deviation
B0518
CU status1.8
Bit 8 Alarm overtemp. motor
B0488
CU status2 .8
Bit 9 PcD-control requested
B0519
CU status1.9
Bit 9 Fault overtemp. motor
B0489
CU status2 .9
Bit 10 Comp. value reached
B0520
CU status1.10
Bit 10
B0490
CU status2.10
Bit 11 Low voltage fault
B0521
CU status1.11
Bit 11 Fault motor blocked
B0491
CU status2.11
Bit 12 req.energ. main conta.
B0522
CU status1.12
Bit 12 Bypass contactor enable
B0492
CU status2.12
Bit 13 Ramp funct.gen. active
B0523
CU status1.13
Bit 13
B0493
CU status2.13
Bit 14 positve speed setpoint
B0524
CU status1.14
Bit 14
B0494
CU status2.14
Bit 15
B0525
CU status1.15
Bit 15 Pre-charging active
B0495
CU status2.15
inverted status sbits

CU status1.0 inv
B0545
CTW from CU
d556
.....
...
...
B0530
CU status1.15 inv
S.CTW from CU
B0550
B0565
CTW from CU.15
B0570
CTW from CU.0 inv
...
H557 can be used to select any communication

PZD to control the angle synchronism software.
Control bits are B0550 ... B0565 (inverted bits
B0570 .. B0585)
1
Inverter interface
Status words
CTW from CU.0
...
H557 (2576)
K (170,3)
B0585
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
CTW from CU.15 inv
7
Function diagram
8
- 180 -
Control Word1 CU
d026
Control word 1
for the inverter
S.Bit0 CTW1 CU... Bit15 CTW1 CU

H510 (0650)
B (530,3)
H512 (0652)
B (530,3)
H514 (0654)
B (530,7)
H516 (0656)
B (530,7)
H518 (0658)
B (540,3)
H520 (0660)
B (540,3)
H522 (0662)
B (540,7)
H524 (0664)
B (540,7)
Control word1 CU
Bit 0 ON
H526 (0000)
B (30,2)
H513 (0653)
B (530,3)
H528 (0000)
B (30,2)
H529 (0000)
B (30,2)
H530 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 4 Ramp funct.gen enable
H517 (0657)
B (530,7)
Bit 4
H532 (0000)
B (30,2)
H533 (0000)
B (30,2)
H534 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 8 Jogging 1
H521 (0661)
B (540,3)
Bit 8
H536 (0000)
B (30,2)
H537 (0000)
B (30,2)
H538 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 12 counter clockw. enable
Bit 12
H540 (0000)
B (30,2)
1
Inverter interface
Control words
B0526
Bit 13
Bit 14
H541 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 15 0= extern fault

H525 (0665)
B (540,7)
Bit 11
H539 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13 Raise motor potentiom

Bit 14 Lower motor
potentiom
Bit 9 Enable speed cntrl.

Bit 10
Bit 11 Clochwise seq. enable
H523 (0663)
B (540,7)
Bit 7
H535 (0546)
B (90,8)
Bit 9 Jogging 2
Bit 10 Control requested
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 Edge fault acknowledge
H519 (0659)
B (540,3)
Bit 3
H531 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5 Start ramp funct.gen.

Bit 6 Setpoint enable
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3 Inverter enable
H515 (0655)
B (530,7)
Control word2 CU
K2027
H527 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 1 /OFF2
Bit 2 /OFF3
Control Word2 CU
d027
Bit 0
K2026
H511 (0651)
B (530,3)
Control word 2
for the inverter
S.Bit0 CTW2 CU ... Bit15 CTW2 CU
Bit 15
ext. Fault
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 220 -
S.CU setp_1
1.0
H500 (3152)
KR (115,8)
K2500
setpoint1 CU N2
100 %
H501
(1.0)
CU setp_1 norm.
Control Word 1 Control Word 2

d147
d148
S.CU setp_2
1.0
H502 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2502
setpoint2 CU N2
100 %
H503
(1.0)
CU setp_2 norm.
1.0
H504 (3120)
KR (110,8)
K2504
setpoint3 CU N2
100 %
H505
(1.0)
CU setp_3 norm.
S.CU setp_4
1.0
H506 (3153)
KR (120,3)
S. PZD1 CU H381 (2026)

K (220,4)
PZD 1
Control word 1
S. PZD2 CU H382 (2500)

K (230,4)
PZD 2
setpoint
S. PZD3 CU H383 (2502)

K (230,4)
S.CU setp_3
K2506
PZD 3
S. PZD4 CU H384 (2027)

K (220,8)
PZD 4
Control word 2
S. PZD5 CU H385 (2504)

K (230,4)
PZD 5
add. setp. speed
S. PZD6 CU H386 (2506)

K (230,4)
PZD 6
KP adaption
S. PZD7 CU H387 (2510)

K (230,5)
setpoint4 CU N2
100 %
PZD 7
S. PZD8 CU H388 (2508)

K (230,4)
H507
(1.0)
CU setp_4 norm.
Process data
transmission to
inverter
PZD 8
Inertia compens.
S.CU setp_5
1.0
H508 (3080)
KR (500,7)
K2508
setpoint5 CU N2
100 %
H509
(1.0)
CU setp_5 norm.
S.Setp DW_ CU
1.0
H498 (3000)
KR (30,2)
100 %
DW
W
high
K2510
setpoint6 high CU
low
K2509
setpoint6 low CU
H499
(1.0)
CU DW norm.
1
2
Inverter interface
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 230 -
Mask Peer tmax

(16#FFFF)
H362
Control and monitoring functions for

the peer to peer interface
Peer enable
(1)
H309
16 bit
Peer RecStateYTS
d364
Enable
Baud Rate Peer

(19200)
H363
maximum time
interval between 2
telegrams
Baud rate
B0361
B0362
PZD 2 + PZD 3
PZD 4 + PZD 5
DW
W
1
2
Communication
B0360
Timeout Peer
S.Peer PZD3 H336 (2000)

K (30,2)
Process data
transmission
peer to peer
Peer Sendtype1
(2)
H339
S.Peer PZD2 H335 (2000)

K (30,2)
W
PZD 1
DW
0
S.Peer DW1 H337 (5000)

K (30,2)
....
DW
Peer W1 send
d300
PZD5 Peer
d333
PZD 1
S.Peer PZD1 H345 (2303)

K (30,2)
The floating-point connectors KR3330 and KR3332 must not

be used if there is no floating point value transmission!
PZD1 Peer
d329
Timeout
Process data words PZD2, PZD3 and PZD4, PZD5 may be

transmitted as word, double word or floating point values.
Process data
receiption
bitwise ANDed
at least 1 bit set
&
receive status
tmax Peer OpMode
(100ms)
H361
tmaxPeer PowerOn
(20000 ms)
H360
K2329
PZD1 from Peer
K2330
PZD2 from Peer
K2331
PZD3 from Peer
KR3330
Peer Float1
KK5330
Peer DW1
K2332
PZD4 from Peer
K2333
PZD5 from Peer
KR3332
Peer Float2
KK5332
Peer DW2
Peer Sendtype2
(2)
H344
S.Peer PZD4 H340 (2000)

K (30,2)
S.Peer PZD5 H341 (2000)
K (30,2)
PZD 2 + PZD 3
S.Peer Float1 H338 (3304)

KR (570,6)
PZD 4 + PZD 5
DW
0
S.Peer DW2 H342 (5000)

K (30,2)
KR (570,8)
1
2
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 300 -
Peer ControlWord
d346
Status Word Peer
d327
K2346
Status word peer
S.PeerState1_B0 ... S.PeerState1_B15

S.ContrlWordPeer
H334 (2329)
K (300,3)
H310 (0000)
B (30,2)
Control word peer

Bit 0
B0300
Peer CTW.0
Bit 1
B0301
Peer CTW.1
Bit 2
B0302
Peer CTW.2
Bit 3
B0303
Peer CTW.3
Bit 4
B0304
Peer CTW.4
Bit 5
B0305
Peer CTW.5
Bit 6
B0306
Peer CTW.6
Bit 7
B0307
Peer CTW.7
Bit 8
B0308
Peer CTW.8
Bit 9
B0309
Peer CTW.9
Bit 10
B0310
Peer CTW.10
Bit 11
B0311
Peer CTW.11
Bit 12
B0312
Peer CTW.12
Bit 13
B0313
Peer CTW.13
Bit 14
B0314
Peer CTW.14
Bit 15
B0315
Peer CTW.15
H312 (0000)
B (30,2)
H314 (0000)
B (30,2)
H316 (0000)
B (30,2)
H318 (0001)
B (30,2)
H320 (0001)
B (30,2)
H322 (0001)
B (30,2)
inverted control bits
B0335
1
2
Communication
Peer CTW.0 inv
.....
...
...
B0320
H324 (0000)
B (30,2)
K2327
H311 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 1
Bit 2
H313 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 3
Bit 4
H315 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
Bit 6
H317 (0001)
B (30,2)
Bit 7
Bit 8
H319 (0666)
B (360,7)
Bit 9
Bit 10
H321 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
Bit 12
H323 (0001)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
Bit 14
H325 (0000)
B (30,2)
Peer CTW.15 inv
status word peer
Bit 0
Bit 15
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 310 -
Control and monitoring functions of

the communication board
(COMBOARD)
16 bit
CB receive state
d465
ComBoard enable
(1)
H409
Enable
bitwise ANDed
at least 1 bit set
T
&
Receives status
Timeout CB
B0405
Timeout CB
Timeout
Receive initialized
tmax CB OpMode
(100ms)
H463
tmax CB PowerOn
(20000 ms)
H462
Mask tmax CB
(16#FFFF)
H464
Maximun time
interval between 2
telegrams
1
send initialized
B0400
CB receive init.
B0401
CB receive not init.
B0402
CB send init.
B0403
CB send not init.
Configuration COMBOARD
CB Param.valid
(1)
H495
CB Slave address
(3)
H480
Configuration of the COMBOARD:
Configuration valid
State of
Configuration
CB state SRT400
d496
Slave address of the

COMBOARDs
CB Parameter 1
(0)
H481
CB Parameter 8
(0)
H488
CB Parameter 2
(2)
H482
CB Parameter 9
(0)
H489
These parameters are reserved for a

COMBOARD in SRT400 applications.
CB Parameter 3
(0)
H483
Parameter setting for the

COMBOARD
CB Parameter 10
(0)
H490
If the T400 is placed in the electronic

box of the inverter the configuration of
the COMBOARD is done by inverter
parameters (e.g. P918 for the bus
address with Masterdrives MC).
CB Parameter 4
(0)
H484
(depending on the type of

COMBOARD)
CB Parameter 11
(0)
H491
CB Parameter 5
(0)
H485
CB Parameter 12
(0)
H492
CB Parameter 6
(0)
H486
CB Parameter 13
(0)
H493
CB Parameter 7
(0)
H487
1
2
Communication
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 400 -
Conversion of 16bit process data to floating point
The maximum number of

PZD depends on the actual
PPO type.
PZD1 CB rec. ...
PZD10 CB rec.
Process data
receiption from
COMBOARD
d801
S.setp_1 CB
100 %
H813 (2802)
K (410,3)
d810
KR3450
....
PZD 1
Control word
CB Setp_1 norm
(1.0)
H451
CB Setp_1 rec.
d450
setpoint1 CB
1.0
K2801
PZD1 from CB
PZD 2
K2802
PZD2 from CB
PZD 3
K2803
PZD3 from CB
CB Setp_2 norm
(1.0)
H453
CB Setp_2 rec.
d452
S.setp_2 CB
100 %
H814 (2803)
K (410,3)
KR3452
setpoint2 CB
1.0
PZD 4
K2804
PZD4 from CB
PZD 5
K2805
PZD5 from CB
PZD 6
K2806
PZD6 from CB
CB Setp_3 norm
(1.0)
H455
CB Setp_3 rec.
d454
S.setp_3 CB
100 %
H815 (2805)
K (410,3)
KR3454
setpoint3 CB
1.0
PZD 7
K2807
PZD7 from CB
PZD 8
K2808
PZD8 from CB
PZD 9
K2809
PZD9 from CB
CB Setp_4 norm
(1.0)
H457
CB Setp_4 rec.
d456
S.setp_4 CB
100 %
H816 (2806)
K (410,3)
KR3456
setpoint4 CB
KR3821
setpoint DW CB
1.0
PZD 10
K2810
PZD10 from CB
Conversion of double word to floating point

CB DW norm.
(1.0)
H841
S.DW high CB
H817 (2807)
K (410,3)
H819 (2809)
K (410,3)
Setp. I_R CB
d818
S.setp. I_R CB
100 %
CB setp. DW
d821
S.DW low CB
KR3818
setpoint I_R CB
1
Communication
COMBOARD receiption
DW
high
H820 (2810)
K (410,3)
low
1.0
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 410 -
ControlWord 1 CB
d460
ControlWord 2 CB
d461
K2460
CB Control word 1
CB Control word 2
S.Control W2 CB
Bit 0 OFF1 = 0
B0800
CB Control W1.0
Bit 1 OFF2 = 0
B0801
CB Control W1.1
Bit 2 OFF3 = 0
B0802
CB CTW2
H812 (2804)
K (410,3)
Bit 0
B0820
CB Control W2.0
Bit 1
B0821
CB Control W2.1
CB Control W1.2
Bit 2
B0822
CB Control W2.2
B0803
CB Control W1.3
Bit 3
B0823
CB Control W2.3
Bit 4 Ramp funct.gen. enable
B0804
CB Control W1.4
Bit 4
B0824
CB Control W2.4
Bit 5 Start ramp funtion gen.
B0805
CB Control W1.5
Bit 5
B0825
CB Control W2.5
B0806
CB Control W1.6
Bit 6
B0826
CB Control W2.6
Bit 7 Fault acknowledge
B0807
CB Control W1.7
Bit 7
B0827
CB Control W2.7
Bit 8 Jogging 1
B0808
CB Control W1.8
Bit 8
B0828
CB Control W2.8
Bit 9 Jogging 2
B0809
CB Control W1.9
Bit 9 Enable speed controller
B0829
CB Control W2.9
B0810
CB Control W1.10
Bit 10
B0830
CB Control W2.10
Bit 11 Clockwise seq. enable
B0811
CB Control W1.11
Bit 11
B0831
CB Control W2.11
Bit 12 Counter clockw. enable
B0812
CB Control W1.12
Bit 12
B0832
CB Control W2.12
Bit 13 Raise motor potentiom.
B0813
CB Control W1.13
Bit 13
B0833
CB Control W2.13
Bit 14 Lower motor potent.
B0814
CB Control W1.14
Bit 14
B0834
CB Control W2.14
Bit 15 External fault = 0
B0815
CB Control W1.15
Bit 15
B0835
CB Control W2.15
inverted bits of the control word
B0855
1
2
Communication
CB CTW1.0 inv
B0860
...
.....
...
...
B0840
CB CTW1.15 inv
B0875
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
CB CTW2.0 inv
.....
H811 (2801)
K (410,3)
K2461
...
S.Control W1 CB
CB CTW1
CB CTW2.15 inv
7
Function diagram
8
- 420 -
S.CB state1 B0 ... S.CB state1 B15

H410 (0000)
B (30,2)
Status word 1
for COMBOARD
Status Word1 CB
d466
Bit 0
H411 (0000)
B (30,2)
H412 (0000)
B (30,2)
K2466
Status word 1 CB
Bit 1
Status Word2 CB
d467
Bit 2
H413 (0000)
B (30,2)
H414 (0000)
B (30,2)
H426 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 4
H415 (0000)
B (30,2)
H416 (0000)
B (30,2)
H418 (0000)
B (30,2)
H420 (0000)
B (330,3)
H422 (0000)
B (30,2)
H424 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
H432 (0548)
B (240,8)
Bit 6
H433 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
Bit 7
H434 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 8
H435 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
Bit 9
H436 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 14
H425 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 4
H431 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 12
H423 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 3
H430 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 9
Bit 10
H437 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 15
Bit 11
H438 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 12
H439 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
H440 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 14
H441 (0000)
B (30,2)
1
2
Communication
Status word 2 CB
Bit 2
H429 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 7
Bit 10
H421 (0000)
B (30,2)
K2467
Bit 1
H428 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 8
H419 (0000)
B
Bit 0
H427 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
Bit 6
H417 (0000)
B (30,2)
Status word 2
for COMBOARD
Bit 3
Bit 15
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 430 -
S.actval_1 CB
1.0
H822 (3446)
KR (550,3)
K2822
Actual value1 CB
PZD1 CB out
d921
100 %
H401
(1.0)
CB actval1 norm.
1.0
H823 (3447)
KR (550,5)
......
S. PZD1 CB H831 (2442)

K (560,4)
S.actval_2 CB
K2823
Actual value2 CB
100 %
H403
(1.0)
CB actval2 norm.
S.actval_3 CB
PZD10 CB out
d930
Process data
transmission
COMBOARD
PZD 1
Status word 1
S. PZD2 CB H832 (2822)

K (440,3)
PZD 2
S. PZD3 CB H833 (2823)

K (440,3)
PZD 3
S. PZD4 CB H834 (2444)

K (560,7)
PZD 4
S. PZD5 CB H835 (2824)

K (440,3)
PZD 5
S. PZD6 CB H836 (2825)

K (440,3)
PZD 6
S. PZD7 CB H837 (2827)

K (440,7)
PZD 7
S. PZD8 CB H838 (2000)

K (30,2)
PZD 8
S. PZD9 CB H839 (2828)

K (440,4)
PZD 9
S. PZD10 CB H840 (2829)

K (440,4)
PZD 10
1.0
H824 (3448)
KR (550,6)
K2824
Actual value3 CB
100 %
H405
(1.0)
CB actval3 norm.
S.actval_4 CB
1.0
H825 (3449)
KR (550,8)
K2825
Actual value4 CB
100 %
H407
(1.0)
CB actval4 norm.
Conversion to double word
S.actval R_I CB
S.actval_1 CB
1.0
H828 (3000)
KR (30,2)
DW
100 %
high
K2828
low
K2829
H826 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2827
Actual value R_I CB
H829
(1.0)
Actval5 CB norm.
1
2
Communication
COMBORAD transmission
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 440 -
USS slave operation

The USS slave coupling is required for visualizing or changing
parameters using OP1S or SIMOVIS only if the T400 is working
stand alone in the SRT400 rack.
For enabling set T400 switch S1/8 = ON. The switching
becomes valid after the next power on. Online communication
with other service tools using the same interface (e.g. CFC) will
be disabled!
If there is no access with OP1S caused by not supported
parameter setting (e.g. wrong baud rate) set S1/8 = OFF and
use the Service-IBS program to correct the parameters.
USS unable
(1)
H700
Baud rate USS

(9600)
H701
USS Address
(0)
H703
USS 4-Wire
(0)
H704
1
Communication
USS slave
Enable
Receives status
PZD1 USS
d706
USS rec. state

d705
Receive
Baud rate
(OP1S: 9600 bps or 19200 bps)
PZD1
K2706
PZD1 USS
PZD2
K2707
PZD2 USS
Transmit
USS bus address
S.PZD1 USS Slave
S.PZD2 USS Slave
Duplex / half duplex operation

0: RS485 (2 wires)
1: RS232 (4 wires)
PZD2 USS
d707
H708 (2000)
K (30,2)
PZD1
PZD2
H709 (2000)
K (30,2)
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 450 -
S.S RS-FlipFlop1
S.S RS-FlipFlop2
L698 (0000)
B (30,2)
L734 (0000)
B (30,2)
Q
S.R RS-FlipFlop1
B0698
RSFF1_Q
B0699
RSFF1_QN
S.AND_OR1_1
S.R RS-FlipFlop2
L699 (0000)
B (30,2)
L735 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.AND1_I1
S.AND2_I1
L700 (0001)
B (30,2)
L703 (0001)
B (30,2)
L830 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0734
RSFF2_Q
B0735
RSFF2_QN
AND_OR1
S.AND_OR1_2
L831 (0000)
B (30,2)
&
S.AND_OR1_3
S.AND1_I2
L832 (0001)
B (30,2)
S.AND_OR2_1
S.AND2_I2
&
L701 (0001)
B (30,2)
B0700
AND1_Q
&
L704 (0001)
B (30,2)
B0703
L833 (0000)
B (30,2)
AND2_Q
AND_OR2
S.AND_OR2_2
S.AND1_I3
S.AND2_I3
L702 (0001)
B (30,2)
L705 (0001)
B (30,2)
S.OR2_I1
L710 (0000)
B (30,2)
L713 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.OR1_I2
&
L835 (0001)
B (30,2)
S.OR2_I2
L711 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0710
Q_OR1
L714 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.Not1
B0713
Q_OR2
L732 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.OR1_I3
S.OR2_I3
S.Not2
L712 (0000)
B (30,2)
L715 (0000)
B (30,2)
L733 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.Switch1_0
S.Switch2_0
L706 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Switch1
L707 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch3_0
L716 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch1_1
KR3706
Switch2
KR3716
KR3825
S.Switch3_sel
S.Switch4_sel
L826 (0000)
B (30,2)
L829 (0000)
B (30,2)
Not2_Q
L828 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L718 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0733
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Switch4
S.Switch2_sel
S.Switch4_1
L708 (0000)
B (30,2)
Not1_Q
Switch3
S.Switch1_sel
1
Logical gates
B0732
L827 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch3_1
L825 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch4_0
L824 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch2_1
L717 (3000)
KR (30,2)
B1833
L834 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.AND_OR2_3
S.OR1_I1
B1830
KR3827
1
7
Function diagram
8
- 460 -
S.ADDI_1 X1
L606 (2000)
K (30,2)
K2607
ADDI_Y
L787 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L607 (2000)
K (30,2)
L608 (2000)
K (30,2)
KR3786
ADD_1
SUBI_Y
S.SUBI_1 X2
L812 (2001)
K (30,2)
S.DIVI_1 X2
L813 (2001)
K (30,2)
L790 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2812
DIVI_1 Y
X1 modulo X2
K2813
S.MULI_1 X2
L815 (2001)
K (30,2)
MUL_1
S.Display R2 L029 (3330)

KR (300,3)
KR (300,3)
S.MUL2 X1

KR (480,7)
L799 (3001)
KR (30,2)
ADD_2
S.ADD2 X3
L800 (3001)
KR (30,2)
MUL_2
S.Display B1
L032 (0193)
B (75,5)
L801 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.Display B2
L033 (0196)
B (75,5)
S.DIV1 X1
S.Display B3
L034 (0105)
B (100,8)
S.Display B4
L035 (0116)
B (110,7)
S.SUB1 X1
K2814
MULI_1 Y
double word result

KK5814
MULI_1 (DW)
KR3792
SUB_1
S.SUB1 X2
L793 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L802 (3001)
KR (30,2)
KR3802
Display R3
d030
Display R4
d031
Display B1
d032
Display B2
d033
Display B3
d034
DIV_1
S.DIV1 X2
L803 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.SUB2 X1
L794 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Display R2
d029
BOOL parameters
KR3799
S.MUL2 X3
L791 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L792 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Display R1
d028
S.MUL2 X2
KR3789
DIVI_1 (MOD)
S.MULI_1 X1
L814 (2001)
K (30,2)
S.ADD2 X1
S.ADD2 X2
S.DIVI_1 X1
KR3796
L798 (3001)
KR (30,2)
L789 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L609 (2000)
K (30,2)
L797 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.MUL1 X3
L788 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2608

KR (100,5)
S.MUL1 X2
S.ADD1 X3
S.SUBI_1 X1
Floating point parameters
L796 (3001)
KR (30,2)
L786 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.ADD1 X2
S.ADDI_1 X2
Display parameters
S.MUL1 X1
S.ADD1 X1
Display B4
d035
Integer parameters
KR3794
S.SUB2 X2
SUB_2
S.DIV2 X1
L804 (3001)
KR (30,2)
L795 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Display I1 L036 (2500)

K (230,4)
KR3804
DIV_2
K (230,4)
S.DIV2 X2
L805 (3001)
KR (30,2)
Display I1
d036
Display I2
d037
Word parameters
S.Display W1 L038 (2605)
K (490,5)
K (490,5)
1
2
Arithmetic and display parameters
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Display W1
d038
Display W2
d039
7
Function diagram
8
- 470 -
Low pass filter

1. order
Tfilt PT1
(20ms)
L741
Band stop filter
QualityFact.Filt
(2.0)
L739
S.PT1_input
S.Band-Stop filt
S.Compare_X
L740 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L742 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L744 (3000)
KR (30,2)
PT1
KR3740
PT1_out
KR3742
Band stop
L745 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L743 (3002)
KR (30,2)
L738 (0000)
B (30,2)
Compare2 Hyst
(0.1)
L751
S.Compare2 Range
L750 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.Compare_Y
S.FilterFrequenc
S.set_PT1_zero
Comparator
X>Y
B0744
Compare X>Y
X=Y
B0743
Compare X=Y
X<Y
B0745
Compare X<Y
Limit_aktiv
Comparator
with
Hysteresis
S.Limit_max
L746 (3001)
KR (30,2)
Limiter
y
S.Limit_input
X>Y
S.Compare2
L749 (3000)
KR (30,2)
X=Y
B0749
B0750
L747 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Compare2 X>Y
S.Limit_min
Compare2 X=Y
B0747
B0746
Limit_max
KR3747
Limit_out
B0748
Limit_min
L748 (3000)
KR (30,2)
X<Y
B0751
Compare2 X<Y
S. Compare2 Mid
L752 (3003)
KR (30,2)
Curve_X1
(0.0)
L754
2 point
characteristic
S.Curve_X
L753 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Integrator T
(1000 ms)
L822
Integrator LU
(1.0)
L819
y
Curve_Y1
(0.0)
L755
B0817
characteristic_Y
S.Integrator X L818 (3000)

KR (30,2)
at upper limit
KR3819
KR3753
Curve_Y2
(1.0)
L757
S.Integrator set
L756
(1.0)
Curve_X2
1
B0818
S.Integrator SV L821 (3000)

KR (30,2)
at lower limit
L820
(-1.0)
Integrator LL
L823 (0000)
B (30,2)
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 480 -
S.FreeWord
L760 (2000)
K (30,2)
DW norm.
(1.0)
L763
S.DW_high
Bit 0
B0760
FreeWord_0
Bit 1
B0761
FreeWord_1
Bit 2
B0762
FreeWord_2
Bit 3
B0763
FreeWord_3
S.DW_low
Bit 4
B0764
FreeWord_4
L762 (2000)
K (30,2)
Bit 5
B0765
FreeWord_5
Bit 6
B0766
FreeWord_6
Bit 7
B0767
FreeWord_7
Bit 8
B0768
FreeWord_8
Bit 9
B0769
FreeWord_9
Bit 10
B0770
FreeWord_10
Bit 11
B0771
FreeWord_11
Bit 12
B0772
FreeWord_12
Bit 13
B0773
FreeWord_13
Bit 14
B0774
FreeWord_14
Bit 15
B0775
FreeWord_15
L761 (2000)
K (30,2)
Word norm.
(1.0)
L765
100 %
Word_Float
Bit 1
B1811
FreeWord2_1
Bit 2
B1812
FreeWord2_2
Bit 3
B1813
FreeWord2_3
Bit 4
B1814
FreeWord2_4
S.W_DW1 low
Bit 5
B1815
FreeWord2_5
L817 (2000)
K (30,2)
Bit 6
B1816
FreeWord2_6
Bit 7
B1817
FreeWord2_7
Bit 8
B1818
FreeWord2_8
L767
(1.0)
Float norm.
DW
K2605
DW_W1 high
low
K2606
DW_W1 low
S.Edge1
L709 (0000)
B (30,2)
L816 (2000)
K (30,2)
B0709
Edge1_Q
B0708
Edge1_QN
B0728
OnDelay1_Q
B0730
OffDelay1_Q
DW
high
KK5816
low
W_DW1
T_OnDelay1
(100ms)
L729
S.OnDelay1
L728 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.I_R_1
L646 (2000)
K (30,2)
B1820
FreeWord2_10
Bit 11
B1821
FreeWord2_11
Bit 12
B1822
FreeWord2_12
Bit 13
B1823
FreeWord2_13
S.R_I1
Bit 14
B1824
FreeWord2_14
Bit 15
B1825
FreeWord2_15
L647 (3000)
KR (30,2)
high
S.W_DW1 high
Bit 10
100 %
KR3765
L605 (5000)
KK (30,2)
FreeWord2_0
1
Type conversion
Float_N2
K2766
S.DW_W1
B1810
FreeWord2_9
1.0
L766 (3000)
KR (30,2)
1.0
Bit 0
B1819
S.Float
S.Word
L764 (2000)
K (30,2)
DW_float
1.0
Bit 9
100 %
KR3763
low
S.Free_W_B_2
L810 (2000)
K (30,2)
DW
high
I
KR3604
I_R1
R
T_OffDelay1
(100ms)
L731
R
K2647
S.OffDelay1
R_I1
L730 (0000)
B (30,2)
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 490 -
MUX displace.Setp
(1)
H050
MUX Accel.Comp.
(1)
H080
0.0
Fixed value displacement [30,3]
0.0
AE1 filtered [50,6]
1) The input assignment for inputs 2 to
AE2 filtered [50,6]
AE3 filtered [50,6]
14 is identical with each multiplexer

on this page
DT1(n_setp) [120,8]
AE4 filtered [50,6]
Actual value1 CU [170,7]
Setpoint1 CB [410,7]
10
11
11
12
12
Peer Float1 [300,4]
13
13
Peer Float2 [300,4]
14
1)
6
7
8
9
KR3050
Mux displacement
setpoint
10
KR3080
0.0
0.0
0.0
Fixed value rel. ration [30,3]
Fixed value ration [30,3]
1)
Mux inertia compensation
MUX Refer.speed
(15)
H070
14
MUXrelativeRatio
(1)
H048
MUX ratio
(1)
H040
Fixed value reference speed [30,3]
0
1
1)
1)
6
7
10
10
1
Multiplexer
Setpoint channels
KR3040
10
Mux ratio
KR3048
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
Mux reference
speed
11
Mux relative ratio
11
KR3070
14
n_Master normalized[70,7]
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
15
7
Function diagram
8
- 500 -
MUX AnalogOutp 1
(1)
H618
1
Multiplexer
Analog outputs
MUX AnalogOutp 2
(0)
H619
0.0
Setpoint for inverter [115,8]
Displacement setpoint [110,1]
Ratio[80,4]
Reference speed setpoint [115,2]
Relative ratio [80,2]
Mux inertia compensation [500,7]
Speed setpoint limited [120,2]
Speed slave filtered [60,8]
Output speed controller [120,8]
The input assignment

for both multiplexers
on this page is
identical
7
8
9
Deviation speed controller [120,4]
10
10
KP speed controller [120,3]
11
11
n setpoint after ramp [115,7]
12
12
Output angle controller [110,8]
13
13
Deviation angle controller [110,5]
14
KP angle controller [110,4]
15
Displacement actual value [100,8]
16
16
Displacement - position difference [100,8]
17
17
position deviation filtered [60,8]
18
18
n_Slave norm. [60,8]
19
19
20
20
n_Master normalized [70,7]
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
setpoint1 CB [410,7]
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
Peer Float1 [300,3]
30
30
Peer Float2 [300,3]
31
31
DT1(n setp) [120,8]
32
32
14
KR3618
15
Mux DAC1
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
KR3619
Mux DAC2
7
Function diagram
8
- 510 -
Identical input
assignment for all
multiplexers of this
chart (except input 2)
MUX Displ.Reset
(0)
H170
MUX enable Jog

(0)
H171
0
1
CTW from CU.1

[180,7]
MUX en.Pos.Cntrl
(0)
H172
0
1
CTW from CU.2

[180,7]
MUX Reset Posit.

(0)
H173
0
1
CTW from CU.3

[180,7]
MUX Synchr.Cmd
(0)
H174
0
1
CTW from CU.4

[180,7]
CTW from CU.0[180,7]
BinInput 3 [52,4]
BinInput 4 [52,4]
BinInput 5 [52,4]
BinInput 6 [52,4]
BinInput 7 [52,4]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
CB Control W2.0 [420,7]
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
16
Peer CTW.0 [310,4]
17
17
17
17
17
Peer CTW.1 [310,4]
18
18
18
18
18
Peer CTW.2 [310,4]
19
19
19
19
19
Peer CTW.3 [310,4]
20
20
20
20
20
Peer CTW.4 [310,4]
21
21
21
21
21
Peer CTW.5 [310,4]
22
22
22
22
22
Peer CTW.6 [310,4]
23
23
23
23
23
Peer CTW.7 [310,4]
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
1
Multiplexer
Binary control
1
3
Mux displacement
reset
B0170
1
3
15
Mux jog enable
15
16
B0171
16
Mux enable angle

controller
B0172
1
3
15
16
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
1
3
14
Mux reset position
15
16
B0173
Mux synchronizing
command
B0174
7
Function diagram
8
- 520 -
MUX CTW1 Bit0

(0)
H650
MUX CTW1 Bit4

(1)
H654
Peer CTW.0 [310,4]
Peer CTW.4 [310,4]
BinInput 1 [52,4]
BinInput 5 [52,4]
CTW from CU.9 [180,7]
Bit0 Control word1

B0650
ON (/OFF1)
MUX CTW1 Bit1

(1)
H651
Ramp function
generator enable
MUX CTW1 Bit5

(1)
H655
Peer CTW.1 [300,7]
BinInput 2 [52,4]
Peer CTW.5 [310,4]
BinInput 6 [52,4]
Bit1 Control word1

B0651
not OFF2
MUX CTW1 Bit2

(1)
H652
Bit5 Control word1
Start ramp function

generator
B0655
MUX CTW1 Bit6

(1)
H656
Peer CTW.2 [310,4]
BinInput 2 [52,4]
Peer CTW.6 [310,4]
BinInput 7 [52,4]
Bit2 Control word1

B0652
not OFF3
MUX CTW1 Bit3

(1)
H653
Bit6 Control word1
Setpoint enable
B0656
MUX CTW1 Bit7

(0)
H657
Peer CTW.3 [310,4]

BinInput 3 [52,4]
1
Multiplexer
Control word (part 1)
Bit4 Control word1

B0654
Peer CTW.7 [310,4]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
Bit3 Control word1

B0653
Inverter enable
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Bit7 Control word1

B0657
Edge fault
acknowlege
7
Function diagram
8
- 530 -
MUX CTW1 Bit8

(0)
H658
MUX CTW1 Bit12

(1)
H662
Peer CTW.8 [310,4]

Coarse pulse 1 [52,8]
Peer CTW.12 [310,4]
Bit8 Control word1
Jogging 1
B0658
MUX CTW1 Bit9

(0)
H659
Counter clockwise
phase sequence
enable
MUX CTW1 Bit13

(0)
H663
Peer CTW.9 [310,4]
Peer CTW.13 [310,4]
Bit9 Control word1
Jogging 2
B0659
Bit13 Control word1

B0663
Raise motor
potentiometer
MUX CTW1 Bit10

(1)
H660
MUX CTW1 Bit14

(0)
H664
Peer CTW.10 [310,4]
Bit10 Control word1

B0660
Control requested
Peer CTW.14 [310,4]
Bit14 Control word1

B0664
Lower motor
potentiometer
4
MUX CTW1 Bit15
(1)
H665
MUX CTW1 Bit11

(1)
H661
Peer CTW.11 [310,4]
1
Multiplexer
Bit12 Control word1

B0662
Bit11 Control word1

B0661
Clockwise phase
sequence enable
Peer CTW.15 [310,4]
Fault [200,6]
Warning [200,8]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
Bit15 Control word1
No external fault
B0665
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 540 -
Mux word2 CB
(1)
H446
Input assignment for each

multiplexer of this chart;
except input 32
Mux word3 CB
(0)
H447
Mux word5 CB
(0)
H448
Mux word6 CB
(0)
H449
0.0
Ratio[80,4]
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
16
Displacement - position differ. [100,8]
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
Peer Float1 [300,3]
30
Peer Float2 [300,3]
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
W2 CB constant
(0.0)
H470
1
Multiplexer
CB actual values
Mux word2 CB
KR3446
W3 CB constant
(0.0)
H471
15
16
29
30
Mux word3 CB
KR3447
14
Mux word5 CB
15
W5 CB constant
(0.0)
H472
15
KR3448
16
16
Mux word6 CB
KR3449
28
W6 CB constant
(0.0)
H473
29
30
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
29
30
7
Function diagram
8
- 550 -
word1 CB constan
(0)
H443
word4 CB constan
(0)
H445
MUX word1 CB
(0)
H442
MUX word4 CB
(0)
H444
K2445
K2443
0
1
Status word1 CB [430,4]
Statusword2 CB [430,8]
Status word angle synchr.[40,7]
PZD1 from CB [410,3]
PZD1 from CU [170,3]
K2442
Mux word1 CB
K2444
PZD1 from Peer [300,3]
Control word 1 CU [220,4]
10
10
Mux word4 CB
MUX Speed enable

(1)
H544
1
Multiplexer
CB status words
Peer CTW.10 [300,4]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
B0547
Mux enable speed controller
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 560 -
MUX float1 Peer

(1)
H304
MUX float2 Peer

(0)
H305
0.0
Ratio[80,4]
10
10
Status word Peer [310,8]
11
11
Status word angle synchr. [40,7]
12
12
Mux word1 Peer
13
K2303
14
15
W1 Peer constant
(0)
H306
MUX word 1 Peer

(2)
H303
K2306

for both multiplexers is
identical
3
4
5
13
14
Mux word2 Peer
15
KR3304
16
16
17
17
18
18
10
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
28
29
Peer Float1 [300,3]
30
30
Peer Float2 [300,3]
31
31
32
32
W2 Peer constant
(0.0)
H307
1
Multiplexer
Peer to peer
Mux word3 Peer

KR3305
27
W3 Peer constant
(0.0)
H308
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
28
29
7
Function diagram
8
- 570 -
s
SIMADYN D
Edition 09.99
Brief Description
Brief Description T400 Technology Module

Edition
Edition version
09.98
04.00
Copyright SIEMENS AG 2000 All rights reserved
Disclaimer of liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent
grant or registration or a utility model or design, are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this Manual to ensure that they

coincide with the described hardware and software. However,
deviations cannot be completely ruled-out, so we cannot guarantee
complete conformance. However, the information in this document is
regularly checked and the necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. We are thankful for any recommendations or
suggestions.
Siemens AG
A&D LD R
Frauenauracherstr.80
91056 Erlangen
Siemens AG 2000
Technical data subject to change
Contents
Definitions.......................................................................................................................... 2
Danger and warning information ...................................................................................... 2
1. Product description ...................................................................................................... 3
2. Installation .................................................................................................................... 4
2.1. Installing the module........................................................................................ 4
2.1.1. SRT400............................................................................................. 4
2.1.2. Electronics box in the MASTERDRIVE / DC MASTER ...................... 4
2.2. Connections..................................................................................................... 5
3. Technical data............................................................................................................... 8
3.1. Overview......................................................................................................... 8
3.2. General data.................................................................................................... 9
3.3. Power supply ................................................................................................... 9
3.4. Inputs/outputs .................................................................................................. 9
3.5. Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine pulse evaluation .......................... 11
3.5.1. Pulse encoder 1 .............................................................................. 11
3.5.2. Pulse encoder 2 .............................................................................. 12
3.5.2.1. Pulse encoder type selection switches S2/1 - S2/8.................. 12
3.5.2.2. useable pulse encoder types................................................... 13
3.6. Absolute value encoder ................................................................................. 14
3.7. Serial interfaces............................................................................................. 14
3.7.1. Service interface 1 .......................................................................... 14
3.7.1.1. Communications switch S1/8 .................................................. 14
3.7.1.2. Connecting cable to the PC .................................................... 15
3.7.2. Interface 2 ....................................................................................... 15
3.7.3. Bus termination switches S1/1 - S1/6............................................... 15
3.7.4. Download switch S1/7 ..................................................................... 15
3.8. Diagnostic LEDs ............................................................................................ 16
4. Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 17
4.1. Hotline........................................................................................................... 17
5. Parameterization ......................................................................................................... 18
6. Configuring ................................................................................................................. 19
6.1. Standard software packages.......................................................................... 19
6.2. Freely configuring the T400 ........................................................................... 20
7. Manufacturers declaration ........................................................................................ 22
8. ESD guidelines ........................................................................................................... 24
8.1. What is ESD?................................................................................................ 24
8.2. Handling ESD modules.................................................................................. 24
8.3. Measuring and making changes on ESD modules ........................................... 2
8.4. Transporting modules ...................................................................................... 2
Definitions
Definitions
NOTE
The information in this Manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchasers purposes, please contact your local Siemens office.
Further, the contents of this Manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein
do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, a Qualified person is someone who is familiar with the
installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have
the following qualifications, for example:
1.
Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in
2.
Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
3.
Trained in rendering first aid
Danger and warning information
!
!
!
DANGER
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Danger indicates death,
severe personal injury and/or substantial property damage will result if proper
WARNING
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Warning indicates death,
severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions
are not taken.
CAUTION
For the purpose of this Manual and product labels, Caution indicates that
minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are
not taken.
NOTE
product or the respective part of the Instruction Manual which is essential to
highlight.
CAUTION

WARNING
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.

Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in severe personal injury
or property damage.
It is especially important that the warning information in all of the relevant
Operating Instructions/Instruction Manuals are strictly observed.
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
SIMADYN D Hardware Brief Description
Product description
1. Product description
Order No.
6DD1606-0AD0
Applications
The T400 is a technology module. It can be used to complement drives with sophisticated, high-dynamic
performance open-loop and closed-loop control functions at a favorable price. Sampling times down to 100 s
are possible.
Applications include higher-level closed-loop controls for:
closed-loop tension control

closed-loop position control
winder and coiler
(angular) synchronous control
positioning
cross cutter and flying saws
drive-related open-loop control functions
The T400 can be inserted in the electronics box of
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES VC, MC Compact 6SE70/71 AC drive converters (not in MC Compact PLUS!)
SIMOREG DC-MASTER 6RA70.
Further, the T400 can also be used in the SRT400 SIMADYN D subrack. Two T400 can be inserted in the
SRT400.
The T400 is always used in the drives and in the SRT400, together with the MASTERDRIVES or DC MASTER
communications module, for example, CB1, SCB as well as the ADB carrier module with the communications
modules inserted in it, for example, CBP2 (PROFIBUS-DP), CBC (CAN), CBD (DeviceNet).
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
Installation
2. Installation
2.1. Installing the module
2.1.1. SRT400
If only one T400 is used, then this is inserted in the lefthand slot. The optional 2nd module (second T400 or
communications module) is inserted at the right. The modules are retained using screws above and below the
handles which are used to insert/withdraw the modules.
2.1.2. Electronics box in the MASTERDRIVE / DC MASTER

Slot in the electronics box
Modules
Left
Slot 1 (CUx)
(left)
CU2 / CU3 / CUDC / CUVC / CUMC / ...
Center
Slot 3 (options)
(center)
CB1 / CB2 / CBP / CBP2 / SCB1 / SCB2 / ADB / ... / empty
Right
Slot 2
(right)
T400
Note:
The T400 must always be inserted at slot 2 (right!!!), if it is used in a MASTERDRIVE or DC MASTER.
It is not permissible to use a TSY or the terminal expansion modules EBx (on the ADB) in conjunction with the
T400.
In order to be able to insert the option modules in
the electronics box, the LBA (Local Bus Adapter)
must be installed in the electronics box.
Installing the bus expansion LBA:
Remove the CUx module (lefthand slot in the
electronics box) after releasing the connecting
cable to the PMU and the two retaining screws.
Use the handles to remove the module.
Insert the bus expansion LBA into the
electronics box (position, refer to the diagram)
until it snaps into place.
Insert the CUx module back into the lefthand
slot, screw in the retaining screws at the
handles, insert the connecting cable to the
PMU.
Insert the T400 in slot 2 (right) and, if required
the option module in slot 3 (center) of the
electronics box, and screw into place.
Replacing modules in the electronics box
Release the screws retaining the modules
above and below the handles.
Slot 1 1 (CU)
SLOT 3 (Options)
SLOT 2 (T400)
Carefully remove the module from the

electronics box using the handles, and take
care that the module does not catch on any
adjacent components and parts.
Carefully locate the new module onto the guide
rails and insert it fully into the electronics box.
Tighten the module retaining screws above and
below the handles.
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Installation
2.2. Connections
T400
80
+15V / 100mA
81 Track A
82 Track B
HTL
84
e.g.
contactswitch
85
2 Pulse
encoder
inputs
HTL/
TTL
(RS422)
Selected with
switch S2
Pulse
encod.
Coarse p. 1
83 0 pulse
88 0 pulse -.
94
95
RS485, 2-wire
X01
T/Rx- 71
Increm_2
69
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
TxD
TTL
Hardwareaddresses
of the basic
configured
software
87 Track B -
5 analog inputs
differential inputs
11 bits + sign
10V / 10k
basic drive
CUx
T/Rx+ 70
86 Track A -
92
93
Zero pulse from CUx
Fct.block
64 0 pulse +
65 Coarse p. Pulse
encod.
66
2
M
90
91
MASTER DRIVES
or DC-MASTER
Increm_1
62 Track A +
63 Track B +
e.g.
contactswitch
Tracks A and B from CUx
68
Serial interface 1
- Program download
- CFC test mode (start-up)
- USS (SIMOVIS)
RxD 67
RS232
Ana_In_1
Ana_In_2
Ana_Out_1
11 bit + VZ
D
97
A
Ana_In_3
D
D
Ana_Out_2
Ana_In_4
2 analog outputs
10V / 10mA
11 bits + sign
98
D
A
99
96
99
50
+24V
4 binary
outputs
bi-directional
24V DC
(8mA input
current)
Ana_In_5
D
M
M
45
P24 external
46
47
48
49
P24 external 45
+24V
50
51
2 binary o utputs
52
BinInOut
(bidirectional)
76
77
78
79
SSI_1
Absolute value
encoder 1
Fct.block
4 binary inputs
alarm-capable
24V DC
(8mA input
current)
4 binaryinputs
24V DC
53
54
55
61
SSI_2
Absolute value
encoder 2
M
72
BinInput
+24V
56
57
58
59
60
Fct.block
74
75
DualCommunications module Porte.g. CB1, ADB RAM
or
73
X02
DualPortRAM
Serial
interface 2:
for
- peer-to-peer
- USS
MASTER DRIVES
or DC-MASTER
basic drive
CUx
Datei: T400-io.dsf
Note: All of the grounds are connected with one another and the electronics ground.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
Installation
2.2.1. Analog inputs/outputs

T400 terminal assignment
Ground, analog inputs/outputs
Analog input 1
Analog input
Analog input
Analog input 2
Analog input
Analog input
Analog input 3
Analog input 4
Analog input 5
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
Ground, analog inputs/outputs
Connec- Connec- Termtor

tor pin
inal
X9
1
89
2
90
3
91
4
92
5
93
6
94
7
95
8
96
9
97
10
98
11
99
1+
12+
2-
If inputs 1 and 2 are not used as differential inputs, terminals 89, 91 and 93 must be connected with one
another. This means that measurements made at terminals 90 and 92 are with respect to ground.
2.2.2. Binary inputs/outputs


tor pin
inal
X5
1
45
2
46
3
47
4
48
5
49
6
50
7
51
8
52
9
53
10
54
11
55
X6
1
56
2
57
3
58
4
59
5
60
6
61
+ 24 V external (for binary inputs and outputs)

Bi-directional binary input and output 1
Ground, binary inputs and outputs
Binary output 1
Binary output 2
Binary input 1 (alarm-capable)
Binary input 5
Binary input 6
Binary input 7
Binary input 8
Ground, binary inputs and outputs
2.2.3. Absolute value encoder

Absolute encoder 2:
Absolute encoder 2:
Absolute encoder 2:
Absolute encoder 2:
Absolute encoder 1:
Absolute encoder 1:
Absolute encoder 1:
Absolute encoder 1:
data+
dataclock+
clockdata+
dataclock+
clock-
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
interface 2:
interface 2:
interface 2:
interface 2:
Rx-RS485+
Rx-RS485Tx (Rx)-RS485+
Tx (Rx)-RS485-

tor pin
inal
X7
6
72
7
73
8
74
9
75
10
76
11
77
X8
1
78
2
79
Either absolute encoder 2 or serial interface 2 can be used. The selection is made when configuring the software
using CFC.
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Installation
2.2.4. Incremental encoder

Increm. encod. 2:
Track A (
Increm. encod. 2:
HTL)
RS422)
Increm. encod. 2:
Track B (
Increm. encod. 2:
HTL)
RS422)
Increm. encod. 2:
Zero pulse Increm. encod. 2:
(HTL)
(RS422)
Increm. encod. 2: Coarse pulse
Ground, incremental encoder 2
+ 15 V encoder power supply (max. 100 mA)
Increm. encod. 1:
Track A
Increm. encod. 1:
Track B
Increm. encod. 1:
Zero pulse
Increm. encod. 1:
Coarse pulse
Ground, incremental encoder 1
Increm. encod. 2:
Track A(for RS422)
Increm. encod. 2:
Track B(for RS422)
Increm. encod. 2:
Zero pulse(for RS422)
Track A+ (

tor pin
inal
X6
7
62
Track B+ (
63
Zero pulse+
64
10
11
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
65
66
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
X8
If no push-pull signals are used for encoder 2, terminals 85, 86,87 and 88 must be connected with one another.
2.2.5. Serial interfaces

Ser. interface 1: Rx-RS232
Ser. interface 1: Tx-RS232
Ground, serial interface
Ser. interface 1: Tx/Rx-RS485+
Ser. interface 1: Tx/Rx-RS485Ser. interface 2: Rx-RS485+
Ser. interface 2: Rx-RS485Ser. interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485+
Ser. interface 2: Tx (Rx)-RS485-
4 wire
4 wire
2 or 4 wire
2 or 4 wire
Absolute encoder 2: data+

Absolute encoder 2: dataAbsolute encoder 2: clock+
Absolute encoder 2: clock-

tor pin
inal
X7
1
67
2
68
3
69
4
70
5
71
6
72
7
73
8
74
9
75
Either absolute value encoder 2 or serial interface 2 can be used. The selection is made when configuring the
software using CFC.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
Technical data
3. Technical data
3.1. Overview
Inputs/outputs
2 analog outputs
5 analog inputs
2 binary outputs
8 binary inputs
of which 4 binary inputs can be used to call interrupt tasks (50 s response time)
4 bi-directional binary inputs or outputs
2 incremental encoder inputs with zero pulse
- encoder 1 for HTL (15V) encoder
Encoder pulses of an encoder connected to a SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SC/VC which are fed
via the backplane bus to the T400 can also be evaluated. This means it is also possible to use a
TTL/RS422 encoder. The pulse encoder simulation via the backplane bus of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES MC can also be used.
- encoder 2 for HTL (15V)- or TTL/RS422 encoder (5V)
For each incremental encoder, a coarse pulse input to suppress the zero pulse, the coarse pulse input
(simultaneously) can also be used as binary input.
The inputs/outputs are not electrically isolated
2 absolute value encoders with SSI- or EnDat protocol (RS485) for positioning applications
Note: When using absolute value encoder 2, serial interface 2 (peer, USS) cannot be used, as the
same terminals are used for the two applications!
Serial interface 1 with RS232 or RS485 data transfer format;
The protocol can be selected using a switch on the module:
Service protocol DUST1
for start-up (CFC test mode, service IBS (start-up), TELEMASTER) and downloading programs
with a 19.2 kbit/s baud rate at the RS232 interface
USS protocol,
2 wire, with selectable RS232 or RS485 data transfer format;
max. baud rates, 38.4 kbit/s;
can be configured as slave for parameterization with OP1S (from OP1S, version V2.2),
or as master for the OP2 operator panel connection
Serial interface 2
with RS485 data transfer format, selectable baud rates of: 9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 93.75 and 187.5 kbit/s;
the required protocol is selected by appropriately configuring the function block:
Peer-to-peer
for fast process coupling, 4 wire
USS protocol (USS bus),
can be configured as slave for parameterization with SIMOVIS (2- or 4 wire),
as master for OP2 operator panel connection (2 wire) or to control drive converters;
max. baud rates, 38.4 kbit/s;
Low deadtimes can be achieved as a result of synchronization:
Synchronization of the T400 on the basic drive converter modules (CUx) or second T400
T400 supplies synchronizing signals for other modules (CUx, CBx or second T400)
Other features
Lowest sampling time is 0.1 ms, 0.8 ms is the typical sampling time for a control loop
As a result of the floating point arithmetic, not only is a high accuracy achieved, but configuring is also
simplified as normalization and value range limits are eliminated
Operation without fan
3 LEDs for operating status displays
Hardlock-PAL: Plug-in socket for 28-pin EPLD device for copy protection of the user program
Soldered-in flash memory (2 Mbyte) for the program code (compressed), which is downloaded from the PC
via the serial interface; no plug-in memory module is used!
4 Mbyte DRAM as working memory for programs and data,
32 Kbyte permanent change memory
NOVRAM for data save at voltage-off for up to 10 configurable values (real type)
Cache memory: 4 Kbyte program, 4 Kbyte data
Clock cycle (external/internal): 32/32 MHz
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Technical data
3.2. General data

Grounding/ground
The grounds of the following terminals
interfaces 1 and 2
analog inputs/outputs
binary inputs/outputs
incremental encoders 1 and 2
are connected with the T400 electronics ground.

Slot assignment
Dimensions W x H x D [mm]
14 x 267 x 140
Weight
Approx. 0.3 kg
Degree of protection
IP00
Terminals
MINI-COMBICON, Phnix
company
Humidity class
F according to DIN 40040
Ambient temperature
From 0C , up to 55C (without

fan)
Storage temperature
From -25C to 75C
3.3. Power supply

The T400 requires the following voltages at the backplane bus connector X1:
Rated voltage
Minimum
Maximum Typical current drain
+5 V
+4.75 V
+5.25 V
1100 mA
+15 V
+14.4 V
+15.6 V
140 mA
+ encoder load (terminal 66)
(max. 100 mA, electronic. limited)
-15 V
-14.55 V
-15.45 V
140 mA
24 V (external)
20 V
30 V
150 mA + binary output currents
3.4. Inputs/outputs
Analog outputs
No.
2, non-floating
Output voltage range
+/-10 V
Output current
Max. +/- 10 mA
Resolution
12 bit (4.88mV)
Linearity error
< 1 bit
Absolute accuracy
+/- 3 bit
Short-circuit protection to
ground
Yes
Voltage rate-of-rise of the

output
Approx. 4.2 V/s
Delay time
3.5 s
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
Technical data
Analog inputs
No.
Version
2 differential inputs, 3 unipolar;

all non-floating
Input voltage range
+/- 10 V
Input resistance
20 kohm
Input filter
3 dB transition freq. 25 kHz
Resolution
12 bit (4.88mV)
Measuring principle
Sampling
Absolute accuracy
+/- 3 bit
Linearity
< 1 bit
Offset error
+/- 3 bit
Conversion time
12 s
Differential input resistance
> 20 kohm
Hardware smoothing
4.7 s
Binary outputs
2
+ max. 4 bidirectional;
No.
all non-floating
Power supply
External
Nominal value
24 V DC
Permiss. range
+15 V to 33 V including ripple
Briefly
+35 V, max. 0.5 s
Current drain
20 mA + output currents
Output current for 1 signal
Max. 50 mA / output
Short-circuit protection
Electronically and thermally, continuous

short-circuit protection, limited to 220 mA
Inductive switch-off voltage

limiting
Power supply voltage + 1 V
Switching frequency
5 kHz for ohmic loads
Signal level
for 0 signal
Max. 0.1 V
for 1 signal
Power supply voltage - 0.3 V
Switching delay
(0V to 24V)
10
Max. 70 s
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Technical data
Binary inputs
8
+ max. 4 bidirectional
No.
+ 2 coarse pulse signals

all non-floating
Input voltage
24 V DC rated voltage
for 0 signal
-1 V to +6 V or open-circuit inputs
for 1 signal
+13 V to +33 V
Input current
for 0-Signal
0 mA
for 1-Signal
typ. 3 mA, max. 5 mA
Delay time
150 s
3.5. Incremental encoder with coarse- and fine pulse evaluation

No. of encoders
Version
Total, max. 2
Encoder 1
HTL
Encoder 2
either HTL,TTL or RS422
3.5.1. Pulse encoder 1

Input voltage range
HTL, 30 V
Input voltage
for 0 signal
<4V
for 1 signal
>8V
Input current
Approx. 8 mA
Pulse frequency
Max. 400 kHz (track frequency)
Phase difference of the track

signals
Independent of the pulse frequency, min. 200

ns
Input filter
Via software (function block NAV) can be

configured
Note:
The pulses for encoder 1 (tracks A, B, zero pulse) can also be retrieved from the basic drive, via the backplane
bus, if another module supplies these (e.g. incremental encoder simulation of the CUMC; as TTL signal level).
The pulse source selection is configured at the speed actual value block NAV.
Zero pulse evaluation
The zero pulse evaluation can be parameterized and is dependent on the direction of rotation, i.e. the same
encoder position is identified independent of the actual direction of rotation.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
11
Technical data
3.5.2. Pulse encoder 2

2 pulse encoders with different signal levels can be connected at encoder input 2.
RS422
HTL, bipolar
HTL, unipolar
TTL
3.5.2.1. Pulse encoder type selection switches S2/1 - S2/8

The encoder type is selected using DIL switch S2/1 - S2/8
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The signal levels of track signals A and B are set according to the following table:
Significance
TTL RS422
HTL, bipolar
HTL, unipolar
TTL
1
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Switch S2
2
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
3
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
The signal level of the zero pulse can be set independently of track A and B:
Significance
TTL RS422
HTL, bipolar
HTL, unipolar
TTL
Switch S2
4
5
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Bus terminating resistors can be switched-in for RS422 using switches S2/6 to S2/8. This is always required, if
the T400 is connected at one end of an RS422 cable. If it is located in the center, then it is not permissible that
the terminating resistors are switched-in.
Significance
Track A
Track B
Zero pulse
Switch S2
6
7
8
The terminating resistors are switched-out in the OFF position; they are switched-in in the ON position.
The switch settings can only be changed when the module is withdrawn. They are not accessible when the
module is inserted.
12
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Technical data
3.5.2.2. useable pulse encoder types

The following properties are valid for the settings for an HTL encoder with push-pull signals:
Input voltage range
HTL, differential voltage +/-30 V
Input voltage
for 0 signal
- 3V
for 1 signal
+3 V
Input current
Approx. 2 mA
Pulse frequency
Max. 1.5 MHz (track frequency)
Input filter
Can be configured per software (function

block)
The following properties are valid for settings for an HTL encoder without push-pull signals:
Input voltage range
HTL, 30 V, unipolar
Input voltage
for 0 signal
<4V
for 1 signal
>8V
Input current
Approx. 2 mA
Pulse frequency
Input filter

block)
If no push-pull signals are used for encoder 2, terminals

85, 86, 87 and 88 must be connected with one another.
The following properties are valid for the setting for a TTL encoder:
Input voltage range
TTL, 5 V
Input voltage
for 0 signal
< 0.8 V
for 1 signal
> 2.3 V
Input current
Approx. 2 mA
Pulse frequency
Input filter

block)
The following properties are valid for the RS422 setting:

Input voltage range
RS422, 5V
Input voltage
for 0 signal
< -0.2 V
for 1 signal
> 0.2 V
Input current
Approx. 2 mA
Pulse frequency
Input filter

block)
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
13
Technical data
3.6. Absolute value encoder

The T400 has up to 2 synchronous serial interfaces for absolute value encoders:
Input voltage range
RS422, 5V
Encoders which can be

connected
Single- or multi-turn encoders

SSI (synchronous-serial)
Protocols
EnDat (accord. to the Heidenhain company)
Data transfer rate
100kHz to 2 MHz
Dual code
Data representation type
Grey code
Grey excess code
It is possible to simultaneously use the 2 serial interfaces and absolute value encoder 1 (terminals 76-79).
3.7. Serial interfaces

The T400 has 2 serial interfaces:
3.7.1. Service interface 1

Interface 1 has the two physical versions (they can only be used one at a time!):
RS 232
for PC coupling (download, service, via the Dust1 protocol with 19.2 kbaud)
RS 485 (2 wire)
for USS to connect

-
SIMADYN D OP2 operator panels

MASTER DRIVES OP1 operator panels
SIMOVIS
or to the higher-level (master) / systems (e.g. SIMATIC)
The program is downloaded and service for start-up executed via interface 1. To realize this, the CFC is used in
the test mode or service-IBS V5 (service start-up) (DUST1 protocol, baud rate: 19.2 kbd).
3.7.1.1. Communications switch S1/8

The physical version of serial interface 1 can be selected using S1/8. In addition to the changeover, the
appropriate blocks must have been configured for the USS protocol. If the USS protocol is set, it is no longer
possible to realize online visualization with CFC or service-IBS (service-start-up)!
Switch S1 / 8
ON
RS485 (2 wire) for USS protocol (bus termination, refer to 3.7.3)
OFF
RS232 for service / start-up
14
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Technical data
3.7.1.2. Connecting cable to the PC

The connection between the T400 and the configuring-PC is via a serial link; this is established using the
following cable which the user must assemble. Switch S1/8 must be in the OFF position.
The cable can be ordered as SC400 with the order number 6DD1684-HF0.
PC
9-pole sub D socket
Pin
2
3
5
T400
Terminal
68
67
69
3.7.2. Interface 2
Interface 2 is a mixed asynchronous and synchronous RS 485 interface:
Peer-to-peer with full duplex, 4-wire connection
USS protocol (master or slave) with half duplex, 2-wire connection
The function blocks @USS_M, @USS_S or @PEER are used to toggle between 2- and 4- wire operation. As soon
as one of these blocks is configured, terminals 72 to 75 can no longer be used for an absolute value encoder.
The following baud rates can be set:
Peer to Peer: 9.6 kbd, 19.2 kbd, 38.4 kbd, 93.75 kbd, 187.5 kbd
USS:
9.6 kbd, 19.2 kbd, 38.4 kbd
3.7.3. Bus termination switches S1/1 - S1/6

The bus terminating resistors for serial interfaces 1 and 2 must be switched-in via switches S1/1 - S1/6, if the
T400 is located at the beginning or end of the RS485 bus. If it located in the center, it is not permissible that the
terminating resistors are switched-in.
Terminals
70 / 71
74 / 75
72 / 73 / 74 / 75
Serial interface 1
Serial interface 2 (2-wire)
Serial interface 2 (4-wire)
Switch S1
1, 2
3, 4
3, 4, 5, 6
ON
In the ON position, the terminating resistors are switched-in.
The switches can only be switched when the module is withdrawn. They
are not accessible when the module is inserted.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3.7.4. Download switch S1/7

Switch S1 / 7
ON
User program inhibited, only download possible.
OFF
Standard operation
This function will only be available from D7-SYS V4.0 R07/98, and version K of the T400.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
15
Technical data
3.8. Diagnostic LEDs

Three diagnostic LEDs are located on the T400.
LED H1 displays the status of the internal T400 monitoring
function. Under normal operating conditions it flashes slowly,
approximately every second (1.5 Hz).
T400
11pol
If H1 starts to flash at a average rate (with 2.5 Hz) this indicates an

internal fault/error. Possible faults/errors are:
user stop
communications error
computation time overflow
hardware monitoring fault

The user stop can be initiated using the CFC- or the configured
software. If the T400 is inserted in an electronics box, generally, the
basic drive converter module signals a fault if the T400 is in the
user stop status.
If there is no user stop, the module must be accessed using the
CFC in the test mode or with Service-IBS V5, to precisely
determine the cause and to evaluate the internal fault fields.
X5
LED H1 ret
LED H2 yellow
X137
LED H3 green
11pol
X6
1 S1
11pol
X7
1 S2
If H1 flashes quickly (with 5 Hz), this indicates an initialization

error. The T400 program is either erroneous, or switch S1/7 is in
the ON setting.
If H1 goes into a steady light condition this indicates a system
error. The user program is not processed. The T400 is either
defective or has been incorrectly programmed.
The module must be accessed using the CFC in the test mode or
with the service-IBS V5 to precisely determine the cause, and to
evaluate the internal fault fields.
11pol
X8
X 13 5
11pol
LEDs H2 and H3 indicate the coupling status to other modules. A

uniform flashing indicates an error-free coupling. The flash
frequency of H2 and H3 is determined by the configuring, i.e. the
sampling time of function block @DRIVE.
X9
T400 in the SRT400:

LED
H1
H2
H3
Function
Internal T400
monitoring
Data transfer to the
lefthand T400
righthand T400
SRT400
lefthand T400
flashes slowly
1.25 Hz
flashes medium frq. 2.50 Hz
flashes quickly
5 Hz
steady light
Color
red
yellow
green
righthand T400
RUN, standard operation
fault/error
initialization error
system error
flashes: OK
dark or steady light: faulted
always dark
flashes: OK
always dark
T400 in the MASTERDRIVE or DC MASTER:

LED
H1
H2
H3
16
Function
Internal T400
monitoring
Color
red

yellow
basic drive
green
communications module
MASTERDRIVE / DC MASTER
flashes slowly
1.25 Hz
flashes medium frq. 2.50 Hz
flashes quickly
5 Hz
steady light
RUN, standard operation

fault/error
initialization error
system error
flashes: OK
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Troubleshooting
4. Troubleshooting
Fault profile
T400 is not running,
MASTERDRIVES initialization
stops at 0002,
initialization of the DC MASTER
stops at 12.2 or F80,
H1 on the T400 flashes quickly
Downloading not possible
No connection can be established

to the T400 using service/IBS or
CFC
Cause
Switch S1/7 set to ON
No configured software loaded
T400 defective
T400 completely overloaded
T400 defective
Switch S1/8 set to ON
Incorrect COM interface selected
Remedy
Switch S1/7 must be set to OFF for
operation
Program the T400
Replace the T400
S1/7 must be set to ON for
downloading and then set back to
OFF
Replace T400
Set switch S1/8 to OFF, USS
operation is then disabled.
CFC:
Click on START in the Windows
task bar, then on SIMATIC,
STEP 7 and on SIMADYN D
online interface. Select the
interface
SERVICE/IBS:
Select under Options, the
interface of the ComPort
4.1. Hotline
A free-of-charge Hotline is available to support users:
Phone:
Fax:
email:
+49 9131 98 5000

+49 9131 98 1603
hotline.simadyn@erlf.siemens.de
The SIMADYN D Hotline can be accessed from 8.00 to 17.00, Monday to Friday.
Outside these times, you can use the telephone answering machine, fax or email.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
17
Parameterization
5. Parameterization
All parameters, which refer to the functions and settings of the T400 technology module, are called
technological parameters. They lie in parameter ranges between 1000 and 1999 and between 3000
and 3999 (if used).
Depending on the access type, thousands are represented directly, or as letter. In this case, there is
an additional differentiation between visualization and parameters which can be changed.
The number and the function of the individual technology parameters is dependent on the configuring.
Range
Display
1000 ... 1999 Hxyz
1000 ... 1999 dxyz
3000 ... 3999 Lxyz
3000 ... 3999 cxyz
Example Significance
H234
Parameter No. 1234 which can be changed
d411
Visualization parameter No. 1411 (this cannot be
changed)
L234
Parameter No. 3234 which can be changed
c521
Visualization parameter No. 3521 (this cannot be
changed)
The technological parameters can be read and changed (simultaneously) from several locations:
PMU
OP1, OP1S (the configured parameter names are displayed)
CB1 (PROFIBUS)
SCB2 with USS protocol
Serial interfaces 1 and 2 of the CU
PC/start-up program (SIMOVIS)
All parameter changes are stored in a EEPROM. This EEPROM allows a maximum of 100 000 write
accesses. This limitation must be taken into account, if frequent write accesses, e.g. from a PLC via
PROFIBUS or USS are used, e.g. with continuos commands to store permanently in EEPROM. For
continuos changes the command store temporary in RAM should be use.
18
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Configuring
6. Configuring
T400 can be configured with the graphic D7-ES configuring tools, based on Windows 95/NT. Thus, it is very
easy to implement even complex customized supplementary functions in the drives. Complete standard
software packages are available for functions and applications which are frequently required.
6.1. Standard software packages

The standard software packages offered, are completely generated using CFC, and can be used in SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES and SIMOREG DC MASTER without any additional modifications. They are parameterized via
the operator panel, OP1(S), SIMOVIS or via Profibus.
Please refer to the instructions of the appropriate standard application software packages for additional
information.
Standard software packages are presently available for:
angular synchronous operation
axial winder
cross cutter + flying saws
The software packages are available in the following forms:
The standard software package is downloaded onto the T400 as code which can run:
T400 can be immediately used. When commissioning, only a few parameters have to be set for the
particular application. The user does not have to configure using STEP 7/CFC.
Standard software packages as CFC source code on floppy disk:

We recommend that the source code is used if the software package has to be adapted to the particular
application, which is impossible using the existing parameters, or if a standard software package is used
very frequently.
The functions of a standard T400 software package can also be implemented on the PM5, PM6 CPU
modules using the source code. In this case, it is especially the closed-loop control-related core which can
be used. In comparison to the configuring for the T400, when porting, only the function blocks for the input,
output and communication interfaces have to be adapted to the appropriate SIMADYN D modules.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
19
Configuring
6.2. Freely configuring the T400

In order to generate your own software packages for T400, a Windows PC (Win95 or NT) and the D7-ES
software package are required (Order No. = 6DD1801-4DA2). D7-ES comprises the following components:
Components
STEP 7
CFC
D7-SYS
Function (for T400)

General project administration and hardware configuration
Graphic editor
Operating system, compiler, function block library
As STEP 7 and CFC are components from the SIMATIC software series, it goes without saying that SIMATIC
S7 programs can also be generated. It is also possible to use SIMADYN D and SIMATIC stations in one and the
same project, so that the user only requires one configuring tool.
Software configured for the T400 can easily be adapted for a CPU in the central SIMADYN D subrack. A
maximum of eight CPUs can be used in multiprocessor operation in SIMADYN D subracks such as these. The
standard CPU PM5 in this case corresponds to a T400.
Graphic configuring, Configuring instead of programming
Closed-loop control-related functions can be configured extremely simply using the CFC graphic configuring
interface (Continuous Function Chart). A programming language does not have to be learned.
Function blocks are simply taken from a library, consisting of approx. 250 function blocks, and placed on a
sheet, per drag & drop. The blocks in the library arent used up, as they are prototypes, which can be called-up
as often as required.
The function blocks are connected with one another by clicking on an output and an input. For inputs, which are
assigned a fixed value, and are not to be connected, this value is simply specified in a parameterizing dialog
box.
The configured software is then compiled by the CFC graphic configuring interface, and downloaded into the
T400.
20
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Configuring
If the program is then running in the T400, the following functions can be realized directly in the graphic man
machine interface using CFC
actual values can be displayed and changed from the T400

connections can be displayed, changed, deleted and added
function blocks can be added or deleted.
Easy entry with basic configured software

The T400 basic configured software is a resource for users who wish to configure their own application on the
T400. It allows users to generate a functioning T400 program quickly and without special SIMADYN D knowhow. The basis configured software can already run and includes the following function blocks:
coupling to basic drive- and communication modules of the drive converter with an interface for the data to
be exchanged (setpoints/actual value)
analog, binary and incremental encoder interfaces can be read-in and output
serial T400 interfaces can be processed (USS, peer-to-peer)
important connections are defined as parameter, which can be set and diagnosed using the configured
functions (e. g. communications to the basic drive converter) via operator panels or SIMOVIS:
When the T400 (without standard software package) is supplied it is loaded with this software, and can
therefore immediately run in the drive converter or in the subrack. Further, the basic configured software is also
included as CFC source code in the D7-SYS software as example. Based on this project, the user can include
functions he requires in a form of additional function blocks, or delete functions which he does not require. A
detailed description of the basic configured software is included in D7-SYS as PDF document.
An introduction in the configuring of the T400 is in the manual Configuring Instructions (Order No. =
6DD1903-0EA0). It describes the basic steps in configuring a T400.
The function blocks are described in the SIMADYN D documentation (on CD: 6DD1987-0AA2, on paper:
6DD1987-1AB2) and in the online help of D7-SYS.
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
21
Manufacturers declaration
7. Manufacturers declaration
22
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
Manufacturers declaration
Siemens AG
Edition 04.00
23
ESD guidelines
8. ESD guidelines
8.1. What is ESD?
Almost all of the SIMADYN D modules have highly-integrated devices. These devices are, from their
very nature, extremely sensitive to overvoltage conditions, and therefore also to electrostatic
discharge.
ESD
The abbreviation stands for electrostatic discharge
Modules, which use these devices have the following warning label on the component side:
Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltage- and energy level which lie far below the
perception levels of human beings. Voltages such as these occur when personnel touch a component
or a module without having first being previously electrostatically discharged. Components, which
have been subject to such overvoltage conditions, can generally not be immediately identified as
being faulty, as this is only manifested after a somewhat longer operating time.
8.2. Handling ESD modules

As a general rule, electronic modules should only be touched if this is absolutely necessary.
Components may only be touched if the person
is continuously grounded through an ESD bracelet, or
is wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips.
Before touching an electronics module, you must electrically discharge your body. This can be simply
done by touching a conductive, grounded object immediately beforehand (e. g. bare metal cabinet
parts, water pipe etc.)
Modules may not come into contact with highly insulating materials which can be statically charged.
This includes plastic foils, insulating desktops, clothing manufactured out of man-made fibers.
Modules may only be placed down on conductive surfaces (desktop with ESD surface, conductive
ESD foam rubber, ESD packing bags, ESD transport containers, cardboard- or paper surfaces).
Modules may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television sets.
24
Edition 04.00
Siemens AG
ESD guidelines
8.3. Measuring and making changes on ESD modules

It only permissible to make measurements at the modules, if
the measuring unit is grounded (e. g. via protective conductor) or
before making measurements with an electrically-isolated measuring device, the probe is briefly
discharged (for example by touching a bare metal control housing).
When carrying-out soldering work on modules, ESD soldering irons must be used or at least the
soldering iron tip grounded.
8.4. Transporting modules

Modules and components may only be stored and transported in conductive packing materials (e. g.
metallized plastic boxes, metal containers).
If the packaging is not conductive, then the modules must first be wrapped in conductive packaging
materials. This can include, for example conductive foam rubber or normal household aluminum foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown in the following diagram.
a = conductive flooring surface

d = ESD coat/jacket
b = ESD desk = ESD chain
c = ESD shoes
f = grounding connection for the cabinets
Siemens AG
Automatisation & Drives
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen
SPA440 Angular Synchronous Control

for the
1 = 2
1
Manual
Edition 05.01
Order No.: 6DD1903-0BB0
Contents
Contents
Warning information.............................. ................................................................................ 3
Overview.................................................................................................................................. 5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
T400 technology module ..................................................................................................... 17

2.1
2.2
Validity........................................... ...................................................................................... 5
Order Numbers.................................................................................................................... 6
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 6
Terminology......................................................................................................................... 6
1.4.1 Important terminology................................................................................................ 6
1.4.2 Functions and features.............................................................................................. 8
A comparison between speed- and angular synchronism................................................... 9
1.5.1 Model......................................................................................................................... 9
1.5.2 Differences between speed- and angular synchronism .......................................... 10
Displacement and synchronization.................................................................................... 11
Hardware constellation.................... .................................................................................. 14
Information and instructions when using angular synchronous control............................. 16
Communication interfaces................................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Interface to the basic drive (CU) ............................................................................. 18
2.1.2 Interface to COMBOARD ........................................................................................ 19
2.1.3 Peer-to-peer interface.............. ............................................................................... 20
2.1.4 Diagnostics interface............................................................................................... 20
2.1.5 USS-slave interface................................................................................................. 21
Terminal assignment..................... .................................................................................... 22
2.2.1 Digital I/O................................................................................................................. 22
2.2.2 Analog I/O........................... .................................................................................... 24
2.2.3 Pulse encoders........................................................................................................ 24
Absolute value encoder ..................................................................................................... 27
Function description................................. ........................................................................... 28

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Ratio......................................... ......................................................................................... 29
3.1.1 Speed ratio........................... ................................................................................... 29
3.1.2 Fine ratio.................................. ............................................................................... 30
Setpoints and actual values............................................................................................... 31
3.2.1 Setpoints........................... ...................................................................................... 31
3.2.2 Actual value sensing................. .............................................................................. 32
3.2.3 Position actual value sensing with absolute value encoders................................... 35
Determining the displacement and synchronization .......................................................... 41
3.3.1 Synchronization......................... .............................................................................. 41
3.3.2 Determining the displacement................................................................................. 42
3.3.3 Noise-immune synchronization ............................................................................... 46
3.3.4 Synchronism achieved........... ................................................................................. 48
Closed-loop angular control............................................................................................... 49
3.4.1 Enable signals............................... .......................................................................... 49
3.4.2 Displacement setpoint............................................................................................. 49
3.4.3 Angular controller............................. ....................................................................... 50
Closed-loop speed control................................................................................................. 52
3.5.1 Ratio....................................... ................................................................................. 52
3.5.2 Master speed setpoint................... .......................................................................... 53
3.5.3 Inertia compensation............................................................................................... 53
3.5.4 Speed controller Kp adaption .................................................................................. 54

Contents
3.6
3.7
3.8
Parameters and connectors ................................................................................................ 60

4.1
4.2
4.3
3.5.5 Jogging.................................. .................................................................................. 54

3.5.6 Parameters to the speed controller ......................................................................... 55
Open-loop control........................... ................................................................................... 56
Faults, alarm and status display ........................................................................................ 56
3.7.1 General information on faults and alarms ............................................................... 56
3.7.2 Monitoring the communication coupling .................................................................. 57
Application example........................................................................................................... 58
3.8.1 Synchronous operation and synchronizing using as an example a gantry crane.... 58
Parameter handling.................................... ....................................................................... 60

4.1.1 BICO parameters.................................. .................................................................. 61
4.1.2 Resources to adapt the software and commissioning............................................. 61
Parameter list................................ .................................................................................... 63
Connector list................................................................................................................... 104
Start-up....................................... ......................................................................................... 115

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Commissioning, general............. ..................................................................................... 115

Commissioning, closed-loop speed control ..................................................................... 117
Commissioning the angular control ................................................................................. 123
5.3.1 Information regarding optimizing the angular controller ........................................ 126
Commissioning synchronization ...................................................................................... 127
Trace function with symTrace-D7 ................................................................................. 129
Literature................................... .......................................................................................... 130
Appendix.............................................................................................................................. 131
Changes............................................................................................................................... 145

Warning information
Warning information
WARNING
equipment.
observed.
Definitions
D Qualified personnel for the purpose of this Manual and product labels
are personnel who are familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must
have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
!
!
!
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION

Warning information
NOTE
highlight.
CAUTION

Overview
1
1.1
Overview
Validity
This User Manual is valid for the SPA440 angular synchronous control
standard software package.
NOTE
This documentation is not compatible with the previous MS340

angular synchronous controls!
Contrary to the earlier version, version 2.02 and higher includes socalled BICO technology. This allows connections within the application
to be adapted to the actual task by making the appropriate parameter
changes. Supplementary functions can be implemented by inserting
free blocks.
For compatibility reasons, the multiplexer blocks have been kept,
although they are no longer required as a result of the BICO technology.
All of the parameters from versions V2.00 and V2.01 which can be
changed, have been kept. Changes have been made with respect to
the display parameters.
Hardware
configuration
The documentation refers to operational standard software package,

comprising the T400 technology module and the software which is loaded
onto it. Generally, the T400 is operated in the drive converter (SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES MC or VC; DC Master) with/without communications
module (e. g.: PROFIBUS connection).
However, the software package can also be used when the T400 is
inserted in the SRT400. In this particular case, data is not transferred to
the basic drive converter via a common backplane bus. Presently, it is not
possible to parameterize the system using SIMOVIS.
NOTE
The control core (all of the functions) of the SPA440 standard software
package is also available for other configurations, e.g. CPU modules
PM4 - PM6 with the IT41 expansion module. In this case, the
application-specific changes are made using the graphic configuring
tool CFC.

Overview
1.2
Order Numbers
The sources of the standard software package SPA440 angular
synchronous control, are available on CD-ROM (designation SPA440) .
When required, the angular synchronous control function can be adapted
to specific customer requirements using the graphic configuring interface
of SIMADYN D, i.e. CFC (also refer to Table 1-1).
Designation
Explanation
MLFB / Order No.
SPA440
SPA440 angular synchronous control on CD-ROM and the

documentation (as file).
6DD1842-0AB0
D7 ES
SIMADYN D configuring software D7-ES. Package comprising 6DD1801-4DA2

Table 1-1
1.3
Components for adapting the software package using CFC
Introduction
Electrical shaft
The angular synchronous control with synchronization is an application

which is frequently used in drive technology. This synchronous operation,
which is achieved with the control software, is also known as Electrical
shaft.
Standard software
package
Angular synchronous operation is implemented using the SPA440

standard software package. This standard software package can run on
the T400 technology module, integrated in a drive converter. It is available
as CFC source software on CD-ROM or directly on the T400. It can be
modified with STEP7, CFC and the supplementary D7-SYS software, to
adapt the technology functions to the customers precise requirements.
1.4
Terminology
1.4.1
Important terminology
Master slave
The angular synchronous application comprises a master drive and one

or several slave drives. The master drive specifies the speed and angular
position of the slaves.
Pulses / pulse
encoder
Position actual values are sensed by counting the pulses received from
the connected pulse encoder. The pulse encoder has two signal lines,
which supply pulse series with a 90 offset to one another. The direction
of rotation is determined from the phase position of the two pulse series.
For these pulse series, both the rising as well as the falling edges are
evaluated. Overall, the pulses are quadrupled, which means that the
resolution is also quadrupled. The position- and speed actual values are
retrieved from the quadrupled pulses per software (using the speed
sensing function blocks).
Encoder pulse
number /
synchronizing
pulse number

Overview
A differentiation must be made between Encoder pulse number
(parameter H011) and Synchronizing pulse number (parameter
H100). Encoder pulse number specifies the number of encoder
pulses per revolution (Pulse number). On the other hand, the
Synchronizing pulse number refers to the number of pulse edges
between two synchronizing pulses (quadrupled pulses). This means, that
for an encoder with an encoder pulse number H011=1024, the
synchronizing pulse number is H100=4096, if one synchronizing pulse
(e.g. zero pulse) occurs per revolution.
Position actual
value
The number of summed pulses since the drive was powered-up, or since
it was reset the last time. The position actual value can be reset, e.g.
when a zero pulse occurs. In this case, the position actual value
corresponds to the number of summed pulses since the last time the
drive was reset.
Actual angular
value
Rotation of the rotor of a drive with reference to a defined zero position in

angular degrees. The definition of the actual angular value is from 0 to
360. It can only be determined after a synchronizing pulse has been
received (zero pulse, BERO proximity switch) with the drive running. The
absolute position of the drive is known as a result of the synchronizing
pulse. As the drive moves, additional pulses are received, which are
summed and the actual position changes. The actual angular value is
obtained from the difference of the instantaneous actual position and the
actual position at the synchronizing instant. It therefore corresponds to the
angle that the rotor has moved through since the last synchronizing pulse
was received.
Position actual
value
The summed pulses of the incremental encoder represent the actual

position value. The actual travel is calculated from the actual position
value, which is generated due to the fact that the drive is moving, e.g. the
distance that a gantry crane moves when the drives are running (refer to
3.8.1)
Speed
synchronism
The master- and slave drive(s) receive the same speed setpoint. The
speed setpoint can be weighted for the individual drives using a ratio. For
pure synchronous speed control, only the speeds of the drives are
controlled and the angular position is ignored.
Angular
synchronism
The angular synchronous control has a closed-loop speed synchronizing

control as subordinate control loop. In addition to the speed synchronism,
the differential position actual values (i. e. the difference pulses) between
the master- and slave drive(s) are fed to a higher-level closed-loop
angular control. Angular synchronous operation of the drives means that
while the master- and slave drives are operational, the relative angular
position between the master and slaves is controlled so that it remains
constant. The same as the closed-loop synchronous speed control, the
master/slave ratio can be adjusted over a wide range.
Synchronization
In addition to speed- and angular synchronism, the drives can also be

synchronized with one another. This means, that the angular- or positions
of the drives can be synchronized to a specified offset (displacement)
when synchronizing marks are passed (pulse encoder zero pulse or
BERO proximity switch). Synchronization is realized, depending on the
application, at various intervals. The synchronizing mechanism is
explained in more detail in Section 1.5.

Overview
1.4.2
Functions and features

Ratio between the master and slave which can be set over a wide
range
Both drives can be synchronized with one another, also for a flying
master
An offset (displacement) can be entered depending on the direction of
rotation
Speed controller KP adaption for low speeds
Angular controller KP adaption as a function of the ratio
Communications coupling is monitored and the angular controller
enabled
From V2.1. onwards for linear axis, angular synchronism can also be
implemented using 2 absolute value encoders by comparing the two
position actual values: Delta_Pos = Pos_Master Pos_Slave.
When using this version, parameters L098 must be set to 0 and L099
to 1. In this case, the peer-to-peer coupling of the T400 cannot be
used.
If the standard version is used (position differential sensing with
incremental encoders), parameter L098 must be set to 1 and L099 to
0 (factory setting).
Functions
The control core consists of the following CFC charts: SYNC01, SYNC02
and CONTR. All of the other charts form the interfaces to the drive
converter, communication channels and HMI devices.
Functions in the standard software package Implemented in CFC chart Sampl. time
Closed-loop control
reading-in setpoints
sensing actual values
angular controller
determining the displacement
synchronizing
speed controller (optional)
analog outputs
analog inputs
AE1
AE2 to AE4
Open-loop control
jogging
enable functions for:
angular controller
synchronization
speed controller
communication interfaces
fault- and alarm handling
monitoring functions
couplings
Communications
drive converter (CU), receive PZD
drive converter (CU), send PZD
COMBOARD PZD
Description
Section 2.2
SYNC01, SYNC02
9.6 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
1.2 ms
Section 3
1.2 ms
9.6 ms
CONTR
Section 3
19.2 ms
19.2 ms
19.2 ms
19.2 ms
when initial.
153.6 ms
19.2 ms
Section 2.1
IF_CU (interface to CU)

IF_COM (interface to CB1)
19.2 ms
1.2 ms
9.6 ms

Overview
-
peer-to-peer PZD
IF_Peer (interface to peer.)
Parameter handling
defining the texts for the
technology parameters
Table 1-2
PAR_GER (German)
PAR_ENG (English)
9.6 ms
153.6 ms
Section 4
Functions and structure at a glance
1.5
A comparison between speed- and angular synchronism
1.5.1
Model
The following sketch of the model is intended to provide a better
understanding of the control principles of speed- and angular
synchronism.
Disk, master drive
P_M
N zero mark
Offset
Disk, slave drive

P_S
F
Sensor
Stroboscope S
Fig. 1-1
Model to illustrate angular synchronism
S_M and S_S
The lefthand disk is located on the rotor of the master drive. In the
following it will be called Disk, master drive (P_M). The righthand disk is
connected to the rotor of the slave drive and is called Disk, slave drive
(P_S).
Stroboscope S
The slave drive is operated from a closed-loop synchronous speed- or

angular synchronous control, where the reference is the master. The
master/slave speed ratio is assumed to be 1:1, i.e. the two disks P_M and
P_S rotate with the same speed, in the same direction. Stroboscope S is
triggered by the rotational motion of the master. It is triggered precisely
then, when cam N is located above sensor F, i.e., if the line on the disk
P_M points vertically upwards (i.e. to 12). This is implemented, e.g.
using the zero pulse of a pulse encoder.
NOTE
Pulse pattern
The situation assumes a master/slave speed ratio of 1:1 (this is easier

to depict). The observations also apply for other ratios.
In spite of the rotational movement, as a result of the stroboscope,
anybody looking at the disk, will see a steady-state pattern of lines on the
disks P_M and P_S. The principles behind closed-loop speed- and
angular synchronous controls can be made very clear using the position
of the lines on the two disks, as will be seen in the following.

Overview
1.5.2
Differences between speed- and angular synchronism

For synchronous speed control, the master- and slave drives receive the
same speed setpoint, while the angular position is ignored. The closedloop angular synchronous control has, as subordinate control, a closedloop synchronous speed control. In addition to speed synchronism, the
differential position actual values (i. e. the difference pulses) between the
master- and slave drives, are fed to a higher-level closed-loop angular
control.
The differences between the two control types will be clarified using the
following example: There are three disks (refer to Fig. 1-2): one master
disk (P_M) and two slave (P_S) disks. The master drive rotates with a
constant impressed speed. One of the slave drives is controlled from a
closed-loop speed control, and the other slave drive, from a closed-loop
angular synchronous control; both of them are referred to the master
drive. The master/slave ratio is set to 1:1 for both of the slaves, i.e. the
three disks rotate in the same direction and with the same speed.
Master
Status
Slave,
speed synchronism
Slave,
angular synchronism
Instant t
Undisturbed,
steady-state
operation
Instant t+1
Vx
Vx
Disturbance
quantity
injected into
the slave
Instant t+2
Vx
Disturbance
quantity has
been corrected
Fig. 1-2
Difference between speed- and angular synchronism
Three instants in time are shown in Fig. 1-2 : the disks of the master
(P_M) and slave (P_S) at the instants t, t+1 and t+2.
Instant t:
Operation without any disturbance quantity. In this operating status, there

are no differences between closed-loop speed- and angular synchronous
control. However, this particular situation is only of theoretical relevance,
as in practical operation, disturbances are always present.
Instant t+1:
10

Overview
A disturbance affects the slave drives. This disturbance initially causes
the slave drive to lead by a specific offset Vx, both for the closed-loop
speed- as well as for the closed-loop angular synchronous control.
Instant t+2:
Note
1.6
In steady-state operation, for closed-loop angular synchronous control,

this offset Vx is corrected and for the pure closed-loop synchronous speed
control, it is not. For the closed-loop angular synchronous control, the
slave disk re-assumes its original position, contrary to the pure closedloop synchronous speed control. The angular controller corrects until the
previous pulse difference between the master- and slave drive at instant t
has been re-established.
After the disturbance has been corrected, for the closed-loop angular
synchronous control, disk P_S assumes its original position, i.e. relative
angular position. Contrary to this, for the pure closed-loop speed
control, this disturbance is not corrected. This means that the additional
angular offset, caused by the fault, is kept !
Displacement and synchronization

When two drives are operated with synchronous control, it may be
necessary to also synchronize the drives. This is generally the case after
the drives have been powered-up, as the master- and slave drives are not
in a defined position. Certain applications make it also necessary to
synchronize shorter or longer intervals (also refer to e.g. Section 3.7.1).
The goal is to correct an erroneous differential pulse actual value between
the master and slave. In this case, the sensed actual values are
referenced to absolute synchronizing marks.
Synchronization
When synchronizing, the displacementat the synchronizing instant is

determined and then this displacement to a specified displacement
setpoint is corrected. Synchronization is required, if the relative position
between two drives regarding absolute synchronizing marks must be
detected and corrected.
Synchronizing
mark
When a synchronizing mark is passed it is detected per hardware using a

zero pulse from the pulse encoder or using a BERO proximity switch. The
absolute position of the drives with respect to one another is sensed using
one synchronizing signal.
Displacement
(actual value)
The actual angular values of the two drives is set to defined actual
angular values when the fixed synchronizing marks are passed. Only after
both drives have passed their synchronizing marks, can the actual offset
(actual value) be defined as the number of pulses, which are received
from the master- and slave drives between the synchronizing marks.
Note
The number of synchronizing pulses between the master- and slave

drive at the machine part, to which the drive must be synchronized,
must be the same. This standard software package does not take into
account unequal synchronizing pulse rates !
Displacement and synchronization are explained using a rotary
movement. This is essentially the same also for linear motion (refer to
Section 3.7.1)

11
Overview
mark of the master
drive
Offset
mark of the slave drive
Disk, master drive

P M
Fig. 1-3
Disk, slave drive

P S
Position displacement between the master- and slave drives
After both drive synchronizing marks have been passed, the correct
displacement (actual value) can be determined as master/slave pulse
difference. This displacement replaces the previous differential position
actual value in the angular synchronous control (which could have been
possibly incorrect).
Displacement
setpoint
The relative (angular) position of the master and slave are entered using
the displacement setpoint so that the master- and slave drives have the
required position to one another. If they are not synchronized, the
displacement setpoint refers to the angular position of the drives at the
instant that the differential position actual value was last set. For example,
at the start of the closed-loop control. If synchronized, the displacement
setpoint refers to the last synchronized displacement actual value. The
displacement is entered as quadrupled pulses (refer to Section 1.3.1).
The disks of the master (P_M) and slave (P_S) at instants t, t+1 and t+2
are illustrated in Fig. 1-4 at three instants in time. They are intended to
clarify the interaction between displacement setpoint and displacement
actual value. These instantaneous states are obtained using a
stroboscope and the model as shown in Fig. 1-1.
Action, status
Master
Slave
Instant t
Displacement actual value V1 and displacement
Setpoint V1* are present
V1 *
V1
Instant t+1
Synchronization has taken place, the displacement
actual value has been corrected.
Displacement setpoint V1 is kept, the change is
corrected.
Instant t+2
New displacement setpoint V2* is entered and kept,
actual value V2 is corrected.
V1 *
V2 *
V2
Fig. 1-4 Synchronizing to an displacement setpoint
Instant t:
12
The slave drive is operated from the closed-loop angular synchronous

control. V1* is available as displacement setpoint, which should specify
the required relative displacement between the master and slave. The

Overview
displacement setpoint V1* refers to the angular position of the drive the
last time that the differential position actual value was set. If
synchronization still has not taken place, this reference instant can extend
back to the past until the angular controller has been enabled after poweron. However, if synchronization has already taken place, the
displacement setpoint refers to the last synchronized angular position.
However, the actual displacement is V1. This means that synchronization
is necessary (refer to instant t+1). The displacement setpoint V1* is kept
during synchronization.
Instant t+1:
Synchronizing takes place after the synchronizing marks have been

passed. An undesirable deviation between the actual displacement V1 and
the displacement setpoint V1* occurs. The deviation is corrected with
unchanged displacement setpoint V1*. In the closed-loop angular
synchronous control, the displacement actual value is set directly to the
actual displacement at the synchronizing instant. The angular control then
corrects the set displacement actual value to the constant displacement
setpoint. Synchronization is completed at instant t+1.
Instant t+2:
A new displacement setpoint V2* is entered and corrected. The setpoint

now refers to the synchronized angular position at instant t+1.
Summary

Determining the displacement, and
Correcting the deviation, to the differential angular actual value.
The angular synchronous control is a lower-level control to the
synchronizing circuit. When synchronizing, the differential position actual
value is directly set to the actual displacement at the synchronizing instant
(i. e. when at least one synchronizing mark is passed). With a constant
displacement setpoint at the angular synchronous controller, deviations
which may be present at the synchronizing instant, are corrected.

13
Overview
1.7
A typical hardware constellation to implement angular synchronous
control on a T400 technology module is shown in Fig. 1-5.
Incremental
encoder
The incremental encoder for the master drive is connected at connector

X6. For the slave drive, the pulse encoder signals are either received from
connector X8 or via the backplane bus of the basic drive (refer to Section
2.2)
CU
COM
T400
BASEBOARD
(MasterDrives / DC Master)
COMBOARD
(CB1, CBP, ...)
Technology module

converter
Control structure
14
The basic closed-loop control structure of the angular synchronous

control is shown in Fig. 1-6. The master- and slave drive(s) are connected
to a common speed master setpoint n*. The speed master setpoint n* is
used for pre-control and ensures that the required speed of the slave(s) is
achieved. Further, the speed of each slave drive can be set using
different master/slave ratios. The higher-level angular controller ensures
angular synchronism and corrects steady-state errors in the lower-level
speed control loop (also refer to Fig. 3-1, Overview closed-loop control).

Overview
Commands, messages/signals
setpoints and actual values
Master
setpoint
n*
n*
Drive
converter
Motor
nMaster
T400
T400
CU
CU
Drive converter
Drive converter
Motor
Motor
nSlave
if required,
amplifier
Position and speed of the master
Master drive
Fig. 1-6
Slave drive 1
If required, add. slave drives
Basic closed-loop control structure of the angular synchronous control (CU: Basic drive module)
Input quantities
The closed-loop control for the slave drive requires the following input
quantities:
Speed master setpoint n* (reference speed for the master and slave)
Speed- and position actual value of the master (from pulse encoder
signals)
Additional commands and signals, setpoints and actual values (e. g.
from the automation)
Synchronization
NOTE
The closed-loop control structure, illustrated above, is independent of the

synchronization. This is because, when synchronizing, only a correction
signal for the differential position actual value can be generated from the
position of the synchronizing marks (refer to Fig. 3-1).
Synchronization is only necessary if the machine requires this.
Angular synchronous control can also be operated without
synchronization (without synchronizing pulse/marks).
Several slave
drives
NOTES
If angular synchronism has to be established between several drives,

then the drive with the highest output or the longest rise time should be
used as the master drive. If this drive runs unsteadily, then it might make
more sense to select a smoother running drive, i.e. deviating from this
recommendation.
The pulse encoder of the master drive must be simultaneously
connected to the appropriate inputs of the slave drives. It is not
permissible to overload the pulse encoder of the master drive!

15
Overview
1.8
Information and instructions when using angular

synchronous control
NOTE
Applications
Angular synchronous control means that the machine runs in true
angular synchronism which for instance can be realized using
mechanical linkages and couplings (e. g. shafts or gearboxes).
NOTE
Applications, which under certain circumstances, are not

practical:
Applications, which can be implemented using a pure closed-loop
speed control. Closed-loop speed control is preferable to angular
synchronism due to the simpler controller optimization, if the task in
hand permits this. Generally, angular synchronous control does not
further improve the control dynamic performance.
Applications, which require load equalization or closed-loop tension
control.
16


The interfaces between the standard software package and the system
environment are explained in this Section. In addition to the local
interfaces of the T400 technology module (terminals and backplane bus
to the basic drive), the three configured communication interfaces are
also involved.
2.1
Communication interfaces
The approximate structure of the standard software package is shown in
Fig. 2-1. It is sub-divided into:
Communication interfaces: COMBOARD (e. g. PROFIBUS slave),
peer-to-peer and USS slave (USS is only required if the T400 is used
in standalone applications, i.e. is not used with a basic drive. In this
case, only restricted parameterization capability is possible via the
USS-slave interface.)
Interface to the basic drive (process data PZD, parameterization, faultand alarm messages)
Analog and digital I/O
Control core (the speed controller can be alternatively located on the
T400 or in the basic drive).
The functions of the control core are explained in detail in Section 0. The
interfaces, via which process- and parameter data are
transferred/exchanged with the T400, are described in the following
Sections.
Communications
COMBOARD
(e.g. PROFIBUS)
Control core
Open-loop control
Local interface
Interface CU

Peer-to-peer
Analog I/O
USS slave
(operation without CU)
Fig. 2-1
Speed/position sensing
Digital I/O
Structure of the standard software package (CU is the processor module of the basic drive)

17
2.1.1
Communications
with CU
Data, including fast process data and parameters, as well as

faults/alarms, is exchanged between the T400 technology module and the
basic drive converter (abbreviated: Basic drive) using the backplane bus
LBA (Local Bus Adapter) via a parallel DUAL-PORT RAM interface.
Basic drive setting
The basic drive must be commissioned. For instance, for SIMOVERT

MasterDrives this is realized according to the Expert application mode in
[1]
the Operating Instructions . In order to operate the SPA440 standard
software package, the following pre-set basic drive parameters must be
set, refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
NOTE
The T400 supplies the basic drive with the following control words;
however, they are only effective in the drive converter after the basic
drive has been appropriately parameterized.
Variable
Word
VC (CU2)
CUMC
DC-Master
Bit
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
On command (main
contactor)
W1.0
P554
3001
P554
3100
P654
3100
Off2
W1.1
P555..557
3001
P555
3101
P655
3101
Off3
W1.2
P558..560
3001
P558
3102
P658
3102
Setpoint enable
W1.6
P564
3001
P564
3106
P664
3106
Fault acknowledgement
W1.7
P565-567
3001
P565
3107
P665
3107
Jogging 1
W1.8
P568
3001
P568
3108
P668
3108
Jogging 2
W1.9
P569
3001
P569
3109
P669
3109
External fault 1
W1.15
P575
3001
P575
3115
P675
3115

Speed setpoint
(if H140 = 0)
Suppl. speed setpoint from
the angular controller
Pre-control value for the
speed controller
W4.9
P585
3004
P585
3409
P685
3409
W2
P443
3002
P443
3002
P644
3002
W5
P433
3005
P224
3005
P634
3005
W8
P506
3008
P262
3008
P501
3008
Table 2-1
Control word- and setpoint channel
Variable
Word /
Bit
VC
CUMC
DC-Master
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
Param.
Value
Status word 1
W1
P694.01
968
552
P734.01
0032
U734.01
0032
Speed actual value
W2
P694.02
219
P734.02
0091
U734.02
0040
Torque
W3
P694.03
P734.03
0182
U734.03
0142
Status word 2
W4
P694.04
553
P734.04
0033
U734.04
0033
Drive converter output current W5
P694.05
P734.05
U734.05
0116
Table 2-2
18
Status word- and actual value channel

2.1.2
Interface to COMBOARD
Communications
module
Communication modules (COMBOARDs; abbreviated: CB) form the

interface between the T400 and a communications network. The type of
COMBOARD depends on the network protocol. For example, CB1,CBP
or CBP2 are available for PROFIBUS applications. For the T400, the
COMBOARD is an interface, which can be used to transfer process data
(PZD) and parameters (PKW).
The COMBOARD is parameterized from the basic drive (protocol, baud
rate, telegram length, monitoring,... ). The number of pieces of net
(useful) data can extend up to 10 PZD (each 16 bits).
T400 in the SRT400
Example
The parameterization is only made from the T400, if the T400 is used as
standalone solution in the SRT400 with COMBOARD at slot 2.
Parameters H480 - H496 are provided for this special case.
Fixed protocol versions are available for PROFIBUS (parameter process
data objects PPO [2, 4]). The required PPO type of the slave is generally
saved in the master. It defines the number of PZD which are transferred.
If, for example, PPO type 4 (6 PZD) is used, PZD7 to PZD10 are
undefined.
Enable
COMBOARD communications can be activated or de-activated using

parameter H409.
Receive data
The first 6 of the process data received from the communications module
are assigned as follows in the factory setting (refer to Chart 410):
PZD
Monitoring
Normalization
Display
Control word1 (e. g. On)
None
d460
Master setpoint
H451
d450
Setpoint, displacement setpoint
H453
d452
Control word2
None
d461
Setpoint, ratio
H455
d454
Setpoint, inertia compensation
H457
d456
Table 2-3
Send data
Receive words (factory setting)
COMBOARD receive channels (sampling time 9.6 ms; free PZD, refer to Chart 410)
The send data are selected via multiplexer (H442 to H449), or using BICO
re-connections. Refer to Chart 440 to normalize the send data.
Telegram reception can be monitored from a time perspective
(watchdog). Two time limits are available. After power-on there is a delay
of H462 ms, and during operation H463 ms for a valid receive telegram.
The error- and alarm messages are transferred to the CU where they are
displayed if the messages were not suppressed (H003 and H004).

19
2.1.3
Peer-to-peer interface
Communications
via peer-to-peer
The standard software package contains a peer-to-peer interface for fast

data transfer between two modules, e.g. to an additional T400. This
interface has the following factory setting:
Baud rate
H363
19200 baud
Monitoring time limit after power-on
H360
20 s
H361
100 ms
Telegram structure (cannot be

changed)
Table 2-4
Factory setting, peer-to-peer interface
NOTE
The peer-to-peer telegram always includes 5 PZD. (PZD2 and PZD3) or

(PZD4 and PZD 5) can, alternatively, be used as single words, double
word or floating-point value (refer to Chart 300). For the factory setting,
floating-point values are transferred.
Caution
In order to eliminate data transfer disturbances, the interface terminating

resistors must be switched-in (switches S1/3 to S1/6; refer to [4]).
Parameter H309
communications.
Enable
Monitoring
is
used
to
enable
or
inhibit
peer-to-peer
Telegram reception can be monitored from a time perspective. There are

two time limits. After power-on, there is a delay of H360 ms and during
operation H361 ms for a valid receive telegram. The error- and alarm
messages are transferred to the CU where they are displayed if the
messages were not suppressed (refer to H003 and H004).
For absolute value

encoders
2.1.4
1 control word
2 floating-point values
If the position sensing of the 2 absolute value encoders of the T400 are
used, the peer-to-peer interface cannot be used, as absolute value
encoder 2 uses the same terminals!
Diagnostics interface
A PC can be connected to serial interface 1 (RS232). The interface can
be used with the Service-IBS/ TELEMASTER or with the CFC in the test
mode. Thus, values and connections can be changed.
The baud rate 19200 baud.
T400
20
PC
Terminal
Function
9-pin
25-pin
67
RxD
68
TxD
69
Ground

Table 2-5
2.1.5
Terminals of interface X01 on T400 (RS232)
USS-slave interface
Serial interface 1 (RS232 / RS485) can be alternatively used for
parameterization. This is intended for the special case, where the T400 is
used in the SRT400. When used in the basic drive, parameterization is
realized via the basic drive. The following settings are required for this
particular case:
Involves
Value
Factory
H700
Significance
Enable USS slave
H701
9600
H703
Slave address at the USS bus
H704
0: RS485 (OP1S)
1: RS232 (SIMOVIS)
S1/8 on
T400
Table 2-6
Caution:
ON
OFF
Changeover from online operation (CFC, basic start-up) on USS.

This only becomes effective after power-down / when the T400 is
reset
Settings for USS-slave operation (factory = factory setting)
It is not possible to simultaneously use USS and CFC online! USS

operation is not possible if the parameterization is incorrect. This means,
that the error can only be resolved if online operation is selected, and then
the error is, for example, resolved using the basic-IBS (basic start-up
tool). OP1S can only be used from version V2.3 onwards.

21
2.2
Terminal assignment
Setpoints and control signals can be read-in and actual values and status
signals output via digital and analog signals. For the T400, the
system/plant signals are connected directly at the appropriate terminals,
which are accessible from the front. Fig. 2-2 shows an overview of the
T400 connections. The following description refers to the terminal
assignment.
2.2.1
Digital I/O
Supply voltage
The digital inputs and outputs of the T400 Technology Module have a 24
V signal level. The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs must be
externally connected.
The SPA440 control core uses 5 control signals, which, when required
can be entered via digital inputs (refer Table 2-7) .
Terminal
Recommended assignment (control signals)
53
Angular controller enable
54
55
Reset position
56
Displacement reset
57
Jog enable
Table 2-7
Recommended terminal assignment for the digital inputs, T400 module
Digital outputs
The digital outputs are pre-assigned for status messages, refer to Table
2-8.
Properties
When the unit is powered-up, all of the outputs are initially open-circuit
(high ohmic state). After the initialization phase, they are driven with the
values which are present. All of the outputs are connected to ground
when the drive converter is powered-down or when a fault develops.
NOTE
Logical 0: Output open-circuit or connected to ground

Logical 1: Output is closed, i. e. the terminal is at the
connected supply voltage of approx. - 2.5 V.
The max. output load is 50 mA, short-circuit proof
Term.
BICO param.
Enable
46
Synchronism reached
H631
H637
47
H632
H638
48
Enable status of the ang. controller
H633
H639
49
Fault
H634
H640
51
Alarm
H635
Not relev.
Table 2-8
22
Factory setting
Terminal assignment of the digital outputs of the T400

X8.80
+15V / 100mA
Track
A
Track
82
B
Pulse
83 Zero pulse encoder
1
84 Coarse pulse
T400
81
HTL
85
Pulse encoder

Zero pulse from CU
M
Increm_1
X6.62
HTL
TTL
RS422
Track B +
Zero
64
pulse
65 Coarse pulse
66
X8.86
M
Track A -
87
Track B -
88
Zero pulse
X01
Pulse
encoder
2
X9.90
10V
5 analog inputs
11 bits + sign
10 V / 10 k
+
-
91
A
D
92
10V
RS485, 2-wire
Track A +
63
Selected using
switch S2
MASTERDRIVES
basic drive
CUx
93
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
10V
Tx/Rx-
71
69
Symbolic
hardware
addresses of
the basic
software
package
TTL
RS232
TxD
68
RxD
67
11 bits + VZ
Ana_In_1
Ana_In_3
X9.97
Ana_In_4
P24 external
X5.45
50
Ana_In_5
51
99
X5. 45
46
4 digital I/O
52
M
P24 external
47
bi-directional
24 V DC
(8 mA input
current)
2 analog outputs
10 V / 10 mA
11 bits + sign
99
96
10V
Program download
CFC online
USS / SIMOVIS
98
95
10V
Serial interface 1
Ana_In_2
Ana_Out_2
X7.70
Increm_2
Ana_Out_1
94
Tx/Rx+
+24V
2 digital outputs
24 V DC / 100 mA
Base load 40 mA
also be taken from
the basic drive
BinInOut
48
X7.76
77
78
79
49
SSI_1
Absolute value
encoder 1
24V
50
M
SSI_2
53
4 digital inputs
interrupt-capable
24 V DC
(8 mA input
current )
54
55
X6
X7.72
56
BinInput
57
4 digital
inputs
24 V DC
X02
58
59
61
Communications
module
e.g.: CB1
Fig. 2-2
Absolute value
encoder-2
74
or
75
Serial interface 2
Peer-to-peer or
USS
60
24V
73
Dual
port
RAM
Dual
port
RAM
MASTERDRIVES
basic drive
CUx
Layout of the terminals of the T400 Technology Module

23
2.2.2
Analog I/O
An output- and input voltage of 5 V corresponds, in the factory setting to
an internal value of 1.0 (100 %). This pre-setting can be changed using
scaling factors and offsets. The following is valid for analog inputs:
Scaling

Generally, the analog inputs have a smoothing element connected in
series. The smoothing can be de-activated by setting the filter time
constant to 0.
Terminal
Recommended
assignment
Sampling
time
Scaling
Offset
Filter time
constant
Value,
smoothed
90 / 91 Inertia compensation
1.2 ms
H210
H211
H222
d223
92 / 93 Ratio
9.6 ms
H213
H214
H224
d225
94 / 99 Speed master setpoint
9.6 ms
H216
H217
H226
d227
95 / 99 Offset setpoint
9.6 ms
H219
H220
H228
d229
Table 2-9
Terminal assignment of the analog inputs, T400 module
T400 has two analog outputs which are processed in the fastest sampling
time (1.2 ms). The output quantity is selected per multiplexer or the BICO
connection. During operation, every output can be inhibited by a control
signal (output = 0V).
Analog outputs
The outputs can be scaled. For the factory setting, 1.0 is output for 5 V.
The output voltage V is obtained as follows:
V = ( value + offset ) scaling factor 5 V
Terminal
Multiplexer
BICO input
Inhibit input
Scaling factor
Offset
97 / 99
H618
H620
H621
H161
H160
98 / 99
H619
H622
H623
H163
H162
Table 2-10
2.2.3
Analog outputs and associated parameters
Pulse encoders
Pulse encoder type
Encoder power
supply
Shielding
24
Pulse encoders with two tracks, offset through 90 degrees must be

used. If the synchronizing function is used, the zero pulse or a
comparable synchronizing signal (e. g. BERO switch) must be connected.
The T400 module provides 15 V (max. 100 mA) as encoder power
supply.
Encoders with a 15 - 24 V supply voltage, especially: SIEMENS rotary
pulse encoders 1XP8001-1 (for 1LA5 motors, frame sizes 100K to 200L);


The pulse encoder cable and the cables used to conduct the
synchronizing pulses must be shielded. The cable shield must be
connected at both ends, if possible through clamps, to ground potential
through the lowest impedance connection. This is especially important for
signals from proximity- or switches using contacts.
15 V power
supply units
If the 100 mA of the internal 15 V supply is not adequate, we recommend

the following 15V power supplies:
Type CM62-PS-220 AC/ 15 DC/ 1
220 V AC to 15V DC, load capacity 1 A
Manufacturer, Phoenix
Type FMP 15S 500 with fast mounting
110/220 V AC to 15V DC, load capacity 0.5 A
Manufacturer, Block
Encoder pulse
numbers
When selecting the encoder pulse number, the following issues must be
taken into account:
1. Maximum pulse frequency, 1.5 MHz
2. The ratio should be approx. 1:1 as in this case, the best dynamic
performance is obtained. A ratio in the range from 1:4 to 4:1 is
acceptable (definitions, refer to the following sections).
3. The encoder pulse numbers of the master- and slave drives should be
same; however, criteria 1) and 2) have priority.
The master drive pulse encoders are directly connected to the T400. The
slave drive can use the incremental encoder signals from the basic drive
(CU) from the backplane bus.
The operating mode can be parameterized using parameters H018 and
H019. The following should be set:
Encoder type
Filter parameterization and filter time constant of the digital filter for the
signals of the two pulse tracks / zero pulse track
The recommended values for H018 and H019 are specified in the
parameter table in Section 4.2. For additional information, refer to Lit.[5]
block NAVS, connector MOD.

25
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
HTL
RS422
HTL
TTL
HTL 3V
81
62
62
62
62
86
82
63
63
63
63
87
83
64
64
64
64
66
88
Coarse pulse inputs
84
65
65
65
65
P15 output for the 15 V encoder power supply
80
80
80
80
80
Ground
85
66
66
66
66
Switch S2.1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.3
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Switch S2.4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Track A+ and track A

Track ATrack B+ and track B
Track B-
Table 2-11
types
Coarse pulse
evaluation

For example, by combining coarse- and fine pulses, disturbances can be
suppressed, or just specific synchronizing pulses evaluated.
5 different cases are investigated. The default setting is for synchronizing
pulses which are used independently of the associated coarse pulses
(mode 1). The coarse pulse mode is selected using H022 and H023.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Y = XG AND XF
only 1st pulse
Y = XG AND XF
Y = XG AND XF
only 1st pulse
Y = XG AND XF
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
XG
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
XF
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Fig. 2-3
26
Operating modes for coarse pulse evaluation (the synchronizing pulses correspond to the fine pulses)


When using the absolute value encoder for differential position sensing,
two absolute encoders with SSI or EnDat interface are connected.
We recommend a multi-turn encoder with e.g. 4096 steps per revolution
and 4096 revolutions which can be differentiated between. The encoder
should be a coded rotary encoder.
(function block type to evaluate an absolute value encoder: AENC)
T400
terminal
Significance
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
Drive to be connected
Master drive
Slave drive with T400
Table 2-12: T400 terminals for absolute value encoder

27
A control-related block diagram of the standard angular synchronism
software package is illustrated in Fig. 3-1.
The closed-loop angular control is implemented on the technology
module. The closed-loop speed control is either realized on the
connected drive converter or is internally computed on the T400 (refer to
parameter H140).
The setpoints are either received from the basic drive (CU), COMBOARD,
peer-to-peer or analog input or can be entered as fixed value.
Inertia
compensation
Closed-loop speed
control
Basic drive CU
Speed controller
Master speed
setpoint
(reference speed)
Speed setpoint
To the
current
controller
Ratio
Closed-loop angular
control
Conversion into pulse

number conversion
Pulse encoder
Slave
Actual value
sensing
Speed actual
values
Position act. value, slave and master
Master
Status and control signals
Control signals for

synchronizing
Displacement
determination
&
synchronization
Displacement
act. value
Displacement position difference
Position difference
Position difference - correction value
Ramp-function
generator
Angular controller
Displacement
setpoint
P- or PI controller
Fig. 3-1 Overview of the SPA440 standard software package
28

3.1
Ratio
3.1.1
Speed ratio
The master- and slave drives receive the same speed setpoint, whereby
this setpoint is weighted by the (master/slave) speed ratio .
The speed ratio between the master and slave drive is defined as
follows:
Speed ratio
Speed, master drive
Speed, slave drive
Example:
Speed, master drive:
Ratio
Speed, slave drive:
NOTE
nM = 1710 RPM
= 1.5
nS = nM / = 1710 RPM / 1.5 = 1140 RPM
Contrary to the older versions of the angular synchronous control, the

ratio, as floating-point value, can be practically set without any
limitations.
Parameter
Use
H040
Multiplexer selection of the source for the ratio
H041
H043
Fixed value, ratio
d044
Actual ratio
d045
Ratio, numerator
d046
Ratio, denominator
H047
H048
Multiplexer selection for the relative ratio
H067
H068
H086
Fixed value, fine ratio, numerator
H087
Fixed value, fine ratio, denominator
H088
Enable fine ratio
H155
Resolution for calculating numerator and denominator
Table 3-1
Parameters to define and display the ratio

29
3.1.2
Fine ratio
The ratio is generally entered as a floating-point value. The integer value
for numerator and denominator DN and NM are automatically calculated
from the selected ratio (refer to Chart 80). The calculated ratio exhibits a
maximum error of 0.0001 with respect to the floating-point input (this can
be influenced using the resolution of the ratio H155).
Nominator and denominator can be separately entered as integer value
(fine ratio) (refer to Table 3-1). (For example, this may be required if the
ratio is entered with OP1S, whereby only 3 decimal points are possible).
Example:
Ratio:
Pulses, slave/revolution:
1024
Pulses, master/revolution:
2048
/3 (master speed/slave speed)
Displacement correction should be made

Settings:
Parameter
Value
H077
5001
H078
30
Explanation
st
Source for fixed value 1 ratio of the displacement

calculation = 1, as the number of pulses between 2
synchronizing operations has been taken into account
(refer to H100, H102, H105, H107)
H086
Fine ratio, numerator
H087
Fine ratio, denominator
H088
Activates the fine ratio
H100
16384

signals of the master (2 revolutions)
H102
12288

signals of the slave (3 revolutions)
H105
10993
Suppresses the first synchronizing pulse from the master

(synchronizing is only enabled after 1.5 revolutions)
H107
10240
Suppresses the first two synchronizing pulses from the

slave (synchronizing is only enabled after 2.5 revolutions)

3.2
3.2.1
Setpoints
Setpoints can be entered from any interface. A connection must be
established from the required source to the appropriate setpoint input
using BICO technology. When making a selection with the multiplexer, a
selection can be made between the following sources. Also refer to
function chart 500 and the tables specified below.
Setpoint
Selection
Pre-assigned with ...
Displacement
H050
Ratio
H040
Relative ratio
H048
H070
H080
Differentiation of the speed setpoint
Table 3-2
Multiplexer to select the setpoint channel
Selection
Normalization
Fixed value 0.0
Fixed value (a separate fixed value for each setpoint channel)
H210
H213
H216
H219
H550
Basic drive, word 2
H552
Basic drive, word 3
H554
Basic drive, word 5
Setpoint sources
H451
COMBOARD word 2
10
H453
COMBOARD word 3
11
H455
COMBOARD word 5
12
H457
COMBOARD word 6
13
14
15
Table 3-3
Speed actual value, master (channel 15 is only available to

select the master setpoint)
Setpoint sources

31
3.2.2
Actual value sensing

The actual speed, position and position difference are sensed by
counting the pulses from the two pulse encoders from the master- and
slave drives.
Principle
The speed actual value sensing is calibrated using parameters H010 to

H013. The speed actual value is referred to the configured rated speed,
i.e. the rated speed has a speed actual value of 1.0.
Speed
Pulses
Measuring time
Encoder pulse No.. Rated speed
All of the parameters which have to be set for the actual value sensing
are listed in Table 3-4:
Param.
Significance
Explanation
H010
Encoder pulse number, slave
H011
Encoder pulse number, master
H012
Rated speed, slave
H013
Rated speed, master
d014
Display parameter
d015
Display parameter
d016
Display parameter
d017
Display parameter
H018
Slave sensing mode
Encoder type (always type 1); filter time; behavior for zero pulse;
source of the tracked signals and zero pulse
H019
Master sensing mode
Encoder type (always type 1); filter time; behavior for zero pulse
d020
Error code, slave sensing
d021
Error code, master sensing
H022
Coarse pulse evaluation, slave
H023
Coarse pulse evaluation,

master
Table 3-4
Parameters for the speed actual value sensing
NOTE
The explanations in this Manual only assume encoders with 2 tracks A

and B, offset through 90 and possibly with zero pulse! However, the
information is also valid for encoders with separate forwards- and
reverse tracks.
Rated speed, master (H013) and rated system frequency:
If the master setpoint for the slave is referred to the encoder pulses of
the master (H070 = 15), the rated speed of the master (H013) and the
rated system frequency (or the speed for a drive converter) must be
parameterized so that they are identical.
The rated speeds of the master and slave are required to generate the
master setpoint and to display the speed actual value (d014, d015).
These are used when calculating the pos. and pos. difference.
32

Position actual
value sensing
The master and slave position actual values are required to determine
the displacement. To sense the position actual value, the encoder pulse
edges from the master- and slave drives are counted which have been
received since the last time the system was reset with the drives
operational.
The position actual values are reset as follows:
the control signal reset position (refer to Chart 90)
when enabling the angular controller
using the synchronizing pulse (e. g. zero pulse) at the pulse encoder
input. When the synchronizing marks are passed, the position actual
value is set to 0 and runs-up to four times the encoder pulse number in
one revolution.
The position difference is sensed per software using a 32-bit counter.
This means that a maximum pulse number of
231 = 2147483648 quadrupled pulses is possible.
NOTE
Param.
31
In order that the position actual values do not overflow (e. g. from 2
31
-2 ), a synchronizing pulse must be generated, at the latest after
231 quadrupled pulses, which then resets the position!
Significance
Explanation
d017
d016
H105
Synchronizing threshold, slave
A synchronizing pulse is only evaluated if the position

actual value exceeds threshold H105
H107
Synchronizing threshold, master
As for H105, however for the master position
d109
Status of the angular controller

enable
At d109=0, the position is reset
H173
Multiplexer for reset position
Selects the source for this control signal
H097
H167
Inputs for the reset position

function
BICO inputs
H181
Input, reset slave position
H189
Input, reset master position
Table 3-5
Parameters for position actual value sensing
Position difference
sensing
The position difference actual value is defined as the position actual value
through which the slave must be moved, so that the position actual value
of the slave and the position actual value of the master, referred to the
slave, are the same.
The position pulse number of the master drive is re-normalized to the
slave. This means it can be directly compared with the position pulse
number of the slave, i.e. the angle through which the master drive moves,
is represented as a pulse number of the slave. The following algorithm for
the position difference is obtained, taking into account different encoder

33
pulse numbers for the master- and slave drives. Master- and encoder
pulses refer to the quadrupled position pulses generated by the pulse
encoder. Rated pulses represents the number of position pulses, where
the position actual value should be 1.0.
PulseMaster
Pos. difference =
Calculation
DN
Slave encoder pulse No.
NM
Master encoder pulse No.
- PulseSlave
Rated pulses
The quotient of NM / DN corresponds to ratio (refer to Section 3.1.2).

A so-called correction pulse number (H093), calculated from the displacement calculation, is added to the position difference for synchronization.
This means that the angular controller is forced to correct the position
difference which is entered. This correction value is zero if
synchronization is not applied or when in the synchronous condition
Correction pulse
number
Par.
Significance
Explanation
H093
H117
Filter time, position

difference
d124
Differential position actual

value, smoothed
Table 3-6
Number of pulses which, when the displacement is being corrected

are input per sampling time into the angular controller to correct the
displacement
Number of pulse edges (pulses 4) which represents the offset

between the master and slave; this is zero when the system is
synchronized.
Parameters for the differential position sensing
The pulse number ratio should be approximately 1:1. An inaccuracy of

several pulses can occur, especially for a pulse number ratio 1. The
highest accuracy is achieved for a pulse number ratio of 1:1, refer to the
example in Fig. 3.5.
Inaccuracy
9 edges
Pulses, master
Counter saved
1 edge
Pulses, slave
Counter saved
Ratio = 1
9 edges - 1 edge
4.5 pulses - 0.75 pulses
= 8 edges
= 3.75 pulses
Ratio = 6
Fig. 3-2
34
9 edges - 6 1 edge
= 3 edges
4.5 pulses - 6 0.75 pulses = 0 pulse
Example of inaccuracies when determining the position difference

The settings when using absolute value encoders are described in the
next section.
3.2.3
Position actual value sensing with absolute value encoders

Parameter
Description
Factory
setting
Connector
L098
Enables position sensing using a pulse

encoder (NAVS).
changed!
---
L099
Enables position sensing using an

absolute value encoder (AENC).
changed!
---
Table 3-7: Activating the absolute value encoder
Settings
The absolute value encoder is set using the following parameters. The
required data can be taken from the manufacturers Operating Instructions
for the particular absolute value encoder.
Absolute Absolute
encoder encoder
1
2
Description
L100
Resolution per turn (RPT)
L200

encoder)
L101
L201
Number of turns (NOT)

only for multi-turn encoders. For single-turn encoders =
0.
Example: A multi-turn encoder is used. L101 = 4096
(Operating Instructions, absolute encoder)
L102
L202
Preceding zero bits (PZB)

Number of non-relevant bits at the start of the position
value transfer. This is valid for SSI encoders, with which
the various protocol versions are specified.
encoder)
L103
L203
Alarm bit position (ABP)

Position of the interrupt bit within the data transfer
protocol of an SSI encoder. If there is no interrupt bit,
then ABP = 0 applies.
encoder)
L104
L204
Clock frequency (MDF)

There are four possible clock frequencies for data
transfer.
2 : Clock frequency = 1 MHz, period = 1 s
3 : Clock frequency = 2 MHz, period = 0.5 s
encoder)

35
L105
L205
Encoder type (MDT)

Specification of the encoder type. The differentiation
between coded rotary encoders and length measuring
systems has an influence on the velocity output
(parameter c114 or c214).
0 : SSI (coded rotary encoder)
1 : SSI (coded length measuring system)
2 : EnDat (coded rotary encoder)
3 : EnDat (coded length measuring system)
4 : SSI (coded length measuring system with range
correction)
5 : EnDat (coded length measuring system with range
correction)
encoder)
L106
L206
Data coding (MDC)

0 : Binary code (permissible for EnDat and SSI)
1 : Gray code (permissible for SSI)
2 : Gray Excess code (permissible for SSI single-turn
encoders)
encoder)
L107
L207
Control word (CW)

Bit 0 : Enables the parity monitoring for an SSI encoder.
A check is made for even parity. The parity bit is directly
transferred after the position value, i.e. as 14th bit or as
26th bit.
0 = No parity monitoring (permissible for SSI, EnDat)
1 = Parity monitoring, even parity (permissible for SSI).
Bit 1 : Resets the AENC block and deletes the fault
messages and alarms as well as individual bits of the
fault word.
When using an EnDat encoder, its alarms and alarm bits
are reset.
For SSI encoders, after connecting-up and powering-up
the encoder, it is necessary to reset. A 0 to 1 signal edge
is required to reset.
Example: L107 = 0000h (hexadecimal value, with all bits
= 0, setting, bit 0 from the Operating Instructions,
absolute encoder)
L108
L208
L109
L209
L110
L210
Gearbox ratio (NFG)

Takes into account a gear ratio between the coded rotary
encoder and the drive system. The position values and
the speed are converted over to the drive system.
For a length measuring system, the gear ratio is not
taken into account.
The following applies: Position(drive) = gear ratio *
position(encoder).
Normalization, position (NFP)
Normalization basis for the offset input (OFF).
Normalization, speed (NFY)
This value influences the output value Y of the speed:
Y = NFY * revolutions/min.
Factory setting: 0.0
Example: L110 = 1.0 (i.e. for 100 revolutions/min, c114 =
100.0 is displayed at the output)
36

L111
L211
Position offset (OFF)

When entering an offsets 0 the encoder zero position is
shifted.
The offset value has the same normalization as the
position outputs.
It is subtracted from the encoder position actual value.
Example:
L111 = .... (must be determined from the position
normalization, refer to Section 4)
L112
L212
Upper speed limit (LU)

Maximum operating speed of the encoder where valid
position values can still be determined. The data is a
value normalized to the speed output (parameter c114
and c214).
Example: L112 = 6000.0 (i.e. 6000 revolutions/min, must,
if required, be adapted)
L120
L220
Offset, number of rotations

This is used to enter an offset for the number of
revolutions (parameter c116 or c216). This determines
the scaled position actual value.
position normalization, refer to Section 6.2.6)
L121
L221
Scaling, position actual value

This normalizes the scaled position actual value (c125 or
c225).
position normalization, refer to Section 4)
L122
L222
Selection, MUL/DIV:
0: The scaling factor L121 (or L221) is multiplied by the
value supplied from AENC.
1: The value supplied from AENC is divided by the
scaling factor L121 (or L221). The scaling factor must be
assigned its inverse value: L121 = 1.0 / L121.
The selection must be made if the scaling factor < 0.1
and otherwise the multiplication would be too inaccurate.
Example: 1: L122 = 0 (the scaling factor L121 = 3.431
determined from the position normalization and can
therefore be multiplied)
Example: 2: L122 = 1 (the original scaling factor L121U =
0.01234 originally determined from the position
normalization, is less than 0.1. The scaling factor to be
entered, L121 = 1.0 / L121U = 81.037.
L123
L223
Offset, position actual value:

The position can only be normalized if a defined point
has the position actual value 0.0. However, if this point is
not at 0.0, then it can be shifted to 0.0 using the offset.
The following applies for AENC 1:
if L122 = 0 : c125 = (c115 + c116 L120) * L121 + L123.
if L122 = 1 : c125 = (c115 + c116 L120) / L121 + L123.
The corresponding is true for AENC 2.
Example: H123 = 10000.0 (reference point 1 for the
position normalization is at 10000.0 mm, however, it
must be 0.0 and is therefore shifted via L123 (offset).
Table 3-8: Settings for absolute value encoders (examples only for AENC1)
INIT parameters
Parameters L100 L106 (or L200 L206) are INIT parameters, i.e. after a value has been
changed, a reset is required (e.g. power off/on).

37
Diagnostics
c114
only display
KR4114
c115
only display
KR4115
c116
only display
KR4116
c118
Error code AENC1, slave (refer below)
only display
---
c119
Error word AENC1, slave (refer below)
only display
---
c125
Position actual value AENC1, slave

[length units]
only display
KR4125
c214
only display
KR4214
c215
only display
KR4215
c216
only display
KR4216
c218
Error code AENC2, master (refer below)
only display
---
c219
Error word AENC2, master (refer below)
only display
---
c225
Position actual value AENC2, master

[length units]
only display
KR4225
c300
Differential position, master slave

[length units]
only display
KR4300
Table 3-9: Diagnostic parameters for absolute value encoders
Normalization of
the position actual
values
L301
Adaptation, division differential position

(Y1 = c300/L301)
1.0
---
L302
Adaptation, multiplication differential

position Y2 = Y1 * L302.
This value is saved in connector KR3124
via the filter smoothed with H117 and
transferred to the angular controller.
1.0
---
Table 3-10: Parameter and connectors for absolute value encoders
The position actual values can be represented in length units. A length

unit can be freely selected, e.g. 1 length unit = 1 mm or 1 length unit = 1
m.
Position
normalization
Procedure when normalizing the position (as an example, AENC1).

Parameters L111, L120, L121, L122 and L123 must be defined using the
position normalization.
1. Prerequisites:
L111 = 0.0 (Offset zero position).
L120 = 0.0 (Offset, number of revolutions)
L121 = 1.0 (Scaling factor).
L122 = 0 (Multiplication of the scaling factor).
The defined first position should be, e.g. 10000 mm: L123 = 10000.
These values should first be entered.
The angular synchronism may still not be activated (H172=0), as the
values from the absolute value encoder block have still not been
normalized in this phase and therefore are not correct.
2. Move to the first position (in this case 10,000 mm). The first position
is now used as a virtual zero point.
38

A value of 10000 must now be in c125.
3. Traverse to a second position. The distance lDiff to the first position
must be known.
lDiff = 15014.3 mm; i.e. the second position is 25014.3 mm, as the first
position = 10000 mm.
Read-off parameter c125.
Example 1: If c125 = 26023.5, a scaling factor is obtained
L121 = 15014.3 / (26023.5 10000) = 0.937
This value is greater than 0.1, which means that L122 can be kept at
0.
Example 2: If c125 = 1234567.8, then this results in a scaling factor
L121 = 15014.3 / (1234567.8 10000) = 0.0123
This value is less than 0.1, a correction must be made:
L122 = 1 (it is divided by the scaling factor).
L121 = (1234567.8 10000) / 15014.3 = 81.560
4. Check:
Move to the "second position" position and read-off c125 (in this case,
c125 = 25014.3).
Then move to the "first position" and ready-off c125 (in this case,
c125 = 10000).
5. Proceed in the same way for the master drive (AENC2).
6. After position normalization, the synchronous operation function
can be activated. The slave will now always control itself to track the
master position.
If the position is to shift, then this can be corrected via the offset slave
L123 or offset master L223.
Example:
Actual slave position = 12000.0 mm, display c125 = 12000.5 mm.
Then
L123 = L123old + real position c125 = 10000.0 + 12000.0 12000.5
= 9999.5
This means that the display is c125 = 12000.0
The position actual value must be re-normalized if the encoder type is

changed.
When using the plausibility check (function chart 75 of the SPA440
Operating Instructions) the dn enable (H118 and H119) must be set to a
higher value (e.g. 1.2), if the speed actual value source (parameter H192
or H195) was not configured.
A higher value is not required for the dn enable if the speed actual values
from the master and slave from the absolute value encoder blocks are

39
used. In this particular case, the source parameters should be set as
follows:
L110!)
L210!)
Error codes for the
absolute value
encoders
Parameters c118 and c218

This involves erroneous input parameters (configuring error)
communication errors (possibly erroneous encoder specification) or
operating errors.
Bit 0 - 1
Not specified
Bit 2
Timeout
Bit 3
Communications error:
The component of messages (telegrams) with parity/CRC errors is,
on the average, 10% and more.
If the error rate decreases the error bit is automatically reset.
Bit 4
Communication errors:
On the average, a parity or CFC error occurs at each second
position transfer (or more frequently). The error bit is automatically
reset if the error rate decreases.
Bit 5
Not specified
Bit 6
Parity check only possible in the SSI mode
Bit 7
Illegal data coding
Bit 8
Illegal encoder type
Bit 9
Illegal clock cycle frequency
Bit 10
Format error: Contradictory or illegal data
Bit 11
Hardware address illegal or already assigned
Bit 12-15
Not specified
Table 3-11: Error codes for absolute value encoders
Errors words of the

absolute encoder
Monitoring parameters c119 and c219

Error status word of an EnDat encoder. The significance of the error bits
can be taken from the manufacturers data sheets.
Fault word = 0000Hex, as long as no fault is present.
Fault word = FFFFHex, as long as an SSI encoder sends a set interrupt
bit.
Faults, alarms via

CU
40
Faults and alarms can also be sent to the basic unit (CU):
Fault
Significance
Alarm
Binector
F125
Fault AENC2 master
A106
B0212
F126
Fault AENC1 slave
A107
B0211

3.3
Determining the displacement and synchronization
3.3.1
Synchronization
The differential position actual value is determined as a result of the
difference between the pulses which have occurred since the position
difference was reset. This does not indicate the relative position of the
drives to one another! The displacement is determined if the position
of two drives with respect to one another regarding their
synchronizing pulses (e.g. zero pulses) must be identified and
corrected.
Synchronization involves determining and correcting the displacement,
which isnt clear from the position difference, e.g. after the drives have
been rotated with the drive converter powered-down. For instance, it
makes sense to first synchronize the drives after they have been
powered-up, as they are still not in defined positions at the instant of
power-on. Initial synchronization can be automatically initiated (refer to
H168, H169). After this initial synchronization, additional synchronized
operations are required, if errors occur in the position actual value
sensing of the drives, as a result of disturbances for example, wheel slip
(also refer to Section 3.8.1)
NOTE
Task
For angular synchronous control, synchronization and therefore the

availability of synchronizing marks is not a prerequisite (if the
displacement is not specified)!
1. Determining the displacement from the position of the synchronizing
marks, whereby a correction value for the differential position actual
value is generated,
2. Correcting the differential position actual value by correcting the
displacement.
In principle, it is adequate to synchronize just once. Continuous
synchronization is mandatory under the following conditions:
The (pulse number) ratio cannot be precisely entered. While fractions
can be precisely set, irrational ratios (e.g. ) cannot be precisely
entered !
Encoder pulses can be lost
Closed-loop position control of a traversing gear (refer to Section3.8.1)
should be executed. As the pulse encoders are mounted on the motor,
they do not emulate the actual position of the crane (position actual
values). For wheel slip, position actual value sensing drive errors
occur, which can only be corrected by synchronizing.
Enable
Synchronization, i. e. correcting an displacement which may have been

identified, is realized by activating a synchronizing command (H174). The
synchronizing command must be inhibited for applications which do not
require synchronization.
Synchronization
sequence

41
The differential position actual value can be corrected using the
calculated displacement, either once within a sampling time, or distributed
over several sampling times.
Directly setting the displacement
The differential position actual value is set directly to a correction value,

which is retrieved from the position of the synchronizing marks, if a
synchronizing command is present, and after at least one synchronizing
pulse has been received.
Thus, the angular controller receives a system deviation, generated from
the displacement calculation, which must be corrected. As there is a time
delay between the instant that the displacement is determined, and the
instant that the displacement is set per software, then the difference
pulses, which are received during this time, must be taken into account.
This is possible when configuring the speed sensing blocks by
appropriately connecting-up the setting inputs and selecting specific
setting modes. The differential position actual value is corrected, so that
no pulses are lost between determining the displacement and correcting
the differential position actual value.
Successively setting the displacement in n sampling times
When the displacement is set once, this can result in large steps in the
differential position actual value at the angular synchronous controller and
can even result in overshoot. Steps such as these can be avoided by
successively setting the displacement. Correction is then step-by-step, i.e.
in n sampling times by the correction pulse number (H093):
n = displacement/H093.
Correction pulse
number
NOTE
3.3.2
H093 is used to define how many pulses of the defined displacement per
sampling time should be corrected. If the angular controller is inactive,
then the differential position value would assume the displacement
setpoint after n sampling cycles. In order that the displacement correction
isnt too high, the correction pulse number H093 should be set to
extremely low values (typically =1). The value of the correction pulse
number is subtracted from the differential position actual value in each
sampling time until synchronism is achieved.
A synchronizing operation, started once is executed until synchronism
is achieved (correction value is 0); this can no longer be interrupted !
Determining the displacement
Synchronizing
pulse number
The number of encoder pulses between two synchronizing pulses, the socalled synchronizing pulse number, must be entered in order to determine
the displacement actual value (refer to Fig. 3-3). The synchronizing
pulse numbers from the master- and slave drives are entered using
If a small deviation occurs between the entered and actual pulse number,
e.g. as a result of an encoder error, then this is corrected by the
synchronization.
42

Master drive, pulses, pulse edges

Track A
Track B
Pulse
edges
Synchronizing
pulse, master
Synchronizing pulse number, master H100 (in this case: 52)
Slave drive, pulses, pulse edges
Track A
Track B
Pulse
edges
Synchronizing
pulse, slave
Synchronizing pulse number, slave H102 (in this case: 104)
Fig. 3-3
Explanation of the synchronizing pulse number
Operating mode
The displacement actual value can be determined once if the master- and
slave drives pass over the two synchronizing marks at least once. This
can be determined in two ways:
"continuous (H091=0) displacement determination:
As soon as the displacement actual value has been determined once, i. e.
both synchronizing marks have been passed once, then an displacement
actual value (d094, d095) is calculated each time a synchronizing mark is
passed. The number of synchronizing pulses passed is counted and is
evaluated with the synchronizing pulse numbers (H100 and H102). This
allows the actual displacement to be determined, even if the associated
synchronizing pulse of the other drive is missing. Several revolutions of
the machine parts to be synchronized may be included in the
displacement actual value. For a synchronizing operation, several
synchronizing pulses which are passed are corrected (revolutions).
This is the default mode.
Retrigger displacement calculation (H091=1):
When synchronizing, correction is only made within a synchronizing
pulse period. This corresponds, for example, for a zero pulse during one
encoder revolution.
The Retrigger operating mode should be used, if
1. if, for technology reasons it is sufficient or it makes more sense to only
synchronize within one revolution, or
2. if the synchronizing pulse number can only be determined with
insufficient accuracy. In this case, both synchronizing pulses are
required in order to determine the precise displacement.

43
In order to determine a new displacement, both synchronizing marks
must be again passed. The number of synchronizing marks which are
passed is not counted. If an displacement of several revolutions is to be
obtained, then this is lost the next time the displacement is calculated.
NOTE
In the Retrigger mode, the danger exists, that the angular control
loop becomes unstable if the dynamic performance is set too high and
for low-frequency synchronizing pulses. This is because if the two
synchronizing pulses occur one after the another, alternating positive
and negative displacement actual values could be determined, which
the angular controller would attempt to correct
Example: +10 would be obtained from an displacement of -370
Edge evaluation
The displacement is determined when the synchronizing pulse edges

are received using the position actual values from the master- and slave
drives. Using the example of the switching cam in Fig. 3-4, this
corresponds to edge a for clockwise direction of rotation or edge b for
counter-clockwise direction of rotation.
The synchronizing circuit has a so-called direction of rotationdependent edge evaluation, i.e. synchronization is realized for both
directions of rotations at the same edge of the switching cam and more
precisely, at the front (positive) edge of the synchronizing pulse when
rotating clockwise (in Fig. 3-4, edge a). When rotating counter-clockwise,
synchronization is realized at the falling edge of the synchronizing pulse (i.
e. at edge a).
Proximity
switch
L
S
S=switching cams, length L with edges a and b
b
a
RL
Fig. 3-4
Command type
Resetting
displacement
calculation
NOTE
44
LL
Determining the displacement and synchronizing for clockwise- and counterclockwise directions of rotation
The synchronizing command can be parameterized for either signal levelor edge control using parameter H092. The synchronizing command must
be 1 for at least the time it takes to determine the displacement. For
signal level control, the displacement is corrected as long as the signal is
active (logical 1); for edge control, correction is only executed once after a
positive (01) edge. The displacement isnt suddenly corrected, but it is
corrected with a pulse number, which can be set using parameter H093,
at each sampling time.
Resetting the displacement calculation is realized by
using the reset position control signal (refer to Chart 90)
by enabling the angular controller
The displacement calculation should only be reset briefly when
required, for example, when the drive starts. After this, it is

automatically controlled by the internal monitoring function
The displacement at the instant that at least one synchronizing pulse is
received, is calculated using the function block Displace in the CFC Chart
SYNC02.
Displacement
calculation
NOTES
The distance between two synchronizing operations may not exceed

231 quadrupled pulses.
The time between two synchronizing operations must be greater
than 4.8 ms (for safety reasons, 4x sampling time for a basic
sampling time of 1.2 ms)
The synchronizing pulse must be inactive for T > 1.6 ms, i. e. low
(for safety, 2x sampling time for a basic sampling time of 1.2 ms).
Synchronizing
example
Master- and slave drive with pulse encoders mounted on the motor shaft.
The pulse encoders generate two pulse series, displacement through 90
and zero pulses.
The drives should be synchronized, so that the zero pulses (synchronizing
pulses) are always simultaneously received. The pulse trains would look
like this on a suitable plotter or oscilloscope:
Pulses, slave
Track A
Track B
Synchronizing pulse, slave
Position act. value, slave

Pulses, master
Track A
Track B
Synchronizing pulse, master
Positon act. value, master

Synchronizing
command
(edge-dependent)
Determine offset
Correction duration
Fig. 3-5 Calculating the displacement and synchronization

45
3.3.3
Noise-immune synchronization
An adjustable enable threshold is used to suppress multiple edges (switch
bounce) and suppress disturbances on the synchronizing pulse cable.
Erroneous synchronizing pulses, caused by switch bounce or
disturbances, can have, among others, the following results:
inaccuracy in the angular position,
the synchronizing control sense could be reversed, as the rigid
sequence of synchronizing pulses is interrupted (e.g. master-,
slave-, master drive),
the slave drive could run without any closed-loop control.
Thus, the synchronizing pulse cables must be especially carefully
routed and shielded.
The following diagrams should show the behavior at contact-bounce and
the resulting evaluation.
Signals at the T400 terminals

Switching
threshold
Internal evaluation
Fig. 3-6
Signal characteristic with clear pulse edges, e.g. for zero pulses from pulse encoders
Synchronizing pulse at the T400 terminal

Switching
threshold
Te
> 0,8
Internal evaluation
Fig. 3-7
NOTE
Noisy signal characteristics, e.g. for proximity switches.
Disturbances and noise which occur in the sampling time are

automatically suppressed when processed in the sampling time !
Faults which occur between two leading edges of the synchronizing
pulses can be suppressed by entering an enable threshold when a
specific position actual value is reached. The synchronizing pulses are
46

only evaluated again after the position actual value exceeds the threshold
for the master- (H107) or slave drive (H105) (refer to Fig. 3-8).
Calculating the limit value of the enable thresholds (H105, H107):
1.) If the situation is non-critical, the enable threshold can be set to
approx. 95% of the synchronizing pulse numbers (parameters H100
and H102).
If the synchronizing pulses are noisy or there is the danger, that at high
speeds, an enable threshold for the enable minimum duration tmin (refer
to Fig. 3-8) is not maintained, then enable threshold d can be calculated
using the following formula:
d = SS (1
t min+ SF TS
);
TS
d>0
Whereby:
SS
Number of pulse edges between 2 synchronizing pulses
TS
Time between 2 synchronizing pulses at the maximum speed
tmin
Minimum enable time. Time period where synchronization is

permitted; calculation: e.g.: 4 T1 (4 base sampling time = 4.8
ms)
SF
Safety factor (0.05 to 0.1) if the synchronizing pulse comes earlier

due to mechanical inaccuracy.
Limit value d designates the enable threshold for the synchronizing pulse.
It defines, how many edges (pulses 4) must be counted after
synchronization (i. e. how high the position actual value must be) before
the next synchronizing operation is enabled. Limit value d must be
separately calculated for master- and slave drive.
Bounce time ( typical 1 ms .. 10 ms)
tsyn
Signal at the T400

terminal
Switching
threshold
Enable
TS
Inhibit duration f (threshold)
Enabled
tmin
Inhibited
Internal
evaluation
Fig. 3-8:
Effect of the enable control (only one drive is shown)

47
3.3.4
Synchronism achieved
The threshold for the Synchronism reached signal can be set using
parameter H103. A high signal is output at digital output terminal 46 when
synchronism is reached.
Conditioned actual
displacement
Dynamic fluctuations in the angular difference, which are mirrored in the

actual displacement, are taken into account by correcting the displacement actual value by the differential angular actual value. This corrected
actual displacement is known as the conditioned actual displacement.
Synchronism is reached, if the conditioned actual displacement has been
determined and this is zero or is a selected displacement setpoint
(including a possible synchronizing displacement setpoint which is
dependent on the direction of rotation), i. e.
conditioned actual displacement = displacement setpoint H103.
Significance
Par.
Explanation
d056 Actual displacement setpoint
Display parameter
H091 Trigger condition, actual displacement

sensing
0
1
=
=
continuous
retrigger
H092 Edge evaluation, synchronizing command
0
1
=
=
level controlled (continuous)

edge-controlled (once)
H093 Correction pulse number
Select the lowest possible value (preferably 1);

this should be increased, if the displacement, in spite
of low-frequency synchronizing pulses, must be
quickly corrected, or if required, for the Retrigger
operating mode
d094 Displacement actual value
Display parameter;
also includes, if relevant, a set displacement setpoint
d095 Actual displacement - differential position

act. value
Display parameter
d096 Actual displacement sensing, error

identification:
Bit 0 = Overflow SSslave
Bit 1 = Overflow SSmaster
Bit 2 = Overflow SSslave (H102)
Bit 3 = Overflow SSmaster (H100)
Bit 8 = Overflow displacement- diff. pos.
actual value
Display parameter
SS = Sum of the synchronizing pulses
H100 Synchronizing pulse number, master
Pulse edges (pulses *4) of the master drive, which are

H102 Synchronizing pulse number, slave
Pulse edges (pulses *4) of the slave drive, which are

H103 Response threshold, synchronism reached
If the actual displacement = displacement setpoint

H103, synchronism has been reached.
H105 Enable threshold, slave synchronization
To suppress the effects of contact bounce and

suppressing disturbances on the zero pulse cable.
H107 Enable threshold, master synchronization
Same as H105
Table 3-12 Parameters for displacement sensing/synchronization
48

3.4

Closed-loop angular synchronous control refers to a cascading speed
control loop with a higher-level angular control. The angular controller has
the task to control the relative angular position between the master- and
slave drive to zero or to an displacement setpoint. Angular differences,
which can be obtained due to different load levels and speed fluctuations
are corrected. The implementation of an angular controller is shown in
Function Chart 110 (Appendix).
Principle
3.4.1
Enable signals
The angular controller is enabled as a result of the following two
conditions
Principle
External enable, angular controller enable (H173, H131,H139), and

Enable threshold of the angular controller (H118)
The angular controller is first enabled. The angular control (d109) is
actually enabled by automatically monitoring the speed actual value of the
slave. An enable threshold defines the margin between the speed
setpoint of the slave and speed actual value of the slave. As soon as the
enable threshold is reached, the angular controller is automatically
switched-in. The displacement calculation is simultaneously reset
together with the position actual values of the slave/master. This avoids
unnecessary overshoot and non-stable rotary motion of the closed-loop
angular synchronous control if there is a considerable speed difference
between the master and slave (e. g: when powering-up or powering-down
a slave while the master is running).
Flying
synchronization
3.4.2
The SPA440 standard software package permits this automatic

monitoring function to also synchronize a stationary slave with a flying
master, and to establish angular synchronism. Before the slave speed
actual value approaches its setpoint, or an enable threshold is reached,
the angular controller becomes inactive. The displacement calculation
and slave/master position are simultaneously reset. Only the speed
control operates during this time. Synchronization is only executed after
the angular controller has been actually enabled.
A shift between the relative angular position of the master- and slave
drives can be set using the displacement setpoint. If synchronization was
not realized, the displacement setpoint refers to the angular drive position
at the instant that the differential position actual value was last set, e.g.
that the angular controller was enabled. If synchronization was realized,
the displacement setpoint refers to the synchronized angular position.
The displacement setpoint is defined as the number of slave-encoder
pulse edges (pulses 4), which the slave drive leads with respect to the
master drive. The limits can be set using parameters H054, H055.
Examples:
Encoder pulse number, slave = 1000 (H010)

49
The slave drive should lead the master drive by 0.5 revolutions
displacement setpoint = 0.5 * (1000 * 4) = 2000 pulses
The displacement setpoint is fed to the angular controller via a rampfunction generator. The ramp-up time should be selected to be as high as
possible (recommended: 5 s to 10 s).
NOTE
Direction of
rotation-dependent
synchronous
displacement
The displacement setpoint, in the displacement calculation =

retrigger (H091=1) mode, should be a maximum of half of a revolution
of the parts which are to be synchronized (safety-/control margin, refer
to Section 3.3.1)
It is possible to provide an displacement setpoint depending on the
direction of rotation. Generally, independent of the direction of rotation,
the same edge of the synchronizing signal is always used (i. e. the same
encoder position). Various displacements can be added to the speed
setpoint using parameters H062 to H064 depending on the direction of
rotation of the master and slave.
Param.
Master speed
Slave speed
H062
Positive
Positive
Slave lags
H063
Negative
Positive
Slave lags
H064
Positive
Negative
Slave leads
H065
Negative
Negative
Slave leads
Table 3-13
3.4.3
Displacement for positive

value
Direction of rotation-dependent synchronizing displacement setpoint
Angular controller
The angular controller can be operated as P- or PI controller (H110).
Optionally, the P gain can be adapted as a function of ratio .
Smoothing,
differential position
actual value
The differential position actual value is smoothed using a PT1 element.

The smoothing time is set using parameter H117. The smoothed
differential position actual value is used as actual value for the angular
controller.
Adapting the P gain
The angular controller provides a supplementary speed setpoint for the

speed controller at its output. For high speed ratios , an overproportional high supplementary speed setpoint is demanded and at low
speeds, an appropriately below-proportional low supplementary speed
setpoint. This non-linear interdependency is simulated using a polygon
characteristic (refer to Fig. 3-9),
The polygon characteristic sets the P gain, dependent on the ratio. The
characteristic linearly interpolated between transition points A and B.
The P gain should be adapted if the ratio is changed in operation by
factors of approximately > 1.5 or < 0.75.
50

KP
B
H113 KP_UE
H114 KP_UE_O
-H115
H116
ue_KP_O
-H116
No adaption for:
H115
ue_KP
H115 = H116 = 0
H113 = H114
Fig. 3-9
Adapting the P gain for the angular controller
The adaption values are determined empirically using the usual

techniques:
1. Starting from the standard setting (no adaption), the highest ratio is
selected. This is entered for ue_KP, and the control should be
optimized for this value (KP_UE).
2. The lowest ratio is then selected. This is entered at ue_KP_0, and the
control should be optimized for this value (KP_UE_0).
Example:
Parameter list
Ratio range: 0.2 to 4.0

H116
=
ue_KP_0
H114
=
KP_UE_0
H115
=
ue_KP
H113
=
KP_UE
=
=
=
=
0.2
3
4.0
5
Table 3-14 lists the parameters used in the angular controller. The
structure is illustrated in Chart 110.
Parameter
Significance
H052
H053
Ramp-down time, displacement

setpoint
H054
Setpoint limiting, positive
H055
Setpoint limiting, negative
d056
Display parameter
H062-H065
Direction of rotation-dependent
displacement setpoint
Synchronizing displacement setpoint (refer to

Table 3-13)
H066
Fixed setpoint
Default 0
H110
(0 / 1 = no / yes = = PI / P controller)
H111
Integral action time TN
I controller
H112
Positive and negative output limiting (as a %

of the rated speed)
H113
P gain, KP_UE
P gain for a high ratio > ue_KP

Explanation
51
Parameter
Significance
Explanation
H114
P gain, KP_UE_0
For a low ratio
H115
Limit value, ue_KP
From a P gain = KP_UE
H116
Limit value, ue_KP_0
From a P gain = KP_UE_0
H117
Smoothing, differential pos. act. value
Smoothing time
H118
Threshold for angular controller enable Reduce for a low speed setpoint (default 0.1)
and monitoring the slave speed
d120
Display parameter
d121
Display parameter
d122
Display parameter
d109
Also available at digital terminal 48
Table 3-14
3.5
Parameters for the angular controller
External or internal
The closed-loop speed control is either external using the connected

drive converter or internal on the T400 processor module. The Closedloop speed control external or internal option is used to select one of
these alternatives, which can be controlled using parameter H140 (H140
= 1 internal on the T400).
Parameter H140 = 0 is the default setting, i. e. the closed-loop speed
control is implemented in the drive converter of the slave drive. It receives
a speed setpoint via the communications interface to the basic drive.
The speed controller structure is illustrated in function chart 120.
3.5.1
Ratio
Ratio is defined as the ratio between the speed of the master drive
referred to the speed of the slave drive. The actual ratio comprises three
parts (refer to Chart 80):
Ratio (d060)
Relative change of the ratio (d061)
Supplementary ratio (this is added)
Relative change
A ratio, entered as absolute value is used, for example, to set stretching
factors and compression factors for material webs in a user-friendly
fashion. The absolute ratio is multiplied by a value, which is supplied from
a source which can be selected using H048, H068. If this factor has the
value 1.0, the selected ratio is not changed.
Supplementary
ratio
52
A fixed ratio can be set using parameter H047; the product of d060 with
d061 is added to this value.

3.5.2

The master speed setpoint is the speed setpoint at which the master
drive should rotate. The speed setpoint for the slave drive is calculated
from the speed master setpoint after smoothing (H072; refer to Chart
115) and after dividing by the ratio. This is fed to the speed control which
is superimposed on an angular control.
The master speed setpoint source is selected using a parameter (H070,
H071). The setpoint smoothing (in ms) is set using parameter H072. This
is recommended, if the master speed actual value is used as master
setpoint (setting, H070 = 15).
NOTE
If the angular controller or synchronization is used, then the slave

master setpoint with respect to the master may only be changed using
ratio .
The angular difference, which occurs as a result of the ratio, does not
appear as differential position value, so that the angular controller does
not have to work to correct it.
3.5.3
System deviations from angular synchronism, which can occur when the
master speed setpoint changes quickly, can be reduced using the inertia
compensation function. The inertia compensation acts as pre-control
value for the speed controller.
The sources for the inertia compensation can be selected using
The following drawing clearly illustrates the characteristics of the DT1
element and the influence of the parameters:
X(t)
H083
H082
Y(t)
t
H082
Fig. 3-10
Setting:
Step response of the DT1 element to illustrate the use of parameters H082
and H083
H082 generally lies in the range between 100 ms and 500 ms. The
magnitude of the differential element output quantity is set using
parameter H083.

53
3.5.4
Speed controller Kp adaption

The speed controller is a PI controller. If extremely low speeds (n* < 0.05
nrated) are used, then we recommend a speed setpoint-dependent
adaption of the P gain. This can be implemented using an adjustable
polygon characteristic.
The characteristic is linearly interpolated between the corner points A and
B.
KP
A
H142 KP
H141 KP_O
B
n
-H143
Fig. 3-11
-H144
H144
n_KP_O
H143
n_KP
P gain adaption for the speed controller
The adaption values should be determined using the usual techniques

and using the following experiments:
1. Starting from the standard setting (no adaption), the lowest speed
should be determined, where the already optimized drive, manifests
the required control quality.
2. Then, for n_KP_0, the value n_KP_0 = n_KP/2 is approximately
defined.
3. The speed is entered as under 2. and approached. The closed-loop
control is then optimized with KP_0.
4. The values for KP_0 and n_KP_0 must still, if required, be varied.
3.5.5
Jogging
When jogging is enabled, a jog setpoint is added to the master setpoint.
This means that the slave speed can be changed with respect to the
master speed, and it is possible to take-up or slack-off with respect to the
master. Jogging is not practical in the closed-loop angular control
mode, except for test purposes, as the angular controller acts to oppose
the jog setpoint.
The jog setpoint is set as fixed value using parameter H130. The source
of the jog enable is defined using H171, H208 (refer to Chart 115).
54

3.5.6
Parameters to the speed controller
Param.
Significance
Explanation
H040
H048
H070
Multiplexer, ratio
Multiplexer, master speed setpoint
H072
H080
Multiplexer, inertia compensation
H130
Jog setpoint
Selectable supplementary speed value
H132
Speed setpoint limiting, positive
H133
Speed setpoint limiting, negative
H134
Speed controller output limiting, positive
H135
Speed controller output limiting, negative
H140
Speed controller calculated on T400
0/1 == no/yes
H141
KP: P gain
H142
H143
H144
H145
d150
d152
KP_0: P gain
Limit value for KP
Limit value for KP_0
Actual basic drive setpoint
At high speeds
n > n_KP
At low speeds
Speed n_KP, from the P gain = KP
Speed n_KP_0, up to the P gain = KP_0
Default 200 ms
Effective at H140=1
At H140=1, d152=d150
At H140=0, d152= speed setpoint
d153
H171
KP speed controller
Jog enable
Table 3-15

Parameters to the speed controllers

55
3.6
Open-loop control
In order to control open-loop angular synchronism, in addition to the
setpoint, five control signals have to be handled (the control signals in this
documentation are always written in italics):
displacement reset
reset position
angular controller enable
synchronizing commend
jog enable
The sources of these control signals can be selected per multiplexer
(refer to H170 to H174), or can be connected-up as required using BICO
connection.
Several options are possible to generate control words for the basic drive
or for output via the communications interface:
Fixed values can entered

Control words can be transferred from one interface to another (e. g.
control word 1 from CB to control word 1 CU)
The control word can be selected bit by bit (e. g. by combining a CB
control word with digital inputs)
Also refer to function charts 170 to 570.
3.7
Faults, alarm and status display
3.7.1
General information on faults and alarms

Fault- and alarm statuses contain various monitoring quantities (Table
3-16). The quantities, which are to be transferred to the basic drive as
alarm or fault are selected using the two masks H003 or H004.
If at least one of the bits, enabled per mask, is set to 1, then the
associated digital output is activated (fault, terminal 49; alarm, terminal
51).
In the factory setting, all faults and alarms are de-activated, i. e. H003 =
H004 = 0.
Fault
56
The basic drive is fault tripped if a bit is set in the fault word and it is
appropriately enabled with mask parameter H003 (behaves the same as
OFF2, i. e. the equipment is powered-down and the drive coasts-down).
The fault is saved in the basic drive. As soon as the cause has been
resolved, i.e. the associated bit has become 0, then the fault can be
acknowledged on the basic drive. The fault cannot be acknowledged as
long as a fault exists (=1), and is transferred to the basic drive via the
dual port RAM!

When appropriately enabled with mask parameter H004, alarms are
displayed as appropriate numbers on the operator panels. They do not
influence the drive. They cannot be acknowledged, but can be deleted
automatically when the cause has been removed, as soon as the
appropriate bit has become 0.
Alarms
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Monitoring
Time overflow COMBOARD (correct data have not been received)

Time overflow peer-to-peer (correct data have not been received)
External fault
Master speed not plausible (deviation w. r. t. the master setpoint is too high)
Slave speed not plausible (deviation w. r. t. the setpoint is too high)
Error, speed sensing, master (illegal parameterization, refer to d021)
Error, speed sensing, slave (illegal parameterization, refer to d120)
Table 3-16
Fault
Alarm
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
A097
A098
A099
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
Monitoring functions and associated faults and alarms
Suppressing the
fault/alarm
message
Fault- and alarm messages can be suppressed using selectable masks.

The appropriate monitoring function is evaluated if a bit in the mask is set
to 1.
Example: H003 = 16#0021
H003 = 0000 0000 0010 0001
Bit 0 = 1
Bit 4 = 1
(input with CFC)

(digital input with OP1S)
time monitoring COMBOARD (watchdog) can initiate a fault

external fault can initiate a fault
We recommend that when commissioning the basic drive, the fault- and
alarm messages of the T400 are de-activated using parameters H003
and H004. When the system is operated, these monitoring functions
should be re-enabled.
3.7.2
Monitoring the communication coupling
Principle
The communication monitoring function checks, whether in a definable

period, a valid telegram (and error-free) has been received. If this is not
the case, the associated error bit is set. If valid telegrams are again
received after an error, the error bit is again reset.
Note
In order to make the first commissioning steps easier, so that they are not
hindered by non-relevant fault trips, when the angular synchronous
software package is supplied, the communication errors and alarms are
suppressed per mask (H003, H004).
If communications are used, the associated status bits to initiate a
fault must be re-enabled!
Power-on time limit

57
After power-up, it must be assumed that it will take several seconds until
the communication channels become operational. Thus, the so-called
power-on time limit is decisive for this particular phase (peer H360;
COMBOARD H462).
Time limit for cyclic
operation
As soon as the initialization delay time after power-on has expired, or

already valid telegrams have been received, the cyclic monitoring time for
the telegram error identification becomes effective (watchdog). This is
defined using parameter H361 (peer), H496 (COMBOARD). For this
monitoring time, for CB1 (PROFIBUS), if necessary, the number of nodes
must be taken into account, as the reception of telegrams depends on the
number of nodes (stations) and the send clock cycle.
3.8
Application example
3.8.1
Synchronous operation and synchronizing using as an example a

gantry crane
The following traversing gear of a container crane can be used as a
specific example for the necessity of having synchronization.
Task description
Both sides of the crane traversing gear (fixed legs-master drive and
moving legs-slave drive) should operate with position synchronous control
and in synchronism. This prevents the crane running skew in the rails
along the quay.
Necessity
Synchronization is required in this case, as the pulse encoders are

mounted on the motor and therefore do not directly represent the
movement of the crane (position actual value), but instead, the position of
the wheels (as a result of slip, wheel slip, etc.). If the wheels slip, then
errors can occur in the drive actual value sensing resulting in errors in the
position difference as controlled variable between the two drives.
Task
The task of synchronization is to correct the above mentioned errors. The

position actual values of the two drives are set to defined, actual position
values when fixed synchronizing marks are passed. The difference
between the two drives, after the second drive has passed its mark, is
known as displacement. This displacement is the real position difference
between the two drives, which must be corrected.
As it involves a linear-axis application, synchronization is always realized
when the position value of the master and slave is approx. 0.0. Thus, in
this case, synchronization must always be enabled. This means that the
position-dependent synchronization must be de-activated (H105 = H107 =
0.0).
Bero proximity
switch
58
To realize this, the position actual value is set to zero on both sides when
the synchronizing mark is passed - Bero proximity switch 3. The position
marks are mechanically located and precisely aligned along the crane
track.

If the crane traversing gear arrives at the synchronizing mark in a skew
position, then at first, the position actual value of side 1 is set to zero, and
then the position actual value of side 2. The position actual values of the
master and slave are therefore corrected.
Displacement
The pulses, which are sensed between these two events, represent the
displacement. The displacement is added to the position difference (in
small steps), whereby the angular controller identifies a position
difference which is the same as the displacement. The skew position is
resolved after the position difference has been corrected.
Coarse signal mark

Fine signal mark
Synchronizing marks
Motion direction
Crane traversing
gear in the skew
position
Side 1
master drive
Fig. 3-12
Fine signal
evaluation
Coarse signal
evaluation
(BERO)
Side 2
slave drive
Closed-loop synchronous operation of a crane traversing gear

59
4.1
Parameter handling
Definition
Parameters are used to
visualize internal quantities (monitoring parameters)

to change connections (BICO parameters)
All of the parameters which refer to the function and setting of the
technology module are called technology parameters. The technology
parameters for the closed-loop synchronous control appear in the function
charts with the following symbols:
Rated speed
(1500 RPM)
H123
Display text
Pre-setting
Offset actual value

d094
Parameter number
Parameter which can be changed
Fig. 4-1
Representing parameters in the function charts
When changing parameters, it should be observed that there are

initialization parameters, which only become effective after the T400 has
re-started.
In addition to technology parameters, there are so-called basic drive
together with the associated function charts of the documentation of the
drive converter used.
It should be noted, that the parameters are selected by entering a number
(e.g. at the drive converter operator panel). However, for the display, the
most significant position is replaced by a letter, which is intended to
symbolize as to whether it involves a quantity which can be changed or
not changed.
Example
Value
Number 1956 is entered to select technology parameter H956.

Significance
range

can be changed
cannot be
changed
0 ... 999

converter
P123
r123
1000 ... 1999
Lower parameter range of the T400
H123
d123
2000 ... 2999
Upper parameter range of the drive

converter
U123
n123
3000 ... 3999
Upper parameter range of the T400
L123
c123
Table 4-1 Parameter number specification
60

4.1.1
BICO parameters
Contrary to (value) parameters, BICO parameters define connections.
This means that parameters specify a fixed value at an input, and on the
other hand, BICO parameters select the signal source, which is
connected to the input. This signal source must be defined in the form of
a connector. The BICO parameter appears as a parameter in the symbol
of a BICO input (refer to Fig. 4-2). The source and target of a BICO
connection must have the same data type. This means that digital
quantities (BOOL) cannot, for example, be connected to floating-point
inputs. Thus, for the data type used, there are different symbols in the
function charts for connectors and BICO inputs.
Changes not
possible
Remedy:
Re-wiring work demands memory space if new connections are to be

generated, and if it involves connections between various time sectors. If
the available memory space can no longer accept connection changes,
then this can be identified when the required re-connection is no longer
possible (OP1S display jumps to the old connector value).
Rest the module (power OFF - ON). Memory space which is not used is
enabled when the module restarts.
Connector
name
Connector number
BICO parameter
S.enable
Connecting:
BOOLean values
B0123
H681 (0123)
B (120,3)
Status
bit_XY
PZD_123
S.control
word
L430 (2541)
K (200,8)
CU_DoppelXY
S.double
word
P501 (5021)
KK (60,2)
Data type symbol

16-bit values
32-bit values
Floating-point values
K2541
KK5021
KR3155
Speed
4.1.2
Number of the
connected connector
(factory setting)
Chart, sector of the
source for the factory
setting
S.speed actual
value
L321 (3155)
KR (330,1)
Connectors
Fig. 4-2
BICO input name
BICO inputs
Resources to adapt the software and commissioning

Various resources are available to adapt the standard software package
to particular applications. The resources essentially differ by the
intervention possibilities, which are shown in the following table. The
parameter name, displayed at OP1S, is a maximum of 16 characters
long, and it is possible to toggle between German and English using
made!).

61
Name
Explanation
PMU
OP1S
Operator device with numerical keypad and 4-line text display; can be directly connected to
the PMU.
SIMOVIS
Start-up- and parameterizing software for the PC (Windows). It provides an oscilloscope

function for MASTERDRIVES MC.
CFC
Graphic engineering tool which is used to generate the standard software package. It is
Service-IBS Simple start-up- and diagnostics tool for PC (DOS). It can also be used as Telemaster for
(Serviceremote diagnostics.
start-up)
Table 4-2
Intervention
CFC
PMU
OP1S
SIMOVIS
Service-IBS
View value
Any
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Any
Change value
Any
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Any
Change connection
Any
BICO
BICO
BICO
Any
Insert block
Yes
No
No
No
No
Delete block
Yes
No
No
No
No
Change execution
sequence
Yes
No
No
No
No
Change cycle time for

processing
Yes
No
No
No
No
Duplicate software
Yes
No
No
No
No
Duplicate the complete

parameter set
No
No
No
Yes
(Macro)
Documentation
Charts
No
No
Parameter
lists
No
Table 4-3
For several parameter types, as a result of the limited resolution at input

or due to conversion operations, rounding-off errors can be expected.
Further, in some cases, more decimal places are offered than can
actually be set.
I/O can be read and changed using CFC online or the simple IBS
program (start-up program) (TELEMASTER) via the T400. This allows
parameters to be influenced.
Changing
connections:
If a connection between function blocks is required, which is not intended

as BICO connection, then this can be simply realized using the basic IBS
program (TELEMASTER). In this case, the complete path name (CFC
software package) of the source and target are required in the following
form:
CFC-chart name.Block name.Connector name
62


To realize this, the parameter list, in addition to the parameter description,
contains the complete I/O designation, which can be used as source or
target for a connection.
If a connection is changed using the simple IBS, this is not identified as
a parameter change, and therefore cannot be read-out with SIMOVIS.
This means that it cannot be transferred to any other modules with
angular synchronism!
Caution:
4.2
Parameter list
The parameters used in the standard angular synchronism software
package are listed on the following pages. The list has the following
format:
Parameter
Description
Data
Hxyz (Lxyz)
Parameter
designation
Parameter description for a technology parameter which can be set

Parameter with the supplement initialization parameter, means when this
parameter is changed, the change only becomes effective after the power
supply voltage has been powered-up again.
Value, factory setting

type
Min lower limit
Max upper limit
Chart chart, sector
Parameter description for a visualization parameter (cannot be set).

Letters d or c symbolize the displacement values
1000 (d) or 3000 (c). This should be taken into account when selecting
the parameter with OP1(S).
Type
Initialization
parameter
dxxx (cxyz)
Parameter
designation
Chart chart, sector

Table 4-4
Type
abbrev.
Type
BO
BOOL
INT
WORD
Significance
Logical quantity
Integer number; unsigned; hexadecimal and binary
displayed at OP1(S)
Example, display
on OP1S
Value range,
OP1S
0, 1
-12345
-32768 ...32767
2F03hex
0000 ... FFFF
0010111100000011
(0 ... 65535)
DI
DINT
123456789
2147483647
REAL
Floating-point number. Input using OP1(S) is

restricted to 6 places before the decimal point and 3
places after the decimal point, whereby the range is
limited to 199999.999.
123456.789
2147483.647
SD
SDTIME
Time in [ms]
200.000 ms
0 ... 2147483.647
ms
N2
INT
N4
DINT
Table 4-5
16-bit fixed point quantity for drive converter comp.

Value range: -32768 ... 32767 => -200% ... 200%
As for N2; however 32-bit resolution:
16#40000000 = 1073741824 => 100%
Data types and range for parameterization with OP1S

63
Table 4-6
Parameters of the SPA440 standard software package
Parameter
Description
Data
H000
0 = German
1 = English
Value: 0
Type: I
Language select
Initialization
parameter
d001
Software Type
IF_CU.DRIVE.PLA
Identification of the angular synchronism, standard software package
on T400 = 440
Type: I
Chart: 40, 3
PAR_GER.SW_TYP.Y
d002
Actual software version (2.020)
Software Version
PAR_GER.SWVERS.Y
Type: R
Chart: 40, 3
H003
Fault messages are enabled bitwise
Error Mask
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
COMBOARD, receive faulted

Peer-to-peer, receive faulted
Master speed outside the tolerance (refer to H119)
Slave speed outside the tolerance (refer to H118)
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 160, 4
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
Bits 9 ..15 can be optionally assigned. In the default setting, all of the error
messages are suppressed to facilitate commissioning. If communications are
used, the monitoring function must be re-enabled
CONTR.ErrorMask.I2
H004
Warnings are enabled bitwise
Warning Mask
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
COMBOARD, data receive faulted

A097
A098
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 160, 7
A099
A100
A101
A102
A103
A104
A105
Bits 9 ..15 can be optionally assigned. The default suppresses all warning
messages!
CONTR.WarnMaske.I2
d005
Status of the standard angular synchronous control software package
State of Control
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

Speed controller on T400 enabled
Synchronism reached
Time overflow, basic drive
PROFIBUS, data receive faulted
Slave has synchronized (10 ms pulse)
Master has synchronized (10 ms pulse)
Position actual value slave > enable threshold
Status displacement determined
Warning active
Fault active
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 40, 7
CONTR.Statuswort.QS
d006
Error Bits
Status of the monitored error sources. The assignment corresponds to the

mask in H003
Type: W
Chart: 160, 4
64

Parameter
Description
Data
d007
Status of the monitored warning sources. The assignment corresponds to the

mask in H004
Type: W
Chart: 160, 6
Warning Bits
H008
TechBoard ParTyp
Initialization
parameter
H008 is used to define the data type which is used to transfer type R
parameters (real) via the USS slave interface. Generally, real parameters
must be converted into a 32-bit fixed-point value (e. g. for OP1S).
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 40,1

IF_CU.DRIVE.TF
H009
T400 = Baseboard
Initialization
parameter
Activates basic drive converter functions if the T400 is used in the SRT400
Value: 0
without a basic drive, and if it should behave with respect to an adjacent T400 Type: BO
just like a basic drive. In this case, all of the parameter numbers are shifted
Chart: 40,1
(offset) by 1000. This means, that H123 becomes P123.
Caution: Only set H009 to 1, if parameterization is still possible, as it is
neither possible to operate in the basic drive nor parameterize via the PMU or
OP1(S)!
0
1
T400 operates as technology module (in the basic drive or SRT400)

T400 behaves just like a basic drive (in the SRT400 as basic drive)
IF_CU.DRIVE.BBF
H010
Pulses Slave
Initialization
parameter
H011
Pulses Master
Initialization
parameter
H012
Nom. Speed Slave
slave drive.
Value: 1024
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
SYNCO2.SlavePulse.X
master drive (=speed sensing 2);
Value: 1024
Type: I
Chart: 70, 4
SYNCO2.MasterPulse.X
Nominal (rated) speed of the slave drive in RPM. This is referred to speed
Value: 1500.0
Type: R
Chart: 60, 4
SYNCO2.SlaveNnenn.X
H013
Nom. Speed Master
Nominal (rated) speed of the master drive in RPM. This is referred to speed
It is especially important to enter the right value when using the master
encoder signal as master setpoint for the slave.
Value: 1500.0
Type: R
Chart: 70, 4
SYNCO2.MasterNnenn.X
d014
Speed Slave
Speed actual value of the slave in RPM; (normalization can be selected with
parameter H058)
Type: R
Chart: 60, 7
SYNCO2.n_Slave.Y
d015
Speed Master
Speed actual value of the master in RPM (normalization can be selected with
parameter H059)
Type: R
Chart: 70, 7
SYNCO2.n_Master.Y
d016
Slave Position
Number of quadrupled pulses of the slave drive since the last synchronizing
(decremented).
Type: R
Chart: 60, 7
SYNCO2.Slave.YP
d017
Master Position
Number of quadrupled pulses of the master drive since the last synchronizing
(decremented).
Type: R
Chart: 70, 6
SYNCO2.Master.YP

65
Parameter
Description
H018
Slave speed sensing mode 1
Mode Slave Speed
Initialization
parameter
Data
Value: 16#7FE2
Type: W
The mode of the speed sensing block for the slave drive is selected using this
Chart: 60, 2
parameter; this especially involves the digital filter, the encoder type, the
coarse signal type selection and the direction of rotation dependency of the
synchronizing pulse (zero encoder pulse), as well as the source of the
encoder pulses.
The selected mode is highlighted (in bold letters). Refer to the SIMADYN D
Reference Manual for an additional description as well as the function block
library, function block NAVS, connection MOD.
- - - X: the last hexadecimal position = 2 has the following significance:
Bit 0
0
1
encoder 1: Two pulse tracks, offset through 90

encoder 2: There is a dedicated track for each direction of rotation
Bit 3..1 digital filter with time constant/limiting frequency 500 ns / 2 MHz
000x no filter
001x
010x
011x
100x
500 ns (encoder 1)
2 s (encoder 1)
8 s (encoder 1)
16 s (encoder 1)
Rest
illegal
125 ns (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
- - X -: the last but one position = E has the following significance:

Bit 4
setting mode for input S
0
1
set YP to SV
subtract SV from YP
Bit 5
setting mode for input SD
0
1
set YDP to SVD

subtract SVD from YDP
Bit 6
source of the encoder tracks (can only be selected for terminal XE1)
0
1
T400
from the BASEBOARD
Bit 7
source of the zero pulse (can only be selected for terminal XE1)
0
1
from terminal XE1 of the T400

from the BASEBOARD
XX - -: the two highest positions = 7F has the following significance:

Correcting the standstill limit for 127 sampling cycles
SYNCO2.Slave.MOD
66

Parameter
Description
Data
H019
Operating mode of master speed sensing 2
Mode MasterSpeed
For this particular software package, the only difference between H018 and
H019 is in the last but one position (refer below)
Value: 16#7F02
Type: W
Chart: 70, 4
This parameter is used to set the speed sensing block mode for the master
drive, especially the digital filter, the encoder type, the coarse pulse version
and the source of the encoder pulses.
Initialization
parameter
In the following text, only those operating modes will be described which are
possible when supplied from the factory. Refer to H018 for additional
information.
- - - X: last position = 2 has the following significance:
Digital filter with time constant/limiting frequency 500 ns / 2 MHz
Encoder type : pulse encoder with 2 tracks offset through 90 degrees
- - X -: last but one position = 0 has the following significance:
Zero- and incremental pulses from the terminal, encoder 2 of the T400
Setting mode S=0 :
set YP to SV
Setting mode SD=0: set YDP to SVD (contrary to
parameter H018, however this is not relevant for this particular software
package, as YDP is not accessed by the master speed sensing block.)
XX - -: the two highest position = 7F have the following significance:
Correcting the standstill limit at 127 sampling cycles
SYNCO2.Master.MOD
d020
Error Code Slave
Error code of the slave drive speed sensing. In order to use angular
Type: W
Chart: 60, 7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SYNCO2.Slave.YFC
d021
ErrorCode Master
Error code of the master drive speed sensing. In order to use angular
Type: W
Chart: 70, 6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SYNCO2.Master.YFC

67
Parameter
Description
Data
H022
Sets the synchronizing type of the slave speed sensing. The value has
modified in this application (refer to Fig. 2-3 ).
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 60, 3
CoarsePulseSlave
Bit(s)
Value
0
1
3...2
6...4
0
0
00
XYZ
000
Significance
Synchronization using the zero pulse

For the zero pulse, the pos. is set to the setting value 0.0
Not evaluated
Coarse pulse version number (refer to Doc. T400)
Example: No. 0 ( coarse pulse is not evaluated; as for
mode 1)
011
Example: No. 3 (mode 3; the zero pulse is always
evaluated if the coarse pulse has a high signal level)
15...7 any
Not evaluated
SYNCO2.Slave.SYM
H023
CoarsePulseMaster
Sets the synchronizing type of the master speed sensing. The value has
modified in this application.
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 70, 3
Significance, refer to H022.

SYNCO2.Master.SYM
H024
COMBOARD ParTyp
Initialization
parameter
H024 is used to define the data type parameter type R (real = floating point)
which is transferred via the COMBOARD interface.
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 40, 1
IF_CU.DRIVE.CF1
d025
Digital inputs 1 .. 8 and their inverse values, combined as a word:
State dig. Inputs
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Type: W
Chart: 52, 7
d026
Control word 1; is sent to the basic drive converter.
Control Word1 CU
Bit Significance
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
On (main contactor)
/OFF3 (fast stop)
Pulse enable
Setpoint enable
Acknowledge fault
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Control requested
Fault, external 1
Type
W
Chart: 220, 4
1=ON
0=OFF
0=OFF
1=enable
1=acknowledge
0 = fault
68

Parameter
Description
Data
d027
2nd control word for the basic drive. Only bit 9 (enabling the speed controller
in the basic drive) is used.
Type: W
Chart: 220, 8
Control Word2 CU
d028 ... d031
Display R1 ...
Display R4
Four display parameters, type REAL (floating point) to display connectors

Type: R
without their own display parameter. The source is selected using parameters Chart: 470, 8
L028 ... L031.
Free_FBs.Display_R.Y1 ... Free_FBs.Display_R.Y4
d032 ... d035

Display B1 ...
Display B4
d036, d037
Display I1 ...
Display I2
Four display parameters, type BOOL to display connectors without their own
display parameter. The source is selected using parameters L032 ... L032.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 8
Free_FBs.Display_BO.Q1 ... Free_FBs.Display_BO.Q4

Two display parameters, type integer (16-bit) to display connectors without
their own display parameter. The source is selected using parameters L036
and L037.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 8
Free_FBs.Display_I.Y1, Free_FBs.Display_I.Y2
d038, d039
Display W1 ...
Display W2
Two display parameters, type word (16-bit) to display connectors without their
own display parameter. The source is selected using parameters L038 and
L039.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 8
Free_FBs.Display_W.Y1, Free_FBs.Display_W.Y2
H040
Multiplexer selection of the source for the ratio:
MUX ratio
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
14
I
500, 1
MUXsoll.MUX_Uebersetzung.XCS
H041
Source for the supplementary ratio.
S.Addition.Ratio
SYNCO1.UE4PRO.X2
H043
Fixed value for the ratio.
Constant Ratio
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X1
d044
Actual ratio calculated from the fixed value and the relevant ratio
Ratio
Actual ratio = (d060 * d061) + source (H041)
Value: 3047
Type: I
Chart: 80,2
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 30,3
Type: R
Chart: 80, 4
SYNCO1.UE4PRO.Y
d045
Actual value of the ratio numerator
Ratio Numerator
SYNCO1.PNRAT.NM
d046
Actual value of the ratio denominator
RatioDenominator
SYNCO1.PNRAT.DN
H047
Additional ratio: Summand to enter the ratio as follows:
Addition. Ratio
ratio * rel.ratio + additional ratio

SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X3

Type: DI
Chart: 80, 5
Type: DI
Chart: 80, 5
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 80, 1
69
Parameter
Description
Data
H048
Multiplexer selection of the source for the relative ratio
MUXrelativeRatio
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
1
0
14
I
500, 4
MUXsoll.MUX_RelUebersetz.XCS
H049
Fixed value for a factor to relatively change the ratio
Rel. Ratio Const
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X2
H050
Multiplexer selection of the source for the displacement setpoint
MUXdisplace.Setp
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 30, 3
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
14
I
500, 1
MUXsoll.MUX_Versatz.XCS
H051
Source for the displacement setpoint (angular controller).
S.Displacem.Setp
SYNCO2.Q_Versatz.X
H052
Time, in which the displacement setpoint changes by 2048 quadrupled pulses Value: 2.5 ms
(2048 quadrupled pulses correspond to the maximum or minimum
Min:
0 ms
displacement setpoint, i.e. half a revolution, also refer to H054 and H055).
Type: SD
Chart: 110, 2
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.TU
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.TD
RmpUp Displacem
H053
RampDownDisplace
H054
Max.Displacement
Upper displacement setpoint limit (pulses*4)

synchronized (control margin)!
Value: 3050
Type: I
Chart: 110, 1
Value:
Min:
Type:
Chart:
2048
0
R
110, 3
Value:
Min:
Type:
Chart:
-2048
0
R
110, 3
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.LU
H055
Min.Displacement
Lower displacement setpoint limit (pulses*4)

synchronized (control margin).
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.LL
d056
DisplacementSetp
Displacement setpoint (pulses*4) at the ramp-function generator output

(angular controller)
Type: R
Chart: 110, 4
H057
Source of the control signal to set the displacement ramp-function generator.
S.set Displ.Ramp
SYNCO2.HLG_Versatz.S
70
Value: 0175
Type: I
Chart: 110, 1

Parameter
Description
Data
H058
Source for the normalization factor to display the slave drive speed (d014). In
the factory setting, this is linked to the rated slave drive speed.
Value: 3012
Type: I
Chart: 60, 7
Q.Norm. n_Slave
SYNCO2.n_Slave.X1
H059
Q.Norm. n_Master
Source for the normalization factor to display the master drive speed (d015).
In the factory setting, this is linked to the rated master drive speed.
SYNCO2.n_Master.X1
d060
Actual ratio before being multiplied by the relative ratio.
Ratio 1
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y4
d061
Actual value for the relative ratio.
Ratio relative
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y5
H062 - H065
Direction of rotation-dependent displacement of the synchronization.
DisplaceMas+Sla+
f(n)
This is only necessary, if different displacement values are required as a

function of the directions of rotation of the master and slave.
H062
H063
H064
H065

Value: 3013
Type: I
Chart: 60, 6
Type: R
Chart: 80, 2
Type: R
Chart: 80, 2
n_Master > 0;
n_Master < 0;
n_Master > 0;
n_Master < 0;
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 100, 1
n_Slave > 0
n_Slave > 0
n_Slave < 0
n_Slave < 0
The displacement setpoints correspond to the number of pulses*4

SYNC01.DREFS1.X1 and .X2 SYNC01.DREFS2.X1 and .X2
H066
Fixed displacement setpoint (pulses*4)
Const.Displacem.
SYNCO1.FixVersatz.X
H067
Source for the speed ratio before being multiplied by the relative ratio.
S.Ratio
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X4
H068
Source for the relative ratio before being multiplied by the ratio.
S.relative Ratio
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.X5
H070
Multiplexer selection of the source for the master speed setpoint
MUX Refer.speed
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fixed value 0.0

Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Speed, master
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 30, 3
Value: 3040
Type: I
Chart: 80, 1
Type: I
Chart: 80, 1
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
15
0
15
I
500, 7
MUXsoll.MUX_Leitsollwert.XCS
H071
Source for the master setpoint (speed setpoint for the master and slave)
S.ReferenceSpeed
SYNCO1.Leitsollwert.X
H072
Smoothing time (PT1 element) for the master speed setpoint
Tfilt Ref. Speed
SYNCO1.SREFSM.T
H073
Const. Ref.Speed
SYNCO1.fixLeitsoll.X
d074
Actual value of the smoothed master speed setpoint
Refer.Speed filt
SYNCO1.SREFSM.Y
d076
Actual value of the master speed setpoint (before smoothing)
Reference Speed

Value: 3070
Type: I
Chart: 115, 1
Value: 10 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 115, 2
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 30,3
Type: R
Chart: 115, 3
Type: R
Chart: 115, 2
71
Parameter
Description
Data
H077
Source for the value of the ratio numerator for the displacement calculation.
S.DisplaceNumer.
SYNCO2.Displace.NM
Value: 5088
Type: I
Chart: 100, 4
H078
Source for the value of the ratio denominator for the displacement
calculation.
S.DisplaceDenom
SYNCO2.Displace.DN
H079
S.DT1 Acc. Comp.
Source for the input quantity of the high-pass filter to generate inertia
compensation.
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.X
H080
MUX Accel.Comp.
Selects the source for the inertia compensation (pre-control value for the
speed controller):
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fixed value 0.0

From dn/dt generated value
Peer Float1
Peer Float2
Value: 5089
Type: I
Chart: 100, 4
Value: 3129
Type: I
Chart: 120, 6
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
14
I
500, 5
MUXsoll.MUX_BAusgleich.XCS
H082
Tfilt Acc.Comp.
Smoothing time constant of the derivative action element (DT1 element) to

generate the inertia compensation value; higher time values signify a lower
influence.
Value: 100ms
Type: SD
Chart: 120, 7
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.T1
H083
Tdif Accel.Comp.
Differentiating time constant of the DT1 element to generate the inertia

compensation value; higher values signify a higher influence.
SYNCO1.DT1_BAusgleich.TD
d085
Actual value of the inertia compensation.
DT1 (SpeedSetp.)
H086
This is used to directly enter numerator and denominator of the ratio.
Fine Ratio Numer
H087
Refer to H086
Fine Ratio Denom
H088
The source of the ratio is changed-over using H088
enable FineRatio
0
1
Value: 4 ms
Type: R
Chart: 120, 7
Type: R
Chart: 120, 7
Value: 1000
Type: DI
Chart: 80, 3
Value: 1000
Type: I
Chart: 80, 3
The numerator and denominator are automatically calculated

Fine setting (H086, H087)
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 80, 6
SYNCO1.FEINPZ.I1
H090
Pos.Correct Mode
H090 is used to define whether the position can always be corrected or only if Value: 1
there is an active synchronizing command. The position correction is required Type: BO
for a position reset and for the displacement correction. For H090=0, the
Chart: 60, 4
edge-controlled correction mode only works, if after passing the
synchronizing marks, the synchronizing command = 1.
0 Displacement correction or reset only as long as the synchronizing
command=1
1 Displacement correction is always possible
72

Parameter
Description
Data
H091
Selects whether synchronization (determining the displacement and

displacement correction) should be realized in the retrigger mode or
continuously.
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 100, 6
SynchrRetrigMode
= Continuously
The displacement is sensed over several revolutions and corrected
(parameters H100 and H102 have to be set!)
1 = Retrigger
The displacement is only determined over 1 revolution and corrected.
Only
the actual position since the last synchronizing operation is evaluated.
(this may be recommendable for negative ratios and a
negative displacement setpoint)
SYNCO2.Displace.RTM
H092
Synchr.Edge Mode
Evaluation modes of the synchronizing command (i. e. displacement

correction). The synchronizing command must be 1 while synchronizing.
H092 is used to define whether the displacement correction should be made
continuously or only once.
0 =
1 =
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 100, 6
Continuous (signal level-controlled)

Once (edge controlled)
SYNCO2.Displace.ENM
H093
CorrectionPulses
Number of quadrupled pulses, which are fed to the angular controller to

correct the displacement for displacement correction per sampling time.
This generates a position difference, which the angular controller corrects.
A lower value (e.g. 1) is recommended in order to achieve low-oscillation
synchronization.
This value must be increased (e. g. to 10) if, for very low-frequency
synchronizing pulses (e. g. as a result of a high ratio or small speed), fast
synchronization is required
Value: 1
Type: R
Chart: 100, 7
SYNCO2.Displace.CPN
d094
act.Displacement
Displacement actual value in quadrupled slave pulses since the displacement Type: R
determination was enabled and after both synchronizing pulses have been
Chart: 100, 7
received. (Synchronizing command is not required.) It is the actual angular
difference between the synchronizing pulses.
It is only re-calculated at the instant in time that one (H91=0; setting of H100
and H102) or two (H091=1) synchronizing pulses occur.
It contains the set displacement- (d056) as well as the direction of rotationdependent synchronizing displacement setpoints (H062 - H065).
In the synchronous status, it is 0 or includes the displacement setpoint.
This status is signaled to terminal 46, taking into account a tolerance
bandwidth which can be set using H103.
SYNCO2.Displace.DV
d095
Displ.-Pos.diff
Difference actual displacement minus the position difference actual value in

quadrupled slave pulses. This value is zero (independent of a possibly
existing displacement setpoint) if the system is in the angular synchronous
status!
During synchronizing, this value is not equal to zero, and during
synchronization, is always less.
Update, as is described for d094.
The following is essentially valid:
d095 = d094 - d124
Type: R
Chart: 100, 7
SYNCO2.Displace.DVD
d096
ErrorCode Displ.
Error IDs from the displacement sensing. The error ID is deleted when the
position difference is reset.
Type: W
Chart: 100, 7
Bit Hex
Significance
0 1
1 2
2 4
Number of synchronizing operations 1 * PR1 > 231
3 8
Number of synchronizing operations 1 * PR2 >231
If one of the bits 0-3 is set, then synchronization was probably erroneous.
8 100 = Displacement position difference cannot be represented with 32 bit,
i. e. synchronization must be repeated.
SYNCO2.Displace.FC

73
Parameter
Description
Data
H097
Source for the 2nd digital signal to reset the position and displacement.
S.Reset Pos_1
CONTR.Zus_Lage-RS.I1
Value: 0108
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
H098
Source for the 2nd digital signal to enable displacement correction.
S.Synchr.Command
CONTR.OR_Sync.I1
H100
The synchronizing pulse number is set in the master drive, and corresponds
to one revolution in quadrupled pulses. The default for H100 is set for a pulse
SyncPulsesMaster
Value: 0173
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
Value: 4096
Type: DI
Chart: 100, 5
SYNCO2.Displace.PR2
H101
Source for the signal to end the start synchronizing (refer to H168).
S.StopStartSynch
CONTR.SyncFlipFlop.R
H102
The synchronizing pulse number is set to the slave drive and corresponds to
one revolution in quadrupled pulses. The default for H102 is set for a pulse
SyncPulses Slave
Value: 0105
Type: BI
Chart: 90,6
Value: 4096
Type: DI
Chart: 100, 6
SYNCO2.Displace.PR1
H103
Threshold Synchr
If the actual displacement is less than this response threshold, then the
synchronism reached status bit is set to 1. In the other case, it is reset to 0.
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.L
H104
Source for the control signal to enable the angular controller.
S.Enable Control
SYNCO2.AngleControl.EN
H105
Minimum number of quadrupled pulses, which must be received after an

effective synchronizing pulse, before a new synchronizing pulse may become
effective. This is used, for example, to suppress multiple edges due to switch
bounce.
Caution: The pulse number specified here must be greater than the number
of pulses, which are received while the synchronizing pulse is active (active
time). This threshold value is also effective for the first synchronization (after
power off,
power on / restart).
Thresh.SyncSlave
Value: 20.0
Type: R
Chart: 100, 6
Value: 0109
Type: I
Chart: 110, 6
Value:
Unit:
Type:
Chart:
500
Pulse
R
60, 3
H107
Thresh.SyncMaster
Enable threshold, synchronizing, master. The function is as for H105 for the
master speed sensing.
H108
S.KP Pos.Contrl.
Source for the input quantity of the characteristic to adapt the P gain of the
angular controller.
SYNCO2.AngleKP.X
d109
Actual status of the angular controller enable
enable Pos.Cntrl
1: Angular controller enabled

0: Angular controller inhibited
Value: 500
Type: R
Chart: 70, 2
Value: 3044
Type: I
Chart: 110, 1
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 7
CONTR.WR-Freigabe.Q
H110
The angular controller mode can be changed-over using this parameter:
Hold I-Component
0 = Controller operates as PI controller

1 = Controller operates as P controller (the I component is kept constant)
Caution: Only changeover from 0 to 1 when the controller is inhibited, as
otherwise the I component will not be cancelled!
Value: 1
Type: BO
Chart: 110, 7
SYNCO2.AngleControl.HI
H111
Integral action time of the angular controller (only relevant for H110 = 0)
Tn Pos.Control
The minimum integral action time corresponds to the sampling time, in which
the AngleControl block is configured.
Value: 500 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 110, 7
SYNCO2.AngleControl.TN
H112
Absolute value of the maximum output quantity of the angular controller
Max. Position
SYNCO2.SYNMAX.X
74
Value: 0.3
Type: R
Chart: 110, 5

Parameter
Description
Data
H113
P gain (angular controller) without adaption or

P gain for the largest ratio ue_KP
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
KP_UE Pos.Contrl
SYNCO2.AngleKP.B2
H114
P gain (angular controller) for low ratios ue_KP_0
KP_UE_0 PosCntrl
SYNCO2.AngleKP.B1
H115
Limit of the ratio , which is linearly interpolated up to from ue_KP_0. For >
ue_KP, KP = KP_UE (angular controller).
ue_KP Value
SYNCO2.AngleKP.A2
H116
ue_KP_0 Value
Limit of the ratio , from which is linearly interpolated up to ue_KP_0. For <
ue_KP_0, KP = KP_UE_0 (angular controller)
SYNCO2.AngleKP.A1
H117
Tfilt Pos.Differ
Smoothing time constant (PT1 element) for the differential position actual
value
SYNCO2.LageDifferenz.T
H118
dn enable Max.
Maximum system deviation between the speed setpoint and actual value of
the slave when the angular controller is enabled. The angular controller is
only enabled if the system deviation lies below the threshold (N_soll_slave
H136 - H118). A low value must be set for a low speed setpoint.
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 2
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
Value: 4.0 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 60, 7
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart: 75, 3
SYNCO2.dnFreigabe.X
H119
Maximum deviation of the speed actual value of the master to its setpoint.
dn Master Max.
SYNCO2.dnMaster.X
d120
Angular controller output = supplementary speed setpoint
Outp.Pos.Control
SYNCO2.PT_Angle.Y
d121
Actual angular deviation (referred to the slave pulses). A possibly existing

displacement setpoint is taken into account:
Angular controller, system deviation = displacement setpoint - differential
actual value.
(The differential position actual value includes the displacement setpoint as
steady-state component)
Diff.Pos.Control
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart: 75, 3
Type: R
Chart: 110, 7
Type: R
Chart: 110, 5
d122
Integral component of the angular controller output
Type:
IntegralComp.Pos
d123
KP Pos.Control
Actual P gain of the angular controller. This value must be multiplied by 104,
so that small KP values do not have to be entered using the OP1S.
Type: R
Chart: 110, 3
SYNCO2.AngleKP.Y
d124
Pos.Diff. filt
Smoothed differential angular actual value, smoothed with H117. This is

independent of the displacement determination or the synchronizing pulses;
this means that it provides no information about the position with respect to
one another (synchronism). On the other hand, d094 is the displacement
actual value between two synchronizing pulses.
Unit: Pulse
Type: R
Chart: 60, 8
After successful synchronization, this value is 0 or contains the selected

displacement setpoint!
H125
Upper limit of the speed setpoint at the ramp-function generator
n_max Ramp Gen.
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.LU
H126
Lower limit of the speed setpoint at the ramp-function generator
n_min Ramp Gen.
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.LL
H127
Time, in which the speed setpoint may change from 0 to rated speed.
n Ramp Up Time
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.TU

Value: 1.0
Type R
Chart: 115, 5
Value: -1.0
Type R
Chart: 115, 5
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 115, 6
75
Parameter
Description
Data
H128
Time, in which the speed setpoint may change from the rated speed to 0.
n Ramp Down Time
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.TD
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 115, 6
H129
Speed setpoint after the ramp-function generator.
SpeedSetpRampOut
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.Y
H130
Supplementary speed setpoint, which is added to the master setpoint in the

jog mode.
Jog Setpoint
CONTR.TIPPEN.X
H131
Source for the 1st control signal to enable the angular controller.
S.enablePosCtrll
CONTR.Steuerbits.I1
H132
Upper speed setpoint limit for the speed controller on T400.

Max. n_Setpoint
SYNCO2.NsollLimit.LU
H133
Min. n_Setpoint
Lower speed setpoint limit for the speed controller on T400

SYNCO2.NsollLimit.LL
H134
Max. n-Controller
Upper limit of the speed controller output on T400

SYNCO2. SpeedControl.LU
H135
Min. n-Controller
Lower limit of the speed controller output on T400

SYNCO2.SpeedControl.LL
d136
Actual speed setpoint after smoothing and multiplication with the ratio.
Speed Setpoint
SYNCO1.SREFR.Y
d137
Actual speed setpoint sum after limiting (setpoint for the speed controller on
T400).
Speed Setp. ltd.
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 115, 7
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 115, 1
Value: 0172
Type: I
Chart: 90, 5
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: -1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 6
Value: -1.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 6
Type: R
Chart: 115, 3
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
SYNCO2.NsollLimit.Y
H138
Smoothing time constant for the angular controller output
Tfilt Pos.Cntrl
SYNCO2.PT_Angle.T
H139
Source for the 2nd control signal to enable the angular controller.
S.enablePosCtrl2
CONTR.WR-Freigabe.I1
H140
The speed controller can be either computed on the T400 or in the basic
drive.
ModeSpeedControl
The T400 outputs the speed setpoint, taking into account the limits on
the basic drive. The speed controller blocks on the T400 are no longer
processed.
Speed controller is on the T400. The torque setpoint is transferred to the

basic drive.
Value: 0 ms
Type R
Chart: 110, 7
Value: 0193
Type: I
Chart: 90, 5
Value: 0
Type:
BO
Chart: 120, 5
CONTR.SCONI.I
H141
KP Speed Control
Upper Y value of the 2-point characteristic for the KP adaption of the speed
controller. P gain for large speed setpoints or if H143 = H144.
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.B2
H142
KP_O SpeedContrl
Lower Y value of the 2-point characteristic for the KP adaption of the speed
controller. P gain for low speed setpoints.
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.B1
H143
n_KP Threshold
Limit value of the speed setpoint which is interpolated up to, starting from
n_KP_0. The P gain = KP for n > n_KP
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.A2
H144
n_KP_0 Threshold
Limit value of the speed setpoint which is interpolated from up to n_KP. For n
< n_KP_0, the P gain = n_KP_0
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.A1
76
Value: 10.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: 10.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 120, 2

Parameter
Description
Data
H145
Integral action time of the speed controller
Tn SpeedControl
SYNCO2. SpeedControl. TN
Value: 200ms
Type R
Chart: 120, 5
H146
Smoothing time (PT1 element) for the slave speed actual value, which is
used for the closed-loop speed control
Tfilt Speed
SYNCO2.NslaveFilter.T
d147
Control Word 1
IF_CU.Sammeln.Y1
d148
Control Word 2
IF_CU.Sammeln.Y4
H149
Pulse extension for the synchronizing pulse of the master-speed sensing. (for
diagnostics)
T SyncPulsMaster
CONTR.Puls_SS_Master.T
d150
Outp.SpeedContrl
d151
Setpoint/actual value deviation of the speed controller
DifferSpeedCntrl
d152
Actual setpoint for the basic drive:
SetpSpeed;Torque
H140 = 1 torque setpoint (d150)

H140 = 0 speed setpoint
Value: 4.0ms
Type: R
Chart: 60, 7
Type: W
Chart: 230, 7
Type: W
Chart: 230, 7
Value: 10 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 70, 6
Type: R
Chart: 120, 7
Type: R
Chart: 120, 4
Type: R
Chart: 115, 7
SYNCO2.SetpSwitch.Y
d153
Effective P gain of the speed controller
KP Speed Control
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.Y
H154
Source for the slave position for synchronizing enable of the position sensing
of the slave drive.
S.SlaveSynchrPos
H155
Ratio Resolution
Initialization
connection
Resolution when calculating the numerator- and denominator components

from the ratio. H155 specifies the numerator of the ratio. The value should
not exceed 100000. Examples:
H155
10000
10000
1000
Ratio
1.2351
0.0333
0.0333
Numer.
10000
10000
1000
Type: R
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3186
Type: I
Chart: 60, 3
Value: 10000
Type: R
Chart: 80, 4
Denominator
12351
333
33
SYNCO1.PNRAT.RR
H156
Source for the main setpoint of the angular controller.
S.Ref_Pos_1
H157
Source for the supplementary setpoint of the angular controller.
S.Ref_Pos_2
H158
Source for the actual value of the angular controller.
S.Act_Pos_1
H159
Source for the supplementary actual value of the angular controller.
S.Act_Pos_2
H160
Aout 1 Offset
H161
Aout 1 Scalefact

T400_EA.AnaOut_1.SF
H162
Aout 2 Offset

Value: 3056
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 3124
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 110, 5
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 4
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
77
Parameter
Description
Data
H163
Aout 2 Scalefact
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 51, 4
T400_EA.AnaOut_2.SF
H164
Erase EEPROM
Task to re-establish the factory setting. All of the changes are deleted.
Beforehand, H165 must be set to 165. Deleting is started when H164 = 1. If
data is deleted, it cannot be re-done (retrieved)!
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 40, 1
CONTR. EEPROM_T400. ERA

H165
Key EEPROM
Password to prevent the change memory being accidentally erased

(EEPROM). H165 must be set to 165 before erasing.
CONTR. EEPROM_T400. KEY
d166
State EEPROM
Indicates whether the standard software package is unchanged (factory

settings), or whether parameters were changed (change memory not empty).
d166 = 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 40, 1
Type: BO
Chart: 40, 3
change memory empty factory setting
CONTR. EEPROM_T400. EPE

H167
Source for the 1st digital signal to reset position and offset.
S.Pos.Reset_1
CONTR.Steuerbits.I3
H168
When the start synchronization is enabled (H169 = 1), after the power supply
is switched-on and after the power-on delay has expired (according to H168),
a synchronizing command is output once.
DelayStartSynchr
Value: 0173
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
Value: 1000 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 90, 6
CONTR. Start_Sync. T
H169
Enables start synchronization (refer to H168)
EnableStartSynch
0
1
Not enabled
Enabled
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 90,5
CONTR.EnableAutoSync.I
H170
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to reset the displacement setpoint
MUX Displ.Reset
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Control word from CU bit 0
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 2
MUX_B.MUX_VersatzReset.XCS
78

Parameter
Description
Data
H171
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to enable jog operation.
MUX enable Jog

1
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 3
MUX_B.MUX_TippFreigabe.XCS
H172
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to enable the angular controller.
MUX en.Pos.Cntrl

2
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 5
MUX_B.MUX_WReglerFreig.XCS
H173
Multiplexer selection of the digital source to reset position and displacement.
MUX Reset Posit.

3
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 6
MUX_B.MUX_LageReset.XCS
H174
MUX Synchr.Cmd
Multiplexer selection of the digital source for the synchronizing command.

This enables displacement errors to be corrected.
4
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 520, 8
MUX_B.MUX_SyncSignal.XCS
d175
Actual value for the control signal to reset the position difference.
Displacem. Reset
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q4
d176
Actual value for the control input jog enable
Enable Jog
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q7
d177
Actual value for the control input angular controller enable
EnableSpeedCntrl
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q1
d178
Actual value for the control input reset position (H167)
Reset Position
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q3
d179
Actual value for the control input (H191) synchronizing command
Synchron.Command
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q2
H180
Source for the digital signal to enable slave drive synchronization.
S.EnableSynSlave
SYNCO2.Slave.SP
H181
Source for the digital signal to reset the slave drive position.
S.ResetSlavePos.
SYNCO2.Slave.R
H182
Source for the numerator of the speed ratio.
S.Slave Numerat.
SYNCO2.Slave.NM
H183
Source for the denominator of the speed ratio.
S.Slave Denomin.
SYNCO2.Slave.DN
H184
Source for the digital signal to enable the differential position correction of the
slave drive. As long as the signal at this input is 1, the position difference is
corrected as follows at each processing cycle:
S.Corr.Pos.Diff.
Type: BO
Chart: 60, 2
Type: BO
Chart: 115, 2
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 6
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 2
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 2
Value: 0154
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 0097
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 5088
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 5089
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Value: 0098
Type: I
Chart: 60, 4
Position difference (new) = position difference (old) position differencecorrection value

(prerequisite, H018 is in the factory setting)
H185
S.Reset PosDiff2
Source for the 2nd digital signal to reset the determined position difference
(slave drive).
CONTR.PosDiff_Reset.I1
H186
Source for the slave drive position to generate the absolute value and sign.
S.Abs.Pos.Slave
SYNCO2.Pos_Slave_Abs.X

Value: 0108
Type: I
Chart: 60, 1
Value: 3016
Type: I
Chart: 60, 1
79
Parameter
Description
Data
H187
Source for the 1st digital signal to reset the determined position difference
(slave drive).
Value: 0170
Type: I
Chart: 60, 1
S.ResetPos.Diff1
CONTR.Steuerbits.I4
H188
Source for the signal to enable synchronization of the master speed sensing.
S.EnableSynMaster
SYNCO2.Master.SP
H189
Source for the signal to set the master position actual value to zero.
S.ResetMasterPos
SYNCO2.Master.R
H190
Source for the position actual value to enable synchronization of the master
speed sensing.
S.MasterSynchPos
H191
S.Synchr.Comd2
Source for the control signal synchronizing command to enable the

displacement correction.
CONTR.Steuerbits.I2
H192
S.n_Slave Compar
Source for the input signal of the comparator to monitor the slave speed. If
the slave speed reaches the setpoint speed, then the angular controller can
be enabled.
Value: 0190
Type: I
Chart: 70, 4
Value: 0097
Type: I
Chart: 70, 4
Value: 3017
Type: I
Chart: 70, 1
Value: 0174
Type: I
Chart: 90, 1
Value: 3018
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.X
H193
S.n_ref SlaveCmp
Source for the setpoint of the slave speed. (comparator to enable the angular
controller)
Value: 3136
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.M
H195
Source for the input signal of the comparator to monitor the master speed.
S.n_MasterCompar
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.X
H196
Source for the master speed setpoint. (comparator to check the plausibility of
the master speed)
S.n_ref MastComp
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.M
H197
Source for the numerator of the fine ratio.
S.FineRatioNumer
SYNCO1.FEIN_NM.X2
H198
Source for the denominator of the fine ratio.
S.FineRatioDenom
SYNCO1.FEIN_DN.X2
H199
Source for the position of the master drive to generate the absolute value and
sign.
S.Abs.Pos.Master
SYNCO2.Pos_Master_Abs.X
H200
Source for the main setpoint of the speed controller (without limiting).
S.1 n(ref-act)
H201
Source for the supplementary setpoint of the speed controller (without

limiting).
S.2 n(ref-act)
H202
Source for the 1st actual value of the speed controller.
S.3 n(ref-act)
H203
Source for the 2nd actual value of the speed controller.
S.4 n(ref-act)
H204
Source for the input quantity of the KP adaption characteristic of the speed
controller.
S.KP (speedCtrl)
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.X
H205
Source for the main setpoint of the speed controller (before limiting).
S.n(ref,speed)
SYNCO2.SumNsoll.X1
80
Value: 3019
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
Value: 3076
Type: I
Chart: 75, 2
Value: 5086
Type: I
Chart: 80, 5
Value: 5087
Type: I
Chart: 80, 5
Value: 3017
Type: I
Chart: 70, 6
Value: 3137
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3146
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 120, 3
Value: 3129
Type: I
Chart: 120, 1
Value: 3129
Type: I
Chart: 120, 1

Parameter
Description
Data
H206
Source for the supplementary setpoint of the speed controller (before

limiting).
Value: 3120
Type: I
Chart: 120, 1
S.n(addit.)
SYNCO2.SumNsoll.X2
H207
Source for the jog setpoint.
S.Jog Ref.Speed
SYNCO1.Tippen-Schalter.X2
H208
Source for the signal to enable the jog setpoint. When enabled, the jog
setpoint is added to the speed setpoint.
S.enable Jog
CONTR.Steuerbits.I7
H209
Value: 3120
Type: I
Chart: 115, 1
Value: 3120
Type: I
Chart: 115, 1
Pulse extension for the synchronizing pulse of the slave speed sensing. (for
diagnostics).
CONTR.Puls_SS_Slave.T
Value: 10 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 60, 7
H210
AI 1 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_1.SF
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
H211
Offset for analog input 1 (setting, refer to d212).
AI 1 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_1.OFF
d212
Actual measured value at the analog input 1 (AI1). This analog input is
sensed in the fastest time sector (T1). The measured value is obtained as
follows:
T SyncPulseSlave
AI 1 act. value
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_1.Y
H213
AI 2 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_2.SF
H214
AI 2 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_2.OFF
d215
AI 2 act. value
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_2.Y
H216
AI 3 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_3.SF
H217
AI 3 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_3.OFF
d218
AI 3 act. value
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_3.Y
H219
AI 4 Scalefactor
T400_EA.AnaIn_4.SF
H220
AI 4 Offset
T400_EA.AnaIn_4.OFF
d221
AI 4 act. value
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 3
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 50, 4
Type: R
Chart: 50, 5

T400_EA.AnaIn_4.Y

81
Parameter
Description
Data
H222
Smoothing time constant for the 1st analog input. A value of 0 de-activates
the filter.
Value: 500
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
AI 1 Filter Time
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.T
d223
Analog value 1 after smoothing with smoothing time constant H222.
AI 1 filtered
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.Y
H224
Smoothing time constant for the 2nd analog input. A value of 0 de-actives the
filter.
AI 2 Filter Time
T400_EA.AE2_FILT.T
d225
AI 2 filtered
T400_EA.AE2_FILT.Y
H226
Smoothing time constant for the 3rd analog input. A value of 0 de-activates
the filter.
AI Filter Time
T400_EA.AE3_FILT.T
d227
AI 3 filtered
T400_EA.AE3_FILT.Y
H228
Smoothing time constant for the 4th analog input. A value of 0 de-activates
the filter.
AI 4 Filter Time
T400_EA.AE4_FILT.T
d229
AI 4 filtered
T400_EA.AE4_FILT.Y
H230 ... H233
4 sources for digital signals to set the 4 analog inputs to zero.
S.set AE1 zero ...

S.set AE4 zero
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.S ... T400_EA.AE4_FILT.S
H234
Source for the position difference for the displacement calculation.
S.Position Diff1
SYNCO2.Displ_Ist.X1
H235
Source for a correction value of the position difference for the displacement
calculation.
S.Position Diff2
SYNCO2.Displ_Ist.X2
H236
Source for the signal to reset the displacement calculation.
S.ResetDisplacem
SYNCO2.Displace.R
H237
Source for the displacement setpoint (this checks whether synchronism has
been reached).
S.Setp Displace1
H238
S.Setp Displace2
Source for the value to correct the displacement setpoint (this checks
whether synchronism has been reached).
H239
S.Ratio n_ref
Source for the ratio to calculate the slave setpoint speed from the master
setpoint.
SYNCO1.SREFR.X2
H240
1st source for the setpoint speed of the slave for the ramp-function generator.
S.Slave n_ref_1
SYNCO1.SSUM.X2
H241
2nd source for the setpoint speed of the slave for the ramp-function generator.
(this is used for the jog setpoint)
S.Slave n_ref_2
SYNCO1.SSUM.X1
H242
Source for the setting value of the integral component of the speed controller.
S.SV Int(speed)
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.SV
82
Type:
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
Type:
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
Type: R
Chart: 50, 6
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Unit: ms
Chart: 50, 5
Type: R
Chart: 50, 6
Type: I
Value: 0000
Chart: 50, 4
Value: 3118
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3062
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 0097
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3051
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3062
Type: I
Chart: 80, 4
Value: 3044
Type: I
Chart: 115, 2
Value: 3136
Type: I
Chart: 115, 4
Value: 3176
Type: I
Chart: 115, 4
Value: 3137
Type: I
Chart: 120, 4

Parameter
Description
Data
H243
Source for the signal to set the integral component of the speed controller.
S.Set Int(speed)
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.S
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 120, 4
H244
Source for the pre-control value of the speed controller.
S.Precontrol
SYNCO2.EnVorstSpeed.X2
H245
Source for the signal to enable the pre-control of the speed controller.
S.enable PreCtrl
SYNCO2.EnVorstSpeed.I
d246
Status word 1 from the basic drive (in the factory setting; i. e. at H558 =
2571).
Status Word1 CU
Value: 3080
Type: I
Chart: 120, 5
Value: 0140
Type: I
Chart: 120, 5
Type: W
Chart: 180, 1
IF_CU.Q_ZWort1.Y
d300
Word 1 for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
Peer W1 send
IF_Peer.Peer_Zustand_W1.Y
H303
Multiplexer selection of the source for the value, output as PZD 1, at the peer- Value: 2
to-peer interface
Min:
0
Max: 10
0 Fixed value 0
Type: I
1 Fixed value H306
Chart: 570, 2
2 Status word 1 from peer-to-peer (refer to H310 ... H325)
3 Status word, angular synchronism
8 Control word 1 peer-to-peer (PZD 1 receive)
MUX word 1 Peer
Type: W
Chart: 300, 6
H304
MUX float1 Peer
Multiplexer selection of the source for output as 1st floating-point value at the
peer-to-peer interface
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Fixed value 0.0

Actual setpoint for the basic drive (speed or torque)
Ratio
Relative ratio
Speed setpoint (limited)
Slave speed (smoothed)
KP speed controller
Displacement differential position actual value
Position difference (smoothed)
Speed actual value slave
Position actual value slave
Speed actual value master
Position actual value master
Fixed value H307
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
32
I
570, 6

83
Parameter
Description
Data
H305
Multiplexer selection of the source for output as 2nd floating-point value at the
peer-to-peer interface.
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
MUX float2 Peer
0 .. 31 as for H304
32 Fixed value H308
0
0
32
I
570, 7
H306
W1 Peer constant
H307
W2 Peer constant
H308
W3 Peer constant
H309
Peer enable
Initialization
parameter
Fixed value to output via peer-to-peer.

MUX_Peer.Festwert_Peer.X
Value 0
Type: W
Chart: 570, 1

value)
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 570, 3

value)
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 570, 6
Enables communications via the peer-to-peer interface and also its

monitoring.
Value: 1
Type:
BO
Chart: 300, 1
0
1
Inhibited
Enabled
IF_Peer. Enable_Peer.I
H310 ... H325
Select sources for the bits of status word 1 of the peer-to-peer interface.
S.PeerState1_B0 ...
S.PeerState1_B15
H310
H311
H312
H313
H314
H315
H316
H317
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H318
H319
H320
H321
H322
H323
H324
H325
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Type
I
Chart: 310, 5
6
IF_Peer.Zustandswort1.I1 ... I15

d327
Status Word Peer
Status word to output at the peer-to-peer interface. The status word is

combined by selecting sources H310 ... H325.
Type: W
Chart: 310, 7
d329 ... d333
PZD1 Peer ...

PZD5 Peer
H334
Source for the control word for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.ContrlWordPeer
IF_Peer.STW_NOP.X
H335
Source for the 2nd PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.Peer PZD2
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XWL
H336
Source for the 3rd PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
S.Peer PZD3
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XWH
H337
Source for the 1st double word for output at the peer-to-peer interface (PZD2
+ PZD3).
S.Peer DW1
Type: W
Chart: 300, 2
Type: I
Chart: 310, 1
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XDI
H338
S.Peer Float1
Source for the 1st floating-point value for output at the peer-to-peer interface
(PZD2 + PZD3).
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.XR
H339
Peer Sendtype1

2: Float1 (H338)
Value: 3304
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 300, 6
IF_Peer.PZD2_3_out.SEL
H340
S.Peer PZD4
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XWL
84
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5

Parameter
Description
Data
H341
S.Peer PZD5
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XWH
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
H342
Source for the 2nd double word for output at the peer-to-peer interface (PZD4
+ PZD5).
S.Peer DW2
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XDI
H343
S.Peer Float2
Source for the 2nd floating-point value for output at the peer-to-peer interface
(PZD4 + PZD5).
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.XR
H344
Peer Sendtype2

2: Float2 (H343)
Value: 3305
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 300, 6
IF_Peer.PZD45_out.SEL
H345
S.Peer PZD1
Source for the 1st PZD for output at the peer-to-peer interface.
IF_Peer.Peer_Zustand_W1.X
d346
Receive data from the peer-to-peer interface, word 1.
Peer ControlWord
IF_Peer.STW_NOP.Y
H360
Time in which a valid telegram must be received after the device has been
tmaxPeer PowerOn
Value: 2303
Type: I
Chart: 300, 5
Type: W
Chart: 310, 1
Value: 20 s
Type: SD
Chart: 300, 6
IF_Peer.StartTimeout.T
H361
tmax Peer OpMode
Value: 100 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 300, 1
IF_Peer. Empf_PEER.TMX
H362
Mask Peer tmax
Value 16#FFFF
Type: W
to H360).
IF_Peer.Filter.I2
H363
Baud rate for peer-to-peer communications.
Baud Rate Peer

IF_Peer.PEER_Zentral.BDR
d364
Peer RecStateYTS
Status output of the receive block CRV as information for the fault signal
F117
Value: 19200
Type: DI
Chart: 300, 1
Type: W
Chart: 300, 4
IF_Peer.Empf_PEER.YTS
H381 ... H388
S.PZD1 CU ...
S.PZD8 CU
Selects 8 sources for output as PZD to the basic drive converter. The source
must either be a word- or integer type. Factory setting:
H381 = 2026
H382 = 2500
H383 = 2502
H384 = 2027
H385 = 2504
H386 = 2506
H387 = 2510
H388 = 2508
Type: I
Chart: 410, 5

Setpoint1 CU N2
Setpoint2 CU N2
Setpoint3 CU N2
Setpoint4 CU N2
Setpoint CU DW high
Setpoint5 CU N2
IF_CU.Sammeln.X1 ... X8
H401
CB actval1 norm.
Normalization factor for the 1st actual value for output in the N2 format at the
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 440, 2

85
Parameter
Description
Data
H403
Normalization factor for the 2nd actual value for output in the N2 format at the
Value
1.0
Type:
CB actval2 norm.
Output value = 100% * source(H823)/ H403

H405
CB actval3 norm.
Normalization factor for the 3rd actual value for output in the N2 format at the
Value
1.0
Type:
Value
1.0
Type:

H407
CB actval4 norm.
Normalization factor for the 4th actual value for output in the N2 format at the
H409
Enables communications via PROFIBUS and its monitoring.
ComBoard enable
0
1
Initialization
parameter
H410 ... H425
S.CB state1 B0 ...
S.CB state1 B15
Inhibited
Enabled
Value: 1
Type:
BO
Chart: 400, 1
IF_COM.Enable_ComBoard.I
H410
H411
H412
H413
H414
H415
H416
H417
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H418
H419
H420
H421
H422
H423
H424
H425
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Value 0
Type
BO
Chart: 430, 1 - 2

H426 ... H441
S.CB state2 B0 ...
S.CB state2 B15
H426
H427
H428
H429
H430
H431
H432
H433
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H434
H435
H436
H437
H438
H439
H440
H441
Value 0
Type
BO
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15

H442
MUX word1 CB
interface as PZD 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fixed value 0
Fixed value H443
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
10
I
560, 3
H443
Fixed value for output at the communications interface as PZD1.
word1 CB constan
86
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 560, 2

Parameter
Description
Data
H444
interface as PZD 4
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
MUX word4 CB
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fixed value 0
Fixed value H445
0
0
10
I
5600, 7
H445
Fixed value for output at the communications interface, as PZD 4.
word4 CB constan
H446

as PZD 2.
MUX word2 CB
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H470
Value: 0
Type: W
Chart: 560, 6
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
32
I
550, 3
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
32
I
550, 4
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
32
I
550, 6
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
32
I
550, 7
H447
MUX word3 CB

as PZD 3.
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H471
H448
MUX word5 CB

as PZD 5.
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H472
H449
MUX word6 CB
Multiplexer selection of the source for the value output as PZD 6 at

COMBOARD.
0 .. 31 Refer to H304
32
Fixed value H473
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W6 XCS
d450
1st setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_1 rec.
H451
Normalization factor for the 1st setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_1 norm.
d450 = H451 * source(H813) / 100%

d452
2nd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_2 rec.
H453
Normalization factor for the 2nd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Set_2 norm.
d452 = H453 * source(H814) / 100%

d454
3rd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_3 rec.
H455
Normalization factor for the 3rd setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_3 norm.
d454 = H455 * source(H815) / 100%

d456
4th setpoint from the communications module.
CB Setp_4 rec.

Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
87
Parameter
Description
Data
H457
Normalization factor for the 4th setpoint from the communications module.
CB setp_4 norm.
d456 = H457 * source(H816) / 100%
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
d458
Word 1 CB Send
IF_COM.Sammeln2.Y3
d459
Word 4 CB Send
IF_COM.Sammeln2.Y4
d460

ControlWord 1 CB
Type:
Type:
Type: W
Chart: 420, 1
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y3
d461
ControlWord 2 CB

Type: W
Chart: 420, 5
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y4
H462
tmax CB PowerOn
Time, in which a valid telegram must be received after the device has been
Value: 20000 ms
Type:
SD
Chart: 400, 5
IF_COM.StartTimeout.T
H463
tmax CB OpMode
Value: 100 ms
Type: SD
Chart: 400, 1
IF_COM. Empf-COM.TMX
H464
Mask tmax CB
Value 16#FFFF
Type: W
to H462).
IF_COM.Filter.I2
d465
CB receive state
Status display of receive block CRV as information for the fault message
F116
Type: W
Chart: 400, 3
IF_COM.Empf-COM.YTS
d466
1st status word for the communications module (as PZD1).
Status Word1 CB
d467
2nd status word for the communications module (as PZD4).
Status Word2 CB
H470
W2 CB constant
H471
W3 CB constant
H472
W5 CB constant
H473
W6 CB constant
H480
Slave address of the COMBOARD.
CB Slave address
This parameter is only relevant for operation without basic drive. For
operation with basic drive, the COMBOARD is parameterized from the basic
drive.
Type: W
Chart: 430, 4
Type: W
Chart: 430, 7
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 1
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 3
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 5
Value 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 550, 7
Value 3
Type: I
Chart: 400, 6
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig.MAA
88

Parameter
Description
Data
H481 ... H493
Parameterizing the COMBOARD. The settings are made depending on the

COMBOARD type used (refer to the User Documentation of the
COMBOARD; H482 = 2 sets PPO type 2 for Profibus)
Value 0
except
H482 = 2
Type: I
Chart: 400, 6 - 8
CB Parameter 1 ....
CB Parameter 13
These parameters are only relevant when using the system without basic
drive. When used with the basic drive, the COMBOARD is parameterized
from the basic drive.
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig. P01 ... P13
H495
CB Param.valid
The COMBOARD settings are set valid. In operation, H495 must be set to 1.
After a parameter change (H480 .. H493), H495 is first set to 0 and then to 1,
in order to update the parameters on COMBOARD.
Value 1
Type: BO
Chart: 400, 6
This parameter is only relevant for operation without a basic drive. When a
basic drive is used, the COMBOARD is parameterized from the basic drive.
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig.SET
d496
CB state SRT400
Status of the COMBOARD. This is only relevant for operation without basic
Type: W
drive. When used with the basic drive, 16#7CB3 is displayed (i.e. Basic drive Chart: 400, 8
available).
IF_COM.ComBoardConfig.YTS
H498
S.Setp DW_CU
Source for the setpoint for output as double word (N4 normalization) at the
basic drive (normalization H499).
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
IF_CU.SollwertN4CU.X
H499
CU DW norm.
Normalization factor for the setpoint for output as double word at the basic
drive. In the factory setting, the high word is output as PZD7:
Double word = 100 % * source(H498) / H499
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
IF_CU.SollwertN4CU.NF
H500
Source for the 1st setpoint for output at the basic drive (normalization H501).
S.CU setp_1
IF_CU.Sollwert_W2.X
H501
Normalization factor for the 1st setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
CU setp_1 norm.
PZD2 = 100 % * source(H500) / H501
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H502
Source for the 2nd setpoint for output to the basic drive (normalization H503).
S.CU setp_2
IF_CU.Sollwert_W3.X
H503
Normalization factor for the 2nd setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
CU setp_2 norm.
PZD3 = 100 % * source(H502) / H503
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H504
Source for the 3rd setpoint for output at the basic drive (normalization H505).
S.CU setp_3
IF_CU.Sollwert_W5.X
H505
Normalization factor for the 3rd setpoint for output at the basic drive. In the
CU setp_3 norm.
PZD5 = 100 % * source(H504) / H505
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H506
S.CU setp_4
IF_CU.Sollwert_W6.X
H507
CU setp_4 norm.
PZD6 = 100 % * source(H506) / H507
Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
H508
S.CU setp_5
IF_CU.Sollwert_W8.X

Type: I
Chart: 230, 1
89
Parameter
Description
Data
H509
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 230, 2
CU setp_5 norm.
PZD8 = 100 % * source(H508) / H509

H510 ... H525
Sources for the bits of control word 1 for outputs at the basic drive.
S.Bit0 CTW1 CU ...

S.Bit15 CTW1 CU
Par.
Bit
Factory Significance
H510
H511
H512
H513
H514
H515
H516
H517
H518
H519
H520
H521
H522
H523
H524
H525
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
0650
0651
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
On (main contactor)
1=ON
/OFF2 (powered-down) 0=OFF
/OFF3 (fast stop)
0=OFF
Pulse enable
Setpoint enable
1=enable
Acknowledge fault
1=acknowledge
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Control requested
Fault, external 1
0 = fault
Type
I
Chart: 220, 1...
2
IF_CU.Steuerwort1.I1 ... I15

IF_CU.Q_ext_Error.I
H526 ... H541
S.Bit0 CTW2 ...
S.Bit15 CTW2
Sources for the bits of control word 2 for output at the basic drive. Only
bit 9 (speed controller enable) is used.
H526
H527
H528
H529
H530
H531
H532
H533
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
H534
H535
H536
H537
H538
H539
H540
H541
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Type
I
Chart: 220, 5
0546
IF_CU.Steuerwort2. I1 ... I16

H542
Mask CU ready
Using this mask, a bit of status word 1 from the basic drive can be selected,
which then signals the operational readiness of the basic drive. Status word 1
of the basic drive is AND'ed bitwise with H542. If at least the 1st bit of the
result word is set, the following is valid: Basic drive ready. This is the
prerequisite for the speed controller enable.
Value 16#0004
Type: W
Chart: 90, 5
H543
TestEnable CU n
For test purposes, the speed controller can be enabled in the basic drive,
bypassing the enable logic.
IF_CU.n-Reg_Freigabe.I2
H544
MUX Speed enable
Multiplexer selection of the source to enable the speed controller in the basic
drive. In order that the speed controller is enabled, the basic drive must be
ready (refer to H542)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Bit 9 from control word 1 from peer-to-peer
Bit 15 from the control word from the basic drive
Value 0
Type: BO
Chart: 90, 7
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
5
BO
560, 3
MUX_CU.Mux_Enable_nRegl.XCS
90

Parameter
Description
d545 ... d548
Computer utilization level of the standard software package, assigned

Type: R
according to time sectors. T1 is the fastest (highest priority), T5 is the slowest Chart: 40, 7
time sector.
CPU load T1 to T4
d549
Total CPU load
It is important that the total CPU load are not utilized more than 100% , as
otherwise they will not be processed in the configured time intervals.
d545
d546
d547
d548
d549
Utilization of T1
Utilization of T2
Utilization of T3
Utilization of T4
Total CPU load
IF_CU.LoadMeasure.YC1 ... YC4,

H550
CU actval1 norm.
Data
IF_CU.LoadMeasure.Y
Normalization factor for the 1st actual value channel (factory setting: PZD2) of
d551 = H550 * PZD2 / 100%
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.NF
d551
CU actval1
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.Y
H552
Normalization factor for the 2nd actual value channel (factory setting: PZD3)
of the receive data from the basic drive
CU actval2 norm.
d553 = H552 * PZD3 / 100%
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.NF
d553
CU actval2
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.Y
H554
Normalization factor for the 3rd actual value channel (factory setting: PZD5) of
CU actval3 norm.
d555 = H554 * PZD5 / 100%
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.NF
d555
CU actval3
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.Y
d556
Optional control word; e.g. to control angular synchronism via SIMOLINK

basic drive T400.
CTW from CU
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Type: W
Chart: 180, 6
IF_CU.STW_SPA.Y
H557
S.CTW from CU
Source for an optional control word. Factory setting, PZD6 from the basic
drive. The selected source is split-up into status bits and inverse status bits
(connectors 0550 and onwards).
Value: 2576
Type: I
Chart: 180, 1
IF_CU.STW_SPA.X
H558
S.StatusWord1 CU
Source for status word1 from the basic drive. The selected source is split-up
into status bits and inverse status bits (connectors 0510 and onwards).
IF_CU.Q_ZWort1.X
H559
S.StatusWord2 CU
Source for the status word1 from the basic drive. The selected source is splitup into status bits (connectors 0480 and onwards).
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.IS
Value: 2571
Type: I
Chart: 180, 1
Value: 2571
Type: I
Chart: 180, 1
d560
CU Status Word 1
IF_CU.Verteilung.X1
d561
CU Status Word 2
IF_CU.Verteilung.X4
d562
CU Rec.State
IF_CU.Empf_BASE.YTS
H563
Source of the 1st actual value from the basic drive, which should be converted Value: 2572
from the N2 format into the floating-point format (normalization factor H550).
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.X
S.actval_1 CU

Type:
Type:
Type: W
Chart: 150, 4
91
Parameter
Description
Data
H564
Source of the 2nd actual value from the basic drive, which should be
factor H552).
Value: 2573
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
S.actval_2 CU
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.X
H565
S.actval_3 CU
Source of the 3rd actual value from the basic drive, which should be
factor H554).
Value: 2575
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.X
H567
S.DW high CU
Source of the double word (high word) from the basic drive, which should be
factor H558).
Value: 2582
Type: I
Chart: 170, 3
IF_CU.W_DW.XWH
H568
S.DW low CU
Source of the double word (low word) from the basic drive, which should be
factor H558).
Value: 2581
Type: I
Chart: 170, 3
IF_CU.W_DW.XWL
H569
S.DW CU
Source of the double word from the basic drive, which is to be directly
converted into the floating-point format.
IF_CU.CU_DI_R.X
d570
CU DW_R
Result of the double word floating-point conversion (received from the

basic drive)
Value: 5567
Type: I
Chart: 170, 5
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.CU_DI_R.Y
d571 .. d584
PZD1 CU rec....
PZD14 CU rec.
H587
S.N4 CU
Actual value of the first 14 process data from the basic drive. In the factory
setting, only PZD1 (status word 1) is evaluated.
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y1 ... Y8
IF_CU.Verteil2CU.Y1 ... Y6
Source of the double word from the basic drive, which is to be converted from
the N4 format into the floating-point format.
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.X
H588
CU N4 norm.
Normalization factor for the conversion from N4 into the floating-point format.
For H588 = 1.0, N4 = 100% (16#40000000) is emulated as 1.0.
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.NF
d589
CU N4_R
Type: W
Chart: 170, 2
Result of the double word (N4 normalization) -> floating-point conversion

(received from the basic drive)
Value: 5567
Type: I
Chart: 170, 5
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.Y
H590
Q.CU_I_R
Source of the actual value from the basic drive which is to be directly
converted into the floating-point format (i.e. PZD= 1234 => d591 = 1234.0 ).
IF_CU.CU_I_R.X
d591
Actual value from the basic drive after conversion into a floating-point value.
CU I_R
IF_CU.CU_I_R.Y
H592
Source for the status word from the basic drive. From this, mask H542
selects a status bit, which is used to enable the speed controller.
S.en.Speed CU1
H593
Source for an additional condition to enable the speed controller.
S.en.Speed CU2
IF_CU.Enable_n_Regler.I2
d601 ... d604
Input value of the bi-directional I/O of the T400. (For the case, where the
terminals are used as inputs; i.e. driver H637 ... H640 inactive)
Pin46 input ...

Pin49 input
Parameter
T400 terminal
1 signifies:
d601
d602
d603
d604
Terminal 46
Terminal 47
Terminal 48
Terminal 49
Synchronism reached
Fault present
Value: 2577
Type: I
Chart: 170, 4
Type: R
Chart: 170, 7
Value: 2571
Type: I
Chart: 90, 5
Value: 0547
Type: I
Chart: 90, 6
Type: BO
Chart: 53, 3 .. 7
T400_EA.BinOut.Q1 ... Q4
92

Parameter
Description
Data
d607
Actual value of the 1st coarse pulse input (terminal 84) on the T400.
Pin84 Coarse P1
T400_EA.BinOut.Q7
Type: BO
Chart: 52, 7
d608
Actual value of the 2nd coarse pulse input (terminal 65) on the T400.
Pin65 Coarse P2
T400_EA.BinOut.Q8
H609
This parameter is available, for compatibility reasons, to earlier software

releases. From version V2.02 onwards, the digital inputs are available
inverted and not inverted, and can be selected using BICO connections.
BinInp Inverters
The digital inputs can be individually inverted using H609. In this case, every
bit from H609 is EXORd with the appropriate input bit.
Type: BO
Chart: 52, 7
Value 16#0000
Type: W
Not included in
the charts!
1-bits result in an inversion.

For example: H609 = 16#0005 = 0000 0101b inputs 1 and 3 are inverted
T400_EA.Invert_BinInp.I2
d610 ... d617
Digital inputs of the T400.
BinInput1 Pin53
d610
d611
d612
d613
d614
d615
d616
d617
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
(terminal 53)
(terminal 54)
(terminal 55)
(terminal 56)
(terminal 57)
(terminal 58)
(terminal 59)
(terminal 60)
Type
BO
Chart: 52, 3
T400_EA.BinInput.Q1 ... Q8
H618
Selects the source for the 1st analog output of the T400 (terminal 97).
MUX AnalogOutp 1
0 .. 31 as for H304
MUX_AnaOut.MUX_DAC_1.XCS
H619
Selects the source for the 2nd analog output of the T400 (terminal 98).
MUX AnalogOutp 2
0 .. 31 as for H304
MUX_AnaOut.MUX_DAC_2. XCS
H620
S.Analog Outp1
H621
S.set DAC1 zero
Source for the signal for output at the 1st analog output of the T400.
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
1
0
31
I
510, 4
Value:
Min:
Max:
Type:
Chart:
0
0
31
I
510, 6
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.X
Value: 3618
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
Source of the signal to set the output value to zero for the 1st analog output of
the T400. If H160 = 0.0 (DA1 offset), this allows the analog output to be
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.S
H622
S.Analog Outp2
H623
S.set DAC2 zero
Source for the signal for output at the 2nd analog output of the T400.
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.X
Value: 3619
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
Source of the signal to set the output value to zero for the 2nd analog output
of the T400. If H162 = 0.0 (DA2 offset), this allows the analog output to be
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 51, 2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.S
H631
S.BiDir Out1
T400_EA.BinOut.I1
H632
S.BiDir Out2
T400_EA.BinOut.I2
H633
S.BiDir Out3
T400_EA.BinOut.I3

Value: 0105
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Value: 0116
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Value: 0109
Type: I
Chart: 53, 5
93
Parameter
Description
Data
H634
Value: 0003
Type: I
Chart: 53, 5
S.BiDir Out4
T400_EA.BinOut.I4
H635
S.Bin.Output1

T400_EA.BinOut.I6
H636
S.Bin.Output2
T400_EA.BinOut.I5
H637 ... H640
Activates the driver for the bi-directional I/O of the T400.

( 1: Driver active; 0: Only the input can be used)
enable BiDir1 ...

enable BiDir4
Initialization
parameter
H637: Terminal 46
H639: Terminal 48
H638:
H640:
Value: 0004
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Value: 0000
Type: I
Chart: 53, 1
Type: BO
Chart: 53, 2 - 6
Terminal 47
Terminal 49
T400_EA.BinOut.DI1 ... DI4
H650
MUX CTW1 Bit0
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H651
MUX CTW1 Bit1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H652
MUX CTW1 Bit2
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H653
MUX CTW1 Bit3
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 2
H654
MUX CTW1 Bit4
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
94

Parameter
Description
Data
H655
MUX CTW1 Bit5
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
H656
MUX CTW1 Bit6
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
H657
MUX CTW1 Bit7
0
1
2
3
4
5
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 530, 6
H658
MUX CTW1 Bit8
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H659
MUX CTW1 Bit9
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H660
MUX CTW1 Bit10
0
1
2
3
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H661
MUX CTW1 Bit11
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 2
H662
MUX CTW1 Bit12
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6

95
Parameter
Description
Data
H663
MUX CTW1 Bit13
0
1
2
3
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
H664
MUX CTW1 Bit14
0
1
2
3
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6
H665
MUX CTW1 Bit15
(external fault)
Selects the source for bit 15 (external fault) in control word 1 to the basic
drive (1 = no fault)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fixed value 0
Fixed value 1
Fault (refer to H003)
Alarm (refer to H004)
Value: 1
Type: I
Chart: 540, 6
d666
Analog output 1
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.Y
d667
Analog output 2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.Y
H668
T_Filter_DAC1
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.T
H669
T_Filter_DAC2
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.T
H700
Enables the serial interface 1 of the T400 for operation as USS slave.
Further, switch S1/8 should be set into the ON position. Online operation with
CFC or with the basic IBS (start-up) is then no longer possible!
USS enable
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
Type: R
Chart: 51, 3
Value: 0 ms
Type: R
Chart: 51, 2
Value: 0 ms
Type: R
Chart: 51, 2
Value: 1
Type: BO
Chart: 450, 1
USS slave is only required for operator control and visualization, if the T400
is to be operated without basic drive (in the SRT400).
Prerequisite for OP1S: Software version from V2.2
IF_USS.Enable.I
H701
Data transfer rate for the USS interface.
Baud rate USS
Example OP1S:
Value: 9600
Type: DI
Chart: 450, 1
9600 or 19200
IF_USS.Slave_ZB.BDR
H703
USS Address
H704
USS 4-Wire
Station address, USS interface.
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 450, 1
IF_USS.Slave_ZB.MAA
Difference between 2-wire (half duplex) and 4-wire operation (full duplex) for
the USS interface.
Value Significance
Required for
0
1
for OP1S
for SIMOVIS
RS485 2-wire (half duplex)

RS232 4-wire (full duplex)
Value: 0
Type: BO
Chart: 450, 1
For end nodes on the USS bus (RS485), terminating resistors must be used
to terminate the bus. The appropriate resistors are switched-in using switches
S1/1 and S1/2 on the T400; the resistors are switched-in in the ON setting.
IF_USS.Slave_ZB. WI4
96

Parameter
Description
Data
d705
Status of the central block of the USS interface (@USS_S).
USS rec. state
This value is only of significance, if the T400 is operated without basic drive,
and parameterization should be realized via the serial interface 1 of the T400
in the USS protocol (refer to H700 to H704).
Type: W
Chart: 450, 4
d706 ... d707
Two pieces of process data, received from the USS interface.
PZD1 USS ...

PZD2 USS
IF_USS.USS_Dummy.Y1 ... Y2
H708 ... H709
Sources for 2 words, which are output at the USS interface.
S.PZD1 USS Slave

...
S.PZD2 USS Slave
IF_USS.USS_Dummy.X1 ... X2
IF_USS.Slave_ZB.YTS
d801 ... d810

PZD1 CB rec. ...
PZD10 CB rec.
10 process data when receiving data from the communications module.

Depending on the PPO type used, not all PZD are used. These values are
then undefined!
Type: W
Chart: 450, 6
Value: 2000
Type: I
Chart: 450, 5
Type: W
Chart: 410, 3
IF_COM.Verteilung.Y1 ... Y8
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y1 ... Y2
H811
S.Control W1 CB
H812
S.Control W2 CB
H813 ... H816
S.setp_1 CB ...
S.setp_4 CB
Selects the source for the 1st control word from the communications module.
IF_COM.Verteil2.X3
Selects the source for the 2nd control word from the communications module.
IF_COM.Verteil2.X4
Selects, from 4 sources, for setpoints from the communications interface,
those which are to be converted from the N2 format into the floating-point
format. Factory setting:
H813 = 2802
H814 = 2803
H815 = 2805
H816 = 2806
Value: 2801
Type: I
Chart: 420, 1
Value: 2804
Type: I
Chart: 420, 1
Type: I
Chart: 410, 5
PZD2
PZD3
PZD5
PZD6
IF_COM.Sollwert_W2.X, _W3.X, _W5.X, _W6.X

H817
S.setp. I_R CB
Selects the source, which is to be converted from integer to floating-point.

IF_COM.Sollw_IR.X
H818
Result of the conversion from integer to floating-point (refer to H817).
Setp. I_R CB
IF_COM.Sollw_IR.Y
H819 ... H820
Selects from high and low word, a double word (format N4), which is to be
converted into the floating-point-format. Normalization using H841.
S.DW high CB ...

S.DW low CB
Factory setting:
H819 = 2809
PZD9
H820 = 2810
PZD10
Type: R
Chart: 410, 2
Type: I
Chart: 410, 4
IF_COM.Sollw_DW.XWH
IF_COM.Sollw_DW.XWL
H821
Result of the N4 to floating-point conversion (refer to H818, H819, H841).
CB setp. DW
IF_COM.Sollw_N4.Y
H822 ... H825
Selects from 4 sources, which are output at the communications interface as

actual values. They are converted from the floating-point format into the N2
format.
S.actval_1 CB ...
S.actval_4 CB
Value: 2807
Type: I
Chart: 410, 1
Type: R
Chart: 410, 7
Type: I
Chart: 440, 1
Factory setting:
H822 = 3446
H823 = 3447
H824 = 3448
H825 = 3449

IF_COM.Istwert_W2.X, _W3.X, _W5.X, _W6.X

H826
S.actval R_I CB
H828
S.actval_5 CB
Selects the source, which should be converted from floating-point to integer.

IF_COM.Ist_RI.X
Selects the source, which should be converted from floating-point to double
word.
IF_COM.Ist_R_N4.X

Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 440, 6
Value: 3000
Type: I
Chart: 440, 1
97
Parameter
Description
Data
H829
Normalization for H828. For H829 = 1.0, the input value is emulated as 1.0
for 100% in the N4 format.
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 440, 2
Actval5 CB norm.
IF_COM.Ist_R_N4.NF
H831 ... H840
S.PZD1 CB ...
S.PZD10 CB
Selects from 10 sources for output as PZD via the communications interface.
The source must be a word or integer type. Only as many PZD are
transferred as the selected PPO type makes provision for!
Factory setting:
H831 = 2442
H832 = 2822
H833 = 2823
H834 = 2444
H835 = 2824
H836 = 2825
H837 = 2827
H838 = 2000
H839 = 2828
H840 = 2829
Type: I
Chart: 410, 5

Actual value1 CB
Actual value2 CB
Actual value3 CB
Actual value4 CB
Actual value R_I CB
Constant 0
IF_COM.Sammeln.X1 ... X8
IF_COM.Sammeln2.X1 ... X2
H841
CB DW norm.
Normalization factor for the N4 to floating-point conversion (refer to H818,

H819, H821). For H841, 100% (16#40000000) is converted into 1.0.
IF_COM.Sollw_N4.NF
H900 ... H913

S.F125 ... S.F131
S.A106 ... S.A112
Sources for optional digital quantities, which should initiate a fault or alarm in
the basic drive.
Source
H900
H901
H902
H903
H904
H905
H906
Fault
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
F130
F131
Source
H907
H908
H909
H910
H911
H912
H913
Alarm
A106
A107
A108
A109
A110
A111
A112
Value: 1.0
Type: R
Chart: 410, 6
Type: I
Chart: 160, 1
160, 4
CONTR.Fehlerzustand.I10 ... I16

CONTR.Warnzustand.I10 ... I16
d921 ... d930
PZD1 CB out ...
PZD10 CB out
Actual value which should output up to 10 process data via the

communications module.
IF_COM.Sammeln.Y1 ... Y8
IF_COM.Sammeln2.Y1 ... Y2
H960 ... H965
6 fixed values, integer type (16 bit, signed)
Constant I1 ...
Constant I6
Constant.INT_Const.X1 ... X6
H971 ... H974
4 fixed value, word type (16 bit)
Constant W1 ...
Constant W4
Constant.WORD_Const.X1 ... X4
H981 ... H984
4 fixed values, double word type (32 bit signed).
Constant DI1 ...

Constant DI4
Constant.DINT_Const.X3 ... X6
H990 ... H997
8 fixed values, floating-point type.
Constant R1 ...
Constant R8
Constant.Const_Float.X1 ... X8
d998, d999
SIMADYN D,
SIMOVIS SW ID
Type: W
Chart: 440, 6
Value: 0
Type: I
Chart: 30,6
Value: 16#0000
Type: W
Chart: 30,6
Value: 0
Type: DI
Chart: 30,8
Value: 0.0
Type: R
Chart: 30,5
Identification parameters for SIMOVIS to identify the standard software

package.
Chart: 40,3
Constant.SIMADYN_D.Y
L028 ... L031
S.Display R1 ...
S.Display R4
Four sources for display parameters, REAL type (floating-point) to display

using parameters d028 ... d031.
Type: I
Chart: 470, 7
Free_FBs.Display_R.X1 ... Free_FBs.Display_R.X4
98

Parameter
Description
Data
L032 ... L035
Four sources for display parameters, BOOL type to display connectors

parameters d032 ... d035.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 7
S.Display B1 ...
S.Display B4
Free_FBs.Display_BO.I1 ... Free_FBs.Display_BO.I4

L036, L037
S.Display I1,
S.Display I2
Two sources for display parameters, type integer (16 bit) to display
using parameters d036 and d037.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 7
Free_FBs.Display_I.X1, Free_FBs.Display_I.X2
L038, L039
S.Display W1,
S.Display W2
Two sources for display parameters, type word (16 bit) to display connectors
parameters d038 and d039.
Type: BO
Chart: 470, 7
Free_FBs.Display_W.X1, Free_FBs.Display_W.X2
L098
Enables position sensing via pulse encoder (NAVS).

Value !
Type BO
Chart 60, 5
L099
Enables position sensing via absolute value encoder (AENC).

Value 0
Type BO
Chart 60, 7
L100 L302
Differential position sensing with absolute value encoder:

Setting parameters for the absolute value encoder and
diagnostic parameters. Detailed description,
refer to Section 3.2.3.
L400
Length buffer
Value:
Length of Trace-buffer (in double words) for offline-trace with

symTrace-D7
Min.
Max.
2048
0
256000
Type
Typ:
Typ:
TRACE.Trace_Kopplung.TBL
c401
Coupling Trace
0: No interconnection to the trace blocks
1: Interconnection to the trace blocks is activ.
TRACE.Trace_Kopplung.QTS
c402
Status Trace
Status-word of trace. Description in symTrace-D7 (Help->
Help subjects->Function blocks error messages)
TRACE.Trace_Kopplung.YTS
L605
S.DW_W1
Sources for a double word quantity, which should be split-up into two words.
Free_FBs.DW_W1.X
L606, L607
Sources for the summands of the 1st integer adder.
S.ADDI_1 X1
S.ADDI_1 X2
Free_FBs.ADDI_1.X1
L608, L609
Sources for the inputs of the 1st integer subtractor.
S.SUBI_1 X1
S.SUBI_1 X2
Free_FBs.SUBI_1.X1 ... X2
L646
Sources for an integer quantity, which should be converted into floating-point.
S.I_R_1
Free_FBs.I_R1.X
L647
Sources for a floating-point quantity, which should be converted into integer.
S.R_I1
Free_FBs.R_I1.X
L698, L699

(free block).
S.S RS-FlipFlop1
S.R RS-FlipFlop1
Free_FBs.RS_FF2.S
Value 5000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Type I
Chart 460, 1
... R

99
Parameter
Description
Data
L700 ... L702
Three sources for the inputs of the 1st free AND block.
S.AND1_I1 ...
S.AND1_I3
Type I
Chart 460, 1
L703 ... L705
Three sources for the inputs of the 2nd free AND block.
S.AND2_I1 ...
S.AND2_I3
L706 , L707
S.Switch1_0 ...
S.Switch1_1
L708
S.Switch1_sel
2 sources for the inputs of the 1st free changeover. The output is selected
using L708.
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Type I
Chart 460, 1
0: Source(L706)
1: Source(L707)
Type I
Chart 460, 1
Free_FBs.Switch1.I
L709
Source for the 1st free edge detecting block.
S.Edge1
Free_FBs.Edge1.I
L710 ... L712
3 sources for the inputs of the 1st free OR block.
S.OR1_I1 ...
S.OR1_I3
L713 ... L715
3 sources for the inputs of the 2nd free OR block.
S.OR2_I1 ...
S.OR2_I3
L716 , L717
S.Switch2_0 ...
S.Switch2_1
L718
S.Switch2_sel
2 sources for the inputs of the 2nd free changeover. The output is selected
using L718.
S.OnDelay1
L729
T_OnDelay1
L730
S.OffDelay1
L731
T_OffDelay1

0: Source(L716)
1: Source(L717)
Source for the 1st power-on delay.
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.I
1st power-on delay time.
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.T
Source for the 1st power-off delay time.
Free_FBs.OffDelay1.I
1st power-off delay time.
Value
0000
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 490, 7
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 490, 7
Free_FBs.OffDelay1.T
S.Not1, S.Not2
Free_FBs.Not1.I ... Not2.I
L734, L735

(free block).
S.set_PT1_zero
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 490, 7
Sources for the 2nd logical inverter.
L738
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 490, 7
L732, L733
S.S RS-FlipFlop2
S.R RS-FlipFlop2
Type I
Chart 460, 1
Free_FBs.Switch2.I
L728
Value I
Chart 430, 6
Type I
Chart 460, 7
Type I
Chart 460, 4
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.S ... R
Setting 0 1:
Setting 1 0:

Output goes to the input value corresponding to L741
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Free_FBs.FreePT1.S
L739
QualityFact.Filt
L740
S.PT1_input
100
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.Q
Source of the input signal for the lowpass 1st order filter (free block).
Free_FBs.FreePT1.X
Value 2.0
Type I
Chart 480, 4
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 2

Parameter
Description
Data
L741
Filter time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter.
Value 20 ms
Type SD
Chart 480, 2
Tfilt PT1
L742
S.Band-Stop filt
L743
S.FilterFrequenc
Free_FBs.FreePT1.T
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.X
Source of the input signal for the bandstop frequency (in Hz) of the bandstop
filter.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 3
Value 3002
Type I
Chart 480, 3
Free_FBs.SperrFilt.FG
L744, L745
S.Compare_X,
S.Compare_Y
Free_FBs.Compare.X1 ... X2
L746
S.Limit_max
L747
S.Limit_input
L748
S.Limit_min
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.LU
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.X
Free_FBs.Begrenzer.LL
L749
S.Compare2
Free_FBs.Comp2.X
L750
S.Compare2 Range
L751
Compare2 Hyst
L752
S.Compare2 Mid
L753
S.Curve_X
Free_FBs.Comp2.L
Free_FBs.Comp2.HY
Source for the comparator center of range with hysteresis (free block).
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Value 0.1
Type I
Chart 480, 2
Free_FBs.Comp2.M
Value 3003
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Source for the input signal of a characteristic with 2 points. If the signal is
less than X1, the output = Y1; if it is greater than X2, the output = Y2. The
characteristic is approximately linear between these two points.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 1
Free_FBs.Kennlin.X
L754, L755
Value pair for the lefthand characteristic point (lower X coordinate).
Curve_X1,
Curve_Y1
L756, L757
Curve_X2,
Curve_Y2
L760
S.FreeWord
Source for a 16-bit value, which is to be split-up into individual bits

(connectors 0760 to 0775)
L761... L763
S.DW_high,
S.DW_low,
DW norm.
L764, L765
S.Word
Word norm.
2 sources for a double word, which are to be converted into a floating-point

value. L763 is the normalization; i. e. the output value for an input value of
16#40000000.
Value 0.0
Type I
Chart 480, 2 3
Value 1.0
Type I
Chart 480, 2 - 3
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 1
Type I
Chart 490, 5 - 7
Free_FBs.DW_inp.XWH ... XWL

Free_FBs.Free_N4_R.NF
Source and normalization for a 16-bit value, which is to be converted into a
floating-point value. L765 is the normalization; i. e. the output value for input
value 16#4000.
Type I
Chart 490, 4 - 5
Free_FBs.Free_N2_R.X, Free_FBs.Free_N2_R.NF

101
Parameter
Description
Data
L766, L767
Source for a floating-point value, which is to be converted into type N2. L767
is the normalization; i. e. the input value for output = 16#4000.
Type I
Chart 490, 6 - 7
S.Float
Float norm.
Free_FBs.Float_N2.X, Free_FBs.Float_N2.NF
L786 ... L788
S.ADD1 X1 ...
S.ADD1 X3
L789 ... L791
S.ADD2 X1 ...
S.ADD2 X3
L792 ... L793
S.SUB1 X1 ...
S.SUB1 X2
L794 ... L795
S.SUB2 X1 ...
S.SUB2 X2
L796 ... L798
S.MUL1 X1 ...
S.MUL1 X3
L799 ... L801
S.MUL2 X1 ...
S.MUL2 X3
L802 ... L803
S.DIV1 X1 ...
S.DIV1 X2
L804 ... L805
S.DIV2 X1 ...
S.DIV2 X2
L810
S.Free_W_B_2
L812 ... L813
S.DIVI_1 X1 ...
S.DIVI_1 X2
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.X1 ... X2
L814 ... L815
S.MULI_1 X1 ...
S.MULI_1 X2
Free_FBs.MULI_1.X1 ... X2
L816, L817
Source for free word-to-double-word converter.
S.W_DW1 high
S.W_DW1 low
Free_FBs.WDW1.XWH ... XWL
L818
Source of the input quantity of the freely available integrator.
S.Integrator X
L819
Integrator LU
L820
Integrator LL
L821
S.Integrator SV
L822
Integrator T
102
Free_FBs.Integrator.X
Upper limit value of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.LU
Lower limit value of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.LL
Source for the setting value of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.SV
Integration time constant of the freely available integrator
Free_FBs.Integrator.TI
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 470, 3
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 470, 5
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 1
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 470, 1
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 490, 4
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 480, 5
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 480, 6
Value -1.0
Type R
Chart 480, 6
Value 3000
Type R
Chart 480, 5
Value 1000 ms
Type SD
Chart 480, 6

Parameter
Description
Data
L823
Source for the setting signal of the freely available integrator.

Free_FBs.Integrator.S
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 480, 5
2 sources for the inputs of the 3rd free changeover switch. The output is
Type I
Chart 460, 5
S.Integrator set
L824 , L825
S.Switch3_0 ...
S.Switch3_1
L826
S.Switch3_sel
0: Source(L824)
1: Source(L825)
Free_FBs.Switch3.I
L827, L828
S.Switch4_0 ...
S.Switch4_1
L829
S.Switch4_sel
2 sources for the inputs of the 4th free changeover switch. The output is
Value
0000
Type I
Chart 460, 5
Type I
Chart 460, 7
0: Source(L827)
1: Source(L828)
Free_FBs.Switch4.I
L830 ... .L832
Sources of the 1st AND-OR logic in Chart 425. Output is B1830.
S.AND_OR1_1 ...
S.AND_OR1_3
Free_FBs.andOR1.I1
L833 ... .L835
Sources of the 2nd AND-OR logic in Chart 425. Output is B1833.
S.AND_OR2_1 ...
S.AND_OR2_3
Free_FBs.andOR2.I1

Value
0000
Type I
Chart 460, 7
Type I
Chart 460, 6
Type I
Chart 460, 6
103
4.3
TC
0000
0001
0003
0004
0005
0020
0021
0097
0098
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0134
0140
0148
0149
0150
0152
0153
0154
0160
0161
0162
0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0179
0186
0188
0189
0190
0192
0193
0194
0195
Connector list
Chart
30,2
30,2
160,7
160,8
160,7
60,8
70,7
90,3
90,3
90,7
90,7
100.7
100.7
100.7
100,8
100,8
90,7
90,7
100,3
100,3
100,3
100,3
100,3
100,3
110,7
120,8
120,5
70,7
70,7
60,7
60,4
60,4
60,4
75,6
75,6
75,6
520,2
520,4
520,5
520,7
520,8
60,2
115,3
90,6
90,2
60,2
70,3
70,3
70,3
75,4
75,5
75,4
75,4
104
Path Name
Constant.FALSE.Q
Constant.TRUE.Q
CONTR.ErrorMask.Q
CONTR.WarnMaske.Q
CONTR.Stoerung.Q
CONTR.ErrorNAVSslave.Q
CONTR.ErrorNAVSMaster.Q
CONTR.Zus_Lage-RS.Q
CONTR.OR_Sync.Q
CONTR.SyncFlipFlop.QN
CONTR.SyncFlipFlop.Q
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.QU
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.QM
SYNCO2.CmpSynchr.QL
SYNCO2.DisplValid.Q
SYNCO2.Displace.DC
CONTR.Lage_RS.Q
CONTR.WR-Freigabe.Q
SYNCO1.SignNmaster.QU
SYNCO1.SignNmaster.QE
SYNCO1.SignNmaster.QL
SYNCO1.SignNslave.QU
SYNCO1.SignNslave.QE
SYNCO1.SignNslave.QL
SYNCO2.AngleLimit.Q
SYNCO2.SpeedCtrlLimit.Q
CONTR.SCONI.Q
SYNCO2.Master.SS
CONTR.Puls_SS_Master.Q
SYNCO2.Slave.SS
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.QL
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.QE
SYNCO2.CmpSPslave.QU
SYNCO2.dnErrSlave.Q
SYNCO2.dnError.Q
SYNCO2.dnErrMaster.Q
MUX_B.MUX_VersatzReset.Q
MUX_B.MUX_TippFreigabe.Q
MUX_B.MUX_WReglerFreig.Q
MUX_B.MUX_LageReset.Q
MUX_B.MUX_SyncSignal.Q
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q4
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q7
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q1
CONTR.Steuerbits.Q2
SYNCO2.Pos_Slave_Abs.SN
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.QL
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.QE
SYNCO2.CmpSPmaster.QU
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.QU
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.QM
SYNCO2.CMP_nSlave.QL
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.QU
Significance
BOOL constant FALSE
BOOL constant TRUE
Fault
Alarm
No fault
Error, speed sensing slave
Error, speed sensing master
Position reset
Automatic start synchronization, inverse
Automatic start synchronization
Displacement > synchronism threshold (H103)
Displacement within threshold range
Displacement < synchronism threshold (H103) (negative)
Synchronism reached
Angular controller inhibit
n_slave > 0
n_slave = 0
n_slave < 0
n_master > 0
n_master = 0
n_master < 0
Position master drive set when synchronized
Pulse extension, position master set when synchronized
Slave position set when synchronized
Position, slave < 0
0 < slave position < threshold
Slave position > threshold (H105)
Speed deviation, slave
Speed deviation
Speed deviation, master
Output, multiplexer displacement reset
Output, multiplexer jog enable
Output, multiplexer angular controller enable
Output, multiplexer reset position
Output, multiplexer synchronizing command
Reset position difference
Jog enable
Inverter enable
Sync command
Slave position negative
Position master < 0
0 < position master threshold (H107)
Position master > threshold (H107)
nslave > range
Slave speed within the permissible range
nslave < range
nmaster > range

TC
0196
0197
0199
0209
0211
0212
0300
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310
0311
0312
0313
0314
0315
0320
0321
0322
0323
0324
0325
0326
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0360
0361
0362
0400
0401
0402
0403
0405
0480
0481
0482
0483
0484
0485
0486
0487
0488
Chart
75,5
75,4
70,8
60,7
72,2
72,2
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
310,4
300,7
300,4
300,4
400,4
400,4
400,4
400,4
400,7
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
Path Name
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.QM
SYNCO2.CMP_nMaster.QL
SYNCO2.Pos_Master_Abs.SN
CONTR.Puls_SS_Slave.Q
IN_AENC.S_AENC.QF
IN_AENC.M_AENC.QF
IF_Peer.Timeout_Peer.Q
IF_Peer.Empf_PEER.QTS
IF_Peer.Send_PEER.QTS
IF_COM.Empf-COM.QTS
IF_COM.E_init_inv.Q
IF_COM.Send_COM.QTS
IF_COM.S_init_inv.Q
IF_COM.Timeout_CB.Q
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q1
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q2
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q3
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q4
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q5
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q6
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q7
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q8
IF_CU.Zustand2CU.Q9
Significance
Master speed in the permissible range
nmaster < range
Position master negative
Extended pulse, slave position set when synchronized
Fault word of the absolute value encoder sensing, slave
Fault word of the absolute value encoder sensing, master
Peer CTW.0
Peer CTW.1
Peer CTW.2
Peer CTW.3
Peer CTW.4
Peer CTW.5
Peer CTW.6
Peer CTW.7
Peer CTW.8
Peer CTW.9
Peer CTW.10
Peer CTW.11
Peer CTW.12
Peer CTW.13
Peer CTW.14
Peer CTW.15
Peer CTW.0 inverse
Peer CTW.1 inverse
Peer CTW.2 inverse
Peer CTW.3 inverse
Peer CTW.4 inverse
Peer CTW.5 inverse
Peer CTW.6 inverse
Peer CTW.7 inverse
Peer CTW.8 inverse
Peer CTW.9 inverse
Peer CTW.10 inverse
Peer CTW.11 inverse
Peer CTW.12 inverse
Peer CTW.13 inverse
Peer CTW.14 inverse
Peer CTW.15 inverse
Timeout peer
CB send initialized
Timeout CB
CU status2.0
CU status2.1
CU status2.2
CU status2.3
CU status2.4
CU status2.5
CU status2.6
CU status2.7
CU status2.8

105
TC
0489
0490
0491
0492
0493
0494
0495
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0510
0511
0512
0513
0514
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
0520
0521
0522
0523
0524
0525
0526
0530
0531
0532
0533
0534
0535
0536
0537
0538
0539
0540
0541
0542
0543
0544
0545
0546
Chart
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
180,8
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
150,5
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
220,3
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
180,4
90,8
Path Name
IF_CU.Empf_BASE.QTS
IF_CU.Send_BASE.QTS
IF_CU.Empf_BASE.QT
IF_CU.DRIVE.BS
IF_CU.CU_Einit_inv.Q
IF_CU.CU_Sinit_inv.Q
IF_CU.CU_Timeout_inv.Q
IF_CU.CU_RDY_INV.Q
IF_CU.Q_ext_Error.Q
IF_CU.n-Reg Freigabe.Q
0547
0550
0551
0552
0553
560,4
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
MUX_CU.Mux_Enable_nRegl.Q
106
Significance
CU status2.9
CU status2.10
CU status2.11
CU status2.12
CU status2.13
CU status2.14
CU status2.15
CU send initialized
CU timeout
CU in operation
CU no timeout
CU not operational
CU status1.0
CU status1.1
CU status1.2
CU status1.3
CU status1.4
CU status1.5
CU status1.6
CU status1.7
CU status1.8
CU status1.9
CU status1.10
CU status1.11
CU status1.12
CU status1.13
CU status1.14
CU status1.15
External fault in control word for CU
Speed controller CU; enabling the speed controller in the basic
drive
Output, multiplexer speed controller enable for the basic drive
CTW from CU.0
CTW from CU.1
CTW from CU.2
CTW from CU.3

TC
0554
0555
0556
0557
0558
0559
0560
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0570
0571
0572
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0601
0602
0603
0604
0607
0608
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0625
0626
0627
0631
0632
0633
0634
0635
Chart
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
180,7
53,4
53,4
53,8
53,8
52,8
52,8
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
52,4
53,4
53,4
53,8
53,8
52,8
Path Name
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q1
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q2
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q3
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q4
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q5
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q6
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q7
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q8
IF_CU.STWSPAibit.Q9
T400_EA.BinOut.Q1
T400_EA.BinOut.Q2
T400_EA.BinOut.Q3
T400_EA.BinOut.Q4
T400_EA.BinOut.Q7
T400_EA.BinOut.Q8
T400_EA.BinInput.Q1
T400_EA.BinInput.Q2
T400_EA.BinInput.Q3
T400_EA.BinInput.Q4
T400_EA.BinInput.Q5
T400_EA.BinInput.Q6
T400_EA.BinInput.Q7
T400_EA.BinInput.Q8
T400_EA.BinInput.Q9
Significance
CTW from CU.4
CTW from CU.5
CTW from CU.6
CTW from CU.7
CTW from CU.8
CTW from CU.9
CTW from CU.10
CTW from CU.11
CTW from CU.12
CTW from CU.13
CTW from CU.14
CTW from CU.15
Terminal 46
Terminal 47
Terminal 48
Terminal 49
Terminal 46 inverse
Terminal 47 inverse
Terminal 48 inverse
Terminal 49 inverse

107
TC
0636
0650
0651
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
0698
0699
0700
0703
0708
0709
0710
0713
0728
0730
0732
0733
0734
0735
0743
0744
0745
0746
0748
0749
0750
0751
0760
0761
0762
0763
0764
0765
0766
0767
0768
0769
0770
0771
0772
0773
0774
0775
Chart
52,8
530,3
530,3
530,3
530,3
530,7
530,7
530,7
530,7
540,3
540,3
540,3
540,3
540,7
540,7
540,7
540,7
460,2
460,2
460,2
460,5
490,8
490,8
460,2
460,5
490,8
490,8
460,8
460,8
460,5
460,5
480,8
480,8
480,8
480,8
480,8
480,3
480,3
480,3
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
108
Path Name
Free_FBs.RS_FF2.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF2.QN
Free_FBs.AND1.Q
Free_FBs.AND2.Q
Free_FBs.Edge1.QN
Free_FBs.Edge1.QP
Free_FBs.OR1.Q
Free_FBs.OR2.Q
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.Q
Free_FBs.Not1.Q
Free_FBs.Not2.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.Q
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.QN
Free_FBs.Compare.QE
Free_FBs.Compare.QU
Free_FBs.Compare.QL
Free_FBs.Comp2.QU
Free_FBs.Comp2.QM
Free_FBs.Comp2.QL
Significance
Output multiplexer, control word1 bit 0
Output multiplexer ,control word1 bit13
Edge detector: falling edge identified
Edge detector: rising edge identified
Output, power-on delay
Output, power-off delay
Output, free comparator: X = Y
Output, free comparator: X > Y
Output, free comparator: X < Y
Output, free limiter: upper limit reached
Output, free limiter: lower limit reached
Output, free comparator: input quantity > range
Output, free comparator: input quantity in range
Output, free comparator: input quantity < range
FreeWord_0
FreeWord_1
FreeWord_2
FreeWord_3
FreeWord_4
FreeWord_5
FreeWord_6
FreeWord_7
FreeWord_8
FreeWord_9
FreeWord_10
FreeWord_11
FreeWord_12
FreeWord_13
FreeWord_14
FreeWord_15

TC
0800
0801
0802
0803
0804
0805
0806
0807
0808
0809
0810
0811
0812
0813
0814
0815
0817
0818
0820
0821
0822
0823
0824
0825
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0835
0840
0841
0842
0843
0844
0845
0846
0847
0848
0849
0850
0851
0852
0853
0854
0855
0860
0861
0862
0863
0864
Chart
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
480,7
480,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,3
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
Path Name
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q1
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q2
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q3
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q4
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q5
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q6
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q7
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q8
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q9
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q10
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q11
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q12
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q13
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q14
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q15
IF_COM.STW1_inv.Q16
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q1
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q2
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q3
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q4
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q5
Significance
CB control W1.0
CB control W1.1
CB control W1.2
CB control W1.3
CB control W1.4
CB control W1.5
CB control W1.6
CB control W1.7
CB control W1.8
CB control W1.9
CB control W1.10
CB control W1.11
CB control W1.12
CB control W1.13
CB control W1.14
CB control W1.15
Free integrator at the upper limit value
Free integrator at the lower limit value
CB control W2.0
CB control W2.1
CB control W2.2
CB control W2.3
CB control W2.4
CB control W2.5
CB control W2.6
CB control W2.7
CB control W2.8
CB control W2.9
CB control W2.10
CB control W2.11
CB control W2.12
CB control W2.13
CB control W2.14
CB control W2.15
CB CTW1.0 inverse
CB CTW1.1 inverse
CB CTW1.2 inverse
CB CTW1.3 inverse
CB CTW1.4 inverse
CB CTW1.5 inverse
CB CTW1.6 inverse
CB CTW1.7 inverse
CB CTW1.8 inverse
CB CTW1.9 inverse
CB CTW1.10 inverse
CB CTW1.11 inverse
CB CTW1.12 inverse
CB CTW1.13 inverse
CB CTW1.14 inverse
CB CTW1.15 inverse
CB CTW2.0 inverse
CB CTW2.1 inverse
CB CTW2.2 inverse
CB CTW2.3 inverse
CB CTW2.4 inverse

109
TC
0865
0866
0867
0868
0869
0870
0871
0872
0873
0874
0875
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1830
1833
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2010
2011
2020
2021
2025
2026
2027
2096
2246
2303
2306
2327
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2346
Chart
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
420,7
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
490,2
460,8
460,8
30,2
30,2
30,2
160,6
160,8
40,7
160,4
160,6
60,4
70,5
60,7
70,7
52,8
220,4
220,8
100.8
180,2
570,3
570,2
310,8
300,7
300,7
300,7
300,7
300,7
310,2
110
Path Name
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q6
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q7
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q8
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q9
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q10
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q11
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q12
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q13
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q14
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q15
IF_COM.STW2_inv.Q16
Free_FBs.andOR1.Q
Free_FBs.andOR2.Q
CONTR.ErrorMask.QS
CONTR.WarnMaske.QS
CONTR.Statuswort.QS
SYNCO2.SlavePulse.Y
SYNCO2.MasterPulse.Y
SYNCO2.Slave.YFC
SYNCO2.Master.YFC
SYNCO2.Displace.FC
IF_CU.Q_ZWort1.Y
MUX_Peer.Festwert_Peer.Y
IF_Peer.STW_NOP.Y
Significance
CB CTW2.5 inverse
CB CTW2.6 inverse
CB CTW2.7 inverse
CB CTW2.8 inverse
CB CTW2.9 inverse
CB CTW2.10 inverse
CB CTW2.11 inverse
CB CTW2.12 inverse
CB CTW2.13 inverse
CB CTW2.14 inverse
CB CTW2.15 inverse
FreeWord2_0
FreeWord2_1
FreeWord2_2
FreeWord2_3
FreeWord2_4
FreeWord2_5
FreeWord2_6
FreeWord2_7
FreeWord2_8
FreeWord2_9
FreeWord2_10
FreeWord2_11
FreeWord2_12
FreeWord2_13
FreeWord2_14
FreeWord2_15
Constant, word 0
Constant, word 1
Constant, word 16#FFFF
Error status (for the basic drive)
Alarm status (for the basic drive)
Error bits
Alarm bits
Encoder pulses, slave
Encoder pulses, master
Error code, slave-speed sensing
Error code, master
Status binary input (binary inputs and inverse values)
Control word1 CU
Control word2 CU
Error identification, displacement calculation
Status word 1CU
Output, multiplexer for 1st PZD send peer-to-peer
Fixed value for PZD1 send peer-to-peer
Status word, peer
PZD1 from peer
PZD2 from peer
PZD3 from peer
PZD4 from peer
PZD5 from peer
Control word peer

TC
2442
2443
2444
2445
2460
2461
2466
2467
2500
2502
2504
2506
2508
2509
2510
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2605
Chart
560,4
560,2
560,7
560,6
420,2
420,6
430,4
430,8
230,4
230,4
230,4
230,4
230,4
230,5
230,5
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
490,6
Path Name
MUX_CB.MUX_COM_W1.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_COM_W4.Y
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y3
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y4
IF_CU.Sollwert_W2.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W3.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W5.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W6.Y
IF_CU.Sollwert_W8.Y
IF_CU.DW_W_CU.YWL
IF_CU.DW_W_CU.YWH
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y1
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y2
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y3
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y4
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y5
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y6
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y7
IF_CU.Verteilung.Y8
Free_FBs.DW_W1.YWH
2606
490,6 Free_FBs.DW_W1.YWL
2607
2608
2647
470,2 Free_FBs.ADDI_1.Y
470,2 Free_FBs.SUBI_1.Y
490,5 Free_FBs.R_I1.Y
2706
2707
2766
490,8 Free_FBs.Float_N2.Y
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2812
2813
2814
2822
2823
2824
2825
2827
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
470,2
470,2
470,2
440,3
440,3
440,3
440,3
440,7
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y1
IF_COM.Verteil2.Y2
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.Y
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.MOD
Free_FBs.MULI_1.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W2.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W3.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W5.Y
IF_COM.Istwert_W6.Y
IF_COM.Ist_RI.Y
Significance
Status word1 CB
Status word2 CB
Setpoint1 CU N2
Setpoint2 CU N2
Setpoint3 CU N2
Setpoint4 CU N2
Setpoint5 CU N2
Setpoint6 low CU
Setpoint6 high CU
PZD1 from CU
PZD2 from CU
PZD3 from CU
PZD4 from CU
PZD5 from CU
PZD6 from CU
PZD7 from CU
PZD8 from CU
PZD9 from CU
PZD10 from CU
PZD11 from CU
PZD12 from CU
PZD13 from CU
PZD14 from CU
DW_W1 high (output, double word word converter high word)
DW_W1 low (output, double word word converter low word)
ADDI_Y (output, free adder type int)
SUBI_Y (output, free subtractor type int)
R_I1 (output, floating-point integer converter)
PZD1 USS
PZD2 USS
R_N2 (output, floating-point N2 converter)
PZD1 from CB
PZD2 from CB
PZD3 from CB
PZD4 from CB
PZD5 from CB
PZD6 from CB
PZD7 from CB
PZD8 from CB
PZD9 from CB
PZD10 from CB
DIVI_1 Y (output, free divider type int)
DIVI_1 (modulo output, free divider type int)
MULI_1Y (output, free multiplier type int)
Actual value1 CB
Actual value2 CB
Actual value3 CB
Actual value4 CB
Actual value R_I CB

111
TC
2828
2829
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2971
2972
2973
2974
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3040
3043
3044
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3056
3060
3061
3062
3066
3070
3073
3074
3076
3080
3085
3091
3094
3095
3117
3118
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3129
Chart
440,4
440,4
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,6
30,2
30,2
30,2
30,2
30,2
60,5
70,4
60,8
60,7
60,8
60,8
60,8
60,7
500,3
30,7
80,4
80,1
500,5
30,7
500,4
110,2
110,4
80,2
80,2
100,7
30,7
500,8
30,7
115,7
115,2
500,7
120,8
100,8
100,8
100,8
60,8
60,8
110,8
110,5
110,7
110,4
60,8
115,7
112
Path Name
IF_COM.Ist_DW_W.YWH
IF_COM.Ist_DW_W.YWL
SYNCO2.SlaveNnenn.Y
SYNCO2.MasterNnenn.Y
SYNCO2.n_Slave.Y
SYNCO2.Master.Y
SYNCO2.Slave.YP
SYNCO2.Master.YP
SYNCO2.Slave.Y
SYNCO2.Master.Y
MUXsoll.MUX_Uebersetzung.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y1
SYNCO1.UE4PRO.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y3
MUXsoll.MUX_RelUebersetz.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y2
MUXsoll.MUX_Versatz.Y
SYNCO2.Q_Versatz.Y
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y4
SYNCO1.CONST_UEB.Y5
SYNCO1.DREFSS.Y
SYNCO1.FixVersatz.Y
MUXsoll.MUX_Leitsollwert.Y
SYNCO1.fixLeitsoll.Y
SYNCO1.SREFSM.Y
MUXsoll.MUX_BAusgleich.Y
SYNCO2.Displace.CVP
SYNCO2.Displace.DV
SYNCO2.Displace.DVD
SYNCO2.Slave.YDP
SYNCO2.YDP_neg.Y
SYNCO2.PT_Angle.Y
SYNCO2.AngleKP.Y
SYNCO1.HLG_Speed.Y
Significance
Fixed value I1 (16 bit, signed)
Fixed value I2
Fixed value I3
Fixed value I4
Fixed value I5
Fixed value I6
Fixed value W1 (16 bit, unsigned)
Fixed value W2
Fixed value W3
Fixed value W4
Floating-point constant -1.0
Rated speed, slave
Rated speed, master
Speed, slave
Speed, master
Position, slave
Position, master
Speed, slave normalized
Speed, master normalized
Output multiplexer ratio
Fixed value ratio
Ratio with supplementary ratio and relative ratio
Fixed value supplementary ratio
Output multiplexer relative ratio
Fixed value relative ratio
Output multiplexer displacement setpoint
Displacement setpoint before the ramp-function generator
Displacement setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Value for ratio (without rel. ratio; without supplementary ratio)
Value for relative ratio
Direction of rotation-dependent displacement
Fixed value displacement
Output, multiplexer master setpoint
Fixed value, master setpoint
Master setpoint, smoothed
Master setpoint
Output, multiplexer inertia compensation
DT1 (n_set)
Correction pulses (to correct the position difference)
Displacement - position difference
Inverse position difference
Position difference
System deviation of the angular controller
I component of the angular controller
Position difference smoothed
speed septpoint after the ramp-function generator

TC
3130
3136
3137
3145
3146
3150
3151
3152
3153
3176
3186
3199
3223
3225
3227
3229
3234
3304
3305
3330
3332
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3452
3454
3456
3551
3553
3555
3570
3589
Chart
115,2
115,4
120,2
120,6
60,8
120,8
120,4
115,8
120,7
115,7
60,2
70,8
50,6
50,6
50,6
50,6
100,5
570,6
570,8
300,3
300,3
550,3
550,5
550,6
550,8
410,7
410,7
410,7
410,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
170,7
Path Name
CONTR.TIPPEN.Y
SYNCO1.SREFR.Y
SYNCO2.NsollLimit.Y
SYNCO2.SpeedControl.YI
SYNCO2.NslaveFilter.Y
SYNCO2.SetpSwitch.Y
SYNCO2.SpeedKP.Y
SYNCO1.Tippen-Schalter.Y
SYNCO2.Pos_Slave_Abs.Y
SYNCO2.Pos_Master_Abs.Y
T400_EA.AE1_FILT.Y
T400_EA.AE2_FILT.Y
T400_EA.AE3_FILT.Y
T400_EA.AE4_FILT.Y
SYNCO2.Displ_Ist.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W2.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W3.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W5.Y
MUX_CB.MUX_CB_W6.Y
IF_CU.Istwert_W2.Y
IF_CU.Istwert_W3.Y
IF_CU.Istwert_W5.Y
IF_CU.CU_DI_R.Y
IF_CU.CU_N4_R.Y
3591
3604
170,7 IF_CU.CU_I_R.Y
490,5 Free_FBs.I_R1.Y
3618
3619
3666
3667
3706
3716
3740
3742
3747
3753
3763
510,4
510,7
51,3
51,3
460,2
460,4
480,2
480,5
480,8
480,3
490,7
3765
490,5 Free_FBs.Free_N2_R.Y
3786
3789
3792
3794
3796
3799
3802
470,4
470,4
470,2
470,4
470,6
470,6
470,6
T400_EA.Filt_DAC1.Y
T400_EA.Filt_DAC2.Y
Free_FBs.Switch1.Y
Free_FBs.Switch2.Y
Free_FBs.FreePT1.Y
Free_FBs.Kennlin.Y
Free_FBs.ADD1.Y
Free_FBs.ADD2.Y
Free_FBs.SUB1.Y
Free_FBs.SUB2.Y
Free_FBs.MUL1.Y
Free_FBs.MUL2.Y
Free_FBs.DIV1.Y
Significance
Setpoint speed, slave
Integral component of the speed controller
Speed, slave smoothed
Speed controller system deviation
Setpoint for the basic drive (n_set or Mset)
KP speed controller
Jog setpoint
Absolute position actual value of the slave
Absolute value (position, master)
AE1 smoothed
AE2 smoothed
AE3 smoothed
AE4 smoothed
Differential position value to determine the displacement
Output multiplexer for 1st floating-point value, send peer
Output multiplexer for 2nd floating-point value, send peer
Setpoint1 CB
Setpoint2 CB
Setpoint3 CB
Setpoint4 CB
Actual value1 CU
Actual value2 CU
Actual value3 CU
CU DW_R (double word as floating-point value)
CU N4_R (double word in the N4 normalization floating-point)
CU actual value_I_R
I_R1 (output, integer floating-point converter)
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
PT1_out (output, free lowpass filter)
Output, bandstop
Output, free limiter
Output, free 2-point characteristic
DW_float (output, double word floating-point converter)
Word_float (output, word floating-point converter)

113
TC
3804
3818
3819
3821
3825
3827
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
4114
4115
4116
4125
4214
4215
4216
4225
4300
5000
5001
5086
5087
5088
5089
5330
5332
5567
Chart
470,6
410,7
480,7
410,7
460,6
460,8
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
30,5
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,2
72,5
30,2
30,2
80,4
80,4
80,7
80,7
300,7
300,7
170,6
5814
5816
470,2 Free_FBs.MULI_1.YDI
490,6 Free_FBs.WDW1.Y
5981
5982
5983
5984
30,8
30,8
30,8
30,8
114
Path Name
Free_FBs.DIV2.Y
IF_COM.Sollw_IR.Y
IF_COM.Sollw_N4.Y
Free_FBs.Switch3.Y
Free_FBs.Switch4.Y
IN_AENC.S_AENC.Y
IN_AENC.S_AENC.YP
IN_AENC.S_AENC.YRC
IN_AENC.S_POS.Y
IN_AENC.M_AENC.Y
IN_AENC.M_AENC.YP
IN_AENC.M_AENC.YRC
IN_AENC.M_POS.Y
IN_AENC.DELTA_Pos.Y
SYNCO1.FEIN_NM.Y
SYNCO1.FEIN_DN.Y
IF_CU.W_DW.Y
Significance
Setpoint I_R CB
Setpoint DW CB
Position actual value AENC1, slave [length units]
Position actual value AENC2, master [length units]
Differential position master slave [length units]
Fixed value fine ratio, numerator
Fixed value fine ratio, denominator
Ratio, numerator
Ratio, denominator
Peer DW1 (receive)
Peer DW2 (receive)
Output of the word double word conversion for PZD from the
CU
MULI_1 (double word output, free multiplier type int)
W_DW1 (output, word double word converter)
Fixed value DI1 (double word)
Fixed value DI2
Fixed value DI3
Fixed value DI4

Start-up
Start-up
WARNING
Only start to commission the system, if adequate and effective measures have
been made to ensure that the system and drive can be safely electrically and
mechanically used.
Ensure that all of the safety- and EMERGENCY OFF signals are connected
and effective and that the drive can be powered-down at any time.
5.1
Commissioning, general
The principal commissioning sequence is shown as follows:
Commissioning the basic drive

Parameterization, basic drive f. oper. w/ the T400
Commission the open-loop control
Parameterize the setpoint input
Commission the closed-loop technology control
Fig. 5-1
Commissioning sequence
We recommend that the sequence, shown in Fig. 5-1, is maintained when

starting-up the equipment, so that possible problems which occur, can be
more easily pinpointed.
Commissioning,
basic drive
The basic drive should be commissioned according to the Operating

Instructions of the drive converter (e.g. Lit.[1]).
Parameterization,
basic drive for use
with T400
In order to be able to use the SPA440 standard software package, the

parameters, listed in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 must be set on the basic
drive for the setpoint/actual value channels and for the CU control.
All of the enable signals, used in the standard software package, are
listed in Table 5-1, and should be switched-in or set according to the
particular application.

115
Start-up
Control
Parameter
Explanation
Enable:
Synchronizing
H174
Angular controller
H172, H118
External and internal enable
Speed controller
H140 = 1
Speed controller activated on T400
COMBOARD
H409
Peer-to-peer
H309
Enable peer communications
Jog
H171
Enable Jog
Reset:
Position
(master/slave)
H173
H170
Displacement
calculation
Table 5-1
Control signals
The enabling and appropriate input for particular functions must be set.
Notes
Flowcharts
An oscilloscope should be used to evaluate the control quality and, if

required, to check the pulse encoder signals. Further, the displacement
can be easily visualized by plotting the synchronizing marks (zero pulses)
in 2 channels. When setting displacement values, a storage oscilloscope
or a stroboscope is extremely helpful.
The flowcharts in Fig. 5-1 show the sequence when commissioning the
three main functions - speed controller, angular controller and
synchronization.
Information on the following flowcharts:
116
Signficance:
Additional information under n) at the
transition to the particular flowchart

Start-up
5.2
Commissioning, closed-loop speed control

Start
First time that the basic driveis commissioned

- motor data, drive converter data
- if required, log-on the T400
CU signals an error?
ja
Basic drive interface

- setpoint channels according to Table 2.1
- actual value channels according to Table 2.2
F080, F070
Speed sensing
- H010 encoder pulses, slave
- H011 encoder pulses, master
- H012 rated speed, slave
- H013 rated speed, master
- H018 operating mode, slave speed sensing
- H019 operating mode, master speed sensing
- H022 coarse pulse mode, slave
- H023 coarse pulse mode, master
Check hardware
Power-down equipment
Power-down the equipment and power-up again

(accept initialization parameter)
Enable errors and alarms
- H003 fault mask
- H004 alarm mask
Define sources for setpoints
- H040 speed ratio
- H048 relative ratio
- H050 offset setpoint
- H070 master setpoint
- H080 inertia compensation
Define sources for control signals
- H170 offset reset
- H171 jog enable
- H172 ang. controller enable = 0 (actually, inhibit)
- H173 reset position
- H174 synchronizing command
Select process data to the basic drive
- H501 ... H509 normalization PZD1, 2, 3, 5 and 8
Scaling of the analog inputs used
- H210 ... H220 scaling and offsets
- H222 ... H228 smoothing times
A
Fig. 5-2
Start-up, closed-loop speed control (start-A): Speed actual value sensing, setpoint

117
Start-up
ON
Enter master setpoint, approx. 0.05
(e.g. via fixed value)
Drive rotates?
Yes
No
No
Setpoint, ON command, all

enable signals available?
No
Yes
Speed actual value

present? (d014)
CU torque limits high enough?
OFF
No
Yes
e
Speed sign
correct?
Slowly increase the torque limit

until the drive rotates or the
maximum value is reached
No
Yes
Yes
No
OFF
Check tracks A, B ; if
required interchange
Speed and torque

sign the same?
Drive overloaded,
locked, blocked?
Yes
Yes
Drive rotates in the

required direction?
No
OFF
ja
g
B
Fig. 5-3
118
No
Power-down unit
Power down
Remove cause
d
A
Commissioning the closed-loop speed control (A-B): Drive rotates, torque

Start-up
Does the
speed actual value
d014 and setpoint
d136 coincide?
Yes
h
Yes
No
Check:
pulse encoder setting;
torque limits
Setpoint
limiting?
No
Does the slave drive
run smoothly ?
Yes
No
Optimize the speed
controller
Yes
Yes
Required torque
selected?
Satisfactory result
attainable ?
No
No
Increase the torque limits by

between 5% to 10% until the
required torque is reached
OFF
i
Rated or maximum speed
reached?
No
Yes
Set the ramp-up and ramp-down
times of the speed ramp-function
generator of the basic drive
(e.g. CUMC: P462, P464)
Increase the speed

setpoint by 0.05 .. 0.1
up to max. speed
Fig. 5-4
Commissioning the closed-loop speed control (B-C): Speed controller optimization, torque limit

119
Start-up
Speed control
subsequently optimized?
No
Optimize controller
Yes
Does jog function ?
No

control
Yes
Fixed ratio?
ja
No
For each requested ratio, approach the maximum
demanded operating speed
Yes
Master speed = slave speed

d015 = d014 ?
No
Sources for
the ratio correct?
(H040, H048)
No

control
Yes
Yes
Change the ratio or reduce
the master setpoint
Setpoint speed = master setpoint /

d136 = d076 / d044 ?
Yes
Refer to the KP adaption,
speed controller
(Section 3.5.4)
Is synchronism used at very low

speeds?
No
For safety, check the pulse encoder
signals
Speed control start-up completed
Fig. 5-5
120
Commissioning the closed-loop speed control (C-end): Ratio

Start-up
The fault/error causes specified here represent help when troubleshooting
the closed-loop speed control; however, other causes are conceivable.
The following table provides an overview of frequently required basic drive
parameters when troubleshooting. Also refer to the setpoint- and actual
value channels in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.
Parameter
T400 log-on
COMBOARD log-on
Configuration, serial interface
Configuration, CB1 /CBP
Control word 1
Control word 2
Status word 1
Status word 2
Closed-loop control mode (V/Hz, ..)
Speed limit values
n_max
n_min
Torque limit values
M_max / M1
M_min / M2
Maximum current
Speed ramp-funct. gener. ramp-up time
ramp-down time
Reference speed
Reference torque
Establish factory setting
Motor identification routine
Table 5-2
CU 2
CU MC
P090
P091
P682 ...
P695 ...
r550
r551
r552
r553
P163
P452
P453,P457
P492
P498
Automatic
Automatic
P700 ...
P711 ...
r550
r551
r552
r553
P367
P452
P453
P263
P264
P128
P462
P464
P353
P354
P462
P464
P485
P052
P052
CU VC
DC-Master
r650
r652
r653
r654
P642, P632
P643, P633
List of important parameters for troubleshooting in the basic drive
a) Basic drive signals fault F080:

T400 correctly inserted, correct slot? T400 defective? SPA440 standard
software package on T400? Does T400 have to be logged-on? CB
correctly inserted, correct slot? CB defective?
b) Basic drive signals fault F070:
If parameterized (P91=3), correct interface module type? SCB1/2 inserted
correctly for the selected protocol (P682)? Correct slot? Hardware
defective? If required, replace the module
c) Drive does not rotate when an ON command is output and a setpoint
is present:
Check whether all of the required control word enable signals are present
(setpoint-, inverter-, ramp-function generator enabled, clockwise/counterclockwise direction of rotation, etc.):
Control word =
16#9C7F
Setpoint available (d074)? Ratio correctly entered (d136)? Setpoint
channel correctly set in the basic drive? Correct frequency limits?
d) Drive does not rotate, although all of the enable signals present:
Can the drive be operated V/Hz-controlled or closed-loop frequency
controlled?

121
Start-up
If required, establish the factory setting and carry-out a motor
identification routine.
e) No speed actual value:
Wiring correct (ground connections)?
For the slave drive: Are the speed encoder cables correctly connected
to the CU (for VC: Connector X132)?
For the master drive: T400 connecting cables O.K.?
Power supply voltage at the pulse encoder?
Are all of the signals available with respect to ground and do they have
the correct phase position (oscilloscope!)?
Yes:
Defective technology module? Replace the technology
module
No:
Check the pulse encoder and cables
f) Polarity of the torque setpoint- and speed actual value different:
Prerequisite: The motor is not driven:
If the drive converter and pulse encoder are correctly connected, for a
positive torque setpoint, the motor must turn clockwise (when viewing the
drive side), and a positive speed actual value must be obtained.
Otherwise, tracks A and B of the pulse encoder must be interchanged
(slave), or a negative value entered at H012 (rated speed, slave) (this is
accepted by powering-down and powering-up the unit!).
Note: For motors running under no-load conditions or under low
conditions, fluctuations can occur, also in the polarity (sign).
g) The drive does not rotate in the required direction:
Power-down the unit, change the phase sequence at the motor/drive
converter (point f) check!),
Reverse the direction of rotation, speed actual value by
- interchanging pulse encoder track A/B or,
- reverse the polarity at H012 (rated speed, slave)
h) Setpoint limiting is effective:
The quotient of the master setpoint (d074) and the ratio (d044) may not
exceed or fall below the setpoint limits, min/max frequency.
i) Poor optimization:
Execute the motor identification run and optimize the speed controller.
Are all of the units which are used O.K.?
Have all of the cables (especially the pulse encoder cables) been carefully
routed and shielded, especially the long encoder cables?
Does the subordinate (lower level) closed-loop torque control operate
perfectly (test parameterization, motor data, etc.)?
Is the driven load mechanically O.K. (no play, elasticity, etc.)?
Is the pulse encoder mechanically O.K.?
k) Checking the pulse encoder signals:
The pulse encoder signals must be perfectly received (no noise) when
using the angular synchronous control. We therefore urgently recommend
that the following measurements are made using an oscilloscope (directly
at the terminals of the T400; refer to Function Charts 60 and 70):
1) At all speeds, the phase shift between tracks A and B of an encoder
must be 1 s.
2) Noise spikes (duration > 0.5 s) may not be present in the vicinity of
the switching threshold of the pulse encoder input circuit, i.e. not in the
122

Start-up
range B:
U/V
10
B
3
Fig. 5-6:
Signals of an incremental encoder with HTL signal level
3) If a synchronizing pulse is used, we recommend that an oscillogram

plot is made of it.
5.3
Commissioning the angular control

The fault causes, specified here are intended to help troubleshoot the
angular control; however, other causes are conceivable.
a) The differential position actual value quickly moves away from 0 after
the actual value sensing has been enabled (angular controller):
The pre-control has been correctly set, if the differential position actual
value only very slowly drifts away from zero without the angular controller
intervening. The prerequisites for this are:
- the master drive runs smoothly (speed controller optimization),
- the master setpoint corresponds to the master drive speed,
- the slave drive runs smoothly (speed controller optimization),
- when the master setpoint is entered as analog signal, the adaption is
correct
b) If the differential position actual value is too high, possible causes
could be:
- Speed controller goes to its limit?
Yes: correctly select the torque limits, remove the overload
condition
- Angular controller goes to its limit?
Yes: ensure that
frequency limit > [speed setpoint (d136) +
angular controller limit
(H112)] !
- If required adapt the enable threshold of the angular controller,
H118
c) Check the ratio which has been set and the data on the present ratio.
If possible, check, for example, the synchronizing pulses and a connected
process or material web. For example, does it continually move away
from the required position?

123
Start-up
Start
Set the largest ratio which is used (or fixed)
Set the angular controller limit to H112 = 0.0

Set "reset position" constant to 0 ;
source H173 = 0
ON
Enter the largest possible speed master setpoint
Enable the angular controller: H173 = 1
Inhibit the ang.controller, H173 = 0
The position difference

d124 only drifts slowly away?
No
Yes
Pre-control has been optimized
Inhibit the angular controller, H173 = 0
Set the angular controller limit H112 to the

required value (generally between 0.1 and 0.3)
Switch the angular controller into the P controller
mode: H110 = 1
Set the KP gain H113 to 0.0
Position difference smoothing, H117 = 4 ms
Fig. 5-7:
124
Commissioning the angular control (start-A): Basic setting

Start-up
A
Enable angular controller: H173 = 1
Optimize the angular controller (as PI controller:

H110 = 0)
- KP: H113
- integral action time Tn: H111
(refer to the next section)
Position difference
tolerance?
No
Yes
No
Are different ratios used?
Yes
P-gain adaption (ratio)
- enter the largest/smallest ratio in H115 / H116
- after optimization, enter the associated KP values in H113 /
H114
a
Position difference
tolerance?
No
Yes
All of the different ratios

can be set?
No
Yes
All
required speeds can
be set?
No
Yes
Define the "reset position" source, H173
Angular controller
commissioning completed
Fig. 5-8
Commissioning the angular control (A-end): Ratio

125
Start-up
5.3.1
Information regarding optimizing the angular controller

Procedure:
1. If there are low to average demands placed on the control quality:
Set the experience value:
A KP of between 2 and 6 provides, for many applications, adequate
precision and dynamic performance.
2. For average up to high demands on the dynamic performance, or if
the experience value does not result in a satisfactory result:
-
Enter a master setpoint of 0
- Increase the P gain in steps of 2 until the slave drive starts to oscillate.
The speed actual value can be monitored at analog output 1 (terminals 97
/ 99). If the slave drive remains absolutely steady for a P gain > 2, then it
is necessary to excite oscillation by deflecting the motor from its quiescent
position. This can be realized, for example, by entering a jog setpoint
(H130, approx. 0.01; enable H171).
- Reduce the P gain H113 in steps of between 0.5 to 1 until oscillation
stops. Then multiply the value which was reached, by 0.5 to 0.7 and save
H113.
3. For high demands placed on the control quality:
- For high demands placed on the control quality, the speed actual
value must be extremely accurate, e. g. via analog output 1 (terminals 97
/ 99) trace the signal using a fast plotter or a storage oscilloscope. In this
case, the speed actual value is compensated by offset value H160 and
the analog output gain can be adapted using H161 so that the speed
ripple can be easily monitored.
- For average slave drive speeds, excite using the jog setpoint
(parameter H130 = 0.01), and monitor the transfer characteristic. The
simplest solution is to write an enable signal using a switch connected to
a digital input. Vary the P gain until a good result is achieved.
- Under certain circumstances, the optimization result can be improved
by increasing the position difference smoothing (H117). However,
generally the default value of 4 ms should be used.
4. Angular errors
- If the master setpoint is inaccurate, (e. g. if fed via an analog input or if
incorrectly adapted (rated speed)), the P control results in an angular
error which is dependent on the P gain. If this error causes disturbances,
the angular controller must be parameterized as PI controller (H110 = 0).
The integral action time should be set using parameter H111. Starting
with high values of Tn (approx. 5 s), the system should be optimized and
Tn changed towards lower values.
- If the ratio was incorrectly set, an enabled integral component would
drift away, i. e. would go to its limit.
126

Start-up
5.4
Commissioning synchronization
Prerequisite
When commissioning the synchronization, the speed- and angular control

must have been completely commissioned. The synchronizing function
must be inhibited (H174 = 0) if synchronization is not required.
Start
Set parameters (refer to Section 3.3.1)

- H091 ... H093 offset modes and correction pulse No.
- H100, H102 pulse numbers, master and slave
- H103 threshold for synchronism reached
- H174 source for synchronizing command
Offset setpoint = 0.0 (H050 = 0)

ON
Enable the speed- and angular controllers
Inhibit speed- and angular controller
Operate the master- and slave drive at approx.

30% of the rated speed
OFF
Number of
(do they slowly drift
apart)?
No
No
Yes
Slave drive runs smoothly?
Fig. 5-9
Commissioning synchronizing (start-A)

127
Start-up
Caution
The synchronizing function is only possible when the synchronizing

pulses are perfect (e. g. zero pulses). The cable routing should be
checked so that it provides immunity against noise and disturbances, and
is sufficiently shielded; the synchronizing pulse shapes must be checked
using an oscilloscope.
Start
Number of
and they do no drift
apart (1) ?
No
Yes
Offset value
d094 in the required range?
No
Wait,
if required increase the
correction pulse number
H093
(e. g. from 1 to 2)
No
Yes
|d095|
Offset - position difference < 32765
?
Are
offset values
required ?
No
Yes
Wait
Yes
Enter offset values

(refer to Section 3.4.2)
Are the
offset values
reached (1) ?
If synchronizing hasn't been realized

after approx. 30 s (|d095|>32765),
then an excessive system deviation
has built-up
Yes
End
Fig. 5-10
(1) Monitor the signals using an oscilloscope

or connect the synchronizing pulses to a
stroboscope
Commissioning synchronizing (A-end)
The synchronizing troubleshooting information represents a help when

troubleshooting; however, other causes are conceivable.
a) The number of synchronizing pulses from the master and slave are
not equal in any time unit:
-
128
Check the master setpoint

Check the ratio ( nset slave nact

Start-up
master d015)
b) The slave drive does not run smoothly after synchronizing has been
enabled:
-
If possible, reduce the correction pulse number H093 (minimum = 1),

Check the synchronizing pulse trains
Check the speed- and angular controller optimization; if required, reoptimize.
Check the master drive; if required, re-optimize the master drive
Investigate the mechanical system for play, torsional oscillations etc.
c) The number of synchronizing pulses from the master and slave are
not equal after synchronizing has been enabled, in any time unit:
-

- Check the displacement parameters (H050 to H067 and H090 to
H107)
Especially check the synchronizing pulse numbers
d) Synchronization has not been completed (absolute displacement

actual value - position difference > 32765)
-
Refer to c)
- If displacement d094 has an increasing trend, then the correcting
influence of the synchronizing is probably too low slightly
increase H093 (e.g. from 1 to 2); commence again at the start
e) Displacement setpoints are not reached:

-
5.5
Check the parameterization (H050 to H067 and H090 to H107)

(displacement setpoint limiting reached?)
Check the mechanical design and if required change
Check the response threshold H103
Trace function with symTrace-D7

With symTrace-D7, a product from the company sympat, it is possible
to establish a connection to an application based on D7-SYS (e.g. the
axial winder SPW420). With symTrace-D7 you are able to trace every
value in your CFC-application.The trace offers you two different options:
online and offline trace. With the online trace you can trace values in
intervals of a few ten-milliseconds. This is only practical for slowly
changing values, e.g. the diameter actual value.
If you want to trace quickly-changing values you need the offline trace.
With this option you can trace values within the shortest cycle-time.
Therefore the values must be saved in a buffer. Some special function
blocks have been placed in the project for that reason. You will find them
in the plan TRACE.
With the parameter L400 you are able to change the length of the tracebuffer. The standard setting is 2048 (double words). Furtheron with the
c401 and c402 two display parameters show you the state of the trace
coupling (-> see parameter list).
For more information please read the online help in symTrace-D7.

129
Literature
Literature
(VC), types of construction A to D, Order No.: 6SE7080-0Ad20, 1995.
module CB1, Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX84-0AK0, 1994.
3. Configuring Communications D7-SYS- SIMADYN D Manual, Order
No. 6DD1987-1AA1, Oct. 1997.
4. Hardware - SIMADYN D Manual, Order No. 6DD1987-1BA1, 1997.
130

Appendix
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H000
Language selection
d001
440
Software type (identification)
Software version
d002
2.1
H003
16#0000
H004
16#0000
d005
Fault message enable
Alarm message enable
d006
Error bits
d007
Alarm bits
H008
TechBoard parameter type (1= floating point)
BO
H009
T400 = baseboard
BO
H010
1024
Pulse
H011
1024
Pulse
Encoder pulse number, master (pulse number)
H012
1500.0
RPM
Rated speed, slave
H013
1500.0
RPM
d014
d015
Encoder pulse number, slave (pulse number)
Rated speed, master
Speed actual value, slave / H012
Speed actual value, master / H013
d016
Pulse
d017
Pulse
H018
16#7FE2
Slave speed sensing mode
H019
16#7F02
Master speed sensing mode
d020
Error code, slave speed sensing
d021
Error code, master speed sensing
W
W
H022
16#0000
Coarse pulse mode, slave sensing
H023
16#0000
Coarse pulse mode, master sensing
H024
COMBOARD parameter type (1= floating point)
BO
d025
Status of the digital inputs
d026
d027
d028 ..
d039
H040
H041
3047
H043
1.0
d044
d045
d046
Free visualization parameter. Selecting the source using

parameters L028 .. L039
Multiplexer selection, ratio
Fixed value, ratio
Actual ratio
Pulse
Ratio, numerator
Pulse
Ratio, denominator
H047
0.0
H048
H049
1.0
Fixed value, relative ratio
Multiplexer, displacement setpoint
H050
H051
3050
H052
2.5
H053
2.5
H054
+2048
H055
-2048
d056
H057
0175
ms
ms
Pulse
Source for the displacement setpoint
SD
Ramp-down time, displacement setpoint
SD
Maximum value, displacement setpoint (positive)
Pulse
Maximum value, displacement setpoint (negative)
Pulse
Source, setting signal for the displacem.ramp-function

gener.

131
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H058
3012
Source for the normalization factor, slave speed
H059
3013
Source for the normalization factor, master speed
d060
Ratio_1 (refer to Chart 80)
d061
Relative ratio
H062
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master 0, n_slave

0
H063
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master < 0, n_slave

0
H064
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master 0, n_slave <

0
H065
0.0
Pulse
Synchronizing displacem. setpoint n_master < 0, n_slave <

0
H066
0.0
Pulse
Fixed value, displacement setpoint
R
I
H067
3040
H068
3048
H070
15
Multiplexer for the master speed setpoint
H071
3070
Source for the master speed setpoint
H072
10
H073
0.0
ms
SD
d074
Actual master speed setpoint, smoothed
d076
Master speed setpoint (before smoothing)
H077
5088
Source for numerator (ratio to determine the displacement)
H078
5089
Source for the denominator (ratio to determine the

displacement)
H079
3129
Source for input DT1 (inertia compensation)
H080
H082
100
ms
Multiplexer selection, inertia compensation
H083
ms
d085
Smoothing time, inertia compensation
I
SD
Differentiating time, inertia compensation
Output DT1 (inertia compensation)
H086
1000
Fine setting, ratio, numerator
DI
H087
1000
Fine setting, ratio, denominator
DI
H088
Enable fine setting, ratio
BO
H090
Position correction mode
BO
H091
RETRIGGER synchronizing
BO
Synchronizing command, edge-controlled
BO
H092
H093
1.0
Pulse
d094
Pulse
d095
Pulse
Displacement actual value - differential position actual

value
Error identification, displacement sensing
d096
H097
0108
Source 2 for reset, position and displacement
H098
0101
Source for the synchronizing command 2
H100
4096
H101
0105
H102
4096
H103
20.0
H104
0109
H105
Pulse
Synchronizing pulse number, master
DI
Source to end start synchronization
Pulse
Synchronizing pulse number, slave
DI
Pulse
Response threshold synchronism reached
Source for controller enable
500
Pulse
Enable threshold, synchronizing, slave
H107
500
Pulse
Enable threshold, synchronizing, master
H108
3044
Source for the input KP characteristic angular controller
d109
H110
132
Angular controller enable status
BO
BO

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
ms
Start-up value
Significance
H111
500
H112
0.3
H113
1.0
P gain, angular controller KP_UE
H114
1.0
P gain, angular controller KP_UE_0
H115
0.0
Limit value ue_KP
H116
0.0
Limit value ue_KP_0
H117
4.0
Smoothing, differential position actual value
SD
H118
0.1
Source for the angular controller enable (n_slave)
H119
0.1
ms
d120
d121
Pulse
d122
d123
d124
Pulse
Integral action time, angular controller
Type
SD
Source for monitoring the master speed
Differential position actual value, smoothed
H125
1.0
Upper limit, speed ramp-function generator
H126
-1.0
Lower limit, speed ramp-function generator
H127
ms
Ramp-up time, speed setpoint
H128
ms
Ramp-down time, speed setpoint
ms
d129
H130
0.0
H131
0172
H132
1.0
Speed setpoint limiting positive
H133
-1.0
Speed setpoint limiting negative
H134
1.0
Speed controller output limiting positive
H135
-1.0
d136
d137
H138
H139
0193
ms
Speed controller output limiting negative
Actual speed setpoint
Smoothing time constant, angular controller output
Compute speed controller on T400
BO
H140
H141
10.0
P gain, speed controller KP
H142
10.0
P gain, speed controller KP_O
H143
0.0
Limit value n_KP
H144
0.0
Limit value n_KP_0
H145
200
ms
H146
4.0
ms
Smoothing, speed actual value
d147
d148
H149
10
ms
Pulse extension, synchronizing pulse master
SD
d150
d151
d152
Actual basic drive setpoint (n or M)
d153
KP speed controller
H154
3186
H155
10000
Source, slave position (synchronizing enable)
Resolution for the ratio
H156
H157
3056
3000
H158
3124
H159
3000
H160
0.0

133
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H161
1.0
H162
0.0
H163
1.0
H164
H165
Erase change memory

Key, change memory
d166
Status, change memory
H167
0173
H168
1000
H169
H170
Source, position reset 1

ms
BO
I
BO
I
Delay start synchronization
SD
Enable start synchronization
BO
Multiplexer, displacement reset
H171
Multiplexer, jog enable
H172
Multiplexer, angular controller enable
H173
Multiplexer, reset position
H174
Multiplexer, synchronizing command
d175
Actual value, displacement reset
BO
d176
Actual value, jog enable
BO
d177
Actual value, angular controller enable (control signal)
BO
d178
Actual value, reset position
BO
Actual value, synchronizing command
BO
H180
d179
0154
Source, enable synchronization, slave
H181
0097
Source, reset the slave position
H182
5088
Source, numerator of the ratio (slave)
H183
5089
Source, denominator of the ratio (slave)
H184
0098
Source, enable position difference correction
H185
0108
H186
3016
Source, slave position for absolute value
H187
0170
H188
0190
Source, enable synchronization, master
H189
0097
Source, reset the master position actual value
H190
3199
Source, position (synchronizing enable, master)
H191
0174
Source, synchronizing command
H192
3014
Source, actual speed (plausibility, slave speed)
H193
3136
Source, setpoint speed (plausibility, slave speed)
H195
3015
Source, actual speed (plausibility, master speed)
H196
3076
Source, setpoint speed (plausibility, master speed)
H197
5086
Source, fine ratio, numerator
H198
5087
Source, fine ratio, denominator
H199
3017
Source, position (absolute position, master)
H200
3137
H201
3000
H202
3146
H203
3000
H204
3129
Source, input KP characteristic (speed controller)
H205
3129
H206
3120
H207
3130
Source, jog setpoint
H208
0171
Source, jog enable
H209
10.0
Pulse extension, slave synchronizing pulse
H210
1.0
H211
0.0
134
ms

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
d212
H213
1.0
H214
0.0
d215
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H216
1.0
H217
0.0
d218
H219
1.0
H220
0.0
d221
H222
500
ms
ms

ms
d227
H228
d225
H226

d223
H224

d229
ms
R
SD
R
SD
R
SD
R
SD
H230
0000
H231
0000
H232
0000
H233
0000
H234
3118
Source, position difference (displacement calculation)
H235
3062
Source, position difference correction (displacem.

calculation)
H236
0097
Source, resetting the displacement calculation
H237
3051
H238
3062
H239
3044
Source, ratio (n_set)
H240
3136
H241
3176
H242
3137
Source f.the setting value of the I comp.(speed controller)
H243
0000
Source, setting signal I component of the speed controller
H244
3080
Source for the pre-control value of the speed controller
H245
0140
Source, enable pre-control (speed controller)
d246
Status word 1 CU
d300
Peer word 1 send
H303
Multiplexer for peer word 1 send
H304
H305
H306
Fixed value for peer word 1 send
H307
0.0
H308
0.0
H309
Enable peer-to-peer
BO
H310H325
Sources for status word1, bits 0-15
BO
d327
Status word1 peer
d329d333
PZD1 peer to PZD5 peer
H334
2329
Source for control word (send peer)
H335
2000

135
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H336
2000
H337
5000
Source, double word 1(send peer)
H338
3304
Source, float 1 (send Peer)
H339
H340
2000
H341
2000
H342
5000
Source, double word 2 (send peer)
H343
3305
Source, float 2 (send peer)
H344
H345
2303
d346
H360
20000
ms
H361
100
ms
H362
16#FFFF
H363
19200
d364
Baud
Peer control word (receive)
Power-on no time limit peer
SD
Time limit peer in operation
SD
Mask peer status
Baud rate peer-to-peer
DI
Peer status, receive block
H381
2026
H382
2500
H383
2502
H384
2027
H385
2504
H386
2506
H387
2510
H388
2508
H401
1.0
H403
1.0
H405
1.0
H407
1.0
H409
BO
H410H425
BO
H426H441
BO
H442
H443
H444
H445
H446
H447
H448
H449
d450
H451
1.0
d452
H453
1.0
d454
H455
1.0
d458
d459
d456
H457
136
1.0

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
d460
d461
W
W
H462
20000
ms
Power-on time limit COMBOARD
SD
H463
100
ms
Time limit COMBOARD operational
SD
H464
16#FFFF
Mask COMBOARD receive status
d465
Receive status COMBOARD
d466
d467
H470
0.0
H471
0.0
H472
0.0
H473
0.0
H480
Slave address COMBOARD (only for SRT400)
H481
H482
H483..
H493
COMBOARD parameter 3..13 (only for SRT400)
H495
COMBOARD parameters valid (only for SRT400)
BO
Status COMBOARD for operation in the SRT400
d496
H498
3000
H499
1.0
H500
3152
H501
H502
Source, setpoint for double word output
Setpoint normalization according to H498
Source for the 1st setpoint to the basic drive
1.0
Normalization, 1st setpoint for the basic drive
3000
Source for the 2nd setpoint for the basic drive
nd
H503
1.0
H504
3120
Source for the 3rd setpoint for the basic drive
Normalization, 2
setpoint for the basic drive
H505
1.0
Normalization, 3rd setpoint for the basic drive
H506
3153
th
H507
1.0
Normalization, 4 setpoint for the basic drive
H508
3080
H509
1.0
Normalization, 5th setpoint for the basic drive
H510
0650
BO
H511
0651
BO
H512
0652
BO
H513
0653
BO
H514
0654
BO
H515
0655
BO
H516
0656
BO
H517
0657
BO
H518
0658
BO
H519
0659
BO
H520
0660
BO
H521
0661
BO
H52
0662
BO
H523
0663
BO
H524
0664
BO
H525
0665
BO
H526H541
Source, control word 2 for the basic drive, bits0 .. 15

(with the exception of H535)
BO
BO
Mask to identify CU operational readiness
H535
0546
H542
16#0004

137
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H543
Test enable for the speed controller in the basic drive
H544
Multiplexer for speed controller enable
d545
Computation utilization for T1 (fastest time sector)
d546
d547
d548
d549
Computation utilization for total CPU load
H550
1.0
d551
H552
1.0
d553
H554
1.0
BO
d555
d556
Control word from the basic drive
Source, control word from the basic drive
H557
H558
2571
H559
2574

I
I
d560
d561
d562
Receive status, basic drive interface
H563
2572
H564
2573
H565
2575
H567
2582
Source for double word (high) from the basic drive
H568
2581
Source for double word (low) from the basic drive
H569
5567
Source for double word from the basic drive
d570
Double word from the basic drive, normalized
d571d585
14 process data from the basic drive
H587
5567
H588
1.0
d589
H590
2577
d591
Source for double word for type conversion (N4 R)
Normalization factor for H587
Double word from CU after type conversion (N4R)
Source for PZD for type conversion (IR)
Result of type conversion (IR) from H590
H592
2571
Source to evaluate the operational readiness
H593
0547
Source for operational readiness, basic drive
d601
Digital output, terminal 46 synchronism reached
d602
Digital output, terminal 47 angular controller at its limit
BO
d603
Digital output, terminal 48 angular controller enabled
BO
d604
Digital output, terminal 49 fault
BO
d607
BO
BO
d608
H609
Mask to invert digital inputs
d610
BO
d611
BO
d612
BO
d613
BO
d614
BO
d615
BO
d616
BO
d617
BO
138
16#0000
BO

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H618
H619
H620
3618
H621
0000
H622
3619
H623
0000
H631
0105
H632
0116
H633
0109
H634
0003
H635
0004
H636
0000
H637
H638
H639
H640
H650
H651
H652
H653
H654
H655
H656
H657
H658
H659
H660
H661
H662
H663
H664
H665
Analog output 1
d666
d667
H668
Analog output 2
ms
H669
ms
H700
H701
9600
H703
Address USS slave
H704
USS slave, 4-wire operation
BO
d705
Status USS slave
d706
PZD1 receive USS
d707
PZD2 receive USS
Enable USS slave
BO
Baud rate USS slave
DI
I
H708
2000
Source for 1st PZD send USS
H709
2000
Source for 2nd PZD send USS
d801
d810
PZD1 to PZD10 from COMBOARD
H811
2801
H812
2804
H813
2802
H814
2803

139
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H815
2805
H816
2806
H817
2807
Source for setpoint integer REAL from CB
Result integer REAL from CB
R
I
d818
H819
2809
Source, high word of the double word from CB
H820
2810
Source, low word of the double word from CB
Double word from CB (N4 format) as REAL value
Source for the 1st actual value at CB
d821
H822
3446
nd
H823
3447
Source for the 2
actual value at CB
H824
3448
Source for the 3rd actual value at CB
H825
3449
Source for the 4th actual value at CB
H826
3000
Source for the actual value (REAL integer) at CB
H828
3000
Source for the 5th actual value at CB(word o.double word)
H829
1.0
Normalization for H828 (REAL N4)
H831
2442
H832
2822
H833
2823
H834
2444
H835
2824
H836
2825
H837
2827
H838
2000
H839
2828
H840
2829
H841
1.0
Normalization for double word from CB
H900
0000
H901
0000
H902
0000
H903
0000
H904
0000
H905
0000
H906
0000
H907
0000
H908
0000
H909
0000
H910
0000
H911
0000
H912
0000
H913
0000
d921
d930
PZD1 to PZD10 for output at CB
I
W
H960
H961
H962
H963
H964
H965
H971
16#0000
H972
16#0000
H973
16#0000
H974
16#0000
140

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Type
H981
H982
H983
H984
H990
0.0
H991
0.0
H992
0.0
H993
0.0
H994
0.0
H995
0.0
H996
0.0
H997
0.0
d998
134
Identification of SIMADYN D components
d999
121
Identification of software for SIMOVIS
L028
3234
Source for the 1st display parameter, REAL type (d028)
L029
3330
Source for the 2nd display parameter, REAL type (d029)
rd
L030
3332
Source for the 3 display parameter, REAL type (d030)
L031
3819
Source for the 4th display parameter, REAL type (d031)
L032
0193
Source for the 1st display parameter, BOOL type (d032)
L033
0196
Source for the 2nd display parameter, BOOL type (d033)
L034
0105
Source for the 3rd display parameter, BOOL type (d034)
L035
0116
Source for the 4th display parameter, BOOL type (d035)
L036
2500
Source for the 1st display parameter, integer type (d036)
L037
2502
Source for the 2nd display parameter, integer type (d037)
L038
2605
Source for the 1st display parameter, word type (d038)
L039
2606
Source for the 2nd display parameter, word type (d039)
new parameters, refers to Chapter 3.2.3
L098L112,
c114c119,
L120L123,
c125,
L200L212,
c214c219,
L220L223,
c225,
c300,
L301L302
L400
2048
c401
c402
Length buffer
Coupling Trace
BO
Status Trace
L605
5000
Source, double word quantity (conversion into 2 words)
L606
2000
L607
2000
L608
2000
L609
2000
L646
2000
Source for integer REAL conversion
L647
3000
Source for REAL integer conversion
L698
0000
L699
0000

141
Appendix
Para.
Factory set
Units
Start-up value
Significance
st
Type
L700
0001
Source, 1 input AND logic gate 1
L701
0001
L702
0001
L703
0001
Source, 1st input AND logic gate 2
L704
0001
L705
0001
L706
3000
L707
3000
L708
0000
L709
0000
Source of the 1st edge evaluation block
L710
0000
L711
0000
rd
L712
0000
Source, 3 input OR logic gate 1
L713
0000
L714
0000
L715
0000
Source, 3rd input OR logic gate 2
L716
3000
L717
3000
L718
0000
L728
0000
Source, power-on delay 1
L729
100.0
Duration, power-on delay 1
SD
L730
0000
L731
100.0
L732
0000
ms
ms
Source, power-off delay 1
Duration, power-off delay 1
SD
Source for the 1st inverter

nd
L733
0000
Source for the 2
L734
0000
L735
0000
L738
0000
Source to inhibit the 1st PT1 element
L739
2.0
Quality of the bandstop filter
L740
3000
L741
20.0
L742
3000
Source for the input signal of the bandstop filter
L743
3002
Source for the bandstop frequency of the bandstop filter
L744
3000
Source for the X input of the comparator
L745
3000
Source for the Y input of the comparator
L746
3001
Source for the upper limit value of the limiter
L747
3000
Source for the input quantity of the limiter
L748
3001
Source for the lower limit value of the limiter
L749
3000
Source for the input, comparator with hysteresis
L750
3001
Source for the range, comparator with hysteresis
L751
0.1
Hysteresis of the comparator with hysteresis
L752
3003
Source for comparison value comparator with hysteresis
L753
3000
Source for input, free 2-point characteristic
L754
0.0
L755
0.0
L756
1.0
L757
1.0
L760
2000
L761
2000
Source for high word (double word REAL)
L762
2000
Source for low word (double word REAL)
142
inverter
Source for the 1st PT1 element

ms
Filter time constant for the 1st PT1 element
I
SD

Appendix
Para.
Factory set
L763
1.0
L764
2000
L765
1.0
L766
3000
Units
Start-up value
Significance
Normalization factor for L761, L762
Type
R
Source for word REAL conversion
Source for REAL N2 conversion
L767
1.0
L786
3000
Source, 1st input, REAL adder 1
L787
3000
L788
3000
st
L789
3000
Source, 1 input, REAL adder 2
L790
3000
L791
3000
L792
3000
nd
L793
3000
Source, 2
L794
3000
L795
3000
Source, 2nd input, REAL subtractor 2
L796
3001
nd
input, REAL subtractor 1
L797
3001
Source, 2
input, REAL multiplier 1
L798
3001
L799
3001
L800
3001
Source, 2nd input, REAL multiplier 2
L801
3001
L802
3001
L803
3001
Source, 2nd input, REAL divider 1
L804
3001
nd
L805
3001
Source, 2
L810
2000
L812
2001
Source, 1st input, integer divider 1
L813
2001
Source, 2nd input, integer divider 1
L814
2001
Source, 1st input, integer multiplier 1
nd
input, REAL divider 2
input, integer multiplier 1
L815
2001
Source, 2
L816
2000
Source, high word (word double word)
L817
2000
Source, low word (word double word)
L818
3000
Source, input free integrator
L819
1.0
Upper limit, integrator
L820
-1.0
Lower limit, integrator
L821
3000
L822
1000
L823
0000
Source for the integrator setting signal
L824
3000
L825
3000
L826
0000
L827
3000
L828
3000
L829
0000
L830
0000
L831
0000
L832
0001
L833
0000
L834
0000
L835
0001
Source, setting value integrator

ms
Integration time, integrator

I
SD
143
Appendix
144

Changes
Changes
Edition 11/98
1. Parameters d129, H138, H668, H669 supplemented in the

Documentation
2. Factory setting, parameters H544, H651-H656, H660-H662
3. Pulse ratio no longer used (this is now automatically generated)
4. Definition, speed ratio inverted
Edition 06/99
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Edition 05/01
1. For release V2.1: Angular synchronism can also be implemented

using 2 absolute value encoders by comparing the two position
actual values
Can be freely wired using BICO technology (many new parameters!).

Digital input quantities, also available inverted.
Bi-directional outputs can be de-activated.
Possible to inhibit analog inputs and outputs.
Freely-available blocks.
The ratio resolution can be changed.
Different data types for the peer-to-peer interface.
Double words can be received and sent.
Monitoring parameters are not identical with version 2.01 (are in some
instances used as parameter which can be changed).

145
Function charts for the standard software package Angular Synchronous Control SPA440
Contents
Chart
General
Contents
General symbols
Control symbols
Constants
10
20
25
30
40
T400
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Binary inputs
50
51
52
53

Slave drive
Master drive
Absolut encoders
Plausibility check
Speed ratio
60
70
72
75
80
Control
Control bits
Angle controller
90
100
110
115
120
Inverter interface
Faults and alarms
Process data receiption
Status words
Control words
150
160
170
180
220
230
1
General
Contents
Contents
Chart
Communication
COMBOARD reception
COMBOARD transmission
USS slave
300
310
400
410
420
430
440
450

Logical gates
Arithmetic and display parameter
Type conversion
460
470
480
490
Multiplexer
setpoint channels
Analog outputs
Binary control
CB actual values
CB status words
Peer to peer
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 10 -
Symbol
Explanations
Parameter name
(factory setting)
Hxyz
Miscellaneous
Logic and arithmetic
Symbol
technology parameter
e.g. H231
Explanations
Symbol
OR operation
type
Explanations
Selection
Parameter name
H123 (fact.)
KR (chart)
dsiplay parameter
e.g. d123
&
R-S-Flip-Flop
e.g. with 5 inputs
AND operation
type
Multiplexer
1
Parameter Name
dxyz
set
reset
3
4
Selection

H123
Switch selection with 2

inputs
Logical inversion
X2
Parameter name
H123 (fact.)
K (chart)
Multiplication
X1
X1
+
-
Y = X1 * X2
Dividor
Parametername
H234 (fact.)
B (chart)
X1
Y=
X2
Sign determination
Y = sign ( X )
X2
X2
Excample:
Adder
parameter name
(factory setting)
X
X1
Y = X1 + X2
Edge detector
Generats a pulse for the
positive edge of X
S.Setpoint speed
parameter
number
H123 (3412)
KR (120,7)
Data type symbol:

B
BOOL
K
16bit
KK 32bit
KR floating point
A+
Absolute value
X
A-
Y=|X|
B+
(chart, sector) for

the factory setting
BN+
Negation
X
-1
Y= -X
1
Allgemeines
Allgemeine Symbole
N-
Pluse encoder
Here: 2 tracks A, B and
zero pulse N;
interface RS422
coarse
pulse
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 20 -
Symbol
Explanations
Symbol
PT1
Explanations
Td
DT1
Explanations
X1
Low pass filter

T time constant
Y1
input
Symbol
High pass filter

T = smoothing time
constant
time constant
output

(X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2)
Y2
input at the
upper limit
upper
limit
Limiter
x
input
output
lower
limit
input at the
lower limit

quantity exceeds the limits
X2
Xmin
setting value
set
hysteresis
interval limit
Limiter function
X
X>Y
X>Y
Y=X
X=Y
X<Y
Y<X
Xmin <= X <= Xmax

input
Xmax
input
output
Ramp function with

setting function

hysteresis
T1
Switch on delay T1
ramp-up time
ramp-down
time
T1
proportional gain
Switch off delay T1

Kp
Tn
integrator
value
system
deviation
100 %
1.0
output
Converter
floationg point
1
2
Allgemeines
Regelungstechnische Symbole
PI controller
enable
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 25 -
Fixed values for free usage

Constants
Floating point (R)
Setpoints fixed values
16bit integer (I, W)
32bit integer (DI)
B0000
Logisch 0
Constant Ratio
(1.0)
H043
KR3043
Constant R1
(0.0)
H990
KR3990
Constant I1
(0)
H960
K2960
Constant DI1
(0)
H981
KK5981
B0001
Logisch 1
Rel.Ratio Const
(1.0)
H049
KR3049
Constant R2
(0.0)
H991
KR3991
Constant I2
(0)
H961
K2961
ConstantDI2
(0)
H982
KK5982
K2000
Wort 0
Const.Displacem.
(0.0)
H066
KR3066
Constant R3
(0.0)
H992
KR3992
Constant I3
(0)
H962
K2962
Constant DI3
(0)
H983
KK5983
K2001
Wort 1
Const. Ref.Speed
(0.0)
H073
KR3073
Constant R4
(0.0)
H993
KR3993
Constant I4
(0)
H963
K2963
Constant DI4
(0)
H984
KK5984
16#FFFF
K2002
Wort 16#FFFF
Constant R5
(0.0)
H994
KR3994
Constant I5
(0)
H964
K2964
Constant R6
(0.0)
H995
KR3995
Constant I6
(0)
H965
K2965
ConstantW1
(0)
H971
K2971
Constant W2
(0)
H972
K2972
Constant W3
(0)
H973
K2973
Constant W4
(0)
H974
K2974
KK5000
Doppelwort 0
KK5001
Doppelwort 1
Constant R7
(0.0)
H996
KR3996
0.0
KR3000
Real 0.0
Constant R8
(0.0)
H997
KR3997
0.5
1.0
2.0
-1.0
1
General
Constants
KR3003
KR3001
KR3002
KR3004
Real 0.5
Real 1.0
Real 2.0
Real -1.0
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 30 -
General settings
Language select
(0)
H000
TechBoard ParTyp
(0)
H008
COMBOARD ParTyp
(0)
H024
0 german
1 english
Select the data type for the

transmission of floatingpoint parameters
CPU load
CPU load T1
d545
Software Type
d001
CPU load T2
d546
Sofware Version
d002
CPU load T3
d547
CPU load T4
d548
SIMADYN D
d998
CPU load T5
d549
SIMOVIS SW ID
d999
T400 = Baseboard
(0)
H009
Erase EEPROM
(0)
H164
Use T400 as Baseboard

(operation without inverter with
additional T400; parameter
numbers differ!
H P; L U)
Key EEPROM
(0)
H165
Status word angular

synchronous control
Bit 2
Bit 3
Speed controller limitation (B0134) [120,8]
Bit 4
Speed deviation master (B0162) [75,6]
Bit 5
Speed deviation slave (B0160) [75,6]
Bit 6
Timeout inverter (B0502) [150,5]
Bit 7
Timeout CB (B0405) [400,6]
Bit 8
Timeout Peer (B0360) [300,7]
Bit 9
Synchr. pulse Slave (10ms) (B0209) [60,8]
Bit 10
Synchr. pulse Master (10ms) (B0149) [70,7]
Bit 11
Slaveposition > enable threshold (B0154) [60,3]
Bit 12
Displacement updated (B0106) [100,8]
Bit 13
Warning (B0004) [160,8]
Bit 14
Fault (B0003) [160,6]
Bit 15
This operation can not be canceled !
General
Bit 1
Running synchron (B0105) [100,8]
Restore factory settings:
All parameter changes are deleted and set to the

original factory setting.
Bit 0
Enable speed controller (B0140) [120,5]

Angle controller limitation (B0116) [110,8]
State EEPROM
d166
Set
H165 = 165
H164 = 1
Status of angle controller (B0109) [90,7]
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
State of Control
d005
K2005
Status word angular synchr.
7
Function diagram
8
- 40 -
AE1 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H210
10 V
Terminal 90
Terminal 91
12 bit
+
-
PT1
PT1
5V
Q.setAE1_Null
5V
Q.setAE2_Null
PT1
PT1
5V
Q.setAE3_Null
T400
Analog inputs
H232 (0000)
B (30,2)
AE4 Offset
(0.0)
H220
AE4 act. value
d221
KR3227
AE1
T1
1,2 ms
AE2
T2
4,8 ms
AE3
T2
4,8 ms
AE4
T2
4,8 ms
AE2 smoothed
AE3 smoothed
AE4 Filter Time

(0 ms)
H228
AE4 smoothed
d229
KR3229
PT1
cykle time
set output zero
Q.setAE4_Null
Task
AE3 smoothed
d227
AE3 act. value

d218
5V
Input
AE3 Filter Time

(0 ms)
H226
PT1
Hardware filter
500 s
KR3225
Task cycle time:
set output zero
12 bit
+
-
AE2 smoothed
d225
AE4 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H219
10 V
AE2 Iact. value

d215
H231 (0000)
B (30,2)
AE3 Offset
(0.0)
H217
12 bit
+
-
AE2 Filter Time

(0 ms)
H224
PT1
Hardware filter
500 s
Terminal 95
AE2 Offset
(0.0)
H214
AE1 smoothed
set output zero
AE3 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H216
Terminal 94
H230 (0000)
B (30,2)
Hardware filter
500 s
10 V
KR3223
PT1
12 bit
+
-
AE1 smoothed
d223
AE1 act. value

d212
AE2 Scalefactor
(1.0)
H213
10 V
AE1 Filter Time

(500 ms)
H222
Hardware filter
500 s
Terminal 92
Terminal 93
AE1 Offset
(0.0)
H211
H233 (0000)
B (30,2)
AE4 smoothed
set output zero
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 50 -
T_Filter_DAC1
(0 ms)
H668
Analog output 1
d666
10 V
5V
S. Analog Outp1
KR3666
H620 (3618)
KR (510,4)
12 Bit
D
PT1
Terminal 97
10 V
Terminal 99
S.set DAC1 zero
H621 (0000)
B (30,2)
set output zero
T_Filter_DAC2
(0 ms)
H669
H160
(0.0)
Aout 1 Offset
H161
(1.0)
Aout 1 Scalefact
-10 V
Analog output 2
d667
10 V
5V
KR3667
S.Analog Outp2
H622 (3619)
KR (510,7)
12 Bit
D
PT1
Terminal 98
10 V
Terminal 99
S.set DAC2 zero
1
T400
Analog outputs
H623 (0000)
B (30,2)
set output zero
H162
(0.0)
Aout 2 Offset
H163
(1.0)
Aout 2 Scalefact
-10 V
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 51 -
Binary inputs (T3)
Coarse pulse inputs (T3)

BinInput1 Pin53
d610
24V
Terminal 53
1
B0620
24V
Terminal 84
5V
BinInput 1 inv.
BinInput 2
B0621
BinInput 2 inv.
B0612
BinInput 3
B0622
BinInput 3 inv.
B0613
BinInput 4
B0623
BinInput 4 inv.
B0607
Coarse pulse 1
B0635
Coarse pulse 1 inv.
B0608
Coarse pulse 2
B0636
Coarse pulse 2 inv.
Pin65 Coarse P2
d608
24V
B0611
5V
Terminal 65
5V
BinInput3 Pin55
d612
24V
Terminal 55
5V
1
BinInput4 Pin56
d613
24V
Terminal 56
5V
State dig.Inputs
d025
Bit 0 BinInput 1
Terminal 57
5V
Bit 2 BinInput 3
B0614
BinInput 5
B0624
BinInput 5 inv.
Bit 3 BinInput 4
Bit 4 BinInput 5
Bit 5 BinInput 6
BinInput6 Pin58
d615
24V
Terminal 58
5V
Bit 6 BinInput 7
Bit 7 BinInput 8
B0615
BinInput 6
B0625
BinInput 6 inv.

BinInput7 Pin59
d616
24V
Terminal 59
5V

B0616
BinInput 7
B0626
BinInput 7 inv.

BinInput8 Pin60
d617
24V
Terminal 60
5V
K2025
Bit 1 BinInput 2
BinInput5 Pin57
d614
24V
T400
Binary inputs
BinInput 1
BinInput2 Pin54
d611
Terminal 54
24V
B0610
5V
Pin84 Coarse P1
d607

B0617
BinInput 8
B0627
BinInput 8 inv.
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 52 -
Bidirectional input/output
enable BiDir1
(1)
H637
enable BiDir3
(1)
H639
Pin46 Input
d601
B0601
Terminal 46
B0631
Terminal 46 inv
S.BiDir Out 1
Pin48 Input
d603
B0603
Terminal 48
B0633
Terminal 48 inv
S.BiDir Out 3
H631 (0105)
B (100,8)
Terminal 46
enable BiDir2
(1)
H638
H633 (0109)
B (90,7)
enable BiDir4
(1)
H640
Pin47 Input
d602
Terminal 48
B0602
Terminal 47
B0632
Terminal 47 inv
S.BiDir Out 2
Pin49 Input
d604
B0604
Terminal 49
B0634
Terminal 49 inv
S.BiDir Out 4
H632 (0116)
B (110,7)
Terminal 47
H634 (0003)
B (160,6)
Terminal 49
Binary outputs
Warning:
Terminal 45
24V
S.Bin.Output1

drivers
H637 ... H640 are initialization parameters.

Modification takes places after the next
power on.
H635 (0004)
B (160,8)
Terminal 51
If bidirectional outputs are enabled as

output the corresponding input value is
inverted!
E.g.: H640 = 1 d604 displays the inverse
level to terminal 49
S.Bin.Output2
H636 (0000)
B (30,2)
Terminal 52
T400
Binayry outputs and bidirectional outputs
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 53 -
Mode Slave Speed

Bit 6 (11)
H018
incremental
encoder
Pulses Slave
(1024)
H010
81
82
83
84
A
B
N
Pulses per
revolution
Mode Slave Speed

Bits 0..5, 8..15
H018
CoarsePulsSlave
(0)
H022
Nom. Speed Slave
Coarse pulse
Mode Slave Speed

Bit 7 (1)
H018
Track A
Track B
Coarse
pulses
handling
Zero pulse
H181 (0097)
B (90,3)
H180 (0154)
B (60,4)
B0186
PT1
correction pulses [100, 6]
n_Slave norm.
KR3146
Speed slave
smoothed
KR3016
Position slave
Position sensing
Slave Position
d016
Enable
synchronization
Actual value
position
T SyncPulseSlave
(10 ms)
H209
position > threshold
B0153
0
Position set for

synchr. pulse
B0152
0.0
B0209
SyncSlave 10ms
B0150
SyncImpuls Slave
Position difference correcting value

1
Pos.Correct Mode
(1)
H090
position difference [60.8]

Displacem. Reset
d175
S.Corr.Pos.Diff.
B0175
S.Slave Denomin H183 (5089)

KK (80,7)
L099=0
Enable, abs. enc
Correct position difference
H184 (0098)
B (90,3)
S.Slave Numerat. H182 (5088)

KK (80,7)
Position difference
calculation
Position
difference
Speed ratio
Numerator
Denominator
Tfilt Pos.Differ
(4 ms)
H117 d124
Pos.Diff. filt
-1
Enable, position
sensing with
incr. encoders
KR3124
PT1
1
KR3118
KR3117
L098=1
1
2
Slave
KR3018
actual value displacement [100, 5]
S.Reset PosDiff2
H185 (0108)
B (90,7)
Speed slave
Reset
position < 0
S.ResetPos.Diff1
H187 (0170)
B (520,2)
KR3014
Tfilt Speed
(4.0ms)
H146
B0154
H154 (3186)
KR (60,2)
slave position
negativ
Speed
S.EnableSynSlave
KR3186
H058 (3012)
KR (60,5)
Mode
Synchronization
S.SlaveSynchrPos
Absolut pos. slave
Speed Slave
d014
S.Norm. n_Slave
S.ResetSlavePos.
Thresh.SyncSlave
(500.0)
H105
H186 (3016)
KR (60,7)
Error position
sensing slave
B0020
K2020
Nominal speed
S.Abs.Pos.Slave
KR3012
(1500.0)
H012
Error Code Slave

d020
Error code
Pulses
from inverter
Position sensing slave

drive
pulses slave
K2010
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
position
difference
smoothed
position difference
inv. position difference
Position difference from absolut encoders [72,8]
7
Function diagram
8
- 60 -
Position sensing
master drive
H059 (3013)
KR (70,4)
KR3013
Nom.Speed Master
(1500.0)
H013
Terminal
A+
AB+
BN+
NCoarse
pulse
62
86
63
87
64
88
65
+
-
Speed Master
d015
Q.Norm. n_Master
KR3015
Speed
Position
Coarse pulse
handling
KR3019
n_Master normalized
KR3017
Position master
Master Position
d017
Pulses
+
+
-
Synchronization
S.Abs.Pos.Master
Abs. value master position
H199 (3017)
KR (70,7)
KR3199
Example: RS422 encoder
B0199
H023
(0)
CoarsePulsMaster
ThreshSyncMaster
(500.0)
H107
Mode MasterSpeed
(16#7F02)
H019
Mode
0
S.MasterSynchPos
x
0.0
B0189
H188 (0190)
B (70,3)
B0188
Position master < 0
depending on the master
position
Enable
synchronization
B0149
SyncMaster 10ms
B0148
SyncImpuls master
Errorcode master
d021
S.ResetMasterPos
H189 (0097)
B (90,3)
Position set for

synchronization
S.EnablSynMaster
H190 (3017)
KR (70,7)
Position master negativ
T SyncPulsMaster
(10 ms)
H149
master pos > threshold

B0190
Speed master
Nominal speed
Error code
B0021
Error position sensing master
K2021
Error code master
Reset
Pulses Master
(1024)
H011
1
2
Master
K2011
Pulses master
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 70 -
Position difference from incremental encoders [60, 7]
L100
...
L106
L108
...
L112
Sensing
Absolut
encoder
Y
YP
YRC
SLAVE
c114
KR4115
c116
c125
KR4116
YSP
YF
B0211
QF
YFC
Terminals
76 - 79
Tfilt position diff. (4 ms)

d124
H117 Pos.Diff. filt
KR4114
c115
0
1
L120
PT1
KR4300
L301
L123
L122
c118
KR4125
L121
c300
KR3124
Position diff..
filtered
KR3118
Position diff.
L302
L099
Enable Abs-Enc
c119
Enable absolut encoders:

L098=0 and L099=1
L200
...
L206
L208
...
L212
Sensing
Absolut
encoder
c214
Y
c215
YP
c216
YRC
MASTER
YSP
KR4214
KR4215
KR4216
QF
YF
B0212
YFC
Terminals
72 -75
c225
0
1
L220
KR4225
L221
L223
L222
c218
Settings, absolut encoders
c219
Only useful for linear axis!

(no range overflow)
Sensing, absolut encoders

Master and Slave
Slave
c114
c115
c116
c118
c119
M aster
c214
c215
c216
c218
c219
Speed actual value

P o sitio n co unter
Number o f ro tatio ns
Erro r co de
Erro r status
Slave
L100
L101
L102
L103
L104
L105
L106
L107
L108
L109
L110
L111
L112
L120
L121
L122
L123
M aster
L200
L201
L202
L203
L204
L205
L206
L207
L208
L209
L210
L211
L212
L220
L221
L222
L223
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Reso lutio n per turn

Number o f turns
P receding zero bits
A larm bit po sitio n
Clo ck frequency
Enco der type
Data co ding
Co ntro l wo rd
Gearbo x ratio
No rmalizatio n po sitio n
No rmalizatio n speed
P o sitio n o ffset
Upper limit speed
Offset, number o f ro tatio ns
Selectio n M UL/DIV
7
Function diagram
- 72 -
dn enable Max.
(0.1)
H118
0.1
H192 (3018)
KR (60,8)
nSlave > Range

B0192
X>Y
S.n_Slave Compar
X
X=Y
B0193
X<Y
B0194
nSlave < Range
S.n_ref SlaveCmp
Slave speed within enable range
B0160
Speed deviation Slave
H193 (3136)
KR (115,4)
dn Master Max.
(0.1)
H119
H195 (3019)
KR (70,7)
X=Y
B0196
X<Y
Master speed within enable range
B0197
nMaster < Range
S.n_ref MastComp
Speed deviation Master
nMaster > Range

B0195
X>Y
X
Speed deviation
0.1
B0162
S.n_Master Compar
B0161
H196 (3076)
KR (115,2)
1
2
Plausibility check
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 75 -
Addition. Ratio
(0.0)
H047
S. Addition.Ratio
KR3047
H041 (3047)
KR (80,1)
Ratio 1
d060
S.Ratio
Ratio Resolution
(10000)
H155
KR3060
H067 (3040)
KR (500,3)
S.relative Ratio
enable FineRatio
(0)
H088
Ratio relative
d061
H068 (3048)
KR (500,5)
KR3061
Ratio Numerator
d045
Ratio
d044
Calculation of
speed ratio
components
KK5088
Ratio numerator
KK5089
Ratio denominator
relative ratio
d046
RatioDenominator
KR3044
actual ratio
S.FineRatioNumer
Fine Ratio Numer
(1000.0)
H086
KK5086
H197 (5086)
KK (80,4)
fixed value numerator
S.FineRatioDenom
Fine Ratio Denom
(1000.0)
H087
1
2
Speed ratio
KK5087
H198 (5087)
KK (80,4)
fixed value denominator
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 80 -
Reset position and displacement

S.Pos.Reset_1
DelayStartSynchr.
(1000ms)
H168
Reset Position
d178
H167 (0173)
B (520,7)
EnableStartSynch
(0)
H169
S.Pos.Reset_2
H097 (0108)
B (90,7)
B0097
Automatic
synchronization after
power on
Position + displacement reset
B0101
StartSynchr
B0100
inv.StartSynchr
S.StopStartSynch H101 (0105)

B (100,8)

Synchron.Command
d179
S.enablePosCtr11
S.Synchr.Comd2
B0179
H191 (0174)
B (520,8)
S.enablePosCTR12
S.Synchr.Command
H098 (0101)
B (90,7)
B0098
synchroning command
Enable angle controller
EnableSpeedCntrl
d177
H131 (0172)
B (520,5)
B0177
enable Pos.Cntrl
d109
&
H139 (0193)
B (75,5)
B0109
status of angle controller
B0108
angle controller inhibit
Enable inverter speed controller
Mask CU ready
(16#0004)
H542
TestEnable CU n
(0)
H543
S.en.Speed CU2
H593 (0547)
B (560,4)
&
S.en.Speed CU1 H592 (2571)

K (170,3)
n-controller CU
&
B0546
16 bit
bitwise ANDed
(at least one bit = 1 of the
AND operation)
1
Control
Conrol bits
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 90 -
SyncPulsesMaster
(4096)
H100
S.Position Diff1
H234 (3118)
KR (60,7)
S.Position Diff2
Displ.- Pos.diff
d095
Displacement - position
KR3234
H235 (3062)
KR (100,3)
Direction depending displacement
actual value
position difference

y
n_Slave norm.
[60,8]
B0110
n_Slave > 0
B0111
n_Slave = 0
B0112
SyncImpuls Master[70,8]
Master has synchronized
SyncImpuls Slave [60,7]
Slave has synchronized
B0113
n_Master > 0
B0114
n_Master = 0
B0115
n_Master < 0
Ratio numerator
S.DisplaceDenom H078 (5089)

KK (80,7)
Ratio denominator
S.ResetDisplacem
H236 (0097)
B (90,3)
KR3062
KR3091
Correction pulses
act.Displacement
d094
Actual value displacement
KR3094
Actual value
displacement
B0106
Displacement
determined
H091
(0)
SynchrRetrigMode
DisplaceMas-Sla+
H063 (0.0)
Correction pulses
Reset displacement
DisplaceMas+Sla+
H062 (0.0)
Error code displacem.

K2096
S.DisplaceNumer. H077 (5088)

KK (80,7)
difference
KR3095
ErrorCode Displ.
d096
n_Slave < 0
y
x
Displacement
- position difference
Displacement calculation
Synchronization command [90,8]
n_Master
normalized [70,8]
SyncPulses Slave CorrectionPulses

(4096)
(1.0)
H102
H093
direction depending
displacement
H092
(0)
Synchr.Edge Mode
Threshold Synchr
(20.0)
H103
0.0
DisplaceMas+SlaH064 (0.0)
Synchronism reached
&
B0105
DisplaceMas- SlaH065 (0.0)
Actual value displacement [100,8]

KR (110,2)
X>Y
B0102
Displacement > setpoint
X=Y
B0103
Displacement within threshold
X<Y
B0104
Displacement < setpoint
Y
KR (100,3)
Control
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 100 -
RmpUp Displacem
(2.5 ms)
H052
RmpUp Displacem
(2.5 ms)
H052
Diff.Pos.Control
d121
DisplacementSetp
d056
S.Ref_Pos_2
H157 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Max.Displacement
(2048.0)
H054
S.Displacem.Setup
KR3056
Set
Kp
Tn
KR3121
KR3122
Integrator comp.
angle controller
S.Act_Pos_1
H158 (3124)
KR (60,8)
set value
S.set Displ.Ramp H057 (0175)

B (60,2)
Tn Pos.Control
(500ms)
H111
IntegralComp.Pos
d122
Deviation angle
controller
S.Ref_Pos_1
H156 (3056)
KR (110,4)
KR3051
H051 (3050)
KR (500,4)
KP normiert
[110,4]
H055
(-2048.0)
Min.Displacement
enable
S.Act_Pos_2
H159 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Enable Control
H110
(1)
Hold I-Component
H104 (0109)
B (90,7)
Ramp generator displacement setpoint
Max. Position
(0.3)
H112
S.KP Pos.Contrl.
H108 (3044)
KR (80,4)
KP Pos.Control
d123
KR3120
PT1
Output angle
controller
KP angle controller
B0116
Angle controller
limitation active
KR3123
10-4
H115
(0.0)
ue_KP Value
Control
Angle controller
-1
KP_UE_0 PosCntrl
(1.0)
H114
KP_UE Pos.Contrl
(1.0)
H113
ue_KP_0 Value
(0.0)
H116
KP adaption
angle controller
Tfilt Pos.Cntrl
(0 ms)
H138
Outp.Pos.Control
d120
KP normalized
The input values of the angle controller use the normalization

1.0 = a quarter of a speed sensor pulse.
This normalization results in very small proportional gains for
the angle controller which can not be entered with OP1S.
The factor 10-4 allows to work with bigger values.
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 110 -
Tfilt Ref. Speed

(10ms)
Reference Speed H072
Refer.Speed filt
d074
d076
S.ReferenceSpeedt
H071 (3070)
KR (500,8)
Speed Setpoint
d136
KR3136
PT1
KR3076
KR3074
n_max Ramp Gen.

(1.0)
H125
H240 (3136)
KR (115,4)
KR3129
S.Ratio n_ref H239 (3044)

KR (80,4)
H126
(-1.0)
n_min Ramp Gen.
H127
(0.0ms)
n Ramp Up
Time
H128
(0.0ms)
n Ramp Down
Time
Enable speed
controller [120, 5]
Enable Jog
d176
S.enable Jog
H208 (0171)
B (520,4)
B0176
S.Jog Ref.Speed
0.0
Jog Setpoint
(0.0)
H130
1
Control
Jog enable
SetpSpeed;Torque
d152
KR3152
Output speed controller [120, 8]
KR3176
n setpoint after ramp
S.Slave n_ref_2
H241 (3176)
KR (115,3)
H207 (3130)
KR (115,2)
SpeedSetpRampOut
d129
S.Slave n_ref_1
Setpoint for
inverter
Jog setpoint
KR3130
Mode
Setpoint for the inverter (CU)
Speed controller on CU
Speed setpoint
Torque setpoint
Fixed value jogging
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 115 -
n_KP_0 Threshold
(0.0)
H144
KP adaption
speed controller
Inertia compensation / precontrol

S.enable PreCtrl
Tdif Accel.Comp.
(4 ms)
H083
H245 (0140)
B (120,5)
KP_0 SpeedContrl
(10.0)
S.KP(speedCtrl)
H142
H204 (3129)
KR (115,7)
KP Speed Control
d153
KP speed controller
S.Precontrol
KR3153
H079 (3129)
KR (115,7)
0.0
KP Speed Control
(10.0)
H141
DT1 (SpeedSetp.)
d085
S.DT1 Acc. Comp.
H244 (3080)
KR (500,7)
DT1
Speed Setp. ltd.

d137
DifferSpeedCntrl
d151
Tn SpeedControl
(200ms)
H145
S.2 n(ref-act)
S.n(ref,speed)
S.n(addit.)
H206 (3120)
KR (110,8)
H201 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Speed setpoint S.1 n(ref-act)
limited
H200 (3137)
KR3137
KR (120,2)
H205 (3129)
KR (115,7)
Deviation
speed
controller
KR3051
Kp
S.4 n(ref-act)
x
precontrol
1
set value
S.SV Int(speed)
set
H140
(0)
ModeSpeedControl
Control
B0134
Speed controller
limitation active
enable
H135
(-1.0)
Min n-Controller
H242 (3137)
KR (120,2)
S.Set Int(speed)
H243 (0000)
B (30,2)
Output speed
controller
Outp.SpeedContrl
d150
H202 (3146)
KR (60,8)
H203 (3000)
KR (30,2)
KR3150
Max n-Controller
(1.0)
H134
Tn
S.3 n(ref-act)
H133
(-1.0)
Min n_Setpoint
DT1 (n setp)
H082
(100ms)
Tfilt Acc.Comp.
H143
(0.0)
n_KP Threshold
Max. n_Setpoint
(1.0)
H132
KR3085
KR3145
B0140
Integral comp. speed controller
enable speed controller
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 120 -
Control and monitoring functions

for the inverter interface
CU Rec.State
d562
Status receive
100 ms
maximum
time interval
between 2
telegrams
receive initialized
1
send initialized
1
Timeout
1
inverter in operation
1
Inverter interface
B0500
CU receive init.
B0504
B0501
CU send init.
B0505
CU send not init.
B0502
CU Timeout
B0506
CU no Timeout
B0503
CU in operation
B0507
CU not operational
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 150 -
Error status word

Timeout CB [400,7]
Bit 0
F116
Bit 1
F117
Bit 2
F118
Bit 3
F119
Bit 4
F120
Bit 5
F121
Bit 6
F122
Bit 7
F123
Bit 8
F124
Bit 9
F125
S.F125
H900 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 10
F126
S.F126
H901 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
F127
Bit 12
F128
H902 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
F129
Bit 14
F130
Bit 15
F131
S.F127
Error Mask
(0)
H003
16 bit
Error Bits
d006
bitwise ANDed
16 bit
&
K2003
Errorbits
K2006
Bit 0
A097
Bit 1
A098
Bit 2
A099
H904 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 3
A100
Bit 4
A101
S.F130
H905 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
A102
S.F131
H906 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 6
A103
Bit 7
A104
Bit 8
A105
Bit 9
A106
Bit 10
A107
S.F129
S.A106
1
Inverter interface
Errors and alarms
Fault
B0005
no fault
Alarm status word

Timeout CB [400,7]
H903 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0003
at least 1 bit of the error

status set
S.F128
Error status
(send to the inverter)
H907 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.A107
H908 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
A108
Bit 12
A109
S.A108
H909 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
A110
Bit 14
A111
S.A109
H910 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 15
A112
S.A110
H911 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.A111
H912 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.A112
H913 (0000)
B (30,2)
Warning Mask
(0)
H004
bitwise ANDed
16 bit
Warning Bits
d007
16 bit
&
K2004
Alarm status
(send to inverter)
K2007
Alarmsbits
B0004
Alarm
at least 1 bit set of the

Alarm status
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 160 -
Four 16bit process data word are converted to floating-point

from inverter
CU actval1 norm.
(1.0)
H550
PZD1 .. PZD14 CU rec.

d571
d584
S.actval_1 CU
H563 (2572)
K (170,3)
...
PZD1 (status word1)
K2571
100 %
PZD1 from CU
CU actval1
d551
KR3551
Actual value1 CU
KR3553
Actual value2 CU
KR3555
Actual value3 CU
KR3591
CU Actual value_I_R
KR3589
CU N4_R
KR3570
CU DW_R
1.0
PZD 2
K2572
PZD2 from CU
PZD 3
K2573
PZD3 from CU
PZD4 (status word2)
K2574
PZD4 from CU
PZD 5
K2575
PZD5 from CU
CU actval2 norm
(1.0)
H552
S.actval_2 CU
100 %
H564 (2573)
K (170,3)
CU actval2
d553
1.0
PZD 6
K2576
PZD6 from CU
PZD 7
K2577
PZD7 from CU
PZD 8
K2578
PZD8 from CU
PZD 9
K2579
PZD9 from CU
PZD 10
K2580
PZD10 from CU
PZD 11
K2581
PZD11 from CU
PZD 12
K2582
PZD12 from CU
CU actval3 norm
(1.0)
H554
S.actval_3 CU
100 %
H565 (2575)
K (170,3)
CU actval3
d555
1.0
CU I_R
d591
S.CU I_R
H590 (2577)
K (170,3)
PZD 13
K2583
PZD13 from CU
PZD 14
K2584
PZD14 from CU

CU N4 norm.
(1.0)
H588
S.DW high CU
H567 (2582)
K (170,3)
S.N4 CU
DW
high
S.DW low CU
H568 (2581)
K (170,3)
H587 (5567)
KK (170,5)
KK5567
low
100 %
CU N4_R
d589
1.0
CU DW_R
d570
S.DW CU
H569 (5567)
KK (170,5)
DW
R
1
Inverter interface
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 170 -
Status Word1 CU
d246
K2246
S.StatusWord1 CU
H558 (2571)
K (170,3)
CU status word 1
S.StatusWord2 CU
H559 (2574)
K (170,3)
CU status word 2
B0510
CU status1.0
B0480
CU status2.0
B0511
CU status1.1
Bit 1
B0481
CU status2.1
Bit 2 Run
B0512
CU status1.2
Bit 2 Overspeed
B0482
CU status2.2
Bit 3 Fault active
B0513
CU status1.3
B0483
CU status2.3
Bit 4 OFF2 active
B0514
CU status1.4
B0484
CU status2.4
Bit 5 OFF3 active
B0515
CU status1.5
B0485
CU status2.5
B0516
CU status1.6
B0486
CU status2.6
Bit 7 Warning active
B0517
CU status1.7
B0487
CU status2.7
Bit 8 no setp./act.value deviation
B0518
CU status1.8
B0488
CU status2 .8
B0519
CU status1.9
B0489
CU status2 .9
B0520
CU status1.10
Bit 10
B0490
CU status2.10
B0521
CU status1.11
B0491
CU status2.11
Bit 12 req.energ. main conta.
B0522
CU status1.12
Bit 12 Bypass contactor enable
B0492
CU status2.12
Bit 13 Ramp funct.gen. active
B0523
CU status1.13
Bit 13
B0493
CU status2.13
Bit 14 positve speed setpoint
B0524
CU status1.14
Bit 14
B0494
CU status2.14
Bit 15
B0525
CU status1.15
Bit 15 Pre-charging active
B0495
CU status2.15
inverted status sbits

CU status1.0 inv
B0545
CTW from CU
d556
.....
...
...
B0530
CU status1.15 inv
S.CTW from CU
B0550
B0565
CTW from CU.15
B0570
CTW from CU.0 inv
...
H557 can be used to select any communication

PZD to control the angle synchronism software.
Control bits are B0550 ... B0565 (inverted bits
B0570 .. B0585)
1
Inverter interface
Status words
CTW from CU.0
...
H557 (2576)
K (170,3)
B0585
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
CTW from CU.15 inv
7
Function diagram
8
- 180 -
Control Word1 CU
d026
Control word 1
for the inverter
S.Bit0 CTW1 CU... Bit15 CTW1 CU

H510 (0650)
B (530,3)
H512 (0652)
B (530,3)
H514 (0654)
B (530,7)
H516 (0656)
B (530,7)
H518 (0658)
B (540,3)
H520 (0660)
B (540,3)
H522 (0662)
B (540,7)
H524 (0664)
B (540,7)
Control word1 CU
Bit 0 ON
H526 (0000)
B (30,2)
H513 (0653)
B (530,3)
H528 (0000)
B (30,2)
H529 (0000)
B (30,2)
H530 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 4 Ramp funct.gen enable
H517 (0657)
B (530,7)
Bit 4
H532 (0000)
B (30,2)
H533 (0000)
B (30,2)
H534 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 8 Jogging 1
H521 (0661)
B (540,3)
Bit 8
H536 (0000)
B (30,2)
H537 (0000)
B (30,2)
H538 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 12 counter clockw. enable
Bit 12
H540 (0000)
B (30,2)
1
Inverter interface
Control words
B0526
Bit 13
Bit 14
H541 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 15 0= extern fault

H525 (0665)
B (540,7)
Bit 11
H539 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13 Raise motor potentiom

Bit 14 Lower motor
potentiom
Bit 9 Enable speed cntrl.

Bit 10
Bit 11 Clochwise seq. enable
H523 (0663)
B (540,7)
Bit 7
H535 (0546)
B (90,8)
Bit 9 Jogging 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 Edge fault acknowledge
H519 (0659)
B (540,3)
Bit 3
H531 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5 Start ramp funct.gen.

Bit 1
Bit 2
H515 (0655)
B (530,7)
Control word2 CU
K2027
H527 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 1 /OFF2
Bit 2 /OFF3
Control Word2 CU
d027
Bit 0
K2026
H511 (0651)
B (530,3)
Control word 2
for the inverter
S.Bit0 CTW2 CU ... Bit15 CTW2 CU
Bit 15
ext. Fault
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 220 -
S.CU setp_1
1.0
H500 (3152)
KR (115,8)
K2500
setpoint1 CU N2
100 %
H501
(1.0)
CU setp_1 norm.
Control Word 1 Control Word 2

d147
d148
S.CU setp_2
1.0
H502 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2502
setpoint2 CU N2
100 %
H503
(1.0)
CU setp_2 norm.
1.0
H504 (3120)
KR (110,8)
K2504
setpoint3 CU N2
100 %
H505
(1.0)
CU setp_3 norm.
S.CU setp_4
1.0
H506 (3153)
KR (120,3)
S. PZD1 CU H381 (2026)

K (220,4)
PZD 1
Control word 1
S. PZD2 CU H382 (2500)

K (230,4)
PZD 2
setpoint
S. PZD3 CU H383 (2502)

K (230,4)
S.CU setp_3
K2506
PZD 3
S. PZD4 CU H384 (2027)

K (220,8)
PZD 4
Control word 2
S. PZD5 CU H385 (2504)

K (230,4)
PZD 5
add. setp. speed
S. PZD6 CU H386 (2506)

K (230,4)
PZD 6
KP adaption
S. PZD7 CU H387 (2510)

K (230,5)
setpoint4 CU N2
100 %
PZD 7
S. PZD8 CU H388 (2508)

K (230,4)
H507
(1.0)
CU setp_4 norm.
Process data
transmission to
inverter
PZD 8
Inertia compens.
S.CU setp_5
1.0
H508 (3080)
KR (500,7)
K2508
setpoint5 CU N2
100 %
H509
(1.0)
CU setp_5 norm.
S.Setp DW_ CU
1.0
H498 (3000)
KR (30,2)
100 %
DW
W
high
K2510
setpoint6 high CU
low
K2509
setpoint6 low CU
H499
(1.0)
CU DW norm.
1
2
Inverter interface
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 230 -
Mask Peer tmax

(16#FFFF)
H362

the peer to peer interface
Peer enable
(1)
H309
16 bit
Peer RecStateYTS
d364
Enable
Baud Rate Peer

(19200)
H363
maximum time
interval between 2
telegrams
Baud rate
B0361
B0362
PZD 2 + PZD 3
PZD 4 + PZD 5
DW
W
1
2
Communication
B0360
Timeout Peer
S.Peer PZD3 H336 (2000)

K (30,2)
Process data
transmission
peer to peer
Peer Sendtype1
(2)
H339
S.Peer PZD2 H335 (2000)

K (30,2)
W
PZD 1
DW
0
S.Peer DW1 H337 (5000)

K (30,2)
....
DW
Peer W1 send
d300
PZD5 Peer
d333
PZD 1
S.Peer PZD1 H345 (2303)

K (30,2)
The floating-point connectors KR3330 and KR3332 must not

be used if there is no floating point value transmission!
PZD1 Peer
d329
Timeout
Process data words PZD2, PZD3 and PZD4, PZD5 may be

transmitted as word, double word or floating point values.
Process data
receiption
bitwise ANDed
at least 1 bit set
&
receive status
tmax Peer OpMode
(100ms)
H361
tmaxPeer PowerOn
(20000 ms)
H360
K2329
PZD1 from Peer
K2330
PZD2 from Peer
K2331
PZD3 from Peer
KR3330
Peer Float1
KK5330
Peer DW1
K2332
PZD4 from Peer
K2333
PZD5 from Peer
KR3332
Peer Float2
KK5332
Peer DW2
Peer Sendtype2
(2)
H344
S.Peer PZD4 H340 (2000)

K (30,2)
S.Peer PZD5 H341 (2000)
K (30,2)
PZD 2 + PZD 3

KR (570,6)
PZD 4 + PZD 5
DW
0
S.Peer DW2 H342 (5000)

K (30,2)
KR (570,8)
1
2
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 300 -
Peer ControlWord
d346
Status Word Peer
d327
K2346
Status word peer
S.PeerState1_B0 ... S.PeerState1_B15

S.ContrlWordPeer
H334 (2329)
K (300,3)
H310 (0000)
B (30,2)
Control word peer

Bit 0
B0300
Peer CTW.0
Bit 1
B0301
Peer CTW.1
Bit 2
B0302
Peer CTW.2
Bit 3
B0303
Peer CTW.3
Bit 4
B0304
Peer CTW.4
Bit 5
B0305
Peer CTW.5
Bit 6
B0306
Peer CTW.6
Bit 7
B0307
Peer CTW.7
Bit 8
B0308
Peer CTW.8
Bit 9
B0309
Peer CTW.9
Bit 10
B0310
Peer CTW.10
Bit 11
B0311
Peer CTW.11
Bit 12
B0312
Peer CTW.12
Bit 13
B0313
Peer CTW.13
Bit 14
B0314
Peer CTW.14
Bit 15
B0315
Peer CTW.15
H312 (0000)
B (30,2)
H314 (0000)
B (30,2)
H316 (0000)
B (30,2)
H318 (0001)
B (30,2)
H320 (0001)
B (30,2)
H322 (0001)
B (30,2)
B0335
1
2
Communication
Peer CTW.0 inv
.....
...
...
B0320
H324 (0000)
B (30,2)
K2327
H311 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 1
Bit 2
H313 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 3
Bit 4
H315 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
Bit 6
H317 (0001)
B (30,2)
Bit 7
Bit 8
H319 (0666)
B (360,7)
Bit 9
Bit 10
H321 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
Bit 12
H323 (0001)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
Bit 14
H325 (0000)
B (30,2)
Peer CTW.15 inv
status word peer
Bit 0
Bit 15
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 310 -
Control and monitoring functions of

the communication board
(COMBOARD)
16 bit
CB receive state
d465
ComBoard enable
(1)
H409
Enable
bitwise ANDed
at least 1 bit set
T
&
Receives status
Timeout CB
B0405
Timeout CB
Timeout
Receive initialized
tmax CB OpMode
(100ms)
H463
tmax CB PowerOn
(20000 ms)
H462
Mask tmax CB
(16#FFFF)
H464
Maximun time
interval between 2
telegrams
1
send initialized
B0400
CB receive init.
B0401
B0402
CB send init.
B0403
CB send not init.
CB Param.valid
(1)
H495
CB Slave address
(3)
H480
Configuration of the COMBOARD:
Configuration valid
State of
Configuration
CB state SRT400
d496
Slave address of the

COMBOARDs
CB Parameter 1
(0)
H481
CB Parameter 8
(0)
H488
CB Parameter 2
(2)
H482
CB Parameter 9
(0)
H489
These parameters are reserved for a

COMBOARD in SRT400 applications.
CB Parameter 3
(0)
H483
Parameter setting for the

COMBOARD
CB Parameter 10
(0)
H490
If the T400 is placed in the electronic

box of the inverter the configuration of
the COMBOARD is done by inverter
parameters (e.g. P918 for the bus
CB Parameter 4
(0)
H484
(depending on the type of

COMBOARD)
CB Parameter 11
(0)
H491
CB Parameter 5
(0)
H485
CB Parameter 12
(0)
H492
CB Parameter 6
(0)
H486
CB Parameter 13
(0)
H493
CB Parameter 7
(0)
H487
1
2
Communication
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 400 -
Conversion of 16bit process data to floating point
The maximum number of

PZD depends on the actual
PPO type.
PZD1 CB rec. ...
PZD10 CB rec.
Process data
receiption from
COMBOARD
d801
S.setp_1 CB
100 %
H813 (2802)
K (410,3)
d810
KR3450
....
PZD 1
Control word
CB Setp_1 norm
(1.0)
H451
CB Setp_1 rec.
d450
setpoint1 CB
1.0
K2801
PZD1 from CB
PZD 2
K2802
PZD2 from CB
PZD 3
K2803
PZD3 from CB
CB Setp_2 norm
(1.0)
H453
CB Setp_2 rec.
d452
S.setp_2 CB
100 %
H814 (2803)
K (410,3)
KR3452
setpoint2 CB
1.0
PZD 4
K2804
PZD4 from CB
PZD 5
K2805
PZD5 from CB
PZD 6
K2806
PZD6 from CB
CB Setp_3 norm
(1.0)
H455
CB Setp_3 rec.
d454
S.setp_3 CB
100 %
H815 (2805)
K (410,3)
KR3454
setpoint3 CB
1.0
PZD 7
K2807
PZD7 from CB
PZD 8
K2808
PZD8 from CB
PZD 9
K2809
PZD9 from CB
CB Setp_4 norm
(1.0)
H457
CB Setp_4 rec.
d456
S.setp_4 CB
100 %
H816 (2806)
K (410,3)
KR3456
setpoint4 CB
KR3821
setpoint DW CB
1.0
PZD 10
K2810
PZD10 from CB
Conversion of double word to floating point

CB DW norm.
(1.0)
H841
S.DW high CB
H817 (2807)
K (410,3)
H819 (2809)
K (410,3)
Setp. I_R CB
d818
S.setp. I_R CB
100 %
CB setp. DW
d821
S.DW low CB
KR3818
setpoint I_R CB
1
Communication
COMBOARD receiption
DW
high
H820 (2810)
K (410,3)
low
1.0
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 410 -
ControlWord 1 CB
d460
ControlWord 2 CB
d461
K2460
CB Control word 1
CB Control word 2
S.Control W2 CB
Bit 0 OFF1 = 0
B0800
CB Control W1.0
Bit 1 OFF2 = 0
B0801
CB Control W1.1
Bit 2 OFF3 = 0
B0802
CB CTW2
H812 (2804)
K (410,3)
Bit 0
B0820
CB Control W2.0
Bit 1
B0821
CB Control W2.1
CB Control W1.2
Bit 2
B0822
CB Control W2.2
B0803
CB Control W1.3
Bit 3
B0823
CB Control W2.3
Bit 4 Ramp funct.gen. enable
B0804
CB Control W1.4
Bit 4
B0824
CB Control W2.4
Bit 5 Start ramp funtion gen.
B0805
CB Control W1.5
Bit 5
B0825
CB Control W2.5
B0806
CB Control W1.6
Bit 6
B0826
CB Control W2.6
B0807
CB Control W1.7
Bit 7
B0827
CB Control W2.7
Bit 8 Jogging 1
B0808
CB Control W1.8
Bit 8
B0828
CB Control W2.8
Bit 9 Jogging 2
B0809
CB Control W1.9
B0829
CB Control W2.9
B0810
CB Control W1.10
Bit 10
B0830
CB Control W2.10
Bit 11 Clockwise seq. enable
B0811
CB Control W1.11
Bit 11
B0831
CB Control W2.11
Bit 12 Counter clockw. enable
B0812
CB Control W1.12
Bit 12
B0832
CB Control W2.12
Bit 13 Raise motor potentiom.
B0813
CB Control W1.13
Bit 13
B0833
CB Control W2.13
Bit 14 Lower motor potent.
B0814
CB Control W1.14
Bit 14
B0834
CB Control W2.14
Bit 15 External fault = 0
B0815
CB Control W1.15
Bit 15
B0835
CB Control W2.15
B0855
1
2
Communication
CB CTW1.0 inv
B0860
...
.....
...
...
B0840
CB CTW1.15 inv
B0875
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
CB CTW2.0 inv
.....
H811 (2801)
K (410,3)
K2461
...
S.Control W1 CB
CB CTW1
CB CTW2.15 inv
7
Function diagram
8
- 420 -

H410 (0000)
B (30,2)
Status word 1
for COMBOARD
Status Word1 CB
d466
Bit 0
H411 (0000)
B (30,2)
H412 (0000)
B (30,2)
K2466
Status word 1 CB
Bit 1
Status Word2 CB
d467
Bit 2
H413 (0000)
B (30,2)
H414 (0000)
B (30,2)
H426 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 4
H415 (0000)
B (30,2)
H416 (0000)
B (30,2)
H418 (0000)
B (30,2)
H420 (0000)
B (330,3)
H422 (0000)
B (30,2)
H424 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
H432 (0548)
B (240,8)
Bit 6
H433 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 11
Bit 7
H434 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 8
H435 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
Bit 9
H436 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 14
H425 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 4
H431 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 12
H423 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 3
H430 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 9
Bit 10
H437 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 15
Bit 11
H438 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 12
H439 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 13
H440 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 14
H441 (0000)
B (30,2)
1
2
Communication
Status word 2 CB
Bit 2
H429 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 7
Bit 10
H421 (0000)
B (30,2)
K2467
Bit 1
H428 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 8
H419 (0000)
B
Bit 0
H427 (0000)
B (30,2)
Bit 5
Bit 6
H417 (0000)
B (30,2)
Status word 2
for COMBOARD
Bit 3
Bit 15
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 430 -
S.actval_1 CB
1.0
H822 (3446)
KR (550,3)
K2822
Actual value1 CB
PZD1 CB out
d921
100 %
H401
(1.0)
CB actval1 norm.
1.0
H823 (3447)
KR (550,5)
......
S. PZD1 CB H831 (2442)

K (560,4)
S.actval_2 CB
K2823
Actual value2 CB
100 %
H403
(1.0)
CB actval2 norm.
S.actval_3 CB
PZD10 CB out
d930
Process data
transmission
COMBOARD
PZD 1
Status word 1
S. PZD2 CB H832 (2822)

K (440,3)
PZD 2
S. PZD3 CB H833 (2823)

K (440,3)
PZD 3
S. PZD4 CB H834 (2444)

K (560,7)
PZD 4
S. PZD5 CB H835 (2824)

K (440,3)
PZD 5
S. PZD6 CB H836 (2825)

K (440,3)
PZD 6
S. PZD7 CB H837 (2827)

K (440,7)
PZD 7
S. PZD8 CB H838 (2000)

K (30,2)
PZD 8
S. PZD9 CB H839 (2828)

K (440,4)
PZD 9
S. PZD10 CB H840 (2829)

K (440,4)
PZD 10
1.0
H824 (3448)
KR (550,6)
K2824
Actual value3 CB
100 %
H405
(1.0)
CB actval3 norm.
S.actval_4 CB
1.0
H825 (3449)
KR (550,8)
K2825
Actual value4 CB
100 %
H407
(1.0)
CB actval4 norm.
S.actval R_I CB
S.actval_1 CB
1.0
H828 (3000)
KR (30,2)
DW
100 %
high
K2828
low
K2829
H826 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2827
Actual value R_I CB
H829
(1.0)
Actval5 CB norm.
1
2
Communication
COMBORAD transmission
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 440 -
USS slave operation

For enabling set T400 switch S1/8 = ON. The switching
becomes valid after the next power on. Online communication
with other service tools using the same interface (e.g. CFC) will
be disabled!
parameter setting (e.g. wrong baud rate) set S1/8 = OFF and
use the Service-IBS program to correct the parameters.
USS unable
(1)
H700
Baud rate USS

(9600)
H701
USS Address
(0)
H703
USS 4-Wire
(0)
H704
1
Communication
USS slave
Enable
Receives status
PZD1 USS
d706
USS rec. state

d705
Receive
Baud rate
(OP1S: 9600 bps or 19200 bps)
PZD1
K2706
PZD1 USS
PZD2
K2707
PZD2 USS
Transmit
USS bus address
S.PZD1 USS Slave
S.PZD2 USS Slave

0: RS485 (2 wires)
1: RS232 (4 wires)
PZD2 USS
d707
H708 (2000)
K (30,2)
PZD1
PZD2
H709 (2000)
K (30,2)
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 450 -
S.S RS-FlipFlop1
S.S RS-FlipFlop2
L698 (0000)
B (30,2)
L734 (0000)
B (30,2)
Q
S.R RS-FlipFlop1
B0698
RSFF1_Q
B0699
RSFF1_QN
S.AND_OR1_1
S.R RS-FlipFlop2
L699 (0000)
B (30,2)
L735 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.AND1_I1
S.AND2_I1
L700 (0001)
B (30,2)
L703 (0001)
B (30,2)
L830 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0734
RSFF2_Q
B0735
RSFF2_QN
AND_OR1
S.AND_OR1_2
L831 (0000)
B (30,2)
&
S.AND_OR1_3
S.AND1_I2
L832 (0001)
B (30,2)
S.AND_OR2_1
S.AND2_I2
&
L701 (0001)
B (30,2)
B0700
AND1_Q
&
L704 (0001)
B (30,2)
B0703
L833 (0000)
B (30,2)
AND2_Q
AND_OR2
S.AND_OR2_2
S.AND1_I3
S.AND2_I3
L702 (0001)
B (30,2)
L705 (0001)
B (30,2)
S.OR2_I1
L710 (0000)
B (30,2)
L713 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.OR1_I2
&
L835 (0001)
B (30,2)
S.OR2_I2
L711 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0710
Q_OR1
L714 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.Not1
B0713
Q_OR2
L732 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.OR1_I3
S.OR2_I3
S.Not2
L712 (0000)
B (30,2)
L715 (0000)
B (30,2)
L733 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.Switch1_0
S.Switch2_0
L706 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Switch1
L707 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch3_0
L716 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch1_1
KR3706
Switch2
KR3716
KR3825
S.Switch3_sel
S.Switch4_sel
L826 (0000)
B (30,2)
L829 (0000)
B (30,2)
Not2_Q
L828 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L718 (0000)
B (30,2)
B0733
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Switch4
S.Switch2_sel
S.Switch4_1
L708 (0000)
B (30,2)
Not1_Q
Switch3
S.Switch1_sel
1
Logical gates
B0732
L827 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch3_1
L825 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch4_0
L824 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.Switch2_1
L717 (3000)
KR (30,2)
B1833
L834 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.AND_OR2_3
S.OR1_I1
B1830
KR3827
1
7
Function diagram
8
- 460 -
S.ADDI_1 X1
L606 (2000)
K (30,2)
K2607
ADDI_Y
L787 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L607 (2000)
K (30,2)
L608 (2000)
K (30,2)
KR3786
ADD_1
SUBI_Y
S.SUBI_1 X2
L812 (2001)
K (30,2)
S.DIVI_1 X2
L813 (2001)
K (30,2)
L790 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2812
DIVI_1 Y
X1 modulo X2
K2813
S.MULI_1 X2
L815 (2001)
K (30,2)
MUL_1

KR (300,3)
KR (300,3)
S.MUL2 X1

KR (480,7)
L799 (3001)
KR (30,2)
ADD_2
S.ADD2 X3
L800 (3001)
KR (30,2)
MUL_2
S.Display B1
L032 (0193)
B (75,5)
L801 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.Display B2
L033 (0196)
B (75,5)
S.DIV1 X1
S.Display B3
L034 (0105)
B (100,8)
S.Display B4
L035 (0116)
B (110,7)
S.SUB1 X1
K2814
MULI_1 Y
double word result

KK5814
MULI_1 (DW)
KR3792
SUB_1
S.SUB1 X2
L793 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L802 (3001)
KR (30,2)
KR3802
Display R3
d030
Display R4
d031
Display B1
d032
Display B2
d033
Display B3
d034
DIV_1
S.DIV1 X2
L803 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.SUB2 X1
L794 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Display R2
d029
BOOL parameters
KR3799
S.MUL2 X3
L791 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L792 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Display R1
d028
S.MUL2 X2
KR3789
DIVI_1 (MOD)
S.MULI_1 X1
L814 (2001)
K (30,2)
S.ADD2 X1
S.ADD2 X2
S.DIVI_1 X1
KR3796
L798 (3001)
KR (30,2)
L789 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L609 (2000)
K (30,2)
L797 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.MUL1 X3
L788 (3000)
KR (30,2)
K2608

KR (100,5)
S.MUL1 X2
S.ADD1 X3
S.SUBI_1 X1
Floating point parameters
L796 (3001)
KR (30,2)
L786 (3000)
KR (30,2)
S.ADD1 X2
S.ADDI_1 X2
Display parameters
S.MUL1 X1
S.ADD1 X1
Display B4
d035
Integer parameters
KR3794
S.SUB2 X2
SUB_2
S.DIV2 X1
L804 (3001)
KR (30,2)
L795 (3000)
KR (30,2)

K (230,4)
KR3804
DIV_2
K (230,4)
S.DIV2 X2
L805 (3001)
KR (30,2)
Display I1
d036
Display I2
d037
Word parameters
K (490,5)
K (490,5)
1
2
Arithmetic and display parameters
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Display W1
d038
Display W2
d039
7
Function diagram
8
- 470 -
Low pass filter

1. order
Tfilt PT1
(20ms)
L741
Band stop filter
QualityFact.Filt
(2.0)
L739
S.PT1_input
S.Band-Stop filt
S.Compare_X
L740 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L742 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L744 (3000)
KR (30,2)
PT1
KR3740
PT1_out
KR3742
Band stop
L745 (3000)
KR (30,2)
L743 (3002)
KR (30,2)
L738 (0000)
B (30,2)
Compare2 Hyst
(0.1)
L751
S.Compare2 Range
L750 (3001)
KR (30,2)
S.Compare_Y
S.FilterFrequenc
S.set_PT1_zero
Comparator
X>Y
B0744
Compare X>Y
X=Y
B0743
Compare X=Y
X<Y
B0745
Compare X<Y
Limit_aktiv
Comparator
with
Hysteresis
S.Limit_max
L746 (3001)
KR (30,2)
Limiter
y
S.Limit_input
X>Y
S.Compare2
L749 (3000)
KR (30,2)
X=Y
B0749
B0750
L747 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Compare2 X>Y
S.Limit_min
Compare2 X=Y
B0747
B0746
Limit_max
KR3747
Limit_out
B0748
Limit_min
L748 (3000)
KR (30,2)
X<Y
B0751
Compare2 X<Y
S. Compare2 Mid
L752 (3003)
KR (30,2)
Curve_X1
(0.0)
L754
2 point
characteristic
S.Curve_X
L753 (3000)
KR (30,2)
Integrator T
(1000 ms)
L822
Integrator LU
(1.0)
L819
y
Curve_Y1
(0.0)
L755
B0817
characteristic_Y
S.Integrator X L818 (3000)

KR (30,2)
at upper limit
KR3819
KR3753
Curve_Y2
(1.0)
L757
S.Integrator set
L756
(1.0)
Curve_X2
1
B0818

KR (30,2)
at lower limit
L820
(-1.0)
Integrator LL
L823 (0000)
B (30,2)
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 480 -
S.FreeWord
L760 (2000)
K (30,2)
DW norm.
(1.0)
L763
S.DW_high
Bit 0
B0760
FreeWord_0
Bit 1
B0761
FreeWord_1
Bit 2
B0762
FreeWord_2
Bit 3
B0763
FreeWord_3
S.DW_low
Bit 4
B0764
FreeWord_4
L762 (2000)
K (30,2)
Bit 5
B0765
FreeWord_5
Bit 6
B0766
FreeWord_6
Bit 7
B0767
FreeWord_7
Bit 8
B0768
FreeWord_8
Bit 9
B0769
FreeWord_9
Bit 10
B0770
FreeWord_10
Bit 11
B0771
FreeWord_11
Bit 12
B0772
FreeWord_12
Bit 13
B0773
FreeWord_13
Bit 14
B0774
FreeWord_14
Bit 15
B0775
FreeWord_15
L761 (2000)
K (30,2)
Word norm.
(1.0)
L765
100 %
Word_Float
Bit 1
B1811
FreeWord2_1
Bit 2
B1812
FreeWord2_2
Bit 3
B1813
FreeWord2_3
Bit 4
B1814
FreeWord2_4
S.W_DW1 low
Bit 5
B1815
FreeWord2_5
L817 (2000)
K (30,2)
Bit 6
B1816
FreeWord2_6
Bit 7
B1817
FreeWord2_7
Bit 8
B1818
FreeWord2_8
L767
(1.0)
Float norm.
DW
K2605
DW_W1 high
low
K2606
DW_W1 low
S.Edge1
L709 (0000)
B (30,2)
L816 (2000)
K (30,2)
B0709
Edge1_Q
B0708
Edge1_QN
B0728
OnDelay1_Q
B0730
OffDelay1_Q
DW
high
KK5816
low
W_DW1
T_OnDelay1
(100ms)
L729
S.OnDelay1
L728 (0000)
B (30,2)
S.I_R_1
L646 (2000)
K (30,2)
B1820
FreeWord2_10
Bit 11
B1821
FreeWord2_11
Bit 12
B1822
FreeWord2_12
Bit 13
B1823
FreeWord2_13
S.R_I1
Bit 14
B1824
FreeWord2_14
Bit 15
B1825
FreeWord2_15
L647 (3000)
KR (30,2)
high
S.W_DW1 high
Bit 10
100 %
KR3765
L605 (5000)
KK (30,2)
FreeWord2_0
1
Type conversion
Float_N2
K2766
S.DW_W1
B1810
FreeWord2_9
1.0
L766 (3000)
KR (30,2)
1.0
Bit 0
B1819
S.Float
S.Word
L764 (2000)
K (30,2)
DW_float
1.0
Bit 9
100 %
KR3763
low
S.Free_W_B_2
L810 (2000)
K (30,2)
DW
high
I
KR3604
I_R1
R
T_OffDelay1
(100ms)
L731
R
K2647
S.OffDelay1
R_I1
L730 (0000)
B (30,2)
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 490 -
MUX displace.Setp
(1)
H050
MUX Accel.Comp.
(1)
H080
0.0
Fixed value displacement [30,3]
0.0
AE1 filtered [50,6]
1) The input assignment for inputs 2 to
AE2 filtered [50,6]
AE3 filtered [50,6]
14 is identical with each multiplexer

on this page
DT1(n_setp) [120,8]
AE4 filtered [50,6]
10
11
11
12
12
Peer Float1 [300,4]
13
13
Peer Float2 [300,4]
14
1)
6
7
8
9
KR3050
Mux displacement
setpoint
10
KR3080
0.0
0.0
0.0
Fixed value rel. ration [30,3]
Fixed value ration [30,3]
1)
Mux inertia compensation
MUX Refer.speed
(15)
H070
14
MUXrelativeRatio
(1)
H048
MUX ratio
(1)
H040
Fixed value reference speed [30,3]
0
1
1)
1)
6
7
10
10
1
Multiplexer
Setpoint channels
KR3040
10
Mux ratio
KR3048
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
Mux reference
speed
11
Mux relative ratio
11
KR3070
14
n_Master normalized[70,7]
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
15
7
Function diagram
8
- 500 -
MUX AnalogOutp 1
(1)
H618
1
Multiplexer
Analog outputs
MUX AnalogOutp 2
(0)
H619
0.0
Ratio[80,4]

for both multiplexers
on this page is
identical
7
8
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
Peer Float1 [300,3]
30
30
Peer Float2 [300,3]
31
31
DT1(n setp) [120,8]
32
32
14
KR3618
15
Mux DAC1
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
KR3619
Mux DAC2
7
Function diagram
8
- 510 -
Identical input
assignment for all
multiplexers of this
chart (except input 2)
MUX Displ.Reset
(0)
H170
MUX enable Jog

(0)
H171
0
1
CTW from CU.1

[180,7]
MUX en.Pos.Cntrl
(0)
H172
0
1
CTW from CU.2

[180,7]
MUX Reset Posit.

(0)
H173
0
1
CTW from CU.3

[180,7]
MUX Synchr.Cmd
(0)
H174
0
1
CTW from CU.4

[180,7]
BinInput 3 [52,4]
BinInput 4 [52,4]
BinInput 5 [52,4]
BinInput 6 [52,4]
BinInput 7 [52,4]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
15
16
Peer CTW.0 [310,4]
17
17
17
17
17
Peer CTW.1 [310,4]
18
18
18
18
18
Peer CTW.2 [310,4]
19
19
19
19
19
Peer CTW.3 [310,4]
20
20
20
20
20
Peer CTW.4 [310,4]
21
21
21
21
21
Peer CTW.5 [310,4]
22
22
22
22
22
Peer CTW.6 [310,4]
23
23
23
23
23
Peer CTW.7 [310,4]
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
1
Multiplexer
Binary control
1
3
Mux displacement
reset
B0170
1
3
15
Mux jog enable
15
16
B0171
16
Mux enable angle

controller
B0172
1
3
15
16
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
1
3
14
Mux reset position
15
16
B0173
Mux synchronizing
command
B0174
7
Function diagram
8
- 520 -
MUX CTW1 Bit0

(0)
H650
MUX CTW1 Bit4

(1)
H654
Peer CTW.0 [310,4]
Peer CTW.4 [310,4]
BinInput 1 [52,4]
BinInput 5 [52,4]
Bit0 Control word1

B0650
ON (/OFF1)
MUX CTW1 Bit1

(1)
H651
Ramp function
generator enable
MUX CTW1 Bit5

(1)
H655
Peer CTW.1 [300,7]
BinInput 2 [52,4]
Peer CTW.5 [310,4]
BinInput 6 [52,4]
Bit1 Control word1

B0651
not OFF2
MUX CTW1 Bit2

(1)
H652
Bit5 Control word1
Start ramp function

generator
B0655
MUX CTW1 Bit6

(1)
H656
Peer CTW.2 [310,4]
BinInput 2 [52,4]
Peer CTW.6 [310,4]
BinInput 7 [52,4]
Bit2 Control word1

B0652
not OFF3
MUX CTW1 Bit3

(1)
H653
Bit6 Control word1
Setpoint enable
B0656
MUX CTW1 Bit7

(0)
H657
Peer CTW.3 [310,4]

BinInput 3 [52,4]
1
Multiplexer
Control word (part 1)
Bit4 Control word1

B0654
Peer CTW.7 [310,4]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
Bit3 Control word1

B0653
Inverter enable
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
Bit7 Control word1

B0657
Edge fault
acknowlege
7
Function diagram
8
- 530 -
MUX CTW1 Bit8

(0)
H658
MUX CTW1 Bit12

(1)
H662
Peer CTW.8 [310,4]

Peer CTW.12 [310,4]
Bit8 Control word1
Jogging 1
B0658
MUX CTW1 Bit9

(0)
H659
Counter clockwise
phase sequence
enable
MUX CTW1 Bit13

(0)
H663
Peer CTW.9 [310,4]
Peer CTW.13 [310,4]
Bit9 Control word1
Jogging 2
B0659
Bit13 Control word1

B0663
Raise motor
potentiometer
MUX CTW1 Bit10

(1)
H660
MUX CTW1 Bit14

(0)
H664
Peer CTW.10 [310,4]
Bit10 Control word1

B0660
Control requested
Peer CTW.14 [310,4]
Bit14 Control word1

B0664
Lower motor
potentiometer
4
MUX CTW1 Bit15
(1)
H665
MUX CTW1 Bit11

(1)
H661
Peer CTW.11 [310,4]
1
Multiplexer
Bit12 Control word1

B0662
Bit11 Control word1

B0661
Clockwise phase
sequence enable
Peer CTW.15 [310,4]
Fault [200,6]
Warning [200,8]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
Bit15 Control word1
No external fault
B0665
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 540 -
Mux word2 CB
(1)
H446
Input assignment for each

multiplexer of this chart;
except input 32
Mux word3 CB
(0)
H447
Mux word5 CB
(0)
H448
Mux word6 CB
(0)
H449
0.0
Ratio[80,4]
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
16
Displacement - position differ. [100,8]
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
Peer Float1 [300,3]
30
Peer Float2 [300,3]
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
W2 CB constant
(0.0)
H470
1
Multiplexer
CB actual values
Mux word2 CB
KR3446
W3 CB constant
(0.0)
H471
15
16
29
30
Mux word3 CB
KR3447
14
Mux word5 CB
15
W5 CB constant
(0.0)
H472
15
KR3448
16
16
Mux word6 CB
KR3449
28
W6 CB constant
(0.0)
H473
29
30
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
29
30
7
Function diagram
8
- 550 -
word1 CB constan
(0)
H443
word4 CB constan
(0)
H445
MUX word1 CB
(0)
H442
MUX word4 CB
(0)
H444
K2445
K2443
0
1
Status word1 CB [430,4]
Statusword2 CB [430,8]
K2442
Mux word1 CB
K2444
10
10
Mux word4 CB
MUX Speed enable

(1)
H544
1
Multiplexer
CB status words
Peer CTW.10 [300,4]
BinInput 8 [52,4]
B0547
Mux enable speed controller
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 560 -
MUX float1 Peer

(1)
H304
MUX float2 Peer

(0)
H305
0.0
Ratio[80,4]
10
10
Status word Peer [310,8]
11
11
Status word angle synchr. [40,7]
12
12
Mux word1 Peer
13
K2303
14
15
W1 Peer constant
(0)
H306
MUX word 1 Peer

(2)
H303
K2306

for both multiplexers is
identical
3
4
5
13
14
Mux word2 Peer
15
KR3304
16
16
17
17
18
18
10
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
28
29
Peer Float1 [300,3]
30
30
Peer Float2 [300,3]
31
31
32
32
W2 Peer constant
(0.0)
H307
1
Multiplexer
Peer to peer
Mux word3 Peer

KR3305
27
W3 Peer constant
(0.0)
H308
6
FPlan_english.vsd
05.01
28
29
7
Function diagram
8
- 570 -
SIEMENS
Sheet-Cutter / Cut to Length

for

Software Version 1.02
CBP
Manual
Edition 10.00
T400
Order No.:6DD1903-0DB0
Contents
Contents
0 Warning information.............................................................................................................3
1 Overview................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Validity and how the software is supplied ........................................................................5
1.2 Order numbers................................................................................................................5
1.3 Adapting the standard software package .........................................................................6
1.3.1 Parameters ...........................................................................................................7
1.3.2 BICO parameters ..................................................................................................8
1.3.3 Resources which are used to adapt the software and for start-up...........................9
2 Introduction.........................................................................................................................10
2.1 Hardware configuration .................................................................................................10
2.2 System features (overview)...........................................................................................11
2.3 Operating modes ..........................................................................................................13
2.3.1 Referencing .........................................................................................................14
2.3.2 Continuous cutting...............................................................................................14
2.3.3 Test cut ...............................................................................................................15
2.3.4 Single cut ............................................................................................................15
2.3.5 End cut................................................................................................................16
2.3.6 Cut program ........................................................................................................16
2.3.7 Jogging 1/2 .........................................................................................................17
2.3.8 Approaching the knife change position.................................................................17
3 Hardware components and interfaces...............................................................................18
3.1 Technology module T400..............................................................................................18
3.1.1 Digital inputs and outputs ....................................................................................20
3.1.2 Analog inputs and outputs ...................................................................................21
3.1.3 Pulse encoders....................................................................................................23
3.1.4 Communication interfaces...................................................................................27
3.1.4.1 Peer-to-peer interface...........................................................................27
3.1.4.2 USS slave interface..............................................................................27
3.1.4.3 Diagnostics interface ............................................................................28
3.1.5 Cycle times (tasks)..............................................................................................28
3.2 Communications module...............................................................................................29
3.3 Interface to the basic drive (CU)....................................................................................32
3.3.1 Faults and alarms................................................................................................35
4 Function description ..........................................................................................................36
4.1 Normalization operations...............................................................................................36
4.2 Setpoints and actual values ..........................................................................................36
4.2.1 Control words ......................................................................................................37
4.2.2 Status words .......................................................................................................39
4.3 Mode of operation .........................................................................................................40
4.4 Plant geometry and motion sequences..........................................................................40
4.4.1 Systems with rotary axis......................................................................................40
4.4.2 Systems with linear knife motion .........................................................................43
4.4.3 Absolute knife position ........................................................................................44
4.4.4 Typical system configurations .............................................................................45
4.5 Closed-loop control structure.........................................................................................46
4.5.1 Types of characteristics.......................................................................................47
4.6 Systems with rotary axis................................................................................................48
Sheet-Cutter/Cut to Length - SIMADYN D - Manual

6DD1903-0DB0 Edition 10.00
Contents
4.6.1 Drum-type shears (basic settings) ....................................................................... 48
4.6.1.1 Pass mark synchronization ................................................................... 49
4.6.1.2 Suppressing pass marks....................................................................... 51
4.6.1.3 Offset correction................................................................................... 52
4.6.1.4 Offset synchronization of the knife position........................................... 53
4.6.2 Double saw ......................................................................................................... 54
4.7 Linear systems.............................................................................................................. 56
4.7.1 Flying knife ......................................................................................................... 56
4.7.1.1 Sequence control ................................................................................. 58
4.7.1.2 Lowering and raising the knife .............................................................. 58
4.7.1.3 Parameterizable STATE logic .............................................................. 59
4.7.1.4 Changeover between format operation and positioning......................... 61
4.7.1.5 Positioning setpoint generator PosRG .................................................. 62
4.7.1.6 Clamping the knife to the material ........................................................ 63
4.7.1.7 Referencing to a linear axis .................................................................. 63
4.7.2 Flying saw........................................................................................................... 64
5 Appendix ............................................................................................................................. 69
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Abbreviations................................................................................................................ 69
Terminology.................................................................................................................. 69
Literature ...................................................................................................................... 70
Changes ....................................................................................................................... 70
6 Parameters and Connectors............................................................................................... 71

6.1 Important information.................................................................................................... 71
6.2 Parameters ................................................................................................................... 72
6.3 Connectors ................................................................................................................. 127
7 Typical commissioning .................................................................................................... 144
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
General procedure ...................................................................................................... 144

Parameterizing the basic drive.................................................................................... 156
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 157
Example of cut to length ........................................................................................... 158
7.4.1 System specifications........................................................................................ 159
7.4.2 Format setpoint ................................................................................................. 160
7.4.3 Incremental encoders........................................................................................ 160
7.4.4 Jogging and referencing.................................................................................... 160
7.4.5 Controlling the cut sequence ............................................................................. 161
7.4.6 Return positioning ............................................................................................. 162
7.4.7 T400 operation without external automation system ........................................... 163
7.4.8 Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 163
7.5 Function flow PLC (principle) ...................................................................................... 164
Function charts

Warning information
0 Warning information
WARNING
equipment.
observed.
Definitions
D Qualified personnel for the purpose of this Manual and product

labels
are personnel who are familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up
and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she
must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and
tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
!
!
!
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION

Warning information
NOTE
highlight.
CAUTION

Overview
1 Overview
1.1
Validity and how the software is supplied

This Manual is valid for Version 1.0 of the standard Sheet-Cutter/Shears
Control software package.
NOTE
Hardware
configuration
NOTE
1.2
This documentation refers to software, generated using the graphic

CFC configuring tool, for 32-bit SIMADYN D processor modules.
The standard software package can be purchased as a T400 technology
board with software, which is ready to run. The documentation is for this
particular application. Using parameters, the software can be adapted to
the special task. Thus, it is possible to change fixed values and
connections within the configured software.
The control core (all of the functions with the exception of
inputs/outputs) is also available for other configurations, for example,
the PM4 - PM6 CPU modules with expansion module IT41 or the T400
in the SRT400 subrack. In this case, the software package is adapted
to the particular application using the graphic CFC configuring tool.
Order numbers
The standard Sheet-Cutter/Cut to Length software package is available,
ready-to-run as T400, or as source code on floppy disk. For the source
code, it involves a SIMADYN D software package. All customer-specific
adaptation work can be executed and documented using the graphic
CFC configuring interface.
The software is protected using a hardlock PAL, which can be inserted
on all SIMADYN D processor modules. This PAL is required when
operating the closed-loop control.
Table 1-1
Components to adapt the configured software using CFC
Designation
Explanation
Order number
T400 with sheetcutter / cut to

length
High performance closed-loop sheet-cutter control, loaded on

T400; with hardlock PAL; ready to run
6DD1842-0AC0
D7-ES
SIMADYN D configuring software D7-ES. This package comprises 6DD1801-4DA2


Overview
1.3
Adapting the standard software package

The purpose of offering a standard software package is to provide a preconfigured control-related solution for a specific application, where it is
only necessary to make a few application-specific adaptations. Further, a
high degree of flexibility is demanded, in order to be able to cover as
many customer requirements as possible.
The procedure for adapting the software for this particular case will now
be explained using the rough structure as shown in Fig. 1-1.
Material position
transmitter
Knife position
transmitter
CU
(drive converter)
Position- and speed

sensing
CU
(drive converter)
CB
(communications)
Closed-loop shears
control
CB
(communications)
Digital and analog

inputs
Auxiliary applicationspecific control functions
Digital and analog

outputs
Fig. 1-1
Rough structure of the standard software package
The following have to be adapted:

Defining the sources for the control signals (from CB or local input or
from the basic drive (SIMOLINK) )
Defining the setpoint channels (format entries, setpoints for the drive
converter)
Normalization of setpoints and actual values
Specifying the plant/system geometry
Specifying the position transmitters
This adaptation essentially involves the interfaces to the actual closedloop control core. In the closed-loop core itself, only a few adaptations
have to be made. Here the motion sequences for the different versions
of the cutting device are defined. The procedure is explained using
examples in the Appendix of this documentation.

Overview
1.3.1 Parameters
Parameters are used
to visualize internal quantities (monitoring)
to change inter-connections (BICO parameters)
All of the parameters, which refer to the functions and settings of the
technology module, are called technology parameters. The technology
parameters for the closed-loop cut to length are described in Section 6,
and appear in the function charts in the form of the following symbols:
Display text
Rated speed
(1500 RPM)
H123
Pre-setting
Knife position
d097
Parameter number
Parameters which can be changed
Fig. 1-2
How parameters are shown in the function charts
When changing parameters, it should be taken into account, that there

are initialization parameters, which only become effective after the T400
has re-started.
In addition to the technology parameters, there are so-called basic drive
together with the associated charts, from the documentation of the drive
converter which is used.
It should be observed that the parameters are selected by entering the
number (e.g. at the operator control panel of the drive converter).
However, for the display, the most significant digit is replaced by a letter,
which is intended to symbolize as to whether it involves a quantity which
can be changed or not changed.
Example
Table 1-2
Value
"1956" is entered in order to select technology parameter "H956".

Parameter number specification
Significance
range

can be changed
cannot be changed

converter
P123
r123
1000 ... 1999 Lower parameter range of the T400
H123
d123
2000 ... 2999 Upper parameter range of the drive

converter
U123
n123
3000 ... 3999 Upper parameter range of the T400
L123
c123
0 ... 999

Overview
1.3.2 BICO parameters

Contrary to (value) parameters, the BICO parameters define the
interconnections. This means, parameters specify a fixed value at an
input, whereby BICO parameters select the signal source, which is
connected using the input. This signal source must be defined in the
form of a connector. The BICO parameter appears as parameter in the
symbol of a BICO input (Fig. 1-3).
The source and destination of a BICO interconnection must have the
same data type. Thus, digital quantities (BOOL) can, for example, not be
connected with floating-point inputs. Thus, for each data type used,
different symbols for connectors and BICO inputs are used in the
function charts.
Connector
name
Connector number
BICO parameter
S.enable
Connecting
BOOLean values
B0123
H681 (0123)
B (120,3)
Status bit_XY
Data type symbol

16-bit values
K2541
PZD_123
KK5021
CU_doubleXY
S. control word
L430 (2541)
K (200,8)
Name of the BICO

input
Number of the
connected connector
(factory setting)
Chart, sector of source
for the factory setting
S. double word
32-bit values
P501 (5021)
KK (60,2)
S. speed actual value
Floating point values
KR3155
L321 (3155)
KR (330,1)
Speed
BICO inputs
Connectors
Fig. 1-3

Overview
1.3.3 Resources which are used to adapt the software and for start-up
Various resources are available which can be used to adapt the standard
software package to the particular application.
Table 1-3
Adaptation- and start-up tools
Name
Explanation
PMU
OP1S
Operator control device with numerical keypad and 4-line text display; this can be directly
connected at the PMU.
SIMOVIS
Start-up- and parameterizing software for PC (Windows). This also provides an

oscilloscope function for MASTERDRIVES MC.
CFC
Graphic configuring tool, which is used to generate the standard software package. This is
Service-IBS Simple start-up- and diagnostics tool for PPC (DOS, Windows). This is also available as
(start-up) Telemaster for remote diagnostics. .
The resources differ essentially by the intervention possibilities, which is

shown in the following table.
Table 1-4
Adaptation- and start-up tools
Intervention
CFC
PMU
OP1S
SIMOVIS
Servicestart-up
View value
any
parameter
parameter
parameter
any
Change value
any
parameter
parameter
parameter
any
Change interconnection
any
BICO
BICO
BICO
any
Insert block
yes
no
no
no
no
Delete block
yes
no
no
no
no
Change execution
sequence (run sequence)
yes
no
no
no
no
Change the cycle time for

processing
yes
no
no
no
no
Duplicate software
yes
no
no
no
no
Duplicate parameter sets
no
no
no
yes
(macro)
Documentation
charts
no
no
parameter
lists
no

Introduction
2 Introduction
2.1
Hardware configuration
The drive unit comprises a SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES drive
converter with integrated T400 technology module, a communications
board for connection to the automation system (e.g. CBP) and a threephase motor (synchronous or induction).
converter
Process data and parameters
CU
CB
T400
Basic drive
(MasterDrives/DC Master)
Communications
module
(CB1, CBP, ...)
Technology module
Encoder emulation
Position sensing,
knife drive
Position sensing, Position sensing,

knife
material
The cutting devices can either be shears, saw, knife, sheet-cutter or

comparable elements. For reasons of simplicity, in the following text,
independent of the actual version, either "knife" or "shears" are used.
The technology control is realized on the T400. The position of the
material to be cut and the knife are required. Thus, the position
transmitter signals of the measuring roll (material feed) and the knife
must be connected to the T400. For gearless applications, the T400
receives the position tracks of the knife from the pulse encoder
emulation of the MASTERDRIVES drive converter via the common
backplane bus.
Data transfer between T400 and the basic drive is also realized via dual
port RAM and the common backplane bus. This combination represents
an optimum system integration, as the setpoints can be transmitted
extremely quickly and in synchronism with the processing cycles.
10

Introduction
2.2
System features (overview)
System versions
A wide variety of different systems can be implemented using the

closed-loop Cut to length. Systems with rotary axis (e.g. drum-type
shears) as well as linear-positioning systems, such as "flying knife" can
be implemented. Only a few parameters have to be changed to adapt
the software to the particular system (examples, refer to Section Fehler!
Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.).
Automation
The closed-loop cut to length is generally controlled from a higher-level

supervisory automation system. This system can control the closed-loop
cut to length using a few transparent system quantities, such as format
length, number of cuts or operating mode. All of the values obtained,
velocity profiles or statuses are internally generated, and normally do not
have to be adapted.
Operating modes
For the automation system, there are five cutting operating modes:
continuous cutting
cutting program (a defined number of cuts can be made)
single cut
test cut (cut a sheet, i.e. make 2 cuts)
final cut (cut the end of the material)
Cut lengths
The knife motion is calculated online from actual data entries and
measured values. Thus, setpoints can be changed, when required, from
cut to cut. This means, for example, that the cut length can be changed
in operation without having to shutdown the system or generate waste.
Cutting speed
The cutting speed is limited by the drive technology used (especially the
moment of inertias). The closed-loop cut to length operates from plant
standstill up to the maximum speed. If speeds are changed when cutting,
these are automatically taken into account.
Overspeed
When required, when cutting the knife can be moved faster than the
material. The forces which occur, influence the appearance of the cutting
edges and move the cut sheet away from the material. The only data
which has to be input is the percentage that the knife speed has to be
higher than the material speed.
Speed profile
The knife speed with respect to time is decisive for the cutting accuracy
and for the power- and torque requirements of the drive. Various speed
profiles can be selected to specify the optimum knife speed for the
particular application (e.g. metal- or paper shears).
Cutting torque
An additional cutting torque can be entered to compensate the cutting

forces within a selectable angular range.
Cutting
characteristic
When cutting, the knife enters the material. For certain drum-type
shears, the knife geometry means that the knife speed has to be
changed during cutting. This correction function is specified using a
characteristic (cutting characteristic: Velocity change as a function of the
knife position).
Characteristic
In addition to the cutting characteristic, three additional characteristics

are available. They are provided so that the following functions can be
implemented, dependent on the position- or velocity:

11
Introduction
KP adaptation: Speed controller gain in the drive converter as a function
of the torque demand.
Friction characteristic: Generates a frictional torque component as a
function of the material velocity
Moment of inertia characteristic: Generates a moment of inertia
characteristic, dependent on the knife position. In this
case, position-dependent changes of the knife geometry
can be taken into account. These characteristics can also
be used for other application-specific characteristics.
Format controller
For shears with rotary axis, the material feed is measured between two
cuts. The closed-loop format controller can compensate deviations from
the reference (setpoint) format.
Pass marks
When required, the closed-loop synchronous control can synchronize to

pass marks, which are located on the material. The cut is then made at a
defined distance from the pass mark.
Optional functions
The standard software package has numerous free functions, which can
be used to realize application-specific open-loop control tasks. Especially
for shears with linear axis, secondary, associated processes must be
controlled (open-loop) (e.g. such as raising and lowering the knife,
positioning, clamping the material (nip position), etc.).
Diagnostics
The closed-loop cut to length includes numerous monitoring- and

plausibility functions. In some instances, they are permanently defined
(e.g. "knife block protection", "plausibility of the knife speed"); in some
instances, they can be used application-specific. Each error/fault
condition can initiate an alarm or a fault to the drive converter. Faults
and alarms can be signaled to the automation system.
All of the most important quantities/parameters of the closed-loop control
are available as monitoring parameters and can be displayed at
parameterizing devices (e.g. OP1S). Quantities/parameters which
change quickly, can be connected to analog outputs, where they can
then be tracked using an oscilloscope.
12

Introduction
2.3
Operating modes
Generally, the sheet-cutter is controlled (open-loop) from a higher-level,
supervisory automation system. This has the advantage, that many
settings and inputs can be changed during operation. This also means
that the required closed-loop control mode can also be defined. The
available operating modes are listed in the following table. For all
operating modes, it is assumed that the drive converter is operationally
ready.
If several operating modes are simultaneously selected, the operating
mode with the highest priority is set. Thus, a cutting operating mode can
be interrupted by approaching the starting position.
A differentiation is made between "steady-state" and "latching" functions.
Steady-state functions are only executed as demanded by the
automation system. For latching functions, a request pulse is sufficient
which then triggers all of the additional sequences.
Table 2-1
Available operating modes (sorted according to priority; highest priority at the top)
Operating mode
Purpose
Prerequisites
Comments
Local operating modes:

The knife is moved with a constant velocity. If the
reference position is passed, the "knife calibrated"
status is set.
None
Steady-state function
The knife is moved forwards (slowly). For example,

a coarse reference position can be approached.
None
The knife is moved backwards (slowly). For

example, a fine reference position can be
approached.
Approach knife change

position
The knife is moved to the knife change position
Calibrated
Approach starting point
The knife is moved to the quiescent position
Calibrated
Referencing
(highest priority)
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
The "knife calibrated"

status is changed
None
The "knife calibrated"
status is changed
Cutting operating modes:

Continuous cutting
Continuous cutting of sheets
Calibrated
starting position
Cut program
To cut a specific number of sheets. When required,

when completed, a test sheet with a specific length
can be automatically cut.
Calibrated
in starting
position
Test cut
Cutting an individual sheet
Calibrated
in starting
position
Latching function
Single cut
A cut is made at any position along the material
Calibrated
in starting
position
Latching function
End cut
A cut is made at the end of the material web

(smooth cutting edge at the end of the material)
Calibrated
in starting
position
Latching function

13
Introduction
2.3.1 Referencing
For all cutting modes, it is assumed that the absolute knife position is
known. In this case, the knife position must be calibrated (referencing).
The sequences and the effect of the prioritization are shown in the
following diagram. A reference approach travel is not required when an
absolute value encoder is used (refer to Section 4.4.3).
Referencing
Jogging 1
Zero pulse
Coarse reference
Knife calibrated
Knife speed
t
Any
Fig. 2-2
Active operating mode (priority)
Sequence when referencing and jogging 1
2.3.2 Continuous cutting

The continuous cutting operating mode is used to cut any number of
material sheets. When the operating mode is selected, cutting starts as
soon as the material enters the cutting range.
Request
continuous cutting
Operating mode
continuous cutting
Material
identification
Knife speed
in the cutting range
at the start position
active mode
Fig. 2-3
Steady-state
operating mode
14
Timing in the "continuous cutting"operating mode
The operating mode is terminated after the request is withdrawn, as soon

as the knife is at the start position. During the last cut, a fictitious format
is entered for the following sheet, which is large enough, so that the knife
must wait in the quiescent position (start position) for the start of the cut.
The continuous cutting mode is completed in this status (without this
fictitious cut actually being made).

Introduction
2.3.3 Test cut

For a test cut, only one sheet is cut. The knife drive is then stopped
again. The test cut operating mode is a "latching" operating mode, i.e.
the request can be withdrawn again immediately after it has been set.
Request
test cut
Operating mode
test cut
Material
identification
Knife speed
active operating mode
Fig. 2-4
Timing in the "test cut operating mode
2.3.4 Single cut

In the single cut operating mode, a single cut is made. If material is
already located in the cutting range, the cut is made immediately after
the request. It is not necessary to specify a sheet length.
If the single cut request is set, before the start of the material web was
identified, the cut position can be defined. The knife stays in the wait
position until the material has approached the cutting range,
corresponding to the cutting data. Thus, for example, a precise cutting
edge can be established at the start of the material web.
Request
single cut
Operating mode
single cut
Material identifcation
Knife speed
active operating mode
Fig. 2-5
Timing in the "single cut" operating mode

15
Introduction
2.3.5 End cut

The end cut operating mode is used to make a cut at the end of the
material web. This allows a selectable sheet length (format) to be cut
from the end of the material. The setpoint for this sheet length is
transferred when the operating mode is activated, which means that it
must already be available. The format must be subatantial shorter than
the clearance between light barrier and knife. Ther must be enough time
for accelerating the knife when the web end passes the light barrier.
This function is latching, and is started with the rising edge of the
request, if the end of material web identification still detects the material
web at this particular instant. The cut is made with the active operating
mode after the end of the material web is identified.
Request
end cut
Operating mode
end cut
Material web
identification
Knife speed
t
Active operating mode
Clearance light
barrier - knife
Light barrier
Knife
End of web
Web speed
Possible format
Format
Invalid format
Web speed
Format
Fig. 2-6
Timing in the "end cut operating mode
2.3.6 Cut program

The cut program automatically manages a larger number of cuts. The
length and number of cuts is specified by the automation system. The
number of sheets to be cut is transferred with the control bit enable cut
program (refer to shear control words) and the cutting operation is
started.
The timing corresponds to that shown in Fig. 2-3, only that for the cut
program, the cut request is withdrawn by the internal control, and not by
the automation.
16

Introduction
Option special test
Optionally, directly after a cut program, a sheet with a special length can
be cut. The source for the format length of the special test is defined
using H626 (chart 190).
2.3.7 Jogging 1/2

Jogging 1
If jogging 1 is activated, the knife normally moves forwards with a

selectable velocity (L523). When the reference position is passed, the
knife position and the knife calibrated status are set.
Coarse reference
If, when referencing, material is still in the traversing range of the knife,
then it is not possible to pass through the reference position. In this case,
a coarse reference switch can be evaluated, which can be located close
to the knife wait position. However, the coarse reference pulse is not as
precise as a zero pulse and therefore results in a lower cutting accuracy
at the first cut
For operation with jogging 2, the same statements are valid as for
jogging 1. However, jogging 2 is normally processed with a negative
direction of rotation
Jogging 2
Table 2-2
Parameters for jogging 1 and jogging 2
Parameter
Chart
Significance
H523
280
Source for jogging 1 in the shears control word
H524
280
Source for jogging 2 in the shears control word
L306
170
Source of the coarse pulse for the coarse referencing function
L308
170
Source for the coarse reference - setting value for jogging 1
L311
170
Coarse reference setting value jogging 2 and a negative direction of rotation
L312
170
Coarse reference setting value jogging 2 and a positive direction of rotation
L520 - L523
260
Sources to enable jogging, positive direction of rotation
L524 - L526
260
Sources to enable jogging, negative direction of rotation
L523
260
Speed for jogging, positive direction of rotation
L527
260
Speed for jogging, negative direction of rotation
L528
260
Source to select the direction of rotation when jogging
2.3.8 Approaching the knife change position

This function is used to bring the knife to a specific mechanical position.
The knife is moved to this position through the shortest possible path,
whereby generally the cutting range does not have to be passed through.
Cutting cannot be started from the knife change position!

17
Hardware components and interfaces
3 Hardware components and interfaces

3.1
Technology module T400

Feature
Data and explanations
Processor
32bit / 32 MHz RISC processor with floating-point arithmetic operation
Cache
4 Kbyte program, 4 Kbyte data
RAM
4 Mbyte DRAM
Program memory
2 Mbyte
Programming
Download via serial interface
NOVRAM
Data save function for up to 30 configurable values at power-down
Change memory
32 Kbyte; to permanently save online changes (e.g. value connection changes)
Subrack
Operation in the electronic boxes of the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES drive

converters (with the exception of the Compact Plus type of construction) and
SIMOREG DC Master
SRT400 subrack
Operation without fan up to an ambient temperature of 55C
Software protection
Application-specific hardlock PALs available (this is required when using the

standard software package)
Analog outputs
No. :
2
Range: 10 V
(12-bit resolution)
Analog inputs
No.:
5
Range: 10 V
(2 differential inputs; 3 non-floating inputs)

(12-bit resolution)
Digital inputs
No.:
8
Interrupt-capable: 4
Voltage:
Digital outputs
No.:
2
Voltage:
Current:
max. 50 mA
Bi-directional inputs/
outputs (digital)
No.:
Pulse encoder 1
HTL; Zero pulse and coarse pulse input;
4
Current / voltage: refer to digital inputs/outputs
alternative to the terminals, tracks A , B and zero pulse can be taken from the
backplane bus of the basic drive converter (encoder emulation)
Pulse encoder 2
RS422; HTL bipolar; HTL unipolar; TTL
Absolute value
encoder
2 synchronous-serial encoders can be connected; protocol: SSI or EnDat
Serial interface 1
2nd encoder uses the same terminals as the communications interface 2; this
means that only one of the alternatives can be used
Service functions:
Download
Online operation in the CFC test mode, basic start-up
Alternatively:
USS (OP1S)
USS
Peer-to-peer
Serial interface 2
Alternatives:
Diagnostic LEDs
Red
Internal T400 monitoring
Green Data transfer to the communications module
Yellow Data transfer to the basic drive
18

X8.80
81
82
HTL
83
84
85
Pulse encoder
+15V / 100mA
Track A
T400
Track B
Pulse
Zero pulse. encoder
1
Coarse
pulse

Zero pulse from CU
M
Increm_1
X6.62
Track A +
HTL
TTL
RS422
63
Track B +
64
Zero pulse+
Select with
switch S2
65
66
X8.86
87
88
Coarse
pulse+
M
Track A -
Pulse
encoder
2
Track B Zero
pulse-
5 analog inputs
11 bits + sign
10 V / 10 k
+
-
91
A
D
92
10V
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
94
X7.70
Tx/Rx-
71
69
Symbolic
hardware
addresses of
the basis
software
package
TTL
RS232
TxD
68
RxD
67
11 bits + sign
Ana_In_1
X9.97
98
D
A
99
Ana_In_4
P24
external
X5.45
50
Ana_In_5
51
99
X5. 45
46
4 digital outputs
52
M
P24
external
47
bidirectional
24 V DC
(8 mA input current)
2 analog outputs
10 V / 10 mA
11 bits + sign
Ana_In_3
96
10V
Program download
CFC online
USS / SIMOVIS
95
10V
Serial interface 1
Ana_In_2
Ana_Out_2
10V
Tx/Rx+
Increm_2
Ana_Out_1
93
RS485, 2 wire
X01
X9.90
10V
MASTERDRIVES
basic drive
CUx
+24V
2 digital outputs
24 V DC / 100 mA
40 mA base load
also come from the
basic drive
BinInOut
48
X7.76
77
78
79
49
SSI_1
Absolute value
encoder 1
24V
50
M
SSI_2
53
4 digital inputs
interrupt-capable
24 V DC
(8 mA input current)
54
X7.72
55
X6
56
Absolute value
encoder 2
74
or
75
serial interface 2
BinInput
57
4 digital inputs
24 V DC
73
X02
58
59
peer-to-peer or
USS
60
61
24V
Communications
module
e.g.: CB1
Fig. 3-1
Dual
portRAM
Dual
portRAM
MASTERDRIVES
basic drive
CUx
Layout of the terminals on the T400 technology module

19
3.1.1 Digital inputs and outputs

The digital inputs and outputs of the T400 technology module use 24V
signal levels. The 24 V - power supply voltage (P24) for the digital
outputs must be externally connected.
Power supply
voltage
A maximum of 14 digital inputs are available for open-loop control

functions (4 of which are bi-directional, i.e. can either be used as input or
as output). All of the inputs are also available inverted. The associated
parameters and connectors are obtained from function charts 100 and
110.
P24
T400
terminal
22k
68nF
10k
Digital inputs
Coarse pulse inputs
Fig. 3-2
T400
terminal
6k8
Digital outputs
Circuit of the digital inputs and outputs (P24: External 24 V power supply at terminal
45)
P24
Drive enable
10k
T400
terminal
6k8
22k
Bi-directional inputs
Fig. 3-3
68nF
Bi-directional outputs
Circuit of bi-directional digital inputs/outputs (P24: external 24 V power supply at

terminal 45)
The inputs can be used for any open-loop control tasks. The configured
pre-assignment can be taken from Table 3-2. It should be observed that
the inputs are up-dated in different sampling times!
Table 3-1
Pre-assignment of the digital outputs
Terminal
Sampling
Chart
46
T1
100
Fault (bi-directional terminal; driver activated with H265 = 1 )
47
T1
100
Open brake (bi-dir. term.; driver activated with H266 = 1 )
48
T1
100
Motor fan on (bi-dir. term.; driver activated with H267 = 1 )
51
T1
100
Raise knife / shears
52
T1
100
Lower knife / shears
20
Application


Table 3-2
Pre-assignment of the digital inputs
Terminal
Sampling
time
Chart
Application
53
T3
280
External fault / alarm 1 in the shears control word 2
54
T3
280
Jogging 1 in the shears control word 2
55
T3
280
Jogging 2 in the shears control word 2
56 inverse
T3
280
External fault / alarm 2 in the shears control word 2
58
T3
280
Coarse reference in the shears control word 2
64
(Hardware)
530
Pass mark detecting respectively zero pulse shear drive (rotary axis)
65
T1
180
240
Light barrier signal to set the reference position

Light barrier signal to input the cutting torque
3.1.2 Analog inputs and outputs

The analog inputs are scaled in the factory setting, so that a terminal
voltage of 5 V is emulated internally as 1.0. This pre-setting is changed
using scaling factors and offsets. The following is valid for analog inputs:
Inputs
Scaling
The integration of analog inputs into the standard software package and
the associated parameters and connectors is shown in function chart 90.
Generally, a smoothing element is connected after the analog inputs in
the software. This smoothing function can be de-activated by setting the
filter time constant to 0 ms. The control can set the output signal to zero
(inhibit).
10nF
20k
T400
terminals
20k
20k
20k
+
20k
10nF
T400
terminal
Analog inputs AE1, AE2
10nF
20k
Analog inputs AE3, AE4, AE5
Fig. 3-4 Analog input circuit
Outputs
The T400 has two analog outputs, which are processed in the fastest
sampling time (T1). The output quantity is selected per parameter. The
outputs have a filter which can be parameterized and which the control
can set to 0 in operation (inhibit). The associated function chart is
number 95.

21
D
A
T400
terminal
56
10nF
Fig. 3-5
Circuit of the analog output
The outputs can be scaled. For the factory setting, for 1.0, 5 V is output.
The output voltage U is obtained as follows:
U = ( value + offset ) scaling factor 5 V
Table 3-3
Terminal assignment, analog input, T400 module
Terminals Sampling
time
Scaling
Offset
Filter time
constant
Source
inhibit
Connector
Value,
smooth
90 / 91
T3
H210
H211
H212
H213
3214
d214
92 / 93
T3
H215
H216
H217
H218
3219
d219
94 / 99
T4
H275
H276
H277
H278
3279
d279
95 / 99
T4
H280
H281
H282
H283
3284
d284
96 / 99
T4
H285
H286
H287
H288
3289
d289
Table 3-4
Terminal assignment analog inputs, T400 module
Terminal
Select source
Output value
Source for
inhibit
Scaling
factor
Offset
Filter time
constant
97 / 99
H220
d223
H221
H161
H160
H222
98 / 99
H226
d229
H227
H163
H162
H228
22

3.1.3 Pulse encoders

Pulse encoders with two tracks, offset by 90 with zero pulse are
required. If the pulse encoder for the knife position is connected to the
basic drive (CU) then its track signals are transferred from the CU to the
T400 via the common backplane bus (Fig. 2-1). In this particular case,
other encoder types can also be used - e.g. high-resolution encoders. It
is important that the encoder module of the CU has an incremental
encoder emulation function, so that the encoder, from the perspective of
the T400 acts like an incremental encoder.
The selection and encoder mounting are decisive for the cutting
accuracy of the system! Thus, the following points must be taken into
account:
Knife position
Material web
position
Measured value
resolution
Example
Encoder power
supply
Screening
The position encoder for the knife should be mounted directly at the knife
and not at the drive motor. A gearbox located between the motor and
knife results in inaccuracy as a result of the gearbox play. The zero pulse
must always be output at precisely the same knife position.
The material web position is sensed using a wheel with incremental
encoder, which is driven by the material which is to be cut. As a result of
slip between the feed drive and material, significant measuring
inaccuracy can result when sensing the position using the angle of the
feed drive.
The resolution of the material position sensing must be 10 x higher than
the required cutting accuracy. This means, that if a cutting accuracy of 1
mm is to be achieved, then the encoder must provide at least 10 position
encoder increments for a 1 mm material feed. For the position sensing,
each edge of the position tracks is evaluated, whereby the position
resolution is quadrupled. (A 1024 pulse encoder generates 4096 edges
per revolution).
Thus, a position encoder increment is the same as the 1/(4 pulse
number)th part of a revolution.
Required cutting accuracy:
Wheel diameter:
Wheel circumference:
Edges per revolution:
Min. pulse number of the encoder:
Selected encoder pulse number:
0.5 mm
200 mm
628 mm
10 628 / 0.5 = 12566
12566 / 4 = 3142
4096 pulses/revolution
A 15 V (max. 100 mA) is available as encoder power supply from the

T400 module.
The pulse encoder cable and the cables for the synchronizing pulses
must be screened. The cable screen must be connected with ground at
both ends, possibly using clamps and through a low-impedance
connection. This is especially important, if these signals are received
from proximity- or switching contacts.
The electrical input circuit of the encoder is shown in Fig. 3-6. If an HTL
encoder is connected at encoder 2, the inverting inputs are switched to
ground.

23

The speed sensing is adapted at the encoder using the parameters listed
in the following tables.
T400
terminal
470pF
22k
15 V
Treshold and
hysteresis can be
set (S2)
1nF
T400
terminal
150
5k6
1nF
T400
terminal
150
S2.x
33k
Pulse encoder 1
tracks A, B, zero
10k
22k
470pF
Pulse encoder 2
tracks A, B, zero
Fig. 3-6 Incremental encoder connection circuit
Table 3-5
types
Encoder 1
RS422
HTL
TTL
HTL 3V
81
62
62
62
62
86
82
63
63
63
63
87
83
64
64
64
64
66
88
P15 - output to the encoder power supply 15 V
80
80
80
80
80
Ground
85
66
66
66
66
Switch S2.1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.3
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Switch S2.4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch S2.5
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Track A+ or track A
Track ATrack B+ or track B
Track B-
24
Encoder 2
HTL


Table 3-6
Parameters to set the incremental encoder
Param.
Chart
H400
120
Encoder pulses/revolution for the knife

position (encoder 1)
H407
120
Mode, encoder 1
(refer to Table 3-7)

Encoder type
Filtering the track signals
Defining the standstill limit
Behavior when setting the position
H408
120
Synchronization settings for encoder 1
Position correction for a zero pulse

Coarse pulse evaluation
H409
120
Max. pulses, encoder 1; if this value is not

equal to 0, then the position is reset after
H409 position pulses.
H420
130
Encoder pulses/revolution for the knife

position (encoder 2)
H429
130
Mode, encoder 2
(refer to Table 3-7)
Encoder type
Filtering the track signals
Defining the standstill limit
H428
130
Synchronization settings, encoder 2
Position correction for a zero pulse

Coarse pulse evaluation
H430
130
Maximum pulses, encoder 2; if this value is

not equal to zero, the position is reset after
H430 position pulses.
Table 3-7
Bit(s)
0
Significance
Details
Incremental encoder sensing modes (factory setting, highlighted)
Designation
Encoder type
3 ... 1 Filter for encoder tracks

(for encoder type 1)
Values
0
1
000
001
010
011
100
otherwise
Significance
Type 1: Two encoder tracks, shifted through
90
Type 2: One track for each direction of
rotation (do not use!)
No filter
500 ns
2 s
8 s
16 s
no permissible
0
1
Position = Setting value

Position = Position - setting value

difference
0
1
Pos. diff. = position difference setting value

Pos. diff. = pos. diff. - pos. diff. setting value
Source of the encoder tracks (this

can only be selected for encoder 1)
0
1
from terminals 81, 82 of the T400

from the basic drive (backplane bus)
Source of the zero pulse track for

encoder 1
0
1
from terminals 83 of the T400

from the basic drive converter (backplane
bus)
0x01
0x7F
(4 + 1) cycles without position change

(4 + 127) cycles without position change
15 ... 8 Measuring interval for standstill

identification in cycles: After 4 +
selected value without position
encoder change, the speed goes to
0

25
Table 3-8
Synchronizing modes of the incremental encoder sensing (factory setting highlighted)
Bit(s)
Designation
Values
Significance
Synchronization
0
1
Via zero pulse

Via trigger signal (not for T400 !)
Behavior for a zero pulse
0
1
Position = setting value

Position = position - setting value
3 ... 2 Not assigned

6 ... 4 Coarse pulse evaluation
(Modes, refer to Fig. 3-7 )
000
001
010
011
100
101
No coarse pulse evaluation

Mode 1 (no coarse pulse evaluation)
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
15 ... 7 Not assigned
Coarse pulse
evaluation

For example, faults/disturbances can be suppressed or only certain
synchronizing pulses evaluated by combining coarse- and fine pulses. 5
different cases are taken into account. In the default setting, the
synchronizing pulses are used independently of the associated coarse
pulses (mode 1).
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Y = XG AND XF
only 1st pulse
Y = XG AND XF
Y = XG AND XF
only 1st pulse
Y = XG AND XF
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
Coarse pulse
XG
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
Fine pulses
XF
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Evaluation signal
Fig. 3-7
26
Operating modes for the coarse pulse evaluation (fine pulses are the zero pulses)

3.1.4 Communication interfaces

3.1.4.1 Peer-to-peer interface
The standard software package includes a peer-to-peer interface, which

is used for fast data transfer with other modules, e.g. an additional T400.
This interface has the following pre-setting:
Table 3-9 Data to the peer-to-peer interface
Characteristic
Param.
Enable communications
Value
L066
Baud rate
L060
19200 baud
L067
100 ms
Monitoring time limit after power-up
L077
20 s
constant
each 5 PZD
Number of process data, receive and send
The other parameters and connectors are described in function chart

780.
Caution
In order to eliminate data transfer faults, the terminating resistors of the

interface used, must be switched-in (switch S1/3 to S1/6; refer to [4]).
3.1.4.2 USS slave interface

Serial interface 1 (RS232 / RS485) can be used as an alternative for
parameterization or as diagnostics interface. The parameterization is
provided for the special case that the T400 is operated in the SRT400.
When used in the basic drive, parameterization is realized via the basic
drive. The following settings are required for USS slave operation (refer
to function chart 770):
Table 3-10
Settings for USS slave operation (factory = factory setting)
Involves
Value
Factory
setting
L920
Significance
Enable the USS slave
L921
9600
L922
Slave address on the USS bus
H923
0: RS485 (OP1S)
1: RS232 (SIMOVIS)
S1/8 on
T400
Caution:
ON
OFF
Changeover from online operation (CFC, basic commissioning)

to USS.
This only becomes effective after power-down/reset of the T400
It is not possible to simultaneously use USS and online operation. USS

operation is not possible if parameterization was incorrect. This means
that the error can only be reversed if online operation is selected and,
e.g. the fault is reversed using the basic commissioning function.
Operation with OP1S is only possible from the OP1S version V2.2.

27

3.1.4.3 Diagnostics interface
A PC can be connected to the serial interface 1 (RS232). The interface
can be used with the service commissioning/ TELEMASTER of the CFC
in the test mode. This allows values and interconnections to be changed.
The baud rate is 19200 baud.
Table 3-11
Terminals of interface X01 on the T400 (RS232)
T400
PC
Terminal
Function
9 pin
25 pin
67
RxD
68
TxD
69
Ground
3.1.5 Cycle times (tasks)

The sheet-cutter software is cyclically processed. 5 different cycle times
are available, in each one of which a processing sequence occurs (task).
The individual functions, are, depending on the priority from a control
perspective, embedded in faster or slower tasks.
In the following text, no timing data is specified, but instead a reference
is only made to the processing task.
Table 3-12
28
Software cycle times
Task
Sheet-cutter /
cut to length
Tasks which have been executed (examples)
T1
1.6 ms
Closed-loop position control

Setpoint input for the CU
Cam group
Pass mark detecting
T2
6.4 ms
Presently not used
T3
12.8 ms
Open-loop control
Communications with automation
Free function blocks (exceptions see charts 425ff)
T4
51.2 ms
Slow control tasks and monitoring functions
T5
204.8 ms
Parameter handling

3.2
Communications module
The communications module forms the interface to the higher-level
automation of the closed-loop sheet-cutter control. Generally, a
PROFIBUS module CBP is inserted at slot G in the electronics box of
the drive converter (lower center slot). Other communication modules
are possible, as long as they behave like a CBP with respect to the T400
(e.g. CB1). All of the CBP settings (e.g. bus address) are realized via the
parameters of the CU.
The automation can read and change the process data (PZD) and
parameters (PKW) on the T400 via the communications network.
The telegram from the automation system comprises 4 words for
parameterization and up to 10 PZD. The pre-assignment is specified in
the following tables.
Monitoring:
Pre-setting:
Table 3-13
Regular reception at the communications interface is monitored (chart

660). If a fault/error develops, alarms or faults can be output.
At the latest after 20 s (H929) after power-up, the first valid telegram
must be received. In operation, a new telegram must be received every
100 ms (H926).
Telegram from the automation system to the T400 (* optional; not required for operation respectively
fixed value used as setpoint)
Word
Name
PKE
Significance/assignment
Chart
Parameter ID
IND
PWE (H)
Parameter value (high word)
Index
PWE (L)
Parameter value (low word)
PZD1 from CB
Control word 1 for CU (CB_CTW1; Table 3-16)
PZD2 from CB
* Master velocity, material web
PZD3 from CB
* Factor, overspeed
PZD4 from CB
* Control word 2
670
PZD5 from CB
* Acceleration
670
10
PZD6 from CB
* Sheet length (format setpoint)
670, 190
11
PZD7 from CB
* Cutting force
670, 240
670, 680
670
670, 265
12
PZD8 from CB
* Removal up to the cut
13
PZD9 from CB
* Number of cuts
670, 300
14
PZD10 from
CB
Shear control word (SCTW; Table 3-15 )
670, 270

670
29

Table 3-14
Telegram from the T400 to the automation system
Word
Name
PKE
Parameter ID
IND
Index
PWE (H)
Parameter value (high word)
PWE (L)
Parameter value (low word)
PZD1 CB out
Status word 1 (Table 3-17)
PZD2 CB out
Material velocity (actual value)
PZD3 CB out
Speed actual value, knife
700, 120
PZD4 CB out
Status word 2 (Table 3-18)
700, 690
PZD5 CB out
Current actual value
700, 610
10
PZD6 CB out
Torque actual value
700, 610
11
PZD7 CB out
Format length, actual sheet (actual format value)
700, 130
12
PZD8 CB out
No pre-assignment (default)
700
13
PZD9 CB out
No pre-assignment (default)
700
14
PZD10 CB out
Shear status word
Table 3-15
Significance/assignment
Chart
700, 690
700
700, 520
CB shear control word (chart 680)
Bit
Name
Control bit
Significance for 1
CB SCTW1.0
Not defined
CB SCTW1.1
Continuous cut
Continuous cutting requested
CB SCTW1.2
Test cut
Test cut requested
CB SCTW1.3
Single cut
Single cut requested
CB SCTW1.4
Length setpoint valid
Requested length setpoint is valid
CB SCTW1.5
Light barrier, start of web
Material web detected by the optical barrier
CB SCTW1.6
Referencing
Request, calibrate knife
CB SCTW1.7
Enable storing
Store value to non-volatile memory
CB SCTW1.8
Approach starting position
Request, approach starting position
CB SCTW1.9
Store actual value
Storing enabled
10
CB SCTW1.10
Enable cutting program
11
CB SCTW1.11
Crop cut enable
Cutting program is enabled;

the length setpoint is transferred with a
0 1 edge
For the start of the material web, the 1st cut
is made with the crop length (special format,
refer to Chart 60)
12
CB SCTW1.12
End cut
13
CB SCTW1.13
Not defined
14
CB SCTW1.14
Approach knife change position
Request to move the knife into the change

position
15
CB SCTW1.15
Option, special test
After the cut program has been completed,

a sheet is cut with a special length
30
Request, end cut


Table 3-16
CB control word 1 (inputs for CU; refer to Chart 680)
Bit
Name
CB Control W1.0
Stop
No stop
CB Control W1.1
Electrical OFF
No electrical OFF
CB Control W1.2
Fast stop
No fast stop
CB Control W1.3
No inverter enable
Inverter enable
CB Control W1.4
Set ramp-function generator to 0
Enable ramp-function generator
CB Control W1.5
Hold ramp-function generator
CB Control W1.6
Inhibit setpoint
Enable setpoint
CB Control W1.7
CB Control W1.8
No jogging 1
Jogging 1
Acknowledge fault
CB Control W1.9
No jogging 2
Jogging 2
10
CB Control W1.10 Not permissible !!
Control from the automation
11
CB Control W1.11 Positive direction of rotation inhibited
Positive direction of rotation enabled
12
CB Control W1.12 Negative direction of rotation inhibited Negative direction of rotation enabled
13
CB Control W1.13 Motorized potentiometer, not raised
Motorized potentiometer, raised
14
CB Control W1.14 Motorized potentiometer, not lowered
Motorized potentiometer, lowered
15
CB Control W1.15 External fault
NO external fault
Table 3-17
Status word 1 (status for CB; refer to Chart 690)
Bit
Assignment for 1
Ready to power up from the CU
Ready from the CU
Inverter enabled from the CU
Fault from CU effective
Electrical OFF from CU
No fast stop from CU
Power-on inhibit from CU
Alarm from CU effective
Setpoint-actual value deviation identified by CU
10
Knife in motion
11 ... 15
Table 3-18
Status word 2 (status for CB; refer to chart 690)
Bit
0 ... 5
6
7 ...15
Assignment for 1
0
Torque limit reached (reference torque > maximum torque )
Inverter enabled from the CU

31
3.3

The T400 and the CU communicate via a dual port RAM (DPRAM).
Parameters and PZD are transferred. In this particular application, the
T400 receives 16 PZD and sends 8 PZD (Table 3-20 and Table 3-19).
The CU and T400 monitor communications. If data transfer
(communications) is interrupted for longer than 200 ms, the CU signals
fault F082. The yellow LED is bright on the T400 if communications
between the T400 and CU are OK. Communications is monitored by the
standard software package (Chart 600).
After T400 has been reset in operation (e.g. via CFC online), the T400
re-establishes communications to the CU and controls the yellow LED.
For the CUs presently being used, the channel to the T400 remains
inhibited, also after fault F082 has been acknowledged. This means
that data is not transferred from the CU to the T400.
WARNING
Remedy:
T400
Control word 1
Speed setpoint
Status word 2
Speed
Current actual
value
Minimum
torque
Torque setpoint
Torque actual
value
Maximum
torque
KP adaption
Status word 1
Control word 2
Restart the CU (shutdown the voltage)
DPRAM
1
Speed
Closed-loop
current control
CU
Fig. 3-8
Table 3-19
Limiting
Ramp-function
generator
Speed controller
Process data transfer between the T400 and CU via DPRAM
Process data from the T400 to the basic drive
Word
Name
PZD1 CU
Control word 1 (refer to Chart 630; Table 3-16)
640, 630
PZD2 CU
Speed setpoint (referred to the rated speed)
640, 260
PZD3 CU
Not assigned
PZD4 CU
Control word 2 (refer to Chart 630; )
640, 630
PZD5 CU
Torque setpoint
640, 240
PZD6 CU
KP adaptation
640, 450
PZD7 CU
Reserved for the minimum torque
640
PZD8 CU
Reserved for the maximum torque
640
32
Significance / assignment
Chart
640


Table 3-20
Communications from the basic drive to the T400
Word
Name
PZD1 from CU
Status word 1 CU (Table 3-21)
610, 620
PZD2 from CU
Speed actual value (refer to the reference speed)
610, 500
PZD3 from CU
Not assigned
PZD4 from CU
PZD5 from CU
Torque actual value (referred to the reference torque)
PZD6 from CU
Not assigned
PZD7 from CU
Current actual value (referred to the reference current; for

optional usage)
PZD8 from CU
Not assigned
610
PZD9 from CU
Not assigned
610
10
PZD10 from CU
Not assigned
610
11
PZD11 from CU
Not assigned
610
12
PZD12 from CU
Not assigned
610
13
PZD13 from CU
Not assigned
610
14
PZD14 from CU
Not assigned
610
15
PZD15 from CU
Not assigned
610
16
PZD16 from CU
Not assigned
610
Table 3-21
Significance / assignment
Chart
610
610, 620
Status word 2 CU ( Table 3-22)
610, 700, 490

610
610, 700
Status word 1 from the basic drive (chart 620)
Bit
Name
CU status 1.0
Not ready to power-up
Ready to power-up
CU status 1.1
Not ready
Ready
CU status 1.2
Pulses inhibited
Operation
CU status 1.3
No fault
Fault (pulse inhibit)
CU status 1.4
OFF2 effective
No OFF2 present
CU status 1.5
Fast stop effective (OFF3)
No fast stop
CU status 1.6
Power-up possible
Power-up inhibit
CU status 1.7
No alarm present
Alarm present
CU status 1.8
Setpoint-actual value deviation
CU status 1.9
May not exist !!
No setpoint-actual value deviation
9
10
CU status 1.10
Comparison value reached
Comparison value not reached
11
CU status 1.11
No undervoltage
Fault, undervoltage condition
12
CU status 1.12
Request, main contactor not

energized
Request, energize main contactor
13
CU status 1.13
Ramp-function generator not active
Ramp-function generator active
14
CU status 1.14
Negative speed setpoint
Positive speed setpoint
15
CU status 1.15
(Reserve)
(Reserve)

PZD control
33

Table 3-22
Status word 2 from the basic drive (chart 620)
Bit
Name
CU status 2.0
Restart-on-the-fly not active or

energization ended
Restart-on-the-fly or energization
active
CU status 2.1
(Reserve)
(Reserve)
CU status 2.2
No overspeed
Overspeed
CU status 2.3
No external fault 1 present
External fault 1
CU status 2.4
No external fault 2 present
External fault 2
CU status 2.5
No external alarm present
External alarm
CU status 2.6
No overload alarm
Alarm, drive converter overload
CU status 2.7
No fault, drive converter

overtemperature
Fault, drive converter

overtemperature
CU status 2.8
No alarm, drive converter

overtemperature
Alarm, drive converter

overtemperature
CU status 2.9
No fault, motor overtemperature
Fault, motor overtemperature
10
CU status 2.10
No alarm, motor overtemperature
Alarm, motor overtemperature
11
CU status 2.11
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
12
CU status 2.12
No fault, motor stalled
Fault, motor stalled
13
CU status 2.13
Bypass contactor not energized
Bypass contactor energized
14
CU status 2.14
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
15
CU status 2.15
Pre-charging not active
Pre-charging active
Table 3-23
Control word 2 for the basic drive (chart 630)
Bit
34
Significance
Assignment
Select function data set, bit 0
Select function data set, bit 1
Reserve
Reserve
Select fixed setpoint, bit 0
Select fixed setpoint, bit 1
Reserve
Enable restart-on-the-fly
Enable speed controller droop
Enable CU speed controller
Controller enable
10
External fault 2
11
No master drive
12
No external alarm 1
13
No external alarm 2
14
Select BICO data set 2
15
Checkback signal, main contactor

3.3.1 Faults and alarms

A number of monitoring- and diagnostic functions are implemented in the
standard software package, and the monitoring result is connected to a
fault word (d968). Using masks, it is defined whether a fault bit is
signaled to the CU as alarm (H967), fault (H966) or not at all (chart 530).
The alarms or fault, signalled to the CU are displayed (PMU), e.g.:
A099 or F120. Further, the drive converter shuts down when a fault is
present.
Table 3-24
Bits of the fault word and associated faults and alarms (chart 530)
Bit
Alarm
Fault
A097
F116
Communications CB
A098
F117
Communications to CU
Old CU type (e.g.: CU2) ?
A099
F118
Not assigned
A100
F119
User fault 1
A101
F120
User fault 2
A102
F121
Fault source
Knife position < minimum

value
Possible causes
No/defective communications module
Incorrect bus address (CU P918)
Incorrect module type configured for the bus
master
log-on T400
Assign application-specific user fault
Knife pulse encoder or reference incorrectly

set
Setting function, knife position sets negative
position values
Limit value not adapted to the application
Check limit value L101, L102
Check speed normalization on T400 / CU
Check limit value L101, L102
Check speed normalization on T400 / CU
A103
F122
Overspeed positive (knife)
A104
F123
Overspeed negative (knife)
A105
F124
Knife drive blocked in spite of

setpoint speed and torque
present
A106
F125
Pulse encoder fault (speed

measured values from T400
and CU different)
Incorrect speed normalization ; check the

plant/system geometry, pulse number, encoder
for T400 and CU correct?
10
A107
F126
External fault 1
Assigned application-specific
11
A108
F127
External fault 2
Assigned application-specific
12
A109
F128
Knife position > max. value
Check limit value! For linear axis, high limit

values possible
13
A110
F129
Material position < min. value
14
A111
F130
Fault, TR encoder
Long format (H111) selected too small

Check functions for setting position values
Correct position several times per sheet
Encoder 1 from type TR absolute value encoder?
15
A112
F131
Not used

35
4 Function description
4.1
Normalization operations
Process data are generally transferred as 16-bit fixed-point values.
If the resolution is not sufficient in certain cases, a 32-bit fixed point
value can be used. When converting from the PZD into floating-point
values, the normalization factor 1.0 is used in the factory setting. When
PZD is output, the inverse conversion is made from floating point to a
fixed-point value. The normalization operations can be individually
changed using parameters. Generally, control- and standard word are
available as 16 bit values.
The closed-loop control related core of the closed-loop cut to length
operate with per unit quantities.
Table 4-1
Normalization of the process data
Type
Resolution
Range
Conversion into floating point values
N2
16 bit
-32768 ... 32767
PZD (16 bit )

Normalizat ion factor
16384
N4
32 bit
-2147483648 ...
2147483647
PZD (32 bit )

1073741824
Table 4-2 Normalization for internal closed-loop control quantities
Quantity
Reference quantity
Parameter
Material velocity
V_reference
Knife velocity
V_reference / cos( )
Velocity, knife drive
Reference speed 1 = Speed at material velocity V_reference
d119
Knife position
Fsymech
H105
Reference position
(material)
Xref_normalization
d114
4.2
H104
Table 4-3 Setpoints for the standard software package (from the automation)
Setpoint
Significance
Units
Permissible
range
Cutting length
Format to be cut
1 mm
0 ... 32767 mm
Overspeed factor
Percentage velocity increase when cutting;
0.1 %
0 ... 10.0 %
1 mm
0 ... 32767 mm
Practical range: 0 ... 100
Distance to the cut
0 .. 10%
Supplementary value for the distance between the

light barrier signal and the center axis of the knife,
if the cut doesn't directly coincide with the optical
barrier mark
Sum of the distance light barrier - knife + distance
36

Setpoint
Significance
Units
Permissible
range
2 .. 16384
1N
16384 N
mm
32.767 /s
to the cut, which is effective

Number. of cuts
Number of cuts for the cut program
Cutting force
The cutting force is switched-in in a defined

angular range during the cut
Master velocity
Material velocity for operating situations where

there is no material at the measuring wheel
0.1
Control word 1 for the drive converter, refer to
Table 3-16
Control word 2
Control word 2 for the drive converter, refer to

Table 3-23
Shears control
words
Inputs for the open-loop control of the closed-loop

cut to length, refer to Table 3-15 and Table 3-16
Table 4-4
mm
/s
Actual values of the standard software package (for the automation)
Setpoint
Material velocity
= 1966.02 /min
Acceleration
Control word 1
/s
Significance
Measured value for the material velocity
Units
Range
mm
... 32,767 m /s
/s
= 1966,02 m /min
Knife speed
Knife speed referred to the reference speed
Reference speed
16384
-32768 ..32767
Current actual
value
Current actual value referred to the reference

current
Reference current
16384
-32768 ..32767
Torque actual
value
Speed controller output in the drive converter
Reference torque
16384
-32768 ..32767
Status word 1
refer to Table 3-17
Status word 2
refer to Table 3-18
Shears status
refer to Table 4-8
4.2.1 Control words

The standard software package uses 4 control words:
Control word 1 and control word 2 for the CU (refer to Table 3-16,
Table 3-23). The structure of control word 1 is identical with the first
PZD, which is received from CB. However, this control word is not
completely transferred from the CB to the CU. The enable signals
(setpoint, ramp-function generator, ) are generated from the closedloop cut to length.
2 shears control words (data inputs for the closed-loop cut to lengths)

37
Table 4-5
Shears control word 1 (chart 270)
Bit
Name
SCTW1.0
Not defined
SCTW1.1
Continuous cut
Continuous cut requested
SCTW1.2
Test cut
Test cut requested
SCTW1.3
Single cut
Single cut requested
SCTW1.4
Length setpoint valid
Requested length setpoint is valid
SCTW1.5
Light barrier, start of the

material web
Light barrier identifies the material
SCTW1.6
Referencing
Request knife calibration
SCTW1.7
Not defined
SCTW1.8
Approach start position
Request, approach start position
SCTW1.9
10
SCTW1.10
Enable cut program
Cut program is enabled;

the length setpoint is transferred with the 0
11
SCTW1.11
Crop cut enable
At the start of the material web, the first cut is with

the crop length
Special format, (refer to Chart 60)
12
SCTW1.12
End cut
Request end cut
13
SCTW1.13
Not defined
14
SCTW1.14
Approach knife change

position
Request that the knife moves into the knife change

position
15
SCTW1.15
Option, special test
After the cut program has been completed, a sheet is

cut with a special length
Table 4-6
Control bit
Function for 1
1 edge
Shears control word 2 (Chart 280)
Bit
Name
Control bit
SCTW2.0
Not defined
SCTW2.1
External fault / alarm 1
Function for 1
Error/alarm 1 active
SCTW2.2
External fault / alarm 2
Error/alarm 2 active
SCTW2.3
Jogging 1
Request jogging 1
SCTW2.4
Jogging 2
Request jogging 2
SCTW2.5
Not defined
SCTW2.6
Not defined
SCTW2.7
Fast stop
SCTW2.8
Not defined
SCTW2.9
Coarse reference
10
SCTW2.10
Not defined
11
SCTW2.11
Not defined
12
SCTW2.12
Enable cutting operation
13
SCTW2.13
Not defined
14
SCTW2.14
Not defined
15
SCTW2.15
Acknowledge fault
38
Request no fast stop

Knife at the coarse reference mark
Prerequisite for all cutting operating modes
Acknowledge faults

4.2.2 Status words

Table 4-7
Open-loop control status (Chart 510)
Bit
Assignment
Function for 1
Load TR encoder
Position controller enable Position controller is enabled
At the start position
Knife is located at the start position
Fast stop from the CU
The basic drive does not signal a fast stop
Knife stationary
Knife drive stationary
Drive converter ready
All of the prerequisites have been fulfilled for drive converter

readiness (Chart 360)
TR start fault
The load output of the TR encoder does not respond to the load
request
TR no load frequency
No position track pulses during the load operation for TR encoder
TR load time
Maximum load time of the TR encoder exceeded
10
Setpoint enable
Open-loop cut to length enables the setpoints for the drive converter
11
Knife calibrated
Knife position is calibrated
12
Fault
Fault effective
13
Open brake
The open-loop brake control releases the brake
14
n_knife > 0
Knife standstill identification signals "knife is not stationary
15
Inverter enabled
Power-off delayed drive converter operating signal to control a

motor fan (also refer to H998)
Table 4-8
The absolute position is requested from the TR encoder (see 4.4.3)
Status of the shears (Chart 520)
Bit
Source
Perm. assigned
Assignment
Knife is calibrated
Perm. assigned
Knife in the cutting range (the knife is in synchronism with the material)
Perm. assigned
Knife in the format range (knife is outside the cutting range)
Perm. assigned
Knife at the start position
Perm. assigned
Knife at the change position
Perm. assigned
Cut program completed
Perm. assigned
Zero pulse, knife (extended to 100 ms)
H547
Mode positioning
H548
Raise knife
H549
Lower knife
10
H550
Knife at the top position
11
H551
Knife at the bottom position
12
H552
Synchronization pulse reference (even if synchronizing disabled)
13
H553
Light barrier
14
H554
15
H555

39
4.3
Mode of operation
All of the applications considered, involve synchronizing the motion of a
cutting device to a moving material web, whereby the cut must be made
at a precisely defined position on this material web. The cutting operation
lasts as long as the material and knife are in contact with one another
During this time, the cutting device must generally move in precise
synchronism with the material web. There are also applications, where
the knife moves faster than the material by a specific factor (overspeed
factor), which then pushes the cut sheet forwards. It may also be
necessary, due to the knife geometry, to adapt the velocity to a positiondependent characteristic during the cut, in order to keep the knife parts
precisely at the material velocity.
After the cutting operation, the knife is brought back into the initial
position.
There are significant differences between the motion of rotating and
linear knife systems. Thus, these systems will be separately handled.
4.4
Plant geometry and motion sequences

The machine geometry is defined using parameters. Their significance
differs as to whether it involves a rotating- or a linear system.
4.4.1 Systems with rotary axis

Plant geometry
Systems which use rotary axes, are characterized by the fact that the
drive for the knife position always rotates in one direction of rotation. The
knife position actual value is reset to 0 at the center of the cutting range.
For rotating systems, angular constants can be specified in degrees
(normalization H100 = 360.0; exception, refer to the "double saw"
example. The 0 mark R lies at the center of the cutting range. When R
is exceeded, the knife position is set to 0 using the zero pulse of the
knife encoder. Thus, contrary to linear systems, there is an angular
overflow (refer to Fig. Fig. 4-3 ).
For AX, the knife is no longer in contact with the material; at AY it again
comes into contact with the material. Refer to Fig. 4-1 and Table 4-9 for
additional definitions.
40

F format area
M1
AY
M2
0
R
AX
S
Fig. 4-1
Table 4-9
Angular definition for rotating cutting devices (drum-type shears)
Angular definitions for rotating shears
Qty.
Parameter
Significance
AX
H101
Angle: End of the cutting range; the knife is no longer in contact with the material
AY
H102
Angle: The knife enters the cutting range
AZ
H103
Percentage position of the transition point in the motion sequence (this is not an
angle!)
Format range (the knife velocity is not the same as the material velocity)
Synchronous range or cutting range (knife velocity = material velocity)
M1
Start of the cutting torque input
M2
End of the cutting torque input
Reference point position
Significance of the
mechanical
synchronous format
Fsymech
Radius through which the knife moves
If the knife rotates with a constant speed, whereby the circumferential

velocity of the knife ( r) is the same as the material velocity, then
sheets are cut with length 2r. This size (quantity) is known as the
Fsymech mechanical synchronous format in the following text. The
associated speed is the synchronous speed.
If shorter material formats are to be cut, the knife must be accelerated as
soon as it has exited the cutting range. This means, that the knife can reenter the cutting range faster than at the synchronous speed. The
following diagram is obtained when showing the knife speed as a
function of time with respect to the material position.

41
AZ=0
AZ=1.0
AZ
Vknife
Vmaterial
AY
AY
AX
AX
Format range
t
Cutting range
Fig. 4-2
Circumferential velocity of the knife for the format < Fsymech (principle)
At a constant material velocity, time and material position are

proportional to one another. Then the "period" of the knife velocity
corresponds to the cut sheet length. Further, the integral over the knife
velocity must correspond, during one period, to precisely 360, as the
knife rotates through precisely one revolution during this time.
If sheet formats are to be cut, which are longer than Fsymech, then the
knife must be braked when it exits the cutting range. From a specific
format length onwards, the knife even brakes down to standstill. This
format is called the limiting format. For all format lengths which exceed
the limiting format, the knife remains in a wait position, until the material
has been transported forwards by an adequate length.
Zero pulse
shear encoder
cutting range
Knife speed
AY
AX
AY
AX
VMaterial
Vknife
t
Knife position
R
AY
Wait
position
AX
t
Material position
Format
Fig. 4-3
42
Circumferential velocity and knife position for format >> Fsymech (principle)

The symmetry of the characteristics is specified by the quantity AZ (refer
to Fig. 4-2). For AZ = 0.5 the transition point lies between AX and AY. In
this particular case, the velocity characteristic is symmetrical to AZ. As
AZ decreases, the transition point shifts increasingly towards the AX
direction. At AZ=0, the transition point coincides with AX. Theoretically,
the knife velocity must make a step function.
Thus, the torque stressing of the drive motor can be influenced using AZ.
Symmetrical characteristics result in lower torque stressing; nonsymmetrical characteristics can be used for lower torques when entering
the cutting range, which allows the cutting accuracy to be influenced.
4.4.2 Systems with linear knife motion

The motion sequence for linear knife systems is sub-divided into the
following sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Synchronization
Synchronous range (with cut)
Braking
Return to the initial position (start position) by reversing the drive
direction of rotation for the knife position
From starting from the quiescent position up to the end of the

synchronous range, the characteristics of the linear and rotating systems
coincide. Thus, both system versions can be realized using the same
software.
Knife velocity
Synchronous
range
Braking
AY
Vmaterial
Vknife
Return
positioning
t
Synchronizing
Knife position
AY
Wait
position
Fig. 4-4
Knife speed and position in the linear system
The following definition is obtained from the analogy to the rotating

system:
Significance of
Fsymech
Fsymech = maximum acceleration travel in [mm]

43
Fsymech is also used to normalize the system for the knife coordinates
(H100). This allows knife coordinates (e.g. and AX and AY) to be entered
in [mm], displayed and evaluated (e.g. for knife-position dependent
functions).
The velocity diagram in Fig. 4-3 must be parameterized as follows by
defining the angular constants:
AX = 0
AZ = 0
AY = 0 ... Fsymech
(shifting the wait position to 0)

(defines the accelerating range)
4.4.3 Absolute knife position

Applications with
rotary axes
In order to be able to sense the absolute encoder position, an encoder

must be used with a reference point on the gearbox output side. For
practical reasons, the encoder zero pulse is used. The reference point
position must be able to be freely selected so that it can be located in the
cutting range of the knife.
Optionally, an additional proximity switch (BERO) can be mounted. It
must be adjusted so that this course reference is active in the quiescent
setting range of the knife, i.e. when the knife is fully opened. In this case,
the system can be referenced using jogging 1, without having to passthrough the cutting range.
Applications with
linear axes
For linear systems, the reference position is located in the quiescent

setting of the knife, i.e. outside the cutting range and close to the limit
switch. The zero mark is defined using a proximity switch or by
combining a proximity switch (coarse pulse) with the zero pulse of the
knife feed.
Applications with
absolute value
encoders
Three types of absolute value encoders are used to sense the knife
position:
TR encoder (pulse encoder, which sense the absolute position, and
output, when requested, this as pulse sequence at the incremental
tracks).
Absolute value encoder at the T400 terminals (SSI- or EnDat
encoder)
Absolute value encoder connected to an encoder sensing module of
the basic drive (CU), whereby the absolute position must be
transferred as process data from the CU to the T400.
When using an absolute value encoder, the incremental position sensing
is initialized with the absolute knife position.
44

4.4.4 Typical system configurations

The following overview shows the essential system configuration
parameters using typical systems.
Both for systems with rotary- as well as linear axis, there are applications
where the knife- and material movement directions deviate from one
another. In these cases, the speed- and position components are
required in the material flow direction, which can be calculated using the
Epsilon parameter(H108).
Table 4-10
System overview
Schematic
Description
Drum-type shears
1 knife at the circumference of
the shears-type drum
Fsymech
Feed/revolution.
Radius of action of the

knife
Fsymech
Half the radius of action
Radius action =
Rotary axis with normalization in

angular degrees (H100 = 360)
Drum-type shears with 2 knifes

along the circumference
2 Fsymech
Rotary axis with normalization in

angular degrees (H100 = 360)
Double saw
Rotary axis with normalization
mm (H100 = Fsymech).
Reference position at the cut
center
Flying saw
Linear axis. Knife position in mm
with respect to the wait position
Flying knife
Motor
Linear axis. Knife position in mm

with respect to the wait position

Half the length of the

transport belt
Circumference of the
drive wheel of the
transport belt
Acceleration range:
Knife travel for 1
Distance between the
revolution of the knife
wait position and the start feed drive
cut
Acceleration range:
Spindle feed per
Distance between the
revolution
wait position and the start
cut
45
4.5
Closed-loop control structure

The closed-loop control essentially comprises the following components
Setpoint generator for synchronization operation (format generator)
Setpoint generator for return positioning (PosRG; this is not required
for rotating shears)
Closed-loop control section
Cut length
Angular ranges
Position
ref. value
Speed setpoint
Torque setpoint
Overspeed factor
Setpoint
generator
Speed actual
value
reference
(material)
T400
CU
Position controller
Speed controller
Control section
Drive converter
Torque controller
Position actual
value
reference
(material)
Position actual
value, knife
Fig. 4-5
M
3~
Speed actual
value, knife
Closed-loop control structure
The setpoint generator calculates the setpoints for the knife position, speed and the required torque from the cutting data (refer to Fig. 4-5).
The position controller is computed on the T400; the speed- and torque
controllers in the drive converter.
The setpoint generator requires the following input quantities:
46
Plant/system geometry (AX, AY)

Required speed characteristic (select the characteristic type)
Cut format
Reference velocity (material)
Reference position
Overvelocity factor

4.5.1 Types of characteristics

The characteristic of the knife speed is defined by selecting the type of
the characteristic (parameter H154) and the position of the transition
point AZ (refer to Fig. 4-2). The types of characteristics which are
available are shown in the following table.
Type of
characteristic
Characteristics
H154
0
Sinusoidal arc
Format < Fsymech
Format > Fsymech
Vknife
Vmaterial
AY
AX
AY
AX
1
Linear ramps
Format < Fsymech
Format > Fsymech
Vknife
Vmaterial
AY
AX
AY
AX
2
Linear ramps
with roundingoff
(start and end,
each with 10%
of the V
amplitude)
Format < Fsymech
Format > Fsymech
Vknife
Vmaterial
AY
AX
AY
AX
Fig. 4-6
Types of characteristics for the format generator
The type of characteristic is selected depending on the particular

application. The smoother the transition of the velocity from acceleration
into the cutting range, then the more precise is the cut. On the other
hand, linear ramps (type 1) allow the best possible utilization of the
motor torque.

47
4.6
Systems with rotary axis

The sub-functions of the closed-loop cut to length will be described using
examples of plants and systems. These will explain the basic settings of
the closed-loop control. Detailed functions will then be described using
case studies. The solutions of detailed functions (e.g. pass mark
synchronization) are principally valid for other system types as well (also
using linear axes).
4.6.1 Drum-type shears (basic settings)
Knife shaft with

inkremental encoder:
Measuring wheel with

incremental encoder:
Start of web
detection
Driving
roll
Light barrier
20
vmax = 200
m
0m
20
m
min
20
Material
240 mm
Fig. 4-7
Table 4-11
Distance material
Panel length (FORMAT)
700 mm
900 mm
Drum-type shears (typical system)
System-specific data
Param
Value
H100
360
X_Shear Norm
Normalization value for knife coordinates (AX, AY are

specified in degrees)
H101
20
AX
Exit angle
H102
340
AY
Entry angle (refer to Fig. 4-1)
Reference Speed
Reference Speed is the maximum material velocity
Fsymech
Circumference of the circle of knife blade movement
Epsilon
Knife and material have the same direction of motion
Quantity
Significance
H104
200 /min
H105
753.98 mm
H108
0.0
H115
628.319 mm
SizeMeas.Wheel
Measuring wheel circumference
H117
753.98 mm
Feed/Revolution
Knife travel for 1 revolution of the knife axis
H120
Mode linear axis
Rotary axis (knife position is reset for cut at 0)
H122
700 mm
Distance_material
Distance between the light barrier for start of web detection

and center of the knife
48

The drive motor for the knife is directly mounted on the knife without a
gearbox. The knife and motor can therefore use the same incremental
encoder. This is electrically connected to the CU. The position tracks and
the zero pulse are transferred from the encoder emulation (pulse
encoder module of the CU) to the T400 via the backplane bus.
The knife position when cutting is a function of the reference position.
Thus, all of the errors when sensing the reference position flow directly
into the cutting accuracy. Although the precise reference position is
forced by the cut, and is therefore known, this operation is used to set
the reference position.
Error correction,
reference position
The zero pulse from the knife encoder is simultaneously used as zero
pulse for encoder 2. When cutting, the knife position and the reference
position are set to zero (refer to Fig. 4-1) and therefore all of the
reference position sensing errors which have occurred, are deleted.
Table 4-12
Hardware connections (terminals, refer to Fig. Fig. 3-1)
Signal
Module
Encoder connections of the CU
CU
Incremental encoder at the knife
Tracks A, B, encoder 1
T400
Via the backplane bus from CU
Zero track, encoder 1
T400
Via the backplane bus from CU
Tracks A, B, encoder 2
T400
Incremental encoder, measuring wheel
Zero pulse, encoder 2
T400
Zero pulse, encoder emulation of the CU (encoder 1 and

encoder 2 using the same zero pulse)
Terminal 65
T400
Light barrier signal to identify the start of the material web
Table 4-13
Source
Incremental encoder settings
Param
Value
Quantity
Significance
H400
4096
Pulses Encoder 1
Pulses/revolution of the incremental encoder at the knife
H420
2048
Pulses Encoder 2
Pulses/revolution of the incremental encoder of the measuring

wheel
4.6.1.1 Pass mark synchronization

To synchronize to a mark on the material requires a light barrier to sense
it (H106). When the mark is passed, the reference position must
precisely have the following value
XSET = reference position(pass mark) = sheet length - distance(cut - pass mark)
This guarantees that the cut is precisely made at the pass mark (the cuts
can be made at a defined distance from the pass mark using H107
distance to the cut).
This distance between the cut (knife center position) and the next pass
mark is also dependent on the actual sheet length, as shown in the
following table and Fig. 4-8.

49
Table 4-14
Setting value for the reference position (material position) for the pass mark synchronization (refer to Fig. 4-8 )
Operating case
Identification
Distance, pass mark

to the cut XPM
Setting value
XSET
Light barrier senses the next cut position.
FORMAT >= XLG
XLG
FORMAT - XLG
Several pass marks are located between

the light barriers and knife (also applies
for the operating case above)
FORMAT < XLG
XLG modulo FORMAT
FORMAT - XPM
Light barrier placed behind th cut region
FORMAT > XLG
XLG
XLG
Light barrier
Knife center
Distance, light barrier - knife

XLG = 700 mm
XPM
XSET
Pass marks
Material
2nd panel
1st panel
Distance cut = -15 mm
Fig. 4-8
Defining the reference position setting value XSET
The reference position is set to the setting value XSET when the pass
mark is passed. Thus, the "set position" function is no longer available
when cutting. Instead of this, the reference position is corrected by the
sheet length when cutting:
Cutting instant
Reference position(cut) = reference position - sheet length

Table 4-15
Parameters for pass mark synchronization and values for the example above
Param
Chart
Value
Quantity
Significance
H095
60
3106
S.Dist.LightGate
Source for the distance from the light barrier to the knife
fixed value
center axis
H096
60
3107
S.Dist. Cut
Source for the distance between the pass mark and cut
fixed value
H106
60
700 mm
Dist. Light Gate
Distance from the light barrier to the knife center axis.
H107
60
-15.0 mm
Dist. Cut
Fixed value distance to the cut. The cut is made 15 mm

in front of the pass mark (example)
H424
130
0413
S.Pos_2 correct
Source for the pulse, generated per software to correct

the reference position when cutting. The reference
position is reduced by the current format length.
Possible sources: 0413 or 0417

H427
130
3630
S.Pos.corr.Val2
Correction value of the reference position when cutting.

This corresponds to the currently effective format
length.
L202
180
3094
S.SV_Setvalue
Source for the setting value of the reference position

according to XSET (refer to Fig. above)
50

4.6.1.2 Suppressing pass marks
For the case where there are several pass marks within a sheet, from
which only one is relevant for the particular cut, there are two selection
techniques. One involves counting the marks and enabling
synchronization from a counter status which can be specified (refer to
Chart 135).
The other technique is to issue a position-dependent enable signal using
free blocks. As a result of the dimension data, specified in Fig. 4-8, the
material position is uniquely defined, when the pass mark passes the
light barrier (setting value, pass mark; KR3094 in Chart 180, 7). If the
material is located within a tolerance window around the position value,
then synchronization can be enabled via the pass mark. Synchronizing is
inhibited in the remaining sheet range.
Range
Window to enable synchronization dependent on the

material position (calculated in T1)
Compare4 Hyst
(0.1)
L751
Q.Compare4 Range
L597 (3366)
KR
Material position
Q.Compare4
L595 (3437)
KR
X>Y
B1595
Compare4 X>Y
X=Y
B1596
Compare4 X=Y
X<Y
B1597
Compare4 X<Y
Enable the mark synchronization
Q.EnableMark_1
Ref. position
of the mark
Q. Compare4 Mid
Q.SetFirstMark
H448 (0434)
B (130,6)
Mark within window
B1363
Q.EnableMark_2
L596 (3204)
KR
Synchr Puls
H363 (0449)
B
H364 (0000)
B (70,2)
Differentiation between 1st cut and

continous operation
S
R
B0448
Mark set
B0449
Mark not set
Manual operation
Error: "No mark in the tolerance window"
Q.ResetFirstMark
Q.AND1_I1
H449 (0577)
B (320,5)
L700 (0749)
B
Sync Puls
Logic whether one mark is

identified per panel
Q.S RS-FlipFlop2
L734 (0434)
B
S
Re-positioning
B0734
RSFF2_Q
B0735
RSFF2_QN
AND1_Q
Q.AND1_I2
L701 (0735)
B
&
B0700
Q.AND1_I3
L702 (0001)
B (70,2)
Q.R RS-FlipFlop2
L735 (1347)
B
Fig. 4-9
Enabling the pass mark synchronization as a function of the material position (example for using free blocks; in this
case, for a linear system)

51
4.6.1.3 Offset correction
When setting the reference position, the closed-loop control mustn't be
influenced by step functions. The value for the closed-loop control (Y in
Fig. 4-10) must be adapted, in small steps (H444 correction increment)
to the corrected measured value YP when setting. The offset correction
function is used to realize this (Chart 135).
The offset correction can also be effective for extremely large offset
values (e.g. for the first offset correction) over several cutting operations.
A new correction operation is not started until a correction operation has
been completed.
While the knife moves in the cutting range, the offset correction can be
held. Thus, the time derivatives of the reference position P and the
corrected position Y are identical, i.e. the knife and material are moving
at the same velocity. This avoids the knife being subject to various
forces.
Position offset
(software)
Reference
position
Y Corrected reference position

YP Meas. value, ref. position
Synchronization
YP
YP
Position
setting value
t
Offset
correction
t
Gradient, proportional to
the correction increment
Fig. 4-10
Examples for offset corrections
Table 4-16
Parameters for offset correction
Para.
Chart
Value
H431
135
3094
S.Ref_Mark_Pos Source for the reference position when the pass mark is
reached (the same setting as for L202 S.SV_setting
value)
H432
135
0453
S.FreezeCorrect. Source to hold (interrupt) the offset correction. Combined

with the shears in the cutting range signal. The correction
is continued outside the cutting range.
H444
135
0.1 %
Correct. increm.
52
Quantity
Significance
For each operation, the offset correction is reduced by the

correction increment (with the exception when correction
is held). In the example: an offset of Fsymech is
corrected in 1000 T1.

4.6.1.4 Offset synchronization of the knife position
The position encoder for the knife position should be adjusted so that a
synchronizing pulse is generated, if the knife is in the setting R (Fig.
4-1). The position sensing (Chart 120) then generates a cutting pulse.
For situations, where this adjustment is not possible, a cutting pulse can
be simulated. The cutting pulse is available at connector B0417:
The position setting value for synchronization is set to the
synchronizing pulse angle. This is only effective once for the position
actual value (when referencing).
A maximum encoder pulse number is specified (H409). A position
maximum (H400) is calculated from the encoder pulse number
( H409 / (4 H400) ).
As soon as the position maximum has been exceeded, the position is
reduced by the position maximum, and a position maximum exceeded
pulse generated. This pulse is used as cutting.
Table 4-17
Parameters to simulate the cutting pulse; new connection to the new cutting pulse source (example)
Para.
Chart
Quantity
Value
Significance in this application
H173
200
S.FormatChanged1
0417
New connection: Enable condition for the format controller to

position maximum exceeded
H188
265
S.Cutc_Int=0
0417
New connection: Control signal for the cutting characteristic

processing
H400
120
Pulses Encoder1
1024
H409
120
Max.PulsesEnc_1
4096
Pulses/revolution of the knife position sensing

Defining the position maximum and activating the automation
position correction when the maximum is exceeded to one
revolution ( 4096/ (41024) = 1.0 )
The knife position is reduced by 1.0 when the position

actual value 1.0 is exceeded.
H414
120
S.Pos.SyncPuls
0417
L312
170
CoarseRef pos.
0.5

New connection: Synchronizing pulse extension

Position setting value for the knife position = position of the
synchronizing pulse (normalization is not in degrees!). In the
example: offset by 180 (0.5 360)
53
4.6.2 Double saw

The arrangement in Fig. 4-11 is an example for a system with rotary
axis, where the knife coordinates are specified in [mm] instead of angles
to make is clearer.
This system has 2 saws. While the first cuts through the material, the
second is brought into the wait position. The knife position is the position
of the transport chain. For each cut, the knife position therefore changes
by half of the chain length.
Distance Material
100
0m
V_knife
Motor
= 70
=
V_material
Saw in the
center of the
cu
Transport chain
1st saw in the wait

position
2nd saw in the

wait position
Transport chain
Cut center
Knife position = 0
(synchronizing pulse)
300 mm
Material
250 mm
500 mm
Cut A-B
Fig. 4-11
500 mm
250 mm
1500 mm
"Double saw system schematic
The system is in the synchronous mode, if the transport chain runs with a
constant velocity. In this case, the following is valid:
Material velocity = knife velocity cos()
A gearbox with a ratio of 10:1 is located between the motor and chain
wheel. The knife position is sensed using the motor encoder. The
position is synchronized using a proximity switch, and more precisely,
each time that a saw reaches the center of the cutting range. This setting
is also decisive for the distance between the saw blade and a light barrier
is used to sense the material web.
54

Table 4-18
Plant-specific data for the double-saw arrangement
Param
Value
H100
1971.239 mm
X_Shear Norm
Normalization value for the knife coordinates

corresponds to Fsymech (AX, AY are specified in
mm)
H101
500 mm + Rsaw
AX
Exit position: The saw blade exits the cutting range,

after 500 mm + radius of the saw blade (Rsaw)
H102
1971.239 mm - AX
AY
Entry position in the cutting range, taking into

account the saw blade diameter
H104
20 /min
Reference Speed
Maximum material velocity
H105
1971.239 mm
Fsymech
Knife travel per cut
H108
70.0
Epsilon
Angle between the knife- and the material

movement direction
H117
942.478 mm
Feed/Revolution
Knife travel for one revolution of the toothed wheel
H120
Mode LinearAxis
Rotary axis (knife position is reset to 0 when

cutting)
Quantity

Significance
55
4.7
Linear systems
For linear systems, the cutting device is synchronized to the material
velocity, cuts, and then returns to the initial position. Thus, there is no
position overflow. The parameterization of the knife-specific coordination
is realized in mm. In this case, H100 is set to Fsymech (X_Shear Norm).
4.7.1 Flying knife

Operating range 1200 mm
Proximity switch
Start position
Braking range
25 mm
Acceleration range
30 mm
Limit switch,
end
Possible synchronous range
Limit switch, start
Motor
Measuring
wheel
Light barrier
Start position
(quiescent position)
Spindle
Pitch: 10 mm/revolution
Knife
Material motion
Disatnce Material
Fig. 4-12
Table 4-19
FORMAT
System principle for the flying knife
System-specific data, "flying knife
Param
Value
H100
30.0 mm
X_Shear Norm
Maximum knife acceleration travel. This allows AX, AY to be

specified in mm (refer to Chart 60).
H101
0.0 mm
AX
The start position is defined as 0 using H101 and H103.
H102
30.0 mm
AY
Position, from which the knife must move in synchronism with

the material. In this particular example, the complete
acceleration travel is used.
H103
0.0
AZ
The start position is defined as 0 using H101 and H103.
H104
20 /min
Reference Speed
H105
30.0 mm
Fsymech
Components of X_Shear Norm in the material flow direction (in

this case, both values are identical
H107
0.0
Epsilon
Knife movement and material flow direction are identical
SizeMeas.Wheel
H115
Quantity
Significance
H117
10 mm
Feed/Revolution
Spindle pitch. This is used to normalize the knife position and

velocity (refer to Chart 80).
H120
Mode LinearAxis
Linear axis (The knife position is not reset to 0 when cutting)
Distance material
Distance between the light barrier and the end of the

accelerating range (from here onwards, the knife is located
above the cutting position.
S.SV_Startlength
S.RefPos Limit
Shifting the web coordinate system. Thus the distance to light

barrier is related to the start position of the knife.
H122
H197
L201
56
3441
3168

Mode of operation
The knife (or the saw) waits in the starting position until the material has
reached the starting length. After this, the knife accelerates. From the
end of the acceleration onwards, it moves in synchronism with the
material. The knife is now lowered and cuts-through the material. After
this, the knife is lifted, and, as soon as it is located above the material, is
returned to its starting position. When starting the positioning operation,
the actual sheet length is subtracted from the material position (position
correction function of the material position; H424, H427).
The time to lower and raise the knife determines, for a specific material
velocity, the distance where the material and knife must run in
synchronism. The following information is required (digital inputs) for the
sequence control:
knife position at the start of the range (front limit switch)

knife position at the end of the range (rear limit switch)
knife position at the start position (knife position = 0)
knife is at the top
knife is at the bottom
Knife in the
cutting range
Knife at the
bottom
Knife at the
top
Lower knife
Raise knife
Positioning
Material
position
Start length
FORMAT
Speed,
knife drive
End of range
Position
knife
Start position
Fig. 4-13
"Flying knife" timing

57
4.7.1.1 Sequence control
The sequence control for the "flying knife" includes 3 functions:
1. Raising the knife
2. Lowering the knife
3. Changeover between format and positioning operation
Table 4-20
Logical equations for the open-loop control functions "flying knife ( = AND; = OR )
Function / Status
No.
Logical equations (example)
Start to raise knife
<1>
<2>
<3>
( no_cutting operation manual operation_UP )

(cutting operation knife_bottom )
(cutting operation knife_outside_the_ lowering range)
Stop, raise knife
<4>
Knife_top no_enable
(dominant)
<5>
v (no_cutting operation no_manual operation_UP)
Start, lower knife
<6>
(cutting operation knife_in the_lowering range format operation

Material_still_not_cut )
<7>
v ( no_cutting operation manual operation_DOWN no_manual

operation_UP )
<8>
v (no_cutting operation no_manual operation_DOWN)
Stop, lower knife

(dominant)
<9> v (knife_not_in the_lowering range cutting operation )

<10> v no_enable knife_bottom
Start positioning = Stop

format operation
<11> Material_cut knife_top_pulse cutting operation mode_linear axis
Start, format operation
<12> No_enable shears_in the_start position

<13> ( positioning_not_active positioning operation )
(dominant)
Material_cut
- the status is set after cutting has been completed

- status is reset, if the knife is in the accelerating range
4.7.1.2 Lowering and raising the knife

In this case, the range must be defined, within which the knife should be
or may be raised and lowered. The limiting position XSmax, from which
position, the knife must be started to be raised, is obtained from the time
taken to raise the knife at the maximum material velocity in order to
come to a standstill before the end of the operating range.
Lowering range
Raising time V_rated
Top
Vertical
knife
position
Bottom
Acceleration
XSmax
Operating range
Braking
Horizontal
knife
position
Starting position
Fig. 4-14
58
Ranges to raise and lower the knife

To monitor the lowering range, the range monitoring in Chart 350 (range
3) is used. This provides the option to shift the limits, as a function of the
velocity, whereby this is not used in the particular example.
Table 4-21
Defining the range, in which the knife may be lowered
Param
Value
Quantity
Significance (using the example)
L224
675
Range3_max
Upper limit value, where the knife may be in the lower position.
Example: max. time to raise the knife = 1.5 s
V_reference = 20 m/min
when raising the knife, distance moved = 500 mm
Range3_max = 1200 mm - 500 mm - 25 mm = 675 mm
Comment
In this particular example, the material is considered to have been cut

when the knife has been lowered (operation completed). It would be
more correct, so set the "material cut" status, when the knife actually
reaches the lower dead point. However, there is the danger that this
status would never be reached if, for a high material velocity and
mechanical delays, knife lowering would be interrupted before the lower
deadpoint is reached.
The conditions for the three control functions can be defined using this
range definition:
4.7.1.3 Parameterizable STATE logic

The logic functions in the table above should be considered as an
application example. For each actual plant or system, changes can be
expected to take into account plant or system secondary conditions. In
order to be able to create as many different versions as possible, logic
functions are not implemented in the form of individual gates, but as
parameterizable logic (refer to Chart 400).
A parameterizable STATE logic block has 8 BOOLean inputs (I1 ... I8),
which can be freely-connected to BOOLean connectors (e.g. to a digital
input which signals "knife at the top"). The type of logical combination is
defined using mask entries. Each mask selects which inputs or inverted
inputs are to be AND'ed.
Mask bit
Associated
input
15 14 13 12 11 10
I8
I2
I1
I8
I7
I6
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1
Example
Fig. 4-15
I7
I6
I5
I4
I3
MR1 = 16#8106 = 1000 0001 0000 0110b = I8 I1 I3 I2
Assigning the selection mask bits to the inputs
4 set masks (MS1 ... MS4) and 3 reset masks (MR1 ... MR3) are
available. In addition, using the MR mask, the inputs can be selected
which cause the internal flipflops to be reset.

59
Table 4-22
Input assignment for the "raise knife function (Chart 415)
Input
Function
Param
Value
The following is used:
I1
No enable
L243
0665
No setpoint enable (Chart 360)
I2
Cutting operation
L244
0576
Cutting operation active (Chart 320)
I3
Knife at the top
L245
0244
Digital input 4 used
I4
Knife at the bottom
L246
0245
I5
Knife not in the lowering range
L247
0234
Output of the range monitoring (Chart 350)
I7
Manual operation, UP
L249
0000
Deactivated in the factory setting
I8
Manual operation, DOWN
L250
0000
The following selection masks are obtained with the input assignment above:
Table 4-23
No.
Selection masks for the "raise knife" function (refer to Table 4-20)
Logical equation
Mask values
Param
Value
<2>
I2 I4
MS1 = 0000 0000 0000 1010b = 16#000A
L251
16#000A
<3>
I2 I5
MS2 = 0000 0000 0001 0010b = 16#0012
L252
16#0012
<1>
/I2 I7
MS3 = 0000 0010 0100 0000b = 16#0240
L253
16#0240
<5>
/I2 /I7
MR1 = 0100 0010 0000 0000b = 16#4200
L255
16#4200
<4>
I3 I1
MR = 0000 0000 0000 0101b = 16#0005
L258
16#0005
Unused masks:
MS4 = MR2 = MR3 = 0
Table 4-24
Input assignment for the "lower knife" function
Input
Function
Param
Value
I1
No enable
L263
0665
I2
Cutting operation
L264
0576
I3
Synchronous operation
L265
1346
Mode_synchronous operation (toggling

between positioning and format operation;
Chart 410)
I4
Knife at the bottom
L266
0245
I5
Knife not in the lowering range
L267
0234
Range monitoring output (Chart 350)
I6
Material still not cut
L268
0237
RSFF1_QN (Chart430)
I7
Manual operation, UP
L269
0000
I8
Manual operation, DOWN
L270
0000
The following selection masks are obtained with the input assignment above:
Table 4-25
No.
Selection masks for the "lower knife" function (refer to Table 4-20)
Logical equation
Mask values
Param
Value
<6>
I2 /I5 I3 I6
MS1 = 0001 0000 0010 0110b = 16#1026
L271
16#1026
<7>
/I2 I8 /I7
MS2 = 0100 0010 1000 0000b = 16#4280
L272
16#4280
<8>
/I2 /I8
MR1 = 1000 0010 0000 0000b = 16#8200
L275
16#8200
<9>
I2 I5
MR2 = 0000 0000 0001 0010b = 16#0012
L276
16#0012
<10>
I1 I4
MR = 0000 0000 0000 1001b = 16#0009
L278
16#0009
Unused masks:
MS2 = MS3 = MS4 = MR1 = MR2 = MR3 = 0
60

4.7.1.4 Changeover between format operation and positioning
Synchronizing and synchronous operation of knife and material are
associated with format operation. The material position defines the knife
velocity and position. (This is why the material position is known as the
reference position).
Terminology
Positioning operation is used to position the knife back to the starting

position. The dynamic performance of this operation must be defined
independent of the material motion. This operation must have been
complete before the material passes-over the starting position.
The logical conditions for toggling between the two operating modes are
shown in Table 4-20. The implementation is shown in the following two
tables.
Table 4-26
Input assignment for toggling between format- and positioning operation (Chart 410)
Input
Function
Param
Value
I1
no_enable
L331
0665
Setpoint not enabled (Chart 360)
I2
Shears_in_the_starting_position
L332
0644
In the starting position; (Chart 340)
I3
Cutting operation
L333
0576
I4
Knife_raise_final pulse
L334
1257
Logic1_QEN (Chart 415); pulse when

terminating the raise operation
I5
Mode_linear axis
L335
0120
ModeLinear (Chart 80)
I6
Positioning_active
L336
0499
PosRG active (Chart 230)
I7
Positioning
L337
1347
Mode_Positioning (Chart 410)
I8
Material cut
L338
0236
RSFF1_QN (Chart430)
Table 4-27
No.
Selection mask to changeover between format/positioning operation (refer to Table 4-20)
Logical equation
Mask value
Param
Value
<11> I4 I3 I5 I8
MS1 = 0000 0000 1001 1100b = 16#009C
L339
16#009C
/I6 I7
MR1 = 0010 0000 0100 0000b = 16#2040
L343
16#2040
<12> I1 I2
MR = 0000 0000 0000 0011b = 16#0003
L346
16#0003
<9>
Masks which are not used:
MS2 = MS3 = MS4 = MR2 = MR3 = 0
The closed-loop control structure is changed when toggling between the

two operating modes. In the format mode, the format generator supplies
the setpoints for the closed-loop position control, and in the positioning
mode, the positioning ramp-function generator (PosRG). The position
controller which is disabled is de-activated, which means that when
changing over, the integral components do not cause setpoint steps
(jumps).
In the format mode, the positioning ramp-function generator receives the
actual speed- and position values as actual values. This means that
changeover to the positioning mode can be realized jerk-free (there are
no steps in the speed- and torque setpoint). A prerequisite is that the
positioning ramp generator is operated with the same position- and
speed normalization as the knife position sensing (H482, H483).

61
Chart 230
Position setpoint
generator
Format mode /
positioning
QN
Q
Position
controller
Set
Format mode (synchr. oper.)
Enable
Setpoints for
the drive
converter
Positioning
Enable
QE
QEN
Chart 410
Fig. 4-16
Format
generator
Position
controller
Chart 200
Chart 210
Torque and
velocity
Chart 240 .. 265
Changing-over the closed-loop control structure
4.7.1.5 Positioning setpoint generator PosRG

The positioning setpoint generator (Chart 230) supplies normalized
setpoints for the position, speed and the torque, taking into account the
maximum speed (H480)

maximum acceleration (H481)
rounding-off (H478)
final rounding-off (H479)
initial values for speed (H485) and acceleration
The speed setpoint is used to pre-control the position controller. The

setpoint characteristics to approach a new position from standstill are
shown in the following diagram. In this particular example, the limit
values for speed and acceleration are reached, which is often not the
case for short positioning operations.
Vmax
Reference
position X*
Amax
Reference speed v*
DA1
DA1
DA2
DA1:
Rounding-off (H478)
DA2:
Final rounding-off (H479)
Fig. 4-17
62
DA1
Reference
acceleration a*
Setpoint characteristics for a positioning operation from standstill

4.7.1.6 Clamping the knife to the material
The material can also be clamped to the material when running in
synchronism using a clamping device. In order to avoid high cantilever
forces acting on the knife, the drive torque can be limited during this
particular phase.
The clamping device is always controlled when the knife is in the cutting
mode, but not in the upper quiescent state. A free AND block is used,
and its output is connected to a digital output of the T400.
Terminal function:
Table 4-28
Clamping function = Knife_not_at the top Cutting operation
Parameter for the "clamp knife function
Function
Param
Value
Knife at the top
L700
0254
Digital input 4 is inversely used (Chart 110)
Cutting operation
L701
0576
"Clamp knife" output at

terminal 49
H274
0700
Output of the free AND output (Chart 100, 425)
Enable terminal 49
H268
Reduce torque
L584
0700
Value for the reduced torque
L587
0.1
Fixed value: 1 = Output

Output of the free AND output (Chart 425, 240)
Fixed value 10% of the reference torque
4.7.1.7 Referencing to a linear axis

When using an incremental encoder for the knife position, after the
system has been powered-up, initially the absolute knife position is not
known. Thus, a reference approach (at a low velocity) is required, or
absolute value encoders must be used for position sensing.
For rotary axes, the direction of movement when referencing is
irrelevant. However, for linear systems, the knife may only move within
the range between the two limit switches. For this reason, the closedloop cut to lengths includes an automatic reversing function when the
limit switch is reached in the referencing mode (Chart 260).
In this case, the limit switches must be connected with the reversing logic
with L530 and L531. The referencing velocity and direction are set using
L542.

63
4.7.2 Flying saw
90
For the "flying saw" using the knife feed, the knife is synchronized to the
material velocity and the material cut. (as a comparison: For "flying
knife", the knife is moved up/down using, for example, an independent
hydraulic system).
Saw blade at the end

of the cutting range
Braking range
V_knife
Motor
= 70
m
810
m
V_material
Knif
e po
sitio
n
130
Cutting range
Saw blade at the start of

the cutting range
Saw blade in the wait
setting
Acceleration range =
Fsymech
Xref_normalization
Distance material
Fig. 4-18
Principle of a "flying saw system
In the diagram above, it can be clearly seen that the material and the
saw slides move in different directions. For the internal normalization
operations, the cosine of the angle is required. In this case, the positionand velocity components of the knife motion are calculated in the
material flow direction. The knife coordinates count in the movement
direction of the knife. The knife position = 0 in the waiting position
(starting position) of the knife.
This example assumes that the knife is braked after cutting, raised
above the material and moved back to the starting position. There, it is
lowered and waits for the next cut. This starts when the material exceeds
a certain position (start length; this is internally calculated).
64

Table 4-29
Special system-specific parameters for the "flying saw" example
Param
Value
H100
130.0 mm
H101
Quantity
Significance
X_Shear Norm
Maximum knife acceleration.
0.0 mm
AX
The starting position is defined as 0 using H101 and H103.
H102
110.0 mm
AY
The knife should run in synchronism with the material 20 mm

before the end of the acceleration travel (example).
H104
10 /min
Reference Speed
H105
130.0 mm
Fsymech
Identical, XShear Norm
H108
70.0
Epsilon
Angle in Fig. 4-18
Feed/Revolution
Knife feed for one revolution of the motor for saw slides. (refer to
Chart 80).
Mode LinearAxis
Linear axis
Distance material
Distance between the light barrier and the end of the accelerating
range (from here onwards, the knife is located above the cutting
position.
S.SV_Startlength
S.RefPos Limit
Shifting the web coordinate system. Thus the distance to light

barrier is related to the start position of the knife.
H117
H120
H122
H197
L201
3441
3168
The coordination of the motion sequences is comparable with the "flying

knife" example. The decisive difference is that the saw is raised and
lowered outside the cutting range.This means that immediately after
cutting the material, it is not possible to start re-positioning the knife. In
this example, positioning is sub-divided into two phases:
1. Approach a wait position after the cutting range as long as the saw
has not been raised.
2. As soon as the saw is in the up position, position to the starting
position.
Table 4-30
Logical equations for the "flying saw" example ( = AND; = OR )
Function/status
No.
Logical equations
Start, raise saw
<14> ( no cutting operation Manual operation_UP )

<15> ( Saw_after_the_cutting range cutting operation )
Stop, raise saw
<16> no_enable saw_top

<17> v ( no_cutting operation no_manual operation_UP )
(dominant)
Start, lower saw
<14> (cutting operation saw_in the_accelerating range )

<15> v (no_cutting operation manual operation_DOWN no_manual
operation_UP )
Stop, lower saw

(dominant)
<16> ( no_cutting operation no_manual operation_DOWN )

<17> v no_enable saw_bottom
Start positioning = stop

formatting
<18> Saw_after_cutting range cutting operation mode_linear axis
Start formatting
<19> No_enable shears_in the_start position

<20> (positioning_not_active positioning )
(dominant)
Target position: after the
cutting range
Saws_after_cutting range saws_not_on top
Target position: Starting

position
Otherwise

65
In the cutting range

Saw in the lower
position
Saw in the upper
position
Raise saw
Lower saw
Positioning
Material position
Format
Start length
t
Speed,
knife drive
t
Knife position
End of
traversing
End of cut
Start of cut
Starting position
Fig. 4-19
Timing for the "flying saw" example
The control functions for raising and lowering the saws are implemented
as well as the changeover between format- and positioning operation
with the parameterizable STATE logic (Chart 415). The logic to
changeover the target coordinates when positioning is a free AND logic
gate (Chart 425).
The required parameters and connection changes are summarized in the
following table.
66

Table 4-31
Input assignment for the "raise saw" function (first STATE block in Chart 415)
Input
Function
Param
Value
I1
No enable
L243
0665
I2
Cutting operation
L244
0576
Cutting operation (Chart 320)
I3
Saw in the upper position
L245
0244
Digital input 4 is used
I5
Saw, rear cutting range
L247
0218
Range1_overflow (Chart 350)
I7
Manual operation_UP
L249
0000
Upper limit to fixed value 1: L215 = 3650
Table 4-32
No.
Not assigned in the factory setting
Selection masks for the "raise saw" function (refer to Table 4-30)
Logical equation
Mask value
Param
Value
<14> /I2 I7
MS1 = 0000 0010 0100 0000b = 16#0240
L251
16#0240
<15> I2 I3
MS2 = 0000 0000 0000 0110b = 16#0006
L252
16#0006
<17> /I2 /7
MR1 = 0100 0010 0000 0000b = 16#4200
L255
16#4200
<16> I1 I3
MR = 0000 0000 0000 0101b = 16#0005
L258
16#0005
Masks which are not

used:
Table 4-33
MS3 = MS4 = MR2 = MR3 = 0
Input assignment for the "lower saw" function: 2nd STATE block in Chart 415)
Input
Function
Param
Value
I1
No enable
L263
0665
Setpoint is not enabled (Chart 360)
I2
Cutting operation
L264
0576
Cutting operation (Chart 320)
I3
Saw in the lower position
L265
0245
Digital input 5 is used
I4
Saw, rear cutting range
L266
0218
Range1_overflow (Chart 350)

Upper limit to fixed value1: L215 = 3650
I5
Saw in the accelerating

range
L267
0454
In the format range (Chart 330)
I7
Manual operation_UP
L269
0000
I8
Manual operation_AB
L270
0000
Table 4-34
No.
Selection masks for the "lower saw function (refer to Table 4-30)
Logical equation
Mask value
Param
Value
<18> I2 I5
MS1 = 0000 0000 0001 0010b = 16#0012
L271
16#0012
<19> /I2 I8 /I7
MS2 = 0100 0010 1000 0000b = 16#4280
L272
16#4280
<20> /I2 /I8
MR1 = 1000 0010 0000 0000b = 16#8200
L275
16#8200
<21> I1 I3
MR = 0000 0000 0000 0101b = 16#0005
L278
16#0005
Masks which are not

used:
MS2 = MS3 = MS4 = MR1 = MR2 = MR3 = 0

67
Table 4-35
Parameters to changeover the target position when positioning
Param
Value
Significance
H476
3651
Source of the target position after the cutting range = fixed value 2
H477
0700
Source to change over the target position = output of the free AND logic gate AND1
L215
3652
Connect upper limit value of the range indicator to fixed value 1
L700
0218
L701
0254
saw is in the rear cutting

Connect 2nd input from AND1 with digital input 4 inverse saw is not in the upper
Connect 1st input from AND1 with range1_overflow

range
position
L720
940.0
Fixed value1 = 130 mm + 810 mm = 940 mm; end of the cutting range (Fig. 4-18)
L721
960.0
Fixed value2 = wait position, until the saw was raised
68

Appendix
5 Appendix
5.1
Abbreviations
AA
AE
AENC
AX
AY
AZ
Calib
CB
CTW
CU
DW
EPC
FC
FGEN
KP
M_max
M_soll
N2
N4
PC
PosRG
PZD
Q.
SCTW
T
TD
TR
V_Ref
V_soll
Word
Doubleword
5.2
Analog output
Analog input
Absolute value encoder processing
Angle where the knife looses contact to the web
Angle where the knife get in contact with the web
Symmetry of speed transitions between two cuts
Calibrating the knife position (define the absolute position)
Communications module
Control word
Processor module of the basic drive
Double word (32bit-word)
Enable position controller
Format controller
Format generator (setpoint generator for motion sequences)
Proportional gain
Maximum torque
Reference torque
16-bit fixed-point format (0x4000 corresponds to 100%)
32-bit fixed-point format (0x40000000 corresponds to 100%)
Position controller
Positioning setpoint generator
Process data
Source for a signal
Shears control word (also shear SCTW)
Smoothing time constant
Differentiation time constant
Manufacture for incremental encoders with combined absolute position
Referencing velocity (material velocity)
Velocity setpoint
16-bit data word
32-bit data word
Terminology
Automatic mode
Format operation
Format range
Positioning
Reference ...
Start length
Starting position
Synchronous
range
Continous cutting operation. Contrary to manually caused operations like

jogging or manual single cut.
Operation with the format generator as setpoint generator for position- and
speed setpoints
Knife position range, in which the knife moves asynchronously with the material
(rotary axis: acceleration or braking; linear axis, acceleration)
Operation with the positioning ramp generator as setpoint generator for
position- and speed setpoints
Values concirning the web (material); e.g.: reference position = web position
If the web position passes this particular value the shear starts accelerating.
(Only valid for a operation where the shear stands still between wo cuts).
When the material passes the starting position, the knife starts to synchronize
with the material. Before this, the knife is in the quiescent position.
The range of the shear positions where the shears runs synchronous with th
web.

69
Appendix
5.3
Literature

(VC), Sizes A to D, Order No.: 6SE7080-0Ad20, 1995.
modules CB1, Order No: 6SE7087-6CX84-0AK0, 1994.
3. Communications configuring D7-SYS- SIMADYN D - Manual, Order
No. 6DD1987-1AA1, Oct. 1997.
4. Hardware - SIMADYN D - Manual, Order No. 6DD1987-1BA1, 1997.
5.4
Changes
Edition 06/99
70
First Edition

Parameters and Connectors
6 Parameters and Connectors

6.1
Important information
The parameter name displayed at the OP1S is a maximum of 16
characters long. You can toggle between German and English using the
made).
For several parameter types, rounding-off errors can be expected due
to the limited resolution at data input or as a result of conversion
operations. Further, in some instances, more decimal points are offered
than can actually be set.
All of the parameters, used for the closed-loop cut to length are listed on
the following pages. The listing is realized in the following form:
Table 6-36
Parameter
Description
Data
Hxyz (Lxyz)
Parameter description for a selectable technology parameter
Parameter
designation
Parameters with the initialization parameter supplement, mean that when

this parameter is changed it only becomes effective after the power supply
voltage has been powered-up again.
Value, factory setting type

Min lower limit
Max upper limit
Unit Units
Initialization
parameter
Chart Number, Sector
dxxx (cxyz)
Parameter
designation
Table 6-37
Parameter description for a visualization parameter (this cannot be set).

The "d or "c symbolize the offset values
Type
1000 (d) or 3000 (c) . This must be taken into account when selecting
the parameters with OP1(S).
Chart Number, Sector
Unit Units
Data types and range when parameterizing using the OP1S
Type
abbrev.
Type
BO
BOOL
INT
WORD
Significance
Logical quantity
Integer number; unsigned; hexadecimal and digital,
displayed at OP1(S); hexadecimal representation in
the documentation start with 16#.
Example
display at OP1S
Value range
OP1S
0, 1
-12345
-32768 ...32767
2F03Hex
16#0000 ... 16#FFFF
0010111100000011
(0 ... 65535)
DI
DINT
123456789
2147483647
REAL
Floating-point number. The entry made with OP1(S)

is limited to 6 positions before and after, whereby the
range is limited 199999.999.
123456.789
2147483.647
SD
SDTIME
Time in [ms] or [s]
200.000 ms
0 ... 2147483.647 ms

71
6.2
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Data
H000
Language select.
Initialization param.
0 = German
1 = English
Value 0
Type I
Chart 50,1
d001
Software-Id
Software ID for the standard software package

450 = Cross-cutters
455 = Closed-loop shears control
Type I
Chart 50,3
d002
Software version
Software version number of the standard software package
Type I
Chart 50,3
d003
Serial number
Plant/system identification
can be changed using H923
Type DI
Chart 50,3
d004
Hardware-Id
Module identification
T400: 144
Type I
Chart 50,3
d005
Status BinInput
Status of the digital inputs, terminal 53 (bit 0) to terminal 60 (bit 8). The leastsignificant 8 bits are the actual input level, the upper 8 bits, the inverse signal level.
Type W
Chart 110,8
d010
System status
Error status of the SIMADYN D system software. 1 means Error.
Type W
Chart 510,2
d012
Control Word1 CU
Control word1 for the basic drive
d013
Control Word2 CU
Control word2 for the basic drive
Type W
Chart 630,8
d014
Actual Faults
The error word comprises the error bits which resulted in a fault trip. It is generated
by masking the fault message enable (H966) with the error bits (d968). The
assignment of the error bits is defined using parameters H950 ... H965. Error
sources in the factory setting:
Type W
Chart 530,7
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 10
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
d015
Actual Alarm
72
Error, task administration

Hardware fault
Communications error
User error
On (main contactor)
1=ON
0=OFF
/OFF3 (fast stop)
0=OFF
Pulse enable
Setpoint enable
1=Enable
Acknowledge fault
1=Acknowledge
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Control requested
this must be a 1 !
Enable, positive direction of rotation
Enable, negative direction of rotation
Fault, external 1
Type W
Chart 630,4
Communications via CB
Communications to the basic drive
Not assigned
User error 1
User error 2
Knife position is lower than the lower limit value
Overspeed, knife (positive)
Overspeed, knife (negative)
Knife drive blocked
Pulse encoder error (speed actual value not plausible)
External fault 1
External fault 2
Knife position greater than the upper limit value
Material position less than the lower limit value
Fault, absolute value encoder (TR encoder)
Not assigned
The alarm word comprises the error bits which resulted in an alarm being displayed.
It is generated by masking the alarm enable (H967) with the error bits (d968).
Assignment, refer to d014.
Type W
Chart 530,7

Parameter
Description
Data
d016
Status Cntrl Logic
Status word of the control. Assignment:
Type W
Chart 510,7
d017
Status Shear
Status word of the shears. Assignment:
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7 ...
Bit 15
Position input of the TR encoder

Not assigned
Position controller enable
Fast stop from CU (basic drive, status word1.5)
Knife stationary
Fault, TR encoder (at start, read the absolute position)
Fault, TR encoder (no position pulses)
Fault, TR encoder (timeout)
Setpoint enable
Knife is calibrated
Fault
Brake open
Knife moving
Inverter enabled
Knife is calibrated
Knife in the synchronous range
Knife in the format range
Knife at the change position
Cutting program completed
Synchronizing pulse of the knife transmitter (extended to 100 ms)
Type W
Chart 520,4
Freely assignable; source selected using H547 ... H555
d020
Factor Overspeed
The knife velocity when in synchronism is obtained from the material speed multiplied Type R
by the overspeed factor
Chart 265,4
d021
SpeedSetp_Cut
Setpoint of the knife speed for cutting. Normalized quantity (1.0 corresponds to the
reference speed)
Type R
Chart 250,6
d022
Sheet Counter
Number of cut sheets since the power-supply was powered-up or the counter status
was reset.
Type I
Chart 520,8
d023
Speed setp
Setpoint of the knife speed (in cutting- or local operation). Normalized quantity (1.0
corresponds to the reference speed)
Type R
Chart 260,8
d024
d_Absolut Pos.
Position value from the absolute value encoder in the user normalization.
Type R
Chart 150,8
d025
Setpoint torque for format operation. Normalized to the reference torque.
Type R
Chart 240,7
d026
TorqAcceleration
Torque as a result of the acceleration for format operation. Normalized to the

reference torque.
Type R
Chart 240,3
d027
Oscill. Torque
Oscillating torque in the format mode. Normalized to the reference torque.
Type R
Chart 240,3
d028
Cutting Torque
Cutting torque in the format mode. Normalized to the reference torque.
Type R
Chart 240,4
d029
Friction
Friction torque in the format mode. Normalized to the reference torque.
Type R
Chart 460,8
d040 .. d047
Display R1 ...
Display R8
Monitoring parameters, R type (floating point).
Type R
Chart 540,5
d048 .. d051
Display W1 ...
Display W4
Monitoring parameters, word type (16-bit, unsigned).
Torque Setp
Par.
d040
d041
d042
d043
d044
d045
d046
d047
Par.
d048
d049
d050
d051
Source selection
L940
L941
L942
L943
L944
L945
L946
L947
Source selection
L948
L949
L950
L951

Factory setting assignment

3401 Reference speed of the shears
3050 Revolutions/Fsymech
3421 Reference speed 2
3440 Position for synchronizing 2
3498 Mset when positioning
3192 Suppl. angle from the cutting curve
3099 Light barriers + clearance cut
3094 3099 Modulo Fsymech
2776 Test value 1
2785 Simulation-shears control word
2671 Fixed value I1
2672 Fixed value I2
Type W
Chart 540,5
73
Parameter
Description
d056 .. d059
Display I1 ...
Display I4
Monitoring parameters, integer type (16-bit, signed).
d064 .. d067
Display B1 ...
Display B4
Monitoring parameter, BOOL type.
d068 .. d071
Display DI1 ...
Display DI4
Monitoring parameter, double integer type (32-bit, signed).
H091
S.AX
Source for the angle at which the knife no longer is in contact with the material.
Value 3101
Type I
Chart 60,3
H092
S.AY
Source for the angle at which the knife comes in contact with the material.
Value 3102
Type I
Chart 60,3
H095
S.DistLight Gate
Source for the clearance (in [mm]) between the light barrier and knife
Value 3106
Type I
Chart 60,3
H096
S.Dist. cut
Source for the distance (in [mm]) between the light barrier and cut
Value 3107
Type I
Chart 60,3
H097
S.TopCut size
Source for the crop length (in [mm]). If a crop cut is enabled, a sheet is cut, with the
crop length at the start of the material web.
Value 3110
Type I
Chart 60,3
H098
S.Long format
Source for the Long Format (in [mm]). The Long Format is a cut length, which is long Value 3111
Type I
enough that the knife must wait in the quiescent position between two cuts (also at
Chart 60,3
the reference speed of the material web).
H100
X_Shear Norm
Normalization factor to enter and display knife coordinates. For application with rotary
axis, use 360.0 (angular degrees), for systems with linear axis, enter Fsymech
(H105).
Value 360.0
Type R
Chart 60,3
H101
AX Angle
Rotary axis: Angle at which the knife no longer is in contact with the material.
Linear axis: 0.0
Value 20.0
Type R
Chart 60,3
H102
AY Angle
Rotary axis: Angle at which the knife comes into contact with the material.
Linear axis: Distance from the starting position, where the knife must run in
synchronism. This value must be Fsymech!
Value 340.0
Type R
Chart 60,3
H103
Edge point AZ
Sub-division of the format range (velocity profile of the knife motion) into an
accelerating- and braking range. The ratio of the ranges is defined using H103.
Value 0.5
Type R
Chart 60,6
Par.
d056
d057
d058
d059
Par.
d064
d065
d066
d067
Par.
d068
d069
d070
d071
Source selection
L956
L957
L958
L959
Source selection
L964
L965
L966
L967
Source selection
L968
L969
L970
L971
Data

2302 PZD2 from CU (speed actual value)
2809 PZD9 from CB
2802 PZD2 from CB
2806 PZD6 from CB
0317 Enable synchronization
0172 Enable format controller
0567 Continuous sheet length
0412 Knife speed, negative
5402 Reference pulses 1
5422 Reference pulses 2
5061 Peer DW1
5063 Peer DW2
Example: For H103 = 0.6, 60% of the format range is available for acceleration and
40% for braking.
Type W
Chart 540,7
Type W
Chart 540,7
Type DI
Chart 540,7
H104
Reference Speed
Maximum material web speed in [m/min].
Value 100 m/min

Type R
Chart 80,4
H105
Fsymech
Mechanical synchronous format.

Rotary axis:
Knife travel between 2 cuts
Linear axis:
Maximum acceleration travel
Value 1000 mm
Type R
Chart 60,6
H106
Dist. Light Gate
Fixed value for the distance between the light barriers and the knife in the 1.0 position Value 1500 mm
(the normalized knife position; corresponds to Fsymech for non-normalized position) Type R
Chart 60,3
H107
Dist. Cut
Fixed value for the distance (in [mm]) between the light barrier and cut
74
Value 0.0 mm
Type R
Chart 60,5

Parameter
Description
Data
H108
Epsilon
Angle between the velocity vectors of the knife and material web
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 60,6
H109
Knife Change Pos
Knife position, to which the knife is positioned in the local mode Approach knife
change position
Value 180.0
Type R
Chart 60,5
H110
TopCut size
Fixed value for the crop length (in [mm]). If a crop cut is enabled, a sheet with the
crop length is cut at the start of the material web.
Value 200.0 mm
Type R
Chart 60,3
H111
Long format
Fixed value for the Long Format (in [mm]). The Long Format is a cut length, which is
large enough that the knife must remain in the quiescent position between two cuts
(also for the reference speed of the material web).
Value 100.0 m
Type R
Chart 60,3
H112
Angle_CUT_ON
Starting position for the cut torque input
Value 315.0
Type R
Chart 60,6
H113
Angle_CUT_OFF
End position for the cut torque input
Value 345.0
Type R
Chart 60,6
d114
Xref_Norm
Normalization factor for the material position. Corresponds to Fsymech for all
applications, where the knife and the material have the same direction of movement.
Type R
Chart 60,7
H115
SizeMeas. Wheel
Circumference of the measuring wheel to sense the material position
Value 500 mm
Type R
Chart 80,1
H116
i_Meas. Wheel
Gearbox ratio for the material position sensing. This is required if the feed drive
encoder is used for position sensing.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 80,1
Definition: speed_encoder = i_measuring wheel speed_measuring wheel

H117
Feed/Revolution
Knife movement for one revolution of the knife feed drive. (Refer to the application
example)
Value 1000 mm
Type R
Chart 80,1
H118
i_Encoder1
Gearbox ratio of the knife encoder.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 80,4
d119
n_Ref. Shear
Calculated reference speed of the shear drive.
Type R
Chart 80,6
H120
Mode Linear Axis
Enables positioning functions for applications with linear axis.
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 410,1
H121
S.Slip Factor
Source for a factor to correct the gearbox ratio and the measuring wheel
circumference. Factors greater than 1.0 simulate a slower material movement as
displayed from the encoder.
Value 3001
Type BO
Chart 80,1
H122
Distance Material
Clearance between the light barrier for material detection and the knife.
Value 1500 mm
Type R
Chart 60,6
H123
S.Meas.WheelCorr
Source for correction value to adapt the circumference of the measuring wheel.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 80,1
H124
S. SetPosition 1
Source for the main position reference value of the angular controller for cutting mode Value 3157
types. This is the position reference value of the format generator as standard.
Type I
Chart 210,1
H125
S. SetPosition 2
Source for the auxiliary position reference value of the angular controller for cutting
mode types. This is the supplementary setpoint from the cutting curve as standard.
Value 3192
Type I
Chart 210,1
H126
S. SetPosition 3
Source for a supplementary position reference value.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 210,1
H127
S. SetPosition 4
Source for the position reference value of the angular encoder in the Approach start
position operating mode.
Value 3161
Type I
Chart 210,1
H128
S. SetPosition 5
Source for the position reference value of the angular controller in the Approach
knife change position operating mode.
Value 3129
Type I
Chart 210,1
Definition: speed_knife encoder = i_encoder1 speed_knife

75
Parameter
Description
Data
H129
S. GotoKnifeChPos
Source for changing-over to the position reference value Reference position 4. As

standard, this is connected to the control signal Approach knife change position.
Value 0596
Type I
Chart 210,1
H130
S. GotoStartPos
Source to changeover from the position reference value Reference position 3. This
is connected as standard to the control signal Approach start position.
Value 0595
Type I
Chart 210,1
H131
S. ActValuePosPC
Source of the position actual value for the position controller. This is connected, as
standard with Knife position.
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 210,4
d132
Deviation PC
System deviation of the position controller.
Type R
Chart 210,5
H133
PosReg_Max_cut
Positive position controller limit value for cutting operation
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 210,2
H134
PosReg_Max_loc
Positive position controller limit value for local operation
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart 210,2
H135
PosReg_Min_cut
Negative position controller limit value for cutting operation
Value -1.0
Type R
Chart 210,2
H136
PosReg_Min_loc
Negative position controller limit value for local operation
Value -0.1
Type R
Chart 210,2
H137
S. Max. Setp. Pos
Source of the upper limit of the knife position for the setpoint of the position controller. Value 3707
Used to stop the knife in linear applications.
Type
Chart 210,4
H138
S. Min. Setp. Pos
Source of the lower limit of the knife position for the setpoint of the position controller.
Used to stop the knife in linear applications.
Value 3705
Type
Chart 210,4
H139
S. PC Enable
Source for the position controller enable.
Value 0671
Type I
Chart 210,4
H140
PC Test Setp
Test setpoint to enter a setpoint (reference value) step into the position controller.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 210,4
H141
S. PC_set YI=0
Source for the control signal to delete the integral component of the position
controller.
Connected to 1 as standard; i. e. the integral component is de-activated.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 210,4
H142, H143
dMeas.Wheel_max,
dMeas.Wheel_min
Maximu and minimum value for the adaption of the measuring wheel circumference.
Value 20 mm
Type R
Chart 80,1
d144
Output PC filt
Position controller output, smoothed.
Type R
Chart 210,8
d145
IntegratorVal PC
Integral component of the position controller.
Type R
Chart 210,6
H146
KP Pos. Ctrl
Proportional Gain of the position controller.
Value 2.5
Type
Chart 210,5
H147
TN Pos.Ctrl
Integral action time TN of the position controller
Value 6 ms
Type SD
Chart 210,5
H148
Tfilt PC
Smoothing time constant of the position controller output
Value 4.8 ms
Type SD
Chart 210,7
H150
S. FGEN Format
Source for the (normalized) cutting format for the format generator.
This is connected to the format controller output as standard.
Value 3184
Type I
Chart 200,3
H151
S. FGEN V_Ref
Source for the (normalized) material web speed for the format generator.
This is connected to the smoothed material web speed as standard.
Value 3435
Type I
Chart 200,3
76

Parameter
Description
Data
H152
S. FGEN RefPos
Source for the (normalized) material position for the format generator.
This is connected to the material position, weighted with the overspeed factor as
standard.
Value 3197
Type I
Chart 200,3
H153
S. Speedfactor
Source for the overspeed factor. For overspeed factor values greater than 1.0, the
knife moves faster than the material web when cutting.
Value 3020
Type I
Chart 200,3
H154
FGEN Curve Typ
Selects the velocity profile for the knife movement:
Value 0
Type I
Chart 200,3
d155
FGEN error code
Error code format generator
d157
FGEN_Xsetp
Form generator, output knife reference position (normalized)
Type R
Chart 200,6
d158
FGEN_Vsetp
Form generator, output knife setpoint speed (normalized)
Type R
Chart 200,7
d159
FGEN_sin*sin
Format generator, output sin (knife position)
Type R
Chart 200,7
d160
Electric Format
Cutting format referred to the format generator output, multiplied by the overspeed
factor
Type R
Chart 200,6
d161
Start Position
Format generator, output starting position (quiescent position) of the knife

(normalized)
Type R
Chart 200,7
d162
Start length
Format generator, output starting length (normalized). If the position of the material
web exceed the starting length, the knife starts its synchronizing operation.
Type R
Chart 200,7
d163
AREF for AZ
Format generator, output material position (normalized), where the knife reaches the
transition point in the velocity profile (the knife comes to a standstill for larger format
lengths).
Type R
Chart 200,6
d164
Acc Phase1
Format generator, output maximum knife acceleration before transition point AZ is

reached.
Type R
Chart 200,7
d165
Acc Phase2
Format generator, output maximum knife acceleration between the transition point AZ
and the start of the cut.
Type R
Chart 200,7
d166
FGEN Diagnostic 1
Format generator, 1 diagnostics output
d167
FGEN Diagnostic 2
0: Sinusoidal sections
1: Linear ramps
2: Linear ramps with rounding-off
Bit 0:
Bit 1:
Bit 2:
Bit 3:
FMT < 0
AX not valid Bit 6:
AY not valid Bit 7:
AZ not valid Bit 8:
Bit 5:
MOD not valid
OVS not valid
Hardlock missing
not enough memory
Type I
Chart 200,7
st
Type R
Chart 200,6
Format generator, 2 diagnostics output
nd
Type R
Chart 200,7
d168
FG in CutReg
Format generator output, shears in the cutting range.

Caution: This output is only valid for cutting operation!
Type BO
Chart 200,6
d169
FG in FormatReg
Format generator output, shears in the format range.

Caution: This output is only valid for cutting operation!
Type BO
Chart 200,7
d170
Hardlock missing
Format generator output, hardlock block not available. The closed-loop shears control Type BO
cannot be operated without this operating license!
Chart 200,6
d171
FGEN Error
Format generator, group error: Internal error or illegal characteristic type was
selected.
H172
S. Format Change_3
3 source to enable the format controller. Refer to H173.

Default: not used
H173
S. Format Changed1
1 source to enable the format controller. The format controller is simultaneously

signaled about a change in the format constants (AX, AY, AZ, format length). The
connected signal must be a short duration pulse.
Default: Synchronizing pulse, knife encoder
H174
S. Format Changed2
2 source to enable the format controller. Refer to H173.

Default: Pulse at the start of positioning (linear axis)
H175
S. FC_FormatSetp1
1 source for the format setpoint of the format controller.

Default: Format setpoint of the format request (normalized)
Type BO
Chart 200,7
rd
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 200,2
st
Value 0413
Type I
Chart 200,2
nd
Value 1345
Type I
Chart 200,2
st
Value 3629
Type I
Chart 220,2

77
Parameter
Description
Data
nd
H176
S. FC_FormatSetp2
2 source for the format setpoint of the format controller.

Default: Long Format (normalized)
Value 3098
Type I
Chart 220,2
H177
S. FC FormatSel
Source to changeover the format setpoint for the format controller.

Default: Special length selected signal
Value 0575
Type I
Chart 220,2
H178
S. FC actFormat
Source for the format actual value of the format controller.

Default: SynchrPosition material position when synchronizing the knife position
encoder
Value 3436
Type I
Chart 220,2
H179
Integral Time FC
Integrating time of the format controller (I controller)
Value 20 ms
Type SD
Chart 220,4
H180
FC_max
Positive limit value of the format controller.

Default: Format controller not active.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 220,5
H181
FC_min
Negative limit value of the format controller.

Default: Format controller not active.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 220,5
H182
S. freeze_FC
Source for the signal to stop the format controller.

Default: No cutting operation signal
Value 0577
Type I
Chart 220,3
d183
Output FC-Int
Output of the format current controller
Type R
Chart 220,6
d184
Output FC
Format controller output. This signal represents a corrected format setpoint to be

entered at the format generator. The correction is used to compensate cutting errors.
Type R
Chart 220,7
H185
S. FC FormatSetp
Source for the format controller format setpoint.

Default: Actual setpoint format
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 220,2
H186
S. FC FormatNorm
Source for the normalization factor to calculate the cut error.

Default: Xref normalization
Value 3114
Type I
Chart 220,2
H187
S.V Cut curve
Source for the cutting velocity when processing the cutting curve. The cutting velocity Value 3577
is the deviation from the synchronous velocity while the knife is in the cutting range.
Type I
The integral of this represents the angular error, which is obtained as a result of the
Chart 265,1
cutting velocity.
Default: Output of the cutting curve.
H188
S. Cutc_Int=0
Source for the control signal to delete the integral over the cutting velocity.
Value 0413
Type I
Chart 265,1
H189
Cut Curve_max
Upper limit of the integral over the cutting velocity.

Default: Cutting curve not active.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 265,3
H190
Cut Curve_min
Lower limit of the integral over the cutting velocity.

Default: Cutting curve not active.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 265,3
H191
S. Sample Cut
Source for the signal to save the cutting angular error (refer to H187).
Default: The value when exiting the cutting range is saved.
Value 0169
Type I
Chart 265,4
H192
S. FC FormatSetp2
Source for a correction value to calculate the cutting error.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 220,2
H193
T Int Cut Curve
Integrating time for the integration over the cutting curve. The integrating time is the
cutting time at the reference velocity and synchronous length
Value 600 ms
Type SD
Chart 265,2
H193 = Xref_norm / V_ref = H105 H108 / H104; (observe the units!)

H194
S. Phi_cut_reduce
Source for the function which should weigh the angular error, determined from the
cutting curve, as supplementary angle.
Default: Weighting with a knife angle-dependent function
Value 3159
Type I
Chart 265,5
H195
S. FC actFormat_l2
Source for a correction value to calculate the cutting error.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 220,2
78

Parameter
Description
Data
d196
Cutting Error
Cutting error in [mm]. This value is valid only, if the knife position and the reference
position are known exactly for the cutting instant. Faults of the reference position
sensing can not be corrected (e.g. slip of the measuring wheel)
Type R
Chart 220,3
H197
S. RefPos Limit
Source for the position actual value for the format generator, if this value is to be
limited (e.g. negative values are not permitted)
Value 3438
Chart 200,1
H198
RefPos max
Upper limit value to limit the reference position (refer to H197).
Value 100000.0
Chart 200,2
H199
RefPos min
Lower limit value to limit the reference position (refer to H197).
Value 0.0
Chart 200,2
H200
S. EnFormatCtrl
Source for the signal to calculate the format controller. The format controller is
processed once at a positive edge of the connected signal.
Value 0172
Type I
Chart 220,2
H201
S. AX_Formatgen
Source for the angular constant AX for the format generator.
Value 3118
Type I
Chart 200,3
H202
S. AY_Formatgen
Source for the angular constant AY for the format generator.
Value 3119
Type I
Chart 200,3
H203
S. AZ_Formatgen
Source for the angular constant AZ (position of the transition point) for the format
generator.
Value 3103
Type I
Chart 200,3
H210
AI1 Scale Factor
Scaling factor for analog input 1 (setting, refer to d214).
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart 90,4
H211
AI1 Offset
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 90,4
H212
AI1 Time Constant
Smoothing time constant for analog input 1.
Value 25 ms
Type SD
Chart 90,5
H213
S. Disable AI1
Source for the control signal to set the analog input 1 to 0.0.
Default: The measured value is not set to 0.0
Value 0
Type I
Chart 90,6
d214
AI1 smoothed
Filtered measured value at analog input 1 (AI1). This analog input is sensed in time
sector T3. The measured value is obtained as
Type R
Chart 90,7
d214 = Terminal voltage * scaling factor / 5 V + offset

d214 = Terminal voltage * H210 / 5 V + H211
H215
AI2 Scale Factor
Scaling factor for analog input 2 (setting, refer to d219).
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 90,3
H216
AI2 Offset
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 90,4
H217
AI2 Time Constant
Value 25 ms
Type SD
Chart 90,5
H218
S. Disable AI2
Source for the control signal to set the analog input 2 to 0.0.
Default: The measured value is not set to 0.0
Value 0
Type I
Chart 90,6
d219
AI2 smoothed
Filtered measured value at analog input 2 (AI2). This analog input is sensed in time
Type R
Chart 90,7

H220
S. Analog Output 1
Source for quantity X, which is output at analog output 1. The voltage at terminal 97
is obtained as
V_terminal97 = 5 V (X + H224) / H225
H221
S. Disable AO1
Source for the control signal to set the analog output 1 to 0.0.
Default: The output is not set to 0.0

Value 3412
Type I
Chart 95,1
Value 0
Type I
Chart 95,1
79
Parameter
Description
Data
H222
AO1 Time Constant
Smoothing time constant for analog output 1.
Value 0 ms
Type SD
Chart 95,2
d223
Analog Output 1
Displays the output quantity for analog output 1. The output is realized in the fastest
time sector (T1).
Type R
Chart 95,4
H224
AO1 Offset
Offset value of analog output 1
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 95,4
H225
AO1 Scale Factor
Scaling for analog output 1
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 95,5
H226
S. Analog Output 2
Source for quantity X, which is output at analog output 1. The voltage at terminal 98
is obtained as
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 95,1
V_terminal98 = 5 V (X + H230) / H231

H227
S. Disable AO2
Source for the control signal to set the analog output 2 to 0.0.
Default: The output is not set to 0.0
Value 0
Type I
Chart 95,1
H228
AO2 Time Constant
Smoothing time constant for analog output 2.
Value 0 ms
Type SD
Chart 95,2
d229
Analog Output 2
Displays the output quantity for analog output 2. The output is realized in the fastest
time sector (T1).
Value R
Chart 95,4
H230
AO2 Offset
Offset value of analog output 2
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 95,4
H231
AO2 Scale Factor
Scaling for analog output 2
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 95,5
H232
S.Norm. Fixed Pos.
Source for the normalization factor for 4 position fixed values.
Value 3100
Type
Chart 70,7
H233 ... H236

Fixed pos. 1 ...
Fiexd pos. 4
4 fixed values interpreted as a position. These values are available as original and as
normalized positions (nomalization factor see H233).
Value 0 mm
Type
Chart 70,6
d241 ... d248

KL53 BinInput1 ...
KL60 BinInput8
Actual signal level of digital inputs 1 to 8. (terminals 53 .. 60)
Type BO
Chart 110,3
d249
KL84 Coarse Pulse 1
Logic signal level at terminal 84. This input can be used as coarse pulse input for
encoder1 (knife).
Type BO
Chart 110,7
d250
KL65 Coarse Pulse 2
Logic signal level at terminal 65. This input can be used as coarse pulse input for
encoder2 (material).
Type BO
Chart 110,7
d261
KL46 Input
Logic signal level at terminal 46 (bi-directional). If the associated output driver is

activated (H265 = 1), the inverse signal level is read.
Type BO
Chart 100,3
d262
KL47 Input

Type BO
Chart 100,3
d263
KL48 Input

Type BO
Chart 100,7
d264
KL49 Input

Type BO
Chart 100,7
H265
Enable BiDir1
Initialization par.
Defines the driver direction for the bi-directional digital terminal 46.
0: Input
1: Output
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 100,2
H266
Enable BiDir2
Initialization par.
0: Input
1: Output
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 100,2
H267
Enable BiDir3
Initialization par.
0: Input
1: Output
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 100,6
80

Parameter
Description
Data
H268
Enable BiDir4
Initialization par.
0: Input
1: Output
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 100,6
H269
S. Bin. Output 1
Source of the digital signal for output at terminal 51.
Value 1259
Type I
Chart 100,1
H270
S. Bin. Output 2
H271
S. BiDir Out 1
H272
S. BiDir Out 2
H273
S. BiDir Out 3
H274
S. BiDir Out 4
Value 0
Type I
Chart 100,5
H276
AI3 Scale Factor
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart 90,3
H277
AI3 Offset
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 90,4
H278
AI3 Time Constant
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 90,5
d279
AI3 smoothed
Actual measured value at analog input 3 (AI3). This analog input is sensed in time
Type R
Chart 90,5
Default: Raise knife/saw.
Default: Lower knife/saw.
Default: Fault.
Default: Open brake.
Default: Fan control.
Value 1279
Type I
Chart 100,1
Value 0014
Type I
Chart 100,1
Value 0676
Type I
Chart 100,1
Value 0978
Type I
Chart 100,5

H280
AI4 Scale Factor
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart 90,3
H281
AI4 Offset
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 90,4
H282
AI4 Time Constant
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 90,5
d283
AI4 smoothed
Type R
Chart 90,5

H284
AI5 Scale Factor
Value 1.0
Type: R
Chart 90,3
H285
AI5 Offset
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 90,4
H286
AI5 Time Constant
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 90,5
d287
AI5 smoothed
Type R
Chart 90,5
d287 = Terminal voltage scaling factor / 5 V + offset

d287 = Terminal voltage H284 / 5 V + H285

81
Parameter
Description
d301 ... d316

PZD1 from CU ...
PZD16 from CU
Process data received from the basic drive. The following are default values:
H317
S. ActValue1 CU
1 source to re-normalize a 16-bit process data in REAL (floating point). Default:

PZD2 from CU
H318
CU ActValue1 Norm
Normalization factor for the 1 actual value from the basic drive.
Calculation rule:
d301
d302
d304
d305
d307
PZD1
PZD2
PZD4
PZD5
PZD7
Data
Status word 1
Speed actual value
Status word 2
Torque actual value
Current actual value
st
st
CU actual value1 = H318 process data(16 bit) / 16768
Type W
Chart 610,2
Value 2302
Type I
Chart 610,4
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
st
Type R
Chart 610,7
nd
Value 2303
Type I
Chart 610,4
d319
CU Act Value 1
1 actual value from the basic drive converter as floating-point quantity
H320
S. ActValue2 CU

PZD3 from CU
H321
CU ActValue2 Norm
Calculation rule:
nd
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
nd
Type R
Chart 610,7
rd
Value 2305
Type I
Chart 610,4
d322
CU ActValue2
2 actual value from the basic drive as floating-point quantity
H323
S. ActValue3 CU

PZD5 from CU
H324
CU ActValue3 Norm
Calculation rule:
rd
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
rd
Type R
Chart 610,7
th
Value 2306
Type I
Chart 610,4
d325
CU AvtValue3
3 actual value from the basic drive as floating-point quantity
H326
S. ActValue4 CU

PZD6 from CU
H327
CU ActValue4 Norm
Calculation rule:
th

th
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
d328
CU ActValue4
4 actual value from the basic drive converter as floating-point quantity
Type R
Chart 610,7
H329
S. DW1 low CU
Source to re-normalize the low word of a 32-bit process data in REAL (floating point).
Default: PZD15 from CU
Value 2315
Type I
Chart 610,4
H330
S. DW1 high CU
Source to re-normalize the high word of a 32-bit process data REAL (floating point).
Default: PZD16 from CU
Value 2316
Type I
Chart 610,4
H333
CU DW1 Norm
Normalization factor for the 32-bit word from the basic drive.
Calculation rule:
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
CU actual value DW1 = H333 process data(32 bit) / 1073741824

st
d334
CU ActValue DW1
1 double word from the basic drive as floating-point quantity
Type R
Chart 610,7
H335
S.Store Value 1
Source for the first value which should be store in the permanent memory of the
T400. (Factory setting: position of the rising edge of the coarse pulse)
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 170,6
H336, H337
S.EnStoreVal_1A,
S.EnStoreVal_1B
Source for 2 conditions for the storing of H335 (AND gate).
Type I
Chart 170,6
H338
S.Store Value 2
Source for the first value which should be store in the permanent memory of the
T400. (Factory setting: position of the rising edge of the coarse pulse)
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 170,6
82

Parameter
Description
Data
H339, H340
S.EnStoreVal_2A,
S.EnStoreVal_2B
Source for 2 conditions for the storing of H338 (AND gate).
Type I
Chart 170,6
H356
S. Status word 1 CU
Source for status word 1 from the basic drive. This connection should remain
connected to the first process data, which is received from the basic drive.
Value 2301
Type I
Chart 620,1
d357
Status word 1 CU
Status word 1 from the basic drive.
Type W
Chart 620,1
H358
S. Status word 2 CU
Source for status word 2 from the basic drive. This connection is connected, as
th
standard, to the 4 process data, which is received from the basic drive.
Value 2304
Type I
Chart 620,5
d359
Status word 2 CU
Status word 2 from the basic drive.
Type W
Chart 620,5
H360 ... H362

S. En Synchr Ref1 ...
S. En Synchr Ref3
3 sources of the AND logic gate to enable the position-dependent pass mark
synchronization.
Type I
Chart 140,7
H363, H364
S. Enable Mark_1 ...
S. Enable Mark_2
2 sources of the OR logic gate to enable the position-dependent pass mark

synchronization outside the enable window (e.g.: to recognize the first mark).
Type I
Chart 140,5
H366
Window Passmark
Possible deviation of the pass mark position from the reference position
(information/data referred to Fsymech) to define a synchronizing window.
Value 0.05
Type R
Chart 140,1
H367, H368
S. RefPos modulo
S. Format modulo
Two sources for a modulo division. The result may be used to display the reference
position within format length.
Type I
Chart 135,6
H369
S. XrefCorrection
Source for an optional signal to trigger the correction function for the reference
position.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 130,1
H370
S. ReqManualCut
Source for the binary manual cutting request.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 145,2
H371
S.EnablManualCut
Source for the binary enable for manual cutting. Recommendation: Set to 666 if the
shear may perform a manual cut while the web is standing still.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 145,2
H372
S.start of cut
Source for a binary value which signals the start of the cutting procedure. After the
start of cut is detected the manual cut pulse is reset.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 145,2
H373
S.end of cut
Source for a binary value which signals the end of the cutting procedure. After the
end of cut is detected the next manual cut may be initiated
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 145,2
H374
S. RefCorrPulse
Source for a binary value which signals the correction of the reference position after
cutting. This information is required to calculate the correction value for the reference
position. Set to 413 if the reference position is reseted by the zero pulse of the shear.
Value 0424
Type I
Chart 145,2
H375
Tmax manual cut
Time limitation for the manual cutting operation. The manual cutting is aborted if
there was no end of cut detected within the time interval specified by H375.
Value 5000 ms
Type SD
Chart 145,4
H400
Pulse Encoder 1
Initialization par.
Number of pulses per revolution of the incremental encoder for the knife position
sensing
Value 1024
Type I
Chart 120,3
H401
S. Refer. Speed_1
Source for the knife reference speed. As standard, the reference speed is
automatically calculated from the system parameters (refer to Chart 80). The
reference speed is the speed at which the material runs with the reference velocity
and the synchronous format length is cut.
Value 3401
Type I
Chart 120,4
H402
S. Ref. Pulses_1
Source for the reference pulse number of the knife. This is the number of edge
changes (quadrupled pulses) of the incremental tracks, when the knife is moved
through Fsymech. The reference pulse number is automatically, calculated as
standard from the plant/system parameters (refer to Chart 80).
Value 5402
Type I
Chart 120,3
H403
S. Reset Pos_1
Source for the signal to reset the knife position.
Value 1311
Type I
Chart 120,3

83
Parameter
Description
Data
H404
S. Set Pos_1
Source for the signal to set the knife position.
Value 1306
Type I
Chart 120,3
H405
S. Sync1 Enable
Source for the signal to enable the knife position synchronization
Value 0317
Type I
Chart 120,3
H406
S. Pos. Set Value_1
Source for the position setting value of the knife position.
Value 3313
Type I
Chart 120,3
H407
Mode Encoder 1
Operating mode of the knife speed sensing
Value 16#7FC2
Type: W
Chart 120,3
Initialization par.
The selected operating mode is highlighted (bold). For additional information, refer to
the SIMADYN D Reference Manual, function block library, function block NAVS,
connection MOD.
The operating mode of the speed sensing block for the knife drive is set using this
parameter; this especially involves the digital filter, the encoder type, the coarse
signal type selection and the source of the encoder pulses.
- - - X: Last hexadecimal location = 2 means:

Bit 0
0
1
Encoder 1: Two pulse tracks, offset through 90

Encoder 2: A dedicated track for each direction of rotation
Bit 3..1 Digital filter with time constant /limiting frequency 500 ns / 2 MHz
000x No filter
001x
010x
011x
100x
Rest
500 ns (encoder 1)
2 s (encoder 1)
8 s (encoder 1)
16 s (encoder 1)
illegal
125 ns (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
illegal (encoder 2)
--X-
Last but one location = E means:
Bit 4
Setting mode for input S
0
1
Set YP to SV
Subtract SV from YP
Bit 5
Setting mode for input SP
0
1
Set YDP to SVD

Subtract SVD from YDP
Bit 6
Source of the encoder tracks (can only be selected for terminal XE1)
0
1
From terminal XE1 of the T400

From the BASEBOARD
Bit 7
Source of the zero pulse (can only be selected for terminal XE1)
0
1
From terminal XE1 of T400

From the BASEBOARD
XX - -: The two most significant locations = 7F means:

The standstill limit is corrected for 127 sampling cycles
84

Parameter
Description
Data
H408
SyncMode Encod_1
Setting the synchronization type of the knife speed sensing. The value has several
functions. The values in bold represent the factory setting.
Initialization par.
Bit(s)
Value
Significance
Value 0
Type W
Chart 120,3
0
1
Synchronizing via the zero pulse

Synchronizing via the trigger input (not for T400)
0
1
When synchronizing, the pos. is set to the setting value

When synchronizing, the setting value is subtracted from
the position
0
Direction of rotation-dependent evaluation of the
synchronizing signal
1
Synchronizing with the leading edge of the synchronous
pulse (H428 bit 2 and H408 bit2 must be identical)
Not assigned
6...4
15...7
H409
Max. Pulse Enc_1
XYZ
Number of the coarse pulse version (refer to Fig. 3-7)
011
e. g.: No. 3 (mode 3; zero pulse is always available if

the coarse- and fine pulse have a high signal level)
Not evaluated
Automatic position overflow generation. For more than H409 pulse edges (4x pulses) Value 0
in one direction of rotation, the knife position is reduced by the value H409 / reference Type DI
pulses and the Maximum position exceeded output is set to 1 for a processing
Chart 120,4
cycle.
The function is enabled for H409 > 0.
d410
Error Encoder 1
Group error message of the knife speed sensing. When a fault develops (d410 = 1)
evaluate d410.
Type BO
Chart 120,6
d411
Speed Shear
Normalized and smoothed (H417) knife speed. The speed value 1.0 is obtained if the
material web is running with the reference speed and a synchronous format length is
cut.
Type R
Chart 120,7
d412
Error code Enc 1
Error code of the knife drive speed sensing. In operation, the value must be 0. If it is
not equal to 0, there is an error in the parameterization of the speed sensing.
Type W
Chart 120,6
The cases identified by *) can only occur after user-specific changes in the
configured software.
Significance of the error bits:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Parameters may not be 0: H400, H104, H105, H108, H118

d413
Pos. Shear
Knife position normalized as defined in H100 (e. g. in angular degrees or [mm]. The
value is displayed without name, as the names cannot be changed by the user.
Type R
Chart 120,7
H414
S. Pos. SyncPulse
Source for the synchronizing pulses of the knife position generated per software. It
can involve the following: Synchronized position or Maximum position exceeded.
Value 0413
Type I
Chart 120,6
H415
S. En Pos_2 Corr
Source for the signal to enable the correction function for the reference position.
Value 0576
Type I
Chart 130,1
H416
Pos SyncDelay
Cutting pulse extension, which means that synchronizing pulses can be identified in
slower processing cycles.
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 120,7
H417
Tfilt n Shear
Filter time constant to smooth the knife speed actual value.
Value 20 ms
Type SD
Chart 120,6
H418
T_Long Pulse
Duration of the extended pulse.
Value 32 ms
Type SD
Chart 130,8
H419
S. Long Pulse
Source for the extended pulse. This is used to transfer synchronizing pulses for
slower processing cycles.
Value 0431
Type I
Chart 130,7

85
Parameter
Description
Data
H420
Pulse Encoder 2
Initialization par.
Number of pulses per revolution of the incremental encoder for material position
sensing.
Value 1024
Type I
Chart 130,2
H421
S. Refer.Speed_ 2
Source for the material reference speed. The reference speed is automatically
calculated from the plant/system parameters as standard (refer to Chart 80). The
speed of the material sensing where the material is running with the reference speed
is the reference speed.
Value 3421
Type I
Chart 130,3
H422
S. Refer.pulses_ 2
Source for the reference pulse number of the material sensing. This is the number of
edge changes (quadrupled pulses) of the incremental tracks, if the material is moved
forwards by the synchronous format. The reference pulse number is automatically
calculated from the plant/system parameters as standard (refer to Chart 80).
Value 5422
Type I
Chart 130,3
H423
S. set Pos_2
Source for the signal to set the material position.
Value 0208
Type I
Chart 130,3
H424
S. Pos_2 correct
Source for the signal to correct the material position. For a positive edge at the
Correct signal input, the Position correction value is subtracted from the actual
material position.
Value 1345
Type I
Chart 130,1
H425
S. Enable Synchr2
Source for the signal to enable material position synchronization.
Value 0317
Type I
Chart 130,2
H426
S. Pos.Set Value2
Source for the position setting value of the material position.
Value 3204
Type I
Chart 130,3
H427
S. Pos.corr.Val2
Source for the position correction value of the material position. For a positive edge at
the Correct position input, the position correction value is subtracted from the actual
position.
Value 3630
Type I
Chart 130,2
H428
SyncMode Encoder2
Initialization par.
Setting for the synchronization type of the material-speed sensing.
Value 0
Type W
Chart 130,3
H429
Mode Encoder2
Initialization par.
Setting of the material-speed sensing mode.
H430
MaxPulseEnc_2
Automatic position overflow generation. For more than H430 pulse edges (4x pulses)
in one direction of rotation, the material position is reduced by the value H430 /
reference pulses, and the Maximum position exceeded output is set to 1 for one
processing cycle.
Settings, refer to H408.
Value 16#7F02
Type W
Chart 130,2
Settings, refer to H407.
Value 0
Type DI
Chart 135,1
The function is enabled by H430 > 0.

H431
S. Ref_Mark_Pos
Source for the pass mark position. This position is used as setpoint for the offset
correction.
Value 3094
Type I
Chart 135,1
H432
S. FreezeCorrect.
Source to interrupt the offset correction. As long as the connected signal = 1,

correction is stopped. If the signal goes to 0, correction is continued until the
position and corrected position are identical.
Value 0453
Type I
Chart 135,1
d433
Error Encoder2
Group error message of the material-speed sensing. If a error develops (d433 = 1),
evaluate d433.
Type BO
Chart 130,5
d434
Error code Enc2
Error code of the speed sensing of the material feed. In operation, the value must be
0. If it is not equal to 0, then there is an error in the speed sensing parameterization.
Error bits, refer to d412.
Type W
Chart 130,5
d435
Speed 2
Material velocity, normalized and smoothed to V_reference (H436).
Type R
Chart 130,6
H436
Tfilt Speed 2
Filter time constant to smooth the material velocity actual value.
Value 4.8 ms
Type SD
Chart 130,5
d437
Position 2
Normalized material position after the offset correction. If a material position offset
has been identified, the material position is instantaneously set to the correct value.
The Position2 value doesnt immediately follow this step function, but approaches the
actual position value in smaller steps.
Type R
Chart 135,3
d438
Reference Pos
The reference position is the normalized material position, which is used as reference Type R
for the knife position closed-loop control. This involves the actual material position,
Chart 135,4
multiplied by the overspeed factor.
86

Parameter
Description
Data
H439
S. Ref Pos Factor
Source for the factor to calculate the reference position from the material position.
This is connected as standard with factor 1.0.
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 135,3
H440
S. Ref. Pos. Offset
Source of the offset value for shifting the coordinate origin of the reference position
(particularly for the format generator). Set to 3000 for systems with rotary axis.
Value 3001
Type
Chart 135,3
H441
S. act Form_Norm
Source for the required normalization of the measured actual format.
Value 3114
Type I
Chart 130,5
d442
Reference Error
Error message from the material position monitoring. An error occurs, if the material
position falls below the minimum value H443.
Type BO
Chart 135,7
H443
Reference Min
Lowest permissible material position in operation. When the limit value is fallen
below, d442 is set to 1.
Value -0.5
Type R
Chart 135,6
H444
Correct. Increm.
If a material position offset has been identified, the offset error is corrected in small
steps. The actual material position deviates from the reference position relevant for
the control (d437) during this correction phase. However, this deviation is reduced by
the value of H444 at each processing until both of the values are identical.
Value 0.02 %
Type R
Chart 135,3
d445
Material Position
Material position in [mm]
Type R
Unit mm
Chart 135,5
H446
ResetDisplCorr.
Inhibiting the offset correction.
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 135,2
d447
Actual Format
Measured cut length. This value is only valid when the material position is
synchronized with the zero pulse of the knife encoder.
Type R
Chart 130,6
H448
S. Set First Mark
Source to activate the status W ait for first pass mark.
Value 0434
Type I
Chart 135,1
H449
S. Reset First Mark
Source to de-active the status Wait for first pass mark.
Value 0577
Type I
Chart 135, 1
H450
S. Range Test
Source for the knife position actual value for the range monitoring of the knife
position. The purpose of this monitoring function is to check whether the knife is in
the cutting- or in the format range.
Value 3413
Type I
Chart 330,1
H451
S. Range Test Start
Source for the start of the format range for the knife range monitoring.
Value 3091
Type I
Chart 330,1
H452
S. Range Test End
Source for the end of the format range for the knife range monitoring.
Value 3092
Type I
Chart 330,1
d453
in SynchrRange
Range of the actual knife position:

0: In the format range
1: In the synchronous range
Type BO
Chart 330,4
H454
S. EnableVrefSim.
Source of the signal to enable simulation operation for the reference position sensing. Value 0
Type I
NOTE: Track A,B and zero pulse of the encoder input are ignored if simulation is
active!
Chart 130,3
H455
S. vRef simul.
Source for the simulated reference speed. Normalization: 1.0 = reference speed.
Factory setting: Connected to analog input 2 (AI2).
Value 3219
Type I
Chart 130,2
H456
S. n Standstill
Source for the speed signal for standstill identification
Value 3411
Type I
Chart 330,1
H457
Limit n_zero
Speed actual value below which knife standstill is signaled.
Value 0.002
Type R
Chart 330,2
H458
Hyst n_zero
Speed hysteresis to identify that the knife is at a standstill.
Value 0.001
Type R
Chart 330,2
d459
n_shear > 0
Display: Shears are moving
Type BO
Chart 330,3

87
Parameter
Description
Data
d460
n_shear Zero
Display: Shears are stationary
Type BO
Chart 330,3
H461
S. ActPos_KCPos
Source for the actual knife position to check whether the shears are at the knife
change position.
Value 3413
Type I
Chart 330,5
H462
KCPos_Range
Permissible deviation from the knife change position.
Value 2.0
Type R
Chart 330,6
H463
KCPos_Hyst
Hysteresis when checking whether the knife is at the knife change position.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 330,7
d464
in Knife Change Pos
Display: The knife is at the knife change position.
Type BO
Chart 330,7
H465
S. Mark Puls Up
Source for the counting pulse of the pass mark counter
Value 0420
Type I
Chart 135,5
H466
S. Mark Puls Down
Source for the down counting pulse of the pass mark counter
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 135,5
H467
S. Mark Cnt Reset
Source to delete the pass mark counter.
Value 0434
Type I
Chart 135,5
H468
S. Mark Cnt Set
Source to set the pass mark counter (setting value, refer to H469).
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 135,5
H469
S. Mark Cnt SV
Source for the setting value of the pass mark counter.
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 135,5
H470
S. Mark Cnt LU
Source for the upper limit of the pass mark counter.
Value 2586
Type I
Chart 135,5
H471
S. Mark Cnt LL
Source for the lower limit of the pass mark counter.
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 135,5
H472
S. Setp_KCPos
Source for the setpoint of the knife position to check whether the shears are in the
knife change position.
Value 3109
Type I
Chart 330,5
H473
PosRG_Diag_Sel
Activates a diagnostics function for the positioning block.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 230,7
d474
Vsetp PosRG
Output of the positioning unit: Reference (setpoint) speed for the knife (normalized)
H475
S. PosRG Target1
Source for the 1 target position for positioning (this is connected to the start position
of the shears as standard)
H476
S. PosRG Target2
Source for the 2 target position for positioning (alternative goal)
H477
S. PosRG TargetSel
Source for the control signal to select between 1 and 2 target position:
0: Target 1
1: Target 2
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 230,1
H478
Rounding-Off
Rounding-off the speed for a positioning operation with the exception of the end
range (refer to DA1 in Fig.4-17). The value presents the acceleration change, and is
nd
obtained as the 2 derivative of the motor frequency.
Value 500.0
Type R
Chart 230,4
H479
Final Rounding Off
Rounding-off the speed when positioning for the end range up to standstill (refer to
DA2 in Fig.4-17). The value represents the acceleration change, and is obtained as
nd
the 2 derivative of the motor frequency.
Value 100.0
Type R
Chart 230,4
H480
PosRG_Vmax
Maximum mechanical motor frequency for positioning. If speed normalization is used

1.0, then the following must be valid:
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 230,7
Only for internal use!
st
Value 3161
Type I
Chart 230,1
nd
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 230,1
st
nd
PosRG_Vmax = max. motor frequency[Hz] / speed normalization
88
Type R
Chart 230,7

Parameter
Description
Data
H481
PosRG_Amax
Maximum mechanical motor acceleration in [1/s]
Value 150.0
Type R
Chart 230,3
H482
S. PosRG_Xnorm
Source for the position normalization for the positioning block. The position
normalization is valid for the starting- and target position and for the calculated
reference position when positioning. Positioning requires the position in units
[revolutions]. Thus, the following is valid for the normalization:
Value 3050
Type I
Chart 230,1
Position normalization = position in [revolutions] / position(normalized)

H483
S. PosRG_Vnorm
Source for the speed normalization for the positioning block. The speed normalization Value 3400
is valid for the initial- and maximum speed and for the calculated reference speed
Type I
when positioning. Positioning requires the speed in units [revolutions/s]. Thus, the
Chart 230,1
following is valid for the normalization:
Speed normalization = speed in [revolutions/s] / speed (normalized)
H484
S. PosRG Startpos
Source of the starting position for positioning (= actual knife position) in the
normalization selected with H482.
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 230,1
H485
S. PosRG VStart
Source of the initial speed (velocity) for positioning (= actual knife speed) in the
normalization selected with H483.
Value 3412
Type I
Chart 230,1
H486
S. PosRG_set
Source for the Accept setting value when positioning function (this involves the
Value 1346
starting position, starting speed). As long as the start values are accepted, they are
Type I
passed on to the positioning which outputs them as reference values. If the setpoint
Chart 230,1
transfer takes several processing cycles, the acceleration is also determined from the
speed change. Positioning starts as soon as the setting function becomes inactive
(0).
H487
KP PosRG
Proportional gain for the position controller of the positioning function.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 230,3
H488
Tn PosRG
Integral action time for the position controller of the positioning function.
Value
Type
Unit
Chart
H489
S. PosRG_actPos
Source for the actual position for the positioning function.
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 230,1
H490
S. PosRG_PI enabl
Source to enable the position controller when positioning.
Value 1347
Type I
Chart 230,1
H491
S. PosRG_clear_I
Source to delete the integral component of the position controller when positioning.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 230,1
H492
S. PosRG_freeze_I
Source to hold the integral component of the position controller when positioning.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 230,1
H493
Tfilt_X_PosRG
Smoothing time constant for the knife drive speed setpoint.
Value
Type
Unit
Chart
H494
S. PosRG_PosSetp
Source of the setpoint of the position controller for the positioning.
Value 3486
Type BO
Chart 230,1
H495
S. PosRG_Vmax
Source of the maximum speed for the positioning.
Value 3480
Type
Chart 230,1
H496
PosRG_VLimit
Limit value for the position controller output when positioning. (this corresponds to the Value 1.2
maximum, normalized knife speed).
Type R
Chart 230,6
H497
PosRG Acc_norm
Normalization factor to convert the acceleration setpoint (in 1/s) into the normalized
torque input for the drive converter (torque setpoint). The effective moment of inertia
Jtot and the reference torque Mref must be taken into account.
0.0 ms
SD
ms
230,3
4.8 ms
SD
ms
230,5
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 230,6
PosRG Acc_Norm = 1000 2 Jtot / Mref

89
Parameter
Description
Data
H498
S. PosRG_VSetp
Source for the precontrol of the position controller for positioning. In factory setting
connected to the speed setpoint output of the ramp generator.
Value 3485
Type
Chart 230,4
d499
PosRG aktiv
Status of the positioning setpoint generator:

0: Positioning inactive or completed
1: Positioning being processed
Type BO
Chart 230,5
st
H500 ... H515

Sources for the bits of the shears control word 1 assignment, refer to d536.
S. ShearCTW1 Bit0 ... In the factory setting, all of the bits of the control word are connected with the 10th
S. ShearCTW1Bit15
process data from COMBOARD.
Value s. Chart
270
Type I
Chart 270,1
H516
Mask 1 LokMode
Mask to select the bits of the shears control word 1, which the automation uses in the Value 16#FFFF
Manual mode (refer to H518).
Type W
Chart 270,1
H517
Mask 1 AutoMode
Mask to select the bits of the shears control word 1, which the automation uses in the Value 16#FFFF
Automatic mode (refer to H518).
Type W
Chart 270,1
H518
Manual mode
Toggles between Automatic and Manual. When changing-over to Manual, for special
activities, the functional scope may be restricted (e. g. for commissioning/start-up).
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 270,2
H519
Simulation
Changes-over to the simulation mode. For the simulation mode, another source is
selected for the shears control word 1 (e. g. fixed values). This means that, for
example, modes can be tested without the automation system.
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 270,5
H520 ... H535

Sources for the bits of shears control word 2. Assignment, refer to d544.
S. ShearCTW2 Bit0 ...
S. ShearCTW2 Bit15
Value s. Chart
280
Type I
Chart 270,1
d536
Shear-CTW1
Shears control word 1 (essentially specifying the mode)
Type W
Chart 270,5
H537
S. SCTW1_simul
Source for the simulation value for shears control word 1.
Value 2621
Type I
Chart 270,4
d539
SCTW1_PLC
Shears control word 1 from the automation. Assignment, refer to d536.
Type W
Chart 270,4
H540
Mask2 LocMode
Mask to select the bits of control word 2, which the automation uses in the Manual
mode (refer to H518).
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 280,1
H541
Mask2 AutoMode
Mask to select the bits of control word 2, which the automation uses in the Automatic
mode (refer to H518).
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 280,1
H542
S. SCTW2_simul
Source for the simulation value for shears control word 2.
Value 2623
Type I
Chart 280,4
d543
SCTW2_PLC
Shears control word 2 from the automation. Assignment, refer to d544.
Type W
Chart 280,4
90
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Not used
Continuous cut
Sample cut
Single cut
Format setpoint valid
Light barrier, start of the material web (for slow time sectors)
Calibration mode
Not used
Approach the starting position
Not used
Enable cut program
Crop cut
End cut
Not used
Approach knife change position
Option, special sample

Parameter
Description
Data
d544
Shear-CTW2
Shears control word 2
Type W
Chart 280,6
H547 ... H555

S. Shear Status B7 ...
S. Shear Status B 15
Sources for the freely-definable bits of the shears status word (refer to d017)
H560
S. Number Of Sheets
Source for the number of sheets to be cut for the cutting program (permissible range: Value 2809
0 ... 32767).
Type I
Chart 300,2
d561
Req. Cut Prog1
Status of the request for continuous cutting from the cutting program.
d562
End Cut Prog1
Status, cutting program 1 completed.
d563
Special sheet
At the last cut of a cutting program, this is used to display as to whether it involves a
sheet with a different format. This control signal selects the format source for the
format reference (Chart 190, 3).
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit8
Bit9
Bit10
Bit11
Bit12
Bit13
Bit14
Bit15
Not used
External fault/alarm 1
External fault/alarm 2
Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Not used
Not used
No fast stop
Not used
Coarse reference
Not used
Not used
Enable cutting operation
Not used
Not used
Acknowledge fault
1 request available.
1 cutting program completed.
Type I
Chart 520,1
Type BO
Chart 300,4
Type BO
Chart 300,5
Type BO
Chart 300,5
1 the last sheet is cut and a request for a special sample is

present.
H564
S. Stop Cutting
Source for an optional control signal to exit the continuous cutting mode. This mode
is self-latching, i. e., after the cut request has been withdrawn, a cut is still made.
This characteristic can be bypassed using the signal at H564.
Value 0560
Type I
Chart 300,3
d565
OM cont. Cut
Status: Operating mode, continuous cut is active.
Type BO
Chart 300,6
H566, H567
S. AND_CutStop_1
S. AND_CutStop_2
Sources of the AND logic gate to immediately stop continuous cutting.
Type I
Chart 300,1
d568
OM Single Cut
Status: Single cutting mode is active.
Type BO
Chart 310,5
d570
OM Test Cut
Status: Sample cut mode is active.
Type BO
Chart 310,5
H572
S. Light OM EndCut
Source of the signal which should be used as the material detection for the operation
mode end cut.
Value 0555
Type I
Chart 260,3
d573
OM End Cut
Status: End cut mode is active.
Type BO
Chart 320,7
H574
S. Cut Pulse Delay
Source of the signal which should be used as the cutting pulse for the cut counting
Value 0168
and cut fault error statistics. The pulse is extended to 32 ms, so that it can be used in Type I
a slower sampling time.
Chart 520,2
d575
Special Sheet Size
Status: Cutting with a special length. This control signal is used to select the format
source for the format controller. The first cut when cutting continuously is realized
with a special length, in order to synchronize the shears to the material, starting from
standstill.
Type BO
Chart 300,7
d576
Cutting active
Status: One of the following modes is active: Continuous cutting, single cut, sample
cut or end cut.
Type BO
Chart 320,4
H577
Counter Reset
This is used to delete the cut counter status per parameter.
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 520,7

91
Parameter
Description
Data
H578
S. Counter Set
Source for the signal to delete the cut counter (set to 0).
Value 0
Type I
Chart 520,5
H579
S. Cut Pulses
Source for the pulses to increment the cut counter (cut pulses).
Value 0554
Type I
Chart 520,5
H580
S. AcknEndofFault
0 edge of
Source for the steady-state signal with the Fault significance. The 1
the signal generates a pulse (refer to H584 for the duration) to acknowledge the fault.
In the factory setting, it is connected to the Fault bit of status word 1 of the basic
drive.
H581
S. Acknowledge_1
1 source for a pulse to acknowledge a fault.
H582
S. Acknowledge_2
Value 0343
Type I
Chart 530,4
st
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 530,4
2 source for a pulse to acknowledge a fault. In the factory setting, this is connected
to bit 7 of control word 1 of COMBOARD.
nd
Value 0847
Type I
Chart 530,4
H583
Delay End of Error
Length of an automatically generated acknowledgement pulse (refer to H580).
Value 10 s
Type SD
Chart 530,5
d584
Acknowledge
Status of the signal to acknowledge a fault message.
Type BO
Chart 530,6
H585
S. Mark Quantity 1
Source for the number of pass marks before the first cut.
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 135,1
H586
S. Mark Quantity 2
Source for the number of pass marks between two cuts.
Value 2588
Type I
Chart 135,1
H587
S. Mark Select
Source for the signal to select the pass mark number.
Value 0448
Type I
Chart 135,1
H588
S. PM Format
Source for the cut format to calculate the pass marks between two cuts.
Value 3630
Type I
Chart 135,1
H589
S. PM_dX_Mark
Source for the clearance of the pass marks (normalized).
Value 3592
Type I
Chart 135,1
H590
S. Enable Prio1
Source of the signal to enable the operating modes. The signal enables the priority
logic for local- and cutting operating modes.
Value 0666
Type I
Chart 290,1
d591
Request Local1
One of the following modes is requested: Referencing, Jogging or Approach start

position, from the automation.
Type BO
Chart 290,6
H592
dX_Pass mark
Distance between two pass marks.
Value 1000 mm
Type R
Chart 60,6
H594
S. Hold OM local
Source for the binary signal for delaying the local operating mode. Used to delay
jogging until the jogging speed ramp output is zero.
Value 0537
Type B
Chart 290,3
d595
OM Start Pos.
The Approach start position operating mode is active.
Type BO
Chart 290,6
d596
OM KnifeChgPos
The Knife change position operating mode is active.
Type BO
Chart 290,6
H597
S. EnableJog
Source of the signal for enabling jogging. In factory setting jogging is disabled while
any cutting mode is active.
Value 0577
Type B
Chart 290,1
d598
OM local
There is a request for a local operating mode.
Type BO
Chart 290,7
d599
OM local2
One of the operating modes, Referencing or Jogging is active.
Type BO
Chart 290,7
H600
S. Enable Prio2
Source of the signal to enable the cutting operating modes. The signal enables the
priority logic.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 290,1
92

Parameter
Description
Data
d605
Enable Prio2
Enables the status of the priority logic for cutting operating modes.
Type BO
Chart 290,4
H606
Saw Blade Width
This value is added to the format setpoint in order to consider the width of the saw
blade.
Value 0.0mm
Type R
Chart 190,1
H607
S.SawBladeWidth
Source for an value which is added to the format setpoint (e.g. the saw blade width).
Value 3606
Type I
Chart 190,2
H608
S. Limit Format
Source for a boolean control bit to activate a dynamic format size limitation. If the
format is modified in automatic mode while the knife is in the starting position, this
limitation avoids abrupt changes of the position setpoint of the knife.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 190,5
H610
S. Format DW high
Source for the high word of a 32-bit format input. In the factory setting, this is
connected to PZD 7 from the basic drive.
Value 2807
Type I
Chart 190,1
H611
S. Format DW low
Source for the low word of a 32-bit format input. In the factory setting, this is
connected to PZD 6 from the basic drive.
Value 2806
Type I
Chart 190,1
H612
Format DW Norm.
Normalization for the 32-bit format input. It involves the resolution of the input value in
[mm].
Value 0.1 mm
Type R
Chart 190,3
d613
Format DW
32-bit format input after normalization. Example:
Type R
Chart 190,3
H614
S. Format Word
Source for the 16-bit format input. In the factory setting, this is connected to PZD 6
from the basic drive converter.
Value 2806
Type I
Chart 190,1
H615
Format W Norm.
Normalization for the 16-bit format input. It involves the resolution of the input in
[mm]. In the factory setting, 1 mm can specify formats up to 16383 mm.
Value 1 mm
Type R
Chart 190,2
d616
Format Word
16-bit format input after normalization.
Type R
Chart 190,3
H617
S. Format float
Source for the format input as floating-point value. In the factory setting, this is
connected to a fixed value.
Value 3664
Type I
Chart 190,4
d618
Format float
Actual value of the floating-point format input.
Type R
Chart 190,5
d619
S. Format Select
Source of the control signal to select the format input source. If this signal is
connected to the automation, then it is possible to toggle between 5 fixed values in
operation.
Factory setting: Input via floating-point channel (H617).
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 190,6
d620
Format Request
Actual format request in [mm] for continuous operation. Whether this format is
actually cut, depends on the operating mode, the request of special formats (special
sample) and the limit H626, H627.
Type R
Unit mm
Chart 190,7
H621 ... H625

Fixformat 1 ....
Fixformat 5
Five fixed values for the format input, which can be used to select a multiplexer and
H619.
Type R
Chart 190,4 - 6
H626
S. Special sheet
Source for the special sample format.
Value 3665
Chart 190,1
H627
Maximum Format
Largest permissible cutting format.
Value 100.0 m
Type R
Chart 190,3
H628
Minimum Format
Smallest permissible cutting format.
Value 0.6 m
Type R
Chart 190,3
d629
Format Setpoint
Requested reference format after limiting and normalization (Xref_normalization)
Type R
Chart 190,7
d630
Setpoint FC
Reference format (normalized) for the format controller. In continuous operation

st
coincides with d629. Exception: 1 cut (changeover to the Long Format to
synchronize to the material web)
Type R
Chart 220,7
Input:
12345
Normalization:
0.1 mm

reference format: 1234.5 mm
93
Parameter
Description
Data
rd
Type I
Chart 425,3
th
H631, H632
S. AND3_1,
S. AND3_2
Two sources of the 3 free AND logic gate. B0631 is the output.
H633, H634
S. AND4_1,
S. AND4_2
Two sources of the 4 free AND logic gate. B0633 is the output.
Type I
Chart 425,3
H640
S. Act. Pos. (Start)
Source for the position actual value to check whether the knife is in the starting
position or is at a standstill there.
Value 3414
Type I
Chart 340,2
H641
S. Start Position
Source for the starting position. In the factory setting, this is connected to the starting
position of the format generator. This value is normalized, therefore H642, H643 and
the actual value must also be normalized quantities (source H640).
Value 3161
Type I
Chart 340,2
H642
Startpos Range
Tolerance range for the starting position identification (normalized).
Value 0.01
Type R
Chart 340,2
H643
Startpos_Hyst
Hysteresis for the starting position identification (normalized).
Value 0.003
Type R
Chart 340,3
d644
In Startposition
Status: The knife is in the starting position.
Type BO
Chart 340,4
H645
S. n_zero (Start)
Source for the Knife stationary signal for the starting position evaluation.
Value 0460
Type I
Chart 340,4
H646
DelayStartpos
Minimum time that the knife must be in the starting position, before the Knife in the
starting position becomes active.
Value 500 ms
Type SD
Chart 340,6
d647
Standing Startpos
Status: Knife is stationary at the starting position, i. e. it stays there for a defined time
(H646).
Type BO
Chart 340,7
H648
S. Pos. (CalcPos)
Source for the position actual value, which should be evaluated to generate a
calculation pulse. Factory setting: Knife position.
Value 3413
Type R
Chart 340,1
H649
Pos. CalcPuls
Position value where a calculation pulse is generated. The calculation pulse must be
generated once per cut, and is used to progress the status for cutting operating
modes.
Value 0.75
Type R
Chart 340,1
H650
S. Enable Local
Source of the inverter enable signals due to the request, local operating modes.
Value 0591
Type I
Chart 360,1
H651
S. Enable_PLC
Source of the inverter enable signal from the automation.
Value 0843
Type I
Chart 360,1
H652
S. Enable Setp.
Source of the setpoint enable.
Value 0846
Type I
Chart 360,1
H653 ... H656

S. CU ready 1 ...
S. CU ready 4
4 sources to generate the Inverter ready signal. All of the 4 sources are ANDed. All
Type I
conditions which are not required, must be connected to a logical 1 (source = 0001). Chart 360,1 - 3
H657
S. Enable Ramp
Source for the control signal Enable ramp-function generator.
Value 0844
Type I
Chart 360,1
H658
S. Start Ramp
Source for the start signal Start ramp-function generator.
Value 0845
Type I
Chart 360,1
H659
Enable DelayLoc
Delay time, controller enable for local operation. This is used to maintain motor
magnetization when Jogging, Referencing or Approach start position.
Value 10 s
Type SD
Chart 360,2
d660
Inverter ready
Status of the drive converter readiness.
Type BO
Chart 360,5
H661
S. optEnableCntrl
Source for an optional controller enable. Using this signal, an additional condition can
be established to enable the control (closed-loop).
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 360,5
94

Parameter
Description
Data
d662
Enable Inverter
Signal to enable the inverter.
Type BO
Chart 360,5
d664
Enable Setpoint
Signal to enable the setpoints for the inverter.
Type BO
Chart 360,5
d666
Enable Controller
Status of the general controller enable.
Type BO
Chart 360,6
H667
S. EPC SetpEnable
Source of the 1 condition to enable the position controller, assigned the general
controller enable.
H668
S. EPC calibrated
Source of the 2 condition to enable the position controller, assigned the status
whether the shears are calibrated.
H669
S. EPCOM BA_local
Source of the 3 condition to enable the position controller. This is assigned as

standard with the No local mode signal.
H670
S. EPC option
st
Value 0666
Type I
Chart 370,1
nd
Value 1310
Type I
Chart 370,1
rd
Value 0600
Type I
Chart 370,1
Source of the 4 condition to enable the position controller (optional). This is used for
linear systems to inhibit the position controller while positioning.
th
Value 1346
Type I
Chart 370,1
d671
EnablePosControl
Position controller enable status.
Type BO
Chart 370,4
H672
S. Brake_CU_off
Source of the 1 enable signal to control the motor brake. This is assigned status bit
OFF2 of the basic drive.
st
Value 0344
Type I
Chart 370,1
H673
S. BrakeCUready
Source of the 2 enable signal to control the motor brake. This is assigned the signal
Converter ready.
nd
Value 0660
Type I
Chart 370,1
H674
S. Quick stop
Source of the 3 enable signal to control the motor brake. This is assigned the signal
No fast stop.
rd
Value 0345
Type I
Chart 370,1
H675
S. Brake_option
Source of the optional 4 enable signal to control the motor brake.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 370,1
d676
Release Brake
Status of the control signal to control the knife drive brake.
Type BO
Chart 370,4
H678
T_Brake close
Time until the brake has closed. The brake control maintains the setpoint enable for a Value 200 ms
time, specified using H678, when withdrawing the CU operational readiness.
Type SD
Chart 370,2
H679
T_Brake release
Time until the brake has opened. The brake control delays the setpoint enable for a
time, specified using H679, after the CU operational readiness has been issued.
Value 200 ms
Type SD
Chart 370,3
d680
Enable from Brake
Setpoint enable from the brake control. This signal takes into account the times to
open and close the brake (H678, H679).
Type BO
Chart 370,4
H690 ... H692

S. CB Fault 1 ...
S. CB Fault 3
Selects 3 fault/error sources to monitor the COMBOARD and the data transfer via
COMBOARD.
Type I
Chart 470,1
H693
CB Fault Delay
Delays a fault message from COMBOARD.
Value 1000 ms
Chart 470,2
d694
CB Fault
Fault status of the COMBOARD.
Type BO
Chart 470,3
H695 ... H697

S. CU Fault 1 ...
S. CU Fault 3
Selects 3 fault/error sources to monitor the basic drive (CU) and data transfer from
CU.
Type I
Chart 470,1
H698
CU Fault Delay
Delays a fault message from the CU.
Value 200 ms
Chart 470,2
d699
CU Fault
Fault status of communications with the CU.
Type BO
Chart 470,3
H700 ... H702

S. User Fault 1 ...
S. User Fault 3
Selects 3 fault/error sources to monitor operator control errors. The sources are
evaluated and signaled as user error 1.
Type I
Chart 470,5
th

95
Parameter
Description
Data
H703
User Fault 1 Delay
Delays an error message for user error 1.
Value 1000 ms
Chart 470,7
d704
User Fault 1
Error status for user error 1.
Type BO
Chart 470,7
d705
User Fault 2
Error status for user error 2.
Type BO
Chart 470,7
H706
User Fault 2 Delay
Delays an error message for user error 2.
Value 1000 ms
Chart 470,7
H707 ... H709

S. User Fault 4 ...
S. User Fault 6
Selects 3 fault/error sources to monitor operator control errors. The sources are
evaluated and signaled as user error 2.
Type I
Chart 470,5
H710
S. User Fault Enable
Source for the signal to enable user error messages.
Value 0342
Type I
Chart 470,5
H715
Shear Pos Min
Smallest permissible knife position value.
Value -20.0
Type R
Chart 480,1
H717
Shear Pos Max
Largest permissible knife position value.
Value 390.0
Type R
Chart 480,1
H718
Shear Pos Toler.
Tolerance of the knife position before position errors can be generated.
Value 10.0
Type
Chart 480,2
H719
S. EnShearPosErr
Source of the signal for enabling the knife position errors and alarms.
Value 0600
Type R
Chart 480,5
H721 ... H728

S. PZD1 CU ...
S. PZD8 CU
Sources for the 8 process data, which are sent to the basic drive.
Type I
Chart 640,6
d731 ... d738

PZD1 to CU ...
PZD8 to CU
Actual process data to the basic drive.
Type W
Chart 640,7
H740 ... H755

S. ControlW1 Bit0 ...
S. ControlW1 Bit15
Sources for the bits which are sent as control word 1 to the basic drive.
Type I
Chart 630,1 - 2
H760 ... H775

S. ControlW2 Bit0 ...
S. ControlW2 Bit15
Sources for the bits which are sent as control word 2 to the basic drive.
Type I
Chart 630,5 - 6
H776
S. Setpoint1A CU
Source for the 1 setpoint for the CU (alternative A). The speed setpoint is entered in
the format mode here as standard.
H777
S. Setpoint1B CU
st
Value 3023
Type I
Chart 640,1
Source for the 1 setpoint for the CU (alternative B). The speed setpoint is entered in
the positioning mode here as standard.
st
Value 3474
Type I
Chart 640,1
H778
S. Setp1_CU_sel
Source for the signal to select setpoint1 at the CU (alternatives, refer to H776 and
H777). This means that the speed setpoint for format- and positioning mode is
changed-over as standard.
Value 1347
Type I
Chart 640,1
d779
Setpoint1 CU
Actual setpoint 1 for the basic drive.
Type R
Chart 640,3
H780
Setpoint1 CU Norm
Normalization for setpoint1 at the CU. This is the floating-point value, which is sent
as 100% to the basic drive.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 640,4
d781
Setpoint1 CU N2
Setpoint1 at the CU after normalization as N2 type (16384 = 100%).
Type I
Chart 640,5
H782
S. Setpoint2A CU
Source for the 2 setpoint for the CU (alternative A). The torque setpoint is entered
in the format mode here as standard.
H783
S.Setpoint2B CU
Source for the 2 setpoint for the CU (alternative B). The torque setpoint is entered
in the positioning mode here as standard.
96
nd
Value 3025
Type I
Chart 640,1
nd
Value 3498
Type I
Chart 640,1

Parameter
Description
Data
H784
S. Setp2_CU_sel
Source for the signal to select setpoint1 at the CU (alternatives, refer to H782 and
H783). This means that the torque setpoint for format- and positioning modes are
changed-over as standard.
Value 1347
Type I
Chart 640,1
d785
Setpoint2 CU
Actual setpoint 2 for the basic drive.
Type R
Chart 640,3
H786
Setpoint2 CU Norm
Normalization for setpoint2 at the CU. This is the floating-point value, which is
transferred as 100% at the basic drive.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 640,4
d787
Setpoint2 CU N2
Type I
Chart 640,5
H788
S. Setpoint3 CU
Source for the 3 setpoint at the basic drive.
Value 3490
Type I
Chart 640,1
d789
Setpoint3 CU
Type I
Chart 640,3
H790
Setpoint3 CU Norm
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 640,2
H791
S. Setpoint4 CU
Source for the 4 setpoint at the basic drive.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 640,1
d792
Setpoint4 CU
Type I
Chart 640,3
H793
Setpoint4 CU Norm
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 640,2
H794
S. Setpoint5 CU
Source for the 5 setpoint at the basic drive. This setpoint is transferred as 32-bit
value at the CU.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 640,1
d795
Setpoint5 high CU
High word of the 32-bit setpoint at the CU (after normalization).
Type W
Chart 640,4
d796
Setpoint5 low CU
Low word of the 32-bit setpoint at the CU (after normalization).
Type W
Chart 640,4
H797
Setpoint5 CU Norm
Normalization for the setpoint at the CU. This is the floating-point value, which is
transferred as 100% (32 bit) at the basic drive.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 640,2
d801 ... d810

PZD1 CB inp ...
PZD10 CB inp
The 10 process data which are received via COMBOARD.
Type W
Chart 670,2
H811
S. DW1 low CB
Source for the low word of a 32-bit process data to convert to REAL (floating point).
Default: PZD7 from CB
Value 2807
Type I
Chart 670,4
H812
S. DW1 high CB
Source for the high word of a 32-bit process data to convert to REAL (floating point).
Default: PZD8 from CB
Value 2808
Type I
Chart 670,4
H813
CB DW1 Norm
Normalization factor for the double word 1 (DW1) from COMBOARD. Calculation
rule:
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 670,6
rd
th
th
CB setpoint DW1 = H813 process data(32 bit) / 16#40000000

st
Type R
Chart 670,7
st
Value 2802
Type I
Chart 670,5
d814
CB Setpoint DW1
1 double word setpoint from COMBOARD as floating-point quantity.
H816
S. Setpoint1 CB
1 source to convert a 16-bit process data to REAL (floating point). Default: PZD2
from CB
H817
CB Setpoint1 Norm
Normalization factor for the 1 setpoint from COMBOARD. Calculation rule:
d818
CB Setpoint1
1 setpoint from COMBOARD as floating-point quantity
st
CB setpoint1 = H817 process data(16 bit) / 16384

st

Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
Type R
Chart 610,7
97
Parameter
Description
Data
nd
H819
S. Setpoint2 CB
from CB
H820
CB Setpoint2 Norm
nd
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
nd
Type R
Chart 610,7
rd
Value 2807
Type I
Chart 670,5
d821
CB Setpoint2
H822
S. Setpoint3 CB
from CB
H823
CB Setpoint3 Norm
rd

rd
d824
CB Setpoint3
H825
S. ActValue1 CB
Source of the 1 actual value, which is sent via the COMBOARD. Factory setting:
Material velocity.
d826
ActValue1 CB
1 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization.
H827
ActValue1 CB Norm
Normalization for the 1 actual value at the COMBOARD. Conversion:
st
st
st
Actual value1 CB = 16384 value_of the _source(H825) / H827

nd
H828
S. ActValue2 CB
Knife speed.
d829
ActValue2 CB
H830
ActValue2 CB Norm
Normalzation for the 2 actual value at the COMBOARD. Conversion:
nd
nd
Actual value2 CB = 16384 value_of the_source(H828) / H830

rd
H831
S. ActValue3 CB
Material velocity.
d832
ActValue3 CB
H833
ActValue3 CB Norm
rd
rd
Actual value3 CB = 16384 value_of the_source(H831) / H833

th
H834
S. ActValue4 CB
Source of the 4 actual value, which is sent via the COMBOARD.
d835
ActValue4 CB
H836
ActValue4 CB Norm
th
th
Actual valuet4 CB = 16384 value_of the _source(H834) / H836

th
H837
S. ActValue5 CB
Source for the 5 actual value, which is sent via the COMBOARD. The value can
either be sent as 16-bit- or 32-bit process data.
d838
ActValue5 high CB
High word of the 5 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization. This value
should be transferred if only 16-bit PZD are used.
d839
ActValue5 low CB
Low word of the 5 actual value for the COMBOARD after normalization.
H840
ActValue5 CB Norm
98
Value 2803
Type I
Chart 670,5
th
th
th
Actual value5 CB = 16#40000000 value_of the _source(H837) / H879
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
Type R
Chart 610,7
Value 3435
Type I
Chart 700,1
Type I
Chart 700,3
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 700,2
Value 3411
Type I
Chart 700,1
Type I
Chart 700,3
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 700,2
Value 3445
Type I
Chart 700,1
Type I
Chart 700,3
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 700,2
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 700,1
Type I
Chart 700,3
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 700,2
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 700,1
Type I
Chart 700,3
Type I
Chart 700,3
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 700,2

Parameter
H841
S. CB_Control W1
Description
Data
st
Value 2801
Type I
Chart 680,1
Source for the CB control word 1. In the factory setting, this is connected to the 1
PZD from COMBOARD.
H842
Source of the simulated control word1 from CB.
S.CB CTW Simulation
Value 2621
Type I
Chart 680,1
d843
CB CTW1
CB control word1. Control word 1 at the basic drive is formed from this.
Type W
Chart 680,2
H844
S. CB Shear CTW
Source for the shears control word from COMBOARD. This is connected to the 10
PZD from COMBOARD in the factory setting.
Value 2810
Type I
Chart 680,5
d845
CB Shear CTW
Shears control word from COMBOARD. This is used to form shears control words 1
and 2 (d539, d543).
Type W
Chart 680,5
d846
Status Word 1 CB
Status word 1. Intended for transfer as 1 PZD from COMBOARD.
d847
Status Word 2 CB
th
st
Type W
Chart 690,4
Status word 2. Intended for transfer as 4 PZD from COMBOARD.
th
Type W
Chart 690,7
H901 ... H910

S. PZD1 CB ...
S. PZD10 CB
Sources for the 10 process data, which are output via COMBOARD.
Type I
Chart 700,5
d911 ... d920

PZD1 CB out ...
PZD10 CB out
Actual values of the 10 process data output via COMBOARD.
Type W
Chart 700,6
d921
CB Receive init
Status of the initialization data receive from COMBOARD.

1: Receive software and hardware were able to be initialized.
Type BO
Chart 660,3
d922
CB Transmit init
Status of the initialization of data output via COMBOARD.

1: Output software and hardware were able to be initialized.
Type BO
Chart 660,3
H923
Defines the plant/system ID (d003).
Value 0
Type DI
Chart 50,2
d924
Timeout CB
Status of the time monitoring from COMBOARD. The monitoring times can be
specified using H926 and H929.
1: Timeout
Type BO
Chart 660,6
H925
CB Enable
Enables communications with COMBOARD.
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 660,1
H926
CB tmax Run
Time limiting for cyclic operation. If no valid messages are received within this time,
timeout is signaled.
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 660,1
d927
CB Receive Status
Status of the receive unit of the COMBOARD. Numerical schematic, refer to Lit. /3/
and CFC Online Help.
Type W
Chart 660,3
Drive code
Caution: The status word represents the coding of an operating status. It cannot be
interpreted bitwise. The value does not have to be a constant 0, even in regular
operation (e. g. 16#6003, if new data are not available at each cycle).
H928
Mask CB Status
Mask to suppress certain bits of the CB receive status word. Setting: Interrupt
communications (remove cable) and evaluate d927.
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 660,4
H929
tmax CB PowerON
If no data are received via COMBOARD within this time after the power supply has
been switched-in, timeout is signaled.
Value 20 s
Type SD
Chart 660,5
H930
S. Setpoint4 CB
4 source to convert a 16-bit process data into REAL (floating point). Default: PZD5
from CB
H931
CB Setpoint4 Norm
d932
CB Setpoint4
th
th

th

Value 2805
Type I
Chart 670,5
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 610,6
Type R
Chart 610,7
99
Parameter
Description
Data
th
H933 ...H936
S. Logic5_I1 ...
S. Logic5_I4
Sources for the digital input signals of the 5 parameterizable logic.
H937 ...H938
Logic5_MS1 ...
Logic5_MS2
Masks for 4 setting functions of the 5 parameterizable logic (refer to Chart 400).
H939
Logic_MR1
Mask for a reset function of the 5 parameterizable logic (evaluation, refer to Chart
400)
H940
Logic_MR
400)
H941 ...H944
S. Logic6_I1 ...
S. Logic6_I4
H945 ...H946
Logic_MS1 ...
Logic_MS2
H947
Logic6_MR1
400)
H948
Logic6_MR
th
Type
Chart 421,1
Type
Chart 421,2
th
Type
Chart 421,2
th
Type
Chart 421,2
th
th
Type
Chart 421,4
Type
Chart 421,5
th
Type
Chart 421,5
400)
th
Type
Chart 421,5
H950 ... H965

S. Fault Bit 0 ...
S. Fault Bit 15
Source of the error bits to display faults and alarms.

Fault sources in the factory setting:
Type I
Chart 530,1 - 2
H966
Fault Mask
Mask to enable fault trips. The mask is ANDed with the fault bits (d968, H950ff).
Value 16#33E2
Type W
Chart 530,4
H967
Alarm Mask
Mask to enable alarm messages. The mask is ANDed with the fault bits (d968,
H950ff).
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 530,4
d968
Fault Bit
Status of the fault/error sources, selected using parameters H950 ... H965.
Type W
Chart 530,4
H969
Fault Start Delay
Delays when signaling faults and alarms after the module has been powered-up. The
fault bits are ignored during this time.
Value 10 s
Type SD
Chart 530,4
H970
System Error Mask
Mask to suppress system fault bits. Assignment bit0 .. bit15:
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 510,2
d971
CU Receive init
d972
CU Transmit init
Status of the send channel to the basic drive
d973
CU Timeout
Status of the process data receive from the basic drive
100
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 3
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 10
0694
0699
0000
0704
0705
0682
0103
0104
0116
0125
0521
0522
0684
0443
0157
0000
Communications via CB
Communications to the basic drive
Not assigned
User error 1
User error 2
Knife position lower than the lower limit value
Overspeed, knife (positive)
Overspeed, knife (negative)
Knife drive blocked
Pulse encoder error (speed actual value isnt plausible)
External fault 1
External fault 2
Knife position is greater than the upper limit value
Material position is less than the lower limit value
Error, absolute value encoder (TR encoder)
Not assigned
Task administration
Hardware fault
Communications error
User error
Type BO
Chart 600,4
1: Receive channel was correctly initialized
Type BO
Chart 600,4
1: Send channel was correctly initialized

1: No data were received for longer than 100 ms
Type BO
Chart 600,4

Parameter
Description
Data
d974
CU in Operation
Status of the basic drive monitoring
Type BO
Chart 600,4
H975
S. Disable Resynch
Source of the signal to inhibit synchronization of the T400 from the basic drive. The
function is only effective for the cross-cutter version.
Value 0666
Type I
Chart 600,2
H976
Resynchr Delay
Delay with the synchronization of the T400 with the basic drive. This synchronization
is established H976 ms after the basic drive has been identified (only for crosscutters).
Value 1000 ms
Type SD
Chart 600,4
H977
T Resynchr T400
Period of the clock signal, which can be used to re-synchronize the T400 with the
basic drive. This function is optional, as a single synchronization after power-on for
the drive converters intended, is sufficient.
Value 10 s
Type SD
Chart 600,3
H978
Fan_off_Delay
Delay to power-down the fan.
Value 30 s
Type SD
Chart 510,4
H980
Defines the data transfer format for floating-point values to the technology boards.
0 As 32-bit integer (standard)
1 As floating-point value (reserved for special applications)
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 50,2
Defines the data transfer format for floating-point values via the COMBOARD
channel.
0 As 32-bit integer (standard)
1 As floating-point value (reserved for special applications)
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 50,2
This means that the T400 can be used for special applications as baseboard (if
required with another technology board). In this case, all of the parameter numbers
shift by 1000 downwards (P123 is obtained from H123 etc.).
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 50,2
Password to establish the factory settings. If this parameter is set to 165, then all of
the parameters are set to the status when the equipment was originally supplied.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 50,2
TechBoardParaType
H981
COMBOARD
ParaType
H982
T400 Baseboard
H984
Key EEPROM
1: Basic drive available and operational
CAUTION: This procedure cannot be undone.

d985
Change status of the standard configured software:

0 Parameters were changed
1 Factory settings
Type BO
Chart 50,4
d986 ... d990

CPU load T1 ...
CPU load T5
Computer utilization sorted according to time sectors. 1.0 means 100% utilization.
The utilization of fast time sectors is included in the utilization of slow time sectors.
Type R
Chart 540,2
d998, d999
Reserved for automatic identification of a SIMADYN D module by SIMOVIS.
Type I
Chart 50,4
L000 ... L015

S. Status1CB Bit0 ...
S. Status1CB B15
Sources for the 16 bits, which are transferred to the COMBOARD as status word1.
Type I
Chart 690,1 - 2
L020 ... L035

S. Status2CB Bit0 ...
S. Status2CB B15
Sources for the 16 bits, which are transferred to the COMBOARD as status word2.
Type I
Chart 690,4 - 5
L036
Cam Reset Mode
L036 = 0: Cams may be shifted even passing position step (saw-toth function of the
position with rotary axis)
L036 = 1: Cams will be automatically reseted when the input position steps over the
end of the saw-tooth fucntion.
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 380,6
L037
Cam deltaPos. Max
If the cam controller actual position value change is more than L037 and is contrary
to the actual sense of rotation, this is interpreted as position setting operation rather
than a reversal.
Value 100.0
Type R
Chart 380,7
L038, L039
S. Cam_X+
S. Cam_X-
Two sources for subtracting an offset value for the input position of the cam
controller.
Type I
Chart 380,1
L040
S. ActpPos. Cam
Source for the position actual value for the cam controller
Value 3038
Type I
Chart 380,3
L041
S. Speed Cam
Source for the speed/velocity actual value to the position actual value of the cam
controller.
Value 3411
Type I
Chart 380,3
Status EEPROM
SIMADYN D
SIMOVIS SW ID

101
Parameter
Description
Data
L042
S. Speed Norm. Cam
Source for the normalization of L041. The normalization is given by:
Value 3040
Type I
Chart 380,3
( change in the position L040 ) / ( time for the position change )

for a velocity 1.0 (at L041)
L043
S. Cam Enable pos.
Enable the cams for position velocities.
Value 0001
Type BO
Chart 380,5
L044
S. Cam enable neg.
Enable the cams for negative velocities.
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 380,5
L045
Cam Pos. Max
Maximum position actual value of the cam controller (for drum-type shears, e.g.
360). If the position overflow processing is required; e. g. if the cam is shifted with
respect to time, and therefore enters the range of the discontinuous position location.
Value 360.0
Type R
Chart 380,7
L046
Cam Pos. Min
Minimum position actual value of the cam controller (for drum-type shears, e.g. 0;
refer to L045).
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 380,8
L047 ... L049

Cam1_XA,
Cam1_XB,
Cam1_DT
Position and time offset of the 1 cam:
st
XA:
XB:
DT:
Switch-on threshold (for a negative speed switch-off threshold)

Shutdown threshold (for a negative speed switch-on threshold)
premature switch-on
Time offset in ms; positive values
late switch-on
negative values
Type R
Chart 380,1 2
nd
Type R
Chart 380,3 4
rd
Type R
Chart 380,5 6
Position and time offset of the 4 cam; refer to L047
th
Type R
Chart 380,7 - 8
L060
Peer Baud Rate
Initialization par.
Baud rate of the peer-to-peer interface.
Value 19200
Type DI
Chart 780,1
c061 ... c065

PZD1 Peer ...
PZD5 Peer
Type W
Chart 790,2
L066
Peer Enable
Initialization par.
Enables the peer-to-peer interface. Enabling will initiate an error state and becomes
valid after the next power on.
Do not enable while cutting is active!
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 780,1
L067
tmax Peer Run
Time limit to receive data via the peer-to-peer interface in cyclic operation. Valid data
must be received within this time.
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 780,1
C068
Peer Receive init
Status: Data receive via peer-to-peer interface was able to be correctly initialized.
Type BO
Chart 780,4
C069
Peer Receive Status
Status of the receive condition of the peer-to-peer interface

(refer to the SIMADYN D communication error messages /3/ and CFC online help).
Type W
Chart 780,4
L050 ... L052

Cam2_XA,
Cam2_XB,
Cam2_DT
L053... L055
Cam3_XA,
Cam3_XB,
Cam3_DT
L056 ... L058

Cam4_XA,
Cam4_XB,
Cam4_DT
Caution: The status word is a coding of the operating status. It cannot be interpreted
bitwise. The value does not have to be constant 0 in regular operation (e. g. 16#6003
if new data are not available in each cycle).
C070
Peer Transmit init
Status: Sending via the peer-to-peer interface was able to be correctly initialized.
Type BO
Chart 780,4
L071 ... L075

S. Peer PZD1...
S. Peer PZD5
Source for 5 process data for output at the peer-to-peer interface. (Setting of L085,
observe L086!)
Type I
Chart 790,5
L076
Mask Peer Status
Mask to suppress specific bits of the peer receive status word. Setting: Interrupt
communications (withdraw the cable) and evaluate c894.
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 780,4
102

Parameter
Description
Data
L077
tmax PeerPowerON
A timeout is signaled if, after the power supply has been powered-up, no data are
received from the peer-to-peer interface.
Value 20 s
Type SD
Chart 780,6
c078
Peer Timeout
Status of the time monitoring of the peer-to-peer interface. The monitoring times can
be specified using L892 and L896.
1: Timeout
Type BO
Chart 780,7
L080
S. Peer DW1
Source for the double word, which should be output at the peer-to-peer interface as
PZD2 and PZD3. (Set L085 to 1!)
Value 5000
Type I
Chart 790,5
L081
S. Peer DW2
Source for the double word, which should be output at the peer-to-peer interface as
PZD4 and PZD5. (Set L086 to 1!)
Value 5000
Type BO
Chart 790,5
L083
S. Peer Float1
Source for the floating-point value, which should be output at the peer-to-peer
interface as PZD2 and PZD3. (Set L085 to 2!)
Value 3000
Type BO
Chart 790,5
L084
S. Peer Float2
Source for the floating-point value, which should be output at the peer-to-peer
interface as PZD4 and PZD5. (Set L086 to 2!)
Value 3000
Type BO
Chart 790,5
L085
Peer Sendtype1
Selects the data for output as PZD1 and PZD2 of the peer-to-peer interface:
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 790,6
L086
Peer Sendtype2
Selects the data for output as PZD3 and PZD4 of the peer-to-peer interface:
c090
Status of the enable for TR encoder processing.
Type BO
Chart 50,6
Status of the enable for the absolute value encoder evaluation on T400.
Type BO
Chart 50,7
Status of the enable for the absolute value encoder evaluation from the basic drive.
Type BO
Chart 50,7
Status, absolute value encoder available.
Type BO
Chart 50,6
L094
SynchronToleranc
Maximum deviation between shear speed and material speed which is still regarded
as synchronous operation (relation to reference speed).
Value 1 %
Type R
Chart 480,6
L100
S. Diagn_n_Shear
Source for the speed signal, which is used for overspeed monitoring.
Value 3411
Type I
Chart 480,1
L101
n_Shear Max
Maximum permissible knife speed (normalized to the reference speed).
Value 1.2
Type R
Chart 480,3
L102
n_Shear Hyst
Hysteresis of the knife speed monitoring (normalized to the reference speed).
Value 0.05
Type R
Chart 480,3
c103
Overspeed pos
Status display: Overspeed positive, knife
Type BO
Chart 480,4
c104
Overspeed neg
Status display: Overspeed negative, knife
Type BO
Chart 480,4
L105
S. Blocking speed
Source for the speed signal, which is used as actual speed for the knife blockage
protection monitoring.
Value 3411
Type I
Chart 490,1
L106
speed BlockLim
As long as the knife speed is less than this value, the knife could be blocked.
Value 0.005
Type R
Chart 490,2
L108
S. Blocking nsetp
Source for the speed signal, which is to be used as reference speed for the knife
blockage protection monitoring.
Value 3023
Type I
Chart 490,1
0: Two 16-bit words according to L072 and L073

1: Double word according to L080
2: Floating-point value according to L083
0: Two 16-bit words according to L074 and L075
1: Double word according to L081
2: Floating-point value according to L084
Enable TR encoder
c091
Enable T400 AbsEnc
c092
En.CU AbsEnc
c093
Enable AbsEnc

Value 0
Type BO
Chart 790,6
103
Parameter
Description
Data
L110
n_setp BlockLim
Limit value of the reference speed, above which the blockage protection should be
activated.
Value 0.01
Type R
Chart 490,4
L112
Source for the actual value of the torque for the knife blockage protection monitoring.
S. Blocking act Torque
Value 3325
Type I
Chart 490,1
L113
act Torque BlockLim
Limit value of the torque actual value, above which the blockage protection should be
activated.
Value 0.8
Type R
Chart 490,4
L115
Blocking Delay
Delay time with which the Knife blocked signal should be transferred.
Value 1000 ms
Type SD
Chart 490,6
c116
Shear Blocking
Status of the blockage protection monitoring:
Type BO
Chart 490,7
c117
Encoder Fault User
This status signal indicates an error, pulse encoder configuring (refer to d412, d434). Type BO
Chart 500,4
L118
S. act Speed_CU
Source for the actual value of the knife speed from the basic drive for checking the
plausibility of the pulse encoder parameterization.
Value 3319
Type I
Chart 500,1
L119
S. act Speed_T400
Source for the actual value of the knife speed on the T400 for checking the
plausibility of the pulse encoder parameterization.
Value 3411
Type I
Chart 500,1
c120
Speed Error
Difference between the knife speed measured on the T400 and in the basic drive.
The difference must be 0 if the pulse encoder was correctly parameterized and
speed normalization.
Type R
Chart 500,3
L121
Limit Delta_n
Maximum permissible speed deviation when checking the plausibility of the pulse
encoder parameterization.
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart 500,3
c122
Delta_n > Limit
Result of the comparison between the knife speed measured values on the T400 and
in the basic drive.
1: Measured values deviate out of range
Type BO
Chart 500,5
L123
S. Enable Delta_n
Source for the enable, checking the plausibility of the knife speed.
Factory setting: The check is inhibited while the absolute position of a TR encoder is
read-in.
Value 0150
Type I
Chart 500,4
L124
Delta_n Delay
Delay time with which an error, identified by the knife speed plausibility check, is
transferred.
Value 10 s
Type SD
Chart 500,6
c125
Delta_n Fault
Error status of the knife speed plausibility check.
Type BO
Chart 500,7
L139
S. TR Acknowledge
Source for the signal to acknowledge a TR encoder fault/error.
Value 0584
Type I
Chart 165,4
L140
S.TR Load Output
Source for the load output of the TR encoder. Using this signal, the encoder signals
that the absolute position is being transferred.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 165,1
L141
S. TR Start Load
Source of the control signal which is used to start the load operation (reading-in the
absolute position) of a TR encoder.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 165,1
L142
S. TR CU disabled
Source for the enable condition to read-in the absolute position of a TR encoder.
Factory setting: Data can only be read-in with the inverter inhibited.
Value 0663
Type I
Chart 165,1
L143
S. TR n_zero
Source of the knife standstill identification for the error evaluation of the TR encoder.
While the absolute position is being read-in, a speed which differs from zero must be
measured (TR encoders generate pulse trains on the incremental encoder tracks).
Value 0460
Type I
Chart 165,1
L144
S. TR Enable
Source for the general enable of the TR encoder.
Value 0090
Type I
Chart 165,3
c145
TR Load request
Status of the request to transfer the absolute position of a TR encoder. The signal
remains at 1 throughout the complete load operation.
Type BO
Chart 165,5
104
1: Knife is blocked
1: Error has been identified

Parameter
Description
Data
L146
TR End Delay
After the TR encoder has signaled the start of the load operation, the load request is
withdrawn, delayed by L146 ms.
Value 120 ms
Type SD
Chart 165,6
c147
TR complete
The signal indicates whether the absolute position of a TR encoder was read-in.
Type BO
Chart 165,2
c148
TR Load input
Status of the request to transfer the absolute position of a TR encoder. The signal is
used to control the encoder. It is withdrawn, delayed after the load operation has
started (L146).
Type BO
Chart 165,7
c149
TR Loading active
Displays an active load operation.
Type BO
Chart 165,7
L150
TR StartErrDelay
Timeout monitoring time for the start of the TR encoder load operation. The encoder
must start the load operation within this time.
Value 1.0 s
Type SD
Chart 165,3
L151
TR Timeout Delay
Timeout monitoring time for the duration of the TR encoder load operation. The load
operation must have been completed within this time.
Value 20.0 s
Type SD
Chart 165,3
L152
TR n_Error Delay
Time where a Frequency = 0 error must be available for a TR encoder load

operation, before the error is initiated. It is expected that a speed not equal to zero will
be obtained due to the load operation.
Value 1.0 s
Type SD
Chart 165,3
L153
TR Start Delay
Delay time when automatically starting the load operation for TR encoders. Factory
setting: After the system is switched-in, the load operation is initiated with a L153 ms
delay.
Value 1000 ms
Type SD
Chart 165,4
c154
TR Start error
Indicates that the TR encoder has not started the load operation within the requested
time (L150).
Type BO
Chart 165,5
c155
TR Timeout
Indicates that the load operation of the TR encoder takes longer than is permissible
(L151).
Type BO
Chart 165,5
c156
TR Frequency Zero
Indicates that during the load operation of the TR encoder, no pulses nor incremental
encoder tracks were identified.
Type BO
Chart 165,5
c157
TR Error
Group error message for the TR encoder
Type BO
Chart 165,6
L158
Selecting the absolute value encoder type:
AbsEncoder Type
0:
1:
2:
3:
Value 0
Chart 50,5
L160
AENC resolution
Resolution of the absolute value encoder (steps per revolution)

(SSI, EnDat connected to T400)
Value 8192
Type
Chart 150,2
L161
AENC Number Turns
Number of revolutions of a multi-turn encoder (0 signifies single-turn encoder).

Value 0
Type DI
Chart 150,20
L162
AENC Zero Bits
Number of fill bits, which are transferred by an SSI protocol before the position value.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 150,3
L163
AENC PosAlarmbit
Position of the alarm bit in the SSI protocol (SSI connected to T400)
Value 0
Type I
Chart 150,3
L164
AENC Frequency
Selects the clock frequency (and period) of the transfer clock cycle for the absolute
value encoder (SSI, EnDat connected to T400).
1: Position was read-in.
0: No alarm bit available
0
1
2
3
L165
AENC Encoder Type
No absolute value encoder used

TR encoder
SSI- or EnDat encoder connected to the T400 terminals
Absolute value encoder connected to the basic drive
100 kHz
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
( 10 s)
( 2 s)
( 1 s)
(0.5 s)
Selects the absolute value encoder type (SSI, EnDat connected to T400).
0
1
2
3
4
5
SSI rotary encoder

SSI length measuring system
EnDat rotary encoder
EnDat length measuring system
SSI length measuring system with range correction
EnDat length measuring system with range correction

Value 0
Type I
Chart 150,3
Value 2
Type I
Chart 150,4
105
Parameter
Description
Data
L166
AENC Data Code
Codes the measured value from absolute value encoders (SSI, EnDat connected to
T400).
Value 0
Type I
Chart 150,4
0
1
2
Binary
Gray code
Gray excess code
L167
AENC Parity
Enables the parity monitoring in the SSI protocol of an absolute value encoder.
L168
AENC i_Gearbox
Ratio of the gearbox between the absolute value encoder and knife. The value must
be 1.0 to clearly determine knife positions.
(for SSI, EnDat connected to T400).

L169
AENC Pos. Norm
L170
AENC n_Norm
Position normalization of the absolute value encoder. The position value is calculated
in [revolutions] and output, multiplied by L169.
Value 0
Type BO
Chart 150,5
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 150,4
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 150,2
Speed normalization of the absolute value encoder. The value can be selected as
required, as the absolute value encoder speed cannot be used, as standard for other
functions.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 150,3

L171
AENC n_max
Maximum permissible speed value (normalization revolutions/minute). If the knife

speed exceeds this limit, bit1 of the error code (c177) is set.
Value 6000 1/min

Type R
Chart 150,4
L172
S. AENC Reset
Source of the signal to reset the absolute value generator sensing and to
acknowledge error messages from the absolute value encoder.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 150,1
L173
S. AENC Offset
Source of the absolute value encoder offset. The offset can be used for zero point
correction. It is subtracted from the measured value.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 150,1
L174
AENC Mask YF
Mask to select individual fault bits of the hardware fault identification (refer to c176).
(for EnDat connected to T400).
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 150,5
L175
AENC Mask YFC
Mask to select individual error bits of the software error indentation (refer to c177).
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 150,6
c176
AENC YF
Error code for the hardware fault monitoring in the EnDat encoder. The significance
of the individual bits can be taken from the data sheets of the encoder.
Type W
Chart 150,5

c177
AENC YFC
Error code of the software error monitoring of the SSI- or EnDat encoder.
Bit 0
Permissible speed exceeded (configured sampling time too slow)
Bit 1
Speed limit exceeded (L171)
Bit 2
Time overflow (EnDat encoder does not respond)
Bit 3
Communications error (sporadic; poor contact?)
Bit 4
Communications error (too many errors; protocol, parity correctly selected?)
Bit 6 ... 11 Configuring error (illegal values for L160 ... L167)
Type W
Chart 150,6

c178
AENC Error
Group fault message of the absolute value encoder sensing on the T400.
Type BO
Chart 150,7
c179
AENC Encoder Pos.
Position value of the absolute value encoder on the T400 without normalization or
conditioning. For multi-turn encoders, the most significant bits represent the number
of revolutions.
Type R
Chart 150,5
c180
AENC Pos. Single
Normalized position value of the absolute value encoder on the T400 without the
multi-turn positions. For L169 = 1.0, c180 lies in the range 0 c180 < 1.0
revolutions. This value can be used to initialize the position of drum-type shears.
Type R
Chart 150,6
c181
AENC Pos. Multi
Normalized position value of the absolute value encoder on the T400 including multiturn positions. For L169 = 1.0, the position is displayed in [revolutions]. This value
can be used to initialize linear positioned shears.
Type R
Chart 150,5
c182
AENC Speed
Speed of the absolute value encoder on the T400 in revolutions/min L170.
Type R
Chart 150,6
L183
S. Abs Position
Source of the absolute position normalized in [revolutions] to normalize to the internal

knife position normalization.
Value 3291
Type I
Chart 150,6
106

Parameter
Description
Data
L189, L190
S. V_Cut Polygon
S. NV_Cut Polygon
Two sources for multiplying the derivation of the the cutting curve.
Type
Chart 450,5
L191, L192
S. V_Friction
S. NV_Friction
Two sources for multiplying the derivation of the the friction curve.
Type
Chart 460,5
L193, L194
S. V_Inertia
S. NV_Inertia
Two sources for multiplying the dreivation of the the inertia curve.
Type
Chart 460,5
L195, L196
S. SV set Ref_1
S. SV set Ref_2
Two sources for setting the reference position during the cutting operation.
Type
Chart 180,1
L197
S. SV_Longformat
Source of the Longfomat variable used to calculate the set value of the reference
position for the first sheet after starting the cutting operation.
Value 3098
Type
Chart 180,3
L198
S. SV_StartSel
Source of the signal for selecting the set value when starting the cutting having
material detected.
Value 0000
Type
Chart 180,1
L199
S. SV_StartVal
Source for an alternative starting length value for the setting value of the material
position.
Value 3000
Type
Chart 180,1
L200
S. SV_Format
Source for the cut format to calculate the setting value of the material position.
Value 3629
Type I
Chart 180,1
L201
S. SV_Start Size
Source for the starting length (refer to d162) to calculate the setting value of the
material position.
Value 3162
Type I
Chart 180,1
L202
S. SV_Set Value
Source for the setting value of the material position for continuous cutting operation.
The material position is set using the synchronizing pulse of the material position
sensing.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 180,1
L203
S. Offset Set Value
Source for the value, which is subtracted from the setting value of the reference
Value 3006
position (material position when passing the pass mark). The result of the subtraction Type I
operation can be used to enable synchronization shortly before reaching the pass
Chart 180,6
mark.
c204
Set Value RefePos
Actual setting value of the material position. The material position is set using the
synchronization pulse of the material position sensing or per software (c208).
Type R
Chart 180,7
L205
S. SV Dist. Light
Source for the distance between the light barrier and knife to calculate the material
position when passing the light barrier when activating cutting operation.
Value 3123
Type I
Chart 180,1
c207
Waiting For Web End
Indicates that the system is waiting for the end of the material web in the End cut
operating mode.
Type BO
Chart 180,4
c208
Set Ref. Position
Status of the control signal is to set the material position.
Type BO
Chart 180,6
L209
S. Dist. PassMark
Source for the distance between the pass marks sensed by the light barrier and the
knife.
Value 3099
Type I
Chart 180,6
L210
S. SV_OM 1.Cut
Source for the control signal Operating mode for the 1 cut. If this signal is 0, then
st
a sheet is cut already at the 1 cut in accordance with the format specifications.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 180,1
L211
S. SV_enTopCut
Source for the control signal to enable the crop cut. When the crop cut is enabled, at
st
the 1 cut a sheet with the crop length is cut. This allows a clean cut edge at the
start of the material web.
Value 0511
Type I
Chart 180,2
L212
S. no Cut Mode
Source for the control signal No cutting operation to generate a pulse to set the
material position.
Value 0577
Type I
Chart 180,1
L213
S. SV Light Gate
Source for the signal to identify the strip to set the material position.
Factory setting: Connected to terminal 65.
Value 0250
Type I
Chart 180,1
L214
S. SV End Cut
Source for the signal to enable the end cut operating mode to set the material
position.
Value 0573
Type I
Chart 180,1
st

107
Parameter
Description
Data
st
L215
S. optRange1_max
Source for the upper range limit of the 1 range monitoring of the knife position.
L216
S. optRange1
Source for the knife position, 1 range monitoring of the knife position.
L217
S. optRange1_min
Source for the lower range limit of the 1 range monitoring (knife position).
c218
range1_OVF
Display, Knife position has exceeded the upper range limit of the 1 range
monitoring .
c219
Range1_UF
Display, Knife position has fallen below the lower range limit of the 1 range
monitoring.
L220
S. Range3ShiftMax
Source for the offset quantity to offset the upper range limit of the 3 range
monitoring. (Example: Offset quantity can be the material velocity. The upper range
limit is then offset dependent on the velocity.)
L221
S. optRange3
Source of the position actual value which is to be evaluated with the 3 range
monitoring.
Factory setting: Monitoring the knife position for linear systems.
L222
S. Range3ShiftMin
Source to offset the lower range limit of the 3 range monitoring.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 350,1
L223
Rng3_Factor_Max
Factor to evaluate the offset quantity L220. For positive values of L223, the upper
range limit is reduced with increasing offset size.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 350,2
L224
Range3_max
Upper range limit if the offset is not effective.
Value 1000 mm
Type R
Chart 350,2
L225
Range3_Factor_Min
Factor to evaluate the offset quantity L222. For positive values of L225, the lower
range limit is reduced with increasing offset quantity.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 350,2
L226
Range3_min
Lower range limit for an offset, which is not effective.
Value 0.0 mm
Type R
Chart 350,2
c227
Range3_OVF
Status of the 3 range monitoring:
st
Value 3413
Type I
Chart 350,1
st
st
st
rd
rd
rd
rd
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 350,1
Type BO
Chart 350,3
Type BO
Chart 350,3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 350,1
Value 3413
Type I
Chart 350,1
Type BO
Chart 350,4
1: Monitored quantity has exceeded the upper range limit.

rd
c228
Range3_UF

1: Monitored quantity has exceeded the lower range limit.
L229
S. optRange2_max
Source for the upper range limit of the 2 range monitoring. The material position is
evaluated as standard.
Type BO
Chart 350,4
L230
S. optRange2
Source for the position actual value of the 2 range monitoring.
L231
S. optRange2_min
Source for the lower range limit of the 2 range monitoring.
c232
Range2_OVF
Display, Monitored position has exceeded the upper range limit of the 2 range
monitoring.
c233
Range2_UF
Display, Monitored position has exceeded the lower range limit of the 2 range
monitoring.
c234
Out of Range3
nd
nd
Value 3162
Type I
Chart 350,5
Value 3438
Type I
Chart 350,5
nd
Value 3163
Type I
Chart 350,5
nd
nd
rd
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 350,1
Type BO
Chart 350,7
Type
Chart 350,7
Type BO
Chart 350,4
1: Monitored quantity is outside the range limits.
L236
S. S RS-FlipFlop1
Source for the setting signal of the free RS flip-flop 1.
Value 1277
Type I
Chart 430,1
L237
S. R RS-FlipFlop1
Source for the reset signal of the free RS flip-flop 1.
Value 0454
Type I
Chart 430,1
108

Parameter
Description
Data
c241
Blocking nsetp
Absolute value of the speed setpoint for the knife blockage protection.
Type R
Chart 490,3
c242
Blocking act Torque
Absolute value of the actual torque for the blockage protection of the knife.
Type R
Chart 490,3
L243 ... L250

S. Logic1_I1 ...
S. Logic1_I8
L251 ... L254

Logic1_MS1 ...
Logic1_MS4
The inputs are selected using the bits of a mask which are set to 1; the inputs are
then ANDed. The low word of the mask selects the non-inverted- and the high word,
the inverted inputs.
st
Type I
Chart 415,1
st
Type W
Chart 415,2 - 3
Example: Logic1_MS1 = 16#300F = 0011 0000 0000 1111b
AND logic operation: 1
st
setting condition = /I6 /I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

st
L255 ... L257

Logic1_MR1 ...
Logic1_MR3
Masks for 3 reset functions of the 1 parameterizable logic (evaluation, refer to L251
and Chart 400)
Type W
Chart 415,2 - 3
L258
Logic1_MR
Mask to select the inputs, which reset the 1 parameterizable block. The low word of Type W
the mask selects the non-inverted- and the high word the inverted inputs (refer to
Chart 415,3
L251). The selected inputs (or inverted inputs) are ORed. If the result of the OR logic
operation is 1, then the outputs Q = 0, QN =1. The output Q then changes from 1
to 0, and a pulse is output at QEN.
c259
Logic1_Q
Status output of the 1 parameterizable logic. The status is inverse to output QN. If
the status changes, a pulse is generated at the outputs QE (QN: 0
1) and QEN
(QN: 1
0) for the duration of a processing cycle.
L263 ... L270

S. Logic2_I1 ...
S. Logic2_I8
L271 ... L274

Logic2_MS1 ...
Logic2_MS4
The inputs, which are ANDed, are selected with the bits of a mask which are set to
1. The low word of the mask selects the non-inverted- the high word, the inverted
inputs.
st
st
nd
Type BO
Chart 415,4
Type I
Chart 415,5
nd
Type W
Chart 415,6 - 7
st

nd
L275 ... L277

Logic2_MR1 ...
Logic2_MR3
and Chart 400)
Type W
Chart 415,6 - 7
L278
Logic2_MR
Mask to select the inputs, which reset the 2 parameterizable block. The low word of Type W
the mask selects the non-inverted- and the high word the inverted inputs (refer to
Chart 415,7
L271). The selected inputs (or inverted inputs) are ORed. If the result of the OR logic
operation is 1, then the outputs Q = 0, QN =1. The output Q then changes from 1
to 0, and a pulse is output at QEN.
c279
Logic2_Q
Status output of the 2 parameterizable logic. The status is inverse to output QN. If
the status changes, a pulse is generated at the outputs QE (QN: 0
1) and QEN
(QN: 1
0) for the duration of a processing cycle.
Type BO
Chart 415,8
L282
S. AbsPos high
Source for the high word of a 32-bit absolute value encoder value. Non-relevant bits
(e.g. multi-turn positions) can be masked-out using L296.
Value 2314
Type I
Chart 160,1
L283
S. AbsPos low
Source for the low word of a 16/32-bit absolute value encoder value. Non-relevant bits Value 2313
(e.g. multi-turn positions) can be masked-out using L297.
Type I
Chart 160,1
L284
Abs. Pos. Norm.
Normalization value for the absolute position selected using L282, L283. In this case
it involves the Cuts per revolution value.
Value 8192.0
Type R
Chart 160,4
c285
Abs. Pos. CU
Absolute value encoder position (L282, L283) before normalization. The value 1.0
corresponds to the smallest encoder step (resolution).
Type R
Chart 160,3
L286
AbsPos Limit
Range limit of the normalized absolute value encoder position. This is required to
shift the range of the position (refer to c292; Chart 160).
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 160,4
nd
nd

109
Parameter
Description
Data
L287
AbsPos Range
Theoretical value range of the absolute value encoder position. The value is used to
shift the range of the absolute position (refer to c292; Chart 160).
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 160,5
L288
AbsPos_AddPos
Offset to shift the range of the absolute position (refer to c292; Chart 160).
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 160,4
c290
AbsolutOffset
Offset position for the absolute value generator (from the CU or on T400). It involves
the encoder position in the required zero position.
Type R
Chart 150,4
When a plant/system is first commissioned, the shears are positioned at the zero
position and the absolute value position is saved as offset position in the NOVRAM of
the T400. In cyclic operation, the saved offset position is subtracted from the
measured value.
c291
Abs.Pos. correct
Absolute position (from the 16/32-bit source) after subtracting the absolute value
offset (c290).
Type R
Chart 150,4
c292
Absolute Pos. 2
Absolute position (from the 16/32-bit source) after normalization and range
correction. The range correction is used to shift a discontinuous position (range
overflow) of the encoder position from the operating range of the encoder.
Type R
Chart 160,6
c293
Absole Pos. 1
Absolute position (from the 16/32-bit source) after normalization.
Type R
Chart 160,4
L294
S. Save pulse
Source of the signal to save the absolute position in the NOVRAM
Value 1311
Type I
Chart 150,2
L295
S. AbsolutPos
Source of the position value from an absolute value encoder (not relevant for TR
encoders). The value can be saved as zero offset in the NOVRAM.
Value 3292
Type I
Chart 150,2
L296
Mask AbsPosHigh
Mask to select the valid bits of the high word of the 32-bit absolute position. All of the
bits, selected with 1 are evaluated.
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 160,2
L297
Mask AbsPosLow
Mask to select the valid bits of the low word of the 16/32-bit absolute position. All of
the bits, selected with 1 are evaluated.
Value 16#FFFF
Type W
Chart 160,2
L298
Source of the signal, which signals the validity of the position value from the absolute
value encoder.
Value 0976
Type I
Chart 150,2
L300
S. Calib_Absolute
Source for the Absolute position valid signal to reference the knife.
Value 0147
Type I
Chart 170,1
L301
S. CoarseRef. Sel.
Source for the signal to enable the direction-dependent reference position. When this
function is enabled, for a positive speed, L312 is set as reference position and for a
negative speed, L311.
Value 0594
Type I
Chart 170,1
L302
S. Calib_ZeroPuls
Source for the synchronizing pulse to reference the knife.
Value 0415
Type I
Chart 170,1
L303
S. CalPhiOverflow
Source for the Knife position has exceeded the permissible range signal. The signal Value 0684
Type I4
is used to reset the status Knife is calibrated.
Chart 170,1
L304
S. CalPhiUnderflw
Source for the Knife position has fallen below the permissible range signal. The
signal is used to reset the status Knife is calibrated.
Value 0682
Type I
Chart 170,1
L305
S. CalibCoarseRef
Source for the coarse reference pulse to set the knife position, when referencing,
with the jogging function, to the coarse reference value.
Value 0529
Type I
Chart 170,4
L306
S. CoarseRef_Jog
Source for the jogging signal in order to set the knife position to the coarse reference
value when referencing.
Value 0593
Type I
Chart 170,4
L307
S. Set Shear Pos2
Source for an optional setting pulse to set the knife position.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 170,6
L308
S. Coarse Set Value
Source for the setting value of the knife position when referencing to the coarse
reference value or when using an absolute value encoder (not for TR encoders).
Value 3183
Type I
Chart 170,6
S. AbsPos Valid
110

Parameter
Description
Data
L309
Calibrate Delay
Delay, which is effective when referencing the knife position after the position
sensing of the absolute value encoder has been completed.
Value 0.0 ms
Type SD
Chart 170,2
c310
Shear calibrated
Referencing status of the knife.
Type BO
Chart 170,5
L311
Synchr.Pos. neg.
Setting value for the knife position for a negative knife speed.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 170,3
L312
Synchr.Pos. pos.
Setting value for the knife position for a positive knife speed.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 170,3
c313
Set Val Shear Pos
Actual setting value for the knife position.
Type R
Chart 170,7
L314 ... L316
3 alternative sources to enable the knife position synchronization. This means that
synchronization is permitted as a function of the current operating mode.
Type I
Chart 120,1
L317
CoarseRef pos.
Setting value for the knife position for the coarse referencing for a positive knife
speed.
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 170,3
L318
CoarseRef neg.
Setting value for the knife position for the coarse referencing for a negative knife
speed.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 170,3
L319
Source set value for the shear position at zero pulse (synchronization)
Value 3311
Type I
Chart 170,6
L321, L322
S. OR4_1
S. OR4_2
2 sources for the inputs of OR-gate 4.
Type
Chart 425,7
L323, L324
S. OR5_1
S. OR5_2
2 sources for the inputs of OR-gate 5.
Type
Chart 425,7
L325, L326
S. NX_Cut Polygon
S. NY_Cut Polygon
Sources for the normalization factors for the cutting curve.
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 450,1-5
L327
Set Cut Curve
Initiates a re-calculation of the cutting curve with a positive edge at L237. (set L327 =
0; L327 = 1)
Value 0
Type I
Chart 450,5
L328
Typ Cut Curve
Order of the curve sections of the cutting curve.

rd
nd
2: 2 order
0: 3 order
st
rd
3: 3 order (more rounded-off than for L508=0)
1: 1 order (straight lines)
Value 1
Type I
Chart 450,6
L329, L330
LM1 Cut Curve
LM2 Cut Curve
Mask to define linear curve elements bit-by-bit. LM1 involves the sections between
points X1 and X16, LM2 the subsequent sections.
Example: LM1 = 0000 0000 0000 1001
The point 1 and point 2 as well as 4 and 5 are connected through a straight line,
independent of the selected curve type L328.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 450,6-7
L331 ... L338

S. ModeSwitch_I1 ...
S. ModeSwitch_I8
Sources for the digital input signal of the mode changeover.
Type I
Chart 410,2
L339 ... L342

ModeSwitch_MS1 ...
ModeSwitch_MS4
Masks for 4 setting functions of the mode changeover (refer to Chart 400). The
Type W
inputs, which are ANDed, are selected using the bits of a mask which are set to 1.
Chart 410,3 - 4
The low word of the mask selects the non-inverted, the high word, the inverted inputs.
S. Enable Synchr1 ...

S. Enable Synchr3
S.SynchrShearPos
Example: ModeSwitch_MS1 = 16#300F = 0011 0000 0000 1111b
st
L343 ... L345

ModeSwitch_MR1 ...
ModeSwitch_MR3
Masks for the 3 reset functions of the mode changeover (evaluation, refer to L339
and Chart 400)

Type W
Chart 410,3 - 4
111
Parameter
Description
Data
L346
ModeSwitch_MR
Mask to select the inputs, which reset the mode changeover to synchronous
operation (setpoint input from a format generator). The low word of the mask selects
the non-inverted- and the high word the inverted inputs (refer to L339). The selected
inputs (or inverted inputs) are ORed. If the result of the OR logic operation is 1, the
outputs Q = 0, QN =1. Output Q then changes from 1 to 0, and a pulse is output
at output QEN.
Type W
Chart 410,4
c347
Mode Positioning
Status output, mode changeover:
Type BO
Chart 410,5
0: Synchronous operation (format generator inputs the setpoint)

1: Positioning mode
The status is inverse to output QN. If the status changes, a pulse is output at the
1) and QEN (QN: 1
0) for the duration of one
following outputs QE (QN: 0
processing cycle.
c348
Error Mode Switch
Monitoring output of the enable of the positioning mode. An error is generated, if an

illegal status occurs, selectable with L349, in the positioning mode. (e. g. if, for the
current material position, synchronous operation should be active.)
Type BO
Chart 410,7
L349
S. Mode Error
Source for the error condition, which may only have the value 1 when there is an
error in the positioning mode. This is used to monitor the mode changeover.
Value 0454
Type I
Chart 410,6
L350 ... L389

Friction_X1,
Friction_Y1 ...
20 value pairs to specify the friction characteristic.
Type R
Chart 460,2 - 4
Friction_X20,
Friction_Y20
Input values < X1

Input values > X2
The X values must be parameterized in an increasing sequence.

This means:
L390 ... L429

n_Cut_X1,
n_Cut_Y1 ...
n_Cut_X20,
n_Cut_Y20
output = Y1
output = Y2
friction_X(n) < friction_X(n+1)
20 value pairs to specify the cutting curve.

Input values < X1
Input values > X2
Type R
Chart 450,2 - 4
output = Y1
output = Y2

This means:
n_cut_X(n) < n_cut_X(n+1)
L430 ... L469

Inertia_X1,
Inertia_Y1 ...
20 value pairs to specify the moment of inertia characteristic.

output = Y1
Input values < X1
Input values > X2
output = Y2
Inertia_X20,
Inertia_Y20
L470 ... L489

P_X1,
KP_Y1 ...
20 value pairs to specify the characteristic for KP adaption (proportional gain of the
speed controller in the basic drive converter).
output = Y1
Input values < X1
Input values > X2
output = Y2
KP_X10,
KP_Y10
This means:
Type R
Chart 460,2 - 4
moment of inertia_X(n) < moment of inertia_X(n+1)
Type R
Chart 450,2 - 4

This means:
KP_X(n) < KP_X(n+1)
c490
KP_Diagr_Outp
Output of the characteristic for KP adaption.
Type R
Chart 450,5
c491
Cut Polygon Outp
Output of the characteristic to specify the cutting curve.
Type R
Chart 450,6
c492
Outp Friction Diag
Friction characteristic output.
Type R
Chart 460,5
c493
Inertia Poly Out
Moment of inertia characteristic output (moment of inertia = (knife position) )
Type R
Chart 460,5
c495
Inertia
Effective moment of inertia.
Type R
Chart 460,8
L496
S. KP_Polygon
Source for the input quantity of the KP characteristic.
Value 3164
Type R
Chart 450,2
L497
S. Cut Polygon
Source for the input quantity of the cutting curve.
Value 3413
Type R
Chart 450,1
112

Parameter
Description
Data
L498
S. Friction Polyg.
Source for the input quantity of the friction characteristic. (This is connected as
standard to the smoothed material velocity.)
Value 3023
Type R
Chart 460,1
L499
S. Inertia Polygon
Source for the input quantity of the moment of inertia characteristic. (This is
connected as standard with the knife position.)
Value 3413
Type R
Chart 460,1
L500
S. Factor1 Friction
Source for the 1 evaluation factor of the friction characteristic (refer to Chart 460)
st
Friction torque = Output_friction characteristic ( (L502) + (L500) (L501) )

nd
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 460,7
L501
S. Factor2 Friction
Source for the 2 evaluation factor of the friction characteristic (refer to Chart 460;
L500).
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 460,7
L502
S. Offset Friction
Source for the offset value to determine the friction (refer to Chart 460; L500).
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 460,7
L503
S. Factor Inertia
Source for the evaluation factor of the moment of inertia characteristic (refer to Chart
460)
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 460,7
Moment of inertia = Output_characteristic (L503) + (L504)

L504
S. Offset Inertia
Source for the offset value to calculate the moment of inertia (refer to Chart 460;
L503)
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 460,7
L505, L506
S. NX_Friction
S. NY_Friction
Sources for the normalization factors of the friction characteristic.
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 460,1-5
L507
Set Friction
Initiate re-calculation of the friction characteristic with a positive edge at L507. (set
L507 = 0; L507 = 1)
Value 0
Type I
Chart 460,5
L508
Typ Friction
Order of the curve segments of the friction characteristic.

rd
nd
2: 2 order
0: 3 order
st
rd
Value 1
Type I
Chart 460,6
L509, L510
LM1 Friction
LM2 Friction
Mask to define the linear curve segments bit-by-bit. LM1 involves the segments
between points X1 and X16, LM2, the subsequent segments.
Example: LM1 = 0000 0000 0000 1001
Value 0
Type I
Chart 460,6 - 7
L511, L512
S. NX_Inertia
S. NY_Inertia
Sources for the normalization factors of the moment of inertia characteristic.
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 460,1-5
L513
Set Inertia
Initiate re-calculation of the moment of inertia characteristic with a positive edge at

L507. (set L513 = 0; L513 = 1)
Value 0
Type I
Chart 460,5
L514
Typ Inertia
Order of the curve segments of the moment of inertia characteristic.

rd
nd
2: 2 order
0: 3 order
st
rd
Value 1
Type I
Chart 460,6
L515, L516
LM1 Inertia
LM2 Inertia
Mask to define the linear curve segments bit-by-bit. LM1 involves the segments
between points X1 and X16, LM2, the subsequent segments.
Example: LM1 = 0000 0000 0000 1001
Value 0
Type I
Chart 460,6 - 7
L517
S. Ramp_Local
Value 3533
Type
Chart 260,6
L518
S. JogSpeed_neg
Source of the velocity for the Jogging mode. This value is negated, and can be used
as velocity for jogging in the opposite direction.
Value 3519
Type I
Chart 260,2
L519
JogSpeed
Fixed speed setpoint (normalized) for the Jogging mode.
Value 0.05
Type R
Chart 260,1
L520 ... L522

S. JogPositiv1 ...
S. JogPositiv3
3 sources to enable the Jogging function for positive speeds. Purpose: Evaluating
limit switches for linear systems. Enable signals, which are not used, must be
connected to 1 (connector 0001).
Type I
Chart 260,1

113
Parameter
Description
Data
L523
S. JogSpeed1
Source for the positive speed setpoint (normalized) for Jogging.
Value 3519
Type I
Chart 260,1
L524 ... L526

S. JogNegativ1 ...
S. JogNegativ3
3 sources to enable the Jogging function for negative speeds. Purpose: Evaluating
limit switches for linear systems. Enable signals, which are not used, must be
connected to 1 (connector 0001).
Type I
Chart 260,1
L527
S. JogSpeed2
Source for the negative speed setpoint (normalized) for Jogging.
Value 3518
Type I
Chart 260,1
L528
S.Jog1_Dir
Source to select the direction of rotation in the Jogging1 mode.

0: Positive
1: Negative
Value 0594
Type I
Chart 260,3
L529
S. Sel. Ref/Jog
Source to select the Jogging1 or Referencing mode. Effect of the selected signal:
0: Jogging1
1: Referencing
Value 0592
Type I
Chart 260,5
L530
S. LimSwitch Start
Source for the status of the lefthand limit switch for automatic referencing. Automatic
in this case means that the direction is reversed when the limit switch is reached.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 260,1
L531
S. Limit Switch End
Source for the status of the righthand limit switch for automatic referencing.
Automatic in this case means that the direction is reversed when the limit switch is
reached.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 260,1
L532
S. Init_Ref_Dir
Source for the signal to define the initial status when automatically referencing. This
Value 1312
means that it can be ensured, that the same direction of rotation is always used at the Type I
start of referencing.
Chart 260,1
c533
Speed Local
Velocity setpoint for the local Jogging1 or Referencing modes.
Type R
Chart 260,5
L534
S. Sel_SpeedLocal
Source to select the knife velocity (refer to Chart 260); signal values
0: Speed setpoint from the cutting mode type
1: Speed setpoint from Jogging1 or Referencing
Value 0599
Type I
Chart 260,5
L535
S. Sel_SpeedStart
Source to select the knife velocity (refer to Chart 260); signal values
0: Speed setpoint in accordance with L534
1: Speed setpoint for the Approach starting position mode
Value 0595
Type I
Chart 260,6
L536
S. Speed Cut
Source for the reference speed (setpoint speed) in cutting operation.
Value 3021
Type I
Chart 260,5
L537
S. Speed_Local
Source for the reference speed (setpoint speed) in the local mode.
Value 3533
Type I
Chart 260,5
L538
S. SpeedPosCtrl
Source for the reference speed (setpoint speed) when approaching the starting
position.
Value 3144
Type I
Chart 260,5
L539
Tfilt n_setp
Smoothing time constant for the reference (setpoint) speed.
Value 1.2 ms
Type SD
Chart 260,7
L540
StepsRampLocal
Ramp steps of a simple ramp function. In the factory setting the duration of the
ramping is 5 task cycle time T3 = 5 12.8 ms = 64 ms.
Value 5
Type
Chart 260,7
L541
S. Disable Spdsetp
Source of the control signal to inhibit the speed output. The speed setpoint can be
set to zero using the signal.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 260,7
L542
Spd_Referencing
Speed setpoint (normalized) when referencing. For applications with linear axis, enter
negative values in order to bring the knife in the direction of the quiescent position.
Value 0.05
Type R
Chart 260,2
L543, L544
S. Not3, S. Not4
Source for the 2 logical inverter.
Type I
Chart 430,6
L545
S. TorqueFriction
Source of the friction torque to generate the torque sum for the drive converter.
Value 3029
Type I
Chart 240,6
L546
S. Dif_inertia
Source of the moment of inertia for differentiating when calculating the oscillating
torque.
Value 3495
Type I
Chart 240,1
114

Parameter
Description
Data
L547
S. FactorT_accel
Source of the moment of inertia to calculate the accelerating torque.
Value 3495
Type I
Chart 240,1
c548
Torque Setp > max
Result of the comparison between the setpoint (reference)- and maximum torque. If
this quantity is 1, this means that the demanded torque cannot be provided (if the
basic drive uses the same limit values).
Type BO
Chart 240,7
c549
Torque Cut_Enable
Status of the cutting torque enable.

1: Cutting torque is entered as additional torque
Type BO
Chart 240,4
L550
S. Cut Torque
Source for the cutting torque for the torque generation.
Value 3824
Type I
Chart 240,1
L551
S. Cut Torque Pos
Source of the knife position for the cutting torque input.
Value 3413
Type I
Chart 240,1
L552
S. Torque Cut Light
Source for the material identification (light barrier) for the cutting torque setpoint
input.
Value 0250
Type I
Chart 240,1
L553
S. n_Acceleration
Source of the speed setpoint to determine the accelerating torque.
Value 3021
Type I
Chart 240,1
L554
S. Inertia
Source for the moment of inertia input to generate the effective mass moment of
inertia.
Value 3493
Type I
Chart 460,7
L555
S. Friction
Source for the friction torque input to generate the effective friction torque.
Value 3492
Type I
Chart 460,7
L556
S. Vref_OscillTorque
Source of the velocity for the oscillating torque calculation.
Value 3435
Type I
Chart 240,1
L557
S. Torque Cut Region
Source for the signal to enable the torque-component oscillating-, accelerating- and
cutting torque. The effect of this enable signal:
0: Torques are set to 0
1: Torques, together with the friction torque, generate the reference
torque
Value 0576
Type I
Chart 240,6
L558
TD_Acceleration
Differentiating time constant to determine the accelerating torque.
Value 250 ms
Type SD
Chart 240,2
L559
TD_Inertia
Differentiating time constant to determine the oscillating torque.
Value 500 ms
Type SD
Chart 240,2
L560
S. F_Overspeed
Source for the supplementary velocity. The knife velocity is increased as percentage
by the supplementary velocity connected (entered) here.
the knife speed is increased by 5% with
Example: Supplementary velocity = 0.05
respect to the material velocity when cutting.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 265,1
L561
S. Speed_vCut
Source for the velocity components from the cutting characteristic to take into
account the over velocity factor.
Value 3491
Type I
Chart 265,1
L562
S. Enable Cut Curve
Source for the control signal to enable the cutting curve. Control signal logic:
0: Setpoint velocity from the cutting curve = 0
1: Setpoint velocity from the cutting curve effective
Value 0576
Type I
Chart 265,6
L563
S. Speed_Vref
Source for the reference velocity for the cutting curve. The supplementary setpoint
obtained from this (parameter c577) is given by:
Value 3435
Type I
Chart 265,5
c577 = L573 factor_overspeed (1 - cutting curve) reference velocity

L564
S. Speed_DV_FGEN
Source for the velocity component of the setpoint generator. This is connected, as
standard to the speed output of the format generator.
Value 3158
Type I
Chart 250,1
L565
S. Speed_FOVS
Source for the overvelocity factor to evaluate the setpoint knife speed. This is
connected as standard to the Factor overspeed (d020).
Value 3020
Type I
Chart 250,1

115
Parameter
Description
Data
L566
S. Speed_PosCtrl
Source for the supplementary speed setpoint. This is connected, as standard to the
position controller output.
Value 3144
Type I
Chart 250,1
L567
S. Speed_Set_OVS
Source for the control signal to transfer the Factor overspeed. It is not permissible to
change the factor while cutting.
1: Accept Factor overspeed
Value 0666
Type I
Chart 265,3
L568
S. Cut Speed Limits
Source for the control signal to enable the setpoint speed in cutting operation. Control Value 0671
signal logic:
Type I
0: Setpoint speed = 0
Chart 250,4
1: Speed setpoint limiting according to L575, L576
L569
F_over_min
Lowest permissible value for the Factor overspeed.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 265,2
L570
S. Speed_Vref
Source for the material velocity to determine the knife velocity setpoint.
Value 3435
Type I
Chart 250,1
L571
Overspeed_Max
Optional weighting factor for the Factor overspeed (refer to Chart 265). This is also
used as upper limit of the cutting velocity.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 265,2
L572
n_Cut_min
Lower limit value of the cutting velocity.
Value 0.3
Type R
Chart 265,2
L573
Factor Cut Curve
Constant weighting factor for the supplementary velocity, which is generated from the
cutting curve.
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 265,7
L574
S. Max. Speed_Cut
Source of the maximum speed for cutting operation modes.
Value 3575
Type
Chart 250,5
L575
Cut Speed_Max
Upper limit value of the velocity for cutting operation.
Value 1.1
Type R
Chart 250,4
L576
Cut Speed_Min
Lower limit value of the velocity for cutting operation.
Value -0.1
Type R
Chart 250,4
c577
v_setp Cut Curve
The velocity components resulting from the cutting curve and evaluation with Factor
overspeed.
Type R
Chart 265,7
L578
max_Torque Cut
Maximum positive torque (referred to the reference torque). This limit value is used to
evaluate as to whether more torque is demanded than is actually available. It can also
be transferred to the basic drive as torque limit (PZD7 in Chart 640).
Value 1.5
Type I
Chart 240,6
L579
min_Torque Cut
Maximum negative torque (referred to the reference torque). This limit value can also
be transferred to the basic drive as torque limit (PZD8 in Chart 640).
Value -1.5
Type I
Chart 240,6
L580
TorqueMax_Local
Maximum torque (referred to the reference torque) for local operating modes.
Value 0.4
Type I
Chart 240,4
c581
act. Max. Torque
Actual positive torque limit.
Type R
Chart 240,7
c582
act. Min. Torque
Actual negative torque limit.
Type R
Chart 240,7
L583
S.Speed_dVsetp
Source of the signal which is treated as supplementary speed component during the
synchronous phase.
Value 3561
Type I
Chart 265,5
L584
S. Reduced Torque
Source for the control signal to changeover to the torque limit, specified using L587.
Using this control signal, for example, when cutting, the torque is limited to extremely
low values while the cutting tool is clamped to the material.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 240,5
L585
S. Speed_dvCut
Source for a supplementary speed setpoint. This is assigned as standard to the

speed generated from the cutting curve.
Value 3577
Type I
Chart 250,1
L586
F_over_max
Highest permissible value for the Factor overspeed value.
Value 1.1
Type R
Chart 265,2
116

Parameter
Description
Data
L587
Torque Reduced
Alternative torque limit value. The value can become effective while cutting with the
control signal selected using L584.
Value 0.1
Type R
Chart 240,5
L588 ... L590

S. Torquet_1 ...
S. Torquet_3
Three sources for torque components, which should be effective in the cutting mode.
Type I
Chart 240,5
L591
S. Compare3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 350,6
L592
S. Compare3 Mid
Center of the comparator range with hysteresis (free block).
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 350,6
L593
S. Compare3 Range
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 350,6
L594
Compare3 Hyst.
Value 0.0
Type I
Chart 350,7
L595
S. Compare 4
Value 3437
Type I
Chart 140,2
L596
S. Compare 4 Mid
Value 3204
Type I
Chart 140,2
L597
S. Compare 4 Range
Value 3366
Type I
Chart 140,2
L598
Compare 4 Hyst.
Value 0.0
Type I
Chart 140,3
L600
Source of the control signal to enable the absolute value encoder evaluation of a SSIor EnDat encoder connected to the T400. As long as the control signal is 0 then
none of the functions, shown in Chart 150, are processed.
Value 0091
Type I
Chart 50,5
Source of the control signal to enable the absolute value generator evaluation of a TR
encoder connected at the T400. As long as the control signal is 0 then none of the
functions, shown in Chart 165, are processed.
Value 0090
Type I
Chart 50,5
Source of the control signal to enable the absolute value generator evaluation of an
encoder connected to the basic drive. As long as the control signal is 0 then non of
the functions, shown in Chart 160, are processed.
Value 0092
Type I
Chart 50,5
Source of the control signal to enable processing of the cutting curve. As long as the
control signal is 0 the cutting curve is not processed.
Value 0168
Type I
Chart 50,4
L605
S. DW_W_1
Source for a double-word-word converter (free block)
Value 5000
Type I
Chart 440,4
L606, L607
S. ADDI1 X1
S. ADDI1 X2
Sources for the summands of the 1 integer adder.
L608, L609
S. SUBI1 X1
S. SUBI1 X2
Sources for the inputs of the 1 integer subtractor.
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 445,1
C610
Status of the evaluation of an abs. value encoder at the T400 (SSI- or EnDat) 0:
No processing
1: Processing software is active
Type BO
Chart 50,6
Status of the evaluation of a TR encoder at T400

0: No processing
Type BO
Chart 50,6
Status of the evaluation of the absolute value encoder from the basic drive
0: No processing
Type BO
Chart 50,6
S.Task AENC_T400
L601
S.Task TR encoder
L602
S.Task CU endocder
L603
S.Task cut curve
Task AENC
C611
Task TR encoder
C612
Task CU encoder
st
st

Value 2000
Type I
Chart 445,1
117
Parameter
Description
Data
C613
Status of the processing of the cutting curve

0: The cutting curve is not processed (no supplementary speed setpoint)
1: Cutting curve processing is active
Type BO
Chart 50,6
The cutting curve is processed, as standard, as long as the knife is within the cutting
range. Processing can be extended for a defined period of time with delay L614.
Value 4.8 ms
Type SD
Chart 50,5
L615 ... L616

S. MUL3 X1 ...
S. MUL3 X2
Sources for the inputs of a free multiplier.
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 445,5
L617 .. L619
S. SQRT_1 ...
S.SQRT_3
3 Source for the square root function to reduce the speed setpoint at the end of the
travel.
Type
Chart 25,1
L620
S. ON StateMach
Source for the starting signal for the automatic start-up sequence (commissioning
sequence) of the simulation mode. The drive can be powered-up, referenced, the
starting position approached and continuous cutting with a 1 at this signal.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 810,1
L621
S. CU ready SM
Source for the Basic drive ready to power-up signal in the simulation mode.
Value 0340
Type I
Chart 810,2
L622
S. Web ready SM
Source for the Feed drive ready to power-up signal, if the feed drive is also to be
activated in the simulation mode.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 810,2
L623
S. Fault SM
Source for the Fault signal in the simulation mode.
Value 0014
Type I
Chart 810,2
L624
CTW1 CU=OFF
Value for control word 1 of the drive converter for the drive OFF status in the
simulation mode.
Value 16#843E
Type W
Chart 810,4
L625
CTW1 CU=ON
Value for the control word 1 of the drive converter for the drive ON status in the
simulation mode.
Value 16#9C7F
Type W
Chart 810,5
L626
S. CU run SM
Source for the Basic drive operational signal in the simulation mode.
Value 0342
Type I
Chart 810,1
L627
S. Web run SM
Source for the Material drive operational signal in the simulation mode.
Value 0001
Type I
Chart 810,1
L628
S. Calibrated SM
Source for the Knife calibrated signal in the simulation mode.
Value 1310
Type I
Chart 810,2
L629
S. in Startpos SM
Source for the Knife in the starting position signal in the simulation mode.
Value 0647
Type I
Chart 810,2
L630
SCTW1 OFF SM
Simulation value for the shears control word for the No operation operating mode.
Value 16#0000
Type I
Chart 810,2
L631
SCTW1 Refer. SM
Simulation value for the shears control word for the Calibrating operating mode.
Value 16#0050
Type I
Chart 810,2
L632
SCTW1 Startp. SM
Simulation value for the shears control word for the Approach starting position
operating mode.
Value 16#0110
Type I
Chart 810,3
L633
SCTW1 Cut SM
Simulation value for the shears control word for the Continuous cutting operating
mode.
Value 16#0032
Type I
Chart 810,4
L634
State Cut MS1
Setting mask to activate the cutting mode for simulation. (Refer to the programmable
logic STATE in Function Chart 400).
Value 16#0007
Type I
Chart 810,3
L635
State Cut MR
Mask to exit the cutting mode for simulation. (Refer to the programmable logic
STATE in Function Chart 400).
Value 16#0500
Type I
Chart 810,4
Task cut curve

L614
Off delay cut
118

Parameter
Description
Data
L636
MS1 SM on
Setting mask to activate the drives for simulation. (Refer to the programmable logic
Value 16#0017
Type I
Chart 810,3
L637
MR SM off
Mask to power-down the drives for simulation. (Refer to the programmable logic
Value 16#1008
Type I
Chart 810,4
L638
S. SCTW1bits SM
Source for the word-to-binary converter to split-up the simulated shears control word
1 into binary (digital) values.
Value 2622
Type I
Chart 810,6
L639
S. CTW1bits SM
Source for the word-to-binary converter to split-up the simulated control word 1 into
binary (digital) values.
Value 2621
Type I
Chart 810,6
L640, L641
S. SwitchDI_0,
S. SwitchDI_1
2 sources for the inputs of the 32bit integer changeover switch. The output is
selected with L642.
Type
Chart 430,6
L642
S. SwitchDI_sel
Source for the signal to select the input at 32bit integer changeover switch.
0: Source(L640)
1: Source(L641)
Value 0000
Type
Chart 425,5
L643
S. Cut Mode SM
Source of the state machine logic for standalone operation of the T400. In factory
setting this input is used to distinguish between cutting operation and approach
start position
Value 576
Type
Chart 810,2
L644
StateCut MR1
2 condition mask for terminating the cutting operation request of the state machine.
L645
S. Edge2
Source for the 2 free edge function input.
Type
Chart 430,4
L646
S. I_R_1
Source for a free integer-to-real converter.
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 440,4
L647
S. R_I_1
Source for a free real-to-integer converter.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 440,4
L649
Source for a reserve variable, which is normalized with Xref_normalization.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 60,6
16 floating-point fixed values
Value 0.0
Type R
Chart 70,3
5 fixed values, word type (16 bit). When parameterizing using OP1S, word
parameters are entered bit-by-bit. Word parameters can be connected to integer
destinations.
Value 0
Type W
Chart 70,5
8 fixed values, integer type (16 bit). When parameterizing using OP1S, integer
parameters are treated as signed, integer number. Integer parameters can be
connected to word destinations.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 70,5
6 fixed values, double-integer type (32 bit). When parameterizing using OP1S,
integer parameters are treated as signed, integer number.
Value 0
Type DI
Chart 70,7
L685, L686
S. NOP1,
S. NOP2
Sources for 2 floating-point values, which are to be distributed to several locations.

The function can also be used to delay the transfer of a value, as it is processed in
the slowest time sector. (time delay achieved: approx. 200 ms ... 500 ms)
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 430,1
L687, L688
S. Bool_NOP1,
S. Bool_NOP2
Sources for 2 digital values, which should be distributed at several locations. The
function can also be used to delay the transfer of a value, as it is processed in the
slowest time sector. (possible time delay: approx. 200 ms ... 500 ms)
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 430,3
L689 ...L690
S. AND5_1 ...
S. AND5_2
2 sources for the inputs of the 5 free AND block.
L691 ...L692
S. AND6_1 ...
S. AND6_2
nd
nd
S.Reserve1
L650 ... L665
Fixed value 1 ...
Fixed value 16
L666 ... L670
Fixed value W1 ...
Fixed value W5
L671 ... L678
Fixed value Int1 ...
Fixed value Int8
L679 ... L684
Fixed value DI1 ...
Fixed value DI6

Value 16#0A00
Type
Chart 810,4
th
Type
Chart 425,1
th
Type
Chart 425,3
119
Parameter
Description
Data
th
L689 ...L690
S. AND7_1 ...
S. AND7_2
Type
Chart 425,5
L695, L695
S. S RS-FlipFlop4,
S. R RS-FlipFlop4
Sources for the set- and reset input of the 4 RS flip-flop (R dominant).
(free block).
L700 ... L702

S. AND1_I1 ...
S. AND1_I3
L703 ... L705

S. AND2_I1 ...
S. AND2_I3
3 sources for the inputs of the 2 free AND blocks.
L706 , L707
S. Switch1_0 ...
S. Switch1_1
th
Type
Chart 430,4
st
Type I
Chart 425,3
nd
Type I
Chart 425,3
2 sources for the inputs of the 1 free changeover switch. The output is selected
using L708.
st
Type I
Chart 430,1
L708
S. Switch1_sel
Source for the signal to select the input at changeover switch 1.

0: Source(L706)
1: Source(L707)
Type I
Chart 430,1
L709
S. Edge1
Source for the 1 free edge detection block.
L710 ... L712

S. OR1_I1 ...
S. OR1_I3
3 sources for the inputs of the 1 free OR logic block.
L713 ... L715

S. OR2_I1 ...
S. OR2_I3
3 sources for the inputs of the 2 free OR logic block.
L716, L717
S. Switch2_0 ...
S. Switch2_1
st
Value I
Chart 430,4
st
Type I
Chart 425,5
nd
Type I
Chart 425,5
using L718.
nd
Type I
Chart 430,3
L718
S. Switch2_sel

0: Source(L716)
1: Source(L717)
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 430,3
L720
S. Ramp Input
Source for the input signal of the ramp-function generator.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 435,5
L721, L722
Source for the upper- and lower limit value of the ramp-function generator.
S. Ramp max,
S. Ramp min
Factory setting: Limited to:
Type I
Chart 435,6
L723
S. Ramp Setvalue
Source for the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
L724, L725
Ramp up time
Ramp down time
Ramp-up- and ramp-down times for the ramp-function generator. The times refer to a Value 10000 ms
change of the output by a value 1.0.
Type I
Chart 435,5-6
L726
S. Ramp enable
Source for the control signal to enable the ramp-function generator.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 435,5
L727
S. Ramp set
Source for the control signal to set the ramp-function generator to the value in
accordance with L723.
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 435,5
L728
S. OnDelay1
Source for the 1 switch-on delay.
L729
T_OnDelay1
1 switch-on delay time.
L730
S. OffDelay1
Source for the 1 switch-out delay.
120
0.0 to 1.0
st
st
st
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 435,5
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 436,1
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 436,2
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 436,1

Parameter
Description
Data
st
L731
T_OffDelay1
1 switch-on delay time.
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 436,2
L732, L733
S. Not1, S. Not2
Sources for the 2 logical inverters.
Type I
Chart 430,6
L734, L735
S. S RS-FlipFlop2
S. R RS-FlipFlop2
(free block).
L736, L737
S. S RS-FlipFlop3
S. R RS-FlipFlop3
L738
S. set_PT1_Zero
nd
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 430,1
(free block).
rd
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 430,1
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 436,7
Setting 0
Setting 1
1:
0:

The output goes to the input value corresponding to L741
L739
Quality
L740
S. PT1_inp
Source of the input signal for a 1 order lowpass filter (free block).
L741
Tfilt PT1
Filter time constant of the 1 order lowpass filter.
Value 20 ms
Type SD
Chart 436,7
L742
S. Bandstop_inp
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 436,7
L743
S. StopFrequency
Source of the input signal for the blocking frequency (in Hz) of the bandstop filter.
Value 3002
Type I
Chart 436,7
L744, L745
S. Compare_X,
S. Compare_Y
Type I
Chart 435,6
L746
S. Limit_max
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 435,1
L747
S. Limit_inp
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 435,1
L748
S. Limit_min
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 435,1
L749
S. Compare2
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 435,1
L750
S. Compare2 Range
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 435,1
L751
Compare2 Hyst.
Value 0.1
Type I
Chart 435,2
L752
S. Compare2 Mid
Value 3006
Type I
Chart 435,1
L753
S. Character_X
Source for the input signal of a characteristic with 2 points. The output = Y1 if the
Value 3000
signal is less than X1; the output = Y2 if X2 is greater. A linear approximation is made Type I
between the two points.
Chart 435,1
L754, L755
Character_X1,
Character_Y1
Value pair for the lefthand characteristic point (smaller X coordinate).
st
st

Value 2.0
Type I
Chart 436,7
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 436,7
Value 0.0
Type I
Chart 435,2 3
121
Parameter
Description
Data
L756, L757
Character_X2,
Character_Y2
Value 1.0
Type I
Chart 435,2 - 3
L758
S. OffDelay2
Source for the 2 switch-off delay.
L759
T_OffDelay2
2 switch-off delay time.
Value 100 ms
Type SD
Chart 436,2
L760
S. Free Word
Source for a 16-bit value, which is broken-down into individual bits (connectors 0760
to 0775)
Value 2061
Type I
Chart 440,1
L761... L763
S. DW_high,
S. DW_low,
DW_Norm
2 sources for a double word, which is converted into a floating-point value. L763 is
the normalization; i. e. the output value for the input value 16#40000000.
Type I
Chart 440,5 - 7
L764, L765
S. Word
Word_Norm
Source for a 16-bit value, which is to be converted into a floating-point value. L765 is
the normalization; i. e. the output value for the input value 16#4000.
Type I
Chart 440,4 - 5
L766, L767
S. Float
Float_Norm
Source for a floating-point value, which is converted into type N2. L767 is the
normalization; i. e. the input value where the output = 16#4000.
Type I
Chart 440,6 - 7
L768 ... L775

Testdata1_1
Testdata1_8
8, 16-bit test values for selection with L776.
Type I
Chart 800,2-3
L776
S. Testdata1_Sel
Source to select one of 8, 16-bit test values (L768 ... L775).
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 800,3
L777 ... L784

Testdata2_1
Testdata2_8
8, 16-bit test values for selection with L785.
Type I
Chart 800,2-3
L785
S. Testdata2_Sel
Source to select one of 8, 16-bit test values (L777 ... L784).
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 800,3
L786 ... L788

S. ADD1 X1 ...
S. ADD1 X3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 445,3
L789 ... L791

S. ADD2 X1 ...
S. ADD2 X3
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 445,3
L792 ... L793

S. SUB1 X1 ...
S. SUB1 X2
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 445,3
L794 ... L795

S. SUB2 X1 ...
S. SUB2 X2
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 445,3
L796 ... L798

Q.MUL1 X1 ...
Q.MUL1 X3
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 445,5
L799 ... L801

S. MUL2 X1 ...
S. MUL2 X3
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 445,5
L802 ... L803

S. DIV1 X1 ...
S. DIV1 X2
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 445,5
L804 ... L805

S. DIV2 X1 ...
S. DIV2 X2
Value 3001
Type I
Chart 445,5
L806 ... L807

S. OR3_I1 ...
S. OR3_I2
2 sources for the inputs of the 3 free OR block.
122
nd
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 436,1
nd
rd
Type I
Chart 425,5

Parameter
Description
Data
L808, L809
S. ADD3 X1,
S. ADD3 X2
Value 3000
Type
Chart 445,3
L810
S. Free W_B_2
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 440,1
L811
S. R_DI
Source for free real-to-double integer converter.
Value 3000
Type
Chart 440,6
L812 ... L813

S. DIVI1 X1 ...
S. DIVI1 X2
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 445,1
L814 ... L815

S. MULI1 X1 ...
S. MULI1 X2
Value 2001
Type I
Chart 445,1
L816, L817
S. W_DW1 high
S. W_DW1 low
Source for a free word-to-double word converter.
Value 2000
Type I
Chart 440,4
L818
S. Integrator_X
Source for the input quantity of the freely-available integrator.
Value 3000
Type I
Chart 435,5
L819
Integrator LU
Upper limit value of the freely-available integrator
Value 1.0
Type R
Chart 435,6
L820
Integrator LL
Lower limit value of the freely-available integrator
Value -1.0
Type R
Chart 435,6
L821
S. Integrator SV
Source for the setting value of the freely-available integrator
Value 3000
Type R
Chart 435,5
L822
Integrator T
Integration time constant of the freely-available integrator
Value 1000 ms
Type SD
Chart 435,5
L823
S. Integrator set
Source for the setting signal of the freely-available integrator
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 435,5
L824 , L825
S. Switch3_0 ...
S. Switch3_1
using L826.
Type I
Chart 430,5
L826
S. Switch3_sel

0: Source(L824)
1: Source(L825)
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 430,5
L827, L828
S. Switch4_0 ...
S. Switch4_1
2 sources for the inputs of the 4 free changeover switch. The output is selected with Type I
L829.
Chart 430,7
L829
S. Switch4_sel

0: Source(L827)
1: Source(L828)
L830 ... .L832

S. AND_OR1_1 ...
S. AND_OR1_3
Sources of the 1 AND-OR logic in Chart 425. B1830 is the output.
L833 ... .L835

S. AND_OR2_1 ...
S. AND_OR2_3
L836 ... .L838

S. AND_OR3_1 ...
S. AND_OR3_3
L840
S. Cut Error
rd
th
Value 0000
Type I
Chart 430,7
st
Type I
Chart 425,1
nd
Type I
Chart 425,1
rd
Type I
Chart 425,1
Source for the cutting error for statistical evaluation.
Value 3196
Type I
Chart 520,6

123
Parameter
Description
Data
L841 ... L848

Statistic Limit1 ...
Statistic Limit8
Eight limit values to statistically evaluate cutting errors. The evaluation determines the Type R
relative component of measured values, which lie between 2 adjacent limit values, or Chart 520,6
below the lowest, or above the highest limit.
For example: Output Component LV3<LV4 = 0.34 indicates that 34% of the
measured values lie between StatisticLimit3 (inclusive) and StatisticLimit4
(exclusive).
L849
Statistic Number
Initialization par.
Number of measured values determined via the error statistics.
Value 100
Type I
Chart 520,6
L850
Statistic Absolut
Defines whether the cutting error statistic should use signed measured values or
their absolute value.
0: Sign is taken into account
1: The absolute measured value is used
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 520,7
c851 ... c859

Portion < Limit 1 ...
Portion > Limit 8
Results of the cutting error statistics (referred to the number of measured values).
Portion < Limit1:
Component of cuts more precise than the limit in L841
Portion LV1 .. LV2: Comp. between limit values in L841 and L842
Portion LV2 .. LV3: Comp. between limit values in L842 and L843
....
Portion > Limit8:
Component of cuts less accurate than the limit in L848
Type R
Chart 520,8
L860
Logic3_MR
Mask to select the inputs, which reset the 3 parameterizable block. The low word of
the mask selects the non-inverted, and the high word, the inverted inputs (refer to
L869). The selected inputs (or inverted inputs) are ORed. If the result of this OR
logic operation is 1, then outputs Q = 0, QN =1. The output Q changes from 1 to
0 and a pulse is output at QEN.
L861 ... L868

S. Logic3_I1 ...
S. Logic3_I8
L869 ... L872

Logic3_MS1 ...
Logic3_MS4
Mask for 4 setting functions of the 3 parameterizable logic (refer to Chart 400). The
inputs, which are ANDed with one another, are selected using the bits of a mask
which are set to 1. The low word of the mask selects the non-inverted, the high word
the inverted input.
rd
Type W
Chart 420,3
rd
Type I
Chart 420,1
rd
Type W
Chart 420,2 - 3
st

rd
L873 ... L875

Logic3_MR1 ...
Logic3_MR3
and Chart 400)
L876
S. Single Shot_1
Source of the 1 free single shot function input.
L877
T_Single Shot_1
Pulse duration of the 1 free single shot function.
L878
S. Single Shot_2
Value 0000
Type
Chart 436,4
L879
T_Single Shot_1
nd
Value 0 ms
Type
Chart 436,5
L880
Logic4_MR
Mask to select the inputs, which reset the 4 parameterizable block (refer to L860).
L881 ... L888

S. Logic4_I1 ...
S. Logic4_I8
L889 ... L892

Logic4_MS1 ...
Logic4_MS4
Masks for 4 setting functions of the 4 parameterizable logic (refer to L869 and Chart Type W
400).
Chart 420,6 - 7
L893 ... L895

Logic4_MR1 ...
Logikc_MR3
and Chart 400)
L986
S. Single Shot_3
124
st
Type W
Chart 420,2 - 3
Value 0000
Type
Chart 436,4
st
Value 0 ms
Type
Chart 436,5
st
th
Type W
Chart 420,7
th
Type I
Chart 420,5
th
th
rd
Type W
Chart 420,6 - 7
Value 0000
Type
Chart 436,4

Parameter
Description
Data
rd
L897
T_Single Shot_3
L898
S. OnDelay2
Source for the 2 switch-on delay.
L899
T_OnDelay2
L900
CB Address
Slave address of the communications module for operating T400 in the SRT400.
Value 3
Type I
Chart 750,3
L901 ... L913

CB Param. 1 ...
CB Param. 13
Parameter set for the communications module when operating the T400 in the
SRT400. Refer to the Documentation of the communications module used for the
significance of the individual parameters. A change only becomes effective after a
0 1 edge for L914.
Type I
Chart 750,3 5
L914
CB Config set
If a parameter for the communications module is changed (L901ff), it becomes

effective after a 0 1 edge for L914.
Type BO
Chart 750,3
c915
CB Config State
Status of the configuration of the communications module. (0 = OK;

16#7CB3 configuration is not effective, as the drive converter is configuring the
module.)
Type W
Chart 750,5
L940 .. L947
S. Display R1 ...
S. Display R8
Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d040 ... d047, floating-point type. This
allows connector values to be displayed, where no monitoring parameter is
configured.
Source Display
Source Display
L940
d040
L944
d044
L941
d041
L945
d045
L942
d042
L946
d046
L943
d043
L947
d047
Type I
Chart 540,4
L948 .. L951
S. Display W1 ...
S. Display W4
Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d048 ... d051, word type. This allows
connector values to be displayed, where no monitoring parameter is configured.
Source Display
Source Display
L948
d048
L950
d050
L949
d049
L951
d051
Type I
Chart 540,4
L956 .. L959
S. Display I1 ...
S. Display I4
Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d056 ... d059, integer type. This allows
Source Display
Source Display
L956
d056
L958
d058
L957
d057
L959
d059
Type I
Chart 540,6
L964 .. L967
S. Display B1 ...
S. Display B4
Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d064 ... d067, BOOL type. This allows
Source Display
Source Display
L964
d064
L966
d066
L965
d065
L967
d067
Type I
Chart 540,6
L968 .. L971
S. Display DI1 ...
S. Display DI4
Sources for the 8 monitoring parameters d068 ... d071, double word type. This allows Type I
Chart 540,6
Source Display
Source Display
L968
d068
L970
d070
L969
d069
L971
d071
L990
USS Enable
Initialization par.
Enables the USS slave functionality to operate the T400 in the SRT400 with OP1S.
Switch S1/8 must be simultaneously set to ON. The activation/ deactivation only
becomes effective after the module is reset. For USS operation, it is no longer
possible to access via the RS232 interface.
Value 1
Type BO
Chart 770,1
L991
USS Baud Rate
Baud rate of the USS interface. (OP1S can only operate with 9600 baud or 19200
baud).
Value 9600
Type DI
Chart 770,1
L992
USS Address
Address of the USS interface.
Value 0
Type I
Chart 770,1
nd
nd
switch-on delay time.
Value 0 ms
Type
Chart 436,5
Value 0000
Type
Chart 436,1
Value 100 ms
Type
Chart 436,1

125
Parameter
Description
L993
USS 4-Wire
Difference between 2-conductor- (half duplex) and 4-conductor operation (full duplex) Value 0
for the USS interface.
Type I
Chart 770,1
Necessary for
Value Significance
0
1
RS485 2-conductor (half duplex)

RS232 4-conductor (full duplex)
Data
for OP1S
for SIMOVIS
The end nodes at the USS bus (RS485) must terminate the bus with terminating
resistors. Switches S1/1 and S1/2 on the T400 switch the appropriate resistors in the
ON setting.
c994
USS Status
Receive-status word of the USS interface. (refer to SIMADYN D Communication

Error Messages /3/ and CFC Online Help). This value is only of significance, if the
T400 is operated without basic drive, and parameterization is to be realized via the
serial interface 1 of the T400 in the USS protocol.
Type W
Chart 770,4
c995 ... c996

PZD1 USS ...
PZD2 USS
Received process data of the USS interface.
Type W
Chart 770,6
L997 ... L998

Q.PZD1 USS Slave ...
Q.PZD2 USS Slave
Sources for the two pieces of process data output at the USS interface.
Type I
Chart 770,6
126

6.3
TC
0000
Connectors
Chart
70,2
Path name
Constant.FALSE.Q
Significance
Fixed value, logical 0
0001
70,2
Constant.TRUE.Q
Fixed value, logical 1
0010
510,3
input_CU.I5020.Q
System error
0013
530,8
Ctrl_Error.ST3895.Q
No fault
0014
530,8
Ctrl_Error.ST3890.Q
Fault
0015
530,6
Ctrl_Error.F4985.Q
Alarm
0040
380,2
RangeCheck.Cam.Q1
Cam1_Q
0041
380,2
RangeCheck.Cam.QN1
Cam1_QN
0042
380,4
RangeCheck.Cam.Q2
Cam2_Q
0043
380,4
RangeCheck.Cam.QN2
Cam2_QN
0044
380,6
RangeCheck.Cam.Q3
Cam3_Q
0045
380,6
RangeCheck.Cam.QN3
Cam3_QN
0046
380,8
RangeCheck.Cam.Q4
Cam4_Q
0047
380,8
RangeCheck.Cam.QN4
Cam4_QN
0048
380,8
RangeCheck.Cam.Q
Cam group output; COR function for cam1 ... cam4
0049
380,8
RangeCheck.Cam.QN
Cam group inverted
0068
780,5
Peer.Receive.QTS
Peer receive, initialized
0069
780,5
Peer.Inv_Empfang.Q
Peer receive, not initialized
0070
780,5
Peer.Transmit.QTS
Peer send, initialized
0071
780,5
Peer.Inv_Senden.Q
Peer send, not initialized
0078
780,7
Peer.Peer_Timeout.Q
Peer timeout
0079
780,7
Peer.Peer_inv_Timeout.Q
Peer no timeout
0090
50,8
inpAbsolut.enable_TR.QE
Enable TR absolute value encoder
0091
50,8
inpAbsolut.SSI_local.QE
Enable T400 absolute value encoder
0092
50,8
inpAbsolut.SSI_CU_enab.QE
Enable CU absolute value encoder
0093
50,8
inpAbsolut.ModeAbsolut.Q
Enable absolute value encoder
0094
480,8
RangeCheck.SpeedVgl.QU
Shear speed > material speed
0095
480,8
RangeCheck.SpeedVgl.QM
Shear speed = material speed
0096
480,8
RangeCheck.SpeedVgl.QL
Shear speed < material speed
0103
480,4
Ctrl_Error.F4350.QU
Overspeed, positive
0104
480,4
Ctrl_Error.F4350.QL
Overspeed, negative
0107
490,4
Ctrl_Error.F4400.QM
n_act < block limit
0109
490,5
Ctrl_Error.F4440.QL
Torque < block torque
0110
490,5
Ctrl_Error.F4420.QL
| n_set | < n_block
0111
490,5
Ctrl_Error.F4420.QU
| n_set | > n_block
0112
490,5
Ctrl_Error.F4440.QU
Torque > block torque
0116
490,7
Ctrl_Error.F4460.Q
Knife is blocked
0117
500,5
Ctrl_Error.T1302.Q
Configuring error, pulse encoder
0120
410,2
Constant.Parameter_Bin.Q1
Linear mode
0121
500,5
Ctrl_Error.F4571.QL
Speed deviation not too high
0122
500,5
Ctrl_Error.F4571.QU
Speed deviation too high
0125
500,7
Ctrl_Error.F4580.Q
Speed deviation, error
0137
210,7
PosControl.PosControl.QU
Position controller at its maximum
0138
210,7
PosControl.PosControl.QL
Position controller at its minimum
0145
165,8
inpAbsolut.TR3250.Q
TR encoder, load request
0146
165,3
inpAbsolut.TR3200.QN
TR encoder, not read-in
0147
165,3
inpAbsolut.TR3200.Q
TR encoder, read-in
0148
165,8
inpAbsolut.TR3400.Q
TR load input
0149
165,8
inpAbsolut.TR3350.Q
TR loading active
0150
165,8
inpAbsolut.TR3350.QN
TR loading not active
0151
165,8
inpAbsolut.TR3260.QP
TR reset knife position
0154
165,6
inpAbsolut.TR3520.Q
TR starting error
0155
165,5
inpAbsolut.TR3610.Q
TR timeout
0156
165,6
inpAbsolut.TR3570.Q
TR zero frequency

127

TC
Chart
0157
165,7
inpAbsolut.TR3690.Q
TR error
0168
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.QCR
FGEN in the cutting range
0169
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.QFR
FGEN in the format range
0170
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.QHL
Hardlock missing
0171
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.QF
FGEN error
0172
200,4
PosControl.P1010.Q
Enable format controller
0178
150,8
inpAbsolut.SSI_loc_err.Q
AENC error
0179
150,8
inpAbsolut.AENC_OK.Q
AENC OK (no error)
0200
220,3
Format.EnableFctrl.QP
Calculate format controller (pos. edge of edge detection)
0201
220,3
Format.EnableFctrl.QN
negative edge of edge detection
0207
180,5
Inc_Encoder.I1205.Q
End of material strip for end cut
0208
180,7
Inc_Encoder.I1210.Q
Set reference
0218
350,3
RangeCheck.Cut_Range.QU
Range1 exceeded
0219
350,3
RangeCheck.Cut_Range.QL
Range1 fallen below
0227
350,4
RangeCheck.KnifeRange.QU
Range3 exceeded
0228
350,4
RangeCheck.KnifeRange.QL
Range3 fallen below
0232
350,8
RangeCheck.Ref_Range.QU
Range2 exceeded
0233
350,8
RangeCheck.Ref_Range.QL
Range2 fallen below
0234
350,4
RangeCheck.PosOffRang.Q
Out of range3
0236
430,3
RangeCheck.OptRSFF.Q
RSFF1_Q
0237
430,3
RangeCheck.OptRSFF.QN
RSFF1_QN
0241
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q1
BinInput 1
0242
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q2
BinInput 2
0243
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q3
BinInput 3
0244
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q4
BinInput 4
0245
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q5
BinInput 5
0246
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q6
BinInput 6
0247
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q7
BinInput 7
0248
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q8
BinInput 8
0249
110,8
input_T400.BQ3000.Q7
Coarse pulse 1
0250
110,8
Coarse pulse 2
0251
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q9
BinInput 1 inverted
0252
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q10
BinInput 2 inv
0253
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q11
BinInput 3 inv
0254
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q12
BinInput 4 inv
0255
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q13
BinInput 5 inv
0256
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q14
BinInput 6 inv
0257
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q15
BinInput 7 inv
0258
110,4
input_T400.BIN.Q16
BinInput 8 inv
0259
110,8
input_T400.Pin84_invers.Q
Coarse pulse 1 inv.
0260
110,8
Coarse pulse 2 inv.
0261
100,4
Terminal 46
0262
100,4
Terminal 47
0263
100,8
Terminal 48
0264
100,8
Terminal 49
0265
100,4
Terminal 46 inv.
0266
100,4
Terminal 47 inv.
0267
100,8
Terminal 48 inv.
0268
100,8
Terminal 49 inv.
0298
150,4
inpAbsolut.AbsPosValid.Q
Absolute position valid
0300
620,4
input_CU.CA3100_invers.Q1
CU status1.0 inv
0301
620,4
CU status1.1 inv
0302
620,4
CU status1.2 inv
0303
620,4
CU status1.3 inv
0304
620,4
CU status1.4 inv
0305
620,4
CU status1.5 inv
128
Path name
Significance


TC
Chart
0306
620,4
Path name
CU status1.6 inv
0307
620,4
CU status1.7 inv
0308
620,4
CU status1.8 inv
0309
620,4
CU status1.9 inv
0310
620,4
CU status1.10 inv
0311
620,4
CU status1.11 inv
0312
620,4
CU status1.12 inv
0313
620,4
CU status1.13 inv
0314
620,4
CU status1.14 inv
0315
620,4
CU status1.15 inv
0317
120,2
Inc_Encoder.I1160.Q
0320
620,8
CU status2.0 inv
0321
620,8
CU status2.1 inv
0322
620,8
CU status2.2 inv
0323
620,8
CU status2.3 inv
0324
620,8
CU status2.4 inv
0325
620,8
CU status2.5 inv
0326
620,8
CU status2.6 inv
0327
620,8
CU status2.7 inv
0328
620,8
CU status2.8 inv
0329
620,8
CU status2.9 inv
0330
620,8
CU status2.10 inv
0331
620,8
CU status2.11 inv
0332
620,8
CU status2.12 inv
0333
620,8
CU status2.13 inv
0334
620,8
CU status2.14 inv
0335
620,8
CU status2.15 inv
0336
170,7
Inc_Encoder.SaveAnd1.Q
Storing of store value 1 (AND gate)
0337
170,7
Inc_Encoder.SaveAnd2.Q
Storing of store value 2 (AND gate)
0340
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q1
CU status1.0
0341
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q2
CU status1.1
0342
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q3
CU status1.2
0343
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q4
CU status1.3
0344
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q5
CU status1.4
0345
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q6
CU status1.5
0346
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q7
CU status1.6
0347
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q8
CU status1.7
0348
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q9
CU status1.8
0349
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q10
CU status1.9
0350
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q11
CU status1.10
0351
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q12
CU status1.11
0352
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q13
CU status1.12
0353
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q14
CU status1.13
0354
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q15
CU status1.14
0355
620,4
input_CU.CA3100.Q16
CU status1.15
0360
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q1
CU status 2.0
0361
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q2
CU status 2.1
0362
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q3
CU status 2.2
0363
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q4
CU status 2.3
0364
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q5
CU status 2.4
0365
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q6
CU status 2.5
0366
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q7
CU status 2.6
0367
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q8
CU status 2.7
0368
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q9
CU status 2.8
0369
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q10
CU status 2.9
0370
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q11
CU status 2.10

Significance
129

TC
Chart
0371
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q12
Path name
CU status 2.11
Significance
0372
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q13
CU status 2.12
0373
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q14
CU status 2.13
0374
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q15
CU status 2.14
0375
620,8
input_CU.CA3200.Q16
CU status 2.15
0376
145,5
Inc_Encoder.RefposControl.CUT
Cuttings pulse for manual cutting
0377
145,5
Inc_Encoder.RefposControl.CPR
Pulse correct reference position
0378
145,5
Inc_Encoder.RefposControl.SPR
Pulse to set reference position
0379
145,5
Inc_Encoder.RefposControl.SPS
Actual setpoint for the shear position is the starting position
0380
145,5
Inc_Encoder.RefposControl.CSP
Pulse at the beginning of the manual cutting pulse
0410
120,6
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.QFC
Encoder error1
0412
120,7
Inc_Encoder.I1100.SN
Knife speed, negative
0413
120,8
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.SS
Position synchronized
0414
120,7
Inc_Encoder.not_SS_Geber1.Q
Position not synchronized
0415
120,8
Inc_Encoder.I1450.Q
Synch. position 32 ms pulse
0416
120,8
Inc_Encoder.CBT335.Q
Synch. position 100 ms pulse
0417
120,7
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.QPM
Maximum position exceeded
0418
120,7
Inc_Encoder.SyncOR.Q
Knife has synchronized or violated the max. position
0419
120,7
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.SYP
Synchronizing pulse, encoder1 (also w/o enable at SP)
0420
130,8
Inc_Encoder.LongPuls.Q
Long pulse (pulse extension for synchronizing pulses)
0424
130,2
Inc_Encoder.RefKorrAND.Q
Reference position correction pulse
0431
130,5
Inc_Encoder.MATERIAL.SYP
Synchronizing pulse, encoder2 (also w/o enable at SP)
0432
130,5
Inc_Encoder.MATERIAL.SS
Position2 with synchronizing pulse set
0433
130,6
Inc_Encoder.MATERIAL.QFC
Encoder error2
0434
130,6
Inc_Encoder.MatSyncPuls.Q
Synchronizing pulse2 extended to 32 ms
0435
130,8
Inc_Encoder.VZ_VRef.QU
Material velocity > zero
0436
130,8
Inc_Encoder.VZ_VRef.QE
Material velocity = zero
0437
130,8
Inc_Encoder.VZ_VRef.QL
Material velocity < zero
0442
135,7
Ctrl_Error.F4600.QL
Reference error
0443
135,7
Ctrl_Error.F4610.QP
Reference error pulse
0448
135,3
Inc_Encoder.FirstMark.Q
Mark set (the first pass mark was detected)
0449
135,3
Inc_Encoder.FirstMark.QN
Mark not set (wait for the first pass mark)
0453
330,5
RangeCheck.I1410.Q
In the synchronous range
0454
330,5
RangeCheck.I1420.Q
In the format range
0455
330,7
RangeCheck.SynchrANDcut.Q
Cutting / synchronous
0456
330,7
RangeCheck.CutSynchron.Q
Enable cutting (in respect to speed and position)
0459
330,3
RangeCheck.I3100.QU
n_knife > 0
0460
330,3
RangeCheck.I3100.QM
Knife stationary
0464
330,8
RangeCheck.I3120.QM
Knife in the change position
0469
135,8
Inc_Encoder.MarkCounter.Q0
Pass mark counter equal to zero
0470
135,8
Inc_Encoder.MarkCounter.QU
Pass mark counter at its upper limit
0471
135,8
Inc_Encoder.MarkCounter.QL
Pass mark counter at its lower limit
0490
330,8
PosControl.Positionierung.QF
Knife in the change position
0499
230,5
PosControl.Positionierung.QP
PosRG; positioning being executed
0500
270,8
Ctrl_STW_Prio.ShearSTW1_int.Q1
SCTW1.0
0501
270,8
SCTW1.1
0502
270,8
SCTW1.2
0503
270,8
SCTW1.3
0504
270,8
SCTW1.4
0505
270,8
SCTW1.5
0506
270,8
SCTW1.6
0507
270,8
SCTW1.7
0508
270,8
SCTW1.8
0509
270,8
SCTW1.9
0510
270,8
SCTW1.10
0511
270,8
SCTW1.11
130


TC
Chart
0512
270,8
Path name
SCTW1.12
Significance
0513
270,8
SCTW1.13
0514
270,8
SCTW1.14
0515
270,8
SCTW1.15
0518
270,3
Ctrl_STW_Prio.Hand_Auto.Q
Manual operation
0519
270,6
Ctrl_STW_Prio.Simulate.Q
Simulation mode
0520
280,8
SCTW2.0
0521
280,8
SCTW2.1
0522
280,8
SCTW2.2
0523
280,8
SCTW2.3
0524
280,8
SCTW2.4
0525
280,8
SCTW2.5
0526
280,8
SCTW2.6
0527
280,8
SCTW2.7
0528
280,8
SCTW2.8
0529
280,8
SCTW2.9
0530
280,8
SCTW2.10
0531
280,8
SCTW2.11
0532
280,8
SCTW2.12
0533
280,8
SCTW2.13
0534
280,8
SCTW2.14
0535
280,8
SCTW2.15
0536
260,7
Speed.Vlokal_Zero.QM
Speed_local = 0
0537
260,7
Speed.Vlokal_not0.Q
Speed_local <> 0
0543
430,8
Free_FBs.Not3.Q
Not3_Q; output negator (free block)
0544
430,8
Free_FBs.Not4.Q
0548
240,8
Torque.M_gt_max.Q
M_set > M_max
0549
240,4
Torque.MC1020.Q
Cutting torque enable
0554
520,3
Enable.DelayCut.Q
Cutting pulse, extended to 32 ms
0555
320,3
Ctrl_STW_Prio.LGT_ST.Q
Material detection (light barrier OR control bit)
0560
300,2
Op_Modes.AND_Stop.Q
Output AND logic gate to exit cutting operation
0561
300,5
Op_Modes.CP3130.Q
Request continuous cut, cutting program
0562
300,5
Op_Modes.CP3300.Q0
End of cut program 1
0563
300,5
Op_Modes.CP3410.Q
Last cut, special sample
0564
300,5
Ctrl_STW_Prio.OR_Anford_cont.Q
Request continuous cutting
0565
300,6
Op_Modes.CN3500.Q
Program continuous cutting
0566
300,6
Op_Modes.CN3500.QN
No continuous cutting
0567
300,6
Op_Modes.FM3210.Q
Continuous cutting with sheet length
0568
310,6
Op_Modes.SP3500.Q
Program, single cut
0569
310,6
Op_Modes.SP3500.QN
No single cut
0570
310,6
Op_Modes.SG3500.Q
Program, sample cut
0571
310,6
Op_Modes.SG3500.QN
No sample cut
0572
310,6
Op_Modes.FM3200.Q
Sample with sheet length
0573
320,7
Op_Modes.TL3500.Q
Program, end cut
0574
320,7
Op_Modes.TL3500.QN
No end cut
0575
300,7
Op_Modes.FM3250.Q
Special length selected
0576
320,4
Enable.PR_M0.Q
Cutting operation active
0577
320,4
Enable.PR_MN.Q
No cutting operation
0579
520,6
Enable.CUT.Q
Cutting pulse for active cutting operation
0580
320,4
Enable.Edge_Cutmode.QP
Start of cutting operation
0581
320,4
Enable.Edge_Cutmode.QN
End of cutting operation
0584
530,6
Ctrl_Error.CA3130.Q
Acknowledge
0590
210,3
PosControl.R3002.Q
Approach start position OR knife change position
0591
290,6
Ctrl_STW_Prio.LOC_RQ.Q
Request local mode 1
0592
290,6
Ctrl_STW_Prio.MODE.Q2
Operating mode, calibrate
0593
290,6
Operating mode, jogging 1

131

TC
Chart
0594
290,6
Path name
Operating mode, jogging 2
Significance
0595
290,7
Operating mode, approach starting position
0596
290,7
Operating mode, knife change position.
0597
290,7
Ctrl_STW_Prio.NOTMOD.Q
No local operation requested
0598
290,7
Ctrl_STW_Prio.ReqLocalMode.Q
Local operation requested
0599
290,8
Ctrl_STW_Prio.CB3160.Q
Operating mode, local operation 2
0600
290,8
Ctrl_STW_Prio.Not_BA_Lokal.Q
Not operating mode, local operation 2
0601
290,7
Ctrl_STW_Prio.MOD_C.Q3
Setting pulse, continuous cut
0602
290,7
Setting pulse, sample cut
0603
290,7
Setting pulse, single cut
0604
290,7
Select end cut
0608
190,6
Format.Set_FMT_Limit.Q
Dynamic format setpoint limitation active
0609
810,2
StateMachine.EIN_Input.Q
Status of the ON signal for test operation
0610
810,7
StateMachine.STW_Bits.Q1
Bit0 of the control word 1 of test bit operation
0611
810,7
0612
810,7
0613
810,7
0614
810,7
0615
810,7
0616
810,7
0617
810,7
0618
810,7
0619
810,7
0620
810,7
0621
810,7
0622
810,7
0623
810,7
0624
810,7
0625
810,7
0626
810,2
StateMachine.EIN_puls.QP
Pulse for a positive edge at connector 0609
0627
810,2
StateMachine.EIN_puls.QN
Pulse for a negative edge at connector 0609
0628
810,4
StateMachine.Startpos.Q
Output AND logic gate; refer to Chart 810
0629
810,5
StateMachine.Cut.Q
Output logic for the test mode
0630
810,5
StateMachine.Cut.QN
0629 inverted
0631
425,4
IncEncoder.AND3.Q
Output of the 3 free AND logic gate
0632
810,2
StateMachine.Eichen.Q
Enable referencing for test operation
0633
425,4
IncEncoder.AND4.Q
Output of the 4 free AND logic gate
rd
th
0635
810,5
StateMachine.WR_EIN.Q
Enable change ON for test operation
0636
810,4
StateMachine.WR_EIN.QN
Enable change ON inverse for test operation
0640
340,4
RangeCheck.ACALC.QU
Position > calculation position
0641
340,4
RangeCheck.ACALC.QL
Position < calculation position
0644
340,4
RangeCheck.SISTR.QM
In the starting position
0645
430,5
Free_FBs.Edge2.QP
Edge2_Q
0646
430,5
Free_FBs.Edge2.QP
Edge2_QN
0647
340,7
RangeCheck.SISTRT.Q
Knife is in the starting position
0648
340,4
RangeCheck.CALC.QN
Position fall below calc. Pos.
0649
340,4
RangeCheck.CALC.QP
Calculated position reached
0660
360,5
Enable.CD3720.Q
0661
360,5
Enable.WR_not_Ready.Q
Drive converter not ready
0662
360,5
Enable.CD3700.Q
Enable inverter
0663
360,5
Enable.CD3705.Q
No inverter enable
0664
360,6
Enable.CD3740.Q
Enable setpoint
0665
360,6
Enable.NoSetpoint.Q
No setpoint enable
0666
360,7
Enable.CD3750.Q
Controller enable
0667
360,7
Enable.CD3760.Q
No controller enable
0670
370,5
Enable.inv_PC_enable.Q
Position controller not enabled
132


TC
Chart
0671
370,5
Enable.CD3800.Q
Path name
Significance
0676
370,4
Format.CD3370.Q
Open brake
0680
370,4
Format.CD3390.Q
Enable brake control
0681
480,7
Ctrl_Error.F4300.QL
Knife position, underflow
0682
480,7
Ctrl_Error.F4320.QP
Knife position, underflow pulse
0683
480,7
Ctrl_Error.F4500.QU
Knife position, overflow
0684
480,7
Ctrl_Error.F4520.QP
Knife position, overflow pulse
0687
430,4
Free binary connector
0688
430,4
Free binary connector
0689
425,2
Free_FBs.AND5.Q
Output 5 AND gate
0691
425,4
Free_FBs.AND6.Q
Output 6 AND gate
0693
425,6
Free_FBs.AND7.Q
Output 7 AND gate
0694
470,3
Ctrl_Error.F4110.Q
CB error
0695
430,5
Free_FBs.RS_FF4.Q
RSFF4_Q
0696
430,5
Free_FBs.RS_FF4.QN
RSFF4_QN
0699
470,3
Ctrl_Error.F4130.Q
CU error
th
th
th
0700
425,4
Free_FBs.AND1.Q
AND1_Q
0701
340,4
RangeCheck.Xref_Startlen.QU
Ref. Pos. > start length
0702
340,4
RangeCheck.Xref_Startlen.QL
Fef. Pos. < start length
0703
425,4
Free_FBs.AND2.Q
AND2_Q
0704
470,8
Ctrl_Error.F4230.Q
User error 1
0705
480,8
Ctrl_Error.F4280.Q
User error 2
0708
430,6
Free_FBs.Edge1.QN
Output positive edge detected (free block)
0709
470,6
Free_FBs.Edge1.QP
Output negative edge detected (free block)
0710
425,6
Free_FBs.OR1.Q
OR1_Q
0713
425,6
Free_FBs.OR2.Q
OR2_Q
0720
435,8
Free_FBs.RampGen.QU
Ramp-function generator at the upper limit value
0721
435,8
Free_FBs.RampGen.QL
Ramp-function generator at the lower limit value
0722
435,6
Free_FBs.RampGen.QE
Ramp Y=X
0728
436,2
Free_FBs.OnDelay1.Q
OnDelay1_Q; switch-in delayed signal
0730
436,2
OffDelay1_Q; switch-out delayed signal
0732
430,8
Free_FBs.Not1.Q
0733
430,8
Free_FBs.Not2.Q
0734
430,3
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.Q
RSFF2_Q; Q output of an RS flip-flop
0735
430,3
Free_FBs.RS_FF1.QN
RSFF2_QN; QN output of an RS flip-flop
0736
430,3
Free_FBs.RS_FF3.Q
RSFF3_Q; Q output of an RS flip-flop
0737
430,3
Free_FBs.RS_FF3.QN
RSFF3_QN; QN output of an RS flip-flop
0743
435,7
Free_FBs.Compare.QE
Compare X = Y (output, free block)
0744
435,7
Free_FBs.Compare.QU
Compare X > Y
0745
435,7
Free_FBs.Compare.QL
Compare X < Y
0746
430,3
Limiter at its upper limit (free block)
0747
430,3
Free_FBs.LimitOR.Q
Limiter at its limit (free block)
0748
430,3
Limiter at its lower limit
0749
435,3
Free_FBs.Comp2.QU
Compare2 X > Y (output, comparator with hysteresis)
0750
435,3
Free_FBs.Comp2.QM
Compare2 X = Y (input in range)
0751
435,3
Free_FBs.Comp2.QL
Compare2 X < Y
0758
436,2
Off Delay2_Q
0760
440,3
Word to bit converter, bit 0
0761
440,3
0762
440,3
0763
440,3
0764
440,3
0765
440,3
0766
440,3
0767
440,3
0768
440,3

133

TC
Chart
0769
440,3
0770
440,3
0771
440,3
0772
440,3
0773
440,3
0774
440,3
0775
440,3
0780
810,7
StateMachine.SSTW_Bits.Q1
Bit0 of the shears control word 1 of the test operation
0781
810,7
0782
810,7
0783
810,7
0784
810,7
0785
810,7
0786
810,7
0787
810,7
0788
810,7
0789
810,7
0790
810,7
0791
810,7
0792
810,7
0793
810,7
0794
810,7
0795
810,7
0800
680,4
input_CB.INV_SER1.Q1
CB CTW1.0 inv
0801
680,4
CB CTW1.1 inv
0802
680,4
CB CTW1.2 inv
0803
680,4
CB CTW1.3 inv
0804
680,4
CB CTW1.4 inv
0805
680,4
CB CTW1.5 inv
0806
680,4
CB CTW1.6 inv
0807
680,4
CB CTW1.7 inv
0808
680,4
CB CTW1.8 inv
0809
680,4
CB CTW1.9 inv
0810
680,4
CB CTW1.10 inv
0811
680,4
CB CTW1.11 inv
0812
680,4
CB CTW1.12 inv
0813
680,4
CB CTW1.13 inv
0814
680,4
CB CTW1.14 inv
0815
680,4
CB CTW1.15 inv
0817
435,7
Free integrator at its upper limit
0818
435,7
Free integrator at its lower limit
0820
680,8
input_CB.INV_SHEAR_CB.Q1
CB CTW2.0 inv
0821
680,8
CB CTW2.1 inv
0822
680,8
CB CTW2.2 inv
0823
680,8
CB CTW2.3 inv
0824
680,8
CB CTW2.4 inv
0825
680,8
CB CTW2.5 inv
0826
680,8
CB CTW2.6 inv
0827
680,8
CB CTW2.7 inv
0828
680,8
CB CTW2.8 inv
0829
680,8
CB CTW2.9 inv
0830
680,8
CB CTW2.10 inv
0831
680,8
CB CTW2.11 inv
0832
680,8
CB CTW2.12 inv
0833
680,8
CB CTW2.13 inv
0834
680,8
CB CTW2.14 inv
134
Path name
Significance


TC
Chart
0835
680,8
Path name
CB CTW2.15 inv
Significance
0836
425,3
Free_FBs.andOR3.Q
Output 3 AND-OR logic
0837
425,2
Free_FBs.ANDor3.Q
AND Output 3 AND-OR logic
0840
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q1
CB control word1, bit 0
0841
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q2
0842
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q3
0843
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q4
0844
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q5
0845
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q6
0846
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q7
0847
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q8
0848
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q9
0849
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q10
0850
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q11
0851
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q12
0852
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q13
0853
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q14
0854
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q15
0855
680,4
input_CB.SER1.Q16
0860
680,8
input_CB.SHEAR_CB.Q1
CB SCTW bit 0
0861
680,8
CB SCTW bit 1
0862
680,8
CB SCTW bit 2
0863
680,8
CB SCTW bit 3
0864
680,8
CB SCTW bit 4
0865
680,8
CB SCTW bit 5
0866
680,8
CB SCTW bit 6
0867
680,8
CB SCTW bit 7
0868
680,8
CB SCTW bit 8
0869
680,8
CB SCTW bit 9
0870
680,8
CB SCTW bit 10
0871
680,8
CB SCTW bit 11
0872
680,8
CB SCTW bit 12
0873
680,8
CB SCTW bit 13
0874
680,8
CB SCTW bit 14
0875
680,8
CB SCTW bit 15
0876
436,5
Free_FBs.Impuls1.Q
Single Shot_1
0878
436,5
Free_FBs.Impuls2.Q
Single Shot_2
0896
436,5
Free_FBs.Impuls3.Q
Single Shot_3
0898
436,2
Free_FBs.OnDelay2.Q
On Delay2_Q
0918
660,7
input_CB.no_Timeout_CB.Q
No timeout CB
0919
660,4
output.CB_TxD_Error.Q
0920
660,4
input_CB.CB_not_init.Q
0921
660,4
input_CB.R3300.QTS
0922
660,4
output.SD3100.QTS
CB send initialized
0924
660,7
input_CB.CB_Timout_OR.Q
Timeout CB
0933
421,3
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_5.Q
Logic5_Q
0934
421,3
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_5.QN
Logic5_QN
0935
421,3
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_5.QE
Logic5_QE
0936
421,3
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_5.QEN
Logic5_QEN
0941
421,6
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_6.Q
Logic6_Q
0942
421,6
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_6.QN
Logic6_QN
0943
421,6
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_6.QE
Logic6_QE
0944
421,6
Ctrl_Linear.Logik_6.QEN
Logic6_QEN
0971
600,5
input_CU.R1000.QTS
rd
rd
0972
600,5
output.SD1200.QTS
CU send initialized
0973
600,5
input_CU.R1000.QT
CU timeout

135

TC
Chart
0974
600,5
Path name
input_CU.DRIVE.BS
Significance
CU operational
0976
600,5
input_CU.Resync_Delay.Q
CU operation delayed
0977
600,4
input_CU.I5060.Q
Resynchronization pulses
0978
510,6
Ctrl_State.ST5000.Q
Fan control
0981
600,5
input_CU.CU_not_CRV.Q
0982
600,5
output.CU_inv_init.Q
0983
600,5
input_CU.CU_inv_Timeout.Q
No CU timeout
0984
600,5
input_CU.CU_inv_Betrieb.Q
CU not operational
1257
415,4
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_up.QEN
Logic1_QEN
1258
415,4
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_up.QE
Logic1_QE
1259
415,4
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_up.Q
Logic1_Q
1260
415,4
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_up.QN
Logic1_QN
1277
415,8
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_down.QEN
Logic2_QEN
1278
415,8
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_down.QE
Logic2_QE
1279
415,8
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_down.Q
Logic2_Q
1280
415,8
Ctrl_Linear.Knife_down.QN
Logic2_QN
1300
170,3
Inc_Encoder.Delay_AbsPosOK.Q
Set AbsPos valid
1306
170,7
Inc_Encoder.I1150.Q
Set knife position
1307
170,7
Inc_Encoder.CL1960.Q
Set to coarse ref. 32 ms
1308
170,7
Inc_Encoder.CL1990.QP
Set to coarse reference
1309
170,5
Inc_Encoder.CL3060.QN
Knife is not calibrated
1310
170,5
Inc_Encoder.CL3060.Q
Knife is calibrated
1311
170,3
Inc_Encoder.CL3045.QP
Calibration, starting pulse
1312
170,3
Inc_Encoder.CL3045.QN
Calibration, end pulse
1313
170,5
Inc_Encoder.Edge_Calibr.QP
Pulse when shear status changes to calibrated
1314
170,5
Inc_Encoder.Edge_Calibr.QN
Pulse when shear status changes to not calibrated
1321
425,8
Free_FBs.OR4.Q
Output 4 free OR gate
1323
425,8
Free_FBs.OR5.Q
Output 5 free OR gate
1344
410,5
Ctrl_Linear.enPosition.QEN
Starting pulse, synchronous operation
1345
410,5
Ctrl_Linear.enPosition.QE
Starting pulse, positioning operation
1346
410,5
Ctrl_Linear.enPosition.QN
Mode, synchronous operation
th
th
1347
410,5
Ctrl_Linear.enPosition.Q
Mode, positioning
1348
410,7
Ctrl_Linear.PosError.Q
Error for mode changeover
1360
140,8
Inc_Encoder.EnableSP_Ref.Q
Enable pass mark synchronization
1363
140,6
Inc_Encoder.FirstMarkRef.Q
Material position in the synchronizing range
1591
350,8
Free_FBs.Compare3.QU
Output, comparator 3: X > Y
1592
350,8
Free_FBs.Compare3.QM
Output, comparator 3: X in range
1593
350,8
Free_FBs.Compare3.QL
Output, comparator 3: X < Y
1595
140,3
Free_FBs.Compare4.QU
Output, comparator 4: X > Y
1596
140,4
Free_FBs.Compare4.QM
Output, comparator 4: X in range
1597
140,3
Free_FBs.Compare4.QL
Output, comparator 4: X < Y
1806
425,6
Free_FBs.OR3.Q
Output, 3 free OR logic gate
1810
440,3
FreeWord2_0 (outputs, word->binary converter)
1811
440,3
1812
440,3
1813
440,3
1814
440,3
1815
440,3
1816
440,3
1817
440,3
1818
440,3
1819
440,3
1820
440,3
1821
440,3
1822
440,3
1823
440,3
136
rd


TC
Chart
1824
440,3
Path name
Significance
1825
440,3
1830
425,3
Free_FBs.andOR1.Q
Output, 1 AND-OR logic
1831
425,2
Free_FBs.ANDor1.Q
AND Output, 1 AND-OR logic
st
st
nd
1833
425,3
Free_FBs.andOR2.Q
Output, 2 AND-OR logic
1834
425,2
Free_FBs.ANDor2.Q
AND Output, 2
1860
420,4
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_3.Q
Output Q of the 3 parameterizable logic
1861
420,4
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_3.QN
Output QN of the 3 parameterizable logic
nd
AND-OR logic
rd
rd
rd
1862
420,4
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_3.QE
Output QE of the 3 parameterizable logic
1863
420,4
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_3.QEN
Output QEN of the 3 parameterizable logic
rd
th
1880
420,8
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_4.Q
Output Q of the 4 parameterizable logic
1881
420,8
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_4.QN
Output QN of the 4 parameterizable logic
th
th
1882
420,8
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_4.QE
Output QE of the 4 parameterizable logic
1883
420,8
Ctrl_Linear.Logic_4.QEN
Output QEN of the 4 parameterizable logic
2000
70,2
Constant.Konst_W.Y1
0 (word)
2001
70,2
Constant.Konst_W.Y2
1 (word)
2002
70,2
Constant.SPS450_ID.Y3
2 (word)
2003
70,2
3 (word)
2004
70,2
4 (word)
2005
70,2
5 (word)
2006
70,2
Constant.Konst_W.Y3
Constant 16#FFFF; corresponds to -1
2010
510,2
input_CU.I5010.QS
System status word
2012
630,4
Ctrl_State.CE3200.QS
2013
630,8
Ctrl_State.CE3500.QS
2014
530,8
Ctrl_Error.F4960.Y
Error word
2015
530,6
Ctrl_Error.F4985.QS
Alarm word
2016
510,7
Ctrl_State.ST3900.QS
Control status
2017
520,5
Ctrl_State.CBT340.QS
Shears status
2020
110,7
input_T400.BI1030.QS
Status binary inputs (inverted and not inverted)
2022
520,8
Enable.CUT_count.Y
Cut counter
2061
790,3
Peer.RecPZD1.YWL
PZD1 receive for peer-to-peer
2062
790,3
Peer.RecPZD1.YWH
2063
790,3
Peer.RecPZD2.YWL
2064
790,3
Peer.RecPZD2.YWH
2065
790,3
Peer.RecPZD3.Y
2155
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.YFC
Error code of the format generator
2301
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y1
PZD1 from CU
2302
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y2
PZD2 from CU
2303
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y3
PZD3 from CU
2304
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y4
PZD4 from CU
2305
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y5
PZD5 from CU
2306
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y6
PZD6 from CU
2307
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y7
PZD7 from CU
2308
610,3
input_CU.R1020.Y8
PZD8 from CU
2309
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y1
PZD9 from CU
2310
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y2
PZD10 from CU
2311
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y3
PZD11 from CU
2312
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y4
PZD12 from CU
2313
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y5
PZD13 from CU
2314
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y6
PZD14 from CU
2315
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y7
PZD15 from CU
2316
610,3
input_CU.R1021.Y8
PZD16 from CU
2357
620,2
input_CU.CTW_STATES.Y1
CU status word 1
2359
620,6
CU status word 2
2400
120,4
Constant.PulseMesser.Y
Pulse number 1 (knife encoder)
2412
120,6
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.YFC
Error code, knife position sensing

th
137

TC
Chart
2420
130,2
Path name
Constant.PulseRef.Y
Significance
Pulses, encoder 2
2434
130,6
Inc_Encoder.MATERIAL.YFC
Error code 2
2465
135,8
Inc_Encoder.MarkCounter.Y
Pass mark number
2536
270,6
Ctrl_STW_Prio.Simul_STW1.Y
2544
280,6
Ctrl_STW_Prio.Simul_STW2.Y
2586
135,3
Inc_Encoder.MarkLimit.Y
Mark limit (limit value for the pass mark counter)
2588
135,3
Inc_Encoder.Marken_I16.Y
Mark number 1 (pass mark number calculated from the format)
2605
440,5
Free_FBs.DW_W1.YWH
DW_W1 high (output, double word->word converter)
2606
440,5
Free_FBs.DW_W1.YWL
DW_W1 low (output, double word->word converter)
2607
445,2
Free_FBs.ADDI_1.Y
ADDI_Y (output, integer adder 1)
2608
445,2
Free_FBs.SUBI_1.Y
SUBI_Y (output, integer subtractor 1)
2621
810,6
StateMachine.SW_STW1.Y
Control word1, test mode
2622
810,5
StateMachine.SSTW_Cut.Y
Shears control word 1, test mode
2623
810,5
StateMachine.SM_const..Y7
Shears control word 2, test mode
2647
440,5
Free_FBs.R_I1.Y
R_I1 (output, floating-point -> integer converter)
2666
70,6
Constant.Konst_W.Y4
Word, fixed value 1
2667
70,6
Constant.Konst_W.Y5
Word, fixed value 2
2668
70,6
Constant.Konst_W.Y6
Word, fixed value 3
2669
70,6
Constant.Konst_W.Y7
Word, fixed value 4
2670
70,6
Constant.Konst_W.Y8
Word, fixed value 5
2671
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y1
Integer, fixed value 1
2672
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y2
2673
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y3
2674
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y4
2675
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y5
2676
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y6
2677
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y7
2678
70,6
Constant.Konst_I.Y8
2766
440,8
Free_FBs.Float_N2.Y
Output float to N2 converter (free block)
2776
800,5
Constant.CW1_von_CB.Y
Test value 1 (for simulation, control word 1 from CB)
2781
640,6
output.Vsoll.Y
Setpoint 1 CU (N2)
2785
800,5
Constant.Scherensteuerw.Y
Test value 2 (for simulation, shears control word)
2787
640,6
output.M_soll.Y
Setpoint 2 CU (N2)
2789
640,4
output.Sollwert3_CU.Y
Setpoint 3 CU (N2)
2792
640,4
output.Sollwert4_CU.Y
Setpoint 4 CU (N2)
2795
640,4
output.Sollwert4_DW.YWH
Setpoint 5 high CU
2796
640,4
output.Sollwert4_DW.YWL
Setpoint 5 low CU
2801
670,3
input_CB.R3310_CB_virt.Y1
PZD1 from CB
2802
670,3
PZD2 from CB
2803
670,3
PZD3 from CB
2804
670,3
PZD4 from CB
2805
670,3
PZD5 from CB
2806
670,3
PZD6 from CB
2807
670,3
PZD7 from CB
2808
670,3
PZD8 from CB
2809
670,3
input_CB.CB_virt_Rec.Y1
PZD9 from CB
2810
670,3
input_CB.CB_virt_Rec.Y2
PZD10 from CB
2812
445,2
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.Y
DIVI_1 Y (output, integer divider)
2813
445,2
Free_FBs.DIVI_1.MOD
DIVI_1 Y (MOD) (modulo output, integer divider)
2814
445,2
Free_FBs.MULI_1.Y
MULI_1 Y (output, integer multiplier)
2826
700,3
output.Istwert1_CB.Y
Actual value 1 CB
2829
700,3
Actual value 2 CB
2832
700,3
Actual value 3 CB
2835
700,3
Actual value 4 CB
2838
700,4
output.Istwert5_CB_DW.YWH
Actual value 5 CB high word
2839
700,4
output.Istwert5_CB_DW.YWL
Actual value 5 CB low word
138


TC
Chart
2843
680,3
Path name
input_CU.STW1CU_sel.Y
Significance
CB CTW1 control word2 from the COMBOARD
2845
680,5
CB shearsCTW; shears control word from COMBOARD
2846
690,4
Status word 1 for COMBOARD
2847
690,8
Status word 2 for COMBOARD
2968
530,5
Ctrl_Error.F4900.QS
Error bits
2994
770,4
USS-Slave.USS_Receive.YTS
USS status
2995
770,7
USS-Slave.USS_PZD.Y1
PZD1 USS, receive
2996
770,7
USS-Slave.USS_PZD.Y2
PZD2 USS, receive
3000
70,2
Constant.Zahlen_Const.Y1
0.0
3001
70,2
1.0
3002
70,2
2.0
3003
70,2
PI
3004
70,2
2 PI
3005
70,2
PI / 2
3006
70,2
0.5
3007
70,2
-1.0
3020
265,5
Speed.FFACTS.Y
Factor, overspeed
3021
250,7
Speed.R1260.Y
n_set cut
3023
260,8
Speed.R1290.Y
Speed setpoint n_set
3025
240,7
Torque.M1420.Y
Reference (setpoint) torque
3026
240,4
Torque.MJ1150.Y
Accelerating torque
3027
240,4
Torque.MA1350.Y
Oscillating torque
3028
240,5
Torque.MC1030.Y
Cutting torque
Frictional torque
3029
460,7
Torque.FPosControl.Y
3038
380,2
RangeCheck.DX_CamPos.Y
Cam_dx
3040
380,2
RangeCheck.NFV_Knife_norm.Y
Speed norm for cams = f(knife position)

Speed norm for cams = f(norm. knife position)
3041
380,2
RangeCheck.NFV_Fsymech.Y
3042
380,2
RangeCheck.NFV_mm_s.Y
Speed norm for cams = f(reference position)
3043
380,2
RangeCheck.NFV_Fsymech.Y
Speed norm for cams = f(norm. reference position)
3050
80,2
Constant.UproFsymec.Y
Revolutions/Fsymech
3061
790,3
Peer.RecPZD1.YR
Peer: PZD2 and PZD3 as floating-point value
3063
790,3
Peer.RecPZD2.YR
Peer: PZD5 and PZD5 as floating-point value
3091
60,4
Constant.AngleConst.Y1
AX
3092
60,4
Constant.AngleConst.Y2
AY
3094
180, 7
Inc_Encoder.DX_Setval.Y
Setting value, pass mark
3095
60,4
Constant.LXLGTnorm.Y
Distance, light barrier normalized
3096
60,4
Constant.Norm_EntfernungS.Y
Distance, cut normalized
3097
60,4
Constant.NormSchopflaeng.Y
Crop length, normalized
3098
60,4
Constant.LF_norm.Y
Long Format, normalized
3099
60,4
Constant.LXLGnorm.Y
Light barrier + distance to the cut (normalized)
3100
60,4
Angular normalization
3101
60,2
Constant.KONST1.Y1
Fixed value AX
3102
60,2
Constant.KONST1.Y2
Fixed value AY
3103
60,7
Constant.KONST3.Y2
Fixed value AZ
3104
80,4
Constant.KONST2.Y1
V_reference
3105
60,6
Constant.KONST2.Y6
Fsymech
3106
60,3
Constant.KONST2.Y4
Distance, light barrier - knife
3107
60,3
Constant.KONST2.Y5
Distance to the cut
3108
60,7
Constant.COS_Epsilon.Y
Cosine epsilon
3109
60,4
Constant.KONST1.Y8
Knife change position
3110
60,2
Constant.KONST2.Y2
TopCut size
3111
60,2
Constant.KONST2.Y3
Long Format
3112
60,7
Constant.KONST1.Y4
Starting angle, M cut input
3113
60,7
Constant.KONST1.Y5
Final angle, M cut input
3114
60,7
Constant.RefNorm.Y
Normalization factor for the material position
3115
80,3
Constant.MessradKorr.Y
Circumference of the measuring wheel

139

TC
3116
Chart
80,3
Path name
Constant.KONST2.Y8
Significance
Gearbox factor, measuring wheel
3117
80,2
Constant.KONST3.Y1
Feed/revolution
3118
60,4
Constant.Norm_AX.Y
Angle, end of cut, normalized
3119
60,4
Constant.Norm_AY.Y
Angle, start of cut, normalized
3122
60,7
Constant.KONST3.Y7
Distance, material detetction to knife
3123
60,7
Constant.NormAbstdMat.Y
Distance, material detetction to knife (normalized)
3129
60,4
Constant.Norm_MWP.Y
Knife change position, normalized
3132
210,6
PosControl.PosControl.YE
System deviation, PC
3143
210,7
PosControl.PosControl.Y
Output, position controller
3144
210,8
PosControl.R1160.Y
Output, PC smoothed
3145
210,6
PosControl.PosControl.YI
Integral component, PC
3157
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.YDS
FGEN Xset
3158
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.YDV
FGEN Vset
3159
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.SIN
FGEN sin*sin
3160
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.FEL
Format, electrical
3161
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.PST
Starting position
3162
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.LST
Starting length
3163
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.YAR
AREF for AZ
3164
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.AM1
Acceleration, phase 1
3165
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.AM2
Acceleration, phase 2
3166
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.DG1
Diagnostics output 1
3167
200,8
PosControl.FormGen.DG2
Diagnostics output 2
3168
200,8
PosControl.StartLenKorr.Y
Start length + offset
3175
220,3
Format.P3140.Y
Next setpoint format
3180
150,7
inpAbsolut.Absolutgebe.YP
AENC position normalized
3181
150,7
inpAbsolut.Absolutgebe.YSP
AENC speed
3182
150,7
inpAbsolut.Absolutgebe.Y
AENC position with revolutions (multi-turn encoder)
3183
150,8
inpAbsolut.AbsNorm.Y
Position of the absolute value encoder, normalized
3184
220,7
Format.P1070.Y
Output, format controller
3185
220,3
Format.ErrAdd.Y
Cutting error
3192
265,6
Speed.R1050.Y
Supplementary angle, cutting curve
3195
60,5
Constant.AbstandInvers.Y
Distance, light barrier normalized, inverted
3196
220,3
Format.CutError.Y
Cutting error in [mm]
3197
200,2
PosControl.LIM_AREF.Y
Limited reference position (material position)
3203
180,7
Inc_Encoder.Dx_EnSync.Y
Position before the setting value (position value shortly before the
pass marks)
3204
180,7
Inc_Encoder.I1220.Y
Position setting value, reference
3205
180,4
Inc_Encoder.SL3050.Y
Distance, light barrier + format
3206
180,4
Inc_Encoder.SL3110.Y
Distance, light barrier - format
3209
180,7
Inc_Encoder.DX_Pass.MOD
Distance, pass mark modulo format setpoint

AI1 smoothed
3214
90,7
Input_T400.AE1_Filter.Y
3216
350,3
RangeCheck.Cut_Range.Y
Limited position after range1
3218
80,5
Constant.KONST3.Y4
Gearbox factor, knife drive
3219
90,7
input_T400.AE2_Filter.Y
AI2 smoothed
3221
350,5
RangeCheck.KnifeRange.Y
3223
70,8
Constant.NormFixLage1.Y
Fixed position 1 normalized
3224
70,8
3225
70,8
3226
70,8
3230
350,8
RangeCheck.Ref_Range.Y
3233
70,8
Constant.KONST4.Y3
Fixed position 1
3234
70,8
Constant.KONST4.Y4
Fixed position 2
3235
70,8
Constant.KONST4.Y5
Fixed position 3
3236
70,8
Constant.KONST4.Y6
Fixed position 4
3241
490,3
Ctrl_Error.F4410.Y
Blocking, | setpoint velocity |
3242
490,3
Ctrl_Error.F4430.Y
Blocking, absolute torque value
140


TC
Chart
Path name
Significance
3279
90,6
AI3 smoothed
3283
90,6
AI4 smoothed
3285
160,3
inpAbsolut.SSI_CU_dw_r.Y
Absolute position from the basic drive before conditioning
3287
90,6
AI5 smoothed
3290
150,4
inpAbsolut.SSI_offset.Y
Absolute offset
3291
150,4
inpAbsolut.SSI_CU_ofs.Y
Absolute position, corrected
3292
160,7
inpAbsolut.SSI_CU_vofs.Y
Absolute position 2 (without offset)
3311
170,4
Inc_Encoder.I1120.Y
Shear position set value for synchronization (zero pulse)
3313
170,7
Inc_Encoder.I1140.Y
Setting value, knife position
3317
170,4
Inc_Encoder.SV_Coarse.Y
Setting value, knife position; referencing with coarse pulse
3319
610,7
input_CU.Istwert1_CU.Y
Actual value1 from CU as real
3322
610,7
3325
610,7
3328
610,7
3334
610,7
input_CU.1.Y
Actual value DW1 from CU
3335
170,8
Inc_Encoder.StoreVal1.Y
3336
170,8
Inc_Encoder.StoreVal2.Y
2 value stored in non-volatile memory
3366
140,2
Constant.KONST1.Y6
Half pass mark synchronizing window width
3367
135,8
Inc_Encoder.RefPosModulo.Y
Reference position divided by the format setpoint
3368
135,8
Inc_Encoder.RefPosModulo.MOD
Reference position modulo divided by the format setpoint
3370
145,5
Inc_Encoder.RefposControl.COR
Correction value for the reference position
3400
80,6
Constant.n_Schere_Hz.Y
Reference frequency 1
3401
80,6
Constant.n_Schere.Y
Reference speed 1
3402
80,6
Constant.inv_NnennShear.Y
Reference speed 1 negated
3410
120,7
Inc_Encoder.I1100.Y
Absolute value, knife speed
3411
120,7
Inc_Encoder.I1360.Y
Knife speed, smoothed
3412
120,7
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.Y
Knife speed
3413
120,7
Inc_Encoder.KnifePos.Y
Knife position
3414
120,7
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.YP
Knife position, normalized
3415
120,7
Inc_Encoder.MESSER.YPS
Knife position at synchronization event (zero pulse)
3420
80,5
Constant.inv_NnennWeb.Y
Reference speed 2, negated
3421
80,5
Constant.n_Treiber.Y
Reference speed 2
3422
80,4
Constant.PR2RP_B4.Y
Reference pulses 2 material sensing before rounding-off (float)
3434
130,6
Inc_Encoder.MATERIAL.Y
Speed2
3435
130,6
Inc_Encoder.I1320.Y
Speed2 smoothed
st
value stored in non-volatile memory
nd
3436
130,5
Inc_Encoder.I1320.YP
Position 2 before offset correction
3437
135,5
Inc_Encoder.MarkenSynchron.Y
Position2
3438
135,5
Inc_Encoder.I1330.Y
Reference position
3440
130,6
Inc_Encoder.MATERIAL.YPS
Synchr. position
3441
135,5
Inc_Encoder.RefPosOffs.Y
Reference position minus offset
3442
135,5
Inc_Encoder.RefPosOffset.Y
Reference position offset
3445
135,5
Inc_Encoder.I2000.Y
Position, material in [mm]
3447
130,6
Inc_Encoder.P3050.Y
Format actual value
3473
230,7
PosControl.Positionierung.DIA
PosRG diagnostics
3474
230,7
PosControl.LageRegler.Y
PosRG Vset
3480
230,7
PosControl.PosRG_Vmax.Y
PosRG Vmax fixed value
3484
230,5
PosControl.Positionierung.YX
PosRG reference position
3485
230,5
PosControl.Positionierung.YV
PosRG setpoint velocity
3486
230,6
PosControl.PT1_Vpos.Y
PosRG_V_filt
3489
230,2
PosControl.LageRegler.YE
Position difference of the position controller
3490
450,5
PosControl.K3050.Y
Output of the KP characteristic
3491
450,6
Speed.CC1040.Y
Output, cutting curve
3492
460,6
Torque.FR1100.Y
Output, friction characteristic
3493
460,6
Torque.J1000.Y
Output, moment of inertia characteristic
3494
460,6
Torque.FrictionCurve.YP
Output derivation of the friction curve
3495
460,7
Torque.J1060.Y
Moment of inertia

141

TC
Chart
3496
460,6
Path name
Torque.InertiaCurve.YP
Significance
Output derivation of the inertia curve
3497
450,6
Speed.Cut_Curve.YP
Output derivation of the cutting curve
3498
230,7
PosControl.a_mal_J.Y
Torque setpoint output PosRG
3517
260,8
Speed.RampLokal.Y
Output ramp function for local speed
3518
260,3
Speed.neg_Tippen.Y
Negated speed setpoint for inching
3519
260,1
Constant.KONST3.Y5
Speed setpoint for inching (fixed value)
3533
260,6
Speed.R3150.Y
Velocity in the local mode
3558
240,3
Torque.MJ1000.Y
Differential of the speed setpoint
3559
240,3
Torque.MA1300.Y
Differential of the moment of inertia
3561
265,5
Speed.CC1150.Y
Cutting speed for speed reduction
3575
250,5
Speed.R3013.Y
Max. speed for cutting modes
3577
265,7
Speed.CC1205.Y
Vset from the cutting curve
3581
240,8
Torque.TQ3000.Y
Actual torque limit, pos.
3582
240,8
Torque.TQ3100.Y
Actual torque limit, neg.
3592
60,7
Constant.NormDxPM.Y
Distance between pass marks (normalized)
3593
60,7
Constant.KONST1.Y7
Distance between pass marks
3604
440,5
Free_FBs.I_R1.Y
I_R1_Y (output, integer->floating-point converter)
3606
190,2
Constant.KONST3.Y8
Saw blade width
3608
190,6
Format.FMT_Limit2.Y
Actual minimum format
3613
190,4
Format.FM32b_norm.Y
Format DW
3615
445,6
Free_FBs.MUL3.Y
MUL_3 (output, multiplier 3)
3616
190,3
Format.FMT16_norm.Y
Format, word
3617
250,4
Speed.SQRT.Y
Square root function output
3618
190,5
Format.Q_FloatFormat.Y
Format, float
3619
250,4
Speed.SQRT_neg.Y
Output square root invers
3620
190,8
Format.Format_MUX.Y
Format request
3621
190,4
Constant.FixFormate.Y1
Fixformat 1
3622
190,5
Fixformat 2
3623
190,5
Fixformat 3
3624
190,5
Fixformat 4
3625
190,6
Fixformat 5
3629
190,8
Format.Format_norm.Y
Format setpoint
3630
220,7
Format.P1055.Y
Setpoint, format controller
3631
220,7
Format.AktFormat.Y
Actual Format setpoint [mm]
3649
60,7
Constant.NormRes1.Y
Reserve1 normalized
3650
70,3
Constant.Festwert1.Y1
Fixed value1
3651
70,3
Fixed value2
3652
70,3
Fixed value3
3653
70,3
Fixed value4
3654
70,3
Fixed value5
3655
70,3
Fixed value6
3656
70,3
Fixed value7
3657
70,3
Fixed value8
3658
70,3
Fixed value9
3659
70,3
Fixed value10
3660
70,3
Fixed value11
3661
70,3
Fixed value12
3662
70,3
Fixed value13
3663
70,3
Fixed value14
3664
70,3
Fixed value15
3665
70,3
Fixed value16
3685
430,2
Constant.KONST4.Y7
Free floating-point connector
3686
430,2
Constant.KONST4.Y8
Free floating-point connector
3705
480,2
Ctrl_Error.MinLageNorm.Y
Min. Shear Pos. Norm.
3706
430,2
Free_FBs.Switch1.Y
Output 1 selection switch (free block)
3707
480,2
Ctrl_Error.MaxLageNorm.Y
Max. shear pos. Norm.
142
st


TC
Chart
3708
480,4
Path name
Significance
Ctrl_Error.LageErrMax.Y
Position error lower limit
3709
480,4
Ctrl_Error.LageErrMin.Y
Position error upper limit
3715
480,2
Ctrl_Error.Grenzwerte.Y1
Knife position lower limit
3716
430,4
Free_FBs.Switch2.Y
Output 2 selection switch (free block)

Knife position upper limit
nd
3717
480,2
Ctrl_Error.Grenzwerte.Y2
3720
435,8
Free_FBs.RampGen.Y
Ramp-function generator output
3740
436,7
Free_FBs.FreePT1.Y
Output, lowpass filter (free block)
3742
436,7
Output, bandstop filter (free block)
3747
435,3
Output, limiter block (free block)
3753
435,3
Free_FBs.Kennlin.Y
Output, 2-point characteristic (free block)
3763
440,7
Output, double word to float converter (free block)
3765
440,5
Output, word to float converter (free block)
3779
640,3
output.Vsoll_NSW.Y
Setpoint 1 CU
3785
640,3
output.Msoll_NSW.Y
Setpoint 2 CU
3786
445,4
Free_FBs.ADD1.Y
ADD_1 (output, adder 1)
3789
445,4
Free_FBs.ADD2.Y
ADD_2 (output, adder 2)
3792
445,4
Free_FBs.SUB1.Y
SUB_1 (output, subtractor 1)
3794
445,4
Free_FBs.SUB2.Y
SUB_2 (output, subtractor 2)
3796
445,6
Free_FBs.MUL1.Y
3799
445,6
Free_FBs.MUL2.Y
3802
445,6
Free_FBs.DIV1.Y
DIV_1 (output, divider 1)
3804
445,6
Free_FBs.DIV2.Y
DIV_2 (output, divider 2)
3808
445,4
Free_FBs.ADD3.Y
ADD_3 (output 3 adder)
3814
670,7
input_CB.CB_DW1.Y
Setpoint DW1 CB
3818
670,7
input_CB.Sollwert1_CB.Y
Setpoint 1 CB
3819
435,7
3821
670,7
Setpoint 2 CB
3824
670,7
Setpoint 3 CB
3825
430,6
Free_FBs.Switch3.Y
Switch3 (output, changeover switch)
3827
430,8
Free_FBs.Switch4.Y
Switch4 (output, changeover switch)
3932
670,7
Setpoint 4 CB
5000
70,2
Constant.Konst_DI.Y1
0 (double word)
5001
70,2
1 (double word
5061
790,3
Peer.RecPZD1.YDI
Peer receive: PZD2 and PZD3 as double word
5063
790,3
Peer.RecPZD2.YDI
Peer receive: PZD4 and PZD5 as double word
5179
150,7
inpAbsolut.Absolutgebe.YOP
AENC encoder position (original value)
5402
80,6
Constant.RP_Schere.Y
Reference pulses 1
5403
80,6
Constant.RPneg_Schere.Y
Reference pulses 1 negated
5422
80,4
Constant.RP_Treiber.Y
Reference pulses 2
5423
80,4
Constant.negRPweb.Y
Reference pulses 2 negated
5640
430,8
Free_FBs.Switch_DI.Y
Output 32bit integer changeover switch
5679
70,8
Fixed value DI1
5680
70,8
Fixed value DI2
5681
70,8
Fixed value DI3
5682
70,8
Fixed value DI4
5683
70,8
Fixed value DI5
5684
70,8
Fixed value DI6
5811
440,7
Free_FBs.R_DI_1.Y
R_DI (real
5814
445,2
Free_FBs.MULI_1.YDI
MULI_1 (double word output, integer-multiplier)
5816
440,6
Free_FBs.WDW1.Y
W_DW1 (output, word->double word-converter)

rd
double word-converter)
143
Typical commissioning
7 Typical commissioning
7.1
General procedure
Commissioning the application
General settings
H120:
0 = Rotary axis
1= Linear axis
H104 = Reference velocity (the max. knife velocity which occurs must be less than 2 * H104!)
H111 = Longitudinal format; Format length, at which the knife slide, at the highest material velocity, remains for at least 0.5 s in the
quiescent position + clearance to the material ID
H115 = Circumference of the measuring wheel (sensor wheel) in [mm]
Faults and alarms
H966 Fault mask: Non-relevant fault/error sources are suppressed (bits in the mask are set to 0)
H967 Alarm mask: Non-relevant fault/error sources are suppressed
Application control
Linear axis
Rotary axis
System type
General settings for linear axis
General settings for rotary axis
Incremental encoder (linear axis)
Incremental encoder (rotary axis)
Op.-loop contr. of the basic unit from the T400 (prereq.: the basic unit has been gen. commissioned, incl. mot. parameterization)
Setting the speed controller, basic unit
Setting the position controller
Entering the format setpoints
Behavior at the first cut in automatic mode
Linear axis
Rotary axis
System type
Settings for jog
Supplementary torques (optional)
Settings for reverse positioning
Cutting curve (optional)
Controlling the cutting operation

End of the commissioning phase
144

Application control
Local (T400 internal)
Control type
L620 Source for the enable input

L626 Source for the "automatic mode" input
L627 = 0013 Inhibit automatic operation when a fault occurs
H841 = 2621 Intern. generate control word 1 for the basic unit
H844 = 2622 Internally generate the shears control word
H581 = 0627 Acknowledge fault when withdrawing the enable
From external automation

device
H841 = Source for control word 1 for the basic unit

H844 = Source for the shears control word
H520 .. H535 Define sources for bits of the shears control word 2
End of the application control
General settings for systems with rotary axis
General settings
H105 = Fsymech (scope (circumference) of the knife movement)
H100 = 360 (degrees)
H101 = Knife exit angle (Fig. 4-1)
H102 = Knife entry angle (Fig. 4-1)
H103 = Symmetry of the velocity characteristic (Fig. 4-2)
H154 = 0 Characteristic type: Sinusoidal sections
H117 = H105 Knife slide feed per motor revolution
Parameters for the knife position

H642 = Tolerance bandwidth to identify "knife in the starting position" (refer to H105; refer below)
H719 = Source to enable position monitoring fault/errors (factory setting: only for cutting operating modes)
End of the general settings for systems with rotary axis

145
Incremental encoder (rotary axis)
H400 = Pulses per knife revolution

H420 = Pulses per revolution of the measuring wheel
Adjust the encoder at the knife, so that the zero pulse lies in the center of the cutting range
Via backplane bus from the encoder

emulation of the basic drive
Via backplane bus

from the basic drive
Connection,
H407 = 0x7FC2
Connection, incremental
encoder knife position
Terminal 83
At terminals 81, 82
Terminal 83
H407 = 0x7F42
Connection,
H407 = 0x7F02
Via backplane bus

H407 = 0x7F82
Referencing technique
Zero pulse
Zero pulse + coarse pulse
H408 = 0x0000
H408 = 0x0030
L542 = 0.0 Velocity reference.
Absolute value generator
L542 = Velocity when referencing (referred to the rated velocity)
no
Pass mark synchronization?
yes
Connect the light barrier at terminal 64 (terminal 88 to

ground)
Connect the zero pulse of the knife position encoder at terminal 64.
H424 = 0413 for the zero pulse of the knife encoder:
material position = material position - cut format
H425 = 0317 synchronize with the knife zero pulse
no
yes
Use every pass mark?
H425 = 1360 sense the pass marks as a function of the position

H366 = permissible deviation from the expected value (refer to Fsymech)
H425 = 1
H446 = permit offset equalization

H444 = percentage offset equalization per machining cycle (e.g. 0.5 % of Fsymech)
Mark first reaches the light barrier
Mark first reaches the knife

Position of the light barrier
H431 = 3094
L202 = 3094
H431 = 3099
L202 = 3099
Power-down the T400 and power-up again
146

Incremental encoder (linear axis)

H400 = Pulses per motor revolution (feed drive of the knife slide)
H420 = Pulses per revolution of the measuring wheel
Via backplane bus from the encoder
emulation of the basic drive
Via backplane bus

Connection,
H407 = 0x7FC2
At terminals 81, 82
Connection, incremental
encoder knife position
Terminal 83
Terminal 83
H407 = 0x7F42
Connection,
H407 = 0x7F02
Via backplane bus

H407 = 0x7F82
Referencing technique
Zero pulse only at the ref. point
H408 = 0x0000
Zero pulse + coarse pulse
H408 = 0x0030
L530 = Limit switch at front (in mat. flow direction; Fig. 4-12)
L531 = Limit switch at the rear
Only when jogging or referencing
When synchronized
to reference point?
H405 = 0599
Limit switch edge
H408 = 0x0004
L530 = inverse input, proximity switch
L531 = input, proximity switch
L532 = 0
Always (factory setting)
H405 = 0317

H405 = 0 no synchronizing
L542 = 0.0 velocity reference
L542 = velocity when referencing (refer to the rated velocity)
no
yes
Pass mark
synchronization?
Connect a light barrier to terminal 64 (terminal 88 to ground)

H425 = 0 inhibit synchronization
no
yes
Use each
pass mark?
H425 = 1360 sense the pass marks as a function of the position

H366 = permissible deviation from the expected value (refer to Fsymech)
H425 = 1
H446 = offset equalization permitted

H444 = percentage offset equalization per processing cycle (e.g. 0.5 % of Fsymech)
Mark first reaches the light barrier
Light barrier
position
H431 = 3094
L202 = 3094
Mark first reaches the knife
H431 = 3099
L202 = 3099
Power-down the T400 and power-up again

147
General settings for systems with linear axis
General settings
H101 = 0
H103 = 0
H154 = 2 Characteristic type: linear ramp with rounding-off
H117 = Feed of the knife slide per motor revolution
Parameters for the knife position

H197 = 3441 Shift the material coordinate system to the knife quiescent position
L201 = 3168 Shift the coordinate system for "Starting length"
H451 = 3662 Format range for the linear axis
H642 = Tolerance bandwidth for identifying "knife in the starting position" (refer to H105; refer below)
H715 = Lowest position value of the knife slide in the range in [mm] (recommended: 0)
H717 = Highest position value of the knife slide in operation in [mm]
H718 = Knife position monitoring tolerance in [mm]
H719 = Source to enable position monitoring errors (factory setting: Only for cutting operating modes)
L574 = 3617 Decrease velocity to zero at the end of traversing
Distance normalization
H105 Fsymech = accelerating travel at max. material velocity
H100 = H105
H102 = H105
Formula
Vmax
Xacc =
Characteristic
H154
type
0
1
2
with:
2 Amax
Vmax max. material velocity

Amax max. acceleration of the knife slide
Acceleration travel
H105 > Xacc
H105 > 2 * Xacc
H105 > 1.1 * Xacc
Caution: In order to avoid rounding-off errors for the position/distance sensing, H105 must be set a multiple of the measuring
wheel resolution.
Example:
Measuring wheel circumference:
Pulses/revolution, measuring wheel:
Resolution, measuring wheel:
Select Fsymech:
From Xacc H105 > 45 mm is obtained

400 mm
4 * 2048 = 8192
0.04883 mm
=> 45 mm corresponds to 921.6 pulses
H105 = 922 * 0.04883 = 45.019 mm
End of the general settings for linear systems
148

Setting the speed controller, basic drive
Generate a speed step (short!)

Settings and wiring changes (re-establish the original settings after the adjustment has been made!)
L896 = 0 to use pulse_3 (Chart 436) to generate a pulse
L897 = 100 ms pulse duration
L660 = 0.1 fixed value 11 as speed setpoint ( start with 10%)
H777 = 2660 fixed value 11 as alternative speed setpoint (chart 640,1)
H778 = 896 enter alternative speed setpoint with pulse_3
H146 = 0.1 test with a low P-gain of the position controller
Monitor the setpoint and actual value using an oscilloscope
H220 = 3412 output the speed actual value knife as first analog value (factory setting)
H226 = 3779 output the speed setpoint as 2nd analog value
Power-up the system - reference - traverse to starting position
Initiate pulse:
L896 = 1
L896 = 0
Test with rated speed

L660 = 1.0
Step response OK?
no
Correct KP, Tn of the speed

controller in the basic drive
yes
no
L660 = 1.0
yes
Speed-dependent KP gain (in this case, e.g. for SIMOVERT MC)

P235 = KP value for L660 = 0.1
P236 = KP value for L660 = 1.0
P232 = 150 adapt KP as function of the setpoint speed (reference speed)
Re-establish the original settings before the test
End of the speed controller setting, basic drive
Setting the position controller
Power-up the system - reference - move to the starting position

Monitor the setpoint and actual value using an oscilloscope
H220 = 3412 output the speed actual value knife as first analog value (factory setting)
H226 = 3779 output the speed setpoint as 2nd analog value
Start with a low P gain
H146 = 0.1 P gain of the position control
H140 = 0.1 generate the supplementary setpoint for
the position controller (larger steps for linear systems)
H140 = 0 withdraw the suppl. setp. for pos. contr.
H146 modify the P gain
no
Step response OK?

yes
Re-establish the original settings before the test

End of the position controller setting

149
Enter the format setpoint
Source, format setpoint

Floating-point value
H617 source (float)

H619 = 2001
16bit word
32bit word
H614 source (word)

H615 normalization/digit
H619 = 2003
Fixed value
H614 source (double word)

H612 normalization/digit
H619 = 2002
H621 fixed value format

H619 = 2004
Adapt limit values

H627 max. format
H628 min. format
with linear axis system
with rotary axis
System
H173 = 0 format is not accepted for the knife synchronizing

pulse
H173 = 0413 format accepted for the knife synchronizing

pulse
H172 = source for an optional condition to accept the format for the next step. (e.g. when the start of the material has been detected.
It is not permissible to accept the format during the cut!) The signal edge is evaluated.
End of input, format setpoint
Behavior at the first step in the automatic mode (const. cutting)
Present
H122 = Clearance between the material detection and quiescent

knife position (linear axis) and center of the knife
(rotary axis; Fig. 4-7)
Length of the
1st section
Format lengths
L213 = 1 simulate "material present"
Immediately after the

start of cutting
operation
Different format length
H110 = crop length

Set the crop cut enable to '1' in the shears
control word 1
Not present
Light barrier, start

of the material
Start of the first cut
(e.g.: wait for the 1st pass mark)
After material feed by

"logitudinal format
Set the initial value of the material position to zero

L687 = 0577 delay "no cutting mode"
L198 = 0687 change over the setting value of the material position,
with a delay, from 0 to "starting length"
General formula:
Feed for 1st section = longitudinal format - setting value (at L199)
End
150

Settings for jogging

H523 source for jogging 1
H524 source for jogging 2
H497 source to enable jogging (factory setting: if cutting mode is not active)
L521 source for front limit switch, inverse (inhibits jogging 1 if the limit switch is active)
L522 source for rear limit switch, inverse (inhibits jogging 2 if the limit switch is active)
L519 velocity for jogging (referred to H104 V_rated)
L540 number of ramp-up stages for the velocity when jogging and referencing
Checking distance normalization:

Move the knife, after referencing, into the start position
Move the knife to the end of the traversing distance (in the direction of the material flow)
The knife position (d413) must be the same as the distance between the knife and the
starting pos.! (if this is not identical, correct H117 feed/revolution and H400 pulses/revolution)

End of the settings for jogging
Settings for re-positioning
H481 acceleration
H478 rounding-off
max. slide acceleration

H481 <
H478 =
Examples
slide feed/motor revolution

H481
5 m/s
H481 <
= 500 1 /s
10 mm
time to establish torque

500 1/s
H479 final rounding-off (calculation, analog to H478)
H478 =
= 25000 1 /s
20 ms
Logic which is recommended to activate positioning

Sources (the factory settings are in brackets)
L331 de-activation signal (0665 no_enable)
L332 optional abort condition (0644 in_start position)
L333 start condition 1 (0576 cutting mode)
L334 start condition 2 (e.g. cut completed; knife raised, or similar.)
L335 optional
L336 end of condition 1 (0499 positioning/setpoint generator active)
L337 end of condition 2 (1347 positioning_mode)
L338 optional start condition (0236 material_cut)
Conditions to start positioning
L339 = 0x008C material_cut AND cut_completed AND cutting mode
Conditions for exiting the positioning mode
L343 = 0x2040 positioning_no_longer_active AND positioning_mode
L346 = 0x0003 no_enable OR optional abort condition
Behavior, if the knife slide does not return to the starting position in time for the
next cut (cause: format too short, velocity too high or cut type too long )
L196 = 1348 delays the start of the new cut until positioning has been completed.
The reference format size can no longer be maintained!
End of the settings for return positioning

151
Cutting operation control
Start cutting with STATE_logic2 (Chart 415)
Define the prerequisites for the start of cutting. The inputs and the logical equations to initiate a cut are specified. Operation must
always be enabled.
General conditions (automatic cut)
1. Cutting mode must be active
2. The knife must be in synchronism with the material
3. A cut has still not been made (so that cuts aren't made a multiple number of times one after the other)
Optional conditions (automatic cut)
4. The knife is located within the permitted lowering range (this takes into account that there is sufficient time to raise the knife).
Manual cut in the automatic mode
A manual cut is initiated, with the material running, by setting the material position to the "starting length" value (refer below). The
start of the cut is obtained from the conditions 1 to 5 above. If the material is stationary, this could be confusing for operating
personnel, as the cut would only be made when the material web starts to move again. Thus, if the material web is stationary,
immediately make a manual cut.
Conditions
5. Material velocity = 0
6. Cutting mode
7. Manual cut request
8. Knife in the quiescent position
Conditions for a manual cut (the cutting mode has been disabled)
9. Request manual cut (this should be in the form of a pulse, which is available for at least as long as the cut lasts)
10. Cutting mode not active
11. The material must be stationary
Contact-controlled (knife at the

top; knife at the bottom)
Time-controlled
End of cut
Define the sequence (time) for the cutting signal using free
blocks (refer to the example in Section 7.1).
Reset the cutting logic with the "knife at the bottom" signal.
Reset the cutting logic (STATE_Logic2) with the start of the

cutting pulse.
Use STATE_logic1 (Chart 415) for "raise knife".

Start conditions for "raise knife"
General conditions
1. Enable signal present
2. Knife not at the top
Automatic mode
3. Knife at the bottom
4. Cutting mode
5. Optional: Outside the permissible lowering range (alternative
to "knife below")
Manual operation
6. Request "raise knife"
7. No cutting mode active
"Material cut" is set with a reset pulse from the cutting logic (connector 1277) (this prevents multiple cuts)
is used
Manual cut in the

automatic mode
not required
Implementation: STATE logic3 (Chart 421)

L195 = 0935 use a positive output pulse in order to set the material position to "starting length".
Start conditions
1. Cutting operation
2. Knife in the start position
3. Manual cut request
Exit condition
4. No manual cut request
End of the cut control
152

Absolute value generator

TR encoder
Type
Settings for TR encoder
SSI or EnDat
At terminals 76 ...79
SSI
Type
Protocol structure, SSI encoder

L165 = 0 SSI rotary encoder
L162 Number of leading bits without position info
L163 Position of the interrupt bit (optional)
L166 Coding (0 binary; 1 gray; 2 gray excess)
L167 Parity bit (0 no; 1 yes)
Connection
At the basic drive
EnDat
L165 = 2 EnDat rotary encoder
L158 = 2 Type: SSI or EnDat connected directly to T400 term.

L160 = Number of cuts per revolution
L161 = Number of revolutions (0 for single-turn encoders)
L295 = 3181 Source, absolute position
L298 = 0179 Position value, if no error has been recognized
L300 = 0298 Set calibration valid if the position value is valid
L158 = 3 Type: Absolute value encoder from the basic drive

L282 = Define source for the high word
L283 = Define source for the low word
L296, L297 suppress non-relevant bits per mask
L284 = Steps per revolution
L286 = L287 number of revolutions (measuring range; 1.0 for
single-turn encoders)
L300 = 0298 set calibration after power-on delayed
Position actual value, encoder = c292
Position actual value encoder = c181
System
Rotary axis
Linear axis
No position overflows may occur when traversing the complete travel.

Move the knife slide to the start of the traversing travel (for the quiescent position)
Encoder position actual value (refer above) must be greater than 0
Move the knife slide to the end of the traversing distance
The position actual value (refer above) must be less than the number of revolutions of the multiturn encoder

If required, rotate the encoder until the conditions are fulfilled.
Correct the zero offset

Move the kife to the required zero position.
L542 = 0 referencing velocity = zero
Initiate referencing (shears control word 1 = 0x0050)
Referencing completed (shears control word 1 = 0x0000)
=> Offset position value is saved

CAUTION: After commissioning has been completed, it is not permissible to output any referencing command, otherwise the zero
setting will be changed! For operation without automation, set L631 to 0 (Chart 810).
End, absolute value encoder

153
TR encoder
TR absolute value encoders are incremental encoders, which, when requested, output the actual absolute position as a sequence
of pulses at tracks A and B (refer to Chart 165) via binary input (digital input) (load input) of the encoder.
L158 = 1 enable operation with TR encoder
L141= 0592 read-in the starting position with referencing request
Connect connector 0148 with the encoder load input via the digital output
Connect L140 with the digital input (connected with the load output of the encoder)
End, TR encoder
Format controller
Define the 1st cutting instant:
Connect H200 with the cutting pulse (for rotary axis, knife zero pulse, 0413)
Linear axis
3438
H197 =
Cut error =
knife position - reference position - 1
H185 = 3414 knife position
H178 = 3436 reference position
H195 = 3001 fixed value 1.0
Rotary axis
System
3441
Present
Pass marks
Cut error =
knife position - reference position
H185 = knife position
H178 = reference position
None
Cut error =
format setpoint - reference position at zero pulse
of the knife
H185 = 3630 setpoint format
H178 = 3440 reference position for zero pulse
Define max. correction range (normalized to Fsymech)

set H180 > 0 (e.g. 0.1)
set H181< 0 (e.g. -0.1)
H179 integrating time; if required, increase until controller output d183 is stable.
End, format controller
154

Attention:
The zero pulse of the encoder for the shear position must be active if the shear is in
the center of cutting range. This zero pulse must reset shear position and material
position.
Cutting characteristic (only rotary axis)
Extending beyond the synchronous range

Range
Exclusively in the synchronous range
Velocity reduction in the angular range 1 .. 2
H605 = 1 (task is always processed)

Any velocity change in the angular range 1 .. 2
Variante
Version 1
Version 2
Cutting characteristic
Range 0 ... 2:
values between -0.7 and 1.0
Range 2 ... 1 : value = 0.0
Range 1 .. 360: values between -0.7 and 1.0
Range 0 ... 2:
values between 0.3 and 1.0
Range 2 ... 1 : value = 1.0
Range 1 .. 360: values between 0.3 and 1.0
L583 = 3491 cutting characteristic is interpretted as supplementary velocity

H189 > 0 enable max. supplementary angle (0.1 = 36)
H190 < 0 enable min. supplementary angle
H193 = H105 * 60 / H104
e.g.: H105 = 750 mm; H104 = 240 m/min
==> H193 = 187.5 ms
End, cutting characteristic
Version 1
Version 2
0
AY
0
AX
AY
v_ref. from the cutting characteristic (c577)
AX
v_ref. from the cutting characteristic (c577)
0
0
0
Integral (v_ref)
0
0
Integral (v_ref)
0
X1
X1
0
X1 KR3159 (FGEN_sin)
X1 KR3159 (FGEN_sin)
X1
X1
Supplementary angle
0
0
Supplementary angle
AY
AX
Knife angle

AY
AX
Knife angle
155
7.2
Parameterizing the basic drive

Purpose
CUMC
CUVC
CUDC
Status word 1 as PZD1 at T400
P734.1 = 32
P734.1 = 32
U734.1 = 32
Actual speed as PZD2 at T400
P734.2 = 91
P734.2 = 91
U734.2 = 40
Torque
P734.5 = 241
P734.5 = 241
U734.5 = 142
Control type: Closed-loop speed control; vector control
P367 = 3
P290 = 0
P100 = 4
Main setpoint PZD2 from T400 (for DC Master: Bypass rampfunction generator and speed setpoint limiting)
P443 = 3002
P443 = 3002
P625 = 3002
De-activate ramp-function generator
P462 = 0 s
P464 = 0 s
P469 = 0 s
P462 = 0 s
P464 = 0 s
P469 = 0 s
refer to main
setpoint
Reference speed (this must be greater than 150 RPM; if required,

increase H104 V_rated)
P353 = d119
P353 = d119
H143 = d119
Bits for control word 1
P554 = 3100
P555 = 3101
P558 = 3102
P564 = 3106
P565 = 3107
P568 = 3108
P569 = 3109
P575 = 3115
P585 = 3409
P554 = 3100
P555 = 3101
P558 = 3102
P564 = 3106
P565 = 3107
P568 = 3108
P569 = 3109
P575 = 3115
P585 = 3409
P654 = 3100
P655 = 3101
P658 = 3102
P664 = 3106
P665 = 3107
P668 = 3108
P669 = 3109
P675 = 3115
P685 = 3409
Remove speed setpoint limiting
P452 = 200 %
P453 = -200 %
P452 = 200 %
P453 = -200 %
refer to the main

setpoint
De-activate smoothing for speed setpoint and actual value
P221 = 0 ms
P223 = 0 ms
P221 = 0 ms
P223 = 0 ms
refer to the main

setpoint
Supplementary torque PZD5 from T400 (optional)
P262 = 3005
P506 = 3005
P473 = 0
P502 = 3005
Set torque limits to maximum
P263 = 200 %
P264 = -200 %
P492 = 200 %
P498 = -200 %
P171 = 200 %
P172 = -200 %
Data transmission task cycle between T400 and drive
U950.11 = 2
U950.11 = 3
Prerequisite is that the basic drive has been commissioned, including all
of the parameters have been set which define the motor.
156

7.3
Troubleshooting
Problem
Knife drive rotates in the
incorrect direction
Rotary axis: Knife and material

position are reset by the same
synchronizing pulse. Torque
surges sporadically occur.
Cut length incorrect
Shears to not stop after "cont.

cut has been withdrawn
(SCTW1.2)
Possible cause
1. Encoder tracks interchanged
2. Direction revised per software (observe
zero pulses; refer to the following problem
profile)
1. The two position sensing functions (knife
and material) use different synchronizing
signal edges (phase sequence, tracks A
and B of the encoder are different); the
position values are then not
simultaneously reset.
1. Format setpoint (reference value) is not
transferred (d630 is not equal to the
format which has been entered)
2. Format shorter than possible (c348,
B1348 briefly to 1)
3. Incorrect position normalization for knife or
material
4. Measuring wheel slip
1.
2.
3.
Brief events are not always

recognized
1.
2.
"In the synchronous range"

becomes active after repositioning
1.
Remedy
1. Interchange encoder tracks A, B
2. H401 = 3402
H318 = -1.0
H780 = -1.0
1. Always use the rising (front) edge of the
synchronizing pulse.
H408 Bit2 = 1 (e.g. H408 = 0x0004)
H428 Bit2 = 1
CAUTION: Both bits must be identical!
1. Set the length setpoint to valid

(SCTW1.4, [270,8] ) ;
Remove limits (H627, H628);
Locate the calculation position H649 in
the operating range;
Allow format constant calculation (H172
... H173)
2. Reduce the material velocity
3. Check the position sensing; Changes
made to H400, H407, H408, H420,
H428, H429 only become effective after
the T400 has been powered-down!
4. Compensate slip using a factor at H121
Longitudinal format too short
1. Set H111 to the format with delay interval
of 0.5 s between 2 cuts + clearance to
Calculation position is not within the
the material detection.
operating range (no changeover to
"longitudinal format" to stop; refer to d630) 2. Locate H649 in the operating range
"Knife in the starting position" not received 3. Knife position fluctuates around the
starting position (increase range H642;
"smooth" closed-loop position control)
Transfer pulses which are too short from
1. Pulses < 25 ms from T1 to T3 should be
a fast into a slower sampling time
extended to 2*T3 (e.g. zero pulses from
the encoder)
Processing sequence of freely-assigned
blocks was not observed
2. The sampling time and sequence of
freely-assigned blocks must be
observed! (refer to function charts)
For linear axes, the knife cannot re-enter
1. Locate the range limit (H451) to a
the synchronous range (cutting range) for
position outside the operating range
a reverse movement

157
7.4
Example of cut to length
Proximity switch
starting position
1
0
Limit switch, rear
1
0
Limit switch, front
1
0
Knife position
0.0
Working range 800 mm
10
Proximity switch
start position
Rear limit switch
Accelerating range
10
Braking range
Limit switch,
front
Possible synchronous range

40
Motor
Measuring wheel
1024 pulses/rev
Circumference: 400 mm
Spindle
Knife
Light barrier to
detect material
start
Clearance, light barrier-knife

450 mm
Pitch: 20 mm/revolution
FORMAT
Starting position (quiescent position)
and reference point for dimensioning
(in this example!)
Material movement
Involves
Description / required behavior
T400 in the SRT400. Speed interface: 10V analog signal (100% = 8 V).
System velocity
Up to 60 m/min
Cut duration
Max. 500 ms
Cut monitoring
There is no checkback signal for the knife position. The cutting tool immediately
returns to the quiescent position after the cut.
Cut start
50 ms after synchronism has been achieved
End of cut
After the max. cutting duration has expired + 50 ms safety margin.

It then immediately returns to the starting position.
Clamps
Clamps are controlled when synchronism has been reached. Duration, 400 ms.
Format input
The cut format is not changed during operation.
Material start
100 mm should be cut from the start of the material.
Manual cut, automatic

operation
The cut is executed immediately after request. The cut length is not defined.
The knife must be located in the starting position!
Manual cut, automatic

mode disabled
This is only permissible when the material and slides are at a standstill. Any
slide position.
Referencing
Automatic after the automatic mode has been activated.
158

Interfaces
Connection
Terminal
Ground
Type
Enable
0241
53
61
Digital input
Jogging, forwards
0242
54
61
Jogging, reverse
0243
55
61
Automatic mode
0244
56
61
Manual cut
0245
57
61
Limit switch, rear
0246
58
61
Limit switch, front
0247
59
61
Limit, switch, starting position
0249
83, 84
61
Light barrier, start of material
0250
65
66
Control signal for cutting
H269
51
50
Digital output
Control signal for clamping
H270
52
50
Fault message
H271
46
50
Speed setpoint, spindle drive
H220
97
99
Analog output
Incremental encoder, wheel
62, 63
85
HTL input
Incremental encoder, spindle drive
81, 82
66, 86,87,88
HTL input
7.4.1
System specifications
Par.
Value
Function
Plan
H100
40
The knife position is normalized to the length of the accelerating travel (40 mm)
60, 1
H101
Synchronizing ramp starts at knife position 0
60, 1
H102
40
Synchronizing ramp ends at knife position 40 ( set H102 H100)
60, 1
H103
Synchronizing ramp starts at knife position 0
60, 5
H104
60 m/min
System reference velocity
80, 4
H105
40
The material position is normalized to the length of the accelerating travel (40 mm)
60, 5
H122
450 mm
Distance between the material detection and reference point
60, 6
H115
400 mm
80, 1
H117
20 mm
Feed of the knife slide per motor revolution
80, 1
H120
Operation with linear axis
410, 1
H154
Curve type 2 (linear ramp with rounding-off)
200, 4
H197
L201
3441
3168
Shift the coordinate system for the reference position by Fsymech (40 mm). This means that
the reference position has the value "actual format" when the cut position reaches the
quiescent position of the knife. This simplifies the input of material position-dependent
dimensions (e.g. the distance between the material start detection and the knife quiescent
position can be measured)
200, 1
H451
3662
Shifts the lower range limit of the synchronous range monitoring to a value outside the
traversing distance (-1000 mm). (For linear axes, the knife slide cannot enter the synchronous
range when reversing out of the quiescent position)
330, 2
H642
0.025
Tolerance bandwidth to identify "in start position" to 0.025 40 mm = 1 mm
340, 2
H715
Min. position of the knife slide 0 mm
480, 1
H717
800
Max. position of the knife slide, 800 mm
480, 1
H718
10
10 mm tolerance bandwidth to the knife position monitoring (to initiate a fault)
480, 3
L574
3617
Reduces the reference velocity to zero at the end of the traversing distance
250, 5
H220
3779
Speed setpoint output at analog output 1
95, 1
H225
0,625
Scaling, analog output 1 to output 1.0 as 8 V
95, 5

159
7.4.2
Par.
Format setpoint
Value
Function
H619
2004
Select fixed format 1 as format request
190, 6
H621
xxxx mm
Enter the required cut format
190, 4
H110
100 mm
Crop length (this is cut from the start of the material)
60, 1
H511
Set crop cut enable
270, 2
H111
2,5 m
Select the longitudinal format so that for this cut format, the knife remains stationary for
approx. 1 s in the starting position between two cuts + H122 (450 mm)
60, 1
L198
0436
If the material is stationary in the shears and for a manual cut, the material position is set to
the value of the actual knife position
180, 1
L199
3414
refer above, L198
180, 1
7.4.3
Chart
Incremental encoders
Par.
Value
Function
Chart
H400
1024
Motor for knife feed; pulses per revolution (factory setting)
120, 3
H407
0x7F02
Source of the encoder tracks from terminals 81, 82 and synchronizing pulse from terminal 83
120, 2
H408
H428
0x0004
0x0004
Direction of rotation - independent of the front edge of the proximity switch signal (starting
position) is used for synchronization (this is only effective, if identical to H428!)
120, 3
H405
0599
Synchronization only enabled for jogging or referencing
120, 4
H420
2048
Measuring wheel; pulses per revolution
130, 3
H425
0000
The material position may not be set by the synchronizing pulses!
130, 2
7.4.4
Jogging and referencing
Par.
Value
Function
Chart
L519
0.05
Velocity when jogging = 5% of 60 m/min (this results in 5 cm/s; factory setting)
260, 1
L521
0257
No forwards jogging, if the "front limit switch " is occupied
260, 2
L525
0256
No reverse jogging, if the "rear limit switch" is occupied
260, 2
L530
0259
Reverse referencing, if "proximity switch starting position" = 0
260, 2
L531
0249
Forwards referencing, if "proximity switch starting position" = 1
260, 2
L532
0000
Initial direction of rotation is automatically obtained due to L531, L532
260, 2
160

7.4.5
Controlling the cut sequence

RS flipflop1
in the format range
Material not cut
Material cut
Pulse_1
400 ms
Enable
Cutting operation
Starting condition
Cutting
control
Clamping pulse
Material standstill
Manual cut
Cutting pulse
STATE Logik2
OnDelay1
50 ms
In starting position
Cutting pulse
Pulse_2
500 ms
OffDelay1
50 ms
Start reverse
positioning
Output, start cut

Clamping pulse
400 ms
Cutting pulse
500 ms
Start, reverse
positioning
50 ms
Par.
50 ms
Value
Function
Chart
L758
0245
A pulse, min. 1000 ms is generated from the manual cut input (terminal 57)
436, 1
L759
1000 ms
Manual cut pulse duration
436, 2
L263
0665
I1 = No enable (factory setting)
L264
0576
I2 = Cutting mode (factory setting)
415, 5
L265
0455
I3 = Starting condition (cutting/synchronism; Chart 330, 8)
415, 5
L266
0730
I4 = Cutting pulse (OffDelay1_Q; Chart 436,3)
415, 5
L267
0436
I5 = Standstill, material (n_Ref = 0; Chart 130, 8)
415, 5
L268
0237
I6 = Material not cut (Chart 430, 2)
415, 5
L269
0644
I7 = In the starting position (Chart 340, 4)
415, 5
Logic to initiate a cut (logic2)

415, 5
L270
0935
I8 = Manual cut
415, 5
L271
0x0026
MS1 = Cutting mode AND start condition AND material_not _cut
415, 6
L272
0x0A90
MS2 = Standstill material AND manual cut request AND cut pulse_completed AND no_cut
operation
415, 6
L273
0x08D0
MS3 = Standstill_material AND manual cut request AND cut pulse_completed AND in_starting
position
415, 6
L275
0x8010
MR1 = Standstill_material AND no_manual cut request
415, 6
L276
0x0000
De-activate factory setting
415, 6
L278
0x0009
MR = no_enable OR cut pulse
415, 6
L876
1279
L877
L728
L729
Pulse generation
Clamping pulse from the output, logic 2
436, 4
400 ms
Clamping pulse duration
436, 5
0876
Derive the switch-on delay for the cutting pulse from the clamping signal
436, 1
50 ms
Duration of the switch-on delay for the cutting pulse
436, 2

161
Par.
Value
Function
Chart
L878
0728
Source for the cutting pulse = output OnDelay1
436, 4
L879
500 ms
Cut pulse duration
436, 5
L730
0878
Source, switch-off delay for the end of cut identification from the cut pulse
436, 1
L731
50 ms
Duration, switch-off delay for the end of cut identification
436, 2
L709
0730
Source of the edge generation at the end of cutting = OffDelay1
430, 4
H269
0878
Connect digital output, terminal 52 with the clamping pulse
100, 1
H270
0876
Connect digital output, terminal 51 with the cut pulse
100, 1
Par.
Value
Function: Initiating a manual cut
Chart
H933
0576
I1 = Cutting operation (Chart 320, 5)
421, 1
H934
0644
I2 = in the starting position (Chart 340, 4)
421, 1
H935
0758
I3 = Manual cut request
421, 1
H937
0x0007
MS1 = Cutting operation AND in_starting position AND manual cut request
421, 2
H938
0x0104
MS2 = no_cutting operation AND manual cut request
421, 2
H940
0x0400
MR = no_manual cut request
421, 3
L195
0935
Set the material position to initiate a manual cut in the automatic mode
180, 1
7.4.6
Return positioning
Par.
Value
Function
Chart
L331
0665
I1: Not enabled (factory setting)
410, 2
L332
0644
I2: in the starting position (factory setting)
410, 2
L333
0576
I3: Cutting operation (factory setting)
410, 2
L334
0708
I4: End of the cutting pulse
410, 2
L336
0499
I6: Positioning active (factory setting)
410, 2
L337
1347
I7: Positioning mode (factory setting)
410, 2
L339
0x020C
MS1: Cutting operation AND end_of the_cut pulse AND not_in_start position
410, 3
L343
0x2040
MR1: Positioning_not_active AND mode_positioning
410, 3
L346
0x0001
MR: No_enable
410, 4
L196
1348
Fault processing if the knife isn't at the starting position on time; this means that larger formats
(sheets) are cut than specified!
180, 2
H481
625 1/s
Angular acceleration of the slide drive (in 40 mm up to 60 m/min = 1 m/s)
230, 3
a=
60 m
v2
min = 12.5 m
=
s
2 X 2 40mm
fr =
a
20 mm
= 625U s
U
H478
30000
1/s
Rounding-off: The torque is established when accelerating

(time to establish the torque: H481 / H478 = 20 ms)
230, 4
H479
15000
1/s
Final rounding-off: The torque is reduced when braking down to standstill

(time to reduce the torque: H481 / H479 = 40 ms)
230, 4
162

7.4.7
T400 operation without external automation system
Par.
Value
Function
Chart
H841
2621
Internally generate control word 1 for the drive converter
680, 1
H844
2622
Internally generate shears control word 1
680, 5
L620
0241
"Enable" from terminal 53
810, 1
L626
0244
"Automatic mode" from terminal 56
810, 1
L627
0635
Only enable automatic mode, if the drive converter is operational (e.g. no fault)
810, 1
H653
0001
Simulate drive converter ready
360, 2
H654
0001
360, 1
L621
0001
810, 2
H656
0013
Ready to run only if no fault is present
360, 1
H581
0627
Acknowledge fault by withdrawing the enable signal at terminal 53
530, 4
H966
0x30E0
Suppress non-relevant faults/error bits in the fault word
530, 4
H967
0x30E0
Suppress non-relevant fault bits in the alarm word
530, 4
7.4.8
Diagnostics
Par.
Value
Assigning free bits in the shears status word
Chart
H548
0876
Clamping pulse
520, 1
H549
1279
Positioning
520, 2
H550
0878
Cut pulse
520, 1
H551
0730
Extended cut pulse (OffDelay1)
520, 2
H552
0632
Automatic mode
520, 1
H553
0250
Light barrier, material detection
520, 2

163
7.5
Function flow PLC (principle)
Power ON
no
Inverter ready
yes
Enable inverter
no
Inverter active
yes

CB Shear control word Bit 4 = 1
no
Cutting mode
requested
yes
Shear calibrated?
no
Referencing shear
no
Move shear to start position

yes
Stop referencing shear

Shear in
start position?
yes
Stop moving to start position

Enable continuous cut
End of cut?
no
yes
End continuous cut

164

Function charts for the standard software package Sheet Cutter/Cut to Length
Contents
Chart
General
Contents
Block diagram control
Block diagram shear controller
General symbols
Control symbols
10
20
25
30
35
Constant
Configuration setting
General constants
Fixed values
Pulse encoder normalizations
50
60
70
80
T400
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
Binary inputs
90
95
100
110
Position sensing
Shear drive
Reference position (material)
Displacement correction and pass mark counter
Suppressing pass marks (position-dependent)
Correction of reference position
Absolute-value encoder on T400 and normalization
Absolute-value encoder (CU)
TR encoder
Calibrate shear
Set reference position
120
130
135
140
145
150
160
165
170
180
1
General
Contents
Contents
Chart
Shear control
Format setpoint selection
Format generator (FGEN)
Position controller (PC)
Format controller (FC)
Positioning with ramp generator (PosRG)
Torque calculation
Cutting speed
Speed local modes and setpoint for inverter
Cut curve and overspeed
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
265
Control logic
Shear control word 1 (SCTW1)
Operation mode priority
Operation modes 1
Operation modes 2
Operation modes 3
Range monitoring 1
Range monitoring 2
Range monitoring 3
Enable inverter / setpoints / controller
Enable position controller / brake control logic
Cam group
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380

Definition of the logic function block STATE
Mode switching (positioning/format mode)
Parameterizable logic 1 (raise/lower knife)
Parameterizable logic 2
AND/OR gates
Control functions
Time dependent functions
Type conversion
Arithmetics
400
410
415
420
421
425
430
435
436
440
445
Contents
Chart
Diagrams
KP-adaption and cut polygon
Friction and inertia
450
460
Diagnostics
CU-, CB- and user faults
Shear position and speed
Blocking protection
Pulse encoder fault detection
System status and control logic status
Status shear
Faults and alarms
Display parameters
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
Inverter interface
General settings
Inverter status words
Control words
600
610
620
630
640
COMBOARD
General settings
Control words
Status words
660
670
680
690
700
Optional communication
COMBOARD configuration
USS slave
Generel settings peer to peer
Peer to peer process data
750
770
780
790
Test operation
Multiplexer selected fixed values
Startup state machine
800
810
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
Sheet cutter / Cut to Length
8
- 10 -
Normalizations
setpoints
actual values
Shear Controller
Normalizations
Chart 610, 640
Chart 25
Chart 670, 700
PLC
Communication
board
setpoints
actual values
Shear Control Words
Controlling shear: mode

switching between
positioning/format mode
Priority handling
Chart 270, 280, 680, 810
Chart 290
Chart 410 ff
CB
Faults and
alarms
or
Operation modes
State machine for

simple stand
alone
application
Chart 300 .. 330
Diagnostics
Enable fault signalling
CU
Chart 530
Chart 330, 340, 470 .. 500
Enabling
(Chart 810)
Inverter
Control Unit
Status Words
Chart 620
Chart 360 .. 370
Control words for inverter

control unit CU
Chart 630, 680
1
General
Block diagram control
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 20 -
Referencing shear
Chart 170
Position controller
(Chart 230)
Pulse encoder shear

Shear drive position
and speed
Chart 120
Setpoint speed
(positioning mode)
Positioning
POSRG
Chart 230
Pre-control torque
(position mode)
Normalization of
position and speed
position shear
Chart 60, 80
Additional torque
components
Pre-control torque
(format mode)
Chart 240
Enable
synchronization
Chart 120, 140

Chart 180
Pulse encoder
measuring wheel
Cutting curve
Chart 265, 450
Setpoint speed
(format mode,
chart 250)
Pass mark counter

Chart 135
Reference drive
position and speed
Displacement
correction
Chart 135
Chart 130
Format generator
Position controller PC
(Chart 210)
Chart 200
Reference speed
Actual sheet size

Chart 130, 220
Local modes:
Jogging, referencing
Chart 260
Format controller
Chart 220
Setpoint sheet size
Chart 190
General
Block diagram shear controller
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
Setpoint speed
(local modes)
7
Function diagram
8
- 25 -
Symbol
Explanations
Parameter name
(factory setting)
Hxyz
Miscellaneous
Logic and arithmetics
Symbol
Technology parameter
e.g. H231
Explanations
Symbol
OR operation
type
Explanations
Selection
Parameter name
H123 (fact.)
KR (chart)
Display parameter
e.g. d123
&
Set
Reset
(here 5 inputs)
AND operation
type
Symbol
Explanations
R-S-Flip-Flop
Multiplexer
1
Parameter name
dxyz
Miscellaneous
S&H
Sampling 1 value
X storage value
Y store value
S storage condition
Selection

H123
Selcetion between 2
inputs
Logical inversion
X2
Parameter name
H123 (fact.)
K (chart)
Multiplication
X1
X1
+
-
Y = X1 * X2
Divider
Parameter name
H234 (fact.)
B (chart)
X1
Y=
X2
Sign determination
Y = sign ( X )
X2
X2
Excample:
Edge detektor
Adder
Parameter name
(factory setting)
X
X1
Y = X1 + X2
S.Setpoint speed
Parameter
number
generates a pulse for the

rizing edge of X
H123 (3412)
KR (120,7)
Data type symbol:

B
BOOL
K
16bit
KK 32bit
KR floating point
A-
Y=|X|
BN+
Negation
-1
Y= -X
General
General symbols
B+
(chart, Sector) for

factory setting
A+
Absolute value
X
N-
Inkremental encoder
Here: tracks A, B and
zero pulse N;
(RS422)
Coarse
pulse
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 30 -
Symbol
Explanations
Symbol
PT1
Explanations
Td
DT1
Explanations
X1
Low pass filter

T time constant
Y1
High pass filter

T = smooting time
constant
time constant
output

(X1,Y1) and (X2,Y2)
Y2
input at the
upper limit
upper
limit
input
T
Symbol
input
output
lower
limit
input at the
lower limit
Limiter
quantity exceed the
limits
X2
Xmin
setting value
interval limit
set
hysteresis
Limiter function
X
X>Y
X>Y
Y=X
X=Y
X<Y
Y<X
Xmin <= X <= Xmax

input
Xmax
input
output
Ramp function with

setting function

hysteresis
T1
Switch on delay T1
ramp-up time
ramp-down time
T1
proportional gain
Switch off delay T1

Kp
system
deviation
100 %
1.0
1
General
Control symbols
integral
value
output
Converter
floating point
Tn
PI controller
enable
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 35 -
Select the absolute

encoder
General settings
Language select.
(0)
H000
0 german
1 english
Software-Id
d001
Software version
d002
Drive code
(0)
H923
Enable TR encod.
c090
0: no absolute encoder
1: TR-encoder
2: SSI/EnDat (T400)
3: SBM2 encoder (CU)
AbsEncoder Type
(0)
L158
Serial No.
d003
TechBoardParaTyp
(0)
H980
Choose data type for

floating-point parameters
COMBOARD ParaTyp
(0)
H981
c093
Enable AbsEnc
Hardware-Id
d004
SYMADYN D
d998
Use T400 as baseboard

(special applications without
inverter)
T400 Baseboard
(0)
H982
En.T400 AbsEnc
c091
B0090
Enable TR encoder
B0091
Enable T400-Abs enc.
B0092
Enable CU encoder
B0093
Enable absolute encod.
c092
En. CU AbsEnc
Disabling of special tasks
SIMOVIS SW ID
d999
Task AENC
c610
S.Task AENC_T400
L600 (0091)
B (50,8)
T400 absolute encoder

(chart 150)
Task TR encoder
c611
S.Task TR encoder
Key EEPROM
(0)
H984
Status EEPROM
d985
L601 (0090)
B (50,8)
TR encoder (chart 140)

Task CU encoder
c612
S.Task CU encoder
L602 (0092)
B (50,8)
Absolute encoder on CU
(chart 160)
Off delay cut

(4.8 ms)
L614
Task cut curve

c613
S.Task cut curve

L603 (0168)
B (200,8)
Set H984 = 165
Modified parameters are restored to factory

setting.
This operation can not be canceled!
1
Constant
Configuration setting
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 50 -
Shear constanst
AX Angle
(20.0)
H101
AX_fixed value
AY Angle
(340.0)
H102
AY_fixed value
S.AX
KR3091
End of cutting range
H091 (3101)
KR (60,2)
KR3118
End of cutting range norm.
KR3101
S.AY
KR3102
H092 (3102)
KR (60,2)
Knife change position

(180.0)
H109
X_Shear Norm
(360.0)
H100
KR3092
Start cutting range
KR3119
Start cutting range norm.
KR3109
knife change position
KR3129
KC pos. normalized
KR3100
Edge point AZ
(0.5)
H103
KR3103
Angle edge point
Angle_CUT_ON
(315.0)
H112
KR3112
Start cut torque
Angle_CUT_OFF
(345.0)
H113
KR3113
End cut torque
Fsymech
(1000 mm)
H105
KR3105
Fsymech
KR3114
Xref_normalization
KR3108
cos_Epsilon
Xref_Norm
d114
cos
Epsilon
(0.0)
H108
X Shear normalization
Reference constants
Dist. Light Gate

(1500.0 mm)
H106
Dist. Cut
(0.0 mm)
H107
Distance
shear to light gate
KR3106
Distance to cut
KR3107
S.DistLightGate
-1
H095 (3106)
KR (60,2)
S.Dist.Cut
H096 (3107)
KR (60,2)
KR3195
Neg. dist. light gate norm.
KR3095
Dist. light gate norm.
KR3099
Dist. light gate + cut
KR3096
Dist. to cut norm

Distance Material
(1500 mm)
H122
S.TopCut size
TopCut size
(200.0 mm)
H110
TopCut size
KR3110
H097 (3110)
KR (60,2)
KR3097
TopCut size norm.
KR3098
Long format norm.
S.Long format
Long format
(100.0 m)
H111
Long format
KR3111
KR3593
Dist. between
pass marks
KR3592
pass mark dist. norm.
KR3122
Distance material
KR3123
Distance material norm.
KR3649
Reserve1 norm.
S.Reserve1
H098 (3111)
KR (60,2)
Xref_normalization [60,7]
1
Constant
General constants
dX_Pass mark
(1000 mm)
H592
L649 (3000)
KR (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 60 -
fixed value1
(0.0)
L650
KR3650
fixed value1
fixed value2
(0.0)
L651
KR3651
fixed value2
fixed value3
(0.0)
L652
KR3652
fixed value 3
fixed value4
(0.0)
L653
KR3653
fixed value 4
word 3
fixed value5
(0.0)
L654
KR3654
fixed value5
fixed value6
(0.0)
L655
KR3655
fixed value6
fixed value7
(0.0)
L656
KR3656
fixed value8
(0.0)
L657
KR3657
fixed value9
(0.0)
L658
KR3658
fixed value10
(0.0)
L659
KR3659
fixed value11
(0.0)
L660
KR3660
fixed value12
(0.0)
L661
KR3661
fixed value13
(-1000.0)
L662
KR3662
B0000
logical 0
B0001
logical 1
0
1
2
3
K2000
K2001
K2002
K2003
word 0
word 1
word 2
K2004
word 4
K2005
word 5
K2006
word 16#FFFF
Integer -1
KK5000
double word 0
16#FFFF
0
1
KK5001
double word 1
0.0
KR3000
Real 0.0
0.5
KR3006
Real 0.5
1.0
KR3001
Real 1.0
-1.0
KR3007
Real -1.0
2.0
KR3002
Real 2.0
3.141592654
6.283185307
1.570796327
1
Constant
Fixed values
KR3003
KR3004
KR3005
fixed value14
(0.0)
L663
KR3663
KR3664
2 PI
fixed value15
(1000.0 mm)
L664
PI / 2
fixed value16
(1200.0 mm)
L665
PI
KR3665
fixed value7
fixed value8
fixed value9
fixed value10
fixed value11
fixed value12
fixed value W1
(0)
L666
fixed value W2
(0)
L667
K2666
fixed value W1
fixed value DI1

(0)
L679
KK5679
fixed value DI1
K2667
fixed value W2
fixed value DI2

(0)
L680
KK5680
fixed value DI2
fixed value W3
(0)
L668
K2668
fixed value W3
fixed value DI3

(0)
L681
KK5681
fixed value DI3
fixed value W4
(0)
L669
K2669
fixed value W4
fixed value DI4

(0)
L682
KK5682
fixed value DI4
fixed value W5
(0)
L670
K2670
fixed value W5
fixed value DI5

(0)
L683
KK5683
fixed value DI5
fixed value DI6

(0)
L684
KK5684
fixed value DI6
fixed value Int1

(0)
L671
K2671
fixed value I1
fixed value Int2

(0)
L672
K2672
fixed value I2
fixed value Int3

(0)
L673
K2673
fixed value I3
fixed value Int4

(0)
L674
K2674
fixed value I4
fixed value Int5

(0)
L675
K2675
fixed value I5
fixed value Int6

(0)
L676
K2676
fixed value I6
K2677
fixed value I7
fixed value13
(format range lin. axes) fixed value Int7
(0)
fixed value 14
L677
(CoarseRefValue 170,6)
fixed value Int8
(0)
fixed value 15
L678
(Format 190,4)
K2678
Fixed pos.1
(0 mm)
H233
KR3233
Fixed pos.1
KR3223
Fixed pos.1 norm.
Fixed pos.2
(0 mm)
H234
KR3234
Fixed pos.2
KR3224
Fixed pos.2 norm.
Fixed pos.3
(0 mm)
H235
KR3235
Fixed pos.3
KR3225
Fixed pos.3 norm.
Fixed pos.4
(0 mm)
H236
KR3236
Fixed pos.4
KR3226
Fixed pos.4 norm.
fixed value I8
S.Norm.Fixed pos. H232 (3100)
KR (60,4)
fixed value 16
(Special sheet 190,2)
32bit-fixed values
16bit-fixed values
Floating-Point-fixed values
Constants
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 70 -
KR3050
Pulses Encoder1
[120,4]
Revolutions/Fsymech
-1
Fsymech [60,7]
Feed/Revolution
(1000 mm)
H117
i_Encoder1
(1.0)
H118
KR3117
KR3218
1000 mm/m
-1
KR3104
inverter settings:
Ref. Speed = Refer.Speed 1
(P353 with SIMOVERT MC)
KR3401
Refer.Speed 1
(1/min)
KR3402
neg. ref. speed1
KR3400
Ref. frequency1
(Hz)
60.0 s/min
-1
S.Slip Factor
H121 (3001)
KR (70,2)
i_Meas.Wheel
(1.0)
H116
KR3116
i_measure
wheel
SizeMeas.Wheel
(500 mm)
H115
KR3115
Circumference
Meas. Wheel
KR3422
(float) reference pulses2
KK5422
Reference pulses2
KK5423
neg. reference pulses2
Scheme for reference position measuring

without no measuring wheel.
Warning:
This reference measuring will never have the
same accuracy as with measuring wheel.
i_Meas.Wheel
H116
Encoder
M
Reference speed
[80,5]
H123 (3000)
KR (70,2)
-1
KR3421
Reference speed2
KR3420
neg. ref. speed
Feeder
drive
i
1
Gear box
(optional)
1000 mm/m
dMeas.Wheel_min
(-20 mm)
H143
1
2
Constant
Pulse encoder normalizations
Refer. pulses 1
Reference speed
cos_Epsilon [60,7]
S.Meas.WheelCorr
KK5402
n_Ref. Shear
d119
Reference Speed
(100 m/min)
H104
dMeas.Wheel_max
(20 mm)
H142
neg. ref. pulses 1
Gear shear
Feed/Revolution
Pulse Encoder2 [130,4]
KK5403
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 80 -
Hardware filter
500 s
10 V
Terminal 90
Terminal 91
AI1 Scale Factor

(1.0)
H210
AI1 Offset
(0.0)
H211
AI1 TimeConstant
(25 ms)
H212
S. Disable AI1
H213 (0000)
B (70,2)
12 bit
+
-
PT1
0.0
PT1
AI1 smoothed
d214
KR3214
AI1 smoothed
KR3219
AI2 smoothed
5V
Hardware filter
500 s
10 V
Terminal 92
Terminal 93
AI2 Scale Factor

(1.0)
H215
AI2 Offset
(0.0)
H216
AI2 TimeConstant
(25 ms)
H217
S. Disable AI2
H218 (0000)
B (70,2)
12 bit
+
-
PT1
0.0
PT1
AI2 smoothed
d219
5V
AI3 Scale Factor

(1.0)
H276
Hardware filter
500 s
AI3 Offset
(0.0)
H277
AI3 TimeConstant
(100 ms)
H278
AI3 smoothed
d279
12 bit
Terminal 94
10 V
+
-
PT1
PT1
KR3279
AI3 smoothed
KR3283
AI4 smoothed
5V
AI4 Scale Factor

(1.0)
H280
Hardware filter
500 s
AI4 Offset
(0.0)
H281
AI4 TimeConstant
(100 ms)
H282
AI4 smoothed
d283
12 bit
Terminal 95
10 V
+
-
PT1
PT1
Input
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
5V
AI5 Scale Factor

(1.0)
H284
Hardware filter
500 s
AI5 Offset
(0.0)
H285
AI5 TimeConstant
(100 ms)
H286
10 V
+
-
PT1
KR3287
PT1
Task
T3
T3
T4
T4
T4
Cycle time
12,8 ms
12,8 ms
51,2 ms
51,2 ms
51,2 ms
AI5 smoothed
d287
12 bit
Terminal 96
Calculation cycle:
AI5 smoothed
5V
1
T400
Analog inputs
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 90 -
AO1 TimeConst
(0 ms)
H222
S. AnalogOutput 1
0.0
H220 (3412)
KR (120,7)
PT1
5V
Analog Output 1
d223
12 Bit
Terminal 99
H224
(0.0)
AO1 Offset
H221 (0000)
B (70,2)
H225
(1.0)
AO1 ScaleFactor
AO2 TimeConst
(0 ms)
H228
0.0
PT1
T400
Analog outputs
10 V
12 Bit
D
A
10 V
Terminal 98
Terminal 99
H230
(0.0)
AO2 Offset
H227 (0000)
B (70,2)
-10 V
5V
Analog Output 2
d229
S. Disable AO2
Terminal 97
S. AnalogOutput 2
10 V
S. Disable AO1
H226 (3414)
KR (120,7)
10 V
H231
(1.0)
AO2 ScaleFactor
-10 V
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 95 -
Bidirectional I/O
Enable BiDir1
(1)
H265
Enable BiDir3
(1)
H267
KL46 input
d261
B0261
Term. 46
B0265
Term. 46 inv
S.BiDir Out 1
KL48 input
d263
B0263
Term. 48
B0267
Term. 48 inv
S.BiDir Out 3
H271 (0014)
B (530,8)
Term. 46
Enable BiDir2
(1)
H266
H273 (0978)
B (70,2)
Enable BiDir4
(0)
H268
KL47 input
d262
Term. 48
B0262
Term. 47
B0266
Term. 47 inv
S.BiDir Out 2
KL48 input
d264
B0264
Term. 49
B0268
Term. 49 inv
S.BiDir Out 4
H272 (0676)
B (70,2)
Term. 47
H274 (0000)
B (70,2)
Term. 49
Binary outputs
Term. 45
24V
S.Bin.Output 1
Warning!

drivers
H265 .. H268 are initialization parameters. Modification

takes place after the next power on.
H269 (1259)
B (415,4)
If bidirectional outputs are enabled as output the

corresponding input value is inverted!
E.g.: H269 =1 d264 displays a level inverse to
terminal 49.
Term. 51
S.Bin.Output 2
H270 (1279)
B (415,8)
Term. 52
T400
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 100 -
Binary Inputs (T3)
Coarse Pulse Inputs (T1)

KL53 BinInput1
d241
24V
Term. 53
24V
B0241
5V
KL84 CoarsePuls1
d249
B0251
BinInput 1
Term. 84
5V
BinInput 1 inv.
KL54 BinInput2
d242
B0259
CoarsePuls 1 inv.
B0250
CoarsePulse 2
B0260
CoarsePuls 2 inv.
24V
B0242
5V
BinInput 2
B0252
BinInput 2 inv.
B0243
BinInput 3
B0253
BinInput 3 inv.
B0244
BinInput 4
B0254
BinInput 4 inv.
Term. 65
5V
KL55 BinInput3
d243
24V
Term. 55
5V
1
KL56 BinInput4
d244
24V
Term. 56
5V
Bit 0 BinInput 1
Term. 57
5V
Bit 2 BinInput 3
B0245
BinInput 5
B0255
BinInput 5 inv.
Term. 58
5V
Bit 5 BinInput 6
Bit 6 BinInput 7
Bit 7 BinInput 8
B0246
BinInput 6
B0256
BinInput 6 inv.

24V
5V
B0247
BinInput 7
B0257
BinInput 7 inv.

KL60 BinInput8
d248
24V
Term. 60
5V
Status bin. inputs
Bit 4 BinInput 5
KL59 BinInput7
d247
Term. 59
K2020
Bit 3 BinInput 4
KL58 BinInput6
d246
24V
Status BinInput
d005
Bit 1 BinInput 2
KL57 BinInput5
d245
24V
T400
Binary inputs
CoarsePulse 1
KL65 CoarsePuls2
d250
24V
Term. 54
B0249

B0248
BinInput 8
B0258
BinInput 8 inv.
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 110 -
Attention!
Pulse Encoder1
Pulse Encoder1
(1024)
H400
Initialization parameters
H400, H407, H408
become effective after next
power-up!
Mode Encoder1
Bit 6 (11)
H407
S. Refer.Speed_1
A
B
N
81
82
83
84
H401 (3401)
KR (80,6)
Speed
Reference speed
KR3410
Abs speed shear
KR3412
Speed shear
Pulses
Speed Shear
d411
PT1
Mode Encoder1
Bit 7 (1)
H407
from inverter
track A
track B
Zero pulse
SyncMode Encod_1
Bit 4..6 (000)
H408
Mode Encoder1
Bits 0..5, 8..15
H407
Coarse pulse
handling
Position sensing
X_Shear norm. [60,4]
Position
Pos. at synchronization
Synchronization pulse
Maximum
position
1
Position set for
synchr. pulse
S. Ref.Pulses_1 H402 (5402)

KK (80,6)
S. Reset Pos_1
S.Enable Synchr1
L314 (0599)
B (290,8)
S. Set Pos_1
Enable
synchronization
S.Enable Synchr2
H403 (1311)
B (170,4)
Maximum position
overflow
Position shear
KR3414
Position shear norm.
Pos. at synchronization
B0419
Synchronization pulse 1
B0414
Position ot synchr.
B0413
Position synchronized
B0418
Sync_OR_Overflow
B0417
Shear max. pos ovf.
S.PosSyncPuls
0
Pos.Sync32ms
B0415
Set position
H405 (0317)
B (120,2)
Enable
synchronization
Error code
Error code Enc1

d412
B0410
Pos.Sync100ms
B0416
H416
(100 ms)
Pos.Sync Delay
Error encoder 1
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
32 ms
Error Enc1
d410
Position set value

Group error
KR3413
KR3415
H414 (0413)
B (120,7)
S. Pos.SetValue_1 H406 (3313)

KR (170,7)
L316 (0595)
B (290,7)
Reset position
H404 (1306)
B (170,7)
n Shear smoothed
0
S. Sync1 Enable
B0317
S.Enable Synchr3
Reference
pulses
KR3411
Pos. Shear
d413
Mode
Synchronization
MaxPulses Enc_1
(0)
H409
1
Position sensing
Shear drive
Shear speed negative
Tfilt n Shear
(20 ms)
H417
Coarse pulse
L315 (0168)
B (200,8)
B0412
0
Pulses per
revolution
Pulse encoder
Speed and position

shear drive
K2400
7
Function diagram
8
- 120 -
Pulses Encoder2
(1024)
H420
K2420
Speed and position

reference drive
Pulses encoder2
Tfilt Speed2
(4.8 ms)
H436
Measuring wheel
here:
RS422 encoder
S. Refer.Speed_2 H421 (3421)

KR (80,4)
Terminal
A+
AB+
B-
(N+)
(N-)
Coarse pulse
62
86
63
87
64
88
65
+
-
S. Refer.pulses_2 H422 (5422)

KK (80,4)
Speed2
d435
Reference speed
PT1
+
-
H415 (0576)
B (320,5)
Coarse pulse
handling
Mode Encoder2
(16#7F02)
H429
&
B0424
Max.PulsesEnc_2
(0)
H430
H369 (0000)
B (70,2)
KR3436
H425 (0317)
B (120,2)
S.Pos.corr.Val2
1
2
Position sensing
Reference position (material)
B0434
X=Y
B0436
n_Ref = 0
X<Y
B0437
n_Ref < 0
T_LongPulse
(32 ms)
H418
Sync2 pulse 32ms
Position set for

synchronization
B0432
Position2 set for synchr.
B0431
Synchronization pulse 2
S.Long Pulse
H419 (0431)
B (130,6)
Long Pulse
B0420
Maximum position
Actual Format
d447
H441 (3114)
KR (60,6)
Correct position
Position at
synchronization
KR3447
actual format
KR3440
Synchron. position
Set position
Position set value
Error code Enc2

d434
Position correct. value

Error code
S.EnableVrefSim.
H455 (3219)
KR (90,7)
n_Ref > 0
S. Pos. Set Value2
H426 (3204)
KR (180,7)
H427 (3630)
KR (220,7)
S.vRef simul.
B0435
Position2 act. value
S.actForm_Norm
H423 (0208)
B (180,7)
X>Y
32 ms
S. set Pos_2
S.Enable Synchr2
Comparator
Synchronization
Mode
S.XrefCorrection
Speed2
0.0
Position
+
-
S.En Pos_2 corr
KR3434
Pulses
H428
Bit 4..6 (000)
SyncMode Encoder2
H424 (1345)
B (410,5)
Speed2 smoothed
X
Speed
S. Pos_2 correct
KR3435
Reference pulses
H454 (0000)
B (70,2)
Error code encoder 2
B0433
Error encoder2
Error Encoder2
d433
Enable speed simulation

Simulated speed
Attention!
K2434
Group error
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
Initialization parameters
H420, H428, H429
become effective after next
power-up!
7
Function diagram
8
- 130 -
ResetDisplCorr
(1)
H446
S.DisableOfsCorr
Correct Increm.
(0.02 %)
H444
H376 (0446)
B (135,1)
Disable
Position
actual value
Position1 act. value [130,6]

S.Ref_Mark_Pos
position2
d437
Position corr.
KR3445
Material position
KR3437
position2
Reference Pos.
d438
S.RefPosFactor
Setpoint mark pos.
S.Format modulo H368 (3631)

KR (220,7)
MaterialPosition
d445
Increment
Displacement correction
H431 (3094)
KR (180,7)
S.RefPos modulo H367 (3445)

KR (135,5)
H439 (3001)
KR (70,2)
KR3438
Reference Min.
(-0.5)
H443
S.Ref.Pos.Offset
KR3441
Ref. pos. - offset
H440 (3001)
KR (70,2)
KR3442
Ref. pos. offset
number of marks -1
R
I
S.MarkCntSet H468 (0000)

B (70,2)
K2586
S.MarkCnt SV H469 (2000)

K (70,2)
Mark limit
H587 (0448)
B (135,3)
H449 (0577)
B (320,5)
S.MarkCnt LU H470 (2586)

K (135,3)
Wait for the 1st mark after enble cutting

S
R
B0448
first mark
B0449
not first mark
1
2
3
Position sensing
Displacement correction and pass mark counter
S.MarkCnt LL H471 (2000)

K (70,2)
Counter status
K2465
Pass mark status
counter at upper limit
B0470
PM maximum
counter status zero
B0469
PM zero
counter at lower limit
B0471
PM minimum
Pass mark counter

Reset
S.ResetFirstMark
Ref. error pulse
Down pulse
S.MarkCntReset H467(0434)
B (130,6)
S.MarkQuantity1 H585 (2001)

K (70,2)
H448 (0434)
B (130,6)
B0443
Monitioring material position
Up pulse
S.MarkPulsDown H466 (0000)
B (70,2)
K2588
S.PM_dX_Mark H589 (3592)

KR (60,7)
S.SetFirstMark
Reference error
S.MarkPulsUp H465 (0420)

B (130,6)
0.5
S.MarkSelect
B0442
Start Correction
S.PM_Format H588 (3630)

KR (220,7)
S.MarkQuantity2 H586 (2588)

K (135,4)
Refpos modulo format
Freeze correction
Position2 set for synchr. [130,6]
KR3368
Reference Error
d442
S.FreezeCorrect.
H432 (0453)
B (330,5)
Refpos / format
Reference position
Act. value mark pos.
Synchron. position [130,7]
KR3367
Set
Set value
Upper limit
Lower limit
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 135 -
Synchronization is enabled within a window close to the

expected synchronization position.
For the first mark synchronization is always enabled until
the first mark was detected.
WindowPassmark
(0.05)
H366
S.Compare4 Range
KR3366
Compare4 Hyst
(0.0)
L598
L597 (3366)
KR (140,2)
S.EnableMark_1
H363 (0449)
B (135,3)
S.EnSynchrRef1
H360 (1363)
B (140,6)
Compare4 X>Y
X>Y
S.Compare4
L595 (3437)
KR (135,5)
B1595
Compare4 X=Y
X=Y
Enable pass marksynchronization
S.EnSynchrRef2
Mark within window
B1596
H361 (0576)
B (320,5)
B1363
&
B1360
Compare4 X<Y
X<Y
S. Compare4 Mid
L596 (3204)
KR (180,7)
1
2
3
Position sensing
Suppressing pass marks (position dependent)
S.EnSynchrRef3
B1597
H362 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.EnableMark_2
H364 (0000)
B (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 140 -
Tmax manual cut

(5000 ms)
H375
Use this function only for test and only for systems with linear axis!
Timeout for the cutting duration

Pos. correction value
Ref. pos. - offset (KR3441) [135,5]
Position shear norm. (KR3414) [120,8]
Reference correct. value
H427 [130,2]
Manual cut pulse
B0376
Manual cut pulse
Cutting logic (application specific)
Correction pulse
B0377
Correct reference position
H369 [130,1]
Set pulse
B0378
L212 [180,1]
Pos. setpoint = start pos.
B0379
Shear pos. setpoint

= start position
H130 [210,1] and L535 [260,6]
B0380
Manual cut pulse
Shear position
Start length
AREF for AZ (KR3163) [200,8]
Stop length
Long format norm. (KR3098) [60,5]
KR3370
Reference pos.FGEN
Start length (KR3162) [200,8]
Format setpoint (KR3629) [190,8]
Format setpoint
Long format
Actual format setpoint (KR3630) [220,7]
Format setpoint FGEN
Shear in start position (B0644) [340,4]
Shear in start position
Manual cut pulse
n_shear = 0 (B0460) [330,3]

n_Ref = 0 (B0436) [130,8]
Cutting active (B0576) [320, 5]
OM local (B0599) [290,8]
S.SV LightGate (L213) [180,1]
S.ReqManualCut
S.EnablManualCut
S.start of cut
S.enf of cut
S.RefCorrPulse
Connect to:
Timing diagram for manual cutting
Shear standing still

Material standing still
Request manual cutting
Automatic/manual mode
Manual cut pulse
Jogging or referencing
Material detection
H370 (0000)
B (70,2)
Request manual cut
H371 (0000)
B (70,2)
Enable manual cut
H372 (0000)
B (70,2)
Start of cutting pulse
H373 (0000)
B (70,2)
End of cutting pulse
H374 (0424)
B (130,2)
Pulse reference position corrected
Start of cut pulse

End of cut pulse
t
Note:
Logic for adapting the reference position after switching between local modes and continous
cutting respectively for manual cutting.This logic enables to continue the automatic cutting as
long as the line has not been moved too far (condition: material position < start length).
Manual cuts are allowed only for systems when cutting is possible even with standing line
(true for the most linear systems).
In automatic cutting mode the shear has to be positioned to the start position after manual
cutting. This is true even if the shear is allready in this position. The logic for starting the
positioning has to be changed in this way.
For rotary systems set H440 = 3000 [135, 4];
1
2
3
4
Position sensing
Correction of the reference position (after manual cut or disabling cutting modes)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 145 -
AENC NumberTurns
(0)
L161
AENC resolution
(8192)
L160
AENC Frequency
(0)
L164
AENC Zero Bits

(0)
L162
AENC EncoderType
(2)
L165
AENC PosAlarmbit
(0)
L163
AENC Parity
(0)
L167
AENC Mask YFC

(16#FFFF)
L175
AENC Mask YF
(16#FFFF)
L174
AENC DataCode
(0)
L166
&
AENC Error
c178
AENC YF
c176
L173 (3000)
KR (70,2)
AENC_error
B0179
AENC_OK
&
General error code

Position offset
Absolute-value encoder 1
at T400 terminals
S.AENC Reset
L172 (0000)
B (70,2)
AENC YFC
c177
Erorr code hardware
S.AENC Offset
B0178
AENC EncoderPos.
c179
Re-initialize
AENC Pos.Norm
(1.0)
L169
AENC n_Norm
(1.0)
L170
AENC i_Gearbox
(1.0)
L168
AENC Pos.Single
c180
Position send by encoder
KK5179
AENC encoder position
Position norm. (Single)
KR3180
AENC Pos.Single
Position norm. (Multi)
KR3181
AENC Pos.Multi
Speed
KR3182
AENC Speed
AENC n_max
(6000.0)
L171
c181
AENC Pos.Multi
c182
AENC Speed
S.AbsPos_Valid
L298 (0976)
B (600,5)
Normalize a position in [revolutions] to the internal normalization
&
B0298
Absolute position valid
1
X Shear normalization [60,4]
Store actual position as
offset in NOVRAM
0: read offset
1: store offset
S.Save pulse
L294 (1311)
B (170,4)
S.AbsPosition
AbsolutOffset
c290
L183 (3291)
KR (150,4)
RD /WR
SAVE
Value
S.AbsolutPos
KR3290
1
2
3
Position sensing
Absolute-value encoder on T400 and normalization
Absolute pos. offset
Abs Pos. correct

c291
L295 (3292)
KR (160,8)
KR3183
Abs. position norm.
Revolutions/Fsymech [80,3]
KR3291
d_AbsolutPos.
d024
Absolute position corrected
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 150 -
Abs.Pos. CU
c285
Mask AbsHigh
(16#FFFF)
L296
AbsPos AddPos
(0.0)
L288
AbsolutePos. 1
c293
&
R
high
Mask AbsLow
(16#FFFF)
L297
low
DW
&
Absolute Pos. 2
c292
corrected
position
KR3292
Absolute position 2
Comparator
L284
(8192.0)
Abs.Pos. Norm.
S.AbsPos low
L283 (2313)
K (610,3)
Overflow handling
If the position exceeds the
upper limits (L286) L287 is
subtracted
KR3285
S.AbsPos high
L282 (2314)
K (610,3)
AbsPos Range
(1.0)
L287
X
L286
(1.0)
AbsPos Limit
X>Y
X=Y
X<Y
Excample for shifting the position value of a single turn absolute-value encoder
Absolute Pos.1 + AbsPos_AddPos
1.0
AbsPosLimit = 1.0
0.5
AbsolutePos.1
AbsPos Range = 1.0
1.0
Absolute position 2
0.5
1 revolution
1
2
Speed and Position
Absolute-value encoder (CU)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 160 -
TR complete
c147
Control of the loading operation
S.TR WR disabled
B0147
TR encoder
complete
L142 (0663)
B (360,6)
B0146
TR encoder
not complete
TR StartDelay
(1000 ms)
L153
B0151
TR reset shear pos.
B0145
TR Load request
TR Load request
c145
S.TR StartLoad
L141 (0000)
B (70,2)
&
S
R
TR Load input
c148
TR load active [165,8]
&
TR error [165,7]
TR End Delay
(120 ms)
L146
S.TR Enable
L144 (0090)
B (50,8)
S.TR Load Output
&
L140 (0000)
B (70,2)
TR StartErrDelay
(1.0 s)
L150)
TR encoder signal loading

active as '1' at terminal load
output
&
connect to TRencoder
B0148
TR Load input
B0150
TR loading inactive
B0149
TR loading active
TR LoadingActive
c149
Monitoring the loading procedure

TR start error
c154
TR loading inactive [165,8]
&
TR request loading [165,8]
TR TimeoutDelay
(20.0 s)
L151
B0154
S.TR Acknowledge
L139 (0584)
B (530,6)
TR Timeout
c155
TR loading active [165,8]
TR start error
S
R
TR Error
c157
B0155
B0157
TR Error
TR Timeout
TR n_ErrorDelay
(1.0 s)
L152
TR FrequencyZero
c156
S.TR n_zero
&
L143 (0460)
B (330,3)
1
Position sensing
TR encoder
S
R
Note:
B0156
TR frequency zero
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
Only flip-flops used with

input R dominant
7
Function diagram
8
- 165 -
S.EnStoreVal_1A
Calibrate Delay
(0.0 ms)
L309
B1313
S.EnStoreVal_1B
Calibration is validated
B1314
S.Calib_Absolute
L300 (0147)
B (165,3)
H336 (1308)
B (170,7)
Pulse calibrated
Pulse not calibrated
set abs. pos. valid
S.Calib_ZeroPuls
R dominant
&
S
R
Stored value
Value
B1310
Shear is calibrated
B1309
Shear is not calibrated
H339 (0413)
B (120,7)
S.EnStoreVal_2B
&
B0339
H340 (0507)
B (270,8)
Set to coarse ref. 32 ms [170,6]
S.Store Value_2
S.CalPhiOverflow
L303 (0684)
B (480,4)
KR3335
Storage of 2 values
(non volatile)
S.EnStoreVal_2A
Stored value 1
Store
H335 (3414)
KR (120,8)
Shear calibrated
c310
OM Local2 [290,8]
B0336
S.Store Value_1
B1300
L302 (0415)
B (120,8)
&
H337 (0513)
B (270,8)
Calibration is unvalidated
Stored value 2
Store
H338 (3415)
KR (120,6)
KR3338
Stored value
Value
S.Calib.CoarseRef
S.CalPhiUnderflw
L305 (0529)
B (280,8)
L304 (0682)
B (480,4)
32 ms
&
S.CoarseRef_Jog
L306 (0593)
B (290,6)
User error pulse encoder [500,5]
B1307
Set to coarse ref. 32 ms
B1308
Set to coarse reference
Start pulse referencing
OM Referencing
[290,6]
set abs. pos. valid [170,3]
B1311
End pulse referencing
&
Enable absolute encoder [50,8]
B1312
Set shear position

CoarseRef pos.
(0.0)
L318
S.SetShearPos2
CoarseRef neg.
(1.0)
L317
Shear speed negative [120,8]

L301 (0594)
B (290,6)
S.ShearSetValue
L308 (3183)
KR (150,8)
Synchr.Pos. neg.
(1.0)
L311
Synchr.Pos. pos..
(0.0)
L312
1
Position sensing
Calibrate shear
B1306
Set shear position
KR3317
1
&
S.CoarseRef.Sel.
L307 (0000)
B (70,2)
Coarse set value
SetVal ShearPos
c313
KR3313
Synchr. set value
S.SynchrShearPos
KR3311
Set value shear position
L319 (3311)
KR (170,4)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 170 -
Start without material in

the cut region
S.SV_enTopCut
L211 (0511)
B (270,8)
S.SV_BA1 cut
L210 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.Dist.PassMark
L209 (3099)
KR (60,5)
TopCut size norm. [60,7]
Dist. light - format
L203 (3006)
KR (70,2)
0
0
KR3203
Position close to set value
L205 (3123)
KR (60,7)
S.SV_StartSel
First set value is different to the set

value used with zero pulse
synchronization setting
Start with material in

the cut region
L198 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.SV_StartLength
S.SV_SetValue
L202 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S.SV_Longformat
1
L197 (3098)
KR (60,5)
SetValue RefPos.
c204
KR3204
Set value ref. position
S.SV End Cut
WaitingForWebEnd
c207
L214 (0573)
B (320,6)
&
1
S.SV LightGate
Set value pass mark
S.OffsetSetValue
S.SV Dist. Light
L199 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3094
Dist. light + format

KR3206
L200 (3629)
KR (190,7)
S.SV_StartVal
Distance modulo format
Act. setpoint format [220,7]

KR3205
S.SV_Format
L201 (3162)
KR (200,8)
MOD
KR3209
S
R
L213 (0250)
B (110,8)
S.SV noCutMode
B0207
Wait for end of web
Set Ref.Position
c208
L212 (0577)
B (320,4)
S.SV set Ref_1
S.SV set Ref_2
L195 (0000)
B (70,2)
L196 (0000)
B (70,2)
1
Position sensing
B0208
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 180 -
Convert double word to floating-point value

normalizing to [mm]
S.Format DW high
H610 (2807)
K (670,3)
high
H617 (3664)
KR (70,3)
Format DW Norm.
(0.1 mm)
H612
Format DW
d613
S.Format DW low
KR3613
H611 (2806)
K (670,3)
low
Format float
d618
S.Format float
S.FormatSelect
KR3618
H619 (2001)
K (70,2)
Format float
Format DW
DW
0.0
0
1
Format W Norm.
(1 mm)
H615
Format Word
d616
S.Format Word
KR3606
R
KR3621
KR3622
KR3623
7
KR3624
8
KR3625
S.SawBladeWidth
Saw Blade Width
(0.0mm)
H606
KR3620
KR3616
Range: 0 ... 65535
Format request
4
Format Word
H614 (2806)
K (670,3)
FormatRequest
d620
H621
(1500.0 mm)
Fixformat 1
H607 (3606)
KR (190,2)
H622
(1200.0 mm)
Fixformat 2
H623
H624
(1000.0 mm) (1000.0 mm)
Fixformat 3
Fixformat 4
H625
(1000.0 mm)
Fixformat 5
Select special sheet [300,6]

Format setpoint normalized to the
mechanical synchron format Fsymech
Maximum Format
(100.0 m)
H627
S.Special sheet H626 (3665)

KR (70,3)

SCTW1.4 [270,8]
S.Limit Format
Format request [190,8]
H628
(0.6 m)
Minimum Format
S&H
H608 (0000)
B (70,2)
B0608
Format setpoint
d629
KR3629
Format setpoint
Limit Format
0.0
Accept new format setpoint

Refpos limited [200,2]
Actual format setpoint [220,7]
KR3608
Actual minimum format
Start length [200,8]
1
2
Shear control
Format setpoint selection
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 190 -
S.FormatChange_3
H172 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.FormatChange_1
H173 (0413)
B (120,8)
S.FormatChange_2
H174 (1345)
B (410,5)
B0172
Update format constants

FGEN_Xsetp
d157
FGEN_sin*sin
d159
Position setpoint
KR3157
FGEN _Xsetp
Speed setpoint
KR3158
FGEN_Vsetp
KR3159
FGEN_sin
Electrical format
KR3160
Electric format
Start position
KR3161
Start position
KR3162
Start length
KR3168
Start length
offset
Reference pos. for AZ
KR3163
AREF for AZ
Acceleration Phase 1
KR3164
Acc Phase1
KR3165
Acc Phase2
Diagnostics_1
KR3166
FGEN Diagn.1
Diagnostics_2
KR3167
FGEN Diagn.2
Shear within cut region
B0168
FGEN in
cut region
Shear within format region
B0169
FGEN in
format region
Update format
constants
Shear calibrated [170,5]
sinus(angle)
ElectricFormat StartPosition
d160
d161
Format generator
Cutting active [320,4]
Factor Overspeed [265,5]
FGEN_Vsetp
d158
value changed?
S.AX_Formatgen
H201 (3118)
KR (60,4)
Format constants
Start length
d162
Start length
AX
Ref. pos. offset[135,5]
S.AY_Formatgen
H202 (3119)
KR (60,4)
AREF for AZ
d163
AY
S.AZ_Formatgen
H203 (3103)
KR (60,7)
AZ
RefPos max
(100000.0)
H198
S.RefPos Limit
RefPos limited
H197 (3438)
KR (135,5)
KR3197
S. FGEN RefPos
H152 (3197)
KR (200,2)
Acc Phase2
d165
Acceleration Phase 2
S. FGEN Format
H150 (3184)
KR (220,7)
Acc Phase1
d164
FGEN Diagnostic1 FGEN Diagnostic2

d166
d167
Actual format
size
FG in CutReg
d168
Reference position
FG in FormatReg
d169
S. FGEN V_Ref
H199
(0.0)
RefPos min
H151 (3435)
KR (130,6)
Hardlock missing FGEN Error

d170
d171
S.Speedfactor
H153 (3020)
KR (265,5)
FGEN Curve Type
(0)
H154
1
2
Shear control
Format generator (FGEN)
Reference speed
Factor overspeed
Hardlock
missing
Hardlock missing
B0170
Group error
B0171
FGEN error
K2155
FGEN
error code
Error code
Curve type
FGEN Error code

d155
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 200 -
Deviation PC
d132
S.SetpPosition 1
S.ActValuePosPC
H124 (3157)
KR (200,8)
H131 (3414)
KR (120,7)
S.SetpPosition 2
H125 (3192)
KR (265,6)
S.Max.Setp.Pos.
KP Pos.Ctrl
(2.5)
H146
H126 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3145
Integrator value PC
IntegratorValPC
d145
Kp
Tn
S.SetpPosition 4
(start position)
Deviation PC
Tn Pos.Ctrl.
(6 ms)
H147
H137 (3707)
KR (480,2)
S.SetpPosition 3
KR3132
H127 (3161)
KR (200,8)
S.SetpPosition 5
(knife change pos.)
H140
(0.0)
PC TestSetp.
S.Min.Setp.Pos.
H138 (3705)
KR (480,2)
Note:
All position values on this chart
are normalized values!
freeze
integral
component
H128 (3129)
KR (60,4)
Position not synchr. [120,8]
S. GotoKnifeChPos
H129 (0596)
B (290,7)
output PC filt
d144
S. PC Enable
S.GotoStartPos
H139 (0671)
B (370,5)
B0590
H130 (0595)
B (290,7)
PT1
S. PC_set YI=0
KR3144
output PC filt
H141 (0001)
B (70,2)
PosReg_Max_cut
(1.0)
H133
Set different limits for the

position controller for cutting
mode and local modes
PosReg_Max_loc
(0.1)
H134
PosReg_Min_cut
(-1.0)
H135
PosReg_Min_loc
(-0.1)
H136
1
Shear control
Position controller (PC)
H148
(4.8 ms)
Tfilt PC
y
1
B0133
PC at maximum
KR3143
output PC
B0135
PC at minimum
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 210 -
B0201
S.EnFormatCtrl
H200 (0172)
B (200,4)
B0200
Calculate format controller
Task: "Format controller"
The "actual format setpoint" is the sheet size of the actual

cutting cycle. A modification takes place after updating the
format constants (see chart 200).
Cutting Error
d196
S. FC FormatNorm H186 (3114)
KR (60,6)
KR3196
The calculation of cutting errors

depends on the system structure
In continuous cutting modes the format controller is calculated

once a cutting cycle, e.g. after the end of cutting operation.
Cutting error
S. freeze_FC
H182 (0577)
B (320,4)
freeze integral
component
S. FC FormatSetp H185 (3414)

KR (120,7)
FC_max
(0.0)
H180
KR3185
S.FC FormatSetp2 H192 (3000)

KR (70,2)
S. FC actFormat H178 (3436)
KR (130,5)
H179
(20 ms)
Integral Time FC
S. FC actFormat_2 H195 (3000)

KR (70,2)
Task: "Update format constants"

(B0172 chart 200,4 )
Output FC-Int
d183
Output FC
d184
KR3184
Output format controller
KR3630
Actual format setpoint
H181
(0.0)
FC_min
Select the actual format setpoint

S. FC_FormatSetp1 H175 (3629)
KR (190,7)
KR3175
Setpoint FC
d630
next format setpoint
KR3631
S. FC_FormatSetp2 H176 (3098)
KR (60,5)
Act. format setpoint

in [mm]
S. FC_FormSel
1
Shear control
Format controller
H177 (0575)
B (300,7)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 220 -
S. PosRG_Xnorm
H482 (3050)
KR (80,2)
position normalization
S. PosRG_Vnorm
H483 (3400)
KR 80,7)
speed normalization
Setpoint generator for position,

speed and acceleration
FinalRoundingOff
(100.0)
H479
Rounding-Off
(500.0)
H478
PosRG active
d499
S.PosRG Vmax H495 (3480)

KR (230,8)
S. PosRG TargetSel
H477 (0000)
B (70,2)
S. PosRG Target1
H475 (3161)
KR (200,8)
H476 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S.PosRG Startpos
H484 (3414)
KR (120,7)
S.PosRG VStart
H485 (3412)
KR (120,7)
S. PosRG_set
amax
PosRG_Amax
(150.0)
H481
Torque setp PosRG
PosRG_Diagn_Sel
(0)
H473
PosRG active
PosRGDiagnostics
v*
KR3485
PosRG setpoint speed
x*
KR3484
PosRG setpoint position
PosRG_Vmax
(1.0)
H480
Tfilt_X_PosRG
(3.2 ms)
H493
use set values
PosRG diagnostics
KR3473
KR3480
PosRG Vmax fixed value
Starting values for position and speed

PT1
KR3486
PosRG_X_smoothed
H486 (1346)
B (410,5)
H494 (3486)
KR (230,5)
Tn PosRG
(0.0 ms)
H488
Pre-control with the speed

setpoint from the ramp
generator
PosRG_VLimit
(1.2)
H496
Vsetp PosRG
d474
S.PosRG Vsetp
dPos_PosRG
Kp
KR3489
S. PosRG_actPos
KR3498
a*
KP PosRG
(1.0)
H487
S. PosRG_PosSetp
0.001
B0499
QP
vmax
0
X
S. PosRG Target2
PosRG Acc_norm
(0.0)
H497
H498 (3485)
KR (230,5)
Tn
H489 (3414)
KR (120,7)
KR3474
Vsetp_PosRG
-1
S. PosRG_PI enabl
H490 (1347)
B (410,5)
S. PosRG_clear_I
H491 (0000)
B (70,2)
clear integral component
S. PosRG_freeze_I
H492 (0001)
B (70,2)
freeze integral component
enable
1
2
Shear control
Positioning with ramp generator PosRG
Position controller for positioning

to start position
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 230 -
TD_Inertia
(500 ms)
L559
S.TorqueFriction
KR3559
S.Dif_Inertia
Oscill. Torque
d027
L547 (3495)
KR (460,8)
L545 (3029)
KR (460,8)
S.Torque_2
Oscill. torque
L589 (3027)
KR (240,4)
KR3027
S.ToruqeCutRegion
L557 (0576)
B (320,4)
S.Vref_OszilTorque
S.Torque_1
L556 (3435)
KR (130,6)
L588 (3026)
KR (240,4)
TD_Acceleration
(250 ms)
L558
KR3025
0.0
S.Torque_3
L553 (3021)
KR (250,6)
KR3026
S.FactorT_accel
0.05
L546 (3495)
KR (460,8)
TorqueSetp > max

c548
S.CutTorque
0.0
L550 (3824)
KR (670,7)
Cutting torque
d028
1
KR3028
L552 (0250)
B (110,8)
Cutting torque
B0548
Torque setpoint
> max. torque
S.TorqCutLight
TorqueCut_Enable
c549
Comparator
&
Start cut torque [60,7]
B0549
TorqueReduced
(0.1)
L587
TorqueMax_Local
(0.4)
L580
X<Y
max_Torque Cut
(1.5)
L578
S.CutTorqPos.
0.0
Torque cut enable
X>Y
X=Y
min_Torque Cut
(-1.5)
L579
X>Y
X=Y
End cut torque [60,7]
-1
X<Y
OM_Local [290,8]
S.ReducedTorque L584 (0000)
B (70,2)
act.max.Torque
c581
KR3581
Actual value
maximum torque
KR3582
Actual value
minimum torque
Comparator
L551 (3413)
KR (120,7)
1
Shear control
Torque calculation
Setpoint torque
L590 (3028)
KR (240,4)
TorqAcceleration
d026
KR3558
S.n_Acceleration
Torque Setp
d025
act.min.Torque
c582
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 240 -
S.SQRT_1
L617 (3707)
KR (480,2)
KR3617
Square root
KR3619
Neg. square root
S.SQRT_2
L618 (3414)
KR (120,8)
-1
S.SQRT_3
L619 (3001)
KR (70,2)
CutSpeed_Max
(1.1)
L575
S.Speed_dvCut
L585 (3577)
KR (265,7)
KR3575
0.0
S.Speed_VRef
L570 (3435)
KR (130,6)
max. cut speed
S.CutSpeedLimits
S.Max.Speed_Cut
L568 (0671)
B (370,5)
L574 (3575)
KR (250,5)
SpeedSetp_Cut
d021
S.Speed_DV_FGEN
L564 (3158)
KR (200,8)
KR3021
Speed setpoint cutting
S.Speed_FOVS
L565 (3020)
KR (265,5)
0.0
S.Speed_PosCtrl
L566 (3144)
KR (210,8)
L576
(-0.1)
CutSpeed_Min
1
Shear control
Cutting speed
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 250 -
JogSpeed
JogSpeed
(0.05)
L519
KR3519
S.JogSpeed_neg
L518 (3519)
KR (260,2)
S.JogSpeed1 L523 (3519)

KR (260,2)
S.JogPositiv1
L520 (0593)
B (290,6)
S.JogPositiv2
L521 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.JogPositiv3
0.0
-1
KR3518
JogSpeed_neg
Speed setpoint for jogging.

If required use limit switches to
stop the shear.
S.Sel. Ref/Jog
L529 (0592)
B (290,6)
&
L522 (0001)
B (70,2)
Speed Local
c533
S.Ramp_Local
S.JogSpeed2 L527 (3518)

KR (260,3)
S.JogNegativ1
L524 (0594)
B (290,6)
S.JogNegativ2
L525 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.JogNegativ3
StepsRampLocal
(5)
L540
0.0
Speed local mode
L517 (3533)
KR (260,6)
KR3533
1
1
Ramp local
KR3517
S.Jog1_Dir
Speed setpoint for the inverter
L528 (0594)
B (290,6)
&
S.Sel_SpeedStart
L526 (0001)
B (70,2)
L535 (0595)
B (290,7)
S.Sel_SpeedLocal
S.DisableSpdsetp
L541 (0000)
B (70,2)
L534 (0599)
B (290,8)
Spd_Referencing
(0.05)
L542
-1
S.LimSwitchStart
S.LimitSwitchEnd
S.Init_Ref_Dir
L536 (3021)
KR (250,6)
S.Speed_Local
L530 (0000)
B (70,2)
L531 (0001)
B (70,2)
L532 (1312)
B (170,4)
L537 (3517)
KR (260,8)
S
Tfilt n_setp
(1.2 ms)
L539
S.Speed_Local
0
PT1
speed setpoint
KR3023
1
L538 (3144)
KR (210,8)
0.0
S.SpeedPosCtrl
Speed setpoint switching for automatical referencing.

Speed reversion when reaching the limit switches.
1
2
Shear control
Speed local modes and setpoint for inverter
speed setp
d023
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
B0537
speed_local <> 0
B0536
speed_local = 0
7
Function diagram
8
- 260 -
Task : "Task cut curve" (may be disabled [50,5])

S.Speed_Set_OVS
F_over_max
(1.1)
L586
1.0
L567 (0666)
B (360,7)
Factor Overspeed
d020
S.EnableCutCurve
S.F_Overspeed
L562 (0576)
B (320,5)
Factor Overspeed
L560 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S&H
Overspeed_Max
(1.0)
L571
KR3020
S.Speed_VRef
L569
(1.0)
F_over_min
L563 (3435)
KR (130,6)
S.Speed_vCut
0.0
v_setp CutCurve
c577
S.Speed_dVsetp
L561 (3491)
KR (450,6)
KR3561
L583 (3561)
KR (265,5)
KR3577
L572
(0.3)
n_Cut_min
V_setp cut curve
L573
(1.0)
FactorCutCurve
S.Phi_cut_reduce H194 (3159)

KR (200,8)
S. SampleCut
H191 (0169)
B (200,8)
store input
S.Cutc_Int=0
H188 (0413)
B (120,8)
set integral value = 0
CutCurve_max
(0.0)
H189
S&H
y
S.V CutCurve
H187 (3577)
KR (265,7)
H193
(600 ms)
T Int CutCurve
1
2
Shear control
Cut curve and overspeed
KR3192
Position cut curve
H190
(0.0)
CutCurve_min
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 265 -
Manual mode
(0)
H518
Mask1 LocMode
(16#FFFF)
H516
Simulation
(0)
H519
B0518
Manual mode
Mask1 AutoMode
(16#FFFF)
H517
H537 (2621)
K (810,6)
Shear control word 1

via PLC
H502 (0862)
B (680,8)
H503 (0863)
B (680,8)
H504 (0864)
B (680,8)
&
H506 (0866)
B (680,8)
H507 (0867)
B (680,8)
H508 (0868)
B (680,8)
H509 (0869)
B (680,8)
H510 (0870)
B (680,8)
H511 (0871)
B (680,8)
H512 (0872)
B (680,8)
H513 (0873)
B (680,8)
H514 (0874)
B (680,8)
H515 (0875)
B (680,8)
1
2
Steuerung
Shear control word (SCTW1)
Shear CTW1

Bit 0
B0500
SCTW1.0
Bit 1 Continous cutting
B0501
SCTW1.1
Bit 2 Test cut
Bit 2 Test cut
B0502
SCTW1.2
Bit 3 Single cut
B0503
SCTW1.3
Bit 4 Format setpoint valid
B0504
SCTW1.4
Bit 5 Light gate web start
B0505
SCTW1.5
Bit 6 Referencing
Bit 6 Referencing
B0506
SCTW1.6
Bit 7
Bit 7 Enable Mewert speichern
B0507
SCTW1.7
Bit 8 Approach start position
B0508
SCTW1.8
Bit 9
Bit 9
B0509
SCTW1.9
Bit 10 Enable cut program
B0510
SCTW1.10
Bit 11 Crop cut
Bit 11 Crop cut
B0511
SCTW1.11
Bit 12 End cut
Bit 12 End cut
B0512
SCTW1.12
Bit 13
Bit 13
B0513
SCTW1.13
Bit 14 Approach knife change pos.
B0514
SCTW1.14
Bit 15 Option special sheet
B0515
SCTW1.15
Bit 3 Single cut

H505 (0865)
B (680,8)
Shear CTW1
d536
Bit 0
H501 (0861)
B (680,8)
Simulation mode
K2536
S.ShearCTW1 Bit0 ... Bit15

H500 (0860)
B (680,8)
B0519
S.SCTW1_simul
d539
SCTW1_PLC
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 270 -
Simulation mode
[200,3]
Manual mode [200,3]

Mask2 LocMode
(16#FFFF)
H540
S.SCTW2_simul
1
Mask2 AutoMode
(16#FFFF)
H541
S.ShearCTW2 Bit0 ... Bit15

H520 (0000)
B (70,2)
K2544

(source selection)
&
H522 (0000)
B (70,2)
H523 (0242)
B (110,4)
H524 (0243)
B (110,4)
Bit 0
B0520
SCTW2.0
Bit 1 External fault/alarm 1
B0521
SCTW2.1
B0522
SCTW2.2
Bit 3 Jogging 1
B0523
SCTW2.3
Bit 4 Jogging 2
B0524
SCTW2.4
Bit 5
Bit 5
B0525
SCTW2.5
Bit 6
Bit 6
B0526
SCTW2.6
Bit 7 No quick stop
Bit 7 No quick stop
B0527
SCTW2.7
Bit 8
Bit 8
B0528
SCTW2.8
Bit 9 Coarse reference
Bit 9 Coarse reference
B0529
SCTW2.9
Bit 10
Bit 10
B0530
SCTW2.10
Bit 11
Bit 11
B0531
SCTW2.11
Bit 12 Opt. enable cut mode
Bit 12 Opt. enable cut mode
B0532
SCTW2.12
Bit 13
B0533
SCTW2.13
Bit 14
B0534
SCTW2.14
B0535
SCTW2.15
Bit 3 Jogging 1
H526 (0000)
B (70,2)
H527 (0842)
B (680,4)
H528 (0000)
B (70,2)
H529 (0264)
B (100,8)
H530 (0000)
B (70,2)
H531 (0000)
B (70,2)
H532 (0000)
B (70,2)
H533 (0000)
B (70,2)
H534 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 13
Optional enable. May be connected to

H600 [290,1] or inverted to H566 [300,1]
Bit 14
H535 (0000)
B (70,2)
1
2
Control logic
d543
SCTW2_PLC
Bit 4 Jogging 2
H525 (0000)
B (70,2)
Shear CTW2
Bit 0
H521 (0241)
B (110,4)
Shear CTW2
d544
H542 (2623)
K (810,6)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 280 -
RequestLocal1
d591
B0591
Priority evaluation
local operation modes
SCTW1.6 Referencing [270,8]

I1
highest priority
&
H597 (0577)
B (320,5)
OM referencing
B0593
OM Jogging 1
B0594
OM Jogging 2
Q1
SCTW2.3 Jogging 1 [280,8]
S.EnableJog
B0592
Request local mode 1
I2
Q2
I3
Q3
OM Local2
d599
1
1
S.Hold OM Local
&
H594 (0537)
B (260,7)
SCTW2.4 Jogging 2 [280,8]

SCTW1.8 Appr. start pos. [270,8]
I5
Q5
B0595
OM appr. start position
Q6
B0596
OM appr. knife chg. pos.
B0597
no request local mode
B0598
request local mode
lowest priority
all inputs zero
&
SCTW1.14 Appr.knife change

pos [270,8]
not OM local
Q4
Enable
OM local
B0600
I4
I6
&
B0599
The value '1' at the input with the

highest priority is switched
through.
d595
OM Start Pos.
d596
OM knifeChgPos
d598
OM local
S.Enable Prio1
H590 (0666)
B (360,7)
S.Enable Prio2
Priority evaluation
local operation modes
Request cont. cutting [300,6]
H600 (0001)
B (70,2)
I1
SCTW1.2 Test cut [270,8]
SCTW1.3 Single cut [270,8]

no request local mode [290,8]
no continous cutting [300,6]
Q1
B0601
Pulse continous cutting
I2
Q2
B0602
Pulse test cut
I3
Q3
B0603
Pulse single cut
I4
Q4
B0604
Enable end cut
I5
Q5
SCTW1.12 End cut [270,8]

no end cut [320,7]
highest priority
Activation of cutting operation modes

(automatic modes)
I6
&
Enable
no test cut [310,6]
d605
Enable Prio2
no single cut [310,6]
lowest priority
Q6
all inputs zero
The value '1' at the input with the

highest priority is switched
through.
no fault [530,8]
Shear standing in start position [340,7]
1
Control logic
Priority handling
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 290 -
End Cut Prog1

d562
Req. Cut Prog1
d561
Special Sheet
d563
S. NumberOfSheets
H560 (2809)
K (670,3)
SCTW1.10 Enable cut program [270,8]
Cut program
SCTW1.15 Option special sheet [270,8]
SCTW1.1 Cont. cutting [270,8]
B0561
Request cont. cutting

by cut program 1
B0562
End cut program 1
B0563
Request special sheet
B0564
Request cont. cutting
OM cont. cutting
d565
Starting condition
Pulse cont. cutting [290,8]
B0565
OM continous cutting
B0566
no cont. cutting
State switching
Passed calculation position [340,4]
1
Stopping conditions
For the first and the lastcut the output

'Standard sheet size' is set to '0'
&
Continous
cutting
Request local mode [290,8]

Shear not calibrated[170,5]
B0567
Standard sheet size

special sheet size
d575
Controller disabled [360,7]

S.AND_CutStop_1
H566 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND_CutStop_2
Test with standard size [310,6]
S.Stop cutting
Stop cutting
B0560
&
B0575
Use special sheet size
H564 (0560)
B (300,2)
H567 (0001)
B (70,2)
Request cont. cutting [300,5]
1
Control logic
Operation modes 1
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 300 -
OM Single cut
d568
Starting condition
Pulse single cut [290,8]
B0568
OM single cut
B0569
no single cut
B0570
OM test cut
B0571
no test cut
B0572
Test with standard size
State switching
Single cut
Stopping conditions
&

Shear not calibrated[ 170,5]

OM Test cut
d570
Starting condition
Pulse test cut [290,8]
State switching
Test cut
Stopping conditions
&

Shear not calibrated[170,5]

1
Control logic
Operation modes 2
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 310 -
Starting condition
S.Light OM_EndCut
Material detected
SCTW1.5 Light gate [270,8]
OM End cut
d573
H572 (0555)
B (320,2)
B0555
&
Enable end cut [290,8]
B0573
OM end cut
B0574
no end cut
State switching
End cut
Stopping conditions
&

Shear not calibrated [170,5]

Cutting active
d576
OM Continous cutting [300,6]

OM Single cut [310,6]
OM Test cut [310,6]
OM End cut [320,7]
1
Control logic
Operation modes 3
B0576
Cutting active
B0577
Cutting disabled
B0580
Start cutting mode
B0581
End cutting mode
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 320 -
n_Shear = n_Ref (0095) [480,8]
&
&
Format mode [410,5]
S. RangeTest H450 (3413)

KR (120,7)
B0455
Cutting/synchronous
in SynchrRange
d453
x
1
1
S.RangeTestStart H451 (3091)

KR (60,4)
B0453
in synchronous range
B0454
in format range
Zero speed detection for

the shear drive
Limit n_zero
(0.002)
H457
Cutting possible
Testing if the knife is in the

region where it runs
synchronous to the material
S.RangeTestEnd H452 (3092)
KR (60,4)
B0456
Test if the shear position is

the knife change position
Hyst n_zero
(0.001)
H458
KCPos_Range
(2.0)
H462
KCPos_Hyst
(1.0)
H463
n_shear > 0
d459
X>Y
S. n Standstill
H456 (3411)
KR (120,7)
B0459
X=Y
X<Y
B0460
n_shear > 0
S.ActPos_KCPos
n_shear = 0
H461 (3413)
KR (120,7)
X>Y
X
X=Y
d460
n_Shear Zero
InKnifeChangePos
d464
B0464
Knife in change pos.
X<Y
Y
S. Setp_KCPos
0.0
1
Control logic
Range monitoring 1
H472 (3109)
KR (60,4)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 330 -
Testing if the shear is standing in start position

Startpos Range
(0.01)
H642
The start position is given in internal position normalization!
Startpos_Hyst
(0.003)
H643
in starting position
d644
S.n_zero (Start)
H640 (3414)
KR (120,7)
StandingStartpos
d647
H645 (0460)
B (330,3)
X>Y
S.Act.Pos. (Start)
DelayStartpos
(500 ms)
H646
&
B0647
Shear standing in start position
X=Y
X<Y
B0644
Shear in start position
S.Start Position
H641 (3161)
KR (200,8)
Generate a pulse for calculation at

special shear position
S.Pos. (CalcPos)
Comparator
H648 (3414)
KR (120,7)
X>Y
B0649
Passed calculation position
B0648
fall below calculation position
B0640
Pos. > calculation position
B0641
Pos. < calculation position
B0701
Ref. pos. > start length
B0702
Ref. pos. < start length
X=Y
Pos.CalcPuls
(0.75)
H649
X<Y
Is the material position bigger than "start length"?

(After passing the "start length" the shear starts accelerating
to web speed (true with big sheets or linear systems) )
Comparator
Reference position
RefPos limited [200, 2]
X>Y
X=Y
Start length [200, 8]
1
Control logic
Range monitoring 2
X<Y
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 340 -
Watching or limiting an actual value position

(in T3)
Watching or limitation of the shear position

(T3)
Range1_OVF
c218
S.optRange1_max L215 (3001)

KR (70,2)
y
B0218
S. optRange1 L216 (3413)

KR (120,7)
S.optRange1_min L217 (3000)

KR (70,2)
Range2_OVF
c232
S.optRange2_max L229 (3162)

KR (200,8)
Range1_Overflow
S. optRange2 L230 (3438)
KR (135,5)
KR3216
Range1_limited
B0219
Range1_Underflow S.optRange2_min L231 (3163)

KR (200,8)
c219
Range1_UF
Range2_Overflow
KR3230
Range2_limited
B0233
Range2_Underflow
c233
Range2_UF
Out of Range3
c234
Range monitoring with variable limits

(in T3; e.g. speed depending)
out of Range3
1
Rng3_Factor_Max
(1.0)
L223
S.Range3ShiftMax
B0232
B0234
Compare3 Hyst
(0.0)
L594
S.Compare3 Range
L593 (3001)
KR (70,2)
Range3_max
(1000 mm)
L224
T3/50
Compare3 X>Y
S.Compare3
L220 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L591 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Range3_OVF
c227
X>Y
B1591
X=Y
B1592
X<Y
B1593
Compare3 X=Y
S.optRange3
L221 (3413)
KR (120,7)
Compare3 X<Y
x
S.Range3ShiftMin
L222 (3000)
KR (70,2)
B0227
Range3_Overflow
KR3221
Range3_limited
B0228
Range3_Underflow
S. Compare3 Mid
L592 (3000)
KR (70,2)
c228
Range3_UF
L225
(0.0)
Rng3_Factor_Min
L226
(0.0 mm)
Range3_min
The monitoring and limitation function of this chart are for free usage.
1
Control logic
Range monitoring 3
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 350 -
S.CU ready 2
(Run)
S.CU ready 1
(Flying restart)
H654 (0342)
B (620,4)
H653 (0320)
B (620,8)
S.CU ready 3
(TR encoder inactive)
Inverter ready
d660
H655 (0150)
B (165,8)
S.CU ready 4
&
H656 (0001)
B (70,2)
B0661
Inverter not ready
B0660
Inverter ready
B0663
Pulse disable
B0662
Enable inverter
Enable Inverter
d662
S.Enable_PLC
H651 (0843)
B (680,4)
EnableDelayLoc
(10 s)
H659
EnableSetpoints
d664
S.EnableLocal
H650 (0591)
B (290,6)
Enable from brake control [370,4]
&
1
B0664
Enable setpoints
B0665
Disable setpoints
1
S.Enable Ramp
H657 (0844)
B (680,4)
EnableController
d666
S.optEnableCntrl
S.Start Ramp
&
H658 (0845)
B (680,4)
&
H661 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.Enable Setp.
B0666
Controller enabled
B0667
Controller disabled
H652 (0846)
B (680,4)
1
2
Control logic
Enable inverter / setpoints / controller
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 360 -
EPC Enable Position Control
S.EPC SetpEnable
H667 (0666)
B (360,7)
S.EPC calibrated
H668 (1310)
B (170,5)
EnablePosControl
d671
S.EPC OM_local
H669 (0600)
B (290,8)
S.EPC option
&
H670 (1346)
B (410,5)
B0671
B0670
Disable position controller
Operation modes using position controller

OM approach start pos. [290,8]
OM approach knife chg. pos. [290,8]

Brake control logic
T_Brake close
(200 ms)
H678
T_Brake release
(200 ms)
H679
EnableFrom Brake
d680
S.BrakeCUready
H673 (0660)
B (360,5)
B0680
Enable from brake control
B0676
Release brake
S.Brake_CU_off
H672 (0344)
B (620,4)
Release brake
d676
S.Quick stop
H674 (0345)
B (620,4)
S.Brake_option
&
H675 (0001)
B (70,2)
1
2
3
Control logic
Enable position controller / brake control logic
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 370 -
Speed source
Speed normalizations
Position source
Position shear
KR3040
speed_norm_1
Position shear norm.
KR3041
speed_norm_2
Material position
KR3042
speed_norm_3
Reference position
KR3043
speed_norm_4
Speed shear
Web speed
(Speed2)
S.CamEnable pos.
L043 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.CamEnable neg.
L044 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.Cam_X+
Cam_dx
L038 (3413)
KR (120,7)
S.ActPos. Cam
KR3038
L040 (3038)
KR (380,2)
Actual value
position
Cam ResetMode
(0)
L036
Cam deltaPos.Max
(100.0)
L037
Separate enable inputs for

positive and negative speed
Cam Pos.Max
(360.0)
L045
Cam Pos.Min
(0.0)
L046
Treatment of position overflows
S.Cam X-
Cam active
S.Speed Cam L041 (3411)

KR (120,7)
L039 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Cam controller
general settings and inputs
S.SpeedNorm.Cam L042 (3040)

KR (380,3)
Cam 1
XA
XB
Cam 3
Cam1_Q
XA
XB
B0040
Position
Cam1_QN
DT
Cam1_XA
(0.5)
L047
1
Control logic
Cam group
B0048 inverted
Cam2_DT
(0.0 ms)
L052
Cam1_XB
(0.6)
L048
Position
Cam2_QN
DT
Cam2_XA
(0.5)
L050
XA
Cam4_DT
(0.0 ms)
L058
XB
B0042
B0041
Position
Cam3_QN
DT
Cam3_XA
(0.5)
L053
Cam3_Q
XA
XB
B0044
B0043
Cam2_XB
(0.6)
L051
B0049
Cam 4
Cam3_DT
(0.0 ms)
L055
Cam2_Q
B0048
Cam not active
Normalization
speed
Cam 2
Cam1_DT
(0.0 ms)
L049
Logical OR
of all cams
Actual value speed
Position
Cam4_XA
(0.5)
L056
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
Cam4_QN
DT
B0045
Cam3_XB
(0.6)
L054
Cam4_Q
B0046
B0047
Cam4_XB
(0.6)
L057
7
Function diagram
8
- 380 -
Boolean
inputs
STATE
I1
I5
I6
I7
I8
XS1
16
11
MS2
Input
Logic for MS2

(see MS1)
MS3
Input
Logic for MS3

(see MS1)
MS4
Input
Logic for MS4

(see MS1)
MR1
Input
Logic for MR1

(see MS1)
QS
QE
R dominant
10
S
R
12
MS2
MS4
&
16
I4
MS3
&
Input
I3
MS1
I2
Selection
masks
Logic for MS1
16
MS1
Bit 0
MR2
Input
13
14
MR3
Input
15
Logic for MR2

(see MS1)
Q
QN
QEN
Logic for MR3

(see MS1)
MR1
QR
16
MR2
MR
MR3
Input
16
16
&
MR
Masks
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Note:
XS1 is set to 1 if all bits of the "Input" quantity masked
by MS1 are set '1'.
corresponding input I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Example: MS1 = 16#3080 = 0011 0000 1000 0000b

Corresponding logic function: XS1 = I6 I5 I8
1
2
Definition of the logic function block STATE
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 400 -
Mode LinearAxis
(0)
H120
B0120
ModeLinear
ModeSwitch_MS2
ModeSwitch_MS4
(0)
(0)
L340
L342
ModeSwitch_MS1
ModeSwitch_MS3
(16#009C)
(0)
L339
L341
May be used to watch the mode switching

respectively to detect if the speed is to fast
for the actual format size.
S.ModeError
MS1
MS2
S.ModeSwitch_I1
Disable
MS3
MS4
Set masks
L331 (0665)
B (360,6)
Ref.pos > start length [340,4]
I1
L332 (0644)
B (340,4)
Positioning mode
L333 (0576)
B (320,4)
B1347
QN
B1346
QE
B1345
QEN
B1344
Format mode
L334 (1257)
B (415,4)
I4
Start positioning
STATE
S.ModeSwitch_I5
Mode linear axis
Q
I3
S.ModeSwitch_I4
Knife at the top position
B1348
I2
S.ModeSwitch_I3
Cutting mode
Mode switching error
&
ModePositioning
c347
S.ModeSwitch_I2
ErrorModeSwitch
c348
L349 (0454)
B (330,5)
L335 (0120)
B (410,2)
Start format mode
I5
S.ModeSwitch_I6
Positioning active
L336 (0499)
B (230,5)
I6
S.ModeSwitch_I7
Mode Positioning
L337 (1347)
B (410,5)
I7
S.ModeSwitch_I8
Material cut
L338 (0236)
B (430,2)
Reset masks
I8
MR1
MR3
MR2
L343
(16#2040)
ModeSwitch_MR1
L345
(16#0000)
ModeSwitch_MR3
L344
(16#0000)
ModeSwitch_MR2
1
2
Mode switching (positioning/format mode)
MR
L346
(16#0003)
ModeSwitch_MR
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 410 -
Parameter setting for the function

"lower knife"
Parameter setting for the function

"raise knife"
Logic1_MS1 Logic1_MS2 Logic1_MS3 Logic1_MS4
(16#000A)
(16#0012)
(16#0240)
(0)
L251
L252
L253
L254
MS1
MS2
MS3

(16#1026)
(16#4280)
(0)
(0)
L271
L272
L273
L274
MS4
MS1
S.Logic1_I1
L243 (0665)
B (360,6)
I1
Logic1_Q
c259
I2
L264 (0576)
B (320,4)
Logic1_Q
Q
I3
(Knife at top position)

QN
I4
(Knife at bottom position)
I5
B1260
Logic1_QE
STATE
S.Logic1_I5
L247 (0234)
B (350,5)
QE
B1258
QEN
B1257
Logic1_QEN
(Out of lowering range)
Logic2_Q
c279
I2
(Cutting mode)
Logic2_Q
I3
B1279
QN
B1280
QE
B1278
QEN
B1277
(Format mode)
Logic2_QN
S.Logic2_I4
L266 (0245)
B (110,4)
I4
(Knife at bottom position)
Logic2_QE
STATE
L267 (0234)
B (350,5)
L268 (0237)
B (430,2)
I6
I5
(Out of lowering range)
I6
(Material still not cut)
I7
(Manual mode UP)
I8
(Manual mode DOWN)
Logic2_QEN
S.Logic2_I7
I7
L269 (0247)
B (110,4)
(Manual mode UP)
S.Logic1_I8
L250 (0248)
B (110,4)
(Disable)
S.Logic2_I6
S.Logic1_I7
L249 (0247)
B (110,4)
I1
S.Logic2_I5
S.Logic1_I6
L248 (0000)
B (70,2)
MS4
Set masks
S.Logic2_I3
L265 (1346)
B (410,5)
B1259
Logic1_QN
S.Logic1_I4
L246 (0245)
B (110,4)
MS3
S.Logic2_I2
(Cutting mode)
S.Logic1_I3
L245 (0244)
B (110,4)
L263 (0665)
B (360,6)
(Disable)
S.Logic1_I2
L244 (0576)
B (320,4)
MS2
S.Logic2_I1
Set masks
S.Logic2_I8
I8
(Manual mode DOWN)
MR1
MR2
L270 (0248)
B (110,4)
Reset masks
MR3
L255
L256
L257
(16#4200)
(0)
(0)
Logic1_MR1 Logic1_MR2 Logic1_MR3
MR1
MR
L258
(16#0005)
Logic1_MR
Reset masks
MR3
L275
L276
L277
(16#8200)
(16#0012)
(0)
STATE_Logic1
1
2
Parametrizable logic 1 (raise/lower knife)
MR2
MR
L278
(16#0009)
Logic2_MR
STATE_Logic2
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 415 -

(16#0000)
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
L869
L870
L871
L872
MS1
MS2
MS3

(16#0000)
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
L889
L890
L891
L892
MS4
MS1
S.Logic3_I1
L861 (0000)
B (70,2)
L881 (0000)
B (70,2)
I1
S.Logic3_I2
L862 (0000)
B (70,2)
L882 (0000)
B (70,2)
I2
Logic3_Q
Q
I3
QN
I4
B1861
Logic3_QE
STATE
S.Logic3_I5
L865 (0000)
B (70,2)
QE
B1862
QEN
B1863
Logic3_QEN
I5
Logic4_Q
B1880
QN
B1881
QE
B1882
QEN
B1883
I3
Logic4_QN
S.Logic4_I4
L884 (0000)
B (70,2)
I4
Logic4_QE
STATE
L885 (0000)
B (70,2)
L886 (0000)
B (70,2)
I6
Logic4_QEN
I5
I6
S.Logic4_I7
L887 (0000)
B (70,2)
I7
S.Logic3_I8
L868 (0000)
B (70,2)
I2
S.Logic4_I6
S.Logic3_I7
L867 (0000)
B (70,2)
I1
S.Logic4_I5
S.Logic3_I6
L866 (0000)
B (70,2)
MS4
Set masks
S.Logic4_I3
L883 (0000)
B (70,2)
B1860
Logic3_QN
S.Logic3_I4
L864 (0000)
B (70,2)
MS3
S.Logic4_I2
S.Logic3_I3
L863 (0000)
B (70,2)
MS2
S.Logic4_I1
Set masks
I7
S.Logic4_I8
I8
L888 (0000)
B (70,2)
Reset masks
MR1
MR2
MR3
L873
L874
L875
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
Reset masks
MR1
MR
L860
(16#0000)
Logic3_MR
MR2
MR3
L893
L894
L895
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
(16#0000)
STATE_Logic3
1
I8
MR
L880
(16#0000)
Logic4_MR
STATE_Logic4
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 420 -
Logic5_MS1
(16#0000)
H937
Logic5_MS2
(16#0000)
H938
MS1
MS2
S.Logic5_I1
H933 (0000)
B (70,2)
Logic5_Q
I1
B0933
I2
STATE
QN
B0934
QE
B0935
Logic5_QE
I3
Logic5_QEN
S.Logic5_I4
H936 (0000)
B (70,2)
MS1
MS2
H941 (0000)
B (70,2)
Set masks
Logic6_Q
I1
B0941
QN
B0942
QE
B0943
QEN
B0944
S.Logic6_I2
Logic5_QN
S.Logic5_I3
H935 (0000)
B (70,2)
Logic6_MS2
(16#0000)
H946
S.Logic6_I1
Set masks
S.Logic5_I2
H934 (0000)
B (70,2)
Logic6_MS1
(16#0000)
H945
QEN
B0936
H942 (0000)
B (70,2)
STATE
S.Logic6_I3
H943 (0000)
B (70,2)
Reset masks
Logic6_QE
I3
Logic6_QEN
S.Logic6_I4
H944 (0000)
B (70,2)
I4
Logic6_QN
I2
I4
Reset masks
MR1
MR
MR1
MR
H939
(16#0000)
Logic5_MR1
H940
(16#0000)
Logic5_MR
H947
(16#0000)
Logic6_MR1
H948
(16#0000)
Logic6_MR
1
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 421 -
Remark:
S.AND1_1
S.OR1_1
The computation order of free function blocks (charts L700 (0001)

B (70,2)
425 to 445) can be read beside each block.
L710 (0000)
B (70,2)
E.g..: T3/9 means 9. free block in task T3
S.AND1_2
L701 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.AND_OR1_1
AND_OR1
S.AND_OR1_2
B1830
&
L702 (0001)
B (70,2)
L712 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.OR4_2
OR1_Q
B0710
T3/8
L704 (0001)
B (70,2)
AND2_Q
&
B0703
S.AND2_3
T3/10
L833 (0000)
B (70,2)
AND_OR2
S.AND_OR2_2
B1834
S.AND3_2
L835 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.OR5_1
T3/11
L836 (0000)
B (70,2)
AND_OR3
S.AND_OR3_2
B0836
L837 (0000)
B (70,2)
&
S.AND4_1
H633 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.AND4_2
H634 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.OR5_2
T1/15
OR5_Q
B1323
L324 (0000)
B (70,2)
T3/44
S.OR2_2
L714 (0000)
B (70,2)
OR2_Q
B0713
T3/5
AND3_Q
&
B0631
H632 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.AND_OR3_1
L715 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND3_1
H631 (0001)
B (70,2)
OR4_Q
B1321
S.OR2_3
B1833
L834 (0000)
B (70,2)
&
L705 (0001)
B (70,2)
T1/14
L322 (0000)
B (70,2)
L323 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.OR2_1
L713 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND2_2
S.AND_OR2_1
S.AND_OR3_3
B0700
S.OR1_3
L703 (0001)
B (70,2)
B1831
L832 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND_OR2_3
&
L711 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND2_1
L831 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND_OR1_3
T3/13
S.OR1_2
AND1_Q
S.AND1_3
T3/9
L830 (0000)
B (70,2)
T3/7
S.OR4_1
L321 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.OR3_1
L806 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.OR3_2
T3/12
OR3_Q
B1806
L807 (0000)
B (70,2)
T3/6
AND4_Q
&
B0633
B0837
L838 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.AND5_1
L689 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.AND5_2
L690 (0001)
B (70,2)
1
AND/OR gates
T1/7
AND5_Q
&
B0689
S.AND6_1
L691 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.AND6_2
L692 (0001)
B (70,2)
T1/8
AND6_Q
&
S.AND7_1
L693 (0001)
B (70,2)
B0691
S.AND7_2
L694 (0001)
B (70,2)
T1/9
AND7_Q
&
B0693
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 425 -
S.S RS-FlipFlop1
L236 (1277)
B (415,8)
Parameter setting for:

"material cut"
S.R RS-FlipFlop1
L237 (0454)
B (330,5)
L695 (0000)
B (70,2)
T3/54
S
R
S.Not1
S.S RS-FlipFlop4
B0236
RSFF1_Q
B0237
RSFF1_QN
L732 (0000)
B (70,2)
T1/12
S
S.R RS-FlipFlop4
B0695
RSFF4_Q
S.Not2
B0696
RSFF4_QN
L733 (0000)
B (70,2)
L696 (0000)
B (70,2)
S dominant!
T3/18
B0732
Not1_Q
B0733
Not2_Q
B0543
Not1_Q
B0544
Not2_Q
T3/19
S.Not3
L543 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.S RS-FlipFlop2
L734 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.Not4
L544 (0000)
B (70,2)
T3/46
S
S.R RS-FlipFlop2
B0734
RSFF2_Q
B0735
RSFF2_QN
T3/52
1
T3/53
L735 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.Edge1
S.S RS-FlipFlop3
L736 (0000)
B (70,2)
T3/47
S
S.R RS-FlipFlop3
T3/20
L709 (0000)
B (70,2)
B0736
RSFF3_Q
B0737
RSFF3_QN
L685 (3000)
KR (70,2)
in T5
L687 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.NOP2
L686 (3000)
KR (70,2)
B0708
Edge1_QN
T3/21
L645 (0000)
B (70,2)
in T5
B0687
L688 (0000)
B (70,2)
KR3686
S.Switch1_0
T1/4
Switch1
S.Switch1_1
KR3706
B0645
Edge2_Q
B0646
Edge2_QN
L641 (5684)
KK (70,8)
S.Switch3_0
T3/22
Switch2
S.Switch2_1
KR3716
T3/23
Switch3
S.Switch3_1
L825 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L827 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3825
S.Switch3_sel
S.Switch4_sel
L718 (0000)
B (70,2)
L826 (0000)
B (70,2)
L829 (0000)
B (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
Switch4
S.Switch4_1
L828 (3001)
KR (70,2)
T3/24
0
S.Switch2_sel
S.Switch4_0
L824 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L708 (0000)
B (70,2)
Switch_DI
KK5640
L642 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.Switch1_sel
1
T3/25
S.SwitchDI_1
B0688
L717 (3000)
KR (70,2)
32bit integer switch
S.SwitchDI_sel
in T5
S.Switch2_0
L716 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L640 (5422)
KK (80,4)
S.Bool_NOP2
in T5
L706 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L707 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S.Edge2
S.Bool_NOP1
KR3685
Edge1_Q
S.SwitchDI_0
L737 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.NOP1
B0709
KR3827
1
7
Function diagram
8
- 430 -
T3/45
Limit_active
S.Limit_max
Limiter
L746 (3001)
KR (70,2)
T3/42
S.Compare_X
B0747
L744 (3000)
KR (70,2)
y
B0746
x
S.Limit_min
L748 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Compare2 Hyst
(0.1)
L751
S.Compare2 Range
L750 (3001)
KR (70,2)
Limit_max
KR3747
Limit_out
B0748
Limit_min
L745 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Ramp up time
(10000ms)
Ramp down time
L724
(10000ms)
L725 S.Ramp max
Comparator
with hysteresis
(additional comparators on chart 350)
X>Y
L749 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S. Compare2 Mid
B0749
Compare2 X>Y
X=Y
B0750
Compare2 X=Y
X<Y
B0751
Compare2 X<Y
L752 (3006)
KR (70,2)
S.Character_X
L753 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Compare X>Y
X=Y
B0743
Compare X=Y
X<Y
B0745
Compare X<Y
Ramp function
T3/48
y
x
Ramp Y=X
B0722
S.Ramp Set Value L723 (3000)

KR (70,2)
S.Ramp set
L727 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.Ramp enable
L726 (0000)
B (70,2)
B0720
Ramp at max
KR3720
Ramp output
B0721
Ramp at min
S.Ramp min
L722 (3007)
KR (70,2)
Character_X1
(0.0)
L754
T3/43
B0744
S.Ramp input L720 (3000)

KR (70,2)
2-Point-Characteristic
X>Y
L721 (3001)
KR (70,2)
T3/41
S.Compare2
S.Compare_Y
S.Limit_inp
L747 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Comparator T1/1
Integrator T
(1000 ms)
L822
Integrator LU
(1.0)
L819
Integrator
T3/49
y
Character_Y1
(0.0)
L755
B0817
Character_Y
S.Integrator_X L818 (3000)

KR (70,2)
Int upper limit
KR3819
KR3753
Character_Y2
(1.0)
L757
S.Integrator set
L756
(1.0)
Character_X2
1
Control functions
B0818

KR (70,2)
Int lower limit
L820
(-1.0)
Integrator LL
L823 (0000)
B (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 435 -
T_OnDelay1
(100ms)
L729
S.OnDelay1
L728 (0000)
B (70,2)
T_SingleShot_1
(0 ms)
L877
T3/14
T
B0728
OnDelay1_Q
L876 (0000)
B (70,2)
T_OnDelay2
(100ms)
L899
S.OnDelay2
L898 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.SingleShot_2
B0898
OnDelay2_Q
L878 (0000)
B (70,2)
T_OffDelay1
(100ms)
L731
S.OffDelay1
L730 (0000)
B (70,2)
B0876
S.SingleShot_3
B0730
OffDelay1_Q
L896 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.OffDelay2
PT1
KR3740
PT1_out
L738 (0000)
B (70,2)
B0878
SingleShot_2
Band-stop
filter
S.Bandstop_inp
L742 (3000)
KR (70,2)
T1/11
T
T1/2
S.set_PT1_zero
T1/10
T
Tfilt PT1
(20ms)
L741
S.PT1_inp
L740 (3000)
KR (70,2)
B0896
SingleShot_3
Quality
(2.0)
L739
T1/3
KR3742
Band stop
S.StopFrequency
L743 (3002)
KR (70,2)
T_OffDelay2
(100ms)
L759
L758 (0000)
B (70,2)
SingleShot_1
T_SingleShot_3
(0 ms)
L897
T3/16
0
T_SingleShot_2
(0 ms)
L879
T3/15
T
Low pass filter

order 1
T1/9
S.SingleShot_1
T3/17
0
1
2
Time dependent functions
B0758
OffDelay2_Q
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 436 -
S.FreeWord
L760 (2061)
K (790,3)
S.FreeW_B2
L810 (2000)
K (70,2)
1
Type conversion
T3/3
B0760
FreeWord_0
Bit 1
B0761
FreeWord_1
Bit 2
B0762
FreeWord_2
Bit 3
B0763
FreeWord_3
S.DW_low
Bit 4
B0764
FreeWord_4
Bit 5
B0765
FreeWord_5
L762 (2000)
K (70,2)
Bit 6
B0766
FreeWord_6
Bit 7
B0767
FreeWord_7
Bit 8
B0768
FreeWord_8
Bit 9
B0769
FreeWord_9
Bit 10
B0770
FreeWord_10
Bit 11
B0771
FreeWord_11
Bit 12
B0772
FreeWord_12
Bit 13
B0773
FreeWord_13
Bit 14
B0774
FreeWord_14
Bit 15
B0775
FreeWord_15
Bit 0
B1810
FreeWord2_0
Bit 1
B1811
FreeWord2_1
Bit 2
B1812
FreeWord2_2
Bit 3
B1813
FreeWord2_3
Bit 4
B1814
FreeWord2_4
L761 (2000)
K (70,2)
T3/1
L764 (2000)
K (70,2)
100 %
B1815
FreeWord2_5
B1816
FreeWord2_6
Bit 7
B1817
FreeWord2_7
Bit 8
B1818
FreeWord2_8
Bit 9
B1819
FreeWord2_9
Bit 10
B1820
FreeWord2_10
Bit 11
B1821
FreeWord2_11
Bit 12
B1822
FreeWord2_12
Bit 13
B1823
FreeWord2_13
Bit 14
B1824
FreeWord2_14
Bit 15
B1825
FreeWord2_15
1.0
L766 (3000)
KR (70,2)
1.0
Float_N2
K2766
100 %
T3/35
DW
L605 (5000)
KK (70,2)
T3/55
S.Float
Word_Float
KR3765
S.DW_W1
DW_float
1.0
Word_Norm
(1.0)
L765
T3/2
S.Word
100 %
KR3763
low
Bit 6
DW
high
T3/4
Bit 5
DW_Norm
(1.0)
L763
S.DW_high
Bit 0
high
K2605
DW_W1 high
low
K2606
DW_W1 low
KK5816
W_DW1
L767
(1.0)
Float_Norm
S.W_DW1 high
L816 (2000)
K (70,2)
T3/36
DW
high
S.W_DW1 low
L817 (2000)
K (70,2)
low
T3/33
S.I_R_1
L646 (2000)
K (70,2)
I_R1_Y
KR3604
R
T3/34
S.R_I1
L647 (3000)
KR (70,2)
R_I1
K2647
L811 (3000)
KR (70,2)
T3/56
S.R_DI
D_DI
KK5811
DI
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 440 -
S.ADDI1 X1
L606 (2000)
K (70,2)
S.ADD1 X1
T3/37
K2607
ADDI_Y
S.MUL1 X1
L786 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L796 (3001)
KR (70,2)
S.ADD1 X2
S.ADDI1 X2
L607 (2000)
K (70,2)
S.MUL1 X2
T3/26
L787 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3786
ADD_1
S.ADD1 X3
T3/38
K2608
SUBI_Y
S.SUBI1 X2
S.DIVI1 X1
L812 (2001)
K (70,2)
S.DIVI1 X2
DIVI_1 Y
X1 modulo X2
L813 (2001)
K (70,2)
L799 (3001)
KR (70,2)
K2813
S.MULI1 X2
L815 (2001)
K (70,2)
MULI_1 Y
double word result

KK5814
S.MUL2 X2
ADD_2
S.MUL3 X1
T1/13
MUL_2
KR3808
ADD_3
T3/51
L615 (3001)
KR (70,2)
KR3615
MUL_3
KR3802
DIV_1
KR3804
DIV_2
S.MUL3 X2
L809 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L616 (3001)
KR (70,2)
MULI_1 (DW)
S.DIV1 X1
L792 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L802 (3001)
KR (70,2)
T1/5
KR3792
SUB_1
S.SUB1 X2
S.DIV1 X2
S.DIV2 X1
S.SUB2 X1
L794 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L804 (3001)
KR (70,2)
T3/28
KR3794
T3/32
SUB_2
S.DIV2 X2
S.SUB2 X2
L805 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L795 (3000)
KR (70,2)
T3/31
L803 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L793 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3799
L801 (3001)
KR (70,2)
S.ADD3 X2
S.SUB1 X1
1
Arithmetics
T3/30
L800 (3001)
KR (70,2)
S.MUL2 X3
L791 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L808 (3000)
KR (70,2)
K2814
KR3789
DIVI_1 (MOD)
T3/39
L814 (2001)
K (70,2)
T3/27
S.ADD2 X3
S.ADD3 X1
S.MULI1 X1
S.MUL2 X1
L790 (3000)
KR (70,2)
K2812
MUL_1
S.ADD2 X1
S.ADD2 X2
T3/40
KR3796
L798 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L789 (3000)
KR (70,2)
L609 (2000)
K (70,2)
T3/29
S.MUL1 X3
L788 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S.SUBI1 X1
L608 (2000)
K (70,2)
L797 (3001)
KR (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 445 -
KP-Adaption
10 points
Parameter number L470 ... L489
even:
X-values
odd:
Y-values
KP_X1
(0.0)
L470
KP_X10
(2.0)
L488
KP_Y1
(1.0)
L471
KP_Diagr_Outp
c490
S.KP_Polygon
L496 (3164)
KR (200,8)
KR3490
output KP polygon
KP_Y10
(1.0)
L489
Cut Polygon
Speed = f(Position)
20 points
even:
X-values
odd:
Y-values
n_cut_X1
(0.0)
L390
n_cut_X20
(360.0)
L428
Type CutCurve
(1)
L328
Validate changes
n_cut_Y1
(1.0)
L391
set CutCurve
(0)
L327
Type
LM1 CutCurve
(16#0000)
L329
LM2 CutCurve
(16#0000)
L330
Masks for linear section

definition
Cut Polygon Outp
c491
S.CutPolygon
KR3491
L497 (3413)
KR (120,7)
Output cut polygon
S.NY_CutPolygon
S.NX_CutPolygon
L325 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L326 (3001)
KR (70,2)
dY
dX
S.V_CutPolygon
n_cut_Y20
(1.0)
L429
S.NV_CutPolygon
1
2
Polygons
KP_Adaption and cut polygon
YV cut polygon
L189 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3497
L190 (3001)
KR (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 450 -
Friction polygon
20 points
even:
X-values
odd:
Y-values
Friction_X1
(0.0)
L350
SetFriction
(0)
L507
Friction_X20
(1.0)
L388
Type Friction
(1)
L508
Validate changes
Type
Friction_Y1
(0.0)
L351
OutpFrictionDiag
c492
LM2 Friction
(16#0000)
L510

definition
output
friction diagram
Friction
d029
S.Friction
L555 (3492)
KR (460,5)
KR3492
S.FrictionPolyg.
LM1 Friction
(16#0000)
L509
KR3029
Friction
S.NY_Friction
L498 (3023)
KR (260,8)
X
S.NX_Friction
S.Offset Friction
L506 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L502 (3000)
KR (70,2)
dY
dX
L505 (3001)
KR (70,2)
S.Factor2Friction
S.V_Friction
Friction_Y20
(0.0)
L389
L501 (3001)
KR (70,2)
YV Friction
L191 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3494
S.Factor1Friction
S.NV_Friction
L192 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L500 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Inertia = f(shear position)

20 points
even:
X-values
odd:
Y-values
Inertia_X1
(0.0)
L430
Inertia_X20
(360.0)
L468
Type Inertia
(1)
L514
Validate changes
Inertia_Y1
(1.0)
L431
SetInertia
(0)
L513
Type
LM1 Inertia
(16#0000)
L515
LM2 Inertia
(16#0000)
L516

definition
InertiaPolyOut
c493
Y inertia polygon
S. InertiaPolygon
KR3493
Y
S.NY_Inertia
L499 (3413)
KR (120,7)
Inertia
c495
S.Inertia
L554 (3493)
KR (460,5)
L512 (3001)
KR (70,2)
S.NX_Inertia
KR3495
Inertia
S.Factor Inertia
dY
dX
L511 (3001)
KR (70,2)
Inertia_Y20
(1.0)
L469
1
Polygons
Friction and inertia
S.V_Inertia
S.NV_Inertia
L193 (3000)
KR (70,2)
YV Inertia
L503 (3000)
KR (70,2)
KR3496
S.Offset Inertia
L194 (3001)
KR (70,2)
L504(3000)
KR (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 460 -
User fault 1
Comboard Faults
CB FaultDelay
(1000 ms)
H693
S.CB Fault 1
H690 (0920)
B (660,4)
S.User Fault 1
CB Fault
d694
S. CB Fault 2
H691 (0919)
B (660,4)
UserFault1Delay
(1000 ms)
H703
H700 (0000)
B (70,2)
S.User Fault 2
B0694
H701 (0000)
B (70,2)
CB Fault
S. CB Fault 3
User Fault1
d704
&
B0704
User Fault 1
S. User Fault 3
H692 (0924)
B (660,7)
H702 (0000)
B (70,2)
Inverter faults
H695 (0984)
B (600,5)
CU Fault
d699
S. CU Fault 2
H696 (0973)
B (600,5)
H710 (0342)
B (620,4)
CU FaultDelay
(200 ms)
H698
S.CU Fault 1
Enable user fault

monitoring
S.UserFaultEnabl
User fault 2
B0699
S.User Fault 4
CU Fault
H707 (0000)
B (70,2)
S. CU Fault 3
S.User Fault 5
H697 (0982)
B (600,5)
H708 (0000)
B (70,2)
&
UserFault2Delay
(1000 ms)
H706
User Fault2
d705
T 0
B0705
User Fault 2
S.User Fault 6
H709 (0000)
B (70,2)
1
Diagnostics
CU-, CB- and user fault
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 470 -
Fault monitoring shear position
KR3708
Position error lower limit

Comparator
Position shear [120,8]
KR3715
X>Y
X=Y
Shear Pos.Min
(-20.0)
H715
X<Y
B0681
Shear pos. underflow
&
B0682
Shear pos. underflow pulse
&
B0684
Shear pos. overflow pulse
B0683
Shear pos. overflow
min. shear pos. norm.

KR3705
S.EnShearPosErr
Shear Pos.Toler.
(10.0)
H718
H719 (0600)
B (290,8)
Comparator
Position shear [120,8]
KR3717
X>Y
X=Y
Shear Pos.Max
(390.0)
H717
Y
KR3707
max. shear pos norm.
KR3709
X<Y
Position error upper limit
Fault monitoring
shear speed
n_Shear Max
(1.2)
L101
n_Shear Hyst
(0.05)
L102
Comparison of line speed

and shear speed
SynchronToleranc
(1%)
L094
0.001
Overspeed pos
c103
X>Y
S.Diagn n_shear
L100 (3411)
KR (120,7)
X=Y
X<Y
B0103
Overspeed positive
n_shear smoothed
(3411) [120,8]
Overspeed neg
c104
B0104
Overspeed negative
B0094
n_shear > n_Ref
X=Y
B0095
n_shear = n_Ref
X<Y
B0096
n_shear < n_Ref
Speed2 smoothed
(3435) [130,6]
0.0
1
2
Diagnostics
Shear position and speed
X>Y
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 480 -
speed BlockLim
(0.005)
L106
0.001
BlockingDelay
(1000 ms)
L115
L105 (3411)
KR (120,7)
Shear Blocking
c116
X>Y
S.Blocking speed
X
X=Y
B0107
&
speed < n_Blocking
B0116
Shear blocking
X<Y
0.0
0.001
0.0
X>Y
Blocking nsetp
c241
S.Blocking nsetp
L108 (3023)
KR (260,8)
KR3241
B0111
n_setp > n_Blocking
X<Y
B0110
n_setp < n_Blocking
X>Y
B0112
Torque > BlockLim
B0109
Torque < BlockLim
X=Y
Abs_nsetp
Y
L110
(0.01)
n_setp BlockLim
0.0
0.05
Blocking act Torque

c242
S.Blocking act Torque

L112 (3325)
KR (610,7)
KR3242
X=Y
X<Y
Abs_actTorque
Y
L113
(0.8)
actTorq.BlockLim
1
Diagnostics
Blocking protection
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 490 -
EncoderFaultUser
c117
User fault: incorrect parameter set
Encoder error1 [120,8]
Encoder error2 [130,8]
B0117
Encoder fault user
Comparison of measured speed on

T400 with speed from CU
Delta_n Delay
(10.0 s)
L124
In case of differences:
S.Enable Delta_n
- check pulse encoder parameters

- check pulse encoder simulation board (CU)
Delta_n Fault
c125
L123 (0150)
B (165,8)
&
B0125
Delta_n fault
S.actSpeed_CU
Speed error
c120
L118 (3319)
KR (610,7)
Comparator
S.actSpeed_T400
Delta_n > Limit

c122
X>Y
B0122
Delta_n > Limit
B0121
Delta_n < Limit
X=Y
L119 (3411)
KR (120,7)
X<Y
L121
(0.1)
Limit Delta_n
1
2
Diagnostics
Pulse encoder fault detection
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 500 -
SystemErrorMask
(16#FFFF)
H970
&
B0010
StatusContrlLogic
d016
System error
Status Control logic

TR-load input [165,8] ]
Bit 0
Bit 1
Enable position controller [370,5]
Bit 2
Enable pos. controller
Bit 3
In starting position
CU Status1.5 (No quick stop) [620,4]
Bit 4
Quick stop from CU
n_shear = 0 [330,3]
Bit 5
n_shear = 0
Inverter ready [360,6]
Bit 6
Inverter ready
TR start error [165,6]
Bit 7
TR start error
TR frequency zero [165,6]
Bit 8
TR frequency zero
TR Timeout [165,6]
Bit 9
TR Timeout
Enable setpoints [360,6]
Bit 10
Enable setpoints
Bit 11
Shear calibrated
Fault [530,8]
Bit 12
Fault
Release brake [370,4]
Bit 13
Release brake
n_shear > 0 [330,3]
Bit 14
n_shear > 0
Bit 15
Inverter operation
System Status
d010
System error
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
TR encoder load
K2016
Status control logic
System Status
Bit 3
Task manager
K2010
Bit 4
Bit 5
Hardware
Bit 6
Communication
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
User error
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Fan_off_Delay
(30 s)
H978
CU Status 1.2 (operation) [620,4]
Status
System status and status control logic
B0978
fan
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 510 -
StatisticNumber
(100)
L849
Status shear
d017
Statistic Absolut
(1)
L850)
Status shear
Status shear
Bit 0
in synchronous range [330,5]
Bit 1
Shear calibrated
Bit 2
in format range
Bit 3
Knife in changepos [330,8]
Bit 4
In knife change position
End cut program 1 [300,6]
Bit 5
Pos.Sync 100ms [120,8]
Bit 6
Zero pulse shear
Bit 7
Mode positioning
H548 (1259)
B (415,4)
H550 (0244)
B (110,4)
H552 (0420)
B (130,8)
H554 (0000)
B (70,2)
H547 (1347)
B (410,5)
H549 (1279)
B (415,8)
H551 (0245)
B (110,4)
H553 (0250)
B (110,8)
L840 (3196)
KR (220,3)
End cut program
Bit 8
Raise shear
Bit 9
Lower shear
Bit 10
Shear top position
Bit 11
Shear bottom position
Bit 12
Synchr. pulse reference
Bit 13
Light barrier
Normalized results
e.g.: (0.23 = 23 %)
Actual value cutting error

Portion < Limit1
c851
StatisticLimit1
(0.1)
L841
LV1
StatisticLimit2
(0.25)
L842
LV2
StatisticLimit3
(0.5)
L843
LV3
StatisticLimit4
(0.75)
L844
LV4
StatisticLimit5
(1.0)
L845
LV5
StatisticLimit6
(1.5)
L846
LV6
StatisticLimit7
(2.0)
L847
LV7
StatisticLimit8
(5.0)
L848
LV8
Portion LV1 < LV2

c852
Cutting error
statistic
Portion LV2 < LV3

c853
Portion LV3 < LV4
c854
Portion LV4 < LV5
c855
8 limits
LV1 .. LV8
Portion LV5 < LV6

c856
Portion LV6 < LV7
c857
Portion LV7 < LV8
c858
Portion > Limit8
c859
Sample new data
Bit 14
H555 (0000)
B (70,2)
Use absolute values
in synchronous range
in format range [330,5]
S.ShearStatusB7 ... 15
S.Cut Error
K2017
Counter Reset
(0)
H577
Bit 15
Count pulses
B0579
Sheet counter
d022
S.CutPulses
32 ms
H579 (0554)
B (520,3)
Clear 2
&
Count pulses

S.CutPulsDelay
H574 (0168)
B (200,8)
B0554
Cut Pulse
S.Counter Set
K2022
Sheet counter
Sheet counter
H578 (0000)
B (70,2)
Clear 1
Extending the pulse which is used as

cut pulse
1
Status
Status shear
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 520 -
Delay_EndOfError
(10 s)
H583
Fault acknowledge
S.AcknEndofFault
S.Acknowledge_1
H580 (0343)
B (620,4)
Acknowledge
d584
H581 (0000)
B (110,4)
Fault status
S. Fault Bit 0 ..15
S.Acknowledge_2 H582 (0847)

B (680,4)
(factory setting)
H950 (0694)
B (470,3)
H951 (0699)
B (470,3)
H952 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 0
F116 , A097
CB-fault
Bit 1
F117, A098
CU-fault
Bit 2
H953 (0704)
B(470,8)
H954 (0705)
B (470,8)
H955 (0682)
B (480,4)
H956 (0103)
B (480,4)
H957 (0104)
B (480,4)
H958 (0116)
B (490,7)
H959 (0125)
B (500,7)
H960 (0521)
B (280,8)
H961 (0522)
B (280,8)
H962 (0684)
B (480,4)
H963 (0443)
B (135,7)
H964 (0157)
B (165,7)
H965 (0000)
B (70,2)
1
Status
Faults and alarms
F119, A100
User fault 1
Bit 4
F120, A101
User fault 2
Bit 5
F121, A102
Shear pos. < Minimum
Bit 6
F122, A103
Overspeed
Bit 7
F123, A104
Overspeed negative
Bit 8
F124, A105
Shear blocked
Bit 9
F125, A106
Fault speed sensing
Bit 10
F126, A107
External fault 1
Bit 11
F127, A108
External fault 2
Bit 12
F128, A109
Shear pos. > Maximum
Bit 13
F129, A110
Reference pos. < Min
Bit 14
F130, A111
Fault TR encoder
Acknowledge
Fault word X is
stored with rizing
edge
Fault Mask
(16#33E2)
H966
at least 1 bit
set
store X
bitwise ANDed
F118, A099
Bit 3
Bit 15
B0584
&
Actual Faults
d014
store X
K2014
Fault status word
(Send to the inverter)
Fault Bits
d968
K2968
FaultStartDelay
(10 s)
H969
at least 1 bit
set
1
0
1
Alarm Mask
(16#FFFF)
H967
bitwise ANDed
Fault
B0013
No fault
Actual Alarm
d015
&
B0014
CU Status 1.3 [620,4]
K2015
Alarm status word

(Send to the inverter)
B0015
Alarm
Set if at least one bit of the

alarm status word is set
F131, A112
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 530 -
Type floating-point
KR (80,6)
KR (80,4)
CPU load
CPU load T1
d986

KR (80,4)
CPU load T2
d987

KR (130,6)
CPU load T3
d988

KR (230,7)
CPU load T4
d989

KR (265,6)
CPU load T5
d990

KR (60,7)
KR (180,7)
Type 16bit Integer

K (610,3)
Display R1
d040

K (670,3)
Display R2
d041

K (670,3)
Display R3
d042

K (670,3)
Display R4
d043
Display R5
d044

K (440,8)
K (70,6)
Note:

K (70,6)
The display parameters on this chart will be

updated about each 200 ms.
1
Diagnostics
Display parameters
Display I2
d057
Display I3
d058
Display I4
d059
Type BOOL
S.Display B1
L964 (0317)
B (170,7)
S.Display B2
L965 (0172)
B (200,4)
S.Display B3
L966 (0567)
B (300,6)
S.Display B4
L967 (0412)
B (120,7)
Display R6
d045
Display R7
d046
Display R8
d047
Type Word
K (480,8)
Display I1
d056
Display B1
d064
Display B2
d065
Display B3
d066
Display B4
d067
Type 32bit Integer

S.Display DI1 L968 (5402)
KK (80,8)
Display W1
d048

KK (80,4)
Display W2
d049

KK (790,3)
Display W3
d050

KK (790,3)
Display W4
d051
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
Display DI1
d068
Display DI2
d069
Display DI3
d070
Display DI4
d071
7
Function diagram
8
- 540 -

the inverter interface
CU Receive init
d971
100 ms
maximum
time interval
between 2
telegrams
Receiver initialized
CU Transmit init
d972
Transmitter initialized
CU Timeout
d973
Timeout
CU in operation
d974
Inverter in operation
T Resynchr T400
(10.0 s)
H977
ResynchrDelay
(1000 ms)
H976
S.DisableResynch
H975 (0666)
B (360,7)
Disable
B0976
B0971
CU receive init.
B0981
B0972
CU transmit init.
B0982
CU transmit not init.
B0973
CU timeout
B0983
CU no timeout
B0974
CU in operation
B0984
CU not in operation
CU operation delayed
Synchronization the T400 by

the inverter clock after a
positive edge here.
&
CU clock has to be 1.6 ms!
B0977
1
Inverter interface
General settings
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 600 -

from inverter
Four 16bit process data are converted to floating-point
PZD1 .. PZD16 from CU

d301
d316
CU actValue1 Norm
(1.0)
H318
CU ActValue1
d319
...
PZD1 (Status word1)
K2301
PZD1 from CU
PZD2 (speed act. value)
K2302
PZD2 from CU
S.ActValue1 CU
100 %
H317 (2302)
K (610,3)
KR3319
ActValue1 CU
1.0
PZD 3
K2303
PZD3 from CU
PZD4 (Status word2)
K2304
PZD4 from CU
PZD5 (Torque act. value)
K2305
PZD5 from CU
PZD 6
K2306
PZD6 from CU
PZD7 (Current act. value)
K2307
PZD7 from CU
PZD 8
K2308
PZD8 from CU
PZD 9
K2309
PZD9 from CU
PZD 10
K2310
PZD10 from CU
CU actValue2 Norm
(1.0)
H321
CU ActValue2
d322
S.ActValue2 CU
100 %
H320 (2303)
K (610,3)
KR3322
ActValue2 CU
1.0
CU actValue3 Norm
(1.0)
H324
CU ActValue3
d325
S.ActValue3 CU
100 %
H323 (2305)
K (610,3)
KR3325
ActValue3 CU
1.0
PZD 11
K2311
PZD11 from CU
PZD 12
K2312
PZD12 from CU
PZD 13
K2313
PZD13 from CU
PZD 14
K2314
PZD14 from CU
CU actValue4 Norm
(1.0)
H327
CU ActValue4
d328
S.ActValue4 CU
100 %
H326 (2306)
K (610,3)
KR3328
ActValue4 CU
1.0
PZD 15
K2315
PZD15 from CU
PZD 16
K2316
PZD16 from CU

CU DW1 Norm
(1.0)
H333
CU ActValue DW1
d334
S.DW1 high CU
H330 (2316)
K (610,3)
DW
high
100 %
S.DW1 low CU
H329 (2315)
K (610,3)
1
Inverter interface
KR3334
low
ActValue DW1 CU
1.0
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 610 -
Status word2 CU
d359
Status word1 CU
d357
K2359
K2357
CU Status word 1
S.StatusWord1 CU
B0340
CU status1.0
B0341
CU status1.1
Bit 2 Run
B0342
Bit 3 Fault active
H358 (2304)
K (610,3)
B0360
CU status2.0
Bit 1
B0361
CU status2.1
CU status1.2
Bit 2 Overspeed
B0362
CU status2.2
B0343
CU status1.3
Bit 3 External fault 1 active
B0363
CU status2.3
Bit 4 OFF2 active
B0344
CU status1.4
Bit 4 External fault 2 active
B0364
CU status2.4
Bit 5 OFF3 active
B0345
CU status1.5
B0365
CU status2.5
B0346
CU status1.6
B0366
CU status2.6
Bit 7 Alarm active
B0347
CU status1.7
B0367
CU status2.7
Bit 8 No setp./act.value deviation
B0348
CU status1.8
B0368
CU status2 .8
B0349
CU status1.9
B0369
CU status2 .9
B0350
CU status1.10
Bit 10
B0370
CU status2.10
B0351
CU status1.11
B0371
CU status2.11
Bit 12 requ. enger. main contactor
B0352
CU status1.12
Bit 12 Bypass contactor ener.
B0372
CU status2.12
Bit 13 Ramp function gener. active
B0353
CU status1.13
Bit 13
B0373
CU status2.13
Bit 14 positive speed setpoint
B0354
CU status1.14
Bit 14
B0374
CU status2.14
Bit 15
B0355
CU status1.15
Bit 15 Pre-charging acktive
B0375
CU status2.15
inverted status bits
B0315
1
Inverter interface
Inverter status words
inverted status bits

B0320
...
.....
CU status1.0 inv
...
...
B0300
CU status1.15 inv
B0335
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
CU status2.0 inv
.....
CU Status word 2
...
H356 (2301)
K (610,3)
S.StatusWord2 CU
CU status2.15 inv
8
- 620 -
Control Word1 CU
d012
Control word 1
for inverter
S.ControlW1 Bit0 ... Bit15

H740 (0840)
B (680,4)
H742 (0527)
B (280,8)
H744 (0664)
B (360,7)
H746 (0664)
B (360,7)
H748 (0848)
B (680,4)
H750 (0001)
B(70,2)
H752 (0852)
B (680,4)
H754 (0854)
B (680,4)
H760 (0000)
B (70,2)
H741 (0841)
B (680,4)
1
2
H743 (0662)
B (360,5)
3
4
H745 (0664)
B (360,7)
H747 (0584)
B (530,6)
0=>1 Fault acknowledge
9
10
H751 (0851)
B (680,4)
11
12
H753 (0853)
B (680,4)
13
14
15
Bit 2
H764 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 4
H766 (0000)
B (70,2)
H767 (0001)
B (70,2)
Bit 8
H770 (0001)
B (70,2)
Bit 10
H772 (0001)
B (70,2)
Bit 12
H774 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 13
Bit 14
H775 (0000)
B (70,2)
0 = External fault
Bit 11
H773 (0001)
B (70,2)
Raise motor potentiom.

Lower motor potentiom.
H771 (0000)
B (70,2)
Clockwise seq. enable

Counter clockw. enable
Bit 7
H769 (0666)
B (360,7)
Jogging 2
1 = Control requested
Bit 5
Bit 6
H768 (0001)
B (70,2)
Jogging 1
Bit 3
H765 (0000)
B (70,2)
Start ramp funct. gen.

Setpoint enable
Bit 1
H763 (0000)
B (70,2)
1 = Inverter enable
8
H749 (0849)
B (680,4)
H762 (0000)
B (70,2)
Ramp funct. gen. enable
Control word2 CU
K2013
H761 (0000)
B (70,2)
0 = OFF2 (pulse disable)

0 = OFF3 (quick stop)
Control Word2 CU
d013
Bit 0
K2012
H755 (0001)
B (70,4)
1
Inverter interface
Control words
Control word1 CU
0 = OFF1
Control word 2
for inverter
S.ControlW2 Bit0 ... Bit15
Bit 15
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 630 -
S.Setpoint1A CU
H776 (3023)
KR (260,8)
S.Setpoint1B CU
H777 (3474)
KR (230,8)
S.Setp1_CU_sel
H778 (1347)
B (410,5)
S.Setpoint2A CU
H782 (3025)
KR (240,7)
H783 (3498)
KR (230,7)
Setpoint1 CU
d779
1.0
Setpoint1 CU N2
d781
K2781
S.Setpoint2B CU
S.Setp2_CU_sel
Setpoint1 CU N2
100 %
KR3779
H780
(1.0)
Setpoint1CU Norm
Setpoint2 CU
d785
Setpoint2 CU N2
d787
1.0
K2787
H786
(1.0)
Setpoint2CU Norm
H784 (1347)
B (410,5)
S.Setpoint3 CU
1.0
H788 (3490)
KR (450,5)
PZD1 to CU
d731
S. PZD1 CU H721 (2012)
K (630,4)
Setpoint3 CU
d789
K2789
S. PZD2 CU H722 (2781)

K (640,6)
Setpoint3 CU
100 %
S.Setpoint4 CU
1.0
PZD8 to CU
d738
......
Process data
transmission to the
inverter
PZD 1
Control word 1
PZD 2
Speed setpoint
S. PZD3 CU H723 (2000)

K (70,2)
H790
(1.0)
Setpoint3CU Norm
H791 (3000)
KR (70,2)
Setpoint2 CU N2
100 %
KR3785
Setpoint4 CU
d792
K2792
Setpoint4 CU
100 %
H793
(1.0)
Setpoint4CU Norm
conversion to double word
Setpoint5 high CU
d795
PZD 3
S. PZD4 CU H724 (2013)

K (630,8)
PZD 4
Control word 2
S. PZD5 CU H725 (2787)

K (640,6)
PZD 5
Torque setpoint
S. PZD6 CU H726 (2789)

K (640,4)
PZD 6
KP_Adaption
S. PZD7 CU H727 (2792)

K (640,4)
PZD 7
S. PZD8 CU H728 (2795)

K (640,4)
PZD 8
S.Setpoint5_CU
1.0
H794 (3000)
KR (70,2)
DW
100 %
K2795
Setpoint5 high CU
low
K2796
Setpoint5 low CU
d796
Setpoint5 low CU
H797
(1.0)
Setpoint5CU Norm
1
2
Inverter interface
high
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 640 -
Mask CB Status
(16#FFFF
H928
Control and monitoring faults for the

COMBOARD interface
CB Enable
(1)
H925
16 bit
CB Receive Status
d927
Enable
tmax CB PowerON
(20s)
H929
bitwise ANDed;
at least one bit = 1
T
&
Receive status
Timeout CB
d924
1
1
Timeout
CB tmax Run
(100ms)
H926
maximum time
interval between 2
telegrams
CB Transmit init
d922
Timeout CB
B0918
No timeout CB
CB Receive init
d921
1
COMBOARD
General settings
B0924
B0921
CB receive init.
B0920
B0922
CB transmit init.
B0919
CB transmit not init.
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 660 -
Convert 16-bit integers to floating-point
PZD1 .. PZD10 CB inp
Process data word

received via COMBOARD
d801
S.Setpoint1 CB
100 %
H816 (2802)
K (670,3)
d810
KR3818
Setpoint1 CB
1.0
....
PZD 1
Control word 1
CB Setpoint1 Norm
(1.0)
H817
CB Setpoint1
d818
K2801
PZD1 from CB
PZD 2
Master velocity
K2802
PZD2 from CB
PZD 3
Factor overspeed
K2803
PZD3 from CB
PZD 4
Control word 2
K2804
PZD4 from CB
PZD 5
Acceleration
K2805
PZD5 from CB
PZD 6
Sheet size
K2806
PZD6 from CB
PZD 7
Cutting force
K2807
PZD7 from CB
PZD 8
Distance to cut
K2808
PZD8 from CB
PZD 9
Number of cuts
K2809
PZD9 from CB
PZD 10
Shear control word
K2810
CB Setpoint2 Norm
(1.0)
H820
CB Setpoint2
d821
S.Setpoint2 CB
100 %
H819 (2803)
K (670,3)
KR3821
Setpoint2 CB
1.0
CB Setpoint3 Norm
(1.0)
H823
CB Setpoint3
d824
S.Setpoint3 CB
100 %
H822 (2807)
K (670,3)
KR3824
Setpoint3 CB
1.0
CB Setpoint4 Norm
(1.0)
H931
CB Setpoint4
d932
S.Setpoint4 CB
100 %
H930 (2805)
K (670,3)
KR3932
Setpoint4 CB
1.0
PZD10 from CB
Convert double word to floating point

CB DW1 Norm
(1.0)
H813
CB Setpoint DW1
d814
S.DW1 high CB
H812 (2808)
K (670,3)
DW
high
100 %
S.DW1 low CB
H811 (2807)
K (670,3)
1
COMBOARD
KR3814
low
Setpoint DW1 CB
1.0
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 670 -
Simulation mode [270,6]

S.CB_Control W1
H841 (2801)
K (670,3)
CB Shear CTW
d845
K2843
S.CB ShearCTW
H844 (2810)
K (670,3)
K2845
CB control word 1 (for CU)
CB Shear control word
Bit 0 (0 = OFF1)
B0840
CB Control W1.0
Bit 0
B0860
CB SCTW.0
Bit 1 (0 = OFF2 )
B0841
CB Control W1.1
B0861
CB SCTW.1
Bit 2 (0 = OFF 3 (quick stop) )
B0842
CB Control W1.2
Bit 2 Test cut
B0862
CB SCTW.2
Bit 3 (Inverter enable)
B0843
CB Control W1.3
Bit 3 Single cut
B0863
CB SCTW.3
Bit 4 (Ramp funct. gen. enable)
B0844
CB Control W1.4
B0864
CB SCTW.4
Bit 5 (Start ramp funct. gener.)
B0845
CB Control W1.5
B0865
CB SCTW.5
Bit 6 (Setpoint enable)
B0846
CB Control W1.6
Bit 6 Referencing
B0866
CB SCTW.6
Bit 7 (Fault acknowledge)
B0847
CB Control W1.7
Bit 7
B0867
CB SCTW.7
Bit 8 (Jogging 1)
B0848
CB Control W1.8
B0868
CB SCTW .8
Bit 9 (Jogging 2)
B0849
CB Control W1.9
Bit 9
B0869
CB SCTW .9
Bit 10 (Control requested)
B0850
CB Control W1.10
B0870
CB SCTW.10
Bit 11 (Clockwise sequ. enable)
B0851
CB Control W1.11
Bit 11 Crop cutfreigabe
B0871
CB SCTW.11
Bit 12 (Counter-clockwise enable)
B0852
CB Control W1.12
Bit 12 End cut
B0872
CB SCTW.12
Bit 13 (Raise motor potentiom.)
B0853
CB Control W1.13
Bit 13
B0873
CB SCTW.13
Bit 14 (Lower motor potentiom.)
B0854
CB Control W1.14
B0874
CB SCTW.14
Bit 15 (1 = external fault)
B0855
CB Control W1.15
B0875
CB SCTW.15
B0815
1
COMBOARD
Control words
CB CTW1.0 inv
B0820
...
.....
...
...
B0800
CB CTW1.15 inv
B0835
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
CB SCTW.0 inv
.....
H842 (2621)
K (810,6)
CB CTW1
d843
...
S.CB CTW Simulation
CB SCTW.15 inv
8
- 680 -
Status word 1
for COMBOARD
S.Status1CB Bit0 ... Bit15

L000 (0340)
B (620,4)
StatusWord1 CB
d846
Bit 0
L001 (0341)
B (620,4)
K2846
Status word1 CB
Bit 1
L002 (0342)
B (620,4)
StatusWord2 CB
d847
Bit 2
L003 (0343)
B (620,4)
Bit 3
L004 (0344)
B (620,4)
L020 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 4
L005 (0345)
B (620,4)
L022 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 6
L007 (0347)
B (620,4)
L024 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 8
L009 (0001)
B
L010 (0459)
B (330,3)
L026 (0548)
B (240,8)
Bit 10
L011 (0000)
B (70,2)
L012 (0000)
B (70,2)
L028 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 12
L013 (0000)
B (70,2)
L014 (0000)
B (70,2)
L030 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 14
L015 (0000)
B (70,2)
L032 (0000)
B (70,2)
L034 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 11
Bit 13
Bit 14
L035 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 9
Bit 12
L033 (0000)
B (70,2)
1
COMBOARD
Status words
Bit 7
Bit 10
L031 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 15
Bit 5
Bit 8
L029 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 13
Bit 3
Bit 6
L027 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 11
Status word 2 CB
Bit 4
L025 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 9
K2847
Bit 1
Bit 2
L023 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 7
L008 (0308)
B (620,4)
Bit 0
L021 (0000)
B (70,2)
Bit 5
L006 (0346)
B (620,4)
Status word 2
for COMBOARD
S.Status2CB Bit0 ... Bit15
Bit 15
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 690 -
S.ActValue1 CB
1.0
H825 (3435)
KR (130,6)
ActValue1 CB
d826
K2826
ActValue1 CB
100 %
H827
(1.0)
ActValue1 CB Norm
PZD1 CB out
d911
S.ActValue2 CB
1.0
H828 (3411)
KR (120,7)
K2829
ActValue2 CB
100 %
S.ActValue3 CB
1.0
PZD 2
Material velocity
PZD 3
Speed act. value shear
ActValue3 CB
100 %
H833
(1.0)
ActValue3 CB Norm
S.ActValue4 CB
1.0
PZD 4
Status word 2
S. PZD5 CB H905 (2307)

K (610,3)
K2832
H834 (3000)
KR (70,2)
S. PZD2 CB H902 (2826)

K (700,3)
S. PZD4 CB H904 (2847)

K (690,8)
ActValue3 CB
d832
ActValue4 CB
d835
K2835
ActValue4 CB
100 %
PZD 5
Current act. value
S. PZD6 CB H906 (2305)

K (610,3)
PZD 6
Torque act. value
S. PZD7 CB H907 (2832)

K (700,3)
PZD 7
S. PZD8 CB H908 (2835)

K (700,3)
PZD 8
S. PZD9 CB H909 (2838)

K (700,4)
PZD 9
S. PZD10 CB H910 (2017)

K (520,5)
PZD 10
Shear status word
H836
(1.0)
ActValue4 CB Norm
Process data send via

COMBOARD
PZD 1
Status word 1
S. PZD3 CB H903 (2829)

K (700,3)
H830
(1.0)
ActValue2 CB Norm
H831 (3445)
KR (135,5)
......
S. PZD1 CB H901 (2846)

K (690,4)
ActValue2 CB
d829
PZD10 CB out
d920
ActValue5 high CB
d838
S.ActValue5 CB
1.0
H837 (3000)
KR (70,2)
DW
100 %
K2838
ActValue5 high CB
low
K2839
ActValue5 low CB
d839
ActValue5 low CB
H840
(1.0)
ActValue5 CB Norm
1
2
COMBOARD
high
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 700 -
CB Config set
(1)
L914
Configuration valid
CB Address
(3)
L900
Slave bus address
Status of the
configuration
CB Config State
c915
CB Param. 1
(0)
L901
CB Param. 8
(0)
L908
CB Param. 2
(2)
L902
CB Param. 9
(0)
L909
Configuration of COMBOARDs:
These parameters are reserved for using
COMBOARDs in SRT400 applications.
CB Param. 3
(0)
L903
Parameter setting for

the COMBOARD
CB Param. 10
(0)
L910
CB Param. 4
(0)
L904
(depending of the type of

COMBOARD)
CB Param. 11
(0)
L911
CB Param. 5
(0)
L905
CB Param. 12
(0)
L912
CB Param. 6
(0)
L906
CB Param. 13
(0)
L913
For the configuration of a COMBOARD placed in slot

G (lower position) of the electronic box of inverters use
parameters of the inverter (e.g. P918 for the bus
The modifications of any parameter L900 to L913
becomes valid after setting
L914= 0 and L914=1.
CB Param. 7
(0)
L907
1
2
COMBOARD configuration
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 750 -
USS slave operation

For enabling set T400 switch S1/8 = ON. The switching becomes
valid after the next power on. Online communications with other
service tools using the same interface (e.g. CFC) will be disabled!
parameter setting (e.g. wrong baud rate) set S1/8 = OFF and use
the Service-IBS program to correct the parameters.
PZD1 USS
c995
USS Status
c994
USS Enable
(1)
L990
USS Baud Rate

(9600)
L991
Enable
Receive status
PZD2 USS
c996
Receive
K2994
USS Status
PZD1
K2995
PZD1 USS
PZD2
K2996
PZD2 USS
Baud rate
(OP1S: 9600 bps or 19200 bps)
Transmit
S.PZD1 USS Slave
USS Address
(0)
L992
USS 4-Wire
(0)
L993
L997 (2000)
K (70,2)
PZD1
USS bus address

S.PZD2 USS Slave
PZD2
L998 (2000)
K (70,2)

0: RS485 (2 wires)
1: RS232 (4 wires)
1
USS slave
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 770 -
Peer Enable
(0)
L066
Peer Baud Rate
(19200)
L060
tmax Peer Run
(100ms)
L067
16 bit
PeerReceiveStat
c069
Enable
maximum time
interval between 2
telegrams
bitwise ANDed
at least one bit = 1
T
&
Receive status
Baud rate
tmax PeerPowerON
(20s)
L077
Mask Peer Status

(16#FFFF)
L076
Peer to Peer
Peer Timeout
c078
B0078
Peer timeout
B0079
Peer no timeout
Timeout
Peer Receive init

c068
B0068
B0069
Peer receive not initialized
B0070
Peer transmit initialized
B0071
Peer transmit not initialized
Peer Transmit init

c070
NOTE:
After enable the Peer to Peer
interface the T400 board has to been
restarted (power off - power on).
1
2
General settings peer to peer
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 780 -
Process data words PZD2, PZD3 und PZD4, PZD5 may be

transmitted either as word, double word or floating-point values.
Note:
Before connecting Floating-point receiver channels (e.g.
KR3061) to other function blocks make sure that you receive
floating-point data from this channel! This avoids additional
computation time for the error handling of "not-a-number" values.
S. Peer PZD1 L071 (2000)

K (70,2)
Peer Sendtype1
(0)
L085
S. Peer PZD2 L072 (2000)

K (70,2)
Process data
reception
PZD1 Peer ... PZD5

c061 ... c065
S. Peer PZD3 L073 (2000)

K (70,2)
Process data
transmission
PZD 1
DW
0
PZD 1
DW
PZD 2 + PZD 3
PZD 4 + PZD 5
DW
W
1
2
Peer to peer process data
K2061
PZD1 from Peer
S.Peer DW1 L080 (5000)

K (70,2)
K2062
PZD2 from Peer
S.Peer Float1 L083 (3000)

K (70,2)
K2063
PZD3 from Peer
KR3061
Peer Float1
KK5061
Peer DW1
K2064
PZD4 from Peer
K2065
PZD5 from Peer
KR3063
Peer Float2
KK5063
Peer DW2
1
2
Peer Sendtype2
(0)
L086
S. Peer PZD4 L074 (2000)

K (70,2)
S. Peer PZD5 L075 (2000)
K (70,2)
PZD 2 + PZD 3
PZD 4 + PZD 5
DW
0
S.Peer DW2 L081 (5000)

K (70,2)
S.Peer Float2 L084 (3000)

K (70,2)
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 790 -
Factory setting:
Test data for control word 1 (CTW1)
Testdata1_1
(16#847E)
L768
Testdata1_3
(16#057F)
L770
Testdata1_5
(16#84FE)
L772
Testdata1_7
(0)
L774
S.Testdata1_Sel
L776 (2000)
K (70,2)
Testdata1_2
(16#9C7F)
L769
1
Testdata1_4
(16#067F)
L771
Continous cut
Test cut
Single cut
Testdata2_3
(16#0038)
L779
Referencing
Approach start pos.
Testdata2_5
(16#0130)
L781
Crop cut
End cut
Cut program
Testdata2_7
(16#1010)
L783
2
3
Testdata1
K2776
Testdata1_6
(0)
L773
6
7
8
Testdata1_8
(0)
L775
Factory setting:
Test data for shear control word1 (SCTW1)
Testdata2_1
(16#0032)
L777
S.Testdata2_Sel
L785 (2000)
K (70,2)
Testdata2_2
(16#0034)
L778
0
1
Testdata2_4
(16#0050)
L780
2
3
Testdata2
K2785
Testdata2_6
(16#0810)
L782
6
7
8
Testdata2_8
(16#0430)
L784
1
2
Test operation
Multiplexer selected fixed values
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 800 -
S.ON StateMach
B0609
L620 (0000)
B (70,2)
ON state machine
S.CTW1bits SM
B0627
MS1 SM on
(16#0017)
L636
B0626
L639 (2621)
K (810,6)
MR SM off
(16#1008)
L637
CTW1 CU=ON
(16#9C7F)
L625
S.CU ready SM
L621 (0340)
B (620,4)
MS1
I1
S.Web ready SM
CTW1 CU=OFF
(16#843E)
L624
MR
I2
L622 (0001)
B (70,2)
I3
CTW1 test operation

K2621
STATE
S.Fault SM
I4
L623 (0014)
B (530,8)
B0635
B0636
Q
I5
SCTW1 Refer. SM
(16#0050)
L631
SCTW1 OFF SM
(16#0000)
L630
SCTW1 Cut SM
(16#0032)
L633
SCTW1 Startp SM
(16#0110)
L632
SCTW1 test operation
1
1
K2622
L638 (2622)
K (810,5)
0
0
S.CU run SM
SCTW2 test operation

16#1080
&
B0632
S.Web runSM
&
StateCut MS1
(16#0007)
L634
S.Calibrated SM
L628 (1310)
B (170,5)
StateCut MR
(16#0500)
L635
MS1
S.in Startpos SM
1
Test operation
Startup state machine
MR
StateCut MR1
(16#0A00)
L644
MR1
I1
L629 (0647)
B (340,4)
L643 (0576)
B (320,5)
K2623
B0628
L627 (0001)
B (70,2)
S.CutMode SM
B0610
CTW1_SM_0
Bit 1
B0611
CTW1_SM_1
Bit 2
B0612
CTW1_SM_2
Bit 3
B0613
CTW1_SM_3
Bit 4
B0614
CTW1_SM_4
Bit 5
B0615
CTW1_SM_5
Bit 6
B0616
CTW1_SM_6
Bit 7
B0617
CTW1_SM_7
Bit 8
B0618
CTW1_SM_8
Bit 9
B0619
CTW1_SM_9
Bit 10
B0620
CTW1_SM_10
Bit 11
B0621
CTW1_SM_11
Bit 12
B0622
CTW1_SM_12
Bit 13
B0623
CTW1_SM_13
Bit 14
B0624
CTW1_SM_14
Bit 15
B0625
CTW1_SM_15
Bit 0
B0780
SCTW1_SM_0
Bit 1
B0781
SCTW1_SM_1
Bit 2
B0782
SCTW1_SM_2
Bit 3
B0783
SCTW1_SM_3
Bit 4
B0784
SCTW1_SM_4
Bit 5
B0785
SCTW1_SM_5
Bit 6
B0786
SCTW1_SM_6
Bit 7
B0787
SCTW1_SM_7
Bit 8
B0788
SCTW1_SM_8
Bit 9
B0789
SCTW1_SM_9
Bit 10
B0790
SCTW1_SM_10
Bit 11
B0791
SCTW1_SM_11
Bit 12
B0792
SCTW1_SM_12
Bit 13
B0793
SCTW1_SM_13
Bit 14
B0794
SCTW1_SM_14
Bit 15
B0795
SCTW1_SM_15
S.SCTW1bits SM
L626 (0342)
B (620,4)
Bit 0
I2
ON state machine (810,2)
STATE
I3
B0629
Q
Q
B0630
I4
V1.02
FPlan_SPS450e.vsd
10.01.01
7
Function diagram
8
- 810 -

T400

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

T400

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Standard Software Package

SPA440 Angular Synchronous Control

T400 Technology Module

Order No.: 6DD1903-0BB0

Warning information.............................. ................................................................................ 3

T400 technology module ..................................................................................................... 17

Function description................................. ........................................................................... 28

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

Parameters and connectors ................................................................................................ 60

3.5.5 Jogging.................................. .................................................................................. 54

Parameter handling.................................... ....................................................................... 60

Start-up....................................... ......................................................................................... 115

Commissioning, general............. ..................................................................................... 115

Literature................................... .......................................................................................... 130

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

This documentation is not compatible with the previous MS340

The documentation refers to operational standard software package,

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

MLFB / Order No.

SPA440 angular synchronous control on CD-ROM and the

SIMADYN D configuring software D7-ES. Package comprising 6DD1801-4DA2

Components for adapting the software package using CFC

The angular synchronous control with synchronization is an application

Angular synchronous operation is implemented using the SPA440

The angular synchronous application comprises a master drive and one

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

Rotation of the rotor of a drive with reference to a defined zero position in

The summed pulses of the incremental encoder represent the actual

The angular synchronous control has a closed-loop speed synchronizing

In addition to speed- and angular synchronism, the drives can also be

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

Functions and features

IF_CU (interface to CU)

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

IF_Peer (interface to peer.)

Functions and structure at a glance

A comparison between speed- and angular synchronism

Disk, slave drive

Model to illustrate angular synchronism

S_M and S_S

The slave drive is operated from a closed-loop synchronous speed- or

The situation assumes a master/slave speed ratio of 1:1 (this is easier

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

Differences between speed- and angular synchronism

Difference between speed- and angular synchronism

Operation without any disturbance quantity. In this operating status, there

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

In steady-state operation, for closed-loop angular synchronous control,

Displacement and synchronization

When synchronizing, the displacementat the synchronizing instant is

When a synchronizing mark is passed it is detected per hardware using a

The number of synchronizing pulses between the master- and slave

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

Disk, master drive

Disk, slave drive

Position displacement between the master- and slave drives

Fig. 1-4 Synchronizing to an displacement setpoint

The slave drive is operated from the closed-loop angular synchronous

SPA440 angular synchronous control - SIMADYN D - Manual

Synchronizing takes place after the synchronizing marks have been

A new displacement setpoint V2* is entered and corrected. The setpoint

Synchronization is sub-divided into: